Nanodac User Manual

nanodac
User Guide
nanodac recorder/controller
Versions 3 and later
HA030554/4
Dec 2011
2011 Eurotherm Limited

All rights are strictly reserved. No part of this document may be reproduced, modified, or transmitted in any form by any means, nor may it be stored in a retrieval system other than for the purpose
to act as an aid in operating the equipment to which the document relates, without the prior, written
permission of Eurotherm Limited.
Eurotherm Limited pursues a policy of continuous development and product improvement. The
specification in this document may therefore be changed without notice. The information in this
document is given in good faith, but is intended for guidance only. Eurotherm Limited will accept
no responsibility for any losses arising from errors in this document.
Declaration of Conformity
Manufacturer's name:
Eurotherm Limited
Manufacturer's address:
Faraday Close, Worthing, West Sussex,

BN13 3PL, United Kingdom
Product type:
Recorder / controller
Models:
nanodac Status level A1 and above
Safety specication:
EN61010-1: 2001
EMC emissions specication: EN61326-1: 2006 Class B (100 to 230V ac supply)

EN61326-1: 2006 Class A (24V ac/dc supply)
EMC immunity specication:
EN61326-1: 2006 Industrial locations
Eurotherm Limited hereby declares that the above products conform to the safety and
EMC specications listed. Eurotherm Limited further declares that the above products
comply with the EMC Directive 2004/108/EC, and also with the Low Voltage Directive
2006/95/EC.
Signed:
Dated:
Signed for and on behalf of Eurotherm Limited.
Kevin Shaw
(R&D Director)
IA249986U790 Issue 2 Oct 10 (CN26774)
40
nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
nanodac Recorder/Controller
User Guide
List of sections
Section
1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2 Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5 Modbus TCP slave comms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6 iTools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7 User Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8 USB Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A Technical specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B Control Loops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D Configuration menu overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Index. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Page
3
3
8
54
161
245
272
277
279
285
311
319
i
Associated documents
HA028838 Printable version of iTools Help
HA025464 EMC installation guidelines
HA027962 Printable version of Review Help
Application notes
HA030817U001
HA030817U002
HA030817U003
HA030817U004
Archiving data from the nanodac recorder/controller

Heat/Cool with carbon potential or oxygen level monitoring
Heat only temperature control and carbon potential control
Virtual channels using the nanodac recorder/controller.
Software effectivity
This manual refers to instruments fitted with software version 3.0.
Software versions 2.20 onwards are backwards compatible so that it can be used on
all hardware versions of the unit.
Previous software versions are not compatible with instruments with hardware status
greater than 2.
The status level may be found on the instrument label and consists of a letter indicating software status followed by a numeral indicating the hardware status (e.g. B2)
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
Page i
nanodac Recorder/Controller
User Guide
Contents List
Section
Page
List of sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Associated documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Application notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Software effectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SAFETY NOTES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
USB DEVICE PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
32-BIT RESOLUTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SYMBOLS USED ON THE RECORDER LABELLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.1 UNPACKING THE INSTRUMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2 INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.1 MECHANICAL INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.1.1 Installation procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.1.2 Demounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2.1 Termination details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2.2 Low Voltage option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2.3 Dual input option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SAMPLE RATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SENSOR BREAK DETECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DUAL MILLIAMP INPUT OFFSET CORRECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INPUT RANGE LIMITATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2.4 Modbus Master communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2.5 EtherNet/IP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3 OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.1.1 Display screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.1.2 Navigation pushbuttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE BUTTON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SCROLL BUTTON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RAISE/LOWER BUTTONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.1.3 On screen help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2 PROCESS VARIABLE DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.1 Alarm icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.2 Status bar Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SYSTEM ALARMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CHANNEL ALARM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FTP ICON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RECORD ICON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MESSAGE ICON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AUTOTUNE ICON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.3 Breaks in recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3 TOP LEVEL MENU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3.1 Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3.2 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3.3 Go to View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ALARM SUMMARY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SYSTEM ALARMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MESSAGE SUMMARY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DISPLAY MODE SELECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3.4 History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3.5 Faceplate Cycling on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3.6 Operator Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CUSTOM NOTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Page ii
i
i
i
i
1
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
5
5
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
8
8
8
8
9
9
9
9
10
10
11
11
12
12
12
13
13
13
13
14
14
14
15
16
16
17
18
18
18
18
18
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
List of Contents (Cont.)

Section
3.3.7 Demand Archiving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ARCHIVE MENU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FTP SERVER ARCHIVING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
REVIEW SOFTWARE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3.8 Login . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LOGGED OUT ACCESS LEVEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OPERATOR ACCESS LEVEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SUPERVISOR ACCESS LEVEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ENGINEER ACCESS LEVEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LOGIN PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4 DISPLAY MODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4.1 Vertical trend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4.2 Horizontal Trend mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4.3 Vertical Bargraph mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4.4 Horizontal Bargraph mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4.5 Numeric mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4.6 Alarm panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4.7 Control Loop1/Loop2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EDITING TECHNIQUES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4.8 Cascade display mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4.9 Programmer display mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PROGRAM RUN/RESET/HOLD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PROGRAM EDITING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PROGRAM DETAILS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SEGMENT CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FUTURE TREND DISPLAY MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PROGRAM STORE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4.10 Steriliser display mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TERMINOLOGY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BEACONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
STERILISING CYCLE DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
APPLICATION DETAILS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TEST CYCLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4.11 Promote list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PARAMETER SELECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4.12 Modbus Master display mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PING DETAILS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4.13 EtherNet/IP display mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CONFIGURATION OF IMPLICIT INPUT/OUTPUT TABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CONNECTION STATUS INDICATOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EXAMPLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EXPLICIT DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
USING TAGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.5 TREND HISTORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.5.1 Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SEARCH FOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.5.2 History Options Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.6 TEXT ENTRY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.6.1 Numeric keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.6.2 USB keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4 CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.1 INSTRUMENT MENU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.1.1 Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.1.2 Locale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.1.3 Display configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.1.4 Info menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.1.5 Upgrade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CUSTOMISING THE SPLASH SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.1.6 Security menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OEM SECURITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
Page
18
19
20
20
20
20
20
21
21
21
22
22
23
23
24
24
25
26
26
27
28
30
31
32
33
36
37
38
38
38
38
39
40
40
41
42
42
43
44
45
46
46
47
48
50
51
51
51
52
52
53
53
53
54
55
56
57
58
60
61
61
62
63
Page iii

Section
Page
4.1.7 I/O fitted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

I/O types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
4.1.8 Save/Restore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
4.1.9 Input adjust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
REMOVAL PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
DUAL INPUT CHANNELS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
4.1.10 Output adjust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
ADJUST PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
ADJUST REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
4.2 NETWORK MENU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
4.2.1 Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
4.2.2 Archiving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
4.2.3 FTP Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
4.2.4 Modbus TCP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
4.3 GROUP CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
4.3.1 Group Trend configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
4.3.2 Group Recording configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
4.4 INPUT CHANNEL CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
4.4.1 Channel Main . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
4.4.2 Channel Trend configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
SPAN EXAMPLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
CHANNEL CONFIGURATION EXAMPLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
4.4.3 Alarm 1 menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
4.4.4 Alarm 2 menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
4.4.5 Alarm types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
ABSOLUTE ALARMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
DEVIATION ALARMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
RATE-OF-CHANGE ALARMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
4.5 VIRTUAL CHANNEL CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
4.5.1 Maths channel configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
MATHS FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
4.5.2 Totaliser configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
4.5.3 Counter configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
4.6 LOOP OPTION CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
4.6.1 Main menu parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
4.6.2 Setup menu parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
4.6.3 Tune menu parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
4.6.4 PID menu parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
4.6.5 Setpoint menu parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
4.6.6 Output menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
4.6.7 Loop diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
4.7 ADVANCED LOOP CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
4.7.1 Advanced Loop Main menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
4.7.2 Advanced Loop Setup menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
4.7.3 Advanced Loop Tune menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
4.7.4 Advanced Loop Master PID menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
4.7.5 Advanced Loop Slave PID menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
4.7.6 Advanced Loop Master SP menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
4.7.7 Advanced Loop Slave SP menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
4.7.8 Advanced Loop Output menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
4.8 PROGRAMMER CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
4.8.1 Programmer Features menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
CLONING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
4.8.2 Programmer FTP menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
4.8.3 Programmer Setup menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
4.8.4 Programmer Run menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
4.8.5 Connecting the programmer to a loop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
4.8.6 Configuration by Modbus Comms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
EXAMPLE 1: configure a program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
EXAMPLE 2: STORE A PROGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
EXAMPLE 3 LIST STORED PROGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
EXAMPLE 4: LOADING PROGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Page iv
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11

Section
Page
4.9 MODBUS MASTER CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

4.9.1 Slave Main menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
PRIORITY LEVELS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
4.9.2 Slave Diagnostics menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
4.9.3 Modbus master data configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
EXAMPLE 1: TARGET SP1 WITH NANODAC SLAVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
EXAMPLE 2 USER DEFINED PARAMETER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
4.10 ETHERNET/IP CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
4.10.1 Ethernet/IP Configuration Main menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
4.10.2 Implicit inputs/outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
4.10.3 Explicit inputs/outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
4.11 DIGITAL I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
4.11.1 Digital input/output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
4.11.2 Relay outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
4.11.3 Digital inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
4.11.4 Digital outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
4.12 DC OUTPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
4.12.1 Configuration display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
SCALING INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
4.13 USER LIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
4.13.1 User linearisation table rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
4.14 CUSTOM MESSAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
4.15 ZIRCONIA BLOCK OPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
4.15.1 Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Temperature Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Carbon Potential Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Sooting Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Automatic Probe Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Endothermic Gas Correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Clean Probe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
OXYGEN CONCENTRATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
4.15.2 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
ZIRCONIA MAIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
MAIN PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
GAS REFERENCES PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
CLEAN PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
4.15.3 Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
4.16 STERILISER OPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
4.16.1 Configuration parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
4.17 HUMIDITY BLOCK OPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
4.18 BCD INPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
4.18.1 Input rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
4.18.2 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
4.19 LOGIC (2 INPUT) BLOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
4.19.1 Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
4.20 LOGIC (8 INPUT) BLOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
4.20.1 Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
INPUT INVERSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
4.20.2 Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
4.20.3 Invert input decoding table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
4.21 Multiplexer block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
4.22 MATH (2 INPUT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
4.22.1 Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
4.22.2 Sample and Hold details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
4.23 TIMER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
4.23.1 Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
4.23.2 Timer modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
Page v

Section
Page
ON PULSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
ON DELAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
ONE SHOT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
MIN ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
4.24 USER VALUES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
4.24.1 Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
4.25 ALARM SUMMARY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
4.26 REAL TIME EVENT CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
5 MODBUS TCP SLAVE COMMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
5.1 INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
5.2 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
5.2.1 Function Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
DIAGNOSTIC CODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
EXCEPTION CODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
5.2.2 Data types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
DATA ENCODING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
5.2.3 Invalid multiple register writes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
5.2.4 Master communications timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
5.2.4 Non-volatile parameters in EEPROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
5.3 PARAMETER LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
6 iTOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
6.1 iTools CONNECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
6.1.1 Ethernet (Modbus TCP) communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
6.1.2 Direct Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
WIRING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
6.2 SCANNING FOR INSTRUMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
6.3 GRAPHICAL WIRING EDITOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
6.3.1 Tool bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
6.3.2 Wiring editor operating details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
COMPONENT SELECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
FUNCTION BLOCKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
WIRES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
COMMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
MONITORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
COLOURS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
DIAGRAM CONTEXT MENU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
COMPOUNDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
TOOL TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
6.4 PARAMETER EXPLORER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
6.4.1 Parameter explorer detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
6.4.2 Explorer tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
6.4.3 Context Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
6.5 WATCH/RECIPE EDITOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
6.5.1 Creating a Watch List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
ADDING PARAMETERS TO THE WATCH LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
DATA SET CREATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
6.5.2 Watch Recipe toolbar icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
6.5.3 Watch/Recipe Context Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
6.6 PROGRAMMER OPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
6.6.1 Segment parameter editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
SEGMENT NAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
SEGMENT TYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
END TYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
GO BACK TO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
CYCLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
DURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
WAIT FOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Ch1 (2) TSP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
TIME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
RATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
OTHER PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Page vi
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11

Section
Page
6.6.2 Digital Event display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266

6.6.3 Program parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
6.6.4 Adding and deleting segments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
INSERT SEGMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
CUTTING, COPYING AND PASTING SEGMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
DELETING SEGMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
6.6.5 Loading and Saving programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
6.6.6 Toolbar icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
6.6.7 Context menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
SEGMENT CONTEXT MENU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
PROGRAM CONTEXT MENU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
CHART CONTEXT MENU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
6.6.8 Programmer menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
6.6.9 Two channel programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
7 USER WIRING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
7.1 DRIVE RELAY EXAMPLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
7.1.1 Wire removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
7.2 COUNTER EXAMPLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
8 USB DEVICES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
8.1 MEMORY STICK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
8.2 BAR CODE READER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
8.3 USB KEYBOARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Appendix A: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
A1 INSTALLATION CATEGORY AND POLLUTION DEGREE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Installation category II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Pollution degree 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
A2 RECORDER SPECIFICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
A3 ANALOGUE INPUT SPECIFICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
A4 RELAY AND LOGIC I/O SPECIFICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
A5 DIGITAL INPUTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
A6 DC OUTPUTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
A7 BLOCKS SUPPORTED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
A7.1 TOOLKIT BLOCKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
A7.2 APPLICATION BLOCKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Appendix B CONTROL LOOPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
B.1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
B1.1 EXAMPLE (HEAT ONLY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
B2 CONTROL LOOP DEFINITIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
B2.1 AUTO/MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
B2.2 TYPES OF CONTROL LOOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
B2.2.1 On/Off control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
B2.2.2 PID Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
PROPORTIONAL BAND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
INTEGRAL TERM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
DERIVATIVE TERM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
B2.2.3 Motorised valve control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
MANUAL MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
MOTORISED VALVE OUTPUT CONNECTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
B2.3 LOOP PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
B2.3.1 Relative cool gain (R2G) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
B2.3.2 High and Low cutback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
B2.3.3 Manual Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
B2.3.4 Integral Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
B2.3.5 Integral De-bump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
B2.3.6 Loop Break . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
B2.3.7 Gain Scheduling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
B2.4 TUNING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
B2.4.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
Page vii

Section
Page
B2.4.2 Loop Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292

UNDER DAMPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
CRITICALLY DAMPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
OVER DAMPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
B2.4.3 Initial Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
SETPOINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
OUTPUT HIGH, OUTPUT LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
REM. OUTPUT LOW, REM. OUTPUT HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Ch2 DeadBand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
MINIMUM ON TIME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
FILTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
RATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
CH1 TRAVEL TIME, CH2 TRAVEL TIME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
B2.4.4 Other tuning considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
B2.4.5 Autotune . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
AUTOTUNE AND SENSOR BREAK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
AUTOTUNE AND INHIBIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
AUTOTUNE AND GAIN SCHEDULING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
INITIAL CONDITIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
INITIATING THE AUTOTUNE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
EXAMPLE 1: AUTOTUNE FROM BELOW SP (HEAT/COOL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
EXAMPLE 2: AUTOTUNE FROM BELOW SP (HEAT ONLY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
EXAMPLE 3: AUTOTUNE AT SP (HEAT /COOL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
AT.R2G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
FAILURE MODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
B2.4.6 Manual tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
CUTBACK VALUES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
B2.5 SETPOINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
B2.5.1 Setpoint function block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
B2.5.2 Setpoint Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
B2.5.3 Setpoint Rate Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
B2.5.4 Setpoint Tracking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
B2.5.5 Manual Tracking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
B2.6 OUTPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
B2.6.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
B2.6.2 Output Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
B2.6.3 Output Rate Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
B2.6.4 Sensor Break Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
SAFE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
HOLD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
B2.6.5 Forced Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
B2.6.6 Power Feed Forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
B2.6.7 Cool Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
LINEAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
OIL COOLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
WATER COOLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
FAN COOLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
B2.6.8 Feed forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
B2.6.9 Effect of Control Action, Hysteresis and Deadband . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
CONTROL ACTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
HYSTERESIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
DEADBAND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
B2.6.10 Valve nudge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
B2.6.11 Time Proportioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
B2.7 DIAGNOSTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Appendix C: REFERENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
C1 BATTERY REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
C2 SETTING UP AN FTP SERVER USING FILEZILLA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
C2.1 DOWNLOADING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
C2.2 SERVER SETUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
C2.3 PC SETUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
C2.4 RECORDER/CONTROLLER SET UP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Page viii
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11

Section
Page
C2.5 ARCHIVE ACTIVITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316

C3 FUNCTION BLOCK DETAILS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
C3.1 EIGHT INPUT OR BLOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
C4 TCP PORT NUMBERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
C5 ISOLATION DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Appendix D: CONFIGURATION MENU OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
D1 INSTRUMENT CONFIGURATION MENUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
D2 NETWORK CONFIGURATION MENUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
D3 GROUP CONFIGURATION MENU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
D4 CHANNEL CONFIGURATION MENU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
D5 VIRTUAL CHANNEL CONFIGURATION MENU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
D6 LOOP CONFIGURATION MENUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
D7 ADVANCED LOOP CONFIGURATION MENUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
D8 PROGRAMMER CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
D9 MODBUS MASTER CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
D10 ETHERNET/IP CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
D11 DIGITAL I/O CONFIGURATION MENUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
D12 DC OUTPUT CONFIGURATION MENUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
D13 USER LINEARISATION TABLE CONFIGURATION MENU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
D14 CUSTOM MESSAGES CONFIGURATION MENU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
D15 ZIRCONIA BLOCK CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
D16 STERILISER BLOCK CONFIGURATION MENU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
D17 HUMIDITY BLOCK CONFIGURATION MENU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
D18 BCD INPUT BLOCK CONFIGURATION MENU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
D19 LOGIC (2 INPUT) CONFIGURATION MENU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
D20 LOGIC (8 INPUT) CONFIGURATION MENU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
D21 MULTIPLEXER BLOCK CONFIGURATION MENU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
D22 MATH (2 INPUT) CONFIGURATION MENU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
D23 TIMER CONFIGURATION MENU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
D24 USER VALUES CONFIGURATION MENU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
i
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
Page ix
This page is deliberately left blank
Page x
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
SAFETY NOTES
WARNINGS
1. Any interruption of the protective conductor inside or outside the apparatus, or disconnection of
the protective earth terminal is likely to make the apparatus dangerous under some fault conditions. Intentional interruption is prohibited.
2. Live sensors: The unit is designed to operate if the temperature sensor is connected directly to
an electrical heating element. It must be ensured that service personnel do not touch connections to such inputs whilst the inputs are live. With live sensors, all cables, connections and switches for connecting the sensor must be mains rated for use in 240V Cat II.
3. Grounding the temperature sensor shield: Where it is common practice to replace the temperature sensor whilst the instrument is live, it is recommended that the shield of the temperature sensor be grounded to safety earth, as an additional protection against electric shock.
4. The instrument must not be wired to a three-phase supply with an unearthed star connection, because, under fault conditions, such a supply could rise above 240V RMS with respect to ground,
thus rendering the instrument unsafe.
Notes:
1. Safety requirements for permanently connected equipment state:
a. A switch or circuit breaker shall be included in the building installation.
b. It shall be in close proximity to the equipment and within easy reach of the operator.
c. It shall be marked as the disconnecting device for the equipment.
2. Recommended external fuse ratings are: 2A Type T 250V.
1.
This instrument is intended for industrial temperature and process control applications within the
requirements of the European directives on safety and EMC.
2. Installation may be carried out only by qualified personnel.
3. To prevent hands or metal tools coming into contact with parts that are electrically live the instrument
must be installed in an enclosure.
4. Where conductive pollution (e.g. condensation, carbon dust) is likely, adequate air conditioning/filtering/sealing etc. must be installed in the enclosure.
5. The mains supply fuse within the power supply is not replaceable. If it is suspected that the fuse is
faulty, the manufacturers local service centre should be contacted for advice.
6. Whenever it is likely that protection has been impaired, the unit shall be made inoperative, and
secured against accidental operation. The manufacturers nearest service centre should be contacted
for advice.
7. If the equipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer, the protection provided by the
equipment might be impaired.
8. The unit must be wired according to the instructions in this manual.
9. Before any other connection is made, the protective earth terminal shall be connected to a protective
conductor. The mains (supply voltage) wiring must be terminated in such a way that, should it slip, the
Earth wire would be the last wire to become disconnected. The protective earth terminal must remain
connected (even if the equipment is isolated from the mains supply), if any of the I/O circuits are connected to hazardous voltages*.
The protective earth connection must always be the first to be connected and the last to be disconnected.
Wiring must comply with all local wiring regulations, e.g. in the UK, the latest IEEE wiring regulations
(BS7671) and in the USA, NEC class 1 wiring methods.
10. Signal and supply voltage wiring should be kept separate from one another. Where this is impractical,
shielded cables should be used for the signal wiring.
* A full definition of Hazardous voltages appears under Hazardous live in BS EN61010. Briefly, under normal operating conditions, hazardous voltages are defined as being > 30V RMS (42.2V peak) or > 60V dc.
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
Page 1
SAFETY NOTES (Cont.)

11. The maximum continuous voltage applied between any of the following terminals must not exceed 240Vac.
1.
Relay output to logic, dc or sensor input connections
2.
Any connection to ground.
The ac supply must not be connected to sensor input or low-level inputs or outputs.
12. Over temperature protection: A separate over-temperature protection unit (with an independent temperature sensor) should be fitted to isolate the process heating circuit should a fault condition arise.
Alarm relays within the recorder/controller do not give protection under all fault conditions/
13. In order to allow the power supply capacitors to discharge to a safe voltage, the supply must be disconnected at least two minutes before the instrument is removed from its sleeve. The touching of the
exposed electronics of an instrument which has been removed from its sleeve should be avoided.
14. Instrument labels may be cleaned using iso-propyl alcohol, or water or water-based products. A mild
soap solution may be used to clean other exterior surfaces.
USB DEVICE PRECAUTIONS

Note: the use of U3 USB Flash drives is not recommended.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Precautions against electrostatic discharge should be taken when the instrument terminals are being
accessed. The USB and Ethernet connections are particularly vulnerable.
Ideally, the USB device should be plugged directly into the instrument, as the use of extension leads
may compromise the instruments ESD compliance. Where the instrument is being used in an electrically noisy environment however, it is recommended that the user brings the USB socket to the front
of the panel using a short extension lead. This is because the USB may lock up or reset in noisy environments and the only means of recovery is to remove the device, then re-insert it. For memory sticks,
EMC-related failure during a write operation might cause corruption of the data held on the stick. For
this reason, the data on the memory stick should be backed up before insertion and checked after
removal.
When using a USB extension cable, a high quality screened cable must be used. The total length of
USB cable between the device and the USB port must not exceed 3 metres (10 ft.)
Most barcode readers and keyboards are not designed for use in industrial EMC environments, and
their operation in such environments may result in impaired performance of the recorder/controller.
32-BIT RESOLUTION
Floating point values are stored in IEEE 32-bit single precision format. Values which require greater resolution than is available in this format are rounded up or down.
SYMBOLS USED ON THE RECORDER LABELLING

One or more of the symbols below may appear as a part of the recorder labelling.
Page 2
Refer to manual for instructions
Risk of electric shock
This unit is CE approved
Precautions against static electrical discharge must be taken when handling

this unit
C-Tick mark for Australia (ACA)

and New Zealand (RSM)
Ethernet connector
Underwriters laboratories listed

mark for Canada and the U.S.A.
USB connector
For environmental reasons, this unit

must be recycled before its age exceeds
the number of years shown in the circle.
Protective conductive terminal

(Safety Earth)
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
1 INTRODUCTION
This document describes the installation, operation and configuration of a paperless graphic recorder/controller. The instrument comes, as standard with four input channels and is equipped, for secure archiving
via FTP transfer and/or to USB memory stick.
1.1 UNPACKING THE INSTRUMENT

The instrument is despatched in a special pack, designed to give adequate protection during transit.
Should the outer box show signs of damage, it should be opened immediately, and the contents examined. If there is evidence of damage, the instrument should not be operated and the local representative
contacted for instructions. After the instrument has been removed from its packing, the packing should be
examined to ensure that all accessories and documentation have been removed. The packing should then
be stored against future transport requirements.
2 INSTALLATION
CAUTION
Before installation, ensure that the specified instrument supply voltage matches the facility supply.
2.1 MECHANICAL INSTALLATION

Figure 2.1 gives installation details.
2.1.1 Installation procedure

1.
2.
3.
4.
If it is not already in place, fit the IP65 sealing gasket behind the front bezel of the instrument.
Insert the instrument through the panel cutout, from the front of the panel.
Spring the retaining clips into place, and secure the instrument by holding it firmly in place whilst pushing both clips towards the rear face of the panel.
The protective membrane can now be removed from the display.
Retaining spring (two places)
For the sake of clarity, the panel

is shown as though transparent
Push springs towards panel
Figure 2.1.1 Securing the instrument
2.1.2 Demounting
WARNING
Before removing the supply voltage wiring, isolate the supply voltage and secure it against unintended operation.
1.
2.
3.
Isolate the mains supply and secure it against accidental operation. Remove all wiring and the USB
device and Ethernet cable (if any).
Remove the retaining springs by unhooking them from the sides using a small flat-blade screwdriver.
Pull the instrument forwards out of the panel.
Note: See section C1 (Battery replacement) for a more detailed description
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
Page 3
2 MECHANICAL INSTALLATION (Cont.)
Side View
Panel cutout:
92mm x 92mm (both -0 + 0.8mm)
3.62in x 3.62in (both -0.00 + 0.03in)
Minimum inter-unit spacing:
Horizontal (x) = 10mm (0.4in)
Vertical (y) = 38mm (1.5in)
Top View
Figure 2.1a Mechanical installation details (standard case)
Page 4
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
2.1 MECHANICAL INSTALLATION (Cont.)
Side View
Panel cutout:
92mm x 92mm (both -0 + 0.8mm)
3.62in x 3.62in (both -0.00 + 0.03in)
Minimum inter-unit spacing:
Horizontal (x) = 10mm (0.4in)
Vertical (y) = 38mm (1.5in)
Top View
Figure 2.1b Mechanical installation details (wash down case option)
2.2 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION

Figure 2.2 shows the locations of the various user terminations along with signal and supply wiring pinouts.
2.2.1 Termination details

The screw terminals accept single wires in the range 0.21 to 2.08 mm2 (24 to 14 AWG) inclusive, or two wires
each in the range 0.21 to 1.31 mm2 (24 to 16 AWG) inclusive.
Screw terminals should be tightened to a torque not exceeding 0.4Nm (3.54 lb in)
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
Page 5
2.2 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION (Cont.)
100 to 230Vac15%;
50/60 Hz
Brown
Blue
Mains (Line) supply voltage wiring
Supply
Voltage
20.4 to 28.8Vac;
48 to 62 Hz or
19.2 to 26.4V dc
(polarity irrelevant)
Safety Earth
Low voltage option supply voltage wiring
I/O1
R>500R = inactive
R<150R = active
Contact closure
Logic o/p (active high)
Relay output
Isolated DC o/p (mA)
O/P2
Isolated DC o/p (mA)
Relay output
Logic o/p (active high)

Dig InA
O/P3
Dig InB
Each wire connected to

LA, LB and LC must be
less than 30 metres in
length.
O/P4; O/P5
R>600R = inactive
R<300R = active
Internal Link (0V)
Relay output
T/C
mV
0 to 1V
0 to 10V
T/C, Volts, millivolts
Contact closure
Contact closure
An In1; An In2; An In3; An In4
Isolated DC o/p (mA/ V)
Relay output
1R0R1k0
R<200R = active
R>350R = inactive
Milliamps
RTD (three wire)
RTD (two wire)
Ohms inputs
Digital
An In1; An In2; An In3; An In4

Dual input option (Section 2.2.3, below)
(Primary and secondary inputs are not electrically isolated from one another.)
For maximum accuracy, it is recommended that separate returns are made to
the negative terminal.
Dual mV/TC
Dual mA
Figure 2.2 Connector locations and pinouts (rear panel)
Page 6
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
2.2.2 Low Voltage option

This option allows the use of a low voltage ac or dc 24 V supply. The specification in Appendix A gives full
details. The polarity of the dc supply connection is not important - it may be connected either way round.
2.2.3 Dual input option

This is a cost option, enabled on a channel-by-channel basis by means of entering the relevant password in
the Feature3 Pass field in Instrument.Security menu described in section 4.1.6.
For each enabled channel, a pair of thermocouple, mV or mA inputs can be connected to the instrument.
These inputs are called primary and secondary, and are terminated at the analogue input terminals (An
In1 to An In 4) as shown in figure 2.2, above. The primary inputs 1 to 4 are assigned to channels 1 to 4, as
normal. Each secondary input must be soft wired to a maths channel configured as Operation = Copy if it
is to be recorded/displayed/alarmed etc.
Note: Due to the nature of the input circuit, a large offset may appear for secondary thermocouple
inputs. This offset can be removed only by using the input adjust feature described in section 4.1.9.
Because of this offset, the dual thermocouple input option is not suitable for AMS2750D applications
Soft wiring is described in Section 7.

Maths channels are described in section 4.5.1.
Channel configuration is described in section 4.4.1.
Input adjust is carried out as described in section 4.1.9
SAMPLE RATE
For dual input channels, both primary and secondary sample rate is reduced to 4 Hz (250ms) from the normal 8Hz (125ms).
SENSOR BREAK DETECTION
Input sensor break detection is not supported for secondary inputs. The internal circuit acts as a pull up on
the secondary input which therefore saturates high in the event of a sensor break.
DUAL MILLIAMP INPUT OFFSET CORRECTION

If Dual mA is selected as input type, then an automatic offset correction will be made, according to the shunt
value entered in channel configuration.
INPUT RANGE LIMITATION
There is no 10V range associated with the secondary input. Any input greater than +2V or less than -2V is
deemed to be bad range.
2.2.4 Modbus Master communications

The master instrument can be connected directly to up to two slaves using standard ethernet network cable
either directly (single slave only) or via a hub or switch (one or two slaves). In either case, straight through
or crossover cable may be used. The cable is terminated at the RJ45 socket at the rear of the unit.
2.2.5 EtherNet/IP
The Client and Server are connected in the same way as described above for Modbus Master communications, except that there can be only one client and one server.
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
Page 7
3 OPERATION
On power up a default or custom (section 4.1.5) splash screen appears and remains visible whilst
the unit is initialising. If during this process a network broadcast storm is detected, the unit stops,
displaying a network failure icon until the broadcast storm has cleared, after which the initialisation
process resumes.
3.1 INTRODUCTION
The operator interface consists of a display screen and four push buttons.
3.1.1 Display screen

The display screen is used both to display channel information (in one of a number of display modes), and
to display the various configuration screens which allow the user to setup the recorder to display the required channels, to set up alarms and so on. Display modes are described in section 3.4, below; configuration is described in section 4.
In display mode, the screen is split horizontally into three areas (figure 3.1.1)
1. a faceplate giving channel details.
2. the main display screen showing channel traces etc.
3. the status area, displaying instrument name, the current time and date and any system icons.
Channel 1
Faceplate
6.23V
Main display screen
Status area
Instrument name
Figure 3.1.1 Display mode screen (vertical trend)
In configuration mode, the entire display screen is devoted to the selected configuration menu.
3.1.2 Navigation pushbuttons
Home
Configuration
Go to View
History
Faceplate cycling (On)
Operator Notes
Demand Archiving
Log out
Figure 3.1.2 Top level menu (Engineer level access)
There are four navigation buttons, called Page, Scroll, Lower and Raise located below the screen. The
general properties of these buttons are described in the remainder of this section, but some have additional,
context sensitive functions, which, for the sake of clarity are not described here but in the relevant sections
(e.g. Message summary) of the manual.
Page 8
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
3.1.2 NAVIGATION PUSHBUTTONS (Cont.)

PAGE BUTTON
From any non-configuration page, pressing this push button causes the top level menu (figure 3.1.2) to appear. The figure shows the menu for a user logged in with Engineer level access. Other access levels may
have fewer menu items.
Within configuration pages, the Scroll button can be used as an enter key to select lower menu levels. In such
cases the page button is used to reverse this action, moving the user up one menu level per operation.
SCROLL BUTTON
From trending pages, operation of the scroll push-button scrolls through the channels enabled in the group.
The Faceplate cycling Off selection can be used to keep a particular channel permanently displayed, and
the scroll pushbuttons can then be used to select channels manually.
In configuration pages, the scroll key operates as an enter key to enter the next menu level associated with
the highlighted item. Once the lowest menu level is reached, operation of the scroll key allows the value of
the selected item to be edited by the relevant means (for example, the raise/lower keys, or a keyboard entry).
The Page key is used to move the user back up the menu structure, until the top level menu is reached,
when the scroll key can be used again to return to the Home page.
The scroll button is also used to initiate user wiring as described in section 7
RAISE/LOWER BUTTONS
Within trending displays, the Raise and Lower keys can be used to scroll through the enabled display modes
in the sequence: vertical trend, horizontal trend, vertical bargraph, horizontal bargraph, numeric, vertical
trend... and so on.
Within configuration pages, these pushbuttons act as cursor keys, allowing, for example, the user to highlight menu items for selection using the scroll button, and in many cases allowing the user to select one from
a number of alternative values within menu items. Theses keys are also used to navigate through the virtual
keyboards (section 3.6) and number pads used to enter text or numeric strings.
3.1.3 On screen help

The top level configuration menu includes contextual help text on the right-hand half of the screen. Mostly
this text fits within on screen height. Where this is not the case, the text can be moved up or down the screen
by holding the Page button operated whilst using the up and down arrows to move the text.
The down arrow moves the text upwards on the screen; the up arrow moves it downwards.
Select configuration menu
Logic (2 Input)
Logic (8 input)
Multiplexer
Math (2 input)
Timer
The timer function

block offers a universal
timer which may be
re-configured between
single pulse outputs
and re-triggering
outputs. Timer types
are:
User values
Alarm Summary
On-screen help.
(Use the Page button with the
down arrow to access hidden
text at the bottom of the screen)
+
On pulse on-timer.
Figure 3.1.3 On-screen help (typical)
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
Page 9
3.2 PROCESS VARIABLE DISPLAY

As discussed above, the operator interface consists of a display screen and associated push buttons. The
display screen shows process variables in one of a number of formats, or operational details (notes or alarm
history for example), or configuration details for use in setting up the recorder to produce the required displays and history formats. The remainder of section three discusses the process variable displays, alarm displays and so on; configuration details are to be found in section 4.
Note: Some of the items below can be selected for use only by users with a suitable permission level
as set up in the Instrument Security menu described in section 4.1.6
Figure 3.2 below, depicts a typical trend display and gives details of the various areas of the display page.
Current point name
Channel 1
6.23V
Current point value and units

Current point scale
Current point pen

Time/date stamps
Instrument name
Recording status
Inst name
Current time/date
Figure 3.2 Typical display screen (Vertical trend)
Figure 3.2 shows a vertical trend page. Operating the Raise/Lower push-buttons allows the user to scroll
through the other display modes: Horizontal trend, Vertical bargraph, horizontal bargraph, numeric, vertical
trend... and so on. All these display modes are described in section 3.4, below.
A display mode can also be selected from the Top level menu Go To View item which appears when the
Page key
is operated.
The scroll button can be used to scroll through the points in the group, overriding the Faceplate Cycling
on or off selection
3.2.1 Alarm icons

Notes:
1. A full discussion of alarms is given in the Channel Configuration section of this manual (section
4.4.3)
2. Trigger alarms do not display threshold marks or bars, or faceplate symbols
The alarm icons shown below appear in some display modes. The icons on a channel faceplate show the
status of that channels alarm(s), as follows:
Icon is flashing
alarm is active but unacknowledged or it is an Auto alarm which is no longer active but which has not been acknowledged
Icon steadily illuminated the alarm is active and has been acknowledged.
Alarm thresholds and deviation alarm bars appear for horizontal and vertical trend modes. For deviation
bars, the bar stretches from (Reference - Deviation) to (Reference + Deviation). Vertical and Horizontal bargraph modes display only absolute alarm symbols.
Page 10
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
3.2.1 ALARM ICONS (Cont.)

Absolute High
Absolute Low
Deviation High
Deviation Low
Deviation Band
Rising Rate of change
Falling Rate of change
Digital High
Digital Low
Table 3.2.1 Alarm icons
3.2.2 Status bar Icons

The following items can appear in a dedicated window immediately to the left of the time and date, at the
bottom right-hand corner of the display. The width of this window expands as the number of icons increases, and the instrument name is truncated, as necessary, to make room.
SYSTEM ALARMS
This indicator appears, flashing, if any one or more of the alarms listed below is active. The System Alarms
summary page (accessed from Go to View in the top level menu) allows the user to view such system alarms
as are active. It is not possible to acknowledge system alarms
Archive Disabled
Archiving Failed
Archiving Timeout
Battery failure
Broadcast Storm detected

Clock failure
Channel error
Database failure
DHCP Server failure
FTP Archiving file lost
FTP Archiving to slow
An unattended archiving strategy has temporarily been disabled.

An unattended archiving strategy has failed to complete.
A configured archiving strategy has timed out.
Indicates that the battery is approaching the end of its useful life, or
that it is missing or is completely exhausted. Immediate battery replacement is recommended (Appendix C; section C1).
Networking is limited until the storm has passed.
The internal clock was found to be corrupt at power up, or that the
time has never been set. Time is forced to 00:00 1/1/1900. Can be
caused by battery failure, in which case a battery failure message appears. The error is cleared by setting the time and date.
Indicates a hardware failure in the channel circuit or in the internal
cold junction temperature measurement.
Corrupted EEPROM or flash memory.
For units with IP Type set to DHCP (Network.Interface configuration)
this alarm occurs if the instrument is unable to obtain an IP address
from the server.
A file has been deleted that had not yet been archived. Possible causes: Communications with the server could not be established,; archive is disabled; archive rate too slow.
The archive rate is too slow to prevent the internal memory from overflowing. The recorder effectively switches to Automatic (Section
4.2.2) to ensure that data is not lost.
(Continued)
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
Page 11
3.2.2 STATUS BAR ICONS (Cont.)

FTP Primary Server Failure
This error occurs if the recorder fails to establish connection with the
primary server, after two attempts. After the second attempt fails, the
recorder attempts to establish connection with the secondary server
instead. Primary and secondary server details are entered in the Network.Archiving area of configuration (Section 4.2.2).
FTP Secondary Server Failure
This error occurs if the recorder fails to establish connection with the
secondary server, after two attempts. Primary and secondary server
details are entered in the Network.Archiving area of configuration
(section 4.2.2).
Maths channel failure
Appears if, for example, the divisor of a divide function is zero.
Media archiving file lost
A file has been deleted that had not yet been archived. Possible causes: Memory stick missing, full or write protected; archiving has been
disabled; archiving rate too slow.
Media archiving to slow
The archive rate is too slow to prevent the internal memory from overflowing. The recorder effectively switches to Automatic (Section
4.2.2) to ensure that data is not lost.
Media full
Archive storage device is full. The alarm becomes active only when
an archive is in progress.
Media missing
No archive storage device present when archive attempted.
Non-volatile memory failure
RAM copy of non-volatile parameters is corrupted.
Non-volatile Write Frequency warning One or more parameters are being written frequently to non-volatile
memory. If this continues, it may lead to memory depletion (i.e. the
memory will no longer be able to store values correctly). A common
cause of this problem is frequent writes over Modbus comms.
Recording failure (message)
Message explains reason for failure.
USB overcurrent
USB power fault - too much current (i.e. >100mA) is being drawn by a
USB device.
Wiring failure
The user wiring has failed to verify, i.e. one or more wires has been
detected that does not have both a source and a destination defined.
This may be the result, for example, of power loss during a download
from iTools.
CHANNEL ALARM
This indicator appears if any channel (including channels not in the display group) is in an alarm state. The
symbol is illuminated continuously if all alarms are acknowledged or flashes if any one or more alarms is unacknowledged. Alarms are acknowledged from the Root menu Alarm summary item as described in section 3.3.3 or in the Channel configuration area (Section 4.4.3) if the users access permission is appropriate.
USB
This icon appears whenever a memory stick (max. capacity 8GB) or other supported USB device (section 8)
is plugged into the USB port at the rear of the recorder.
When data transfer is in progress between the instrument and the memory stick, the icon changes to a busy
version.
CAUTION
The Memory stick must not be removed while archiving (demand or automatic) is in
progress, as to do so may irreparably damage the file system of the memory stick,
rendering it unusable. It is recommended that all archiving be suspended before the
memory stick is removed.
Memory
stick fitted
Transfer in
progress
FTP ICON
The FTP icon appears whenever transfer activity is taking place.
Page 12
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
3.2.2 STATUS BAR ICONS (Cont.)

RECORD ICON
One of four icons appears at the bottom left corner of the display to indicate recording status.
Record
This indicates that the recorder is recording the items selected in the Group Recording area of configuration
(section 4.3).
Stopped
This means that Enable has been set to no in the Group Recording area of configuration (section 4.3).
Trending is not affected.
Paused (Suspended)
This means that recording has been paused by a wire to the Suspend parameter (Group Recording area of
configuration (section 4.3)) going true (high). Trending is not affected.
In Configuration
The recorder has been placed in configuration mode either at the user interface, or via iTools. Recording is
stopped until the recorder is no longer in configuration mode. For each non-recording state (Stopped,
Paused or In Configuration). A new history file is created when the unit comes out of configuration mode.
Note: For recording to be enabled, configuration status must be logged out both at the instrument
and at iTools.
MESSAGE ICON
This envelope icon appears when a message is generated and it remains on display until the Message Summary is accessed, when it is removed from the display until the next new message is generated.
AUTOTUNE ICON
For instruments fitted with the Loop option, this symbol appears during the Autotune process.
3.2.3 Breaks in recording

Breaks in recording can be caused by the unit being powered down, by the user entering configuration
mode or when the recorder time is changed manually. In vertical and horizontal trend modes, a line is drawn
across the width/height of the chart to indicate that recording has been interrupted.
On power up, a red line is drawn across the chart. In History, if messages are enabled the message:
Date Time System power up
is printed on the chart, together with the configuration and security revisions.
On exiting configuration mode, a blue line is drawn on the chart and in History, if messages are enabled,
the messages:
Date Time Logged out.
Date Time Config Revision: N was N-1 (assuming a configuration change was made)
Date Time Logged in as: Engineer
appear on the chart.
When the instrument time is changed (manually - not through daylight saving action) a green line is drawn
on the chart and in History, if messages are enabled, the message:
Date Time Time/Date changed
appears on the chart.
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
Page 13
3.3 TOP LEVEL MENU

This menu appears when the page key is operated from any non-configuration page. The menu items displayed depend on the access permission of the user. One of the menu items is highlighted, and if the scroll
key is operated, then it is the highlighted item that is entered.
Figure 3.3 shows the top level menu for Engineer level access.
Section 3.3.1
Section 3.3.2
Section 3.3.3
Section 3.3.4
Section 3.3.5
Section 3.3.6
Section 3.3.7
Section 3.3.8
Home
Configuration
Go to View
History
Faceplate cycling (On)
Operator Notes
Demand Archiving
Log out
Page key
Scroll key
Figure 3.3 Top level menu
3.3.1 Home
Operating the scroll key whilst Home is highlighted causes a return to the Home page. By default, this is
the vertical trend mode, but the mode can be changed in Instrument.Display configuration (section 4.1.3)
3.3.2 Configuration
Operating the down arrow key highlights the Configuration item. Operating the Scroll key enters the configuration submenu described in section 4 of this manual.
Note: Configuration appears only if the user has an appropriate access level.
Page 14
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
3.3.3 Go to View
Operating the scroll key whilst the Go to view item is highlighted, calls the Go to view submenu (figure
3.3.3a). This allows the user to view channel alarms, system alarms, messages or to select a different display
mode.
Alarm Summary
System Alarms
Message Summary
Vertical Trend
Horizontal Trend
Vertical Bargraph
Horizontal Bargraph
Numeric
Alarm Panel
Control
Dual Loop
Cascade
Programmer
Steriliser
Promote List
Modbus Master
EtherNet/IP
Alarm Summary
System Alarms
Message Summary
Vertical Trend
Horizontal Trend
Vertical Bargraph
Horizontal Bargraph
Numeric
Alarm Panel
Control
Control (Dual Loop)
Cascde
Programmer
Steriliser
Promote List
Modbus Master
EtherNet/IP
Figure 3.3.3a Go to view submenu
Notes:
1. If an option (e.g. Steriliser) is not fitted, its display mode does not appear in the list.
2. Some display modes must be enabled in Instrument.View configuration (section 4.1.3) before
they become available.
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
Page 15
3.3.3 GO TO VIEW (Cont.)

ALARM SUMMARY
For each active alarm, this page displays the channel identifier with alarm number (e.g. C1(2) = channel 1;
alarm 2), the channel descriptor, the alarm threshold the current process value and an alarm type symbol.
To return to the top level menu, operate the Page key.
Notes:
1. The background colour to the channel ID is the same as that chosen for the channel.
2. A prefix C in the channel ID means that this is a measuring channel; A prefix V means that this
is a virtual channel (i.e. a totaliser, counter or maths channel)
Alarm Threshold
Channel descriptor
Channel ID
(Alarm number)
C1(2)
C2(1)
C3(1)
C4(1)
Channel current process value

Alarm Summary
Furnace 1 temp 1
750.00
Furnace 1 temp 3
750.00
Furnace 1 temp 2
590.00
Furnace 2 temp 1
645.00
Alarm Type indicator
798.39
763.89
603.39
630.71
Page key
Scroll key
Figure 3.3.3b Alarm summary page with acknowledge confirmation display
ALARM ACKNOWLEDGEMENT
To acknowledge an alarm from this view:
1. Use the up and down arrows to highlight the required
alarm
2.
Alarm Summary
C1(2)
C2(1)
C3(1)
C4(1)
Operate the scroll button. The Acknowledge alarm

window appears.
Furnace 1 temp 1
Furnace 1 temp 3
Furnace 1 temp 2
Furnace 2 temp 1
Use the up arrow to highlight the relevant field (C2(1) in this

example), or All if all alarms are to be acknowledged.
C2(1)
All
Acknowledge alarm?
No
4.
763.26
770.01
595.83
644.33
Acknowledge alarm?
No
3.
750.00
750.00
590.00
645.00
C2(1)
All
Operate the scroll key to confirm. If the alarm fails to respond,

this may be due to the fact that it has been configured as a Manual alarm, and the trigger has not yet
returned to a safe (non-alarm) state, or it could be that the instrument is in a logged out state.
SYSTEM ALARMS
Operating the scroll button whilst the System Alarms field is highlighted displays a list of all currently active
system alarms. Section 3.2.2 contains a list of system alarms and their interpretations. To return to the top
level menu, operate the Page key.
A further operation of the scroll button displays a Help Information page, giving the reason for the highlighted alarm.
Operate the scroll button again to return to the system alarm display.
Page 16
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11

MESSAGE SUMMARY
Operating the scroll key whilst the Message summary field is highlighted displays the10 most recent messages.
Operating the scroll key whilst a message is highlighted shows the selected message in more detail (and
using the up/down keys allows the other messages to be scrolled through). Whilst in this mode, operating
the scroll key again, allows the user to choose to jump to the messages location in trend history mode (section 3.5) or to return to the summary page.
By default, the interface is set up such that:
1. all message types are included
2. the up and down arrow keys cause the highlighted selection to move up or down by one message at a
time.
Message Summary (All Messages)
9/47
20/11/09 08:06:37 Inactive: Ch1(Al1)

20/11/09 08:06:29 Active: Ch2(Al1)
20/11/09 08:06:22 Active: Ch1(Al1)
20/11/09 08:06:19 Inactive: Ch2(Al2)
20/11/09 08:06:18 Inactive: Ch1(Al2)
20/11/09 08:06:09 Inactive: Ch2(Al1)
20/11/09 08:06:01 Active: Ch1(Al2)
20/11/09 08:05:59 Active: Ch2(Al1)
20/11/09 08:05:22 Battery flat less than 5% re
20/11/09 08:05:22 Power up
20/11/09 08:05:22
Battery flat less than 5% remaining

Go to?
Summary
History
To Trend History
display (section 3.5)
All Messages
Refresh
Exit Messages
Use scroll button to scroll through All Messages,

System, Alarm and Power Up. Use page button
to confirm selection.
Use scroll button to return to refreshed Message
Summary page.
Use the scroll or page button to return to the top
level menu.
Figure 3.3.3c Message summary features
MESSAGE FILTERS
All Messages
System
Alarm
Power up
Login/out
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
Causes all messages to be displayed on the screen.

Shows only system alarms
Shows only channel alarms
Shows only power up messages
Limits the display to Log in and Log out events.
Page 17

DISPLAY MODE SELECTION
Use the up/down arrow buttons to highlight the required display mode.
Once the required display mode is highlighted, operation of the scroll
button causes the recorder to leave the Go to View menu and to display
channel values in the selected mode. See section 3.4 for a description of
the various display modes.
Alternatively the up and down arrow buttons can be used from any of the
display modes to cycle through the available modes in the order listed in
the figure.
Notes:
1. If an option (e.g. Steriliser) is not fitted, its display mode is not
available for selection.
2. Some display modes must be enabled in Instrument.Display
configuration (section 4.1.3) before they become available.
3.3.4 History
This top level menu item allows the user to switch from real-time trending
to review mode, where channel values, messages, alarm triggers etc. can
be viewed back as far as the last significant configuration change. History
mode is fully discussed in section 3.5.
Alarm Summary
System Alarms
Message Summary
Vertical Trend
Horizontal Trend
Vertical Bargraph
Horizontal Bargraph
Numeric
Alarm Panel
Control
Control (Dual Loop)
Cascde
Programmer
Steriliser
Promote List
Modbus Master
EtherNet/IP
3.3.5 Faceplate Cycling on/off

For the purposes of this document the channel whose faceplate is currently displayed and whose pen symbol is visible is called the Active channel.
By default, the recorder scrolls through all the channels in the display group, with each channel becoming
the active channel in turn. This top level menu Faceplate Cycling item allows the user to inhibit this scrolling
action such that the currently active channel remains active permanently, or until a manual scroll is performed using the scroll button (or until Faceplate Cycling is re-enabled).
Faceplate Cycling is highlighted by using the up/down arrow buttons. Once highlighted, the status can be
changed from On to Off or vice-versa using the scroll button. Operation of the Page button returns the
user to the trend display.
3.3.6 Operator Notes

This area allows up to 10 notes to be created when logged in as Engineer, using either the text entry techniques described in section 3.6, or iTools described in section 6. Once logged out, operating the scroll button whilst a note is highlighted calls a selection box allowing the user either to send that note to the chart,
or to write a Custom Note.
CUSTOM NOTE
The Custom Note is written using the text entry techniques described in section 3.6. Once the note is complete, operation of the page button calls a confirmation display. The down arrow is used to highlight Yes,
and when the scroll key is then operated, the message is sent to the chart. This custom message is not retained for further use, so if it is required on a regular basis, it is suggested that one of the Operator Notes 1
to 10 be configured (Engineer access level required) so that it may be used instead.
Note: Each note can contain up to 100 characters.
3.3.7 Demand Archiving

This allows a user, with a high enough access level, to archive a selected portion of the recorder history, either to a memory stick plugged into the USB port at the rear of the recorder (Local Archiving), or to a pc, by
means of the FTP protocol (Remote Archiving). The archived data remains in the flash memory of the instrument. When the flash memory is full, new data causes the oldest file(s) to be discarded.
The up and down arrow keys are used to navigate to the required field.
Page 18
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
3.3.7 DEMAND ARCHIVING (Cont.)

ARCHIVE MENU
Demand Archiving
Archive To USB
Archive None
Suspend Schedule No
Cancel All No
Status Complete
Last Archive 02/11/2011 11:37:09
Demand Archiving
Archive To FTP Server
Archive None
Cancel All No
Pri Status Complete
Sec Status Connecting
Last Archive 02/11/2011 11:37:09
Figure 3.3.7 Demand Archiving menu (Local Archiving on left; Remote Archiving on right)
Archive To
With this item highlighted, the scroll button and the up/down arrows can be used to select USB or FTP Server.
For USB, the archive will be made to the rear USB memory stick. For FTP Server the
archive will be made to the Primary or Secondary server (configured in the Network.Archive area of configuration described in section 4.2.2). For more details about remote
archiving, see Remote archiving, below.
Archive
In a similar way, select the archive period:
None: No archiving to take place. (Not editable when logged out)
Last Hour: Archives all files created within the last 60 minutes.
Last Day: Archive all files created in the last 24 hours.
Last Week: Archives all files created in the past seven days.
Last Month: Archives all files created in the past 31 days.
Archive All: Archives all the files in the recorders history.
Bring To Date: Archives all files created or updated since the Last Archive date and
time.
Suspend Schedule When set to Yes, automatic (scheduled) archiving is stopped, once the transfer of the
current file is complete. Suspend Schedule must be set to No again, to restart the suspended archive. Suspend can be used to allow the memory stick to be removed and
re-fitted safely.
Cancel All
When set to Yes, this cancels USB archiving activity immediately, or cancels FTP archiving once transfer of the current file (if any) is complete.
Last Archive
Shows the date and time at which the last archive (demand or automatic) was attempted. If a demand archive is requested, or is in operation when an automatic archive is
triggered, the automatic archive takes precedence.
Status
For Archive to USB only
Complete means that no archiving is currently taking place.
Transferring indicates that an archiving is in progress. Accompanied by an animated
circular display.
Suspended means that archiving has been suspended as requested.
PriStatus
For Archive to FTP Server only, this shows the transfer status between the instrument
and the primary host computer.
SecStatus
For Archive to FTP Server only, this shows the transfer status between the instrument
and the secondary host computer.
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
Page 19
3.3.7 DEMAND ARCHIVING (Cont.)

FTP SERVER ARCHIVING
This allows the archiving of recorder files to a remote computer via the RJ45 type connector at the rear of
the recorder, either directly or via a network.
In order to carry out a successful transfer:
1. Details of the remote host must be entered in the Network.Archive area of configuration (section
4.2.2).
2. The remote computer must be set up as an FTP server. Help from the users IT department may be
necessary in order to achieve this. Appendix C, Section C2 to this manual suggests one way, using
Filezilla.
3. The remote computer must also be set up to respond to pings. This is because the instrument pings
the host whilst establishing connection, and if it does not receive a response the archive attempt fails.
When accessing files using Microsoft Internet Explorer, the address (URL) field can be in one of two formats:
1. ftp://<instrument IP address>. This allows a user to log in as the anonymous user (if the recorder has
any account with the user name set to anonymous with a blank password.
2. ftp://<user name>:<password>@<instrument IP address> to log in as a specific user.
For IE5 users, Microsoft Internet Explorer displays, by default, history files only. To quit the history folder,
either uncheck the Tools/Internet Options/Advanced/Browsing/Enable folder view for FTP sites option, or
check the Tools/Internet Options/Advanced/Browsing/Use Web based FTP option.
REVIEW SOFTWARE
Review is a proprietary software package which allows the user to extract archive data from one or more
suitable instruments* and to present this data on a host computer, as if on a chart, or as a spreadsheet. The
host computer must be set up as an ftp server (see Appendix C section C2 for a description of one way of
doing this).
As described in the Review help system, Review allows the user to set up a regular transfer of data (using
ftp) from connected instruments into a database on the pc, and then from this database to the chart or
spreadsheet. The chart/spreadsheet can be configured to include one or more points from one or all connected instruments (where a point is an umbrella term for channel, totaliser, counter etc.).
It is also possible to archive instrument history files to a memory stick, Compact Flash card etc. (depending
on instrument type) and to use this to transfer the data to the pc.
Each type of instrument has its own remote user name and password configuration - for this instrument, the
user name and password are both history and they are not editable.
*Suitable instruments are connected instruments, the archive files of which have the suffix .uhh.
3.3.8 Login
Login allows the user to enter a password in order to gain access to areas of the units configuration which
are not available when the user is logged out.
LOGGED OUT ACCESS LEVEL
Logged out mode allows the user to select viewing mode, to view history, to view alarms, to toggle faceplate
cycling on and off, to send notes, to suspend/resume USB archiving and to access the login process.
OPERATOR ACCESS LEVEL
In addition to the logged out features, Operator access level allows the user to acknowledge alarms, to edit
notes and to perform demand archive operations.
By default, no password is required in order to enter Operator level, but a password can be set either at Supervisor level or at Engineer level.
Page 20
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
3.3.8 LOGIN (Cont.)

SUPERVISOR ACCESS LEVEL
In addition to the logged out level function, this access level allows the user to view the recorders configuration, and to edit some values (such as alarm thresholds). By default, there is no password required to enter
Supervisor level, but a password can be set in the Instrument area of configuration, either at Supervisor level
or at Engineer level.
ENGINEER ACCESS LEVEL
This allows full access to all areas of the recorder configuration. The default password is 100, but this can be
edited in the Instrument area of configuration (section 4.1.5).
Note: recording is stopped for as long as the user is logged in at Engineer level,
even if the recorder is not being configured. This is indicated by the Record icon at
the bottom left corner of the process value display screen being replaced by the
Configuration (wrench) icon.
Record icon
Configuration
icon
LOGIN PROCEDURE
From the top level menu, use the up or down arrow keys as often as necessary in order to highlight Login,
and then operate the Scroll key to produce the Access Logged out display.
Note: this procedure describes how to login to an access level with a password associated with it.
For non-password protected logins, the user needs only to select the required access level, and
press the scroll key.
To log in as Engineer
(password = 100):
Access Logged out
1.
Operate the up
arrow key three
times, to display
Engineer.
Password
Access Operator
Access Supervisor
2.
Press the scroll

key to call the
alpha keyboard,
with the letter q
highlighted.
Access Engineer
Access Engineer
Password
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Use the down

arrow key three
times to highlight
Numeric.
Operate the scroll key to display the numeric keyboard
(numeral 1 highlighted.)
Operate the scroll key to enter 1, then use the up arrow
key nine times to highlight numeral 0 and use the scroll
key twice to enter 0 0, completing the password of 100.
Use the Page key to call the confirmation display.
Password
Accept changes
Cancel
No
Yes
If the password entry is as required, use the up arrow twice (or the down arrow once) to highlight the
word Yes and operate the scroll key to confirm. The top level configuration menu appears. Otherwise, Cancel can be used to clear the entry in order to start again, or No can be used to quit login.
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
Page 21
3.4 DISPLAY MODES

The following subsections describe the various display modes available to the user. By default, the Home
display mode is Vertical Trend, but this can be edited as a part of Instrument.Display configuration. This
configuration area also allows the user to disable one or more display modes should they not be required.
The current display mode can be chosen either by using the top level menu Go to View item or, from any
display mode, by scrolling through the enabled modes using the up or down arrow button.
Details of the various display modes are to be found in the following subsections:
Vertical trend ..................section 3.4.1
Horizontal trend .............section 3.4.2
Vertical bargraph ...........section 3.4.3
Horizontal bargraph ......section 3.4.4
Numeric ..........................section 3.4.5
Alarm panel ....................section 3.4.6
Control loop 1/2 ............section 3.4.7
Cascade..............................................section 3.4.8
Programmer (inc. future trend) .......section 3.4.9
Steriliser..............................................section 3.4.10
Promote list........................................section 3.4.11
Modbus Master .................................section 3.4.12
EtherNet/IP ........................................Section 3.4.13
3.4.1 Vertical trend

In this mode, channel values are traced as though on a chart rolling downwards (i.e with the latest data at the
top). The chart speed, and the number of major divisions are configured in the Group.Trend area of configuration (section 4.3.1). By default, the chart background is black, but this can be changed to white or grey
in the Instrument Display area of configuration (section 4.1.3).
Faceplate
Current point name
Current point scale
Channel 1
6.23V
Current point value
Current trace pen

Time/date stamp
Recording symbol
Inst name
Current time/date
Instrument name
Status icons
Figure 3.4 Vertical trend mode display elements
One of the channels is said to be the current or scale channel. This channel is identified by its pen icon
being displayed, and by the channel descriptor, dynamic value and its scale being displayed on a faceplate
across the width of the display, above the chart.
Each channel in the Group becomes the current channel in turn, for approximately five seconds -i.e. the
channels are cycled through, starting with the lowest numbered channel. Once the final channel in the
Group has ben displayed for five seconds, the first channel is returned-to and the process repeats. This
scrolling behaviour can be enabled/disabled from the top level menu Faceplate Cycling (Off) item described in section 3.3.5.
The scroll button can be used to cycle through the channels manually in both Faceplate cycle on and off
modes.
Use of the up arrow button causes the next enabled display mode to be entered (default = horizontal trend).
The page key calls the top level menu.
Page 22
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
3.4.2 Horizontal Trend mode

This view is similar to the vertical trend mode described in section 3.4.1 above, except that the traces are
produced horizontally rather than vertically. Initially, as each channel appears, its scale appears at the left
edge of the display (as shown below), but in order to show the maximum amount of trend data, the scale is
overwritten after a few seconds.
Channel 1
6.23V
By default, after a few seconds, the

chart expands leftwards to hide
the scale. This feature can be disabled in the Instrument.Display area
of configuration (section 4.1.3,
H.Trend scaling) so that the scale is
permanently on display.
Inst name
Figure 3.4.2 Horizontal trend display mode
Note: Timestamps appear to the right of the gridline to which they relate
Use of the up arrow button causes the next enabled display mode to be entered (default = vertical bargraph). Use of the page key calls the top level menu.
3.4.3 Vertical Bargraph mode

This display mode shows the channel values as a histogram. Absolute alarm threshold values appear as lines
across the bars, grey if the alarm is not triggered; red if the alarm is triggered. Alarm symbols appear for
active alarms.
Bargraph widths for four to six channels divide the width of the display screen equally between them. For
one and two channels, the width is fixed, and the bars are centred on the screen. Figure 3.4.3 shows some
examples (not to the same scale).
Channel 1
35.40V
Full scale value

Active alarm symbol
2 channels
Alarm threshold (active)

Alarm threshold (non-active)
1 channel
Zero value
Inst name
Figure 3.4.3 Vertical bargraph display mode
Use of the up arrow button causes the next enabled display mode to be entered (default = horizontal bargraph). Use of the page key calls the top level menu.
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
Page 23
3.4.4 Horizontal Bargraph mode

Similar to the Vertical bargraph mode described in section 3.4.3, above, but includes channel descriptors.
Furnace 1 temp 12
Furnace 1 temp 12
2 channels
Channel 2
The scroll button toggles
the text between point
descriptor (as shown) and
point value.
Channel 2
Channel 3
Channel 4
VirtualChan 1
Furnace 1 temp 12
1 channel
VirtualChan 2
Inst name
Figure 3.4.4 Horizontal bargraph mode
Use of the up arrow button causes the next enabled display mode to be entered (default = numeric).
Use of the page key calls the top level menu.
3.4.5 Numeric mode

Shows the enabled channels values along with their descriptors and with indications of the type(s) of alarm
configured for each channel.
Alarm type indication
(table 3.2.1)
Furnace 1 temp 12
Channel 4
Channel 2
VirtualChan 1
Channel 3
VirtualChan 2
Figure 3.4.5a Numeric display mode (six enabled channels)
The figure above shows an example where the Trend group contains six channels. Figure 3.4.5b shows how
the display appears for trend groups with fewer than six channels configured
6 channels
5 channels
4 channels
3 channels
2 channels
1 channel
Figure 3.4.5b Display layout for different numbers of channels
The up arrow button returns to the vertical trend display mode; the page key calls the top level menu.
Page 24
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
3.4.6 Alarm panel

This display appears only if enabled in the Instrument Display configuration (section 4.1.3) Alarm panel
mode shows current value and alarm status for each channel enabled in the Trend Group. The status is
shown in two ways, by the colour of the relevant bar, and by the alarm status indicators.
Alarm type indication (table 3.2.1)
Red bar
Alarm 2 is active, or alarm 1
and alarm 2 are both active.
Amber bar
Alarm 1 is active for this
channel, but not alarm 2.
Green bar
Neither alarm 1 nor alarm two
active for this channel.
Inst name
Figure 3.4.6a Alarm panel display (six channels)
The figure above shows an example where the Trend group contains six channels. Figure 3.4.6b shows how
the display appears for trend groups with fewer than six channels configured.
6 channels
5 channels
4 channels
3 channels
2 channels
1 channel
Figure 3.4.6b Alarm panel display layouts for trend groups with fewer than six channels
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
Page 25
3.4.7 Control Loop1/Loop2

These displays appear only if the controller option is enabled (section 4.1.6).
The loop display modes are interactive, in that the setpoint, the Auto/Manual mode and the Manual Output
value can be edited from the user interface. Full configuration is carried out in the Loop setup menus (section 4.6) and a fuller description of control loops is to be found as Appendix B to this manual.
Figure 3.4.7 depicts a single loop display and the dual loop display. The up and down arrow keys are used
as normal to scroll through Loop1, Loop2 and Dual loop pages.
Loop 1
Loop 1
C
SP1
Mode Manual
Man Op
PV
WSP
SP1
SP1
Mode Manual
WSP
WSP
Loop 2
Working Output
SP
PV
PV
Mode Manual
Man Op
PV
WSP
Man Op
Inst name
Inst name
Figure 3.4.7 Loop displays
Note: The colours associated with the loops are those of the channels to which they are wired.
EDITING TECHNIQUES
1.
2.
With the loop page on display, operate the Scroll key. This highlights the first
editable item (SP1). The scroll order includes both loop1 and loop 2 parameters
in the dual loop display.
Use the up and down arrow keys to select the required field for editing. When the
required field is highlighted, operate the scroll key again, to enter edit mode.
SP1
Mode Manual
Man Op
SP1
Mode Manual
Man Op
SP1
Mode Manual
Man Op
3.
Use the up/down arrows to edit the current setting.

SP1
Mode Auto
Man Op
4.
Operate the scroll key to confirm the edit.
SP1
Mode Auto
5.
Select a further parameter for editing, or operate the page key to return to normal
operation.
Man Op
Note: Edit permissions for Setpoint and Auto/Manual are set in the Loop Setup
configuration menu (section 4.6.2).
Page 26
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
3.4.8 Cascade display mode

This display mode appears only if Cascade has been enabled in the Instrument.Display area of configuration (section 4.1.3). See also Advanced Loop configuration (section 4.7)
Master
Mode Cascade
Sp1
PV
WSP
Slave
SP
Man.OP
PV
WSP
Inst name
Figure 3.4.8a Cascade display mode
Operating the scroll button highlights the Master Mode field. Operating the scroll button again, enters edit
mode allowing the user to use the up/down arrow buttons to scroll through the available modes. Once the
required mode appears, a further operation of the scroll button confirms the entry and quits edit mode.
Once out of edit mode, the down arrow key can be used to select Master SP1, Slave SP and Slave Man
OP. The Mode selected determines how many of these items are editable by the operator.
Mode
Cascade: The master loop is in auto mode and provides the slave setpoint. Changing
modes causes the slave to switch to the local slave setpoint.
Slave: A simple single loop controlling with a local setpoint.
Manual: Provides a single manual % power output.
SP1
Setpoint 1 is the primary setpoint of the controller. If the controller is in automatic control mode, then the difference between the setpoint and the process variable (PV) is
continuously monitored by the control algorithm. The difference between the two is
used to produce an output calculated to bring the PV to the setpoint as quickly as possible without causing overshoot.
SP
The slave setpoint, either local (Manual or Slave mode) in which case it can be edited,
or supplied by the master loop (Cascade mode), in which case it is not editable.
Man.OP
The percentage output power to be applied when in Manual mode (100% = full on; 0%
= off).
Note: The default loop names (Master and Slave) can be replaced by user-entered strings of up
to 10 characters in Advanced Loop Setup configuration (section 4.7.2).
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
Page 27
3.4.9 Programmer display mode

Program edit
Program status
Program Name (Segment name)
PV
Ramp
PV
PSP
PSP
Events:
Mode Run
Ch1 PSP 123.2
Ch1 TSP 140.0
PSP
Status: Running
Status: Running
Seg Time Left 00:00:44
Ch1 Rate 1
00:00:30
Program
progress
PV
00:02:12
Segment
progress
Program time
remaining
Mode Run
Ch1 PSP 123.2
Ch1 TSP 140.0
Events:
Seg Time Left 00:01:05
Ch2 PSP 12.7
CH2 TSP 13.0
00:01:30
00:03:12
Double channel
Single channel
Figure 3.4.9a Programmer displays (typical)
This display mode (if enabled - see section 4.1.3) allows the user to monitor the progress of a single or dualchannel setpoint program, and if logged-in as Operator*, to reset or run the program. The program itself
is created in the Program edit page (described below) and in Programmer configuration (section 4.8 or
iTools).
*Note: Operator is the default access level - to edit, see Prog Mode Access in section 4.8.3)
The displays contain the following features:
Program name
This is the name of the loaded program. If the program has been modified since being
saved, an asterisk (*) appears after the name. Default background colour shown. This
colour changes to that assigned to the input channel when this is configured.
Segment name
This is the name of the current segment. If not named in Segment configuration, then
the segment number appears instead.
Program status
At the top right hand corner of the display, this can be any one of the following:
The program is running (or ran last time) without any PV Alarm events or user intervention.
The user has intervened in the running of the program, by placing it in hold or reset, or by advancing a segment, or by adjusting a duration, target setpoint, ramp rate
or time-to-target value.
A PV Alarm Event has activated. A PV Alarm Event is an absolute high/low or a
deviation alarm on the PV input.
There is no program loaded, or if a program is loaded, it has not yet run.
Program edit
This icon appears for users with appropriate access permissions, to indicate that
setpoint programs can be configured (as described in Program edit, below).
Segment type
For single channel displays, this indicates the type of segment currently being run:
Dwell. The segment value remains constant for the duration of the dwell period.
End (dwell). Displayed on completion of the program. The segment value remains
at the final value until reset
End (reset). Displayed on completion of the program. The program resets.
Ramp. The segment value ramps at a fixed rate or over a fixed period to the Target
setpoint. Ramp up icon shown; ramp down is similar but inverted.
Step. The segment value switches immediately to the new Target setpoint. Step
down shown; step up similar but inverted.
Wait. The segment value remains constant until the wait criteria are satisfied.
Page 28
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
3.4.9 PROGRAMMER DISPLAY MODE (cont.)

PV
Ch1(2)PSP
The current process value of the signal wired to Ch1(2) PV Input.

This is the output setpoint from the programmer for the channel. In reset this value
tracks the configured servo parameter.
Ch1(2)TSP
The channel target setpoint. The target set-point may be edited while the program is
in hold (in such cases, for ramp rate segments the time remaining is recalculated.
Events
Up to eight events can be configured in the Program Edit page. Any one or more of
these events may be deemed to be active for the duration of each individual segment.
Mode
Shows the current run mode of the program. If the user has the correct access level, the
mode can be set to hold, reset etc. by using the scroll key twice (first to highlight the
run mode, then again to enter edit mode) and then using the up/down arrow keys to
select the required mode. Run, reset, hold etc. can also be selected by inputs from other parameters, switch inputs etc.
Status
Shows the status of the current segment.
Ch1 Rate
The channel 1 rate-of-change of segment value for Rate ramp segments.
Ch1 Time
Shows the channel 1 duration configured for the segment to ramp, dwell etc. for Time
ramp segments. For two-channel programs, see the note below.
Seg Time Left
Shows the time that the segment has to run before completion.
Program progress The numerals show program elapsed time, and the bar gives an indication of progress
so far. For two-channel programs, see the note below.
Segment progress For each segment as it runs, this gives a visual indication of the proportion of total segment time which has elapsed so far. For two-channel programs, see the note below.
Program time remaining
Shows the time remaining until the program completes. For two-channel programs, see
the note below.
Note: For two-channel programs, in Hold mode, the program progress, segment progress and
program time remaining areas of the display are replaced by Ch1 Time and Ch2 Time, as shown
below.
PV
PV
PSP
PSP
Status: Holding
Mode
Ch1 PSP
Ch1 TSP
Ch1 Time
Hold
123.2
140.0
00:00:34
Events:
Seg Time Left
Ch2 PSP
CH2 TSP
Ch2 Time
00:01:05
12.7
13.0
00:00:49
Figure 3.4.9b two channel program in Hold mode
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
Page 29

PROGRAM RUN/RESET/HOLD
Programs can be controlled by users with the correct access level (defined in Programmer configuration section 4.24). The display page is placed in edit mode by operation of the scroll key (Mode highlights). A
second operation of the scroll key followed by operation of the up/down arrows allows the user to select
Run, Hold or Reset. A further operation of the scroll key initiates the selected action.
Program
Name
Reset
14.3
Reset
15.7
PV
Ramp
Hold appears only Hold

if the program status is Running. 18.9
PSP
Events
Mode Reset
Ch1 PSP 14.3
Status: Reset
Run
17.3
Figure 3.4.9c Setting the Mode
Notes:
1. These functions can also be carried out by wiring relevant inputs to the Run, Hold or Reset parameters in Programmer configuration (section 4.8).
2. The user must have either Logged off, Operator or Supervisor level access as defined in Prog
Mode Access in the Programmer.Setup menu described in section 4.8.3 . The program cannot
run if the unit is logged into at Engineer level.
Page 30
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11

PROGRAM EDITING
The program edit page is accessed by operating the scroll button once to highlight the Mode, then using
the up arrow key to highlight the page symbol at the top right hand corner of the display and then the scroll
button again to enter the program editor.
Ramp
Events:
Mode Reset
Ch1 PSP 14.3
Status: Reset
By default, Program Edit is available only to users

with Supervisor or Engineer level access. The required access level can be edited in Programmer.Set Up configuration as described in section
4.8.3.
Program Edit
Operation Select ...
Status Success
Program Program Name

Holdback Style Program
Ch1 Holdback High
Ramp
Ch1 Holdback Val 0.0 V
Events:
Mode Reset
Ch1 PSP 14.3
Ch2 Holdback Off
Status: Reset
Ramp Style Time

Ch1 Ramp Units Per Second
Ch2 Ramp Units Per Minute
Segment Number 1
Segment Name Heat Init
Figure 3.4.9d Access to the program editor
As can be seen from the figure above, the initial Program Edit page is divided into two areas - the top part
contains program details; the lower part (figure 3.4.9f) contains individual segment details. The editable
items that appear in the program details area depend on the features enabled in the Programmer Features
configuration menu (section 4.8.1).
Note: Access to some program operations is restricted to users with the correct access level, as
defined in the Prog Mode Access, the Prog Edit Access and the Prog Store Access parameters in
the Programmer.Set Up area of configuration described in section 4.8.3. Access to some items also
depends on whether or not the program is running.
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
Page 31

PROGRAM DETAILS
Operation
This allows the user to select one of the following (see also Program Store, below):
Load. Opens the program store and allows the user to select a program to be loaded.
The program must have the same number of channels as defined in Programmer.Set
Up (section 4.8.3).
Store. Allows the current program to be saved to the internal program drive.
Delete. Allows the selected program to be deleted.
Delete All. Deletes all programs.
Copy. Copies the selected program for pasting either from the internal drive to the
USB device, or vice-versa.
Copy All. As above, for Copy, but copies all the programs in the selected directory.
Note: If a Store, Copy or Copy All operation would result in there being a total of more than 100
program files in the internal drive, the operation fails and an error message is displayed.
Status
Program
Holdback Style
Ch1 Holdback
Ch1 Holdback value

Ch2 Holdback
Ch2 Holdback value
Ramp Style
Ch1 Ramp Units

Ch2 Ramp Units
Page 32
Success. Previous operation was successful.

Failed. Previous operation failed.
Loading. The program is loading.
Copying. The program copy process is underway.
Deleting. The relevant program is being deleted.
The name of the program currently loaded.
Appears only if Holdback is enabled in the Programmer Features configuration (section 4.8.1). See also Holdback, below.
Program: Holdback applies to all appropriate segments.
Per Segment: Holdback enabled on a segment by segment basis as described in Segment configuration below.
Appears only if Holdback Style (above) is set to Program.
Off: Holdback is disabled
Low: Holdback is entered when PV < (PSP - Holdback Value)
High: Holdback is entered when PV > (PSP + Holdback Value)
Band: Holdback is entered when PV < (PSP - Holdback Value) or PV > (PSP + Holdback
Value)
The value to be used in triggering holdback.
As for Ch1 Holdback, above but for channel 2. Appears only if Channels is set to 2 in
Programmer Set Up configuration (section 4.8.3).
As for Ch1 Holdback value, above, but for channel 2. Appears only if Channels is set to
2 in Programmer Set Up configuration (section 4.8.3).
Ramp style applies to all ramp segments in the program. Ramp Style can be edited only
when the program is in Reset mode. Setpoints, rates, times etc. are set in the individual
segment configurations
Rate. A Ramp Rate segment is specified by a target set-point and the rate at which to
ascend/descend to that set-point.
Time. A Ramp Time segment is specified by a target set-point and a time in which to
achieve that set-point.
Select Per Second, Per Minute or Per Hour for ramp timing units. Ramp Units can be
edited only when the program is in Reset mode.
As for Ch1 Ramp Units above. Appears only for two channel programs and allows different ramp units to be selected for the two channels, if required. Ramp Units can be
edited only when the program is in Reset mode.
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11

PROGRAM DETAILS (Cont.)
HOLDBACK
Holdback pauses the program (freezes the Programmer setpoint (PSP) and the time remaining parameters)
if the difference between the Process value (PV) and the PSP exceeds a user-specified amount (Holdback value). The program remains paused until the PV returns to within the specified deviation.
In ramp or step segments, holdback indicates that the PV is lagging the SP by more than the specified
amount and that the program is waiting for the process to catch up. In a dwell segment, holdback is used
to guarantee that a work piece stays at set-point within a specified tolerance for the specified dwell duration.
Holdback applied
Holdback
applied
Holdback
released
PV
PSP
PSP-Holdback value
Holdback released
Figure 3.4.9e Holdback
SEGMENT CONFIGURATION
Program Edit
Segment Number 1
Segment Name Heat init
Type Ramp
Ch1TSP 43.358 C
Ch1 Time 00:10:30
Ch1 Holdback High
Ch1 Holdback Val 5.0 C
Ch1 PVEvent Abs High
Ch1 PVEvent Val 58 C
Ch1 User Val 40.0
Ch2TSP 19.5 C
Ch2 Time 00:01:00
Ch2 User val 33.00
Event 1
Event 2
Figure 3.4.9f Segment configuration
Segment Number
Segment Name
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
Select the relevant segment for configuration.

Enter a segment name of up to 20 characters. This name will be truncated on the display page if it, together with the program name, are too long to fit the width of the display area.
Page 33

SEGMENT CONFIGURATION (Cont.)
Type
Select a segment type. Default is End.
Ramp. For any program, Ramp segments can be either Ramp Rate segments or Ramp
Time segments according to the Ramp Style setting described above. See also
Ch1(2) Time or Ch1(2) Rate, below.
Dwell. The setpoint is maintained at its current value for the period defined in Duration
(see below).
Step. A step segment allows a step change to be entered for the target set-points Ch1
TSP and Ch2 TSP.
Wait. A wait segment causes the program to wait for a certain event to occur before
continuing. See Wait For, below.
Go Back. A Go Back segment allows a specifiable number of iterations to be performed
of a group of segments. This could be used, for example, to cycle an entire program
by having a Go Back segment immediately before the end segment and specifying segment 1 as the Go Back To point. Setting Cycles to Continuous causes the program
to loop indefinitely, until interrupted by the user. Nested loops are not permitted i.e.
Go Back is not available as a segment type for segments inside an existing GoBack
loop.
End. The final segment of a program allows the user to select Dwell or Reset as the
action to be taken at the end of the program (see End Type, below)
Ch1(2) TSP
Target setpoint. The value that Ramp or Step segments seek to attain, for channel 1(2).
Ch1(2) Rate
For Ramp Rate segments, this specifies the speed at which the process value ramps towards the target, for Channel 1(2). The ramp units (per second, per minute, per hour)
are set in Ch1(2) ramp units described above.
Ch1(2) Time
For Ramp Time segments, this allows the user to specify the time to be taken by the segment for the process value to reach the target.
Duration
For Dwell segments, this allows the entry of the time for which the segment dwells.
Go Back To
For Go Back segments, this defines the number of the segment to which the program
is to return.
Cycles
The number of times the Go Back instruction is to be carried out. If set to Continuous,
the program continues until the user intervenes to stop it.
End Type
Allows the user to select the action to be taken at the end of the program:
Dwell: the set-point is maintained indefinitely and event outputs remain at their configured state.
Reset: the set-point reverts to the value used by the control loop before the program
was started and the event outputs return to their default states.
Wait For
Digital High: Wait segments can be configured to wait for Wait Digital to go high before allowing the program to continue.
Analog 1(2): The segment waits for Wait Analog1(2) to meet an Absolute High or Low,
or Deviation High or Low condition before allowing the program to continue.
Analog Both: As Analog 1(2) above, but waits for both Channels conditions to be true
before continuing.
Note: Wait Digital, Wait Analog 1 and Wait Analog 2 parameters are configured in the Programmer.Set Up menu described in section 4.8.3.
Ch1 Wait
Select Abs High, Abs Low, Dev High or Dev Low as the wait criterion for channel 1.
Appears only if Wait For (above) is set to Analog 1 or Analog Both.
Ch2 Wait
Select Abs High, Abs Low, Dev High or Dev Low as the wait criterion for channel 2.
Appears only if Wait For (above) is set to Analog 2 or Analog Both.
Ch1(2) Wait Val
Enter the trigger value for Ch1(2) Wait
Ch1(2) Holdback
Select Off, Low, High, or Band (see description in Program details above).
Ch1(2) Holdback Val The value to be used in triggering holdback.
Page 34
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11

Ch1(2) PV Event
Appear only if PV Events have been enabled in the Programmer Features menu (section 4.8.1). A PV Event (an analogue alarm on the channel PV) is available for each channel in every segment (excluding Wait and Go Back segment types). The following PV
Events are supported:
Off: The PV Event is disabled
Abs High: The event is triggered when the channel PV exceeds PVEvent Val for the relevant channel.
Abs Low: Triggered when the channel PV becomes less than PVEvent Val for the relevant channel.
Dev High: This event is triggered when the channel PV exceeds (PSP + PVEvent Val) for
the relevant channel
Dev Low: Triggered when the channel PV becomes less than (PSP - PVEvent Val) for the
relevant channel.
Dev Band - This event is triggered when the channel PV differs from the PSP by more
than the configured deviation value (either above or below)
In the following example, in segment 1 Ch1 PV Event has been configured as Dev Band
and in segment 2 it has been configured as an Abs low:
Segment 1
Segment 2
PSP
PV
PVEvent Val
= PV Event Val Segment 1
= PV Event Val Segment 2
On
Off
PV Event
Figure 3.4.9g PV Events
Ch1 PVEvent Val

Ch2 PVEvent Val
Ch1 (2) Event Use
Ch1 (2) User Val
Event 1 to 8
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
Appears only if Ch1 PVEvent is not Off. Sets the level at which Ch1 PV Event becomes
active.
Appears only if Ch2 PVEvent is not Off and if Channels is set to 2 in Programmer Set
Up configuration (section 4.8.3). Sets the level at which Ch2 PV Event becomes active.
When PV events become active, they can be used either to Trigger a secondary process
or as a simple analogue alarm on the PV input. Appears only if the relevant PV Event
parameter is not set to Off.
Specifies the User Value for this segment, for channel 1(2). Appears only if User Value
has been enabled in the Programmer Features menu (section 4.8.1).
The example below (from iTools) shows this parameter wired to the trigger 1 input of
the Custom Messages block, so that, if a User value >0 is entered, then every time the
segment runs, Custom message 1 is generated.
The number of Events available (Max Events) is defined in Programmer Set Up configuration (section 4.8.3). Enabling an event causes the relevant indicator on the display
page to be illuminated for the duration of the segment. As with User Val, above,
Events can be wired to the inputs of other parameters if required.
Page 35

Figure 3.4.9h iTools example showing Ch1 UserVal being used to trigger custom message 1.
FUTURE TREND DISPLAY MODE

If enabled in Instrument.Display configuration (section 4.1.3), this allows the user to view the actual value of
the PSP alongside the expected value, so the two can be compared to see how the process is performing.
Future trend is an enhancement of the horizontal trend mode, with the display being divided into two parts,
with the instantaneous current value located at the divide, with past trends to the left and the next few program segments to come, to the right.
Notes:
1. For the future trend mode to appear, the programmer must be wired to the loop or advanced
loop feature.
2. Both historic and future trends move from right to left with the present anchored at the screen
centre.
3. The amount of history and of future trending displayed on the screen depends on the trend interval set in Group.Trend configuration (section 4.3.1)
Figure 3.4.9i shows a typical future trend display
Present
Channel 1
Past
26.23V
Future
Inst name
Figure 3.4.9i Future trend display
Page 36
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11

PROGRAM STORE
Note: The access levels required for the operations described below are configured in the Programmer Set Up menu Prog Edit Access and Prog Store Access parameters, described in section
4.8.3.
The program store allows access to the instruments local program storage area and to programs stored on
a USB memory stick (if any) and to those stored in a pc (if any), via FTP. Programs may be saved to (Stored)
or retrieved from (Loaded) from the program store, or they can be copied or deleted.
Selecting any of the program operations (except Delete All), from the Program Edit page (Engineer access
level required) opens the file explorer page. Figure 3.4.9j depicts this page, with just a couple of example
entries after a Load operation has been requested.
On entry, use the up/down arrow button to select User, USB or FTP (selection highlights yellow), then use
the scroll button to confirm. Use the up/down arrow buttons to select the required file, and then use the
scroll button again to confirm. Other operations are similar.
The file explorer supports 100 entries, which may be directories or files.
User
Kiln1.UIPZ
Symbol appears only
Kiln1 type 2.uipz
if a suitable USB
kiln2.uipz
device
is inserted
furnace1 purge.uipz
Selected file
highlighted
Figure 3.4.9j Program store display
Note: A busy icon (rotating green flash) appears whilst directory listings are being accessed.
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
Page 37
3.4.10 Steriliser display mode

This display mode appears only if the Steriliser option is fitted and if the display mode has been enabled in
the Instrument Display configuration (section 4.1.3) Steriliser configuration parameters are to be found in
section 4.16
Cycle status
Cycle: 123
Cycle number
Band High
Input 1
Input 2
Input 3
Input 4
122.4C
2885mB
Band Low (red)

Target setpoint (orange)
Current input values
120.8C
Input status beacons
Equilibration
121.6C
Remaining 00.05.00
Sterilising 00.00.00
Equilibration 00.03.00
Total Cycle 00.03.00
Note:
If any input is configured Off
(in Steriliser configuration), it
does not appear in the display,
and the other inputs occupy
the screen width equally.
Input status beacons are black
for inputs configured Off
Figure 3.4.10a Steriliser display mode (typical) (four inputs)
OPERATION
A sterilising cycle cannot be initiated whilst the unit is in Configuration (Engineer) mode.
A steriliser cycle is started by setting its relevant Start input to Yes for the duration of the cycle. The cycle
waits (status Waiting) until input 1 reaches its setpoint, at which point the cycle enters the equilibration period (status Equilibration), and remains there until all the configured inputs are valid. The cycle then enters
the sterilising period and stays in this mode until the sterilising period has expired (status Passed) or until
one of the inputs becomes invalid (status Failed) for longer than its configured Failure Dwell time.
Note: The cycle stops (status Failed) if the trigger source is removed.
TERMINOLOGY
Holding time
Equilibration time
Bands
Most operating cycles have a stage in which the load must be exposed to sterilisation
conditions for a specified length of time, known as the Holding time.
The holding time (above) is preceded by a period during which, although the sterilising
condition is present in the chamber, the load has not yet attained that temperature due
to its thermal inertia. Equilibration time is defined as the time between the attainment
of sterilisation temperature in the chamber, and the attainment of that temperature in
all parts of the load.
For steam and dry heat sterilisers, sterilisation conditions are specified by a sterilisation
temperature band, defined by a minimum acceptable temperature (known as the sterilisation temperature) and a maximum allowable temperature. A sterilisation band is
normally quoted for each steriliser type.
BEACONS
There are four input status beacons near the top right hand corner of the display, one for each input.
During equilibration, the beacons are flashing red for inputs that have not attained the Target setpoint, and
go green when the target setpoint is reached, remaining green even if the input value rises above the Band
High value The beacons revert to red if input falls below* the target setpoint.
During sterilisation, the beacons go red for any input whose value rises above Band High or falls below* setpoint for a duration exceeding the configured Failure Dwell period.
Beacons are black for inputs that are configured as Off.
* rises above for input types Falling Pressure or Fall Air Detect
Page 38
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
3.4.10 STERILISER DISPLAY MODE (Cont.)

DISPLAYED INFORMATION
Cycle
Status
Remaining
Target time
Equilibration
Sterilising
Total Cycle
Input values
A five-digit counter to indicate the total number of cycles started.

Wait start: The initial state at power up. This status remains until the first cycle is initiated
Waiting: Waiting for input 1 to reach its target setpoint. The cycle then enters Equilibration.
Equilibration: Currently in the equilibration period, during which the cycle waits until
all inputs have reached sterilisation conditions.
Sterilising: Currently in the decontamination phase
Passed: The cycle has completed successfully
Failed: The cycle has failed either through one or more inputs becoming invalid, or because the Start signal was removed.
Test cycle: A test cycle is in progress
The sterilising time remaining for the current cycle. Display field is replaced by Target
Time (below) when the cycle is not running.
The intended sterilisation time. This can be configured by operating the scroll button
twice (once to highlight the field, and again to enter edit mode), and then using the up
and/or down arrows to edit the time. Use the Scroll button again to quit edit mode, and
the page key to unhighlight the field.
Replaced by Remaining (above) when the cycle is running.
The equilibration time period for the current cycle
The time for which the load has currently been at sterilisation conditions
The elapsed time since the initiation of the current cycle. This time increments from the
time the cycle is triggered until the time the trigger is removed.
Temperature are required in C; pressure inputs in mBar. If necessary, maths channels
and user values can be used to convert from other units (see Note overleaf).
STERILISING CYCLE DIAGRAM

Figure 3.4.10b, below, shows a steriliser cycle in diagrammatic form.
Wait Start
Waiting
Equilibration
Sterilisation
Overheat
Band High
(Note 3)
Target setpoint
Equilibration starts when
input 1 reaches setpoint
Sterilisation starts when

slowest input reaches setpoint
Cycle start
Band Low
(Note 3)
Figure 3.4.10b Steriliser cycle
Notes:
1. For temperature inputs in most applications, the Setpoint value is the same as the Band Low value
For the sake of clarity, this is not as shown in the figure above.
2. For the sake of clarity all four inputs in the figure above are shown with the same Band High, Band
Low and Setpoint value. This would not be unusual for temperature units, but the pressure input
would normally have a different set of values from temperature inputs.
3. Band High and Band Low are effective only during Sterilisation phase.
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
Page 39

APPLICATION DETAILS
Figure 3.4.10c shows a typical steriliser application, with temperature and pressure signals from the sterilisation chamber being applied directly to the rear terminals of the controller/recorder, and control signals
connected from the controller to both the chamber and the controller/recorder.
Sterilisation chamber
Temperature
transducers
Pressure
transducer
nanodac
PV1
Data Flow
PV2
PV3
PV4
Start 121C/134C
Running Output
Passed Output
User wiring
Steriliser configuration parameters
Controller
I/O terminals
(figure 2.2)
Figure 3.4.10c Typical steriliser application
Analogue inputs 1 to 3 receive signals from temperature transducers (typically thermocouples) within the
chamber. These inputs are internally connected to channels 1 to 3 respectively, allowing transducer type,
ranges, alarms etc. to be configured (section 4.4). Inputs are assumed to be degrees Celsius*.
The pressure transducer is connected to channel 4 and can be configured in the same way. The input is assumed to be in milliBar. Other pressure inputs should be converted using virtual channels*.
PV1 to PV4 in the Steriliser configuration is software wired (section 7) to Ch 1 to Ch4.
Start cycle input and the Running Output and Passed Output signals are software wired to suitable DIO
terminals, for connection to the Controller.
*Note: For Fahrenheit inputs, use one virtual channel to subtract 32, and a second to divide the
result by 1.8 (where 32 and 1.8 can be configured as user values). Similar techniques should be
used to convert pressure input units if necessary.
TEST CYCLES
A Test cycle is initiated by initiating a 121C cycle and a 134C cycle simultaneously. A test cycle allows the
user to check actual performance against expected performance.
Page 40
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11

F0
F0 is a means of calculating equivalent time at sterilising temperature for temperatures below, at and above
sterilizing temperature, using the equation below.
Where:
Sterilisation time
Temp
Ts
Z
Depends on the application, typically 15 minutes at Ts = 121C

The value of the temperature measuring input.
Desired Sterilising temperature
Temperature interval representing a factor-of-10 reduction in killing efficiency. Z = 10
for steam sterilising (F0), or Z=20 for dry heat sterilising (FH). Z = 10 for thermal disinfection (A0).
To ensure that steriliser loads which contain materials with different thermal inertias are thoroughly sterilised, a number of sensors are located withing the load. The F value should be calculated using the sensor
closest to that part of the load which has the highest thermal inertia. For maximum accuracy, the temperature sensor should be calibrated and the input adjust function used to compensate for any inaccuracy found.
F0 calculation examples
For all the examples following, the following are assumed: Sterilisation time = 15 minutes; Sterilisation target temperature =121C and Z = 10.
1.
For an actual sterilising temperature of 111C
Which means that 15 minutes at 111C is equivalent to 1.5 minutes at 121C

2.
For a sterilising temperature of 121C
Which means that the sterilising temperature is ideal (by definition)

3.
For a sterilising temperature of 124C
Which means that 15 minutes at 124C is equivalent to nearly 30 minutes at 121C.

Normally sterilising temperatures would not remain constant at temperatures below or above the target value, so the above equations are illustrative only of the facts:
1 Temperatures below the target have some killing efficacy
2 Temperatures above the target value have a greater killing efficiency, so that the sterilising time can be
reduced.
In order to calculate the value dynamically, the instrument uses the equation:
where
Fvalt
Fvalt-1
T
mat
Target Temp
Z
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
= F value this iteration

= F value last time
= Iteration period (minutes)
= input temperature value this iteration
= 121C for F0, 170C for FH, 80C for A0
= 10C for F0, 20C for FH, 10C for A0
Page 41
3.4.11 Promote list

This display page allows the user to display up to 10 of the parameters that appear anywhere in the operator
interface. The parameters can be selected only by using iTools, as described below.
Notes:
1. Promote List must be enabled (in Instrument.Display configuration), before it appears in the Go
to View list.
2. There are more parameters visible in iTools than appear at the operator interface. If non-operator
interface parameters are selected for inclusion in the promote list, they do not appear.
3. If parameters which appear only in certain circumstances are selected, then they appear in the
promote list only when they appear in the Operator interface. For example, a channel PV is not
visible unless that channel is enabled (i.e. it is not Off).
PARAMETER SELECTION
1. Open iTools and scan for the instrument, (see section 6).
2. Once the instrument has been found, stop the scan. When the instrument has synchronised, click on
the Access button near the top of the display to set the unit into configuration mode (a password may
be required).
3. Click on the + sign to the left of the Instrument folder in the tree list (left-most pane) to expand the
folder. Double-click on Promote List, to display the Promote list in the main pane. The list contains 20
entries, 1 to 10 being for parameters, 11 to 20 being available to the user to add descriptors for parameters 1 to 10 respectively.
4. Expand further folders, as necessary, to access the required parameters, and click-drag these parameters into the promote list. Enter a descriptor for the parameter if the default is not as required. As each
parameter is dragged into the list, it appears in the Promote list.
5. If the parameters are modified at the operator interface, the changes are reflected in iTools, and viceversa.
6. Once all the parameters have been added, it is recommended that the Access button be used to quit
configuration mode, as otherwise it will not subsequently be possible to quit from the operator interface.
Figure 3.4.11 shows typical displays.
Promote List
Chan 1 Tmp
T/C 157A
Channel.1.Main.Units
Group.Recording.Enable
Channel.1.Alarm1.Active
Promote list (iTools)
268.34C
H2O Tmp 12
C
Yes
Yes
Promote list
(Operator interface)
Figure 3.4.11 Promote list displays.
Page 42
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
3.4.12 Modbus Master display mode

This display mode consists of two pages, as shown below.
Page one opens by default and shows the first eight parameters being read from (left pointing arrow) or written to (right pointing arrow) the relevant slave. These items are configured in the Modbus Master configuration described in section 4.9. Hidden parameters may be viewed by operating the scroll key, then using
the arrow keys to scroll through the list. A green arrow means that the item may be edited by the user when
logged in.
A pair of animated indicators in the top left-hand corner of the screen show the connection status of the
two possible slaves. A green moving streak indicates that successful communications are being carried out. A red flashing circle indicates that there is a break in the transmission line or that the slave is
switched off. A grey, non-animated display indicates that that slave has not yet been configured as a
part of the communications link (i.e it is off line).
A traffic light indicator appears to the right of each parameter. Green indicates that the parameter is being
read from or written to successfully. Orange indicates that a write of the value is pending. Red indicates that
there is an error and that no value is currently being read or written; the value displayed is the last good value
read or written depending on whether the data item is a read or write. If the indicator is black, the parameter
is off.
Operation of the scroll key highlights the page symbol in the top right-hand corner of the screen, and a further operation of the scroll key calls page two to the screen.
Page two contains the IP address of the Modbus master and of any slaves connected to it, together with
some diagnostic information, as described in PING DETAILS below.
Connection
status
Page symbol
Read/Write
Parameter status
Modbus Master
Parameters
and values
Chan 1 Tmp
Chan 2 Tmp
VChannel 1 PV
VChanne 2 PV
VChannel 3 Input
Any Channel alarm
Dig In 1
198.3
200.3
2.0
-20.0
122
Active
Off
Modbus Master
Chan 1 Tmp
Chan 2 Tmp
VChannel 1 PV
VChanne 2 PV
VChannel 3 Input
Any Channel alarm
Dig In 1
Modbus Master
195.6
199.7
4.1
-23.9
13
Active
Off
nanodac
123.123.123.120
nanodac
123.123.123.123
26684
1
Ping...
3rd Party
123.123.123.124
0
0
Ping...
The list of parameters can be scrolled through using

the up/down arrows. Values being read by the master are read only, but the user may enter values for
parameters being written by the master, by highlighting the relevant item and using the scroll key to
enter edit mode.
The use of the Page key causes a return to be made
to the initial Modbus Master display.
Figure 3.4.12a Modbus Master display pages
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
Page 43
3.4.12 MODBUS MASTER DISPLAY MODE (Cont.)

PING DETAILS
Slave Name
Slave address
Total no of successful read
and write transactions
Total no of failed read
and write transactions
Ping initiation field.
}
}
Slave 1
Slave 2
nanodac
123.123.123.123
26684
1
Ping...
3rd Party
123.123.123.124
0
0
Ping...
Green: Ping successful

Red: Ping failed
3rd Party
123.123.123.124
0
0
Start
3rd Party
123.123.123.124
2
0
Ping...
Figure 3.4.12b Slave 2 ping initiation (Slave 1 similar)
The Ping... field of the first slave is highlighted by default. As shown above, the down (or up) arrow can be
used to highlight the Ping... field of the other slave instead.
Once the relevant Ping... field is highlighted, the scroll key can be used to enter edit mode and the up/down
arrow key used to select Start. A further operation of the scroll key initiates the Ping and if this is successful,
a green indicator appears alongside the field (and the text returns to Ping...). If the Ping is unsuccessful,
then the indicator is coloured red.
The up or down arrow can now be used to return to slave 1, or the page key can be used to return to the
previous parameter display page.
As shown in the figure above, some diagnostic information is given. This includes the total number of successful attempts that the master has made to communicate with the relevant slave, and the total number of
failed attempts. Fuller diagnostic details are to be found in the Modbus Master Communications configuration description (section 4.9)
Page 44
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
3.4.13 EtherNet/IP display mode

This display mode appears only if enabled in Instrument.Display configuration ( Section 4.1.3) and is used
to display the input and output parameters assigned to the Client and Server input and output tables. Parameters which have been configured with descriptors are identified by these descriptors instead of their
opc names (shown below).
EtherNet/IP Client
Inputs
Outputs
Virtual Channel.1.Main.Input1 11.1

Virtual Channel.2.Main.Input1 -19.1
Loop.1.Setpoint.SP1
Loop.1.Setpoint.SP2
Loop.2.Setpoint.SP1
Loop.1.Setpoint.SP2
123.0
132.0
246.2
111.11
EtherNet/IP Client
Server IP address,
Connection type,
RPI
Loop.1.Setpoint.SP1
Loop.1.Setpoint.SP2
Loop.2.Setpoint.SP1
Loop.1.Setpoint.SP2
EtherNet/IP Client
123.0
132.0
246.2
111.11
123.123.123.223 : Point2Point : 1000ms

Implicit I/O
IP address and
mode of operation
for this unit
See
Explicit data
below
123.123.123.222
Client (IO)
Explicit 1
No Connection
The list of parameters can be scrolled through

using the up/down arrows.
Items with green arrows can be edited if the user
is logged in with the correct access level.
Explicit 2
No Connection
IO Server Identity
Vendor Number
Device Type
Product Code
Revision
Status Word
Serial number
Product Name
IO Server Configuration
Mode Client (IO)
Input Instance 100
Size (Bytes) 100
45
0
E780
n.nn
0
8D01904C
Nano
Output Instance 112

Size (Bytes) 100
Data depends on the slave.
Server Address
Priotity
RPI (ms)
Connection Type
123.123.123.223
Scheduled
1000
Point2Point
These items appear only for the Client
Reset No
Figure 3.4.13a Typical EtherNet/IP display
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
Page 45
3.4.13 ETHERNET/IP DISPLAY MODE (Cont.)

If the EtherNet/IP option is fitted, the nanodac can be configured as either a client (master) or a server (slave)
(see section 4.10). The client and server displays are identical except that the configuration area of the client
display is more extensive than that of the server display.
Figure 3.4.13a, above shows a typical set of display pages for an EtherNet/IP client.
CONFIGURATION OF IMPLICIT INPUT/OUTPUT TABLES
Configuration of the input and output tables is carried out by:
a. Entering the parameters to be read by the client into the server output table.
b Entering the destination parameter into the equivalent location in the client input table.
c. Entering the parameters to be written by the client into the client output table.
d Entering the destination parameter into the equivalent location in the server input table.
The example in figure 3.4.13b attempts to show this (using the nanodac as the client) in graphical form, using
just a few parameters (there can be up to 50 in each table).
Client (nanodac) input table
Server output table
Virtual Channel.1.Main.Input1 I/P1
O/P1 Out Parameter 1
etc.
etc.
Client (nanodac) output table
Server input table
User Values.1.Value O/P1
I/P1
In Parameter 1
Channel.1.Alarm1 O/P2
I/P2
In Parameter 2
etc.
etc.
Figure 3.4.13b Input/Output table entries
Notes:
1. Channel values from the Server can be wired into nanodac Virtual channel inputs (as shown
above) so that they can be traced and/or recorded. In such cases the virtual channel Operation
must be set to Copy (see section 4.5.1).
2. Inputs and outputs would normally be given suitable descriptors (e.g. Reset timer instead of
Channel.1.Alarm1).
CONNECTION STATUS INDICATOR
A circular status indicator appears in a number of the EtherNet/IP display pages. This indicator can indicate the following states:
Green rotating flash: the instrument is on line and at least one CIP connection is established.
Green flashing circle: the instrument is on line but no CIP connections have been established.
Red flashing circle: there is a break in the physical connection between the client and the server, or the remote unit is switched off or is initialising.
Page 46
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11

Adding parameters to the input and output tables can be achieved only through the proprietary software
package iTools, running on a pc. The following description assumes that the user is familiar with iTools.
Section 6 of this manual shows how to set up an iTools link to the unit and the iTools on-line help system and
its pdf version (HA028838) should be referred-to as necessary.
Note: the client/server and the pc must all be on the same network.
Once iTools has started up and the Scan process has found the relevant instrument, the scan process should be stopped and the instrument (s) allowed to synchronise. (The scan may be left to run its course, but the speed at which iTools operates
is reduced for the duration of the scan process.)
Synchronised
Not synchronised
EXAMPLE
To add Loop 2 Setpoint 2 to Output 4 of the Client Output table.
In the example shown below, the instruments have both synchronised, and the
Access tool button clicked-on for both instruments to set them into configuration mode.
With the client selected, expand the EtherNet/IP folder in the Browse list, then
double-click on the ImplicitOutputs folder.
Locate and expand the Loop 2 SP folder in the Browse window, and click-drag
SP2 to Output 4 and release.
Figure 3.14.3c Dragging a parameter to the Output table
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
Page 47

An alternative to the click-drag technique is to right click on the required output (five in the example below),
and select Edit Wire... from the context menu that appears. A browse window pops up, allowing the user
to navigate to the required parameter. This technique can be used both on previously empty inputs or outputs and on those previously filled.
Figure 3.4.13d Context menu details
EXPLICIT DATA
As shown in table 3.4.13, when configured as a server, there is only one explicit application object, and that
has the class ID= A2 (162 decimal). The instance ID is the Modbus address of the parameter and the Attribute is always = 1. Explicit service codes hex10 (decimal 16) and 0E (14) are both supported, for writing
and reading single attributes respectively.
Service code
Hex
Dec
0010
16
000E
14
Class ID
Instance ID
Attribute
Hex Dec Decimal
A2
162 1-65535
1
A2
162 1-65535
1
Table 3.4.13 Explicit data specification
When configured as a client, two separate connections are available allowing the user to produce two independent explicit read or write messages to different server devices.
Figure 3.4.13e below, shows an example of how to configure an explicit message request. The instance ID
and the data type are taken from the server manufacturers data. In this example a read request is configured
to determine the Group recording status of a nanodac server, and it can be seen from table 5.3 that the decimal modbus address for this parameter is 4150 and the data type is int16. It is this address which is used as
the instance ID.
Once all the information has been entered, the read is requested by setting Send to Yes. The Data field
changes to 3 for this example and from table 5.3 it can be seen that the recording status is Recording enabled.
Note: The nanodac supports only 16 bit data types for reading and writing of explicit messages.
Page 48
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11

EtherNet/IP Client
When wired to parameters which have descriptors,

the descriptor names appear instead of the opc
names (e.g. Loop.1.Setpoint.SP1) shown here.

Loop.1.Setpoint.SP1
Loop.1.Setpoint.SP2
Loop.2.Setpoint.SP1
Loop.1.Setpoint.SP2
123.0
132.0
246.2
111.11
Tags page appears if Mode is set to Client (Tags)
in EtherNet/IP configuration (section 4.10).
Explicit messaging is not possible in tag IO mode
as tag mode needs to consume both connections
for communications with the PLC.
EtherNet/IP Client
EtherNet/IP Client
123.123.123.223 : Point2Point : 1000ms

Implicit I/O
123.123.123.223 : 1000ms
Tag I/O
123.123.123.222
Client (IO)
123.123.123.222
Client (Tags)
Explicit 1
No Connection
Explicit 2
No Connection
Input Tags
Connection Failed
Output Tags
Connection Failed
Explicit Messaging
Destination Address
Service Code
Class Id
Instance Id
Attribute Id
Data Type
Data
Send
123.123.123.223
Get Attribute
162
4150
1
INT
3
No
Figure 3.4.13e explicit messaging example
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
Page 49

USING TAGS
When acting as servers, many PLCs present their data in a tag format instead of implicit data format. For this
reason, when the client is configured as Client (Tags), (section 4.10) 30 input and 30 output tags become
available to the user via iTools (figure 3.4.13f).
This allows tag names to be typed in, input tags 1 to 30 being associated with implicit inputs 1to 30 respectively and output tags 1 to 30 being associated with implicit outputs 1to 30 respectively.
Figure 3.4.13f iTools display showing input tags.
In the example above, the value of the parameter with the tag Channel 1 will be written to implicit input 1.
Notes:
1. Most PLCs have a data buffer limit of 500 Bytes. The total number of bytes being used is given by
the equation: Total number of data bytes = (tag length + 10) the number of requested tags.
2. Input data direction is always to the nanodac:
in server mode input data is written to the nanodac from the client
in client mode, input data is read by the nanodac from the server device.
3. Output data direction is always from the nanodac:
in server mode output data is written to the client from the nanodac
in client mode, output data is read by the server from the nanodac.
Page 50
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
3.5 TREND HISTORY

Entered from the top level menu (section 3.1), this allows vertical and horizontal traces to be reviewed for
Trend group channels. The amount of data displayed in one screen depends on the Zoom In/Out setting
in the History menu (section 3.5.2) and on the recording interval selected in Group Recording configuration
(section 4.3.2). It is also possible to enter a time and date to which the history then jumps.
The history display is identical in appearance with the trend display except:
1. History displays can include messages if so configured in the History menu.
2. For horizontal trends, the scale is displayed permanently at the left edge of the display.
Home
Configuration
Go to view
History
Enter trend history mode
Faceplate cycling (Off)

Operator Notes
Demand Archiving
Log out
Figure 3.5a Top level menu
3.5.1 Navigation
The down arrow button moves the display backwards in time by 1/3 screen-full per operation (assuming that
the current display is not the earliest). See also SEARCH FOR, below.
The up arrow button moves the display forwards in time by 1/3 screen-full per operation (assuming that the
current display is not the latest). See also SEARCH FOR, below
The scroll key scrolls through the trend group channels, emphasizing each channel (and displaying its faceplate) as it is selected.
The page key calls the History Menu, described in section 3.5.2, below.
SEARCH FOR
In the history display, holding the up or down arrow key operated for approximately two seconds produces a Search for display which allows the
user to enter a time and date. Once a time and date have been entered,
Yes then causes the history display to jump to that time and date (if such history exists).
Search for
10:31:58 21/09/10
Cancel
Yes
To enter a time and date:

1. Use the up/down arrows to highlight the item to be edited.
2. When highlighted (orange background), operate the scroll button. The highlighted text turns black.
3. Use the up and down arrow keys to scroll to the required value for the field, then operate the scroll button again. The text goes white.
4. Repeat the above editing process for all the remaining items which are to be edited.
5. Use the up/down keys to select Yes. The Search for window closes, and the history display jumps to
the selected time and date.
Notes:
1. If no history exists for the selected time and/or date No History Available is displayed.
2. The time and date format and Daylight Savings Time (DST) effects are as set in the Locale area
of Instrument configuration. See section 4.1.2 for further details.
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
Page 51
3.5.2 History Options Menu

Operating the page key from within a history display, causes the History Options menu to appear.
History Menu
Zoom In/Out
Trend
Show Messages
Exit History
0.125 sec
All Points
Off
No
Figure 3.5.2 History Options menu
PARAMETERS
Zoom In/out
Trend
Show Messages
Exit History
Allows the user to select the amount of history displayed on the screen.
Select either All Points or Each Point.
All points displays all channels in the trend group, with the first channel emphasized
on the screen and its faceplate displayed. The Scroll button is used to select the next
channel in the group.
Each Point initially displays only the first point in the trace group. The scroll key is used
to cycle through individual group channels in turn.
Off disable the inclusion of messages in history display. On causes messages to appear, superimposed upon the point traces (vertical trend mode only).
Selecting Yes for this item causes a return to the top level menu or to the message
summary page.
Note: Operating the page key from the History menu causes a return to the history display.
Page 52
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
3.6 TEXT ENTRY

The user is often required to enter text characters or numbers (when editing operator notes, for example).
This is done using the pop-up keyboards which are displayed when required. When only numerals are required a special keyboard is presented which contains only numerals.
Figure 3.6 shows the three standard keyboards, along with a scan direction for operations of both up arrow
and down arrow keys. To change keyboards, use the arrow pushbuttons to highlight the keyboard name
(Numeric, Symbols or Alpha), and then operate the scroll button.
Generally, to enter text, the required character is highlighted using the up and down arrows and the scroll
button is used as an Enter key. Once text entry is complete, the Page button is used to confirm the edit (use
the down arrow to select Yes then operate the scroll button).
Pressing and holding the scroll button and then immediately operating the up or down arrow, causes the
character insertion point to move to the left (down arrow) or to the right (up arrow).
The user can press and hold the scroll key to display variations on certain characters (the letter e in the figure). Once displayed, the up and down arrows can again be used to scroll through auxiliary list, allowing capital letters, and characters with diacriticals (e.g. accents, umlauts, tildes, cedillas) to be selected and entered
using the scroll button.
The backarrow key is used as a back space key - i.e. it deletes the character to the left of the cursor position.
The Del key deletes the character to the right of the cursor.
Note: Leading and trailing space characters are automatically removed from text strings.
Press and hold scroll
button for alternative
character set.
Figure 3.6 Standard Keyboards
3.6.1 Numeric keyboard

As mentioned previously, for functions which can take only numerals, a special numeric keyboard appears,
as depicted in figure 3.6.1.
Figure 3.6.1 Numeric keyboard
3.6.2 USB keyboard

Text and numeric entry can also be carried out using a USB keyboard as described in section 8.3.
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
Page 53
4 CONFIGURATION
Entered from the top level menu (section 3.1) this allows the recorder configuration to be accessed and edited (Engineer access level required for full editing).
CAUTION
Recording is stopped for as long as the recorder login is at Engineer level. This means that Input/
output circuits are switched off during configuration.
As shown in figure 4, below, the recorder configuration is arranged in a number of areas, each of which is
allocated its own sub-section within section 4.
Instrument
Section 4.1
Home
Network
Section 4.2
Configuration
Group
Section 4.3
Go to View
Channel
Section 4.4
History
Virtual Channel
Section 4.5
Faceplate cycling (Off)
Loop
Section 4.6
Operator Notes
Advanced Loop
Section 4.7
Demand archiving
Programmer
Section 4.8
Log out
Modbus Master
Section 4.9
EtherNet/IP
Section 4.10
Digital I/O
Section 4.11
DC Output
Section 4.12
User Lin
Section 4.13
Custom Message
Section 4.14
Zirconia
Section 4.15
Steriliser
Section 4.16
Humidity
Section 4.17
BCD Input
Section 4.18
Logic (2 input)
Section 4.19
Logic (8 input)
Section 4.20
Multiplexer
Section 4.21
Math (2 input)
Section 4.22
Timer
Section 4.23
User Values
Section 4.24
Alarm Summary
Section 4.25
Real Time Event
Section 4.26
Figure 4 Top level configuration menu
The factory default configuration can be returned-to, if required, by entering a special Engineer password,
as described in section 4.1.6.
Page 54
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
4.1 INSTRUMENT MENU

Instrument
Clock
Locale
Display
Info
Upgrade
(section 4.1.1) (section 4.1.2) (section 4.1.3) (section 4.1.4) (section 4.1.5)
Language
Date
Brightness
Name
Type
Date format
Time
Save after
Type
IP Address
Time zone
Saver Brightness
Version
Username
DST enable
Home page
Bootrom
Password
HPage timeout Company ID
Source Path
Vertical trend
Config Rev
Initiate
Horizontal trend Security Rev
Future trend
Nvol writes
Vertical bar
Line Voltage
Horizontal bar Wires Free
Numeric
Alarm panel
Loop control
Dual loop
Cascade
Programmer
Steriliser
Promote list
Modbus Master
EtherNet/IP
Trend background
History background
H.Trend scaling
Faceplate cycling
Setpoint colour
Number format
USB auto scan
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
Save/Restore
I/O Fitted
Security
(section 4.1.6) (Section 4.1.7) (Section 4.1.8)
Select Save or
Engineer
Restore
Password
Supervisor
Password
Operator
Password
Feature Passwords
Comms Password
OEM Pass
OEM Entry
OEM Status
Input Adjust Output Adjust

(section 4.1.9) (section 4.1.10)
Select channs
Output
Start IP adjust Measured o/p
Confirm
Abort
Page 55
4.1.1 Clock
The up and down arrows are used to highlight Date (default) or Time.
To set the date, the scroll button is used to display the numeric keyboard described in section 3.6.1. The up
and down arrows are used to highlight the relevant numeral or separator (/ or :) and the scroll key used to
enter it into the display window.
To set the time, the scroll button is operated to enter edit mode, then the up and down buttons are used to
scroll to display a time, say 15 seconds later than the current time. Once the current time matches the display, the scroll button is pressed to confirm the time and to start the clock.
Instrument.Clock
Date
Time
DST
Figure 4.1.1 Clock menu
The DST field appears only If DST Enable is selected Yes, in Locale (section 4.1.2). If the box contains a
cross (as shown) then Daylight Saving Time (DST) is not currently active. A tick means that the time shown
has been advanced by an hour because DST is active.
Page 56
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
4.1.2 Locale
Instrument.Locale
Language English
Date Format DD/MM/YY
Time Zone GMT
DST Enable Yes
Start Time 01:00
Start On Last
Start Day
Sunday
Start Month March

End Time 02:00
End On Last
End day Sunday
End Month October
Figure 4.1.2 Typical Instrument configuration menu (expanded to show all fields)
Language
Date format
Time Zone
Select the language to be used for displays etc.

Select MM/DD/YY, YY/MM/DD as the required format.
Select the required offset from GMT (UTC). This setting affects only the displayed time.
Archiving, recording etc. times remain in GMT.
DST Enable
Daylight Saving Time enable. Once the selection is enabled, the following (previously
hidden) fields appear, allowing the start and end dates for Daylight Saving Time (DST)
to be configured. DST affects only the displayed time. Archiving, recording etc. times
remain in GMT.
Start Time
Appears only when DST Enable (above) is set to Yes. Use the up/down keys to scroll
to the required start time.
Start On
Select Last, First, Second, Third or Fourth as the required week. Used in conjunction with the Start Day and Start Month entries following.
Start Day
Select the day of the week on which DST is to commence.
Start Month
Select the month in which DST is to commence.
End Time, End On, End Day, End Month
As for Start Time etc. above, but specifies the end time and date for daylight savings.
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
Page 57
4.1.3 Display configuration

This allows the user to set display brightnesses and screen saver details, to select a display mode as the
Home page, and to enable/ disable the various display modes. The normal Select, Scroll, Enter editing
technique is used as has been previously described.
Instrument.Display
Brightness 70%
Save After 7 min
Saver Brightness 50%
Home Page V.Trend
HPage Timeout Off
Vertical Trend
Horizontal Trend
Home page
(always enabled)
Mode disabled
Vertical Bar
Horizontal Bar
Mode enabled
Promote List
Trend Backgrnd Black
History Backgrnd DarkGrey
H.Trend Scaling Hide
Faceplate Cycling Off
Setpoint Colour Red
Number Format Rounded
USB Auto Scan No
Figure 4.1.3 Display menu (expanded to show all fields)
Brightness
Save After
Saver Brightness
Home page
HPage Timeout
Vertical Trend
Page 58
Allows the user to select a normal operating brightness for the screen from 10% to
100%, in 10% steps.
The elapsed time (since last button press) before the screen switches from Brightness
to Saver Brightness. (Off = saver function disabled)
The screen saver brightness. Valid entries are 10% to 100% inclusive, in 10% steps. Using a lower power when not in use not only saves power, but also increases display life.
Typical screen power consumption is 0.5W at 100%, falling in a linear fashion to 0.05W
at 10%.
Allows any display mode to be chosen as the Home page. This is the page that the
recorder displays at power up, and also the page displayed when the Home key is selected from the top level menu (section 3.3). The selected display mode (vertical trend
in figure 4.1.3) is always enabled in the following display mode enable fields (its tick
is greyed out and cannot be edited). See section 3.4 for a description of the available
modes.
The elapsed time (since last button press) before the display returns to the home
screen. (Off = disabled)
This is the default home page, and its tick is greyed. If this is not the home page, the
tick can be changed to a cross, by highlighting it and operating the scroll button.
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
4.1.3 DISPLAY CONFIGURATION (Cont.)

Horizontal Trend, Vertical Bar, Horizontal bar, Numeric, Alarm Panel, Loop control, Dual Loop, Cascade, Programmer, Steriliser, Promote List, Modbus Master, EtherNet/IP. As for Vertical Trend,
above. By default some display modes are disabled (grey cross). In order to enable
such display modes the relevant cross is highlighted using the up/down arrow buttons,
and the scroll button then used to change the grey cross to a white tick.
The tick associated with the selected home page is always grey.
Note: Some display modes are available only if the relevant option is fitted.
Future Trend
This and the associated colour selections appear only if the Programmer option is fitted. See section 3.4.9 for more details.
Trend Background Allows the user to select black (default), white dark grey or light gray as the chart colour.
History Background As above for Trend background, but for history displays.
H.Trend Scaling
As described in section 3.4.2, by default, the scale for horizontal trends appears at the
left edge of the chart for a few seconds before the chart expands leftwards to occupy
the scale area. Setting H.Trend Scaling to Permanent, ensures that the scale remains
permanently on display.
Faceplate cycling Allows the default faceplate cycling state to be defined as On or Off (section 3.3.5)
Setpoint colour
The colour for the setpoint in Control Loop display pages (section 3.4.7).
Number Format
Rounded:
Truncated:
USB Auto Scan
If set to Yes, bar code data messages are automatically generated and appear on the
display and in the Message list without operator intervention. If set to No, the Message
appears on the screen for editing and/or confirmation, before being displayed etc.
Section 8.2 provides further details.
There is a new paramter been added to the Instrument.Display list - Number format.
The options are to "Round" or "Truncate" values. On the previous phases of the nano, numbers were truncated (in the same was as the 6000).
With phase 3 there is an option to allow numbers to be rounded. The reason for this is driven primarily from
a control point-of-view. With truncation, it is quite likely that the PV will look as though it never settles onto
setpoint. The rounding/truncation affects the UI display and MODBUS scaled integers, the underlying numbers are not affected, nor the values saved in the history files. Over MODBUS comms, all floating point parameters that are read via scaled integer comms will take note of the configured setting for rounding or
truncating and reflect this. On the UI, ALL floating point values rendered will adhere to the configured setting of rounding or truncating.
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
Page 59
4.1.4 Info menu

Gives information about the recorder hardware and software, and allows the user to enter a descriptor for
the instrument. The normal Select, Scroll, Enter editing technique, previously described) is used to edit
those fields that are not read only.
Instrument.Info
Name nanodac
Type nanodac
Version 2.0
Bootrom 1.8
Company ID 1280
Config Rev 10
Security Rev 2
Nvol writes 339
Line Voltage 239.2 v
Wires Free 240
Figure 4.1.4 Info menu (expanded to show all fields)
Name
Type
Version
Bootrom
Company ID
Config Rev
Security Rev
Nvol writes
Line voltage
Wires Free
Allows the user to enter a descriptor of up to 20 characters, using the text entry techniques described in section 3.6. The number of characters visible in the display mode
pages varies according to the number of alarm symbols on display.
Nano. Read only display of the instrument model (used by iTools).
Read only. The software version of the instrument.
Read only. Instrument software Boot ROM version
Read only. For CNOMO* purposes over Modbus (1280 decimal; 0500 hex).
Read only. This value is updated, and a message including this value generated, every
time configuration is quit, if any one or more configuration parameter has been
changed.
Read only. This number is incremented every time configuration is quit, if any one or
more passwords has been changed, or if the FTP Server username has been changed,
or if the Comms Enable field has been edited.
Number of non volatile write operations for diagnostic purposes.
The instantaneous value of the supply voltage applied to the instrument. Used in some
control loop operations.
This shows the number of wires free to be used. The value takes into account all user
wiring whether carried out at the instrument or downloaded from the iTools graphical
wiring editor.
* CNOMO = Comit de normalisation des moyens de production.
Page 60
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
4.1.5 Upgrade
CAUTION
1. Power must not be removed from the unit whilst upgrade is in progress, as to do so will cause permanent damage to the unit.
2. For USB upgrades, the memory stick must not be removed whilst upgrade is in progress or the
instrument will be permanently damaged.
This item allows the user to update the instrument firmware, either from a memory stick in the USB socket at
the rear of the unit, or via FTP transfer from a host computer. Firmware upgrade files are downloaded from
the recorder manufacturer and transferred to the instrument by memory stick or by FTP transfer. Splash
screens are prepared by the user and transferred using a memory stick. The unit restarts automatically after
an upgrade or splash screen replacement.
Instrument.Upgrade
Upgrade Firmware (FTP)
Instrument.Upgrade
Server IP Address 123.123.123.123

Account Username anonymous
Account Password ****
Upgrade Firmware (USB)

Source Path release
Initiate No
Source Path release

Initiate No
Figure 4.1.5 Typical Upgrade menus
Upgrade
Select Firmware (USB), Firmware (FTP), Bootrom (USB) or Splash (USB) as the
source of the upgrade.
Server IP Address For Upgrade = Firmware (FTP) only, this field must contain the IP address of the pc
which is to supply the upgrade file.
Account Username For Type = Firmware (FTP) only, the username set up in the host ftp server
Account Password For Type = Firmware (FTP) only, the password set up in the host ftp server
Source Path
The name of the directory from which the upgrade file is to be read. This is only the
name of the directory without any path elements (e.g. /) included unless the path is release/upgrade/files.
Initiate
Select Yes to initiate the upgrade.
CUSTOMISING THE SPLASH SCREEN
Splash (USB) allows the user to select a new image for the splash screen (i.e. the screen that appears at power up or restart). When Initiate is set to Yes, the instrument searches the USB device for a file called
splash.bmp located in the release folder. If such a file is found, it is loaded, and the instrument re-starts
with the new image as the splash screen. If no file is found, the request is ignored. If the image is not of the
correct type or size, the instrument re-starts with the default splash screen.
The original splash screen is included on the tools DVD, so that it can be restored if required.
Rules:
1. This feature is available only with Bootrom versions 2.0 and above.
2. The file must be located in a folder called release and the file name must be splash.bmp.
3. The image must be 320 x 240; 24-bit resolution.
4. The image must be in bitmap (suffix.bmp) format.
5. The image may not exceed 256kB.
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
Page 61
4.1.6 Security menu

This allows the user to enter passwords for all security levels (except logged out), and to enable/disable serial communications security.
Instrument.Security
Engineer Pass **********
Supervisor Pass
Operator Pass
Feature Pass 12345
Feature2 Pass 1232
Feature3 Pass 54321
Comms Pass Enabled
OEM Pass **********
OEM Entry
OEM Status Unlocked
Default Config. No
Appears only if Engineer

Password = reset
Figure 4.1.6 Security menu
Engineer Pass
Supervisor Pass
Operator Pass
Feature Pass
Feature2/3 Pass
Comms Pass
Gives access to configuration menus. Set to 100 when despatched, but can be edited
here, if required, by entering an alternative of up to 20 characters (note 1).
If reset (case sensitive) is entered as the Engineer Password, the Default Config. field
appears allowing the instrument default configuration to be restored (note 2).
A password (none by default) of up to 20 characters can be entered here to protect Supervisor level access.
A password (none by default) of up to 20 characters can be entered here to protect Operator level access.
This is a password supplied by the manufacturer to enable the software options (e.g.
Loop, Zirconia block, Toolkit blocks etc.). When applying for this code, the manufacturer will require the instruments MAC address (Network.Interface menu section 4.2.1)
and the instruments firmware Version (Instrument.info menu - section 4.1.4). The password is MAC address dependent so that it cannot be used on any other instrument.
Similar to Feature Pass above, but for additional features.
Enables/disables password security for external communications (including via iTools).
If set to Enabled, the Engineer level password will be required if an attempt is made to
enter the configuration menus from a remote pc. If set to Disabled, then access to configuration can be gained over a communications link, without a password.
If enabled, then entry to configuration mode via the Instrument Mode (IM) parameter
must be completed within 5 seconds of entering the password, or the attempt will fail.
Notes:
1. It is recommended that only such characters as appear on the users pc keyboard be used in the
Engineer password. The use of other characters makes it necessary to use Escape codes (e.g.
Alt 0247 for the sign) when trying to enter configuration mode from iTools, for example.
2. Restoring factory default configuration can also be carried out in iTools, using the Engineer password reset and selecting Default Config to Yes.
Page 62
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
4.1.6 SECURITY MENU (Cont.)

OEM Pass
OEM entry
OEM Status
Default Config
The configured pass phrase used to enable / disable the OEM security option. This
field is editable whilst the OEM Status is Unlocked and the user has Engineer access.
To lock or unlock the OEM security feature, the user must enter the pass phrase entered
in OEM Pass above.
Read only Locked or Unlocked status display.
This field appears only if reset has been entered as the Engineer Password. Selecting
Yes Causes the instrument to restart with default configuration (i.e. the instrument
cold starts). See note 2 above.
OEM SECURITY
In products that incorporate user wiring, the value of an application may lie more in the user wiring (connecting the function blocks together) than in the configuration of the instrument's parameters.
OEM Security allows the user to prevent the application from being copied either via comms (by iTools or a
third party comms package) or via the instrument's user interface.
When OEM security is enabled, users are prevented from accessing wiring (for reading or writing) from any
source (comms or user interface), and it is not possible to Load or Save the configuration of the instrument
via iTools or by using the Save/Restore facility (section 4.1.8).
4.1.7 I/O fitted

This provides a read only display showing what type of input or output circuit is associated with each set of
rear terminals.
Instrument.I/O Fitted
1A1B (Dig.IO)
2A2B (Relay)
LALC (Dig.In)
3A3B (Relay)
LBLC (Dig.In)
4AC (Relay)
5AC (Relay)
Figure 4.1.7 I/O fitted display
I/O TYPES
Dig.IO
Relay
Dig.In
Dig.Out
DC.Op
Digital input/output
Relay output
Digital input
Digital output
DC output
Note: The I/O types fitted in locations LALC, LBLC, 4AC and 5AC are always as shown above. The
types of I/O fitted in locations 1A1B, 2A2B and 3A3B depends on the options specified at time of
order.
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
Page 63
4.1.8 Save/Restore
This allows the user to save and/or restore instrument clone configurations to a memory stick inserted into
the USB connector at the rear of the unit. The format of the saved/restored files is iTools clone files (*.uic)
Selecting Restore presents a list of clone files in the configured directory on the USB device. (In the example
below, the file is located in the basic usb0 directory - it has not been saved to a particular configuration directory.)
When Save is selected, the virtual keyboard must be used to enter the filename. If the file already exists on
the USB device, a warning appears offering Cancel or Overwrite alternatives.
Notes:
1. The ability to save and restore is disabled if OEM security is enabled.
2. Configuration save/restore is available only when the unit is logged into at Engineer access level.
3. During USB cloning (USB save/restore), the priority of modbus slave comms is lowered. This allows the save/restore process to complete in a minimal time (around 60 seconds). During this period, modbus slave comms response times will be extended and may result in the master device
timing-out.
Instrument.Save/Restore
Operation Restore
Status Complete
RELEASE
history
FileName.UIC
Figure 4.1.8 Save/Restore display
Operation
Status
Select Save or Restore. Use the up/down arrow keys to highlight the required .UIC
file, then use the scroll key to initiate the operation.
Shows the status of the operation, as follows:
Inactive: Neither saving or restoring a clone file has occurred since the last time the instrument was power cycled.
Complete: Indicates that the cloning process has completed.
Restoring: Restore operation is currently in progress.
Saving: A clone file is currently being saved.
Cold started: A power-cycle of the product occurred whilst a Restore operation
was in progress. The product configuration is unreliable and has been reset to factory
default.
The Restoring and Saving status text is accompanied by an animated display (circling green flash) to indicate that the operation is in progress.
Page 64
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
4.1.9 Input adjust

Notes
1. Input adjust cannot be applied to input channels with input type of Digital, Test or Off.
2. Input adjustments can be carried out only by users logged in as Engineer (see section 3.3.7).
3. The instrument must be powered for a sufficient time (e.g. 30 minutes) for it to reach thermal equilibrium before an input adjust is performed.
This facility allows the user to compensate for tolerance errors etc. The technique used is to select those
channels to which adjust is to be applied, then for each channel to:
a apply a known low level signal (at or close to the low input range value) to the relevant input. When the
recorder reading is steady, press Apply.
b. apply a known high level signal (at, or close to, the high input range value) to the relevant input. When
the recorder reading is steady, press Apply.
Figure 4.1.9a shows a typical display when Input adjust is selected from the Instrument menu, and Apply
adjust has been selected. As can be seen, channel 3 has previously been adjusted.
Instrument.Input Adjust
Channel 1 Unadjusted
Channel 3 Adjusted
Apply Adjust No
Remove Adjust No
Figure 4.1.9a Input adjust top level display
Channel 1 to 4
Apply Adjust
Remove Adjust
Abort
Shows the adjust status of each channel

Selecting Yes initiates the adjustment procedure described below.
Selecting Yes initiates the adjustment removal procedure described below.
Allows the user to abandon input adjustment at any point in the procedure.
ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE
1. As shown in figure 4.1.9b, highlight the Apply Adjust field, and operate the scroll key to enter edit
mode. Use the up or down arrow key to select Yes. Use the scroll button to change Channel 1 cross
to a tick (check mark). Similarly select any other channels which require adjustment.
Channel 1
Channel 2
Channel 3 Adjusted
Channel 3
Channel 4
Apply Adjust Yes
Start IP Adjust No
Remove Adjust No
Abort No
Figure 4.1.9b Channel adjustment procedure (1)
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
Page 65
4.1.9 INPUT ADJUST (Cont.)

ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE (Cont.)
2.
3.
Highlight the Start IP Adjust field and use the scroll and up/down arrow to select Yes. Use the scroll
key again to enter the low value adjust page.
Apply the known low value and wait for the value to stabilise. Enter the Low Target Value (the value
that the recorder is to read for the applied input). When all is steady, use the scroll and up/down arrow
to set the Confirm Low field to Yes, then operate the scroll button again.
Channel 1
Low Target Value 0.00
Channel 2
Confirm Low Yes
Channel 3
Channel 1 Value 0.21
Channel 4
Abort No
Start IP Adjust Yes

Abort No
Figure 4.1.9c Channel adjustment procedure (2)
4.
5.
The display changes to the high value adjust page.

Apply the known high value and wait for the value to stabilise. Enter the High Target Value (the value
that the recorder is to read for the applied input). When all is steady, set Confirm High to Yes.
High Target Value 10.00
Confirm High Yes
Channel 1 Value 9.79
Abort No
Channel 1 Adjusted
Channel 3 Adjusted
Apply Adjust Yes
Remove Adjust No
Figure 4.1.9d Channel adjustment procedure (3)
REMOVAL PROCEDURE
1. Set Remove Adjust to Yes and operate the scroll button.
2. Use the scroll and up/down arrow buttons to change the required channel icons from crosses to ticks.
3. Select Remove IP Adjust to Yes and operate the scroll key. The adjustment is removed from all
selected channels without further confirmation.
Channel 1 Adjusted
Channel 1
Channel 2
Channel 3
Channel 4
Apply Adjust Yes
Remove IP Adjust Yes
Remove Adjust No
Abort No
Figure 4.1.9e Channel adjustment removal
Page 66
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
4.1.9 INPUT ADJUST (Cont.)

DUAL INPUT CHANNELS
For the dual input channel option, input adjust is carried out as described above, except that for any channel
where dual inputs are configured, the user must initiate adjustment to primary and secondary inputs separately. As shown in figure 4.1.9f, a new field Input on Channel is introduced for this purpose.
Input on Channel Primary
Input on Channel Secondary
Apply Adjust No
Remove Adjust No
Apply Adjust No
Remove Adjust No
Only those channels with Type set to Dual mA,

Dual mV or Dual T/C appear in the list of secondary channels. In this example, only channels
1 and 3 are configured as dual input. (See section
4.4.1 for channel Type configuration.)
Figure 4.1.9f Input adjust top level display (dual input channels)
For primary inputs, all four channels are included in the list and can therefore be selected for adjustment.
For secondary inputs, only those channels which have been configured as dual input are included.
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
Page 67
4.1.10 Output adjust

This item appears only if one or more of I/O type DC Output is fitted and allows the user to compensate for
tolerance errors etc. in connected equipment.
Instrument.Output Adjust
1A1B and 2A2B can be configured only as mA outputs.

3A3B can be configured as mA
or Volts.
See section 4.12 for configuration details.
DC Output 3A3B Unadjusted

Apply Adjust No
Remove Adjust No
Figure 4.1.10a Output adjust initial display
ADJUST PROCEDURE
1. Highlight the Apply Adjust field, and operate the scroll key to enter edit mode. Use the up or down
arrow key to select the required output and confirm with the scroll key. The output adjust page
appears for the low point.
2. Measure the output at the required point, and enter this value in the Measured Output field using the
text entry techniques described in section 3.6. To skip this stage go to step 3.
3. Set Confirm Low to Yes. The output adjust page appears for the high point.
4. Measure the output at the required point, and enter this value in the Measured Output field as
described for the low point. To skip this stage go to step 5.
5. Set Confirm High to Yes. The output adjust initial display reappears, with the word Adjusted in the
relevant DC Output field.
Output 2V
Output 10V
Measured Output 2.000
Measured Output 10.000
Confirm Low No
Confirm High No
Abort No
Abort No
Figure 4.1.10b Low and High adjust point displays
Notes:
1 The figures above show the displays when the DC output is set to Volts (section 4.12) (3A3B only). The mA displays are similar, but the fixed low and high values are 4mA and 20mA respectively.
2. Abort cancels operations so far and returns to the output adjust initial display (figure 4.1.10a).
DC Output 3A3B Adjusted
Apply Adjust No
Remove Adjust No
Figure 4.1.10c Adjusted display
ADJUST REMOVAL
In the output adjust initial display (figure 4.1.10c) highlight the Remove Adjust field, and operate the scroll
key to enter edit mode. Use the up or down arrow key to select the required output and confirm with the
scroll key. The output adjustment is removed, without confirmation. The initial display returns to Unadjusted as in figure 4.1.10a.
Page 68
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
4.2 NETWORK MENU
Network
Interface
(Section 4.2.1)
Archiving
(Section 4.2.2)
FTP Server
(Section 4.2.3)
Modbus
(Section 4.2.4)
MAC address
Client Identifier
IP type
IP address
Subnet mask
Gateway
Media size
Media free
Media duration
Rate
Destination
File format
On media full
Remote path
Primary server
Primary user
Primary password
Secondary server
Secondary user
Secondary password
Trigger
Period
User name
Password
Prefmaster IP
Address
Input timeout
Unit ID Enable
Serial Mode
Time Format
Pref Master Conn
Response time
Master Conn 2
Response time
Master Conn 3
Response time
Master Conn 4
Response time
4.2.1 Interface
This area of configuration allows the user to set up an IP address for the instrument, either by typing one in
(Fixed), or automatically (DHCP), assuming a DHCP server is running.
Network.Interface
MAC
00:0A:8D:01:90:00
Client identifier 01000A8D019000

IP Type DHCP
IP Address 123.123.123.123
Subnet Mask 255.255.248.0
Gateway 234.234.234.234
Figure 4.2.1 Network Interface menu
MAC
Client Identifier
IP Type
IP Address
Subnet Mask
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
Read only. Media Access Control. A unique address for each instrument, entered at the
factory.
The client identifier is a unique id used by DHCP servers that implement option 61.
Each nano product will have a unique ID built up from its MAC address. If the DHCP
server is configured to use option 61, then it will use this id instead of the MAC address
to assign a dynamic IP address.
If Fixed, the user needs to enter an IP address and Subnet Mask in the following fields,
and a Gateway address if required.
If DHCP the subsequent fields become read only, with the entries automatically generated by the DHCP server. When set to DHCP, it takes several seconds before the IP
address is obtained from the DHCP server.
Read only if IP Type = DHCP.
If IP Type = Fixed, the user may enter an IP address (IPV4 dot notation). This would
normally be supplied by the users IT department, or from the Network supervisor.
If IP Type = Fixed, this sets a range of IP addresses that can be accessed. Normally
supplied by the users IT department, or from the Network supervisor.
Page 69
4.2.1 INTERFACE (Cont.)

Gateway

If IP Type = Fixed this allows the user to enter a gateway address for use when the unit
is to communicate outside the local network. Normally supplied by the users IT department, or from the Network supervisor.
4.2.2 Archiving
This area of configuration is used to set up the parameters for use during unattended archiving. Some of
the fields appear only if other fields are set to a particular value. For example, the CSV fields appear only if
File Format is set to CSV or to Both.
The archived data is not removed from the flash memory of the instrument. When the flash memory is full,
new data causes the oldest file(s) to be discarded.
Note: For remote archiving, the host computer must be set up to respond to pings. This is
because the nano pings the host whilst establishing connection, and if it does not receive a response
the archive attempt fails.
Network.Archiving
Media Size 1907.46 MB
Network.Archiving
Rate Monthly
Media Free 1902.90 MB
Destination USB
Media Duration 763.77 Days
File Format Both
Rate Automatic
CSV Values Yes
Destination FTP server
CSV Messages No
File Format Binary (UHH)

On Media Full Overwrite
Remote Path /archive
Primary Server 123.123.123.123
Primary User history
Primary Password ******
Sec. Server 234.234.234.234
Sec. User anonymous
Sec. Password ****
Trigger No
Period None
CSV Headers No
CSV Headings Yes
CSV Date Format Text
CSV Tab Del No
Primary User history
Primary Password ******
Sec. Server 234.234.234.234
Sec. User anonymous
Sec. Password ****
Remote with Binary file format
Trigger No
Period None
Local with CSV files included

Figure 4.2.2a Unattended Archive configuration (typical settings)
Media Size
Media Free
Media Duration
Page 70
Appears only for File Format = Binary (UHH). A read only value showing the capacity
of the memory stick inserted in the USB port at the rear of the unit. Shows zero if no
memory stick is present.
Appears only for File Format = Binary (UHH). A read only value showing the space remaining in the memory stick inserted in the USB port at the rear of the unit. Shows zero
if no memory stick is present.
Appears only for File Format = Binary (UHH). A read only value showing the time it will
take to fill the Memory stick if the recorder configuration remains unchanged.
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
4.2.2 ARCHIVING (Cont.)

Rate
Allows the user to specify the frequency at which the contents of the Flash memory are
archived to the USB port or, via FTP, to a pc. Scrollable settings are:
None
Automatic archiving is disabled. Any archiving must be initiated by the user
using Demand Archiving, as described in section 3.3.7.
Hourly
Archive occurs on the hour, every hour.
Daily
Archive initiated at 00:00* each day
Weekly
Archive is initiated at midnight* every Sunday
Monthly Archive is initiated at 00:00* on the 1st of every month.
Automatic The recorder selects the least frequent of the above archive periods which
is guaranteed not to lose data as a result of the internal flash memorys running out of space.
*Note: Archive times are not adjusted for daylight saving time (DST). Thus, if the archive is set to
Daily, Weekly or Monthly, then during summer time, the archive will be triggered an hour late (i.e
at 01:00 hours instead of midnight).
Destination
File format
Select FTP Server for archive to a remote pc, or USB to archive to the USB port device.
Select Binary (UHH) CSV or Both.
Binary (UHH)
A proprietary format used by the instrument that needs other software (e.g.
Review, to interpret the data before it can be presented in spreadsheets
etc. Binary files have the extension .uhh.
CSV
This format is a standard open-file format for numeric data. A simple ASCIIbased format, it is readable by a wide range of pc applications as well as being suitable for direct import into many commercial databases. CSV files
have the extension .csv.
Both
Archiving includes both .uhh and .csv files.
Note: CSV is ASCII based and cannot interpret Unicode characters. For this reason, some characters available to the user will not be displayed correctly in .csv files.
CSV Values
CSV Messages
CSV Headers
CSV Headings
CSV Date Format
CSV Tab Del
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
Appears only if File Format is set to CSV or Both. If Yes is selected, then process
values are included in the file (see figure 4.2.2b for details).
Appears only if File Format is set to CSV or Both. If Yes is selected, then messages
are included in the file (see figure 4.2.2b for details).
Appears only if File Format is set to CSV or Both. If Yes is selected, then Header details are included in the file (see figure 4.2.2b for details).
Appears only if File Format is set to CSV or Both. If Yes is selected, then column
headers are included in the file (see figure 4.2.2b for details).
Appears only if File Format is set to CSV or Both. Allows Text or Spreadsheet to be
selected. Text causes a time/date to appear in the spreadsheet. Spreadsheet Nu displays the number of days since December 30th 1899. The decimal part of the number
represents the latest six hours. For example: DDD--- --DD.25 represents 06:00 hours
and DDD--- --DD.5 represents 12:00 hours. Spreadsheet Numeric format is more easily
interpreted than Text by some spreadsheet applications.
Appears only if File Format is set to CSV or Both.
CSV (Comma Separated Variables) does not always use commas as separators. For example, in some countries the decimal point is represented by a full stop (period), whilst
in others a comma is used. In order to avoid confusion between a comma as a decimal
point and a comma as a separator, a different separator can be used. This field allows
the tab character (^t) to be used instead of a comma.
Page 71
4.2.2 ARCHIVING (Cont.)

On Media Full
For Destination = USB only, this allows the user to select Overwrite or Stop as the
action to be taken when the memory stick is full. Overwrite causes the oldest data to
be discarded from the memory stick to make room for newer data. Stop inhibits archiving activity.
Remote Path
Left blank if the archive destination is the home folder. If the destination is to a subfolder
within the home folder, then the name of the subfolder is entered here, preceded by a
/ character (e.g. /history).
Primary Server
Allows the user to enter the IP address for the pc to be used as the primary FTP server.
Primary User/Password
These are the Login name and password of the remote host account, assigned either
by the Network administrator, or set up in the Guest account of the remote hosts FTP
server or User Manager configuration.
Sec. Server/user/password
As Primary server details above, but for the secondary FTP server used when the primary is not available for any reason.
Trigger
This parameter can be wired to, say, an alarm going active, or a digital input, to allow
an archive to be triggered remotely. Can also be set to yes manually.
Period
Appears only if Trigger is wired (section 7). Allows a period of history to be selected
for archiving when Trigger goes true. Selections are: None, Last Hour, Last Day, Last
Week, Last Month, All, Bring to Date. (Last Month archives the last 31 days of history.)
Click/drag separator
to edit field width
Include header
details
Include column
headings
Include values
Right click, then:

Format cells...
select time as number category
Select time/date type as required.
Include messages
Figure 4.2.2b CSV data example
4.2.3 FTP Server

This area of configuration allows the user to enter the Username and Password used to access the instrument
from a remote FTP client.
Page 72
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
4.2.4 Modbus TCP

This allows the user to configure the recorder so as to allow it to communicate using Modbus Transmission
Control Protocol.
Network.Modbus
PrefMaster IP 123.123.123.123
Address 1
Input Timeout 0 sec
Unit ID Enable Instrument
Serial Mode Modbus Slave
Time Format Seconds
PrefMaster Conn 123.123.123.123
Response Time 0
Master Conn 1 0.0.0.0
Response Time 0
Response Time 0
Response Time 0
Response Time 0
Figure 4.2.4 Modbus TCP configuration menu
PrefMaster IP
The IP address of the relevant Modbus master. The Preferred master is guaranteed to
be able to connect, even if all slave connections (max. = 4 for TCP) are in use.
Address
The Modbus address for this slave. This address must be unique for the network to
which it is attached. The recorder will respond to this address and to Address 255.
Input Timeout
Allows a value of between 0 and 3600 seconds to be entered to set the timeout period
for modbus input channels. If a modbus input is not written to within this period the value of the channel is set to -9999.0 with a 'No Data' status. A value of 0 disables the comms inactivity timeout feature.
Unit ID Enable
Enables/Disables the checking of the Modbus TCP unit identity field.
Strict
The Modbus TCP Unit Identity Field (UIF) does not have to match the instrument address. The instrument responds only to Hex value FF in the UIF.
iTools finds this instrument only at location 255, and then stops scanning.
Loose
The Modbus TCP Unit Identity Field (UIF) does not have to match the instrument address. The instrument responds to any value in the UIF
Instrument The Modbus TCP Unit Identity Field (UIF) must match the instrument address or no response will be made to messages.
Serial Mode
Slave communications via the side mounted configuration port interface (CPI) clip (for
iTools use.) Parameters: Baud rate 19,200; Parity = none; Number of data bits = 8;
Number of stop bits = 1; no flow control. Can be set to Modbus Slave or Off. The unit
must be restarted before any change takes effect.
Time Format
Allows the user to choose milliseconds, seconds, minutes or hours as the time format.
Sets the resolution for the reading and writing of time format parameters.
PrefMaster Conn
Read only. Shows the IP address of the preferred master, when connected.
Response Time
Read only. Shows the response time for a single communications request to the relevant master.
Master Conn 1 to 4 Read only. Shows the IP addresses of any other masters connected to this recorder.
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
Page 73
4.3 GROUP CONFIGURATION

Group configuration is separated into two areas, one which defines trending characteristics (for display
channels) the other defining the recording characteristics for saving data to the Flash memory ready for archiving.
4.3.1 Group Trend configuration

This allows the user to define which points are to be traced on the display and at what interval, and also allows the number of chart divisions to be set up. Figure 4.3.1 shows a typical configuration page.
Note: The background chart colour is set up as a part of Instrument Display configuration (section
4.1.3)
Group.Trend
Descriptor Group 1
Interval 0.25 sec
Major Divisions 10
Point1 Channel1
Point2 Channel2
Point3 Channel3
Point4 Channel4
Point5 No Trend
Point6 VirtualChan1
Figure 4.3.1 Group Trend Configuration
Descriptor
Interval
Major Divisions
Point1 to Point6
Page 74
Allows the user to enter a descriptor (20 characters max.) for the group.
The trending interval which defines how much data appears on one screen height or
width. A number of discrete intervals can be chosen between 0.125 seconds to 1 hour.
The selection should be made according to how much detail is required, and how
much data is to be visible on the screen.
Allows the user to select the number of divisions into which the scale is divided and how
many gridlines are displayed. Setting the value to 1 results in just the zero and full scale
values appearing. Setting the value to 10 (the maximum) results in a scale with zero, full
scale and nine intermediate values appearing, with associated grid lines.
Allows the user to select which channels and virtual channels are to be traced. The maximum number of traces is six.
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
4.3.2 Group Recording configuration

Similar to Trend configuration, above, but for saving the data to Flash memory history files. Each point can
individually be enabled or disabled for recording, or recording can be disabled for the whole group.
Figure 4.3.2 shows a typical page.
Group.Recording
Flash Size 50.00 MB
Flash Duration 17.06 Days
Enable Yes
Interval 1 sec
UHH Compression Normal
Channel 1 Yes
Channel 2 Yes
Channel 3 Yes
Channel 4 Yes
VirtualChan 1 Yes
VirtualChan 2 No
VirtualChan 30 No
Suspend No
Figure 4.3.2 Group trend recording configuration
Flash Size
Flash Duration
Read only. Shows the size of the Flash memory fitted in MB.
Read only. Shows the time it will take to fill the Flash memory if the recorder configuration remains unchanged.
Enable
Yes enables group recording so that all points set to Yes are stored in the recorders
flash memory. No disables group recording.
Interval
Defines the rate at which data is saved to the recorders Flash memory. The value affects how much trace history appears on the screen in trend history mode.
UHH Compression Select Normal or High. Normal compresses the data, but still provides an exact
copy. High compresses more, but values are saved only to 1 part in 108 resolution.
See also note 1, below.
Channel 1 to VirtualChan 30 (see note 2, below)
Read only (greyed yes) for points being trended, (these are automatically recorded).
For non-trending points the user may enable or disable each point individually.
Suspend
Ignored unless the user has wired to this field. If wired then when set to 'No' recording
is active, when set to 'Yes' recording is paused.
Notes:
1. Where very high values are involved, such as in some totaliser values, High compression may
cause the value displayed at the recorder, and held in the history file, to be incorrect. The problem may be resolved by changing to Normal compression, or, in the case of a totaliser, by rescaling it (for example from MegaWatt hours to TeraWatt hours).
2. Virtual channels 1 to 15 are included in the standard build. Channels 16 to 30 are included only
if the Modbus Master and / or EtherNet/IP option is fitted.
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
Page 75
4.4 INPUT CHANNEL CONFIGURATION

Channel
N Select channel number
Main
(Section 4.4.1)
Trend
(Section 4.4.2)
Alarm 1/2
(Section 4.4.3)
Descriptor
Type
PV
Status
IP adjust state
Resolution
Units
Test signal
Input low/high
Shunt value
Linearisation type
Range low/high
Scale low/high
Offset
CJ type
Filter
Sensor break type
Fault Response
Sensor break value
Measured value
Internal CJ Temp
Colour
Span low
Span high
Type
Status
Threshold
Hysteresis
Latch
Block
Dwell
Acknowledge
Active
Inactive
Not acknowledged
Acknowledgement
Figure 4.4 Channel configuration menu
Page 76
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
4.4.1 Channel Main

This section describes all possible menu items, but it should be noted that some items are context dependent (e.g. Cold Junction settings appear only for Type = Thermocouple).
Channels one to four in the configuration relate to An In 1 (terminals 1I, 1+ and 1-) to An In 4 (terminals 4I,
4+ and 4-) respectively - see figure 2.2.
Channel.1.Main
Descriptor Channel 1
Type Thermocouple
PV 197.35
Status Good
IP Adjust State Adjusted
Resolution 2
Units C
Test Signal Triangle 5 Hr
Input Low 0
Input High 10
Shunt 2.49
Lin Type Type K
Range Low 0.00
Range High 100.00
Range Units C
Scale Low 0.00
Scale High 100.00
Offset 0.000
CJ Type External
Ext CJ Temp 0.00
Filter 1.0 sec
Sensor Break Type Break High
Fault Response Drive Low
Sensor Break Val 1%
Measured Value 0.2
Internal CJ Temp 35.1
Figure 4.4.1a Channel main menu (expanded)
Note: For the sake of completeness, the figure above shows all possible fields, even though many
are mutually exclusive. For example, Test signal appears only when Test is selected as Type. It
would never appear when Type = thermocouple (as shown). Similarly, Shunt would appear only for
Type = mA.
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
Page 77
4.4.1 CHANNEL MAIN (Cont.)

Descriptor
PV
Status
PV2
Status2
IP Adjust State
IP Adjust State2
Resolution
Units
Type
Allows a (20 character max.) descriptor to be entered for the channel. Some thought
should be given to ensure that the descriptor is meaningful because in some display
screens it is truncated. For example, Furnace 1 area 1 and Furnace 1 area 2 might
both appear as Furnace 1 a and thus be indistinguishable from one another, except in
background colour.
Read only. Displays the current value of the channel.
Read only. Shows the channel status as one of: Good, Channel Off, Over range, Under range, HW error, Ranging, HW (capability) exceeded.
Read only. For dual inputs only, displays the current value of the secondary input.
Read only. For dual inputs only, shows the secondary input status (as Status above).
Appears only for channels which have been included in the Adjust Input procedure
described in section 4.1.9.
As IP Adjust State, above but for secondary channels.
Allows the number of decimal places to be defined for the channel. Valid entries are
zero to nine.
Allows a units string of up to five characters to be entered.
Allows the user to select an input type for the channel. Available selections are: Off,
Thermocouple, mV, V, mA, RTD, Digital, Test or Ohms. If the Dual Input option
is fitted, Dual mV, Dual mA, Dual T/C (if enabled) are also available.
Note : If Dual T/C is selected then it is essential that the secondary T/C input is field calibrated using
the Input Adjust procedure (section 4.1.9)
Test signal
Input Low*
Input High*
Shunt value
Lin type
Range Low*
Range High*
Range Units
Scale Low/High
Scale Low2/High2
Offset
Appears only if Test is selected as Type. Allows either a sinusoidal or a triangular

waveform to be selected at one of a number of cycle times between 40 seconds and
five hours.
For Type = mV, Dual mV, V, mA, Dual mA or Ohms, the lowest value of the applied signal in electrical units.
As Input Low, but the highest value of the applied signal in electrical units.
For mA and Dual mA input types only, this allows the value of the shunt resistor (in
Ohms) to be entered. The recorder does not validate this value - it is up to the user to
ensure that the value entered here matches that of the shunt resistor(s) fitted. For Dual
mA input type, both primary and secondary inputs must have independent shunts each
of the same value.
Linear, Square root, x3/2, x5/2, User Lin.
Thermocouple types (alphabetical order): B, C, D, E, G2, J, K, L, N, R, S, T, U, NiMo/
NiCo, Platinel, Ni/MiMo, Pt20%Rh/Pt40%Rh.
User 1 to User 4
Resistance thermometer types: Cu10, Pt100, Pt100A, JPT100, Ni100, Ni120, Cu53.
See Appendix A for input ranges, accuracies etc. associated with the above thermocouple and RTD types. See section 4.13 for details of user linearisations.
For thermocouples, RTDs, User linearisations and retransmitted signals only, the lowest
value of the required linearisation range.
For thermocouples, RTDs, User linearisations and retransmitted signals only, the highest
value of the required linearisation range.
For thermocouples only and RTDs, Select C, F or K.
Maps the process value to (Scale High - Scale Low). For example, an input of 4 to 20mA
may be scaled as 0 to 100% by setting Scale low to 0 and Scale High to 100.
As Scale Low/High but for the secondary input (PV2).
Allows a fixed value to be added to or subtracted from the process variable.
*Note: See section 4.13 for details of the configuration of Range High/Low and Input High/Low
when Type = User 1 to User 4.
Page 78
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11

Offset2
The nature of the secondary input results in an offset being introduced into the process
variable value.
For mA inputs this offset is removed automatically, without user intervention.
For mV inputs the offset depends on the value of the voltage source impedance and is
equal to 199.9V/. This offset can be compensated for either by using this Offset2 parameter, or by carrying out the Input Adjust procedure (Section 4.1.9).
For Dual T/C inputs, it is recommended that the Input Adjust procedure be used instead of Offset2 as the use of Offset2 results in an offset which is non-linear over the
thermocouple range.
Input
Input filter
Damping can be used to filter out noise from slowly

changing signals so that the underlying trend can be
seen more clearly. Valid input values are between 0
and 60 seconds.
Instrument
Response
3x
Input filter
Note: Applying a filter to an input channel can affect the operation of any Rate-of-change alarms
configured to act on that channel.
CJC Type
For thermocouple input types only, this allows the user to select None, Internal, External or Remote 1 to Remote 4. For Dual T/C inputs, both primary and secondary
inputs use the same cold junction.
None: No Cold junction compensation applied.
Internal uses the recorders internal cold junction temperature measurement.
External means that the cold junction is to be maintained by the user, at a fixed, known
temperature. This temperature is entered in the External CJ Temp field which appears
when External is selected.
Remote 1 (2) (3) (4) means that the cold junction temperature is being measured by input channel 1 (2) (3) (4) respectively. (This must be a different channel from that currently being configured).
Ext. CJ Temp
Appears only if CJC type is set to External, and allows the user to enter the temperature at which the external cold junction is being maintained.
Sensor Break Type Defines whether the sensor break becomes active for circuit impedances greater than
expected.
Off disables Sensor Break detection.
Break Low: Sensor break active if measured impedance is greater than the Break Low
impedance value given in table 4.4.1.
Break High: Sensor break active if measured impedance is greater than the Break
High Impedance value given in table 4.4.1.
For mA inputs, limits are applied, such that if the process value lies outside these limits,
a sensor break is assumed to have occurred. These limits are (Input lo - 4% Span) and
(Input high + 6% Span). For example, for a 4 to 20mA signal, an input below 3.36mA
or above 20.96mA will trigger a sensor break event
Range
40mV
80mV
2V
10V
Break Low Break High

impedance Impedance
~5k
~5k
~12.5k
~12.5k
~20k
~20k
~70k
~120k
Table 4.4.1 Minimum impedances for sensor break detection
Note: Break High impedance values would be used typically for sensors which have a high nominal
impedance when working normally
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
Page 79

Sensor Break type (Cont.)
Input sensor break detection is not supported for secondary inputs. The internal circuit
acts as a pull up on the secondary input which therefore saturates high in the event of
a sensor break.
Fault Response
Specifies the behaviour of the recorder if a sensor break is detected or if the input is
over driven (saturated high or low).
None means that the input drifts, with the wiring acting as an aerial.
Drive High means that the trace moves to (Scale High +10%). Drive Low means that
the trace moves to (Scale Low -10%), where the 10% values represent 10% of (Scale
High - Scale Low).
Sensor Break Val
A diagnostic representation of how close the sensor break detection circuitry is to tripping.
Measured ValueThe (read only) input channel measured value before any scaling or linearisation is applied.
Measured Value2 As Measured Value, above but for the secondary input.
Internal CJ temp
The (read only) temperature of the internal cold junction associated with this channel.
Page 80
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
4.4.2 Channel Trend configuration

This area allows the configuration of channel colour and span.
Channel.1.Colour
Wheatgerm
Channel.1.Trend
Colour Wheatgerm
Span Low 0.00
Span High 200.00
Figure 4.4.2a Channel Trend menu
Colour
Span Low/High
Figure 4.4.2b Colour selection
Allows a colour to be specified for the channel. The Scroll key is used to enter the colour swatch page. The up and down arrows are used to scroll through the available colours, with each colour being enlarged for as long as it is selected. Once the required
colour, is reached, the scroll key is used again to return to the Trend Configuration.
Span low and high values.
Note: Trend colours and alarm settings for secondary inputs are configured in the maths channels
to which they are wired.
SPAN EXAMPLE
In an input range of 0 to 600 degrees C, the temperature range between 500 and 600 degrees is of most
interest. In such a case, Span Low is set to 500 and Span High to 600 so that the recorder trends only the
required part of the temperature range, effectively magnifying the area of interest.
Note: Trending is restricted to the PV range (Span High - Span Low), but the instrument can display
values outside this range.
CHANNEL CONFIGURATION EXAMPLE
A type J thermocouple is used to measure a temperature range of 100 to 200 degrees Celsius. This thermocouple output is transmitted to the recorder by a 4 to 20mA transmitter, for display as a value between 0
and 100%.
In Channel.Main, set the following for the relevant channel:
Type
= mA
Units
=%
Input Low
= 4.00
Input high
= 20.00
Shunt
= 250 Ohms
Lin Type
= Type J
Range Low
= 100.00
Range High
= 200.00
Range Units
= C
Scale Low
=0
Scale High
= 100
Other items may be left at their defaults.
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
Page 81
4.4.3 Alarm 1 menu

Allows the alarm characteristics for Alarm 1 to be configured. The figure below shows a typical configuration
page (expanded for clarity). Actual configuration parameters are context sensitive.
Channel.1.Alarm1
Type Abs High
Status Active Not ackd
Threshold 35.00C
Hysteresis 5.00C
Latch Manual
Block Off
Dwell 00:00:00
Acknowledge No
Active Yes
Inactive No
N.acknowledged Yes
Acknowledgement No
Inhibit
Figure 4.4.3 Typical alarm 1 configuration menu
Type
Status
Threshold
Reference
Deviation
Page 82
Select an alarm type from: Off, Abs. High (absolute high). Abs. Low (absolute low),
Dev. High (deviation high), Dev. Low (deviation low), Dev. Band (deviation band),
Rise ROC (rate-of-change: rising), Fall ROC (rate-of-change: falling), Digital High,
Digital Low. See Alarm types, below, for definitions.
Read only. This shows that the alarm is Off, Active, SafeNotAcked or ActiveNotAcked.
For Auto and Manual alarms only, SafeNotAcked means that the alarm trigger
source has returned to a non-alarm state, but the alarm is still active because it has not
been acknowledged. Similarly, ActiveNotAcked means that the source is still active
and the alarm has not been acknowledged. Always shows Off when the alarm is inhibited (see below).
For absolute alarms only, this is the trip point for the alarm. For absolute high alarms, if
the threshold value is exceeded by the process value (PV) of this channel, then the
alarm becomes active, and remains active until the PV falls below the value (threshold hysteresis). For absolute low alarms, if the PV of this channel falls below the threshold
value, then the alarm becomes active and remains active until the PV rises above
(Threshold + Hysteresis).
For deviation alarms only, this provides a centre point for the deviation band.
For deviation high alarms, the alarm becomes active if the process value (PV) rises
above the value (Reference + Deviation) and remains active until the PV falls below (Reference + Deviation - Hysteresis).
For deviation low alarms, the alarm becomes active if the process value (PV) falls below
the value (Reference - Deviation) and remains active until the PV rises above (Reference
- Deviation + Hysteresis).
For deviation band alarms, the alarm is active whenever the process value (PV) lies outside the value (Reference Deviation) and remains active until the PV returns to within
the band, minus or plus Hysteresis as appropriate.
For deviation alarms only, Deviation defines the width of the deviation band, each side
of the Reference value, as described immediately above.
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
4.4.3 ALARM 1 MENU (Cont.)

Hysteresis
For absolute and deviation alarms, this provides a means of preventing multiple alarm
triggering, if the process value is drifting close to the trigger value.
Amount
For rate-of-change alarms only. The alarm becomes active if the process value rises
(Rise ROC) or falls (Fall ROC) by more than the specified Amount within the time period defined in Change Time, below. The alarm remains active until the rate of change
falls below the value (Amount/Change Time) in the relevant sense.
Change Time
Settable to 1 second, 1 minute or 1 hour. See Amount (above).
Average Time
For rate-of-change alarms only. This allows an averaging period (for the process value)
to be entered to reduce nuisance trips due to signal noise, or if the rate of change is
hovering around the trip value.
Latch
None: the alarm remains active until the monitored value has returned to a non alarm
state, when it becomes inactive.
Auto: The alarm remains active until the monitored value has returned to a non alarm
state and the alarm has been acknowledged. Acknowledgement can take place either
before or after the value has returned a non alarm state.
Manual: The alarm remains active until the monitored value has returned to a non alarm
state and the alarm has been acknowledged. Acknowledgement is permitted only after
the value has returned a non alarm state.
Trigger: Not enunciated, this mode is used only to initiate an action defined by user
wiring either using iTools or using the user interface.
Block
Alarms with Block set to On are inhibited until the monitored value has entered the
'safe' condition after a start-up. This prevents such alarms from becoming active whilst
the process is brought into control. If a latching alarm is not acknowledged then the
alarm is re-asserted (not blocked), unless the alarms threshold or reference value is
changed, in which case the alarm is blocked again.
Dwell
Initiates a delay between the trigger source becoming active, and the alarm becoming
active. If the trigger source returns to a non alarm state before the dwell time has
elapsed, then the alarm is not triggered and the dwell timer is reset.
Acknowledge
Select yes to acknowledge the alarm. Display returns to No.
Active
Read only. Shows the status of the alarm as Yes if it is active, or No, if inactive. The active/inactive state depends on the Latch type (above) and acknowledgment status of
the alarm. Always shows No if the alarm is inbited (below).
Inactive
As for Active above, but shows Yes if the alarm in inactive and No if the alarm is active. Always shows Yes if the alarm is inbited (below).
N.acknowledged
As for Active above but shows Yes for as long as the alarm is unacknowledged, and
No as soon as it is acknowledged. Always shows No if the alarm is inbited (below).
Acknowledgement Fleetingly goes Yes on alarm acknowledgement, and then returns to No.
Inhibit
When Inhibit is enabled, (tick symbol), the alarm is inhibited. Status is set to Off; Active and N.acknowledged are set to No, and Inactive is set to Yes. If the alarm is
active when inhibit is enabled, then it becomes inactive until inhibit is disabled, when
its status depends on its configuration. Similarly if the alarm trigger becomes active
when the alarm is inhibited, the alarm remains off until inhibit is disabled, when its status depends on its configuration.
4.4.4 Alarm 2 menu

As above for Alarm 1 menu.
Note: The parameters Acknowledge, Active, Inactive, N(ot) Acknowledged and, Acknowledgement can all be wired to other parameters, so, for example, a relay can be made to operate whilst
the alarm is inactive or whilst it is active or on acknowledgement etc. by wiring the relevant parameter to the relays PV input. See section 7 for details of user wiring.
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
Page 83
4.4.5 Alarm types

The following figures attempt to show graphically the meanings of the alarm parameters which can be set
for the various alarm types available.
ABSOLUTE ALARMS
Absolute high alarm definitions
Absolute low alarm definitions
Symbol
Symbol
Input signal
Threshold
Hysteresis
Hysteresis
Threshold
Input signal
Hysteresis: 0
Dwell: 0
Hysteresis: 0
Dwell: 0
Hysteresis: 0
Dwell: D
Hysteresis: 0
Dwell: D
Hysteresis: yes
Dwell: 0
Hysteresis: yes
Dwell: 0
Hysteresis: yes
Dwell:D
Hysteresis: yes
Dwell:D
= Alarm active
= Alarm active
Figure 4.4.5a absolute alarm parameters
DEVIATION ALARMS
Deviation low alarm definitions
Deviation high alarm definitions
Symbol
Symbol
Hysteresis
Deviation
Reference
Reference
Deviation
Hysteresis
Input signal
Input signal
Hysteresis: 0
Dwell: 0
Hysteresis: 0
Dwell: 0
Hysteresis: 0
Dwell: D
Hysteresis: 0
Dwell: D
Hysteresis: yes
Dwell: 0
Hysteresis: yes
Dwell: 0
Hysteresis: yes
Dwell: D
= Alarm active
Hysteresis: yes
Dwell: D
= Alarm active
Deviation band alarm definitions

Symbol
Hysteresis
Deviation
Reference
Deviation
Hysteresis
Input signal
Hysteresis: 0
Dwell: 0
Hysteresis: 0
Dwell: D
Hysteresis: yes
Dwell: 0
Hysteresis: yes
Dwell: D
= Alarm active
Figure 4.4.5b Deviation alarm parameters
Page 84
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
4.4.5 ALARM TYPES (Cont.)

RATE-OF-CHANGE ALARMS
Rate-of-change alarm definitions
Symbol
Symbol
Amount
Rate-of-change rise active
Rate-of-change fall active

Change Time units
(second, minute or hour)
Present
time
A rate-of-change alarm is active if the monitored value changes by more than one Amount in
less than 1 Change time. Dwell delays the alarm on-time. Averaging removes the effects of
signal noise.
Figure 4.4.5c Rate-of-change alarm parameters
Note: Operation of rate-of-change alarms may be affected if an input filter (section 4.4.1) is applied
to the input signal.
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
Page 85
4.5 VIRTUAL CHANNEL CONFIGURATION

This allows the configuration of maths channels, totalisers and counters. The configuration is divided into
the following areas: Main, Trend, Alarm 1* and Alarm 2*. Items appearing in the Trend, Alarm 1 and
Alarm 2 areas are identical with the equivalent items described in section 4.4 (Input channels), above.
*Note: Virtual channels 16 to 30 (supplied with Modbus Master and EtherNet/IP options only) come
without alarms.
4.5.1 Maths channel configuration

The following maths functions are available (listed in up-arrow scroll order)
Off, Add, Subtract, Multiply, Divide, Group Average, Group minimum, Group maximum, Modbus input,
Copy, Group minimum (latch), Group maximum (latch), Channel maximum, Channel minimum, Channel Average, Configuration revision, Off.
Figure 4.5.1 shows a typical maths channel configuration
Virtual Channel.1.Main
Descriptor VirtualChan1
Type Math
Operation Add
PV 180.36 Units
Status Good
Resolution 2
Units Units
Input1 93.49C
Input2 86.8C
Figure 4.5.1 Maths channel configuration (typical)
Descriptor
Type
Operation
PV
Status
Resolution
Units
Input1
Input 2
Reset
Time Remaining
Period
Page 86
Allows the user to enter a descriptor (20 characters max.) for the maths channel
Math selected for this example. (See sections 4.5.2 and 4.5.3 for totalisers and counters
respectively.)
Allows the user to select the required maths function. See Maths Functions, below.
Read only. Shows the dynamic value of this channel in the units entered in Units below.
Read only. Shows the status of this channel, reflecting the status of the input sources.
Enter the number of decimal places required
Allows a five character string to be entered to be used as the channel units.
The value of input 1. May be entered manually, or it may be wired from another parameter (section 7). Uses the resolution of the source.
As for Input 1, Appears only when the operation requires two inputs.
Allows the user to reset latching functions (e.g. Channel Max) or averaging functions
(e.g. Channel Avg). Reset is carried out by setting the field to Yes, then operating the
scroll key. The display returns to No. Alternatively the function can be reset by another
parameter wired to Reset.
The period of time remaining before the virtual channel performs its operation. For example, the time remaining for the maths channel average operation to sample the input
before performing the calculation.
For averaging functions, this allows a period to be entered, over which the value is to
be averaged. Selectable periods are: 0.125, 0.25, 0.5, 1, 2, 5, 10, 20, 30 seconds, 1, 2,
5, 10, 20, 30 minutes, 1, 2, 6, 12, 24 hours
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
4.5.1 MATHS CHANNEL CONFIGURATION (Cont.)

MATHS FUNCTIONS
Off
Add
Subtract
Multiply
Divide
Group Avg*
Group Min*
Group Max*
Modbus Input
Copy
Grp Min Latch*
Grp Max Latch*
Channel Max
Channel Min
Channel Avg
Config Revision
Out = -9999; status = Off

Out = Input1 + Input2
Out = Input1 - Input2
Out = Input1 x Input2
Out = Input1 Input2. If Input2 = 0, Out = -9999; Status = Bad.
Out = Instantaneous sum of all points in the recording group (except this one and any
channel that has been configured with operation = group average, group minimum,
group maximum, group minimum (latched), group maximum (latched), channel maximum or channel minimum), divided by the number of points in the group (excluding
this one).
Any point that has a status other than Good is excluded from the calculation.
If the group contains no channels, Out = -9999; Status = No data.
Out = Instantaneous value of whichever point (except this one) in the recording group
has the lowest value.
Out = Instantaneous value of whichever point (except this one) in the recording group
has the highest value.
Out = value written to this channels modbus input.
If the comms timeout expires, Out = -9999; status = No data.
Allows an input or other derived channel to be copied.
Out = Lowest value reached by any point in the recording group (except this one) since
last reset.
Out = Highest value reached by any point in the recording group (except this one) since
last reset.
Out = Highest value reached by Input1 since last reset.
If Input1 has a status other than Good, then Out = -9999 and Status depends on the
status of Input1.
Out = Lowest value reached by Input1 since last reset.
status of Input1.
Out = the average value of Input1 over the time specified in Period.
status of Input1.
Out = current Configuration Revision value.
*Note: All Group functions operate on the Recording group, not on the Trend group.
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
Page 87
4.5.2 Totaliser configuration

Totalisers allow the user to maintain a running total of any input channel, or of any maths channel. Using
maths channels, it is possible to totalise combinations of input channels so that, for example, the sum of two
channels or the difference between them could be totalised if required.
The maximum capacity for each totaliser is 1,000,000. This range can be expanded by wiring from the Rollover output of the totaliser to the trigger input of a counter. Wiring is carried out either at the operator interface (section 7) or in iTools (section 6).
The totaliser equation is:
ma t
tot t = tot t 1 + ------------------------------PSF USF
tott
tott-1
mat
PSF
USF
where,
= totaliser value this sample

= totaliser value last sample
= process value this sample
= Period Scaling Factor (Period)
= Units Scaling Factor (Units scaler)
Note: the time between samples is 125ms.
Figure 4.5.2 shows a typical configuration page.

Type Totaliser
Operation On
PV 180.3625 units
Status Good
Totaliser
Input 1
1 to
Resolution 4
Units units
Rollover
6
10
Counter 1
Input 1
Rollover
106
Units Scaler 1
to 1012
Low Cut Off 0

Counter 2
High Cut Off 100000
Input 1
Input1 327.1
1012
Period 1 sec
Preset No
Rollover
to 1018
Using cascaded counters to expand

the totalisation range.
Preset Value 0
Rollover No
Disable
Figure 4.5.2 Typical totaliser configuration menu
Descriptor
Type
Operation
PV
Page 88
Allows the user to enter a descriptor (20 characters max.) for the totaliser.
Select: Math, Counter or Totaliser.
Allows the user to enable (On) or disable (Off) the totaliser.
Read only. Shows the dynamic value of the totaliser.
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
4.5.2 TOTALISER CONFIGURATION (Cont.)

Status
Read only. Shows the status of the totaliser.

Notes:
1. Because of the way in which the totaliser value is stored (IEEE 32-bit floating point), it is possible
that if the current totaliser value is very large, then very small input values can be smaller than the
minimum that can be resolved. In such a case the small value is not totalised, and the status Overflow is set. This should not be confused with Rollover, described below.
2. The incremental value (ma/(PSF*USF)) at the rollover point (1,000,000) should be 1.
Resolution
Units
Units Scaler
Low Cut Off

High Cut Off
Input1
Period
Preset
Preset Value
Rollover
Disable
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
Allows the number of decimal places (up to 6) to be selected for the totaliser.
Allows a units string of up to five characters to be entered for the totalised value.
Allows a units scaler to be selected. If, for example, the input channel has units of litres
per hour, then, if the Units Scaler is set to one, the totalised value will be in litres. If the
Units Scaler is set to 1000, then the totalised value will be in thousands of litres.
Setting the Units Scaler to a negative value, causes the totaliser to decrement rather
than increment.
Used to restrict the input operating range of the totaliser. Minimum value = -100 000
Used to restrict the input operating range of the totaliser. Maximum value = 100 000
The value of the source. May be entered manually, or this parameter can be wired from
an external channel PV.
The totaliser equation works in seconds. If the totalised channel units are other than
per second, a period scaler different from the default (1 sec) must be used. The Period field presents a number of fixed periods from 0.125 seconds to 24 hours for selection.
Setting this to Yes causes the totaliser to adopt the Preset Value. The field returns immediately to No. The totaliser can also be preset by an external source wired to this
parameter.
Allows the entry of a value, from which the totaliser is to start incrementing or decrementing. The direction of the count is set by the sign of the units scaler: positive = increment; negative = decrement.
The maximum capacity of the totaliser is 1 000 000. If, for example, the current totaliser
value is 999 999 and Input 1 = 10, then the next sample will set the totaliser value to
(999,999 +10 - 1,000,000 = 9) and Rollover is set to Yes for one iteration period. This
can be used to increment a counter by wiring the totaliser Rollover parameter to the
Trigger parameter of the counter. The maximum capacity of each counter is also 1 million and if necessary, counters can be cascaded in a similar way, the first counter counting in millions, the second in units of 1012, the third in units of 1018, and so on.
Allows the user temporarily to suspend totalising action. The output retains the pre-disabled value until the totaliser is re-enabled, when it resumes from that value. The totaliser is toggled between being enabled (cross symbol) and disabled (tick symbol) by
means of the scroll key.
Page 89
4.5.3 Counter configuration

This allows the user to set up a counter to count trigger inputs (or it may be incremented from the Configuration page. Maximum count is 1 000 000. Counters can be cascaded by wiring from Rollover of one counter to trigger of the next. Wiring is carried out from the operator interface (section 7) or in iTools (section 6).
For Trend, Alarm 1 and Alarm 2 configurations please see the relevant parts of section 4.4.
Type Counter
Operation On
Counter 1
Input 1
PV 123436 units
Rollover
1 to 10
Status Good
Resolution 0
Units units
Low Cut Off 0
High Cut Off 999999
Input1 015.3241
Preset 0
Preset Value 0
Counter 2
Input 1
Rollover
106
to 1012
Counter 3
Input 1
Rollover
etc.
1012 to 1018
Cascading counters
Trigger No
Rollover No
Disable
Figure 4.5.3 Typical Counter configuration
Descriptor
Type
Operation
PV
Status
Resolution
Units
Low Cut Off
High Cut Off
Input1
Preset
Preset Val
Trigger
Rollover
Disable
Page 90
Allows the user to enter a descriptor (20 characters max.) for the counter.
Select: Math, Counter or Totaliser.
Allows the user to enable (On) or disable (Off) the counter.
Read only. Shows the dynamic value of the counter.
Read only. Reflects the status of the input channel.
Allows the number of decimal places (up to six) to be defined for the channel.
Allows a units string of up to five characters to be entered for the counter value
Specifies a value below which the counter will not decrement.
Specifies a value above which the counter will not increment.
The amount by which the counter is incremented each time Trigger goes high. The value may be entered manually, or wired from another parameter. Negative values cause
the counter to decrement.
Setting this to Yes causes the counter to adopt its Preset Value. The field returns immediately to No. The counter can also be preset by wiring from another parameter.
Allows the entry of a value, from which the counter is to start incrementing or decrementing.
Setting this to 1, causes the current value of the input source to be added to the Counter value. This function can be carried out manually, or the input can be wired from another parameter (section 7.2).
The maximum capacity of the counter is 1 000 000. If, for example, the current value is
999 999 and Input 1 = 15, then the next sample will set the totaliser value to 14
(999,999 +15 - 1,000,000) and Rollover is set to Yes for one iteration period. This can
be used to increment a further counter by wiring Rollover to Trigger.
Allows the user temporarily to suspend counting. The output retains the pre-disabled
value until the counter is re-enabled, when it resumes counting from that value. The
counter is toggled between being enabled (cross symbol) and disabled (tick symbol)
by means of the scroll key.
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
4.6 LOOP OPTION CONFIGURATION

This configuration area allows the user to set up two control loops. This description refers to temperature
control loops, but the configuration parameters apply equally to other types of control. For each loop, channel 1 is assumed to be a heating channel; channel 2 a cooling channel.
The configuration is divided into a number of areas, as shown in the overview below.
Loop
N
N = 1 or 2
Main
Setup
Tune
PID
Setpoint
Output
(Section 4.6.1) (Section 4.6.2) (Section 4.6.3) (Section 4.6.4) (Section 4.6.5) (Section 4.6.6)
Auto/Manual
Loop name
PV
Ch1 Control
Inhibit
Ch2 Control
Target Setpoint Control action
Working SetPB Units
point
Deriv Type
Working Output Setpoint Access
Integral Hold Auto/Man Access
Tune Enable
Low Output
High Output
State
Stage Time
Sched Type
No. of sets
Remote i/p
Active set
Boundary 1-2
Boundary 2-3
PB
Ti
Td
CBH
CBL
MR
LBT
Output Low
Output High
Diagnostics
(Section 4.6.7)
Range Low
Output Low
Error
Range High
Output High
Target Output
SP Select
Ch1/2 Output
Working Out Low
SP1
Ch2 Deadband Working Out High
SP2
Ch1/2 OnOff Hyst
Loop Break
SP Low Limit Ch1/2 Travel time
Prop Output
SP High Limit
Nudge raise
Integral Output
Alt SP Enable
Nudge lower
Deriv Output
Alt SP
Ch1/2 pot pos
Sensor Break
Rate
Ch1/2 pot brk
Sched PB
Rate Done
Pot Brk mode
Sched Ti
SP rate disable
Rate
Sched Td
Servo to PV
SbrkMode
Sched CBH
SP Trim
Sbrk OP
Sched CBL
SP Trim Low
Safe OP
Sched MR
SP Trim High
Manual Mode
Sched Loop Break
Manual Track
Manual Output
Sched Out Low
Setpoint Track
Forced Output
Sched Out High
Track PV
Manual Startup
Track Value
Pff En
SP Int Balance
Power In
Cool type
FF type/gain
FF offset/trim lin
FF OP
Track Output
Track Enable
Rem. Output Low
Rem. Output High
Figure 4.6 Loop configuration overview
For a general discussion of control loops, please see Appendix B to this manual.
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
Page 91
4.6.1 Main menu parameters

Auto/Manual
PV
Inhibit
Target Setpoint
Working Setpoint
Working Output
Integral Hold
Selects Auto(matic) or Manual operation. Auto automatically controls output power in

a closed loop configuration. In manual mode, the operator controls the output power.
The Process Variable input value. The value can be entered by the user, but is most often wired from an analogue input.
Select No or Yes. Yes stops the loop and sets the output to a safe value, this value
being entered as a part of the Output configuration (section 4.6.6). If an output rate limit is set, then the output ramps to the safe level at that rate, otherwise it performs a step
change. If setpoint or manual tracking is enabled (in setpoint configuration section
4.6.5), Inhibit overrides tracking.
If No is selected, the loop operates normally.
Inhibit can be enabled/disabled from an external source.
The value at which the control loop is aiming. SP may be derived from a number of
sources, as described in Appendix B, section B2.5. The value range limited by the setpoint limits (SP High Limit and SP Low Limit) described in section 4.6.5.
A read-only value displaying the current value of setpoint being used by the loop. This
might or might not be the Target setpoint. The value may come from a number of
sources, but is limited by the setpoint limits (SP High Lim and SP Low Lim) described in
section 4.6.5.
The actual working output value before being split into channel 1 and 2 outputs.
Select Yes or No. Yes freezes the integral term at its current value. IntHold ensures
that the power is reapplied smoothly after the loop has been broken for service reasons, for example.
4.6.2 Setup menu parameters

Loop Name
Ch1 Control
Ch2 Control
Control Action
PB Units *
Deriv Type *
Setpoint Access
Page 92
Allows entry of an 11 character name for the loop.

Selects the type of control for channel one from:
Off: Channel is turned off
OnOff: Channel uses on/off control
PID: Proportional + integral + derivative (three-term) control.
VPU: Valve positioning unbounded
VPB: Valve positioning bounded.
Appendix B, Section B2.2 provides more details.
As above, but for loop channel two.
Select Reverse or Direct.
Reverse means that the output is on when the process value (PV) is below the target
setpoint (SP). This is normal for heating control.
Direct means that the output is on when PV is above SP. This is normal for cooling control.
Select Engineering or Percent.
Engineering displays values in (for example) temperature units (e.g. C or F).
Percent displays values as a percentage of loop span (Range Hi - Range Lo).
Error means that changes to PV or SP cause changes to the derivative output. Derivative on error should be used with a programmer since it tends to reduce ramp overshoot. Error provides rapid response to small setpoint changes which makes it ideal
for temperature control systems.
PV means that changes in PV alone cause changes to the derivative output. Typically
used for process systems using valve control, as it reduces wear on the valve mechanics.
Allows setpoint editing permission in the loop display pages (section 3.4.7).
Read/Write allows free access to all users
Read Only allows editing only in Configuration or Supervisor modes.
Operator R/W allows editing in all modes except Logged out.
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
4.6.2 SETUP MENU PARAMETERS (Cont.)

Auto/Man Access
As Setpoint Access above, but for Auto/manual parameter.
*Note: PB Units and Deriv Type appear only if at least one of Ch1 Control and Ch2 Control is set to
PID, VPU or VPB.
4.6.3 Tune menu parameters

Tune Enable
Low Output
High Output
State
Stage
Stage Time
AT.R2G
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
On initiates autotune. Legend changes to Off when autotune is complete. Can be

set to Off manually, to stop the tuning process.
Sets a low limit to be imposed whilst autotune is running. The value must be greater
than or equal to the Output Low value, specified in the Output menu (section 4.6.6).
Sets a high limit to be imposed whilst autotune is running. The value must be less than
or equal to the Output High value, specified in the Output menu (section 4.6.6).
Read only display of autotune progress:
Off. Autotune not running
Ready. Fleeting display. Changes immediately to Running.
Running. Autotune is in progress.
Complete. Autotune completed successfully. This is a fleeting display which changes
immediately to Off.
Timeout, TI Limit and R2G Limit are error conditions described in Appendix B section
B2.4.5. If any of these occurs, tuning is aborted and the PID settings remain unchanged.
A read only display showing the progress of the autotune:
Settling. Displayed during the first minute whilst loop stability is checked (Appendix B,
section B2.4.5)
To SP. Heating or cooling switched on.
Wait min. Power output off.
Wait max. Power output on.
Timeout, TI Limit and R2G Limit are error conditions described in Appendix B section
B2.4.5.
Time into the current stage of the autotune process. 0 to 99999 seconds.
Autotune at R2G. Yes means that the control loop uses the R2G value calculated by
autotune. No causes the loop to use the R2G value entered by the user (PID menu)
calculated as described in Appendix B section B2.4.5.
Page 93
4.6.4 PID menu parameters

Note: If control type is set to Off, or OnOff in the Setup menu, the PID menu contains only the
Loop Break time parameter LBT.
Sched Type
Number of Sets
Remote input
Active Set
Boundary 1-2
Boundary 2-3
PB/PB2/PB3
Ti/Ti2/Ti3
Td/Td2/Td3
R2G/R2G2/R2G3
CBH/CBH2/CBH3
CBL/CBL2/CBL3
MR/MR2/MR3
LBT/LBT2/LBT3
Output Low/2/3
Output High/2/3
Page 94
Selects the type of gain scheduling (section B2.3.7) to be applied.

Off. Gain scheduling not active
Set. The user selects the PID parameter set to be used.
Setpoint. Transfer from one set to the next depends on the setpoint value
PV. The transfer from one set to another depends on the PV value
Error. The transfer between sets depends on the value of the error signal
OP. Transfer depends on the value of the output.
Rem. Transfer is controlled by a remote input.
Allows the number of sets of PID parameters for use in Gain scheduling to be selected.
For Sched Type = Rem only, this shows the current value of the remote input channel
being used to select which set is active. If the remote input value the Boundary 1-2
value (see below) then set 1 is selected. If it is > Boundary 1-2 value but Boundary 23 value then set 2 is used. If the remote value is > Boundary 2-3 value, then set three is
used. If the Remote input is not wired, the value is user editable from the front panel.
The set number currently in use.
For all Sched Types except Set, this allows the user to enter a boundary value, which
means that if the relevant value (SP, PV, Error etc.) rises above this boundary, the loop
switches from PID set 1 to PID set 2. If it falls below the boundary value, the loop switches from set 2 to set 1.
As above but for switching between sets 2 and 3.
Proportional band for set one/two/three. The proportional term in the units (Engineering units or %) set in PBUnits in the Setup menu. See Appendix B section B2.2.2 for
more details.
Integral time constant for set one/two/three. Valid entries are1 to 9999.9 seconds, or
Off. If set Off, then integral action is disabled. Removes steady state control offsets by
moving the output up or down at a rate proportional to the error signal.
Derivative time constant for set one/two/three. Valid entries are 1 to 9999.9 seconds,
or Off. If set Off, then derivative action is disabled. Determines how strongly the controller reacts to a change in the PV. Used to control overshoot and undershoot and to
restore the PV rapidly if there is a sudden change in demand.
Relative cool gain for set one/two/three. Appears only if cooling has been configured
(Ch2 Control not Off or OnOff in Setup menu). Valid entries are 0.1 to 10. Sets the
cooling proportional band which compensates for differences between heating and
cooling power gains.
Cutback high for set one/two/three. Valid entries Auto (3PB) or 0.1 to 9999.9. The
number of display units above setpoint at which the controller output is forced to 0% or
-100% (OP min), in order to modify undershoot on cool down. See section B2.3.2 for
more details.
Cutback low for set one/two/three. Valid entries Auto (3PB) or 0.1 to 9999.9. The
number of display units below setpoint at which the controller output is forced to 100%
(OP max), in order to modify overshoot on heat up. See section B2.3.2 for more details.
Manual reset for set one/two/three. Valid entries 0 to 100%. Introduces a fixed additional power level to the output in order to eliminate steady state error from proportional only control. Applied instead of the integral component when Ti is set to Off.
Loop break time for set one/two/three. valid entries are 1 to 99999 seconds, or Off.
See section B2.3.6 for more details.
Output low limit for set one/two/three. Valid entries are in the range Output High/2/3
to -100.
Output high limit for set one/two/three. Valid entries are in the range Output Low/2/3
to +100
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
4.6.5 Setpoint menu parameters

Range High/Low
SP select
SP1, SP2
SP Low Limit
SP High Limit
Alt SP Enable
Alt SP
Rate
Rate Done
SP Rate Disable
Servo To PV
SP Trim
SP Trim High/Low
Manual Track
Setpoint Track
Track PV
Track Value
SP Int Balance
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
Range limits. Valid entries from 99999 to -99999. Range limits set absolute maxima and
minima for control loop setpoints. If the proportional band is configured as a % span,
the span is derived from the range limits.
Select SP1 or SP2. SP1 is considered to be the primary setpoint for the controller, and
SP2 a secondary (standby) setpoint.
Allows values for Setpoints 1 and 2 to be entered. Valid entries are any within the range
SPHigh Limit to SPLowLim.
Minimum setpoint limit for SP1 and SP2. Valid entries are in the range Range Lo and
SP High Limit
Maximum setpoint limit for SP1 and SP2. Valid entries are in the range Range Hi and
SP Low Limit
Yes enables the alternative setpoint; No disables it. May be wired to an external or
internal source.
When wired this is a read only display of the alternative setpoint value. Otherwise, the
user may insert a value. Valid values are limited by Range Hi and Range Lo.
Sets the maximum rate at which the working setpoint may change in Engineering units
per minute. Often used to protect the load from thermal shock cause by large step
changes in setpoint. Off disables rate limiting.
Read only display. Yes indicates that the working setpoint has completed its change.
No indicates that the setpoint is still ramping.
Appears only if Rate is not Off. Yes disables rate limiting; No enables rate limiting.
If Rate is set to any value other than Off, and if Servo to PV is set to Yes then any
change in the current setpoint value causes the working setpoint to servo to the current
PV before ramping to the new setpoint value.
A positive or negative value added to the setpoint, for local fine tuning. Valid entries
are any value between SP Trim High and SP Trim Low.
Setpoint trim high and low limits
On enables manual tracking to allow the local SP to follow the value of the current PV.
See section B2.5.5 for more details. Off disables manual tracking.
On enables setpoint tracking to allow the local SP to follow the value of the alternative
SP. See section B2.5.4 for more details. Off disables setpoint tracking.
The unit tracks the PV when it is servoing or tracking.
The SP to track in manual tracking
Allows the user to enable (tick) or disable (cross) debump on PV change.
Page 95
4.6.6 Output menu items

Appendix B section B2.6 contains details of the output functions.
Output Low
Output High
Ch1 Output
Ch2 Output
Ch2 Deadband
Rate
Ch1 OnOff Hyst
Ch2 OnOff Hyst
Ch1 Travel Time
Ch2 Travel Time
Nudge Raise
Nudge Lower
Ch1 Pot Pos*
Ch1 Pot Brk*
Ch2 Pot Pos*
Ch2 Pot Brk*
Pot Brk Mode*
The minimum power, or the maximum negative (i.e. cooling) power to be delivered by
the system. The valid input range is -100% and Output High.
The maximum output power to be delivered by channels 1 and 2, where 100% is full
power. The valid input range is Output Low to 100.0%. Reducing this value reduces
the rate of change of the process, but it also reduces the controllers ability to react to
perturbations.
Displays the positive power values used by the heat output. Values range from Output
low to Output high
Displays the cooling power values for channel two. Appears as a value between Output
high and -100%, where -100% represents full cooling power.
A gap (in %) between output 1 switching off, and output 2 switching on, and vice-versa.
Valid inputs are 0 (off) to 100%.
Limit on the rate at which the output from the PID can change. Can be useful in preventing rapid changes in output that could damage the process, heater elements etc.
Appears only if Ch1 Control has been set to OnOff in the Setup menu. Allows the user
to enter a hysteresis value for channel one. Valid entries are 0.0 to 200.0.
Appears only if Ch2 Control has been set to OnOff in the Setup menu. Allows the user
to enter a hysteresis value for channel two. Valid entries are 0.0 to 200.0.
Appears only if Setup menu parameter Ch1 Control is set to VPB or VPU. This is the
valve travel time from closed (0%) to open (100%). In a valve positioning application,
channel 1 output is connected by a single software wire to a Valve Raise/Valve Lower
relay pair. For heat/cool applications, channel 1 is associated with the heating valve.
Valid entries: 0.0 to 1000.0 seconds.
Appears only if Setup menu parameter Ch2 Control is set to VPB or VPU. This is the
valve travel time from closed (0%) to open (100%). For heat/cool applications, channel
2 is associated with the cooling valve. Valid entries: 0.0 to 1000.0 seconds.
Appears only if Setup menu parameter Ch1 Control or Ch2 Control is set to VPU.
If set to Yes, the valve can be moved towards the open position by, for example, a contact closure, an up arrow button operation or a serial communications command. The
default minimum nudge time is 125 ms, but this can be edited in the relevant relay configuration - see section 4.11.2. See also Section B2.6.10 for more Nudge details.
As for Nudge Raise, above but moves the valve towards the closed position.
The position of the channel one actuator as measured by the feedback potentiometer.
On indicates that the input to the relevant channel is open circuit.
The position of the channel two actuator as measured by the feedback potentiometer.
Defines the action to be taken if a potentiometer break is detected:
Raise: opens the valve
Lower: closes the valve
Rest: the valve remains in its current state.
Model: the controller tracks the position of the valve and sets up a model of the system
so that it continues to function if the potentiometer becomes faulty.
* Note: These parameters appear only if the Setup menu parameter Ch1 Control or Ch2 control
(as appropriate) is set to VBP. The Setup menu is described in section 4.6.2.
Page 96
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
4.6.6 OUTPUT MENU PARAMETERS (Cont.)

SBrk Mode
Sbrk OP
Safe OP
Manual Mode
Manual Output
Defines the action to be taken in the event of a sensor break.

Safe: The output adopts the value configured in Sbrk OP, below.
Hold: The output remains at its current level.
The value to be output if a sensor break occurs, and SBrk Mode (above) is set to Safe.
The output level adopted when the loop is inhibited (Main menu section 4.6.1).
Selects the type of transition to occur when changing to manual mode (section 4.6.1):
Track: Whilst in Auto mode, the manual output tracks the control output so that there
is no change of output when manual mode is switched to.
Step: On transition to manual mode, the output is set to the value entered for ForcedOP (below).
Last Man. Out: On transition to manual mode, the output adopts the manual output value as last set by the operator.
The output when the loop is in manual mode. In manual mode the controller limits the
maximum power, but it is not recommended that it be left unattended at high power
settings. It is important that over range alarms are fitted to protect the process.
Note: It is recommended that all processes are fitted with an independent over range detection system.
Forced Output
Forced Manual output value. When Manual Mode = Step, this is the output value
adopted when changing from Auto to Manual mode.
Manual Startup
When set to off (cross symbol), the controller powers up in the same (auto or manual)
mode that obtained when it was switched off. When set to on (tick symbol) the controller always powers up in manual mode.
Pff En
Power feed forward enable. Yes enables power feed forward (adjusts the output signal to compensate for variations is supply voltage. No disables Pff. See section B2.6.6
for further details.
Power In
Read only display of the current supply voltage.
Cool Type
Appears only if Ch2 Control = PID in the setup menu (section 4.6.2) and allows the
user to enter the appropriate type of cooling (section B2.6.7):
Linear: For use when controller output changes linearly with PID demand.
Oil: For oil cooled applications
Water: For water cooled applications
Fan: For forced air cooling.
FF Type
Feed forward type (section B2.6.8):
None: No signal fed forward.
Remote: A remote signal fed forward.
SP: Setpoint is fed forward.
PV: PV is fed forward.
FF Gain
For FF types PV and SP, this scales the feed forward signal.
FF Offset
For FF types PV and SP, this defines the offset of the scaled feed forward signal.
FF Trim lim
For FF types PV and SP, defines symmetrical limits about the PID output which are applied to the scaled feed forward signal.
FF OP
For FF types PV and SP, this is the calculated (scaled, offset and trimmed) feed forward signal. FF OP = FF gain (input + FF Offset)
Track Output
If Track Enable (below) is set to Yes, this is the value for the control output. PID remains in Auto mode and tracks the output. The Track OP value can be wired to an external source, or can be entered via the front panel. Similar to entering manual mode.
Track Enable
When set to Yes, the output follows the Track OP value (above). When subsequently
set to Off the loop makes a bump less return to control.
Rem. Output Low/High Used to limit the output using a remote source. These limits cannot exceed the Output Low and
Output High values described earlier in this section.
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
Page 97
4.6.7 Loop diagnostics

These parameters are read only unless otherwise stated.
Error
Target Output
Working Out Low
Working Out High
Loop Break
Prop. Output
Integral Output
Deriv. Output
Sensor Break
Sched PB
Sched Ti
Sched Td
Sched R2G
Sched CBH
Sched CBL
Sched MR
Sched Loop Break
Sched Out Low
Sched Out High
Page 98
The difference in value between the setpoint and the PV.

The requested control output. The target of the active output if rate limiting is active.
The low limit for the working output. This is the value used to limit the output power of
the loop and is derived from the gain scheduled limit, the remote limit and the safety
limit.
The high limit for the working output. This is the value used to limit the output power
of the loop and is derived from the gain scheduled limit, the remote limit and the safety
limit.
Loop Break Alarm. Becomes active Yes if the loop break time (LBT), set in the PID
menu (section 4.6.4) is exceeded, otherwise No is displayed.
Shows the proportional term contribution to the control output
Shows the integral term contribution to the control output
Shows the derivative term contribution to the control output
Indicates sensor break status. On (tick symbol) indicates a sensor break has occurred;
Off (cross symbol) shows that no sensor breaks have been detected.
The scheduled proportional band for the current PID set.
The scheduled integral time for the current PID set.
The scheduled derivative time for the current PID set.
The scheduled relative cool gain value for the current PID set.
The scheduled cutback high value for the current PID set.
The scheduled cutback low value for the current PID set.
The scheduled manual reset value for the current PID set.
The scheduled loop break time for the current PID set.
The scheduled output low limit for the current PID set.
The scheduled output high limit for the current PID set.
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
4.7 ADVANCED LOOP CONFIGURATION

Similar to the Loop option described above, advanced loop includes the ability to run a cascade loop.
Figure 4.7 is an overview of the configuration menu structure.
Advanced Loop
Main
(Section 4.7.1)
Setup
(Section 4.7.2)
Tune
(Section 4.7.3)
Master PID
(Section 4.7.4)
Slave PID
(Section 4.7.5)
Master PV
Master WSP
Target setpoint
Slave PV
Slave WSP
Working Output
Cascade Mode
Inhibit
Master Int.Hold
Slave Int.Hold
Master Name
Slave Name
Master Loop
Cascade Type
Slave Channel 1
Slave Channel 2
Setpoint access
Mode Access
Tune Type
Tune Enable
Tune Slave R2G
Tune High
Tune Low
Output High
Output Low
State
Stage Time
Diagnostics
Control Action
PB Units
Derivative Type
PB
Ti
Td
CBH
CBL
MR
LBT
Control Action
PB Units
Derivative Type
Sched Type
No of sets
Remote input
Set boundaries
PB
Ti
Td
R2G
CBH
CBL
MR
LBT
Output Low
Output High
Master SP
(Section 4.7.6)
Slave SP
(Section 4.7.7)
Output
(Section 4.7.8)
Diagnostics
(Section 4.7.9)
Range High
Range Low
SP Select
SP1
SP2
SP High Limit
SP Low Limit
Alt SP Enable
Alt SP
Rate
Rate Done
SP Trim
SP Trim High
SP Trim Low
Manual Track
Setpoint Track
Track PV
Track SP
SP Int Balance
Range High
Range Low
SP High Limit
SP Low Limit
Local SP
Alt SP
Remote FF
Remote FF Enable
Remote FF High
Remote FF Low
Manual Track
Output High
Output Low
Ch1 Output
Ch2 Output
Ch2 Deadband
Rate
Sbrk Mode
Sbrk OP
Safe OP
Manual Mode
Manual Output
Forced Output
Manual Startup
Pff En
Line Voltage
Cool Type
FF Type
Track Output
Track Enable
Rem. Output Low
Rem. Output High
Master Eror
Slave Error
(M)Prop. Output
(M)Integral Out
(M)Deriv. Output
(S)Prop. Output
(S)Integral Out
(S)Deriv. Output
Target Output
Loop Break (S)
Loop Break (M)
Sensor Break (S)
Sensor Break (M)
Sched PB
Sched Ti/Td
Sched CBH/CBL
Sched MR
Sched Loop Break
Sched R2G
Sched Out High
Sched Out Low
Working Out Low
Working Out High
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
Page 99
4.7.1 Advanced Loop Main menu

Advanced Loop.Main
Master PV 0.0
Master WSP 16.1
Target setpoint 16.1
Slave PV 0.0
Slave WSP 32.2
Working Output 0.0%
Cascade Mode Slave
Inhibit No
Master Int.Hold No
Slave Int.Hold No
Figure 4.7.1 Main menu
Master PV
Master WSP
Target setpoint
Slave PV
Slave WSP
Working Output
Cascade Mode
Inhibit
Master Int.Hold
Slave Int.Hold
Page 100
This is the process value for the outer (master) loop of cascade control, typically obtained from an analogue input.
This is the (read only) working setpoint for the outer (master) loop of cascade control.
The Master WSP can obtain its value from one of a number of sources such as Internal
SP or Remote SP.
The target setpoint is the value which the outer (master) control loop is attempting to
reach. The value may come from one of a number of sources, such as internal SP or remote SP
This is the process value for the inner (slave) loop of cascade control, typically wired
from an analogue input.
This is the (read only) working setpoint for the inner (slave) loop. The value may come
from one of a number of sources, such as the output from the master loop or the local
slave setpoint.
The actual output of the inner (slave) loop before it is split into channel 1 and channel
2 outputs.
Slave: Also known as Slave Local Auto, this is a single loop controlling with a local setpoint.
Manual: Also known as Slave Manual, this provides a single manual power setting for
the slave.
Cascade: (Full) cascade. In this mode, the master is in Auto mode and provides the
setpoint for the slave.
If set to Yes, both outer (master) loop and inner (slave) loops stop controlling and the
output of the slave loop is set to the safe output value (SafeOp) set in the Output menu
(section 4.7.8).
If set to Yes, the integral component of the outer (master) loop PID calculation is held
at its current value and does not integrate any further disturbances in the plant. Essentially this is equivalent to switching into PD control with a manual reset value pre-configured.
As for Master.IntHold, above, but for the inner (slave) loop.
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
4.7.2 Advanced Loop Setup menu

Advanced Loop.Setup
Master Name Master
Slave Name SLave
Master Loop PID
Cascade Type Full Scale
Slave Channel 1 PID
Slave Channel 2 Off
Setpoint Access Read/Write
Mode Access Read/Write
Figure 4.7.2 Advanced Loop Setup menu
Master Name
Slave Name
Master Loop
Cascade Type
Slave Channel 1
Slave Channel 2
Setpoint Access
Mode Access
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
Allows the user to enter a 10-character string for the Master loop name in the Cascade
display page (section 3.4.8)
As above, but for the slave loop.
The control algorithm for the master control loop (PID only for this software release).
Full Scale: The master generates a setpoint (between SP High limit and SP Low limit)
for the slave.
Trim: The master working setpoint is used as the base setpoint of the slave. This is then
modified by the addition of a setpoint trim, to become the target setpoint for the slave.
The PID output from the master is mapped to range set by Trim Range High and Trim
Range Low.
Selects the channel 1 control algorithm. Different algorithms can be selected for channels 1 and 2. In temperature control applications, channel 1 is usually the heating channel, and channel 2 the cooling channel.
PID: Control Output Configured as PID
VPB: Control Output Configured as Bounded VP. Bounded VP is implemented as a PID
algorithm driving a position loop and is used in systems with position feedback.
Selects the channel 2 control algorithm. Different algorithms can be selected for channels 1 and 2. In temperature control applications, channel 1 is usually the heating channel, channel 2 the cooling channel.
Off: Control output is not configured
PID: Control Output Configured as PID
Allows the user to select Read Only, Read/Write, or Operator R/W for setpoint access, where Operator R/W means that the setpoint is read write for access levels operator and above, but read only in Logged out mode.
As for Setpoint Access, above, but for Auto/Manual mode switching.
Page 101
4.7.3 Advanced Loop Tune menu

Advanced Loop.Tune
Tune Type Master
Tune Enable Off
Tune Slave R2G Standard
Tune High 1372.0
Tune Low -20
Output High 100.0%
Output Low 0.0%
State Off
Stage Reset
Stage Time 0 sec
Diagnostics
Hysteresis 1.0
Band 5.0
Timout 7200 sec
OPDel 0.00
WSP 0.0
ModeMan 1
OP 0.0
MasterTune 0
TuneSlave 0.0
TuneStatus 0
These items appear only if

Tune Type = Master and if
Diagnostics is enabled (ticked)
as shown.
(default = disabled
)
Mod_PV 0.0
Mod_OP 0.0
Arg_PV 0.0
Arg_OP 0.0
Gain 0.0
Phase 0.0
Period 0.0
A1 0 sec
A2 0
Figure 4.7.3 Advanced Loop Tune menu
Tune Type
Tune Enable
Tune Slave R2G
Tune High
Tune Low
Page 102
Select Master or Slave for the Tuning process.

Allows the user to initiate an autotune.
Appears only if the Slave channel 2 is set to PID in the Setup menu (section 4.7.2).
Standard: Normal compensation applied to account for differences in heating and
cooling efficiencies between the heating and cooling channels.
R2GPD: Typically used in heavily lagged systems.
Sets the maximum value for the master loop setpoint during the tuning process.
Sets the maximum value for the master loop setpoint during the tuning process.
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
4.7.3 ADVANCED LOOP TUNE MENU (Cont.)

Output High
Output Low
State
Stage
Stage Time
Diagnostics
Hysteresis
Band
Timeout
OPDel
WSP
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
The maximum output power level which the controller may supply during the tuning
process. If Output High in the Output menu (section 4.7.8) is lower than High Output
then the maximum output is clipped to the Output High value.
The minimum output power level which the controller may supply during the tuning
process. If Output Low in the Output menu ((section 4.7.8) is higher than Low Output
then the minimum output is clipped to the Output Low value.
The current autotune state.
Off: Autotune not enabled
Ready:
Running: Autotune running
Complete: The tune process completed successfully. Fleeting display before returning to Off.
Time-Out: A timeout error has occurred and the autotune has been aborted.
Ti Limit
R2G Limit
Reset
None
Settling
Current SP
New SP
To SP
Wait Max
Wait Min
Store
CoolT
PID
Abort
Complete
NewR2G
1:Half Cycle
2:Full Cycle
3:Full Cycle
4:FinalCycle
5:Calc.
Elapsed time since entering this stage of the tuning.
If this is enabled, a number of further parameters become visible.
This defines the hysteresis of the switch used during master autotuning to generate the
oscillation. It is set as a % of the master PV range (High Range - Low Range) in engineering units being +/- Hysteresis/2 about the tuning setpoint
This defines the band between which the setpoint of the slave controller will be
switched during the master autotune oscillation. It is set as a % of the master PV (High
Range - Low Range) in engineering units being +/- Band/2 about the tuning setpoint.
The actual values applied to the slave may actually be constrained inside this band by
the wind-up control mechanism
Defines the maximum time permitted for each stage of the master tuning.
This is an internal setting of the order of 0.5 during tuning.
This is the actual setpoint around which the autotuning oscillation of the master takes
place. It is used for the calculations associated with the Hysteresis and Band parameters.
Page 103
4.7.3 ADVANCED LOOP TUNE MENU (Cont.)

ModeMan
OP
MasterTune
TuneSlave
Tune Status
Mod_PV
Mod_OP
Arg_PV
Arg_OP
Gain
Phase
Period
A1
A2
Alpha_p
OPss
Alpha
Debug
CycleNo
PBs
TDs
Settle
Page 104
This parameter is used by the master autotune algorithm to communicate with the master loop. Puts master controller into Not-Auto mode
This signal is generated within the master loop during the autotune oscillation. It is used
only as an input to the calculations which generate the slave loop setpoint. It is not the
overall loop output to the load which at all times is under the control of the slave PID
calculations.
Master tune in progress
The autotune process is requesting a slave tune.
This indicates the internal stage of tuning.
0 = Not tuning
1 = Tuning the slave
2 = Tuning the master
3 = Tuning completed
-1 = Tuning has aborted or timed-out
This is the amplitude of the fundamental component of the master PV during the last
cycle of the tuning oscillation.
This is the amplitude of the fundamental component of the master OP during the last
cycle of the tuning oscillation.
This is the argument (phase) of the fundamental component of the master PV during the
last cycle of the tuning oscillation. Value in radians.
This is the argument (phase) of the fundamental component of the master OP during
the last cycle of the tuning oscillation. Value in radians.
This is the gain between the master OP and the master PV over the path via the slave
loop and the load, measured at the fundamental frequency of the autotuning oscillation.
The phase shift in radians between the master OP and the master PV over the path via
the slave loop and the load, measured at the fundamental frequency of the autotuning
oscillation
This is the period of the last cycle of the autotune oscillation, in seconds.
This is the number of samples actually taken in order to determine the fundamental
components of the master PV and OP. The target number is around 100 samples but
the actual number taken may differ slightly from this depending on the load's behaviour.
The A2 parameter is a used for diagnostic purposes. Its value indicates the design
method chosen by the algorithm which depends on the characteristics of the master
tuning oscillation and the measured values of frequency, gain, and phase shift around
the master loop. This influences the choices of the P, I and D values set into the master
loop.
R2GPD tuning diagnostic parameter: Heat time / cool time.
R2GPD tuning diagnostic parameter: Steady state output at the end of the settling period.
R2GPD tuning diagnostic parameter: 1/R2G.
R2GPD tuning diagnostic parameter: 0-PID, 1-PI, 2-PD, 3-P.
R2GPD tuning diagnostic parameter: Number of cycles in auto tune sequence.
R2GPD tuning diagnostic parameter: PBs scales the proportional band which will be
used in the PD settling period.
R2GPD tuning diagnostic parameter: TDs scales the derivative value which will be used
during the PD settling period.
R2GPD tuning diagnostic parameter: Used to scale the last cycle time. The result will be
used for the PD settling time.
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
4.7.4 Advanced Loop Master PID menu

Advanced Loop.Master PID
Control Action Reverse
PB Units Engineering
Derivative Type PV
PB 20.0
Ti 360.0 sec
Td 60.0 sec
CBH Auto
CBL Auto
MR 0.0 %
LBT 100 sec
Error limit 999999.0 sec
Figure 4.7.4 Advanced Loop master PID menu
Control Action
PB Units
Deriv Type
PB
Ti
Td
CBH
CBL
MR
LBT
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11

Percent displays values as a percentage of loop span (Range High - Range Low).
Proportional band. The proportional term in the units (Engineering units or %) set in
PBUnits above. See Appendix B section B2.2.2 for more details.
Integral time constant. Valid entries are1 to 9999.9 seconds, or Off. If set Off, then integral action is disabled. Removes steady state control offsets by moving the output up
or down at a rate proportional to the error signal.
Derivative time constant. Valid entries are 1 to 9999.9 seconds, or Off. If set Off, then
derivative action is disabled. Determines how strongly the controller reacts to the rateof-change in the PV. Used to control overshoot and undershoot and to restore the PV
rapidly if there is a sudden change in demand.
Cutback high. Valid entries Auto (3PB) or 0.1 to 9999.9. The number of display units
above setpoint at which the controller output is forced to 0% or -100% (OP min), in order to modify undershoot on cool down. See section B2.3.2 for more details.
Cutback low. Valid entries Auto (3PB) or 0.1 to 9999.9. The number of display units
below setpoint at which the controller output is forced to 100% (OP max), in order to
modify overshoot on heat up. See section B2.3.2 for more details.
Manual reset. Valid entries -100% to +100%. Introduces a fixed additional power level
to the output in order to eliminate steady state error from proportional only control.
Applied instead of the integral component when Ti is set to Off.
Loop break time. valid entries are 1 to 99999 seconds, or Off. See section B2.3.6 for
more details
Page 105
4.7.5 Advanced Loop Slave PID menu

Advanced Loop.Slave PID
Derivative Type Error
Sched Type Remote
Number of Sets 3
Remote Input 0
Active Set Set3
Boundary 1-2 0
Boundary 2-3 0
PB 20.0
Ti 360 sec
Td 60 sec
R2G 1.0
CBH Auto
CBL Auto
MR 0.0%
LBT 100 sec
Output Low -100%
Output High 100%
PB2 23.0
Ti2 360.0 sec
Output Low 3 -90.0%
Output High 3 90.0%
Figure 4.7.5 Advanced Loop Slave PID Menu (Typical)
Control Action
PB Units
Deriv Type
Page 106

Percent displays values as a percentage of loop span (Range High - Range Low).
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
4.7.5 ADVANCED LOOP SLAVE PID MENU (Cont.)
Sched Type
Number of Sets
Remote input
Active Set
Boundary 1-2
Boundary 2-3
PB/PB2/PB3
Ti/Ti2/Ti3
Td/Td2/Td3
R2G/R2G2/R2G3
CBH/CBH2/CBH3
CBL/CBL2/CBL3
MR/MR2/MR3
LBT/LBT2/LBT3
Output Low/2/3
Output High/2/3
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
Selects the type of Gain Scheduling (section B2.3.7) to be applied.

Off. Gain Scheduling not active
Set. The user selects the PID parameter set to be used.
Setpoint. Transfer from one set to the next depends on the setpoint value
PV. The transfer from one set to another depends on the PV value
Error. The transfer between sets depends on the value of the error signal
OP. Transfer depends on the value of the output.
Rem. Transfer is controlled by a remote input.
Allows the number of sets of PID parameters for use in Gain scheduling to be selected.
For Sched Type = Rem only, this shows the current value of the remote input channel
being used to select which set is active. If the remote input value the Boundary 1-2
value (see below) then set 1 is selected. If it is > Boundary 1-2 value but Boundary 23 value then set 2 is used. If the remote value is > Boundary 2-3 value, then set three is
used. If the Remote input is not wired, the value is user editable from the front panel.
The set number currently in use.
For all Sched Types except Set, this allows the user to enter a boundary value, which
means that if the relevant value (SP, PV, Error etc.) rises above this boundary, the loop
switches from PID set 1 to PID set 2. If it falls below the boundary value, the loop switches from set 2 to set 1.
As above but for switching between sets 2 and 3.
Proportional band for set one/two/three. The proportional term in the units (Engineering units or %) set in PBUnits in the Setup menu. See Appendix B section B2.2.2 for
more details.
Integral time constant for set one/two/three. Valid entries are1 to 9999.9 seconds, or
Off. If set Off, then integral action is disabled. Removes steady state control offsets by
moving the output up or down at a rate proportional to the error signal.
Derivative time constant for set one/two/three. Valid entries are 1 to 9999.9 seconds,
or Off. If set Off, then derivative action is disabled. Determines how strongly the controller reacts to the rate-of-change in the PV. Used to control overshoot and undershoot and to restore the PV rapidly if there is a sudden change in demand.
Relative cool gain for set one/two/three. Appears only if cooling has been configured
(Ch2 Control not Off in the Setup menu). Valid entries are 0.1 to 10. Sets the cooling
proportional band which compensates for differences between heating and cooling
power gains.
Cutback high for set one/two/three. Valid entries Auto (3PB) or 0.1 to 9999.9. The
number of display units above setpoint at which the controller output is forced to 0% or
-100% (OP min), in order to modify undershoot on cool down. See section B2.3.2 for
more details.
Cutback low for set one/two/three. Valid entries Auto (3PB) or 0.1 to 9999.9. The
number of display units below setpoint at which the controller output is forced to 100%
(OP max), in order to modify overshoot on heat up. See section B2.3.2 for more details.
Manual reset for set one/two/three. Valid entries 0 to 100%. Introduces a fixed additional power level to the output in order to eliminate steady state error from proportional only control. Applied instead of the integral component when Ti is set to Off.
Loop break time for set one/two/three. valid entries are 1 to 99999 seconds, or Off.
See section B2.3.6 for more details.
Output low limit for set one/two/three. Valid entries are in the range Output High/2/3
to -100.
Output high limit for set one/two/three. Valid entries are in the range Output Low/2/3
to +100
Page 107
4.7.6 Advanced Loop Master SP menu

Advanced Loop.Master.SP
Range High 1372.0 V
Range Low -200 V
SP Select SP1
SP1 -0.9 V
SP2 0.0 V
SP High Limit 1372.0 V
SP Low Limit -200.0 V
Alt SP Enable No
Alt SP 0.0 V
Rate 123
Rate Done No
SP Rate Disable No
Servo to PV No
SP Trim 0.0 V
SP Trim High 0.0 V
SP Trim Low 0.0 V
Manual Track On
Setpoint Track On
Track PV 31.5 V
Track SP -0.9 V
SP Int Balance
Figure 4.7.6 Advanced Loop Master SP menu
Range High/Low
SP select
SP1, SP2
SP High Limit
SP Low Limit
Alt SP Enable
Alt SP
Rate
Rate Done
Page 108
Range limits. Range limits set absolute maxima and minima for control loop setpoints.
If the proportional band is configured as a % span, the span is derived from the range
limits.
Select SP1 or SP2. SP1 is often considered to be the primary setpoint for the controller,
and SP2 a secondary setpoint.
Allows values for Setpoints 1 and 2 to be entered. Valid entries are any within the range
SPHigh Limit to SPLowLim.
Maximum setpoint limit for SP1 and SP2. Valid entries are in the range Range Hi and
SP Low Limit
Minimum setpoint limit for SP1 and SP2. Valid entries are in the range Range Lo and
SP High Limit
Yes enables the alternative setpoint; No disables it. May be wired to an external or
internal source.
When wired this is a read only display of the alternative setpoint value. Otherwise, the
user may insert a value. Valid values are limited by Range Hi and Range Lo.
Sets the maximum rate at which the working setpoint may change in Engineering units
per minute. Often used to protect the load from thermal shock caused by large step
changes in setpoint. Off disables rate limiting.
Read only display. Yes indicates that the working setpoint has completed its change.
No indicates that the setpoint is still ramping.
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
4.7.6 ADVANCED LOOP MASTER SP MENU (Cont.)

SP Rate Disable
Servo To PV
SP Trim
SP Trim High/Low
Manual Track
Setpoint Track
Track PV
Track SP
SP Int Balance
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
Appears only if Rate is not Off. Yes disables rate limiting; No enables rate limiting.
If Rate is set to any value other than Off, and if Servo to PV is set to Yes then any
change in the current setpoint value causes the working setpoint to servo to the current
PV before ramping to the new setpoint value.
A positive or negative value added to the setpoint, for local fine tuning. Valid entries
are any value between SP Trim High and SP Trim Low.
Setpoint trim high and low limits
On enables manual tracking. Manual tracking removes steps in setpoint when switching between MMan and Auto modes. When the loop is switched from manual to auto
the target setpoint is set to the current PV. See section B2.5.5 for more details. Off
disables manual tracking.
On enables setpoint tracking. When setpoint tracking is enabled, it ensures bumpless transfer in setpoint when seitching from Alternative setpoint to a local setpoint.
See section B2.5.4 for more details. Off disables setpoint tracking.
The unit tracks the PV when it is servoing or tracking.
The SP to track in manual tracking - see Setpoint Track, above.
Allows the user to enable (tick) or disable (cross) debump on PV change.
Page 109
4.7.7 Advanced Loop Slave SP menu

Advanced Loop.Slave.SP
Range High 1372.0 V
Range Low -200 V
SP High Limit 1372.0
SP Low Limit -200
Local SP 1372.0
Trim Range High 100.0
Trim Range Low -100.0
Trim High Limit 100.0 V
Trim Low Limit -100 V
Remote FF 0.0
Remote FF Enable No
Remote FF High 1372.0
Remote FF Low -200
Manual Track Off
Figure 4.7.7a Advanced Loop Slave Setpint menu
Range High/Low
SP High Limit
SP Low Limit
Local SP
Trim Range High
Trim Range Low
Trim High Limit
Trim Low Limit
Remote FF
Remote FF Enable
Remote FF High
Remote FF Low
FF Select
Manual Track
Page 110
Range limits. Valid entries from 99999 to -99999. Range limits set absolute maxima and
minima for control loop setpoints. If the proportional band is configured as a % span,
the span is derived from the range limits.
Maximum setpoint limit for the local setpoint. Valid entries are in the range Range Hi
and SP Low Limit
Minimum setpoint limit for the local setpoint. Valid entries are in the range Range Lo
and SP High Limit
The Slave local setpoint
Trim Range upper limit. Appears only if Cascade type has been set to Trim in the Setup menu.
Trim Range upper limit. Appears only if Cascade type has been set to Trim in the Setup menu.
Maximum value for Trim High value. Appears only if Cascade type has been set to
Trim in the Setup menu.
Minimum value for Trim Low value. Appears only if Cascade type has been set to Trim
in the Setup menu.
The current remote feedforward value
Enables or disables the use of a remote Feedforward signal. Appears only if Cascade
type has been set to Full Scale in the Setup menu.
High limit for the remote feedforward signal value. Appears only if Cascade type has
been set to Full Scale in the Setup menu.
Low limit for the remote feedforward signal value. Appears only if Cascade type has
been set to Full Scale in the Setup menu.
Allows the user to select the source of the feedforward signal from master PV, Master
working setpoint or Remote FF. Appears only if Cascade type has been set to Trim
in the Setup menu.
On enables manual tracking to allow the local SP to follow the value of the current PV
to allow bumpless transfer when switching to Auto. See section B2.5.5 for more details.
Off disables manual tracking.
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
4.7.7 ADVANCED LOOP SLAVE SP MENU (Cont.)

Sbrk Mode
Sbrk SP
This defines the behaviour when the master loop process variable is bad, i.e. the sensor
has failed.
The setpoint for the slave loop when the master sensor has gone into sensor break and
the sensor break mode for the master is set to SbrkSP
0
Feedforward limit
FF High
User Wire
FF Low
FFSw
Slave SP Limit
Master OP
SP High
Scale to slave
PV units
Slave WSP
SP Low
FF_SP
Master Tune OP
Cascade in Full scale
Master WSP
Master PV
User Wire
Trim limit
Master OP
Scale to slave
PV units
Trim
Low
Slave SP Limit
Trim
High
SP High
SP Low
Slave WSP
FF_SP
Master Tune OP
Cascade
inTrim
Mode
Figure 4.7.7b
Slave
Working
setpoint limits
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
Page 111
4.7.8 Advanced Loop Output menu

Appendix B section B2.6 contains details of the output functions.
Advanced Loop.Output
Output High 100 %
Output Low -100 %
Ch1 Output 0.0
Ch2 Output 0.0
Ch2 Deadband Off
Rate 15
Rate Disable No
Ch1 Travel Time 22.0 sec
Ch1 Pot Pos 0
Ch1 Pot Brk Off
Ch2 Pot Pos 0
Ch2 Pot Brk Off
Pot Brk Mode Raise
Sbrk Mode Safe
Sbrk OP 0.0 %
Safe OP 0.0 %
Manual Mode Track
Manual Output 0.0 %
Forced Output 0.0 %
Manual Startup
Pff En Yes
Line Voltage 218 V
Cool Type Linear
FF Type SP
FF Gain 1.000
FF Offset 0
FF Trim Limit 100
FF Remote
FF Output 0 %
Track Output 0
Track Enable Off
Rem. Output Low -100 %
Rem. Output High 100 %
Figure 4.7.8 Advanced Loop Output menu
Page 112
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
4.7.8 ADVANCED LOOP OUTPUT MENU (Cont.)

Output High
Output Low
Ch1 Output
Ch2 Output
Ch2 Deadband
Rate
Rate Disable
Ch1 Travel Time
Ch2 Travel Time
Ch1 Pot Pos*

Ch1 Pot Brk*
Ch2 Pot Pos*
Ch2 Pot Brk*
Pot Brk Mode*
The maximum output power to be delivered by channels 1 and 2, where 100% is full
power. The valid input range is Output Low to 100.0%. Reducing this value reduces
the rate of change of the process, but it also reduces the controllers ability to react to
perturbations and can even cause it to fail to achieve setpoint.
The minimum power, or the maximum negative (i.e. cooling) power to be delivered by
the system.
Displays the positive power values used by the heat output.
Displays the cooling power values for channel two. Appears as a value between Output
High and -100%, where -100% represents full cooling power.
A gap (in %) between output 1 switching off, and output 2 switching on, and vice-versa.
Valid inputs are 0 (off) to 100%.
Limit on the rate at which the output from the PID can change. Can be useful in preventing rapid changes in output that could damage the process, heater elements etc.
The Output Rate limit may be disabled by setting its value to 0.0. Alternatively, for some
applications it is useful to be able to wire to the Output Rate Disable so that Rate can
be switched on/off during stages of the process. For example, Rate Disable can be
used with the programmer event outputs to control the output rate of change during a
particular segment.
Appears only if Setup menu parameter Slave Channel 1 is set to VPB. This is the valve
travel time from closed (0%) to open (100%). In a valve positioning application, channel
1 output is connected by a single software wire to a Valve Raise/Valve Lower relay pair.
For heat/cool applications, channel 1 is associated with the heating valve. Valid entries:
0.0 to 1000.0 seconds.
Appears only if Setup menu parameter Slave Channel 2 is set to VPB . This is the valve
travel time from closed (0%) to open (100%). For heat/cool applications, channel 2 is
associated with the cooling valve. Valid entries: 0.0 to 1000.0 seconds.
The position of the channel one actuator as measured by the feedback potentiometer.
The position of the channel two actuator as measured by the feedback potentiometer.
Defines the action to be taken if a potentiometer break is detected:
Raise: opens the valve
Lower: closes the valve
Rest: the valve remains in its current state.
Model: the controller tracks the position of the valve and sets up a model of the system
so that it continues to function if the potentiometer becomes faulty. This does not mean
that the potentiometer can be omitted with VPB, as the accuracy of valve position control is reduced without it.
* Note: These parameters appear only if the Setup menu parameter Slave Channel 1 or Slave
Channel 2 (as appropriate) is set to VPB. The Setup menu is described in section 4.7.2.
SBrk Mode
Sbrk OP
Safe OP
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
Defines the action to be taken in the event of a sensor break.

Safe: The output adopts the value configured in Sbrk OP, below.
Hold: The output remains at its current level.
The value to be output if a Slave sensor break occurs, and SBrk Mode (above) is set to
Safe.
The output level adopted when the loop is inhibited (Main menu section 4.7.1).
Page 113
4.7.8 ADVANCED LOOP OUTPUT MENU (Cont.)

Manual Mode
Manual Output
Selects the type of transition to occur when changing to manual cascade mode (section
4.7.1):
Track: Whilst in Auto mode, the manual output tracks the control output so that there
is no change of output when manual mode is switched to.
Step: On transition to manual mode, the output is set to the value entered for ForcedOP (below).
Last Man. Out: On transition to manual mode, the output adopts the manual output value as last set by the operator.
The output when the loop is in manual mode. In manual mode the controller limits the
maximum power, but it is not recommended that it be left unattended at high power
settings. It is important that over range alarms are fitted to protect the process.
Note: It is recommended that all processes are fitted with an independent over range detection system.
Forced Output
Forced Manual output value. When Manual Mode = Step, this is the output value
adopted when changing from Auto to Manual mode.
Manual Startup
When set to off (cross symbol), the controller powers up in the same (auto or manual)
mode that obtained when it was switched off. When set to on (tick symbol) the controller always powers up in manual mode.
Pff En
Power feed forward enable. Yes enables power feed forward (adjusts the output signal to compensate for variations is supply voltage. No disables Pff. See section B2.6.6
for further details.
Line Voltage
Read only display of the current supply voltage.
Cool Type
Appears only if Ch2 Control = PID in the setup menu (section 4.7.2) and allows the
user to enter the appropriate type of cooling (section B2.6.7):
Linear: For use when controller output changes linearly with PID demand.
Oil: For oil cooled applications
Water: For water cooled applications
Fan: For forced air cooling.
FF Type
Feed forward type (section B2.6.8):
None: No signal fed forward.
Remote: A remote signal is fed forward.
SP: Setpoint is fed forward.
PV: PV is fed forward.
FF Gain
For FF types PV and SP, this scales the feed forward signal.
FF Offset
For FF types PV and SP, this defines the offset of the scaled feed forward signal.
FF Trim Limit
For FF types PV and SP, defines symmetrical limits about the PID output which are applied to the scaled feed forward signal.
FF Remote
Allows another value from the strategy to be used as the primary control variable in the
feed forward strategy. The gain and offset are not applied to the remote value.
FF Output
For FF types PV and SP, this is the calculated (scaled, offset and trimmed) feed forward signal. FF OP = FF gain (input + FF Offset)
Track Output
If Track Enable (below) is set to Yes, this is the value for the loop output to track when
output track is enabled.
Track Enable
When set to Yes, the output follows the Track OP value (above). When subsequently
set to Off the loop makes a bumpless return to control.
Rem. Output Low/High Used to limit the output when using a remote source. These limits cannot exceed the
Output Low and Output High values described earlier in this section.
Page 114
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
4.7.9 Advanced Loop Diagnostics menu

Master Error
Slave Error
(M)Prop. Output
Calc OP
HiSatLim
LoSatLim
OPPID
The difference in value between the setpoint and the PV for the Master (Read only).
The difference in value between the setpoint and the PV for the Slave (Read only).
Shows the proportional term contribution to the control output of the Master (Read only).
Shows the integral term contribution to the control output of the Master (Read only).
Shows the derivative term contribution to the control output of the Master (Read only).
Shows the proportional term contribution to the control output of the Slave (Read only).
Shows the integral term contribution to the control output of the Slave (Read only).
Shows the derivative term contribution to the control output of the Slave (Read only).
The requested control output. The target of the active output if rate limiting is active.
(Read only.)
Loop Break Alarm (Read only). Becomes active Yes if the relevant loop break time
(LBT1/2/3), set in the Slave PID menu (section 4.7.5) is exceeded, otherwise No is displayed.
Loop Break Alarm (Read only). Becomes active Yes if the Master loop break time (LBT),
set in the Master PID menu (section 4.7.4) is exceeded, otherwise No is displayed.
Indicates Slave sensor break status (Read only). On (tick symbol) indicates a sensor
break has occurred; Off (cross symbol) shows that no sensor breaks have been detected.
Indicates Master sensor break status (Read only). On (tick symbol) indicates a sensor
break has occurred; Off (cross symbol) shows that no sensor breaks have been detected.
The scheduled proportional band for the current PID set.
The scheduled integral time for the current PID set.
The scheduled derivative time for the current PID set.
The scheduled cutback high value for the current PID set.
The scheduled cutback low value for the current PID set.
The scheduled manual reset value for the current PID set.
The scheduled loop break time for the current PID set.
The scheduled relative cool gain value for the current PID set.
The scheduled output high limit for the current PID set.
The scheduled output low limit for the current PID set.
The low limit for the working output (Read only). This is the value used to limit the output power of the loop and is derived from the gain scheduled limit, the remote limit and
the safety limit.
The high limit for the working output (Read only). This is the value used to limit the output power of the loop and is derived from the gain scheduled limit, the remote limit and
the safety limit.
Master FB is the value of the master control output after limiting and is used for Integral
desaturation.
Master P+I+D
HiSatLim is an internally generated limit
LoSatLim is an internally generated limit
Master control output It will be the same as Calc OP if the master is not in Cutback
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
Page 115
(M)Integral Out
(M)Deriv. Output
(S)Prop. Output
(S)Integral Out
(S)Deriv. Output
Target Output
Loop Break (S)
Loop Break (M)

Sensor Break (S)
Sensor Break (M)
Sched PB
Sched Ti
Sched Td
Sched CBH
Sched CBL
Sched MR
Sched Loop Break
Sched R2G
Sched Out High
Sched Out Low
Working Out Low
Working Out High
Master FB
4.8 PROGRAMMER CONFIGURATION

The programmer option allows the user to configure a setpoint program with one or two channels, as required. The program can be run from the Programmer operator display page (section 3.4.9) or can be controlled by inputs received from other parameters. In particular, the programmer is intended for use with the
loop or advanced loop options.
The programmer configuration is separated into a number of areas as depicted in the overview below. The
segment configuration (ramp type etc.) is carried out from the programmer edit page, also described in section 3.4.9.
Programmer
Features
Section 4.8.1)
FTP
(Section 4.8.2)
Set Up
(Section 4.8.3)
Run
(Section 4.8.4)
Holdback
PV Event
User Value
Messages
FTP Store
IP Address
Username
password
Channels
Prog Mode Access
Prog Edit Access
Prog Store Access
Rate Resolution
Ch1(2) Units
Ch1(2) Resolution
Ch1(2) Servo To
Ch1(2) PV Input
Ch1(2) SP Input
Power Fail Action
Max Events
Reset Events 1 to 8
Reset Ch1(2) UV
Run
Hold
Reset
Run reset
Run Hold
Wait Digital
Wait analogue 1(2)
Advance
Operation
Status
Mode
Status
Ch1(2) PSP
Segment Name
Segment type
Segment Time Left
Segment Time Run
Prog Time Left
Prog Time Spent
Prog Time Run
Duration
Ch1(2) TSP
Ch1(2) rate
Ch1(2) Time
Cycles Left
Ch1(2) User Val
Ch1(2) PV Event
Event 1 to 8
End Output
Page 116
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
4.8.1 Programmer Features menu

This menu allows the user to enable/disable some of the items presented to the user in the Programmer edit
page described in section 3.4.9. Features are enabled/disabled by using the up/down arrow keys to highlight the required item and then using the scroll button to toggle between enabled (tick) and disabled
(cross). Typically, items would be left disabled in order to reduce the number of configuration fields presented to a user who may not need all such features.
Programmer.Features
Holdback
PV Event
User Value
Messages
FTP Store
Figure 4.8.1 Programmer features menu
Holdback
PV Event
User Value
Messages
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
Holdback pauses the program (freezes the Programmer setpoint (PSP) and the time remaining parameters) if the difference between the Process value (PV) and the PSP exceeds a user-specified amount (deviation). The program remains paused until the PV
returns to within the specified deviation.
In ramp or step segments, holdback indicates that the PV is lagging the SP by more than
the specified amount and that the program is waiting for the process to catch up. In a
dwell segment, holdback is used to guarantee that a work piece stays at set-point within
a specified tolerance for the specified dwell duration.
Holdback type and deviation value are configured, on a per program basis, to be applied to either the entire program or to individual segments. See Program edit (section
3.4.9) for details.
A PV Event is available for each channel in every segment except for Wait and Go Back
segment types. A PV Event is an absolute or deviation analogue alarm on the channel
PV, and can be used to trigger a secondary process, or to trigger an analogue alarm.
A user value can be entered for every segment (except for Wait or Go Back types) and
when the segment is entered, this value is transferred to the associated User Value Output parameter, which could be wired to another parameter to form part of an application strategy.
Table 4.8.1, below, lists the programmer specific events that generate messages that
are displayed in the message summary and recorded into the history file.
It is also possible to trigger custom messages from any of the programmer outputs via
user wiring. The program name and segment name can be embedded in custom messages by inserting the modbus address for the current program / segment name parameters in square brackets i.e.:
[<current_program_name_modbus_address>]
[<current_segment_name_modbus_address>]
Page 117
4.8.1 PROGRAMMER FEATURES CONFIGURATION (Cont.)

Event
Program Run
Program End
Program Hold
Program Resume
Program Reset
Segment Start
Advance
Holdback
PV Event
Message
<program_name>: Run
<program_name>: Complete
<program_name>: <segment_name>: Hold
<program_name>: <segment_name>: Resume
<program_name>: <segment_name>: Reset
<program_name>: <segment_name>: Segment Start
<program_name>: <segment_name>: Advanced
<program_name>: <segment_name>: Holdback:Channel No.
<program_name>: <segment_name>: PV Event:Channel No.
Table 4.8.1 Programmer messages
FTP Store
If this feature is enabled, an FTP menu item appears in the top level Programmer configuration menu. FTP allows the user to enter communications parameters for the host
computer which is to act as the ftp server.
FTP Store allows the user to set-up a centralised program store from which several instruments can select their program.
Notes
1 A maximum of 100 entries is supported on all drives. Directory trees are supported for both USB
and FTP, and if the root of the drive contains only files (no directories), then up to 100 files are
listed. If the root of the drive contains directories then each directory can contain 100 entries (but
one of these entries will be taken up by '..' to return to the directory above).
2 Program files are in compressed XML (.uipz) file format.
3 When a program is selected from an FTP server a local copy of the program file is made within
the instrument before being processed. It should be noted that the number of program files in
the internal 'user' drive does not affect this local copy, and therefore a program from an FTP server can be loaded, even when the internal user drive is full.
4 As the loaded program resides in the current program database it is automatically included in a
clone file. In addition, program files stored in the internal program drive are included in a clone
file (refer to Cloning, below).
5. On the internal program drive only a flat directory structure is supported. However, full tree directories are supported on both the USB memory stick and FTP server (accessed via the HMI File Explorer).
6. It is not possible to store program files on an external device. Programs selected from an external
device can, however, be stored in the internal program store.
7. It is not possible to select a program from an external device over comms and iTools.
CLONING
Each program file stored locally on the instrument IS included in a clone file as a Binary Large Object (BLOB),
similar to the Graphical Wiring Editor layout. Each program file BLOB contains the program filename.
When loading a clone file, existing programs in the instruments internal drive are deleted, and program file
BLOB(s) in the clone are reformatted into program files by the instrument.
Page 118
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
4.8.2 Programmer FTP menu

Note: This menu item is accessible only if FTP has been enabled in the Programmer features menu
described above.
Programmer.FTP
IP Address 123.123.123.111
Username anonymous
Password **********
Figure 4.8.2 Programmer FTP menu
IP Address
Username
Password
The IP address of the FTP server.

The User Name entered when setting up the FTP server
The password associated with the above User Name.
Section C2 gives an example of how to set up an FTP server using Filezilla
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
Page 119
4.8.3 Programmer Setup menu

Programmer.Set Up
Channels 2
Prog Mode Access Operator
Prog Edit Access Supervisor
Prog Store Access Supervisor
Rate Resolution 1
Ch1 Units Deg C
Ch1 Resolution 0
Ch1 Servo To SP
Ch1 PV Input 23.7 V
Ch1 SP Input 0 Deg C
Ch2 Units l/sec
Ch2 Resolution 1
Ch2 Servo To PV
Ch2 PV Input 35.9 V
Ch2 SP Input 431 l/sec
Power Fail Action Ramp back
Max Events 2
Reset Event 1
Reset Event 2
Reset Ch1 UV 0.0
Reset Ch2 UV 0.0
Run No
Hold No
Reset Yes
Run Reset No
Run Hold No
Wait Digital
Wait Analog 1 10
Wait Analog 2 39.7
Advance No
Operation Select...
Status Success
Figure 4.8.3 Programmer Set Up menu
Channels
The number of channels to be profiled. 1 = single channel mode, 2 = dual channel

sync-all mode
Prog Mode Access Sets the minimum access level (Logged off, Operator, Supervisor) for allowing changes
to the current program mode (run, hold or reset)
Page 120
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
4.8.3 PROGRAMMER SET UP MENU (Cont.)

Prog Edit Access
Prog Store Access

Rate Resolution
Ch1 Units
Ch1 Resolution
Ch1 Servo To
Ch1 PV Input
Ch1 SP Input
Ch2 Units
Ch2 Resolution
Ch2 Servo To
Ch2 PV Input
Ch1 SP Input
Power Fail Action
Sets the minimum access level (Logged off, Operator, Supervisor, Engineer) for loading
programs, and for allowing edits to the current program including permission to advance a segment.
Sets the minimum access level (Logged off, Operator, Supervisor, Engineer) that allows
users to copy, store and delete programs.
Sets the resolution (0 to 4 decimal places) of ramp rates when read from / written to via
scaled integer comms.
Five-character (max.) descriptor for channel 1 units. If wired, the units will be those of
the wire source.
Number of decimal places for channel 1 value. If wired, the value will be that of the wire
source.
Determines whether the programmer starts running channel 1 from the control loop's
configured set-point (servo to SP), or from the current process value (servo to PV).
Various programmer functions (for example Ch1 Servo to PV), require the PV value of
the loop that the programmer is trying to control. The parameter is normally wired from
the loop's Track PV parameter.
Various programmer functions (for example Ch1 Servo to SP), require the SP value of
the loop that the programmer is trying to control - it is normally wired from the loop's
Track SP parameter.
As Ch1 Units, above but for channel 2. Appears only if Channels is set to 2.
As Ch1 Resolution, above, but for channel 2. Appears only if Channels is set to 2.
As Ch1 Servo To, above, but for channel 2. Appears only if Channels is set to 2.
As Ch1 PV Input, above, but for channel 2. Appears only if Channels is set to 2.
As Ch1 SP Input, above, but for channel 2. Appears only if Channels is set to 2.
If the power supplied to the instrument is interrupted, the program status is retained
and when power is restored, the instrument performs the selected power fail action.
Continue: The programmer set-point returns immediately to its last value prior to the
power down and the program continue to run from that point.
Reset: The program resets.
Ramp Back: The programmer servos the programmer set-point to the channel PV, and
ramps to the target set-point at the rate prior to the power-fail. The time remaining for
the segment is recalculated.
Notes:
1. If the interrupted segment was a 'time to target' ramp, then when power is returned the calculated
ramp rate prior to the interruption is used.
2. If the interrupted segment was Dwell, then the ramp rate is determined by the previous ramp
segment. On achieving the dwell set-point, the dwell period continues.
3. If a previous ramp segment does not exist (i.e. the first segment of a program is a dwell), the dwell
continues at the 'servo to PV' programmer set-point.
Max Events
Reset Event N
Reset Ch1 UV
Reset Ch2 UV
Run
Hold
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
Configures the maximum number of event outputs (0 to 8).

Sets the state of event output N when the program is in reset. Appears only if Max
Events is > (N-1).
Enter the value to be written to user value 1 when the program is in reset. Appears only
if User Value feature is enabled in Programmer.Features configuration (section 4.8.1).
Enter the value to be written to user value 2 when the program is in reset. Appears only
if User Value feature is enabled in Programmer.Features configuration (section 4.8.1)
and Channels = 2
The input that causes the programmer to place the current program in Run mode.
The input that causes the programmer to place the current program in Hold mode.
Page 121
4.8.3 PROGRAMMER SET UP MENU (Cont.)

Reset
Run Reset
Run Hold
Wait Digital
Wait Analog 1
Wait Analog 2
Advance
Operation
Status
Amended
File Error Status
Page 122
The input that causes the programmer to place the current program in Reset mode.
Dual functionality input, that causes the programmer to place the current program in
Run or Reset mode.
Dual functionality input, that causes the programmer to place the current program in
Run or Hold mode.
The Boolean input that is used in Wait segments.
The analogue input associated with channel 1 that is used in wait segments.
The analogue input associated with channel 2 that is used in wait segments. Appears
only if Channels = 2
The input to advance the current segment
Program file operation selection parameter. See Program editing (section 3.4.9) for
further details
Status indication of the selected file operation.See Program editing (section 3.4.9) for
further details
Indicates whether the current program has been amended since being loaded (Comms
only)
File operation error status (Busy, OK, Load Open File Error, Store Open File Error, Delete File Fail, Copy File Fail, Invalid Format, Invalid Device, Invalid Version, Invalid Num
Channels, Parameter Write Fail, Store Operation Did Not Complete, Load Operation
Did Not Complete, Delete Operation Did Not Complete, Copy Operation Did Not
Complete, Invalid Filename, Unspecified Error). Available only over Comms as the error is displayed on the display screen.
'Parameter Write Fail' indicates that one or more program/segment parameters failed
to be written to during a 'Load' operation. This is generally caused by a program that
contains features (i.e. Holdback, User Values, PV Events) which are disabled in the instrument's Programmer block, or the program contains more Event Outputs than configured in the instrument's Programmer block.
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
4.8.4 Programmer Run menu

Programmer.Run
Mode Run
Status Running
Ch1 PSP 43.3 V
Ch2 PSP 42.9 V
Segment Heat Init
Segment Type Ramp
Segment Time Left 00:00:33
Segment Time Run 00:01:17
Prog Time Left 00:18:48
Prog Time Spent 00:00:33
Prog Time Run 00:00:53
Duration 00:00:14
Ch1 TSP 43.3 V
Ch1 Time 00:01:00
Ch2 TSP 10.5 V
Ch2 Time 00:02:23
Cycles Left 10
Ch1 User Val 7
Ch2 User Val 3
Ch1 PV Event
Ch2 PV Event
Event 1
Event 2
End Output
Figure 4.8.4 Programmer Run menu
Mode
Status
Ch1 PSP
Ch2 PSP
Segment
Segment Type
Seg Time Left
Seg Time Run
Prog Time Left
Prog Time Spent
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
Current program mode (Run, Hold, Reset).

Current program status (Running, Holding, Holdback, Waiting, Reset, Complete)
The output setpoint for channel 1.
The output setpoint for channel 2. Appears only if Channels = 2 in the Set Up menu
(section 4.8.3).
Name of the current segment as entered in the Program Edit page (section 3.4.9)
Current segment type as entered in the Program Edit page (section 3.4.9)
Indicates the minimum amount of time left in the current segment.
The length of time that the current segment has been running. This value does not include time spent in Hold, Holdback or Waiting
Shows the minimum amount of time left before the program completes. Each segment
can be up to 500 hours in length. The maximum display is 500 hours, and if the length
of the entire program is greater than this, the display remains at 500 until the remaining
time falls below 500 hours.
Indicates the length of time the current program has been running, including time
spent in Hold, Holdback or Waiting
Page 123
4.8.4 PROGRAMMER RUN MENU (Cont.)

Prog Time Run
Duration
Ch1 TSP
Ch1 Time
Ch2 TSP
Ch2 Time
Cycles Left
Ch1 User Val
Ch2 User Val
Ch1 PV Event
Ch2 PV Event
Event 1 to 8
End Output
Page 124
The length of time the current program has been running. This value does not include
time spent in Hold, Holdback or Waiting
For Dwell segments only, this is the dwell duration.
For Ramp and Step segments, this is the current target setpoint for channel 1.
For Ramp segments, this is the configured time for channel 1 to reach it's Target Setpoint (TSP)
For Ramp and Step segments, this is the current target setpoint for channel 2. Appears
only if Channels = 2 in the Programmer Set Up menu (section 4.8.3).
For Ramp segments, this is the configured time for channel 2 to reach it's Target Setpoint (TSP). Appears only if Channels = 2 in the Programmer Set Up menu (section
4.8.3)
The number of Go Back cycles remaining before the Go Back loop ends.
The value of user value 1 in the current segment. Appears only if the User Value feature
is enabled in the Programmer Features menu (section 4.8.1).
The value of user value 2 in the current segment. Appears only if the User Value feature
is enabled in the Programmer Features menu (section 4.8.1) and if Channels = 2 in
the Programmer Set Up menu (section 4.8.3)
The state of channel 1 PV event (Off = Cross symbol, On = Tick). Appears only if the PV
Event feature is enabled
The state of channel 2 PV event (Off = Cross symbol, On = Tick). Appears only if the
PV Event feature is enabled and if Channels = 2 in the Programmer Set Up menu
(section 4.8.3).
The state of event output 1 to 8 for the current segment (Off = Cross symbol, On = Tick).
The number of events appearing is defined in the Programmer Set Up menu (section
4.8.3) (Max Events)
The output that is set by the end segment (Off = Cross symbol, On = Tick).
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
4.8.5 Connecting the programmer to a loop

Below are some examples of how programmers and loops may be soft-wired together so that the programmer has access to the Loop PV and Loop setpoint. The examples are taken from iTools (section 6), but may
be carried out through User Wiring (section 7) if more convenient.
Figure 4.8.5a Advanced loop to Programmer basic wiring
Figure 4.8.5b Programmer to Loop basic wiring
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
Page 125
4.8.5 CONNECTING THE PROGRAMMER TO A LOOP (Cont.)
Figure 4.8.5c Dual programmer to two loops basic wiring
Page 126
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
4.8.6 Configuration by Modbus Comms

It is possible to configure, store, delete, or load a program via Modbus comms by setting the Program and
Segment parameters using either their scaled integer or native modbus addresses (section 5.3).
EXAMPLE 1: CONFIGURE A PROGRAM
To configure a simple Ramp-Dwell-Ramp program via modbus comms:
Set Segment.1.Type (address 15040) to Ramp (1)
Set Segment.1.Ch1TSP (address 15042) to 60.0 (600 - 1dp)
Set Segment.1.Ch1Time (address 15044) to 60s (60s)
Set Segment.2.Type (address 15088) to Dwell (2)
Set Segment.2.Duration (address 15089) to 120s (120)
Set Segment.3.Type (address 15136) to Ramp (1)
Set Segment.3.Ch1TSP (address 15138) to 0.0 (0 - 1dp)
Set Segment.3.Ch1Time (address 15140) to 180s (180)
EXAMPLE 2: STORE A PROGRAM
To store the current program:
Set Programmer.FileList.FilenameEntry (address 27281) to required filename (e.g. George)
Set Programmer.Setup.Operation (address 14912) to Store (4)
Read Programmer.Setup.Operation (address 14912) until it returns Select (1)
Read Programmer.Setup.Status (address 14913) to get the status of the store operation (Success = 1, Failed
= 2)
EXAMPLE 3 LIST STORED PROGRAMS
To get a listing of stored program files:
Set Programmer.FileList.Operation (address 14976) to Get Listing (1)
Read Programmer.FileList.Operation (address 14976) until it returns Complete (0)
Read Programmer.FileList.Filename1 to 100 parameters (address 30976 - 31075)
Note: for each filename parameter perform a 21 register block read starting from the base address of the
parameter, 1st null string indicates end of List.
EXAMPLE 4: LOADING PROGRAMS
To load a program:
Get a listing as described above
Set Programmer.FileList.FilenameEntry (address 27281) to the filename to be loaded (e.g. George)
Set Programmer.Setup.Operation (address 14912) to Load (2)
Read Programmer.Setup.Operation (address 14912) until it returns Select (1)
Read Programmer.Setup.Status (address 14913) to get the status of the store operation (Success = 1, Failed
= 2)
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
Page 127
4.9 MODBUS MASTER CONFIGURATION

Modbus master configuration is divided into two areas: a) setting up the slave(s), including diagnostics, and
b) defining the locations of the parameters to be read. Figure 4.9 shows an overview.
Section 3.4.12 shows the Modbus Master display page, and describes the configuration options available
there.
Note: Versions 2.40 to 2.50 of the Mini8 Controller, and versions 2.70 to 3.20 of the Model 3550 controller are supported. It is not guaranteed that later software versions of these instruments will be
fully compatible.
Programmer

Programmer
Modbus Master
Slave 1
Slave 2
Modbus Master
EtherNet/IP
EtherNet/IP
Digital I/O
Digital I/O
User Lin
User Lin
Custom Message
Custom Message
Zirconia
Zirconia
Main
Section 4.9.1
Diagnostics
Section 4.9.2

Programmer
Data
Section 4.9.3
Modbus Master
Data items that have been configured as
other than Off are indicated by a green
triangle in the top right-hand corner
EtherNet/IP
Digital I/O
User Lin
Custom Message
Zirconia
Figure 4.9 Modbus Master configuration top level menus
Page 128
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
4.9.1 Slave Main menu

This allows the IP address, Unit ID and other communications parameters to be entered for Slaves 1 and 2.
Modbus Master.Slave.1.Main
Descriptor nanodac
Online
Comms Failure No
IP Address 123.123.123.111
Unit ID 1
Search Device No
Search Result Available
Profile nanodac
Retries 3
Timeout (ms) 250
Max Block Size 124
High Priority 0.125 sec
Medium Priority 1 sec
Low Priority 2 secs
Available Priority selections

Seconds Minutes
0.125
1
0.25
2
0.5
5
1
10
2
20
5
30
10
20
30
Hours
1
Figure 4.9.1 Modbus Master Slave 1 configuration (Slave 2 similar)
Descriptor
Online
Comms Failure
IP Address
Unit ID
Search Device
Search Result
Profile
Retries
Timeout
Max Block Size
High Priority
Medium Priority
Low Priority
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
A descriptor for this instrument. For use in Modbus communications, this is not the
same as the Name which appears in the Instrument Info configuration (section 4.14).
Disabled by default (Cross symbol). Must be enabled (highlighted using the down arrow, then edited by the scroll button) to allow the remaining configuration items to appear and to allow data transactions be processed. Setting the slave offline temporarily
disables data transactions - it does not reconfigure them.
Active (yes) if a data item has failed to respond after all retries.
The IP address of the Slave device
The Unit Id or Modbus address to use in each data transaction with the slave device.
Limits are 1 to 255
Setting this to Yes searches the network to see if the device with the specified IP address and Unit ID is available. If so, the descriptor will be overwritten to indicate what
type of device has been found.
The status of the selected 'Search Device' request (Searching, Available, Unreachable).
Search activity is indicated by a rotating animated display in the Searching field.
A number of profiles are held within the instrument that match a selection of known devices. If the device is known, its type, model number etc. is displayed. If the device is
unknown, 3rd Party appears instead.
The number of times (0 to 3) to re-send a data transaction to the device if no response
is received within the configured timeout period (below).
The timeout period for each Modbus transaction in ms
The maximum number of registers (16bit words) that a single data transaction is permitted to contain
The interval rate between each high priority data transaction. Default = 0.125 second.
The interval rate between each medium priority data transaction. Default = 1 second.
The interval rate between each low priority data transaction. Default = 2 seconds.
Page 129
4.9.1 SLAVE MAIN MENU (Cont.)

PRIORITY LEVELS
Three levels of update rate can be entered for use in data configuration (section 4.9.3), to define how often
a value is read or written. In order to optimise performance, it is recommended that the slowest rate consistent with requirements be selected. The intervals are selected from a scroll list see figure 4.9.1 above.
4.9.2 Slave Diagnostics menu

Modbus Master.Slave.1.Diagnostics
Actual High 0.125
Actual Medium 1.000
Actual Low 2.000
Device Status Success
Loopback Test No
Total 15428
Successful 15428
Failures 0
Retries 0
Timeouts 0
Illegal Function 0
illegal Address 0
Ilegal Data 0
Slave Failure 0
No Gateway Path 0
Reset No
Figure 4.9.2 Diagnostics menu
Note: Diagnostic values are reset on power up
Actual High
Actual Medium
Actual Low
Device Status
Page 130
The high priority rate that this slave is actually running at. This can never be faster than
the high priority rate that was configured for this device (Slave Main menu, above), but
if the master is heavily loaded the rate may be lower than that specified.
The medium priority rate that this slave is running at. This can never be faster than the
medium priority rate that was configured for this device (Slave Main menu, above), but
if the master is heavily loaded the rate may be lower than that specified.
The actual low priority rate that this slave is running at. This can never be faster than the
low priority rate that was configured for this device (Slave Main menu, above), but if the
master is heavily loaded the rate may be lower than that specified.
The status of the last transaction to this slave
Success: The transaction was successfully actioned by the slave device
Timeout: There was no response from the slave device to a given request within the
configured time
Illegal Address: The request to the slave device contained an invalid modbus address.
The address may be for a read only parameter
Illegal Value: The request to the slave device contained invalid data for the specified
parameter
Bad Sub: The sub function code in the request was invalid
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
4.9.2 SLAVE DIAGNOSTICS MENU (Cont.)

DEVICE STATUS (Cont.)
Loopback Test
Total
Successful
Failures
Retries
Timeouts
Illegal Function
Illegal Address
Illegal Data
Slave Failure
No Gateway Path
Master Rejects
Reset
Idle: This data item is currently idle and not communicating with the slave device
Illegal Code: The slave does not support the function code transmitted by the master.
Pending: The request is waiting to be sent, the most likely cause being that the slave
device has not been set to online
If set to Yes, Sends a function code 8 transaction to the slave, and waits for a response.
A count of all the transactions sent to the slave including reads, writes both good and
failed transactions.
A count of all the successful transactions sent to the slave.
A count of all the unsuccessful (failed) transactions sent to the slave. May be caused by
Illegal Function, Illegal Address etc. failures, as detailed below
The number of transactions that were re-sent because of timed out responses from the
slave devices.
A count of all the transactions sent to the slave for which no response was received within the configured timeout period.
A count of all the transactions sent to the slave that the slave claimed contained an
invalid function code. Exception code (1).
invalid Modbus register address. Exception code (2).
invalid value. Exception code (3)
A count of all the times this slave device has failed to communicate. Exception code (4)
A count of all the times it has not been possible to access the slave device as it is on another network that requires a gateway for access
A count of all the transactions that the Modbus Master has refused to send to the slave
due to invalid configuration data
A one shot action that immediately resets all diagnostics counts.
4.9.3 Modbus master data configuration

This is the area of configuration in which the individual data items are selected for transmission across the
Modbus master communications link. The configuration fields that appear depends on the parameter selected, so the examples given here will probably not match those that appear to the user. The parameters
that appear in the parameter List scroll menu depends on the slave model.
EXAMPLE 1: TARGET SP1 WITH NANODAC SLAVE
Modbus Master.1.Data

Programmer
Descriptor Data Item 1
Data
Modbus Master
PV 0.00
EtherNet/IP
Status Success
Digital I/O
Slave Device nanodac
User Lin
Parameter List Target SP

Number 1
Custom Message
Priority Medium
Zirconia
Figure 4.9.3a Target Setpoint
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
Page 131
4.9.3 MODBUS MASTER DATA CONFIGURATION (Cont.)

EXAMPLE 2 USER DEFINED PARAMETER
This allows the user to enter a Modbus address (decimal) and a data type in order to read the value of a parameter from or write a parameter value to the slave. Modbus address and data types must be obtained
from the documentation supplied with the slave device. For convenience, this example uses a nanodac as
the slave; table 5.3 of this document providing the required data.
Programmer
Data
Descriptor Ch1 PV
Modbus Master
PV 23.6
EtherNet/IP
Status Success
Digital I/O
User Lin
Custom Message
Zirconia
Slave Device Slave 2

Parameter List User Defined
Modbus Address 256
Function Code Read Input (4)
Data Type REAL
Priority Medium
Figure 4.9.3b User defined parameters
DATA PARAMETERS
This lists all possible configuration fields that might appear, not just those shown in the examples above.
Descriptor
Up to 20 characters used to describe the current data item (used in the Modbus Master
user page (section 3.4.12)).
PV
The process value currently being read from the selected slave. Visible only if data item
is not an alarm type. The value must be wired to a virtual channel with Operation =
Copy if it is to be trended and/or recorded.
Sys Alm status
The status (e.g. None, Active) of the data item. Visible only for specific read profiles. The
value must be wired to a virtual channel with Operation = Copy if it is to be trended
and/or recorded.
Chan. Alm Status
The status of the data item. Visible only for specific read profiles. The value must be
wired to a virtual channel with Operation = Copy if it is to be trended and/or recorded.
Set
Allows the user to set an on/off value. Visible only for specific write profiles.
Mode
Allows the user to set an auto/manual value. Visible only for specific write profiles.
Value
Configured or wired value to be sent to the selected slave. This parameter is available
only with function codes 6 & 16
Fall Back Value
The value to be sent to the selected slave if the 'Value' parameter is wired and has a status other than GOOD_PV. This parameter is available only with function codes 6 & 16
It is not possible to wire Fall Back Value from another parameter and it can be configured only manually
Send
A one shot action that sends the data in the 'Value' parameter or the 'Fall Back Value'
parameter (depending upon the status of 'Value') to the selected slave. This is classed
as an acyclic write and so is available only for function codes 6 & 16. The 'Priority' parameter must be set to 'Acyclic'
Page 132
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
4.9.3 MODBUS MASTER DATA CONFIGURATION (Cont.)

Status
Slave Device
Parameter List
Number
Modbus Address
Function Code
The status of the last transaction sent to the selected slave

Success: The transaction was successfully actioned by the slave device
Timeout: There was no response from the slave device to a given request within the
configured time
Illegal Address: The request to the slave device contained an invalid modbus address.
The address may be for a read only parameter
Illegal Value: The request to the slave device contained invalid data for the specified
parameter
Bad Sub: The sub function code in the request was invalid
Idle: This data item is currently idle and not communicating with the slave device
Illegal Code: The slave does not support the function code transmitted by the master.
Pending: The request is waiting to be sent, the most likely cause being that the slave
device has not been set to online.
A list of available slaves that this data is to communicate with.
List of parameters available for the selected slave devices profile. These parameters require no user configuration.
The channel, loop or group etc. instance.
The Modbus register address that this data is to be read or written to. Limits are 0 65535
The function code to use, this determines if the data is going to be read or written to
the selected slave. Supported function codes are:
Code
1
2
3
4
Data Type
Bit Position
Scaling
Priority
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
Description
Code
Description
Read contiguous status coils
5 Write a single coil on or off
Read contiguous discrete inputs
6 Write to a single register
Read contiguous holding registers
8 Loopback test
Read contiguous input registers
16 Write to contiguous registers
The data type that defines how this data is going to be represented. The data types listed below are supported.
8-bit signed byte (BYTE)
8-bit unsigned byte (UBYTE)
16-bit signed integer (INT)
16-bit unsigned integer (UINT)
32-bit signed long (DINT)
32-bit unsigned long (UDINT)
32-bit floating point IEEE (REAL)
32-bit signed long (little Endian, word swapped) (DINT (Swap))
32-bit unsigned long (little Endian, word swapped) (UDINT (Swap))
32-bit floating point IEEE (little Endian, word swapped) (REAL (swap))
Bit from register (BIT)
By default all 16 & 32 bit data types (unless specified) will be transmitted in Big Endian
format, where the most significant byte in the value is sent first. Byte Ordering: (for big
Endian) (0x12 sent first)
16-bit
0x1234
0x12, 0x34
32-bit
0x12345678
0x12, 0x34, 0x56, 0x78
The bit in the register to be extracted, this is only available if the 'Data Type' selected is
'BIT In Register'
The decimal placing for scaled 16 bit data types. Visible depending on the 'Data Type'
selected.
The frequency with which this data will be managed. See Priority Levels, in section
4.9.1, above.
Page 133
4.10 ETHERNET/IP CONFIGURATION

This area of configuration allows the Client user to set up an EtherNet/IP communications link with up to
two Server units. The Server user has a more limited range of configurable items.
Note: Implicit I/O is used for continuous real-time transfer of multiple data items from instrument to
instrument. Explicit I/O is used as a one-shot transfer of a single data item. See section 3.4.13 for
further details.
Figure 4.10 shows that the configuration is split into three areas: Main, Implicit Inputs and Implicit Outputs,
but it should be noted that the implicit inputs and implicit outputs are read only, as these can be configured
only by using iTools, as described in the EtherNet/IP display mode description (section 3.4.13).
Channel Main
Virtual Channel Implicit Inputs
Loop Implicit Outputs
Section 4.10.1
Section 4.10.2
Section 4.10.2
Advanced Loop
Programmer
Modbus Master
EtherNet/IP
Figure 4.10 Client configuration
4.10.1 Ethernet/IP Configuration Main menu

EtherNet/IP.Main
IO Status Code Online
Implicit I/O 123.123.123.223
Explicit 1 No connection
Explicit 2 No Connection
Mode Client (IO)
Server Address 123.123.123.223
Input Instance 100
Size (Bytes) 100
Output Instance 112
Size (Bytes) 100
Connection Type Point2Point
Priority Scheduled
RPI (ms) 1000
Reset Comms No
Figure 4.10.1 Ethernet/IP Main menu
Page 134
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
4.10.1 ETHERNET/IP CONFIGURATION MAIN MENU (Cont.)

Net Status Code
IO Status Code
Tag Status code
Implicit I/O
Multicast
Explicit 1
Explicit 2
Mode
Server Address
Input Instance
Size (bytes)
Output Instance
Size (bytes)
Connection Type
Priority
Rpi
Reset Comms
Slot Number
Network status (Server only)

Offline: nanodac online but there are currently no CIP connections
Online: nanodac online with at least 1 CIP connection
Connection Timeout: The connection has timed out
Duplicate IP: A duplicate IP address has been detected on the network
Initialisation: nanodac is initialising comms
IO status (Client (IO) only). As above.
Tag status (Client (Tags) only. See table 4.10.1, below.
Connected IO server IP address
Connected IO server IP address (only if multicast selected)
Connected client/server IP address
Connected client/server IP address
Modes of operation: Server, Client (IO) or Client (Tags)
IO Server IP address (Client mode only)
Input class instance number (client mode only)
The size in bytes of data that the client is expecting to read from the implicit input.
Output class instance number (client mode only)
The size of data that the client is expecting to write to the server.
Connection type (client mode only)
Connection priority (client mode only)
IO connection speed (client mode only)
Applies all changes to the EtherNet/IP stack at the same time. Or can be used to reset
communications using the current configuration
PLC slot number (zero indexed) when communicating using tags
4.10.2 Implicit inputs/outputs

This display provides a read-only display of the values in the input and output data tables. Parameters are
placed in the input and output tables using the proprietary software tool called iTools, as described in section 3.4.13.
4.10.3 Explicit inputs/outputs

See section 3.4.13 for details.
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
Page 135
4.10 ETHERNET/IP CONFIGURATION (Cont.)

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
64
65
Success. Service was successful

Connection Failed. A connection in the path failed
Invalid Parameter. A parameter associated with the request was invalid
Memory Unavailable. No available resources in the server to service the request
Path Segment Error. The syntax of all or some of the path was not understood
Path Dest. Error. The path references an unknown object, class or instance
Partial Transfer. Only part of the expected data was transferred
Connection Lost. The messaging connection was lost
Service Unsupported. Undefined service for requested object
Invalid Attribute. Invalid attribute data detected
Attribute Error. An attribute in the response has a non zero status
Already Requested. The object is already in the mode/state being requested
Object Conflict. The object cannot perform the requested service
Already Exists. The requested instance or object already exists
Attribute Error. Request to modify a non modifiable attribute received
No Privileges. Permission/Privilege check failed
State Conflict. The current state or mode prohibits the execution of the requested service
Reply To Large. Response buffer too small for response data
Fragmented Value. For example this service request will return only half a REAL data type
Not Enough Data. The service does not provide enough data to complete the request
Invalid Attribute. Requested attribute is not supported
Too Much Data. The service supplied more than was expected
Object Non-Exist. The object specified does not exist in the device
Seq. Fragmentation. The fragmentation sequence for this service is not active
No Attribute Data. The attribute data for this object was not saved at the server prior to this request service
Data Store Failure. The attribute data for this object was not saved due to a failure during the attempt
Routing Failed. The service request packet was too large for transmission on a network in the path to the destination. The routing device was forced to abort the service
Routing Failed. The service request packet was too large for transmission on a network in the path to the destination. The routing device was forced to abort the service
Missing Attribute. The service did not supply an attribute in a list of attributes that was needed by the service
to perform the requested behaviour
Invalid Attribute. The service is returning the list of attributes supplied with status information for those attributes that were invalid
Embedded Tag Error. An embedded service resulted in an error. This is most commonly an incorrectly formatted tag name
Vendor Error. A vendor specific error has encountered
Invalid Parameter. A parameter associated with the request was invalid
Write Once Error. An attempt to write to a write once only parameter occured
Invalid Reply. An invalid reply was received
Buffer Overflow. The message received is larger than the receiving buffer
Format Error. The format of the received message is not supported
Key Path Failure. The key segement in the path does not match destination key
Path Size Error. The size of the path in the request is too large
Unexpected Attribute. Unable to set the attribute at this time
Invalid Member Id. The requested member id does not match class object
Member Is R/O. A request to modify a R/O member was received
Group 2 Server. Group 2 DeviceNet server response
Translation Error. A CIP modbus translator request failed
Attribute Is R/O. A request to read a non readable attribute was received
No Tags Found. There were no tags configured in the input or output tables
Invalid Config. The total length in characters of all the tags in this table will cause the PLC to exceed its internal
buffer of 500 bytes. To eliminate this problem, reduce the length of some or all tag names
Table 4.10.1 Tag Status code definition
Page 136
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
4.11 DIGITAL I/O

This area of configuration allows the digital I/O types to be selected.
Notes:
1. If 2A2B is set to Valve Raise, then 3A3B is set to Valve Lower. Similarly, if relay 4AC is set to
Valve Raise, then relay 5AC is set to Valve Lower.
When the loop channel output is wired to the PV input of a Valve Raise function, then the PV input
of the associated Valve Lower function becomes unavailable for wiring, and both outputs are controlled by the loop as a pair, using only the single wire.
2. See section B2.6.11 for a description of time proportioning.
Note: These fields do not

appear if they contain I/O
type DC output.
Instrument
Network
Group
Channel
Virtual Channel
Loop
Digital I/O
1A1B
2A2B
LALC (Dig.In)
3A3B
LBLC (Dig.In)
4AC (Relay)
5AC (Relay)
Figure 4.11 Digital I/O top level menu
4.11.1 Digital input/output

This applies to signals at terminals 1A/1B (figure 2.2). Highlight 1A1B, then operate the scroll key to reveal
the configuration menu.
Module Ident
Dig IO
Type
On Off O/P, Time Prop O/P or Contact I/P (default)
PV
For inputs, 0 = contact is open; 1 = contact is closed. For On Off O/P, a value 0.5
drives the output high, otherwise, the output is driven low. For Time Prop O/P, the value is the demanded output %.
Min On Time
For Type = Time Prop O/P only, this allows a minimum on time to be specified. Configurable range = 0.1 to 150 seconds
Invert
Inverts the output sense for digital outputs; or the input signal for digital inputs.
Output
Off = output being driven low; On = output being driven high. Does not appear for
Type = Contact I/P
4.11.2 Relay outputs

This may apply to terminal pairs 1A1B, 2A2B, 3A3B, 4AC, 5AC (figure 2.2). Highlight the relevant terminal
pair, then operate the scroll key to reveal the configuration menu.
Module Ident
Relay
Type (2A2B, 4AC) On Off O/P (default), Time Prop O/P, Valve Raise (not if DC output I/O fitted).
Type (3A3B, 5AC) On Off O/P (default), Time Prop O/P. The 3A3B relay is not fitted if DC Output I/O is
fitted.
PV
For On Off O/P, a value 0.5 closes the relay contacts, otherwise, the contacts are
open. For Time Prop O/P, the value is the demanded output %.
Min On Time
For Type = Time Prop O/P only, this allows a minimum on time to be specified to reduce
relay wear. Configurable range = 0.1 to 150 seconds
Invert
Inverts the output sense for the relays (not applicable if Type = Valve Raise).
(Continued)
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
Page 137
4.11.2 RELAY OUTPUTS (Cont.)

Inertia
For Type = Valve Raise only, this allows a value to be entered (in seconds) to take into
account valve run-on.
Backlash
For Type = Valve Raise only, this allows a value to be entered (in seconds) in order to
compensate for backlash in the valve linkage.
Standby action
For Type = Valve Raise only, this specifies the valve action when the instrument is in
standby mode.
Continue: Output continues at the demanded level
Freeze: The valve stops being driven.
Output
Off = relay contacts open; On = relay contacts closed.
4.11.3 Digital inputs

This applies to terminals pairs LALC, LBLC (figure 2.2). Highlight the relevant terminal pair, then operate the
scroll key to reveal the configuration menu.
Module Ident
Dig.In
Type
Contact I/P
PV
0 = contact is open; 1 = contact is closed.
Invert
Inverts the sense of the input.
4.11.4 Digital outputs

This applies to terminal pair 2A2B (figure 2.2). Highlight 2A2B, then operate the scroll key to reveal the configuration menu.
Module Ident
Dig.Out
Type
On Off O/P, Time Prop O/P or Valve Raise
PV
For On Off O/P, a value 0.5 drives the output high, otherwise, the output is driven low.
For Time Prop O/P, the value is the demanded output %.
Min On Time
For Type = Time Prop O/P only, this allows a minimum on time to be specified. Configurable range = 0.1 to 150 seconds
Invert
Inverts the output sense for digital outputs; or the input signal for digital inputs.
Inertia
For Type = Valve Raise only, this allows a value to be entered (in seconds) to take into
account valve run-on.
Backlash
For Type = Valve Raise only, this allows a value to be entered (in seconds) in order to
compensate for backlash in the valve linkage.
Standby action
For Type = Valve Raise only, this specifies the valve action when the instrument is in
standby mode.
Continue: Output continues at the demanded level
Freeze: The valve stops being driven.
Output
Off = output being driven low; On = output being driven high.
Page 138
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
4.12 DC OUTPUT
This option provides a voltage (terminals 3A3B only) or mA output. Terminal location is shown in figure 2.2.
CAUTION
There are no mechanical interlocks to prevent a chassis with the dc output option being fitted into a
sleeve or case which has previously been wired for the standard relay output. Before fitting the
chassis into the case, it should be ensured that the terminal wiring is not attached to live voltage supplies, as such voltages may cause permanent damage to the instrument.
4.12.1 Configuration display

As shown in the figure below, highlight the required DC output, then operate the scroll button to reveal the
configuration page.
DC Output.3A3B (DC Op)
Network
3A3B (DC.Op)
Group
2A2B (DC.Op)
Channel
1A1B (DC.Op)
Virtual Channel
Loop
Digital I/O
DC Output
Type V
PV 0.00
Status Good
OP Adjust State Adjusted
Resolution 2
Output Low 0.00
Output High 10.00
Appears only if
the DC Output
has been adjusted (section
4.1.10)
Scale Low 0.00

Scale High 100.00
Fallback PV 0.00
Measured Value 0.00
Figure 4.12.1 DC Output option configuration page (typical)
PARAMETERS
Type
PV
Status
OP Adjust State
Resolution
Output Low
Output High
Scale Low
Scale High
Fallback PV
Measured Value
Select V(olts) (3A3B only) or mA as the output type.

Input value to the function. Normally wired to a suitable parameter.
The status of the input parameter.
Adjusted. Appears only if the Output Adjust facility (section 4.1.10) has been used.
The number of decimal places to be used for this configuration item.
The minimum output value in Volts or mA as appropriate
The maximum output value to be output in Volts or mA as appropriate.
See SCALING INFORMATION below.
See SCALING INFORMATION below.
The output value when the status of the input parameter is not good.
The Voltage or mA value appearing at the output terminals
Note: The output voltage or current can be calibrated by using the output adjust procedure
described in section 4.1.10.
SCALING INFORMATION
When PV = Scale Low, Output = output low value. When PV = Scale high, Output = output high value. The
PV is mapped via the scale range onto the output range according to the equation:
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
Page 139
4.13 USER LIN

Allows the entry of up to four user linearisation tables, any one of which can be selected as Lin Type in Channel configuration (section 4.4.1). Configuration consists of defining the number of points to be included (2
to 32) and then entering an X and a Y value for each point, where X values are the inputs and the Y values
are the resulting outputs.
4.13.1 User linearisation table rules

1.
Tables must be monotonic - i.e. there may not be more than one X value with the same Y value
assigned to it.
2 Each X value must be greater than the preceding one.
3. Each Y value must be greater than the preceding one.
4. If units other than temperature units are to be displayed, the channel scale high and scale low values
should be set to the same as the range high and low values, and the required scale units entered.
Figure 4.13.1 shows the first part of the configuration table for an imaginary cylinder example.
Point
pair
User Lin.1
X1 0.00
Y1 0.00
X2 0.50
Y2 0.07
X3 1.00
Volume (cubic metres)
Num. of Points 12
Y3 0.58
Depth (metres)
Figure 4.13.1 User Linearisation table example
When configuring a channel (section 4.4.1) to use a User linearisation table:

If Type = Thermocouple or RTD, then Range High/Low must be set to the highest and lowest Y values to be
used, respectively. The instrument automatically looks up the associated X mV or Ohms values.
If Type = mV, V or mA, then Range High/Low must be set to the highest and lowest Y values to be used,
respectively. Input High/Low should be set to the highest and lowest X values in the table, respectively.
4.14 CUSTOM MESSAGES

This feature allows the entry of up to 10 messages for sending to the history file, when triggered by a wired
source (e.g. an alarm going active).
The messages of up to 100 characters each are entered using either the virtual keyboard, described in section 3.6, or by means of iTools configuration software.
Up to three parameter values may be embedded in messages in the format [Address], where Address is the
decimal Modbus address of the parameter (section5.3). E.G. [256] embeds Channel 1 PV.
Page 140
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
4.15 ZIRCONIA BLOCK OPTION

This option allows the calculation of Carbon Potential, Dew point or Oxygen concentration. A zirconia (oxygen) probe consists of two platinum electrodes bonded to a pellet or cylinder of zirconia. At elevated temperatures, such a probe develops an emf across it which is proportional to the probe absolute temperature
and to the log of the difference in oxygen partial pressure between its two ends.
The temperature of the probe is normally measured using a type K or type R thermocouple. The temperature effect on the thermocouple is such, that for successful operation, the probe temperature must be greater than 973K (700C).
4.15.1 Definitions
TEMPERATURE CONTROL
The sensor input of the temperature loop may come from the zirconia probe but it is common for a separate
thermocouple to be used. The controller provides a heating output which may be used to control gas burners. In some applications a cooling output may also be connected to a circulation fan or exhaust damper.
CARBON POTENTIAL CONTROL
The zirconia probe generates a millivolt signal based on the ratio of oxygen concentrations on the reference
side of the probe (outside the furnace) to the amount of oxygen in the furnace.
The controller uses the temperature and carbon potential signals to calculate the actual percentage of carbon in the furnace. This second loop generally has two outputs. One output is connected to a valve which
controls the amount of an enrichment gas supplied to the furnace. The second output controls the level of
dilution air.
SOOTING ALARM
In addition to other alarms which may be detected by the controller, the instrument can trigger an alarm
when the atmospheric conditions are such that carbon will be deposited as soot on all surfaces inside the
furnace. The alarm may be wired to an output (e.g. relay) to initiate an external alarm.
AUTOMATIC PROBE CLEANING
The instrument has a probe clean and recovery strategy that can be programmed to occur between batches
or be manually requested. At the start of the cleaning process a snapshot of the probe mV is taken, and a
short blast of compressed air is used to remove any soot and other particles that may have accumulated on
the probe. A minimum and maximum cleaning time can be set by the user. If the probe mV has not recovered to within 5% of the snapshot value within the maximum recovery time set then an alarm is given. This
indicates that the probe is ageing and replacement or refurbishment is due. During the cleaning and recovery cycle the PV is frozen, thereby ensuring continuous furnace operation. The Pv Frozen parameter can be
used in an individual strategy, for example to hold the integral action during cleaning.
ENDOTHERMIC GAS CORRECTION
A gas analyser may be used to determine the carbon monoxide (CO) concentration of the endothermic gas.
If a 4 to 20mA output is available from the analyser, this can be applied to the instrument to adjust the calculated % carbon reading automatically. Alternatively, this value can be entered manually.
CLEAN PROBE
As these sensors are used in furnace environments they require regular cleaning. Cleaning (Burn Off) is performed by forcing compressed air through the probe. Cleaning can be initiated either manually or automatically using a timed period. During cleaning PV Frozen is set to Yes.
OXYGEN CONCENTRATION
In order to measure oxygen concentrations, one end of the probe is inserted into the atmosphere to be
measured, whilst the other is subjected to a reference atmosphere. For most applications, air provides a
suitable reference (reference input = 20.95 for air).
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
Page 141
4.15.2 Configuration
The configuration parameters appear in one of three lists as shown in Figure 4.15.2a.
Zirconia
Gas Ref
Main
Probe type
Resolution
Min Calc Temp
Tolerance
Oxygen Exp
Temp Input
Probe Input
Temp Offset
Probe Offset
Carbon Potential
Dew Point
Oxygen
Soot Alarm
PV Frozen
Probe Status
Balance Integral
Carb Act CO O2
Probe state
Oxygen Type
CO Local
CO Remote
CO Remote Enable
H2 Local
H2 remote
H2 Remote Enable
H2 In use
Clean
Clean Frequency
Clean Time
Min Rcv Time
Max Rcv Time
Clean Valve
Clean Probe
Time2Cln
Clean Enable
Clean Max Temp
Clean Abort
Clean Rcov Time
Last Clean
Clean Msg Reset
Probe Fault
Cant Clean
Clean Abort
Clean Temp
Figure 4.15.2a Zirconia probe configuration layout.
ZIRCONIA MAIN
The parameters that appear depend on the Probe Type setting. For this reason, not all the parameters listed appear for all probe types. Figure 4.15.2b shows a typical configuration page.
Zirconia.Main
Probe Type Eurotherm
Resolution 2
Min Calc Temp 720
Tolerance 1.0
Oxygen Exp 2
Temp Input 0
Probe Input 0
Carbon Potential Off
Dew Point Off
Oxygen Off
Temp Offset 0
Probe Offset 0
Soot alarm No
PV Frozen Yes
Probe Status Min Calc Temp
Balance Integral No
Carb Act CO O2 0.0000
Probe State Not Ready
Oxygen type Nernst
Figure 4.15.2b Zirconia Probe configuration (typical)
Page 142
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
4.15.2 CONFIGURATION (Cont.)

MAIN PARAMETERS
Probe Type
Resolution
Gas Reference
Rem Gas Ref
Rem Gas Enable
Working Gas
Min Calc Temp*
Oxygen Exp
Tolerance
Process Factor
Clean Frequency
Clean Time
Min Rcov Time
Max Rcov Time
Temp Input*
Temp Offset*
Probe Input
Probe mV Offset
Oxygen
Carbon Potential
Dew Point
Soot Alarm
Probe Fault
PV Frozen
Clean Valve
Clean State
Time to Clean
Probe Status
Balance Integral
Carb Act CO O2
Probe State
Oxygen Type
Select from a variety of probe manufacturers. The subsequent parameter list depends
on which manufacturer is selected.
Enter the number of decimal places to be used for the value display
Reference value for the hydrogen concentration in the atmosphere.
Remote reference value for hydrogen concentration in the atmosphere. Allows hydrogen concentration to be read from an external source.
Yes allows remote gas measurement. No uses the internal Gas Reference value.
Read only. Working Reference Gas value
The minimum temperature in at which the calculation is valid.
The exponent units of the log oxygen type calculation. valid entries -24 to +24.
Sooting tolerance multiplier. Allows the user to adjust the sensitivity of the Sooting
alarm, in order to reduce the incidence of nuisance alarms.
Process factor defined by the probe manufacturer.
Allows the interval between probe cleaning cycles to be entered in hours and minutes.
Allows Probe clean time to be entered in hours and minutes.
The minimum recovery time after purging in hours and minutes.
The maximum recovery time after purging in hours and minutes.
Zirconia probe temperature input value
Allows a temperature offset to be entered for the probe.
Zirconia probe mV input
Allows an offset to be entered for the probe mV input
Read only. calculated oxygen value
Read only. The calculated carbon potential.
Read only. The dew point value derived from temperature and remote gas reference inputs.
Read only. Sooting alarm. Active if sooting is likely to take place. The sensitivity of the
alarm can be adjusted by using the Tolerance parameter, above.
Yes indicates a sensor break.
Read only. Parameter set to Yes during Probe cleaning.
Read only. Enable the Clean valve.
Read only. The burn off state of the zirconia probe: Waiting, Cleaning or Recovering.Clean ProbeYes = Initiate probe cleaning. No = Do not clean probe.
Read only. The time remaining, in hours and minutes until the next cleaning cycle is
due.
Read only. Current probe status
OK
Normal working
mV Sensor Brk
Probe input sensor break
Temp Sensor Brk Temperature input sensor break
Min Calc Temp
Probe deteriorating
This output goes true when a step change in the output occurs, which requires an integral re-balance if the readings are used for PID control.
The carbon activity for the surface gas reaction between Carbon monoxide (CO) and
Oxygen (O2)
Read only. The current state of the probe. If Measuring, then the outputs are updated.
For any other state (Clean, Clean Recovery, Test impedance, Impedance Recovery,
Waiting), the outputs are not updated.
Oxygen equation being used.
* Temperature units are those configured for the channel to which the temperature measuring transducer is connected.
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
Page 143
4.15.2 CONFIGURATION (Cont.)

GAS REFERENCES PARAMETERS
CO Local
CO Remote
CO Remote En
CO in Use
H2 Local
H2 Remote
H2 Remote En
H2 In Use
Reference value for the carbon monoxide (CO) concentration in the atmosphere.
Remote reference value for the carbon monoxide concentration in the atmosphere. allows the value to be read remotely.
Yes allows remote CO measurement. No uses the internal value.
The CO gas measurement value currently being used.
Reference value for the hydrogen (H) concentration in the atmosphere.
Remote reference value for the hydrogen concentration in the atmosphere. allows the
value to be read remotely.
Yes allows remote H measurement. No uses the internal value.
The H gas measurement value currently being used.
CLEAN PARAMETERS
Clean Frequency
Clean Time
Min Rcov Time
Max Rcov time
Clean Valve
Clean Probe
Time to Clean
Clean Enable
Clean Max Temp
Clean Abort
Clean Rcov Time
Last Clean
Clean Msg Reset
Probe Fault
Cant Clean
Clean Abort
Clean Temp
Page 144
Allows the interval between probe cleaning cycles to be entered in hours and minutes.
Allows Probe clean time to be entered in hours and minutes.
The minimum recovery time after purging in hours and minutes.
The maximum recovery time after purging in hours and minutes.
Read only. Enable the Clean valve.
Initiate probe cleaning
Read only. The time remaining, in hours and minutes until the next cleaning cycle is
due.
Enable probe cleaning
Maximum temperature for cleaning. If the temperature exceeds this value, cleaning is
aborted.
Abort probe cleaning
The time taken for the probe to recover to 95% of its original value after the last clean.
If the last clean did not recover within the Max Rcov time, this value is set to 0.
The mV output from the probe after the last clean.
Yes clears cleaning related alarms
Yes means that the probe failed to recover to 95% of its original output, following a
clean,
Conditions exist which prevent a clean cycle starting. Can be cleared using Clean Msg
Reset.
A clean cycle was aborted. Can be cleared using Clean Msg Reset.
A clean cycle was aborted because the temperature was too high. Can be cleared using
Clean Msg Reset.
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
4.15.3 Wiring
Figure 4.15.3 shows a typical wiring arrangement for a Zirconia probe.
Cooling
solenoid
Outer electrode
Inner electrode
Zirconia
pellet
Screen
Dilution
Air
Clean Probe
Thermocouple
Enrichment gas
AI 1, AI 2 = analogue inputs
AI1 (zirconia) input range must be
configured as 0 to 2V (max.), scaled
to mV.
Power
supply
I/O1= Logic output

O/P2 to O/P 5 = Relay outputs
DI A = Digital input
Power
supply
Gas
valve
Figure 4.15.3 Typical zirconia probe wiring
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
Page 145
4.16 STERILISER OPTION

This block provides a means of recording complete sterilisation cycles, including for example, venting and
pumping as well as the actual sterilising period. See section 3.4.10 for display mode details.
Data is stored in .uhh history files for viewing in Review software.
Steriliser
Cycle status Wait Start
Remaining 00:00:00
Equilibration 00:00:00
Sterilising 00:00:00
Total Cycle 00:00:00
F0 (A0) 00:00:00
Running Output No
Passed Output No
Start No
Start 121C No
121C Time 00:03:00
Start 134C No
134C Time 00:15:00
Target Time 00:03:00
Cycle Number 0
Auto Counter No
File by Tag
Input 1 Type Thermocouple
PV1 0
Target SP 134
Band Low 134
Band High 137
Failure Dwell 00:00:00
Input 2 Type Thermo r Detect
Measured Temp. 115
Target Temp. 134
Z Temp. 10
Low Limit 134
Figure 4.16 Steriliser block configuration menu
4.16.1 Configuration parameters

Cycle Status
Page 146
Wait start: The cycle is waiting to be started

Waiting: Waiting for input 1 to reach its target setpoint.
Equilibration: Currently in the equilibration period
Sterilising: Currently in the sterilising phase
Passed: The cycle has completed successfully
Failed: The cycle has failed
Test cycle: A test cycle is in progress
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
4.16.1 CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS (Cont.)

Remaining
The sterilising time remaining for the current cycle
Equilibration
The equilibration time period for the current cycle
Sterilising
The time for which the load has currently been at sterilisation conditions
Total Cycle
The total cycle time
F0 (A0)
The current F0, FH or A0 value
Running Output
Yes = Cycle running; No = Cycle not running
Passed Output
Yes = Output passed; No = Output did not pass
Start
Trigger to start a custom cycle (i.e. one for which High and Low band and / or Target
setpoint have been changed from their default values.)
Start 121C
Trigger to start a pre-defined 121C cycle (Setpoint, Band Low/Band High etc. values
are set to their 121 defaults when the cycle is initiated).
121C Time
Target time for a121C cycle. Automatically copied to the Target Time field when Start
121C requested. Scrollable value in hh:mm:ss format.
Start 134C
Trigger to start a pre-defined 134C cycle (Setpoint, Band Low/Band High etc. values
are set to their 134 defaults when the cycle is initiated)
134C Time
Target time for a134C cycle. Automatically copied to the Target Time field when Start
134C requested. Scrollable value in hh:mm:ss format.
Target Time
The time for which the input values must remain at their sterilisation values in order that
the cycle shall pass. The cycle fails if any input moves outside its specified band limits
during the Target Time. Scrollable value in hh:mm:ss format.
Cycle Number
Each execution of the Steriliser block uses a unique cycle number. This may be entered
manually, or can be set to increment automatically by setting Auto Counter (below) to
Yes.
Auto Counter
Yes causes the Cycle Number (above) to increment automatically each time a new cycle is initiated. If Auto counter = Yes, the Cycle Number forms part of the historical
data and can be used to help identify data during later review.
File By Tag
Tick ensures that each cycle is recorded in its own unique history file identified by cycle
number and File tag (below).
File tag
This field appears only if File By Tag is enabled (tick symbol). File tag allows a fourcharacter identifier to be entered to be used with the Cycle Number (above) to identify
the history file
Input n Type
Select Off, Thermocouple, Rising Pressure, Falling pressure, Rise Air Detect, or
Fall Air Detect.
Off
This input will not be included in steriliser monitoring calculations
Thermocouple
Degrees Celsius input
Rising pressure
A mBar pressure input with a rising pressure expected during the cycle. This pressure input would normally be synchronised with a temperature input, in the same chamber, when performing a 121C or
134C cycle.
Falling pressure As Rising Pressure above, but with a falling pressure expected during the cycle
Rise Air Detect
A mBar pressure input with a rising pressure expected during the cycle. This pressure input is not synchronised with a temperature input
when performing a 121C or 134C cycle, as it is (typically) an outside chamber pressure.
Fall Air Detect
As Rise Air Detect above, but with a falling pressure expected during the cycle
PV n
Input value (wireable only). See note 1 below.
Target SP
Target setpoint for this input. (Does not appear if relevant Input Type = Off.) See note
2 below.
Band Low/High
The low and high steriliser temperature or pressure band for this input. (Does not appear if relevant Input Type = Off.) See note 2 below. Values are effective only during
Sterilisation mode.
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
Page 147
4.16.1 CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS (Cont.)

Failure Dwell
A failure alarm is set if this input is out of band range for more than the Failure Dwell
time. Scrollable value in hh:mm:ss format.
Notes
1. n = 1 to 4, where typically, inputs 1 to 3 are temperature inputs and input 4 is a pressure input.
2. Target SP and Band High/Low values are set to their relevant default values when a 121C or
134C cycle is initiated.
Measured Temp.
Target Temp.
Z Temp.
Low Limit
For F0 or A0 calculations, this value must be in C. Typically wired to an input channel

PV .
For F0 or A0 calculations, the target temperature (see section 3.4.10 for details). This
typically is the same value as the Target SP (above).
For F0 or A0 calculations this is a temperature interval representing a factor-of-10 increase in killing efficiency. Z = 10C for F0 and A0, and 20C for FH
The temperature below which F0 or A0 calculations are suspended.
4.17 HUMIDITY BLOCK OPTION

This block uses wet and dry bulb temperatures, and atmospheric pressure inputs to derive values for relative
humidity and dew point.
Humidity.
Resolution 2
Psychro Constant 6.66E-4
Pressure 1013.0
Wet Temperature 28.23
Wet Offset 0
Dry Temperature 29.65
Relative Hum. 89.93
Dew Point 27.83
Sensor Break No
Figure 4.17 Humidity calculation configuration

Resolution
Psychro constant
Pressure
Wet Temperature
Wet Offset
Dry Temperature
Relative Hum.
Dew Point
Sensor Break
The number of decimal places for the Relative humidity and Dew point displays.
The psychrometric constant (default = 6.66 x 10-4) (See note below).
The current atmospheric pressure in mBar.
The wet bulb thermometer temperature.
Offset for the wet bulb temperature.
The dry bulb thermometer temperature.
The relative humidity value calculated from the Wet temperature, the Dry temperature
and the Pressure inputs. The number of decimal places depends on the Resolution setting.
The dew point value calculated from the Wet temperature, the Dry temperature and the
Pressure inputs. The number of decimal places depends on the Resolution setting.
Yes implies that a break has occurred between one (or more) of the temperature or
pressure transducer and its input.
Note: The default value 6.66 may be edited, but the multiplier is always 10-4 (i.e. it cannot be edited).
Page 148
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
4.18 BCD INPUT

Part of the Toolkit Blocks option, this block derives decimal and two-decade binary coded decimal (BCD)
values from eight discrete inputs, where input 1 is the least significant input (20 = 1) and input 8 is the most
significant (27 = 128). The example below shows that for inputs 2, 4, 6 and 8 high, the decimal input value
is 170, but the BCD value is invalid. In any such case, the maximum BCD value for each decade is limited to 9.
Input number
Input status
Decimal input
BCD output
Figure 4.18 BCD block example
4.18.1 Input rules

Valid BCD outputs are produced only with the following inputs set:
1. Any combination of inputs 1, 2, 3, 5, 6 and 7
2. Any combination of Inputs 1, 4, 5 and 8
4.18.2 Configuration
BCD Input.1
Digital Input 1
Digital Input 2
Input active symbol
Digital Input 3
Digital Input 4
Digital Input 5
Input not active symbol
Digital Input 6
Digital Input 7
Digital Input 8
Decimal input 170
BCD Output 99
BCD LS Digit 9
BCD MS Digit 9
Figure 4.18.2 BCD block configuration
PARAMETERS
Digital Input N
Decimal input
BCD Output
BCD LS Digit
BCD MS Digit
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
Digital inputs, wired (for example) to contact inputs at the rear panel or to other suitable
parameter outputs.
The value defined by the active inputs, where input 1 = 1, when active, input 2 = 2, input
3 = 4, input 4 = 8 and so on.
A two digit output being the binary coded decimal version of the input.
This least significant (right-most) digit represents the value of inputs 1 to 4, where input
1 = 1, input 2 = 2, input 3 = 4, input 4 = 8. Maximum value = 9, even if input is greater
than 9.
This most significant (left-most) digit represents the value of inputs 5 to 8, where input
5 = 1, input 6 = 2, input 7 = 4, input 8 = 8. Maximum value = 9, even if input is greater
than 9.
Page 149
4.19 LOGIC (2 INPUT) BLOCK

Part of the Toolkit Blocks option, this block allows a number of logic and comparison operations to be performed on a pair of inputs. For logic functions, the inputs can be inverted to allow, for example, a NOR function to be implemented by inverting the inputs to an AND function. 12 two-input logic blocks are available.
Logic (2 input).1
Operation OR
Input 1 1
Input 2 0
Fallback FalseBad
Invert None
Output On
Status Ok
Figure 4.19 Two-input logic block configuration
4.19.1 Parameters
Operation
Input 1(2)
Fallback
Invert
Output
Status
Page 150
AND, OR, XOR, LATCH (boolean values only)

== (Input 1 = Input 2)
<> (Input 1 Input 2)
< (Input 1 < Input 2}
<= (Input 1 Input 2)
> (Input 1 > Input 2)
=> (Input 1 Input 2)
The inputs to the specified operation. For inverted inputs (below), this shows the real
(non-inverted) state.
Configures the output and status values to be used if either input has a status other than
Good.
FalseBad: Output = False; Status = Bad
TrueBad: Output = True; Status = Bad
FalseGood: Output = False; Status = Good
TrueGood: Output = True; Status = Good
For logic operators only allows neither, either or both inputs to be inverted. Input 1 and
Input 2 show the non-inverted state.
On or Off depending on input states etc.
The status of the result (Ok or Error).
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
4.20 LOGIC (8 INPUT) BLOCK

Part of the Toolkit Blocks option, this block allows AND, OR and cascading* XOR logic operations to be carried out on up to eight inputs.
*Cascading XOR example for inputs 1 to 4: (((Input1 Input2) Input3) Input4).
Logic (8 input).1
Operation OR
Number of Inputs 2
The number of invert boxes
matches the Number of inputs
value (2 in this example)
Invert
Invert Output 0
Input 1
Input 2
Output Off
Figure 4.20 Eight input logic block configuration
4.20.1 Parameters
Operation
Number of inputs
Invert
Invert Output
Input 1
Inputs 2 to N
Output
AND, OR or XOR
The number of inputs to the logic operator
Allows the user to invert individual inputs, as described below.
Yes inverts the output status
The status of input 1, ignoring the Invert status. Cross = off; Tick = on.
As for input 1, where N = the value of the Number of Inputs parameter.
On or Off. Includes the effect of Invert Output status.
INPUT INVERSION
1.
2.
3.
4.
Use the down arrow key to highlight the Invert field and operate the scroll key to enter edit mode
Use the up arrow key to highlight the first input to be inverted (the relevant input numbers appear in
the display boxes for uninverted inputs when highlighted).
Once the required input box is highlighted, use the scroll key to change the numeric character to a tick
symbol (to invert) or change the tick character to a numeric character (to remove a previous inversion).
Repeat for any further inputs, then operate the page key to confirm the changes and to quit edit mode.
4.20.2 Schematic
Input 1
Invert 1
Input 2
Invert 2
Input 3
Invert 4
Input 4
Invert 8
Input 5
Invert 16
Output
OutInvert
Input 6
Invert 32
Input 7
Invert 64
Input 8
Invert 128
Figure 4.20.2 Logic (8 input) block schematic
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
Page 151
4.20.3 Invert input decoding table

Over a communications link, the inversion status is transmitted as a decimal value, which can be encoded/
decoded using the following table
Input
8
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
7
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
6
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
5
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
4
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
3
N
N
N
N
3
3
3
3
N
N
N
N
3
3
3
3
N
N
N
N
3
3
3
3
N
N
N
N
3
3
3
3
N
N
N
N
3
3
3
3
N
N
N
N
3
3
3
3
N
N
N
N
3
3
3
3
N
N
N
N
3
3
3
3
Input
2
N
N
2
2
N
N
2
2
N
N
2
2
N
N
2
2
N
N
2
2
N
N
2
2
N
N
2
2
N
N
2
2
N
N
2
2
N
N
2
2
N
N
2
2
N
N
2
2
N
N
2
2
N
N
2
2
N
N
2
2
N
N
2
2
1
N
1
N
1
N
1
N
1
N
1
N
1
N
1
N
1
N
1
N
1
N
1
N
1
N
1
N
1
N
1
N
1
N
1
N
1
N
1
N
1
N
1
N
1
N
1
N
1
N
1
N
1
N
1
N
1
N
1
N
1
N
1
N
1
Hex
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
0A
0B
0C
0D
0E
0F
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
1A
1B
1C
1D
1E
1F
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
2A
2B
2C
2D
2E
2F
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
3A
3B
3C
3D
3E
3F
Dec
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
8
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
6
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
5
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
4
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
3
N
N
N
N
3
3
3
3
N
N
N
N
3
3
3
3
N
N
N
N
3
3
3
3
N
N
N
N
3
3
3
3
N
N
N
N
3
3
3
3
N
N
N
N
3
3
3
3
N
N
N
N
3
3
3
3
N
N
N
N
3
3
3
3
Input
2
N
N
2
2
N
N
2
2
N
N
2
2
N
N
2
2
N
N
2
2
N
N
2
2
N
N
2
2
N
N
2
2
N
N
2
2
N
N
2
2
N
N
2
2
N
N
2
2
N
N
2
2
N
N
2
2
N
N
2
2
N
N
2
2
1
N
1
N
1
N
1
N
1
N
1
N
1
N
1
N
1
N
1
N
1
N
1
N
1
N
1
N
1
N
1
N
1
N
1
N
1
N
1
N
1
N
1
N
1
N
1
N
1
N
1
N
1
N
1
N
1
N
1
N
1
N
1
N
1
Hex
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
4A
4B
4C
4D
4E
4F
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
5A
5B
5C
5D
5E
5F
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
6A
6B
6C
6D
6E
6F
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
7A
7B
7C
7D
7E
7F
Dec
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
7
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
6
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
5
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
4
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
3
N
N
N
N
3
3
3
3
N
N
N
N
3
3
3
3
N
N
N
N
3
3
3
3
N
N
N
N
3
3
3
3
N
N
N
N
3
3
3
3
N
N
N
N
3
3
3
3
N
N
N
N
3
3
3
3
N
N
N
N
3
3
3
3
Input
2
N
N
2
2
N
N
2
2
N
N
2
2
N
N
2
2
N
N
2
2
N
N
2
2
N
N
2
2
N
N
2
2
N
N
2
2
N
N
2
2
N
N
2
2
N
N
2
2
N
N
2
2
N
N
2
2
N
N
2
2
N
N
2
2
1
N
1
N
1
N
1
N
1
N
1
N
1
N
1
N
1
N
1
N
1
N
1
N
1
N
1
N
1
N
1
N
1
N
1
N
1
N
1
N
1
N
1
N
1
N
1
N
1
N
1
N
1
N
1
N
1
N
1
N
1
N
1
N
1
Hex Dec
80 128
81 129
82 130
83 131
84 132
85 133
86 134
87 135
88 136
89 137
8A 138
8B 139
8C 140
8D 141
8E 142
8F 143
90 144
91 145
92 146
93 147
94 148
95 149
96 150
97 151
98 152
99 153
9A 154
9B 155
9C 156
9D 157
9E 158
9F 159
A0 160
A1 161
A2 162
A3 163
A4 164
A5 165
A6 166
A7 167
A8 168
A9 169
AA 170
AB 171
AC 172
AD 173
AE 174
AF 175
B0 176
B1 177
B2 178
B3 179
B4 180
B5 181
B6 182
B7 183
B8 184
B9 185
BA 186
BB 187
BC 188
BD 189
BE 190
BF 191
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
6
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
5
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
4
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
3
N
N
N
N
3
3
3
3
N
N
N
N
3
3
3
3
N
N
N
N
3
3
3
3
N
N
N
N
3
3
3
3
N
N
N
N
3
3
3
3
N
N
N
N
3
3
3
3
N
N
N
N
3
3
3
3
N
N
N
N
3
3
3
3
2
N
N
2
2
N
N
2
2
N
N
2
2
N
N
2
2
N
N
2
2
N
N
2
2
N
N
2
2
N
N
2
2
N
N
2
2
N
N
2
2
N
N
2
2
N
N
2
2
N
N
2
2
N
N
2
2
N
N
2
2
N
N
2
2
1
N
1
N
1
N
1
N
1
N
1
N
1
N
1
N
1
N
1
N
1
N
1
N
1
N
1
N
1
N
1
N
1
N
1
N
1
N
1
N
1
N
1
N
1
N
1
N
1
N
1
N
1
N
1
N
1
N
1
N
1
N
1
N
1
Hex
C0
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
C8
C9
CA
CB
CC
CD
CE
CF
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
D9
DA
DB
DC
DD
DE
DF
E0
E1
E2
E3
E4
E5
E6
E7
E8
E9
EA
EB
EC
ED
EE
EF
F0
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
FA
FB
FC
FD
FE
FF
Dec
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
Example: Decimal 146 means that inputs 8, 5 and 2 are inverted.
Page 152
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
4.21 Multiplexer block

This Toolkit option block selects one of eight analogue inputs to appear at its output
Multiplexer.1
High Limit 100000000.0
Low Limit -100000000.0
Fall Back Strategy Clip bad
Fall Back Value 0.0
Input Selector Input 1
Input 1 0.0
Input 2 0.0
Input 3 0.0
Input 8 0.0
PV Out 0
Status Ok
Resolution 0
Figure 4.21 Multiplexer block configuration

High Limit
Low Limit
Fallback Strategy
Fallback Value
Input Selector
Input 1 to 8
PV Out
Status
Resolution
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
The high limit for input, output and fallback values. Minimum value is Low Limit.
The low limit for input and fallback values. Maximum value is High Limit.
Clip Bad: If the input value is above High Limit or below Low Limit, then the output
value is set to the appropriate limit, and the status is set to Bad. If the input signal is
within the limits, but its status is bad, the output is set to the Fallback value.
Clip Good: If the input value is above High Limit or below Low Limit, then the output
value is set to the appropriate limit, and the status is set to Good. If the input signal is
within the limits, but its status is bad, the output is set to the Fallback value.
Fall Bad: If the input value is above High Limit or below Low Limit, then the output
value is set to the Fallback value, and the status is set to Bad
Fall Good: If the input value is above High Limit or below Low Limit, then the output
value is set to the Fallback value, and the status is set to Good
Upscale: If the input status is bad, or if the input signal is above High Limit or below
Low Limit, the output value is set to the High limit.
Downscale: If the input status is bad, or if the input signal is above High Limit or below
Low Limit, the output value is set to the Low limit.
The value to be adopted by the output, under error conditions, if Fallback Status is set
to Fall Good or Fall Bad.
Selects which of the eight inputs is presented at the output. When wired to a suitable
parameter, Input Selector becomes read only. Input 1 is selected for an Input Selector
value of 1, Input 2 for a value of 2 and so on. Input Selector values greater than 8 are
ignored. If not wired, the user may select the required input using the scroll keys.
Wired to the relevant analogue inputs.
The output from the multiplexer block.
Indicates the status of the operation as Ok or Error.
The number of decimal places for the output value (maximum = 6)
Page 153
4.22 MATH (2 INPUT)

This Toolkit option block allows one of a number of operations to be carried out using two input values
which may be analogue or digital in nature. Either or both of the inputs can be scaled, using a Multiplier.
Math (2 input)
block
Input 1
Input 1 Multiplier
Output
Input 2
Input 2 Multiplier
Figure 4.22a Block schematic
Math (2 input).1
Operation Sel1
Input 1 Multiplier 1.0
Units DegC
Resolution 2
Low Limit 0.00 DegC
High limit 50.00 DegC
Fallback Strategy ClipGood
Fallback Value 0.0 DegC
Input Selector Input1
Input 1 30.28 C
Input 2 1.40
Output 30.28 DegC
Status Ok
Figure 4.22b Block configuration (typical)
4.22.1 Parameters
Operation
Add
Subtract
Multiply
Divide
Abs Diff
Select Max
Select Min
Hot Swap
Sample/Hold
Power*
Square Root
Log Base 10
Log Base e
Exponential
10 to the X
Sel1
Output = Input 1 + Input 2

Output = Input 1 - Input 2
Output = Input 1 x Input 2
Output = Input 1 Input 2
Output = the difference between Input 1 and Input 2, ignoring sign
Output = whichever is the larger of Input 1 or Input 2
Output = whichever is the smaller of Input 1 or Input 2
Output = Input 2 if Input 1 is Bad; otherwise Output = Input 1
Output tracks Input 1 whilst Input 2 = 1. Output value is held whilst Input 2 = 0 (See section 4.22.2, below, for more details)
Output = Input 1 to the power of Input 2. (Output = Input 1Input 2)
Output = Input 1 (Input 2 ignored)
Output = Log10 Input 1 (Input 2 ignored)
Output = Ln Input 1 (Input 2 ignored)
Output = eInput1 (Input 2 ignored)
Output = 10Input 1 (Input 2 ignored)
Output = Input 1 if Input Selector = Input1
Output = Input 2 if Input Selector = Input2
* Note... For this implementation:

0 to the power 0 = 1.
Negative values raised to any power result in bad status.
0 raised to a negative power results in bad status.
Page 154
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
4.22.1 PARAMETERS (Cont.)

Input 1(2) Multiplier The scaling factor for input 1(2). This multiplying factor is applied to the input of the
function, but does not affect the displayed values of Input1 and Input 2 (below).
Units
Allows a five-character string to be entered for the function
Resolution
Sets the number of decimal places for the Output value. Input resolution (if applicable)
is that of the relevant input.
High Limit
The high limit for input, output and fallback values. Minimum value is Low Limit.
Low Limit
The low limit for input and fallback values. Maximum value is High Limit.
Fallback Strategy
Clip Bad: If the input value is above High Limit or below Low Limit, then the output
value is set to the appropriate limit, and the status is set to Bad. If the input signal is
within the limits, but its status is bad, the output is set to the Fall Back value.
Clip Good: If the input value is above High Limit or below Low Limit, then the output
value is set to the appropriate limit, and the status is set to Good. If the input signal is
within the limits, but its status is bad, the output is set to the Fall Back value.
Fall Bad: If the input value is above High Limit or below Low Limit, then the output
value is set to the Fall Back value, and the status is set to Bad
Fall Good: If the input value is above High Limit or below Low Limit, then the output
value is set to the Fall Back value, and the status is set to Good
Upscale: If the input status is bad, or if the input signal is above High Limit or below
Low Limit, the output value is set to the High limit.
Downscale: If the input status is bad, or if the input signal is above High Limit or below
Low Limit, the output value is set to the Low limit.
Fallback Value
The value to be adopted by the output, under error conditions, if Fallback Status is set
to Fall Good or Fall Bad.
Input Selector
For Select operation only. When wired to a suitable parameter, Input Select becomes
read only. Input 1 is selected if Input Select = 1; Input 2 is selected if Input Select = 2.
Input Select values greater than 2 are ignored. If not wired, the user may select the required input using the scroll keys.
Input 1(2)
Wired to suitable input parameters. Displayed values ignore any input multiplier effects.
Output
Gives the output value for the operation.
Status
Shows the status of the output value, as Ok or Error
4.22.2 Sample and Hold details

As described above, Output follows Input1 as long as Input 2 is High. When Input 2 goes Low, the output
adopts the instantaneous value of Input 1 until Input 2 goes High again. When Input 2 goes high the output
jumps to the current value of Input 1 and tracks it until Input 2 goes low.
Input 1
Input 2
Output
tracks
Input 1
Output
held
Output
tracks
Input 1
Output
held
Output
tracks
Input 1
Output
Figure 4.22.2 Sample and Hold example
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
Page 155
4.23 TIMER
This Toolkit option allows the user to configure up to four timers as: On Pulse, On Delay, One Shot or
Min On types. The different types are described in section 4.23.2, below.
Timer.1
Mode Off
Time 00:00:00
Elapsed Time 00:00:00
Trigger In
Output
Triggered
Figure 4.23 Timer configuration
4.23.1 Parameters
Mode
Time
Elapsed time
Trigger in
Output
Triggered
Select On pulse, On delay, One shot or Min On

Allows the user to enter a period for the timer.
This read-only parameter shows timing progress
Shows if the trigger source is active (tick) or inactive (cross)
Shows if the output is on (tick) or off (cross)
Shows if the timer is currently triggered (can remain triggered even after the trigger
source has returned to off).
4.23.2 Timer modes

ON PULSE
Output goes on as soon as the trigger input goes active, and remains on until the time period has elapsed.
If the timer is re-triggered during the timing period, the timer restarts.
Trigger
Time
Time
Time
Output
Re-trigger
Elapsed time
Triggered
Figure 4.23.2a On Pulse definitions
Page 156
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
4.23.2 TIMER MODES (Cont.)

ON DELAY
Provides a delay between the trigger point and the timer output becoming active.
Rules
1.
2.
After the trigger goes active, the output switches on after the delay time has elapsed, and stays on until
the trigger goes inactive.
If the trigger goes inactive before the delay time has elapsed, the output does not switch on.
Trigger
Time
Time
Output
Elapsed time
Triggered
Figure 4.23.2b On Delay definitions
ONE SHOT
If the trigger input is active, countdown timing is initiated as soon as the entered time value is confirmed
(scroll key). The entered time decrements to zero, and must be re-entered by the user before any further
timer function can be initiated.
Rules
1.
2.
3.
The time value decrements only when the trigger input is active.
The output is On only when the trigger value is active (and the entered time value has not elapsed).
The entered time value can be edited at any time to increase or decrease the remaining time period.
Trigger
Output
Time
12 = Time
Time edits
Elapsed time
Time
Triggered
Figure 4.23.2c One Shot timer definitions
Note: For ease of comparison the two time edits in the figure above were both to the same value.
This is not a necessary condition.
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
Page 157
4.23.2 TIMER MODES (Cont.)

MIN ON
This Off delay function provides an output signal that goes on when the trigger goes active and remains
on for a specified period after the trigger goes inactive.
If the trigger goes inactive, then active again before the time period has elapsed, then the elapsed time is
reset to zero and the output remains on.
The Triggered parameter is on whenever the elapsed time is counting down.
Trigger
Time
Time
Time
Output
Elapsed time
Triggered
Figure 4.23.2d Min On timer definitions
4.24 USER VALUES

This Toolkit option block allows up to 12 values to be configured for use as inputs to other parameters.
User Value.1
Units
Resolution 2
High Limit 100000000.00
Low Limit -100000000.00
Value 0.00
Status Ok
Figure 4.24 User value configuration
4.24.1 Parameters
Units
Resolution
High/Low Limit
Value
Status
Page 158
Allows a five-character string to be entered for the user value units

The number of decimal places for the user value (max. = 6)
Sets maximum and minimum values that the User value can be set to
The user value, either entered manually, or wired to another appropriate parameter
The output status for the User Value.
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
4.25 ALARM SUMMARY

Allows the user to view the overall status of the units alarms, and to carry out a global acknowledgement of
active alarms if required.
Global Ack
Allows the user to acknowledge all applicable alarms simultaneously. Manual alarms
must be non-active before they can be acknowledged.
Any Channel alarm Indicates if there are any channel alarms active, acknowledged etc.
Any Sys Alarm
Indicates if there are any active system alarms.
Any Alarm
Indicates if there are any channel or system alarms active.
Alarm Summary.Global
Global Ack No
Any Channel Alarm Yes NAck
Any Sys Alarm Yes
Any Alarm Yes
Figure 4.25 Alarm summary display
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
Page 159
4.26 REAL TIME EVENT CONFIGURATION

This allows the user to configure up to two events to trigger at a specific time and date, or on a particular
day, and to remain active for a configurable time, either measured as a duration, or as a specific Off time.
Typical applications would be to start and/or stop a programmer at a particular time, or to act as an input to
a Wait segment.
Figure 4.26 shows the two types of timer: Time and Date, and Time and Day, for Event 1.
Real Time Event.1
Real Time Event.1
Type Time and Day

On Day Mon-Fri
Type Time and Date

On Month October
On Time 16:00:00
On Date 11
Off Type Time
On Time 14:50:00
Off day Monday
Off Type Duration
Off Time 09:00:00
Duration 00:01:00
Output
Output
Figure 4.26 Real Time Events (typical)
Type
On Month
On Date
On Day
On Time
Off Type
Off Month
Off Date
Off Day
Off Time
Duration
Output
Page 160
Selects the type of the real time event (Off, Time and Day, Time and Date
For Time and Date only, this is the month that the event is to switch on.
For Time and Date only, this is the date in the month that the event is to switch on.
For Time and Day only, this is the day(s) of the week that the event output is to switch
on (Mon, Tue, Wed, Thu, Fri, Sat, Sun, Mon-Fri, Sat-Sun, Everyday).
The time of day that the event output is to switch on (00:00:00 to 23:59:59)
Selects the action that will switch the event off (Duration, Time)
For Time and Date only and with Off Type set to Time, this is the month that the event
is to switch off.
For Time and Date only and with Off Type set to Time, this is the day number in the
month that the event is to switch off.
For Time and Day only and with Off Type set to Time, this is the day of the week that
the event output is to switch off (Mon, Tue, Wed, Thu, Fri, Sat, Sun, Mon-Fri, Sat-Sun,
Everyday).
The time at which the event output is to switch off (00:00:00 - 23:59:59)
For Off type set to Duration, this specifies the duration for which the event output is
to remain on (00:00:01 to 23:59:59 for Time and Day, or 00:00:01 to 500:00:00 for Time
and Date)
The output for the real time event (Cross symbol = Off, Tick = On) (Read only)
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
5 MODBUS TCP SLAVE COMMS

5.1 INSTALLATION
The installation of the Modbus link consists of connecting a standard Ethernet cable between the RJ45 connector at the rear of the unit to a host computer either directly or via a network. A straight-through cable
can be used in either case (i.e. a cross-over cable is not required).
5.2 INTRODUCTION
MODBUS TCP allows the instrument to act as a 'slave' device to one or more host computers connected via
the RJ45 connector at the rear of the recorder. Each recorder must have a unique Internet Protocol (IP) address, set up as described in Section 4.2.1 (Network.Interface).
MODBUS TCP (Transmission Control Protocol) is a variant of the MODBUS family of communications protocols intended for supervision and control of automated equipment specifically covering the use of MODBUS
messaging in an intranet or internet environment, using TCP/IP protocols. Much of the MODBUS detail in
this manual is derived from the document openmbus.doc, available at http://www.modbus.org/default.htm
The above mentioned document also includes implementation guidelines for users.
Note: The Modbus protocol allows a maximum of 255 data bytes to be read from or written to in
one transaction. For this reason, the maximum number of standard (16 bit) registers that can be
accessed in one transaction is 255/2 = 127 and the maximum number of IEEE (32-bit) registers is
127/2 = 63.
5.2.1 Function Codes

MODBUS function codes 3, 4, 6, 8 and 16, defined in table 8.2.1a below, are supported and are fully described in section 5.5, below.
Code
Modbus definition
Description
03
Read holding registers
Reads the binary contents if holding registers. In this implementation codes 3 and 4 are identical in operation.
04
Read input registers
Reads the binary contents if holding registers. In this implementation codes 3 and 4 are identical in operation.
06
Preset single register
08
Diagnostics
16
Preset multiple registers
Writes a single value to a single register.

Performs a simple loop back test.
Writes values to multiple holding registers.
Table 5.2.1a MODBUS Function code definition
DIAGNOSTIC CODES
Function code 08, subfunction 00 (Return query data) echoes the query (Loop back).
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
Page 161
5.2.1 FUNCTION CODES (Cont.)

EXCEPTION CODES
MODBUS TCP provides reserved codes used for exceptions. These codes provide error information relating to failed requests. Exceptions are signalled by hex 80 being added to the function code of the request,
followed by one of the codes listed in table 8.2.1b, below.
Code
Modbus definition
Dec Hex
01 01 Illegal function
Description (see Modbus specification for full details)

An invalid function code was received
02
02
Illegal Data Address
An invalid data address was received
03
03
Illegal Data Value
An invalid data value was received
04
04
Slave Device Failure
An unrecoverable error occurred in the instrument
09
09
Illegal Sub Function
An invalid sub function was received
10
0A
Gateway path unavailable
Gateway misconfigured or overloaded
11
0B
Gateway target device failed Device not present on the network

to respond
Table 5.2.1b Exception codes
5.2.2 Data types

The following data types are supported:
1. 2's complement signed 16-bit analogue values with implied decimal point. The decimal point position
must be configured in both the recorder and the host computer.
2. 16, 32 and 64 bit signed integers.
3. 16-bit unsigned integer values.
4. 32 bit IEEE Floating point values.
5. Strings of limited size, can be transferred across Modbus TCP in Unicode format using a single nonmultiplexed set of consecutive registers.
DATA ENCODING
MODBUS uses what is called a 'Big endian' representation for addresses and data items. This means that
when a numerical quantity larger than a single byte is transmitted, the most significant byte is sent first. For
example a 32-bit hex value of 12345678 would be transmitted as 12, followed by 34, followed by 56 and
finally 78.
5.2.3 Invalid multiple register writes

When a recorder receives a multi-register write request, it is possible that one or more requests will be rejected. Under such a circumstance, the recorder accepts all valid write requests and ignores any invalid
writes. No error response is produced.
5.2.4 Master communications timeout

Whilst the instrument is archiving, it is possible that communications responses slow sufficiently to cause
communications timouts. The Modbus master device should be configured with a timout value large
enough to ensure against nuisance timeouts during archiving.
Page 162
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
5.2.4 Non-volatile parameters in EEPROM

CAUTION
The parameters in the following list must not be written-to on a continuous basis as to do so will
damage the EEPROM, greatly shortening its useful life.
Note: nvol = non-volatile. Loop N = Loop1 and Loop2; Channel N = Channel 1, 2, 3 and 4 etc.
AdvancedLoop.MasterPID.ControlAction
AdvancedLoop.MasterPID.CutbackHigh
AdvancedLoop.MasterPID.CutbackLow
AdvancedLoop.MasterPID.DerivativeTime
AdvancedLoop.MasterPID.DerivativeType
AdvancedLoop.MasterPID.ErrorLimit
AdvancedLoop.MasterPID.IntegralTime
AdvancedLoop.MasterPID.LoopBreakTime
AdvancedLoop.MasterPID.ManualReset
AdvancedLoop.MasterPID.PBUnits
AdvancedLoop.MasterPID.ProportionalBand
AdvancedLoop.MasterSP.ManualTrack
AdvancedLoop.MasterSP.RangeHigh
AdvancedLoop.MasterSP.RangeLow
AdvancedLoop.MasterSP.ServoToPV
AdvancedLoop.MasterSP.SPHighLimit
AdvancedLoop.MasterSP.SPIntBal
AdvancedLoop.MasterSP.SPLowLimit
AdvancedLoop.MasterSP.SPTrack
AdvancedLoop.MasterSP.SPTrimHighLimit
AdvancedLoop.MasterSP.SPTrimLowLimit
AdvancedLoop.Output.Ch1OnOffHysteresis
AdvancedLoop.Output.Ch1TravelTime
AdvancedLoop.Output.Ch2Deadband
AdvancedLoop.Output.CoolType
AdvancedLoop.Output.EnablePowerFeedforward
AdvancedLoop.Output.FeedForwardGain
AdvancedLoop.Output.FeedForwardOffset
AdvancedLoop.Output.FeedForwardTrimLimit
AdvancedLoop.Output.FeedForwardType
AdvancedLoop.Output.ManualMode
AdvancedLoop.Output.ManualStartup
AdvancedLoop.Output.OutputHighLimit
AdvancedLoop.Output.OutputLowLimit
AdvancedLoop.Output.PotBreakMode
AdvancedLoop.Output.Rate
AdvancedLoop.Output.RateDisable
AdvancedLoop.Output.SafeOutVal
AdvancedLoop.Output.SbrkOP
AdvancedLoop.Output.SlaveSensorBreakMode
AdvancedLoop.Setup.CascadeType
AdvancedLoop.Setup.MasterName
AdvancedLoop.Setup.ModeAccess
AdvancedLoop.Setup.SetpointAccess
AdvancedLoop.Setup.SlaveChannel1
AdvancedLoop.Setup.SlaveName
AdvancedLoop.SlavePID.Boundary1-2
AdvancedLoop.SlavePID.ControlAction
AdvancedLoop.SlavePID.CutbackHigh
AdvancedLoop.SlavePID.CutbackHigh2
AdvancedLoop.SlavePID.CutbackLow
AdvancedLoop.SlavePID.CutbackLow2
AdvancedLoop.SlavePID.DerivativeTime
AdvancedLoop.SlavePID.DerivativeTime2
AdvancedLoop.SlavePID.DerivativeType
AdvancedLoop.SlavePID.IntegralTime
AdvancedLoop.SlavePID.IntegralTime2
AdvancedLoop.SlavePID.LoopBreakTime
AdvancedLoop.SlavePID.LoopBreakTime2
AdvancedLoop.SlavePID.ManualReset
AdvancedLoop.SlavePID.ManualReset2
AdvancedLoop.SlavePID.NumberOfSets
AdvancedLoop.SlavePID.PBUnits
AdvancedLoop.SlavePID.ProportionalBand
AdvancedLoop.SlavePID.ProportionalBand2
AdvancedLoop.SlavePID.RelCh2Gain
AdvancedLoop.SlavePID.RelCh2Gain2
AdvancedLoop.SlavePID.RemoteInput
AdvancedLoop.SlavePID.SchedulerType
AdvancedLoop.SlaveSP.FFSelect
AdvancedLoop.SlaveSP.ManualTrack
AdvancedLoop.SlaveSP.MasterSensorBreakMode
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
AdvancedLoop.SlaveSP.RangeHigh
AdvancedLoop.SlaveSP.RangeLow
AdvancedLoop.SlaveSP.SbrkSP
AdvancedLoop.Tune.Band
AdvancedLoop.Tune.CycleNo
AdvancedLoop.Tune.Hysteresis
AdvancedLoop.Tune.OutputHighLimit
AdvancedLoop.Tune.OutputLowLimit
AdvancedLoop.Tune.PBs
AdvancedLoop.Tune.Settle
AdvancedLoop.Tune.TDs
AdvancedLoop.Tune.Timeout
AdvancedLoop.Tune.TuneHigh
AdvancedLoop.Tune.TuneLow
AdvancedLoop.Tune.TuneR2G
AdvancedLoop.Tune.TuneType
BCDInput.N.InN
Channel.N.AlarmN.Amount
Channel.N.AlarmN.AverageTime
Channel.N.AlarmN.Block
Channel.N.AlarmN.ChangeTime
Channel.N.AlarmN.Deviation
Channel.N.AlarmN.Dwell
Channel.N.AlarmN.Hysteresis
Channel.N.AlarmN.Latch
Channel.N.AlarmN.Threshold
Channel.N.AlarmN.Type
Channel.N.Main.CJType
Channel.N.Main.CloseString
Channel.N.Main.Descriptor
Channel.N.Main.ExtCJTemp
Channel.N.Main.FaultResponse
Channel.N.Main.Filter
Channel.N.Main.InputHigh
Channel.N.Main.InputLow
Channel.N.Main.LinType
Channel.N.Main.Offset
Channel.N.Main.Offset2
Channel.N.Main.OpenString
Channel.N.Main.RangeHigh
Channel.N.Main.RangeLow
Channel.N.Main.RangeUnits
Channel.N.Main.Resolution
Channel.N.Main.ScaleHigh
Channel.N.Main.ScaleHigh2
Channel.N.Main.ScaleLow
Channel.N.Main.ScaleLow2
Channel.N.Main.SensorBreakType
Channel.N.Main.Shunt
Channel.N.Main.TestSignal
Channel.N.Main.Type
Channel.N.Main.Units
Channel.N.Trend.Colour
Channel.N.Trend.SpanHigh
Channel.N.Trend.SpanLow
CustomMessage.MessageN
DCOutput.1A1B_DCOP.FallbackPV
DCOutput.1A1B_DCOP.OutputHigh
DCOutput.1A1B_DCOP.OutputLow
DCOutput.1A1B_DCOP.Resolution
DCOutput.1A1B_DCOP.ScaleHigh
DCOutput.1A1B_DCOP.ScaleLow
DCOutput.1A1B_DCOP.Type
DigitalIO.1A1B.Backlash
DigitalIO.1A1B.Inertia
DigitalIO.1A1B.Invert
DigitalIO.1A1B.MinOnTime
DigitalIO.1A1B.StandbyAction
DigitalIO.1A1B.Type
DigitalIO.2A2B.Type
DigitalIO.3A3B.Type
DigitalIO.DI_LALC.Backlash
DigitalIO.DI_LALC.Inertia
DigitalIO.DI_LALC.Invert
DigitalIO.DI_LALC.MinOnTime
DigitalIO.DI_LALC.StandbyAction
DigitalIO.DI_LALC.Type
DigitalIO.DI_LBLC.Backlash
DigitalIO.DI_LBLC.Inertia
DigitalIO.DI_LBLC.Invert
DigitalIO.DI_LBLC.MinOnTime
DigitalIO.DI_LBLC.StandbyAction
DigitalIO.DI_LBLC.Type
DigitalIO.RELAY_4AC.Backlash
DigitalIO.RELAY_4AC.Inertia
DigitalIO.RELAY_4AC.Invert
DigitalIO.RELAY_4AC.MinOnTime
DigitalIO.RELAY_4AC.StandbyAction
DigitalIO.RELAY_4AC.Type
EthernetIP.ImplicitInputs.InputN
EthernetIP.ImplicitOutputs.OutputN
EthernetIP.InputTags.InputN
EthernetIP.Main.ConfigInstance
EthernetIP.Main.ConfigSize
EthernetIP.Main.ConnectionType
EthernetIP.Main.InputInstance
EthernetIP.Main.InputSize
EthernetIP.Main.Mode
EthernetIP.Main.OutputInstance
EthernetIP.Main.OutputSize
EthernetIP.Main.Priority
EthernetIP.Main.Rpi
EthernetIP.Main.ServerAddress
EthernetIP.Main.SlotNumber
EthernetIP.OutputTags.OutputN
EthernetIP.OutputTags.Output2
Group.Recording.ChannelNEn
Group.Recording.Compression
Group.Recording.Interval
Group.Recording.VirtualChanNEn
Group.Recording.VirtualChan28En
Group.Trend.Descriptor
Group.Trend.Interval
Group.Trend.MajorDivisions
Group.Trend.PointN
Humidity.Pressure
Humidity.PsychroConst
Humidity.Resolution
Humidity.WetOffset
Instrument.Display.AlarmPanel
Instrument.Display.Brightness
Instrument.Display.Cascade
Instrument.Display.DualLoopControl
Instrument.Display.EIPServerPage
Instrument.Display.FutureTrend
Instrument.Display.FutureTrend1Colour
Instrument.Display.HistoryBackground
Instrument.Display.HomePage
Instrument.Display.HorizontalBar
Instrument.Display.HorizontalTrend
Instrument.Display.HPageTimeout
Instrument.Display.HTrendScaling
Instrument.Display.LoopControl
Instrument.Display.LoopSetpointColour
Instrument.Display.ModbusMaster
Instrument.Display.NumberFormat
Page 163
5.2.4 NON-VOLATILE PARAMETERS IN EEPROM (Cont.)

Instrument.Display.Numeric
Instrument.Display.Programmer
Instrument.Display.PromoteListView
Instrument.Display.ScreenSaverAfter
Instrument.Display.ScreenSaverBrightness
Instrument.Display.SteriliserPage
Instrument.Display.TrendBackground
Instrument.Display.USBAutoScan
Instrument.Display.VerticalBar
Instrument.Display.VerticalTrend
Instrument.Info.CloneState
Instrument.Info.Name
Instrument.Locale.DateFormat
Instrument.Locale.DSTenable
Instrument.Locale.EndDay
Instrument.Locale.EndMonth
Instrument.Locale.EndOn
Instrument.Locale.EndTime
Instrument.Locale.Language
Instrument.Locale.StartDay
Instrument.Locale.StartMonth
Instrument.Locale.StartOn
Instrument.Locale.StartTime
Instrument.Locale.TimeZone
Instrument.Notes.NoteN
Instrument.PromoteList.PromoteListName
Instrument.PromoteList.PromoteParamN
Instrument.PromoteList.PromoteParamNDesc
Instrument.Security.CommsPass
Instrument.Security.DefaultConfig
Instrument.Security.EngineerPassword
Instrument.Security.OEMPass
Instrument.Security.OperatorPassword
Instrument.Security.SupervisorPassword
Lgc2.N.FallbackType
Lgc2.N.In1
Lgc2.N.In2
Lgc2.N.Invert
Lgc2.N.Oper
Lgc8.N.InN
Lgc8.N.InInvert
Lgc8.N.NumIn
Lgc8.N.Oper
Lgc8.N.OutInvert
Loop.N.Diag.LoopMode
Loop.N.OP.Ch1OnOffHysteresis
Loop.N.OP.Ch1TravelTime
Loop.N.OP.Ch2Deadband
Loop.N.OP.Ch2OnOffHysteresis
Loop.N.OP.Ch2TravelTime
Loop.N.OP.CoolType
Loop.N.OP.EnablePowerFeedforward
Loop.N.OP.FeedForwardGain
Loop.N.OP.FeedForwardOffset
Loop.N.OP.FeedForwardTrimLimit
Loop.N.OP.FeedForwardType
Loop.N.OP.ManStartup
Loop.N.OP.ManualMode
Loop.N.OP.OutputHighLimit
Loop.N.OP.OutputLowLimit
Loop.N.OP.PotBreakMode
Loop.N.OP.Rate
Loop.N.OP.RateDisable
Loop.N.OP.SafeOutVal
Loop.N.OP.SbrkOP
Loop.N.OP.SensorBreakMode
Loop.N.PID.Boundary1-2
Loop.N.PID.Boundary2-3
Loop.N.PID.CutbackHigh
Loop.N.PID.CutbackHighN
Loop.N.PID.CutbackLow
Loop.N.PID.CutbackLowN
Loop.N.PID.DerivativeTime
Loop.N.PID.DerivativeTimeN
Loop.N.PID.IntegralTime
Loop.N.PID.IntegralTimeN
Loop.N.PID.LoopBreakTime
Loop.N.PID.LoopBreakTimeN
Loop.N.PID.ManualReset
Loop.N.PID.ManualResetN
Loop.N.PID.NumSets
Loop.N.PID.ProportionalBand
Loop.N.PID.ProportionalBandN
Loop.N.PID.RelCh2Gain
Loop.N.PID.RelCh2GainN
Loop.N.PID.SchedulerRemoteInput
Loop.N.PID.SchedulerType
Loop.N.Setup.AutoManAccess
Loop.N.Setup.CH1ControlType
Loop.N.Setup.CH2ControlType
Loop.N.Setup.ControlAction
Loop.N.Setup.DerivativeType
Loop.N.Setup.LoopName
Loop.N.Setup.PBUnits
Loop.N.Setup.SPAccess
Page 164
Loop.N.SP.ManualTrack
Loop.N.SP.RangeHigh
Loop.N.SP.RangeLow
Loop.N.SP.ServoToPV
Loop.N.SP.SPHighLimit
Loop.N.SP.SPIntBal
Loop.N.SP.SPLowLimit
Loop.N.SP.SPTrack
Loop.N.SP.SPTrimHighLimit
Loop.N.SP.SPTrimLowLimit
Loop.N.Tune.CycleNo
Loop.N.Tune.Diagnostics
Loop.N.Tune.OutputHighLimit
Loop.N.Tune.OutputLowLimit
Loop.N.Tune.PBs
Loop.N.Tune.Settle
Loop.N.Tune.TDs
Loop.N.Tune.TuneR2G
Loop.N.Tune.Type
Math2.N.Fallback
Math2.N.FallbackVal
Math2.N.HighLimit
Math2.N.InN
Math2.N.InNMul
Math2.N.LowLimit
Math2.N.Oper
Math2.N.Resolution
Math2.N.Select
Math2.N.Units
ModbusMaster.N.Data.BitPosition
ModbusMaster.N.Data.DataType
ModbusMaster.N.Data.Descriptor
ModbusMaster.N.Data.FallBackValue
ModbusMaster.N.Data.FunctionCode
ModbusMaster.N.Data.ModbusAddress
ModbusMaster.N.Data.Mode
ModbusMaster.N.Data.Number
ModbusMaster.N.Data.ParameterList
ModbusMaster.N.Data.Priority
ModbusMaster.N.Data.Scaling
ModbusMaster.N.Data.Set
ModbusMaster.N.Data.SlaveDevice
ModbusMaster.N.Data.Value
ModbusMaster.SlaveN.Data.BitPosition
ModbusMaster.SlaveN.Data.DataType
ModbusMaster.SlaveN.Data.Descriptor
ModbusMaster.SlaveN.Data.FallBackValue
ModbusMaster.SlaveN.Data.FunctionCode
ModbusMaster.SlaveN.Data.ModbusAddress
ModbusMaster.SlaveN.Data.Mode
ModbusMaster.SlaveN.Data.Number
ModbusMaster.SlaveN.Data.ParameterList
ModbusMaster.SlaveN.Data.Priority
ModbusMaster.SlaveN.Data.Scaling
ModbusMaster.SlaveN.Data.Set
ModbusMaster.SlaveN.Data.SlaveDevice
ModbusMaster.SlaveN.Data.Value
ModbusMaster.SlaveN.Main.Descriptor
ModbusMaster.SlaveN.Main.HighPriority
ModbusMaster.SlaveN.Main.IPAddress
ModbusMaster.SlaveN.Main.LowPriority
ModbusMaster.SlaveN.Main.MaxBlockSize
ModbusMaster.SlaveN.Main.MediumPriority
ModbusMaster.SlaveN.Main.Online
ModbusMaster.SlaveN.Main.Profile
ModbusMaster.SlaveN.Main.Retries
ModbusMaster.SlaveN.Main.Timeout
ModbusMaster.SlaveN.Main.UnitId
Mux8.N.Fallback
Mux8.N.FallbackVal
Mux8.N.HighLimit
Mux8.N.InN
Mux8.N.LowLimit
Mux8.N.Select
Network.Archive.ArchiveRate
Network.Archive.CSVDateFormat
Network.Archive.CSVHeaders
Network.Archive.CSVHeadings
Network.Archive.CSVIncludeValues
Network.Archive.CSVMessages
Network.Archive.CSVTabDelimiter
Network.Archive.Destination
Network.Archive.FileFormat
Network.Archive.OnFull
Network.Archive.Period
Network.Archive.PrimaryPassword
Network.Archive.PrimaryUser
Network.Archive.PServerIPAddress
Network.Archive.RemotePath
Network.Archive.SecondaryPassword
Network.Archive.SecondaryUser
Network.Archive.SServerIPAddress
Network.FTPserver.Password
Network.FTPserver.Username
Network.Interface.DNSserver
Network.Interface.Gateway
Network.Interface.IPaddress
Network.Interface.IPType
Network.Interface.SubnetMask
Network.Modbus.Address
Network.Modbus.InputTimeout
Network.Modbus.PrefMasterIP
Network.Modbus.SerialMode
Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Network.Modbus.UnitIdEnable
Program.ChNHoldback
Program.ChNHoldbackVal
Program.ChNRampUnits
Program.HoldbackStyle
Program.RampStyle
Programmer.Features.FTPStore
Programmer.Features.Holdback
Programmer.Features.Messages
Programmer.Features.PVEvent
Programmer.Features.UserValue
Programmer.FTP.IPAddress
Programmer.FTP.Password
Programmer.FTP.Username
Programmer.SetUp.ChNResolution
Programmer.SetUp.ChNServoTo
Programmer.SetUp.ChNUnits
Programmer.SetUp.Channels
Programmer.SetUp.MaxEvents
Programmer.SetUp.PowerFailAction
Programmer.SetUp.ProgEditAccess
Programmer.SetUp.ProgModeAccess
Programmer.SetUp.ProgStoreAccess
Programmer.SetUp.RateResolution
Programmer.SetUp.ResetCh1UserVal
Programmer.SetUp.ResetEventN
RealTimeEvent.N.Duration
RealTimeEvent.N.OffDate
RealTimeEvent.N.OffDay
RealTimeEvent.N.OffMonth
RealTimeEvent.N.OffTime
RealTimeEvent.N.OffType
RealTimeEvent.N.OnDate
RealTimeEvent.N.OnDay
RealTimeEvent.N.OnMonth
RealTimeEvent.N.OnTime
RealTimeEvent.N.Type
Segment.N.ChNHoldback
Segment.N.ChNHoldbackVal
Segment.N.ChNPVEvent
Segment.N.ChNPVEventUse
Segment.N.ChNPVEventVal
Segment.N.ChNRate
Segment.N.ChNTime
Segment.N.ChNTSP
Segment.N.ChNUserVal
Segment.N.ChNWait
Segment.N.ChNWaitVal
Segment.N.Cycles
Segment.N.Duration
Segment.N.EndType
Segment.N.EventN
Segment.N.GoBackTo
Segment.N.SegmentName
Segment.N.Type
Segment.N.WaitFor
Steriliser.AutoCounter
Steriliser.FailureDwellN
Steriliser.FileByTag
Steriliser.FileTag
Steriliser.InputNPV
Steriliser.InputTypeN
Steriliser.IP1BandHigh
Steriliser.IP1BandLow
Steriliser.IP1TargetSP
Steriliser.LowLimit
Steriliser.MeasuredTemp
Steriliser.TargetTemperature
Steriliser.TargetTime
Steriliser.TargetTime121
Steriliser.ZTemperatureInterval
Timer.N.In
Timer.N.Type
UserLin.N.NumberOfBreakpoints
UserLin.N.XN
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
5.2.4 NON-VOLATILE PARAMETERS IN EEPROM (Cont.)

UserLin.N.YN
UsrVal.N.HighLimit
UsrVal.N.LowLimit
UsrVal.N.Resolution
UsrVal.N.Units
VirtualChannel.N.AlarmN.Amount
VirtualChannel.N.AlarmN.AverageTime
VirtualChannel.N.AlarmN.Block
VirtualChannel.N.AlarmN.ChangeTime
VirtualChannel.N.AlarmN.Deviation
VirtualChannel.N.AlarmN.Dwell
VirtualChannel.N.AlarmN.Hysteresis
VirtualChannel.N.AlarmN.Latch
VirtualChannel.N.AlarmN.Threshold
VirtualChannel.N.AlarmN.Type
VirtualChannel.N.Main.Descriptor
VirtualChannel.N.Main.HighCutOff
VirtualChannel.N.Main.LowCutOff
VirtualChannel.N.Main.Operation
VirtualChannel.N.Main.Period
VirtualChannel.N.Main.PresetValue
VirtualChannel.N.Main.Resolution
VirtualChannel.N.Main.Type
VirtualChannel.N.Main.Units
VirtualChannel.N.Main.UnitsScaler
VirtualChannel.N.Trend.Colour
VirtualChannel.N.Trend.SpanHigh
VirtualChannel.N.Trend.SpanLow
Zirconia.Clean.CleanEnable
Zirconia.Clean.CleanFreq
Zirconia.Clean.CleanMaxTemp
Zirconia.Clean.CleanTime
Zirconia.Clean.MaxRcovTime
Zirconia.Clean.MinRcovTime
Zirconia.CleanFreq
Zirconia.CleanTime
Zirconia.GasRef
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
Zirconia.GasRefs.CO_Ideal
Zirconia.GasRefs.CO_Local
Zirconia.GasRefs.CO_RemoteEn
Zirconia.GasRefs.H2_Local
Zirconia.GasRefs.H2_RemoteEn
Zirconia.MaxRcovTime
Zirconia.MinCalTemp
Zirconia.MinRcovTime
Zirconia.NumResolution
Zirconia.OxygenExp
Zirconia.OxygenType
Zirconia.ProbeOffset
Zirconia.ProbeType
Zirconia.ProcFactor
Zirconia.RemGasEn
Zirconia.TempOffset
Zirconia.Tolerance
UserLin.N.YN
UsrVal.N.HighLimit
UsrVal.N.LowLimit
UsrVal.N.Resolution
UsrVal.N.Units
VirtualChannel.N.AlarmN.Amount
VirtualChannel.N.AlarmN.AverageTime
VirtualChannel.N.AlarmN.Block
VirtualChannel.N.AlarmN.ChangeTime
VirtualChannel.N.AlarmN.Deviation
VirtualChannel.N.AlarmN.Dwell
VirtualChannel.N.AlarmN.Hysteresis
VirtualChannel.N.AlarmN.Latch
VirtualChannel.N.AlarmN.Threshold
VirtualChannel.N.AlarmN.Type
VirtualChannel.N.Main.Descriptor
VirtualChannel.N.Main.HighCutOff
VirtualChannel.N.Main.LowCutOff
VirtualChannel.N.Main.Operation
VirtualChannel.N.Main.Period
VirtualChannel.N.Main.PresetValue
VirtualChannel.N.Main.Resolution
VirtualChannel.N.Main.Type
VirtualChannel.N.Main.Units
VirtualChannel.N.Main.UnitsScaler
VirtualChannel.N.Trend.Colour
VirtualChannel.N.Trend.SpanHigh
VirtualChannel.N.Trend.SpanLow
Zirconia.CleanFreq
Zirconia.CleanTime
Zirconia.GasRef
Zirconia.MinCalTemp
Zirconia.OxygenExp
Zirconia.OxygenType
Zirconia.ProbeType
Zirconia.ProcFactor
Zirconia.RemGasEn
Zirconia.TempOffset
Zirconia.Tolerance
Page 165
5.3 PARAMETER LIST

This list is arranged in alphabetical block order and gives the memory address for each parameter in both
hex and decimal.
The Modbus addresses, in the range 0x0001 - 0x3FFF, listed in the table below give access to the parameter
values in a scaled integer format. It is possible to gain access to the parameter values in native format by using the following formula:
Native address = (scaled integer address x 2) + 0x8000
The blocks are ordered as follows:
Loop 2
Advanced Loop
Math (2 input)
Alarm summary
Modbus Master
BCD Input
Multiplexer
Channel 1
Network
Channel 2
OR block
Channel 3
Program
Channel 4
Programmer
Custom messages
Real Time Events
DC Output
Segments
Digital I/O
Steriliser
Ether|Net/!P
Timer
Group
User Lin 1
Humidity
User Lin 2
Instrument
User Lin 3
Logic (2 Input)
User Lin 4
Logic (8 input)
User values
Loop 1
Page 166
Virtual chan 1
Virtual chan 2
Virtual chan 3
Virtual chan 4
Virtual chan 5
Virtual chan 6
Virtual chan 7
Virtual chan 8
Virtual chan 9
Virtual chan 10
Virtual chan 11
Virtual chan 12
Virtual chan 13
Virtual chan 14
Virtual chan 15
Virtual chan 16
Virtual chan 17
Virtual chan 18
Virtual chan 19
Virtual chan 20
Virtual chan 21
Virtual chan 22
Virtual chan 23
Virtual chan 24
Virtual chan 25
Virtual chan 26
Virtual chan 27
Virtual chan 28
Virtual chan 29
Virtual chan 30
Zirconia
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
5.3 PARAMETER LIST (Cont.)

Parameter path
Description
Type
Hex
Dec
Resolution
AdvancedLoop.Diag.CalcOP
AdvancedLoop.Diag.HiSatLim
AdvancedLoop.Diag.LoSatLim
AdvancedLoop.Diag.MasterDerivativeOutContrib
AdvancedLoop.Diag.MasterError
AdvancedLoop.Diag.MasterFB
AdvancedLoop.Diag.MasterIntegralOutContrib
AdvancedLoop.Diag.MasterLoopBreakAlarm
AdvancedLoop.Diag.MasterPropOutContrib
AdvancedLoop.Diag.MasterSensorBreak
AdvancedLoop.Diag.OPPid
AdvancedLoop.Diag.SchedCBH
AdvancedLoop.Diag.SchedCBL
AdvancedLoop.Diag.SchedLPBrk
AdvancedLoop.Diag.SchedMR
AdvancedLoop.Diag.SchedOutputHigh
AdvancedLoop.Diag.SchedOutputLow
AdvancedLoop.Diag.SchedPB
AdvancedLoop.Diag.SchedR2G
AdvancedLoop.Diag.SchedTd
AdvancedLoop.Diag.SchedTi
AdvancedLoop.Diag.SlaveDerivativeOutContrib
AdvancedLoop.Diag.SlaveError
AdvancedLoop.Diag.SlaveIntegralOutContrib
AdvancedLoop.Diag.SlaveLoopBreakAlarm
AdvancedLoop.Diag.SlavePropOutContrib
AdvancedLoop.Diag.SlaveSensorBreak
AdvancedLoop.Diag.TargetOutput
Calc OP
HiSatLim
LoSatLim
Master derivative output contribution
Master error
Master feedback
Master integral output contribution
Master loop break (0 = No; 1 = Yes)
Master loop proportional output contribution
Master sensor break (0 = Off, 1 = On)
OPPID
Scheduled cutback high
Scheduled cutback low
Scheduled loop break time
Scheduled manual reset
Scheduled output high limit
Scheduled output low limit
Scheduled proportional band
Scheduled relative cool gain
Scheduled derivative time
Scheduled integral time
Slave derivative output contribution
Slave error
Slave integral output contribution
Slave loop break (0 = No; 1 = Yes)
Slave loop proportional output contribution
Slave sensor break (0 = Off; 1 = On)
Target output
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
bool
float32
bool
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
bool
float32
bool
float32
031f
0320
0321
0312
030d
031e
0311
0323
0310
0313
0322
3195
3196
3198
3197
319a
319b
3192
3199
3194
3193
031d
031a
031c
030f
031b
0325
030e
799
800
801
786
781
798
785
803
784
787
802
12693
12694
12696
12695
12698
12699
12690
12697
12692
12691
797
794
796
783
795
805
782
AdvancedLoop.Diag.WorkingOutputHigh
AdvancedLoop.Diag.WorkingOutputLow
AdvancedLoop.Main.ActiveOut
Slave output high limit

Slave output low limit
Working output
float32
float32
float32
0315
0314
0303
789
788
771
AdvancedLoop.Main.CascadeMode
AdvancedLoop.Main.Inhibit
AdvancedLoop.Main.MasterIntHold
AdvancedLoop.Main.MasterPV
AdvancedLoop.Main.MasterWSP
AdvancedLoop.Main.SlaveIntHold
AdvancedLoop.Main.SlavePV
AdvancedLoop.Main.SlaveWSP
AdvancedLoop.Main.TargetSetpoint
AdvancedLoop.MasterPID.ControlAction
AdvancedLoop.MasterPID.CutbackHigh
AdvancedLoop.MasterPID.CutbackLow
AdvancedLoop.MasterPID.DerivativeTime
AdvancedLoop.MasterPID.DerivativeType
AdvancedLoop.MasterPID.ErrorLimit
AdvancedLoop.MasterPID.IntegralTime
AdvancedLoop.MasterPID.LoopBreakTime
AdvancedLoop.MasterPID.ManualReset
AdvancedLoop.MasterPID.PBUnits
AdvancedLoop.MasterPID.ProportionalBand
AdvancedLoop.MasterSP.AltSP
AdvancedLoop.MasterSP.AltSPSelect
AdvancedLoop.MasterSP.ManualTrack
AdvancedLoop.MasterSP.RangeHigh
AdvancedLoop.MasterSP.RangeLow
AdvancedLoop.MasterSP.Rate
AdvancedLoop.MasterSP.RateDisable
AdvancedLoop.MasterSP.RateDone
AdvancedLoop.MasterSP.ServoToPV
AdvancedLoop.MasterSP.SP1
AdvancedLoop.MasterSP.SP2
AdvancedLoop.MasterSP.SPHighLimit
AdvancedLoop.MasterSP.SPIntBal
AdvancedLoop.MasterSP.SPLowLimit
AdvancedLoop.MasterSP.SPSelect
AdvancedLoop.MasterSP.SPTrack
AdvancedLoop.MasterSP.SPTrim
AdvancedLoop.MasterSP.SPTrimHighLimit
AdvancedLoop.MasterSP.SPTrimLowLimit
AdvancedLoop.MasterSP.TrackPV
AdvancedLoop.MasterSP.TrackSP
AdvancedLoop.Output.Ch1Output
Cascade mode (0 = Cascade; 1 = Slave; 2 = Manual)

Control inhibit (0 = No; 1 = Yes)
Master integral hold (0 = No; 1 = Yes)
Master loop process variable
Master loop working setpoint
Slave integral hold (0 = No; 1 = Yes)
Slave loop process variable
Slave loop working setpoint
Target setpoint
Control action (0 = Reverse acting; 1 = Direct acting)
Cutback high (0 = Auto)
Cutback low (0 = Auto)
Derivative time (0 = Off)
Derivative type ( 0 = PV; 1 = Eror)
Error limit
Integral time (0 = Off)
Loop break time (0 = Off)
Manual reset
Proportional band units (0 = Engineering; 1 = Percentage)
Proportional band
Alternative setpoint
Alternative setpoint enable (0 = No; 1 = Yes)
Manual track enable (0 = Off; 1 = On)
Range high
Range low
Setpoint rate limit value (0 = Off)
Setpoint rate limit disable (0 = No; 1 = Yes)
Setpoint rate limit complete (0 = No; 1 = Yes)
Servo to PV enable (0 = No; 1 = Yes)
Setpoint 1
Setpoint 2
Setpoint high limit
SP integral balance (0 = Off; 1 = On)
Setpoint low limit
Active setpoint select (0 - Setpoint 1; 1 = Setpoint 2)
Setpoint tracking enable (0 = Off; 1 = On)
Setpoint trim
Setpoint trim high limit
Setpoint trim low limit
Track PV
Track SP
Channel 1 on/off hysteresis
Channel 1 output value
uint8
bool
uint8
float32
float32
uint8
float32
float32
float32
uint8
float32
float32
float32
uint8
float32
float32
float32
float32
uint8
float32
float32
uint8
uint8
float32
float32
float32
bool
bool
bool
float32
float32
float32
bool
float32
uint8
uint8
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
0316
0304
0305
0317
0318
0306
0300
0302
0301
3103
31af
31b0
31ae
3105
31cc
31ad
31b2
31b1
3104
31ac
3160
3161
3167
3159
315a
3162
3163
030a
316c
315c
315d
315e
316b
315f
315b
3168
3164
3165
3166
3169
316a
3172
030b
790
772
773
791
792
774
768
770
769
12547
12719
12720
12718
12549
12748
12717
12722
12721
12548
12716
12640
12641
12647
12633
12634
12642
12643
778
12652
12636
12637
12638
12651
12639
12635
12648
12644
12645
12646
12649
12650
12658
779
AdvancedLoop.Output.Ch1PotBreak
AdvancedLoop.Output.Ch1PotPosition
AdvancedLoop.Output.Ch2Deadband
Channel 1 potentiometer break (0 = Off; 1 = On)

Channel 1 valve position
Channel 1 travel time
Channel 2 deadband (0 = Off)
uint8
float32
float32
float32
3179
3178
3174
316f
12665
12664
12660
12655
1dp
1dp
1dp
0dp
Same as AdvancedLoop.Main.MasterPV
1dp
4dp
Not applicable
0dp
Not applicable
1dp
0dp
0dp
0dp
1dp
1dp
1dp
1dp
1dp
1dp
1dp
0dp
Same as AdvancedLoop.Main.SlavePV
4dp
Not applicable
0dp
Not applicable
Same as AdvancedLoop.Output.OutputHighLimit
0dp
0dp
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
1dp
Not applicable
1dp
Not applicable
1dp
1dp
1dp
Not applicable
1dp
1dp
0dp
1dp
Not applicable
1dp
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
0dp
1dp
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
Page 167

Parameter path
Description
Type
Hex
Dec
AdvancedLoop.Output.Ch2Output
Channel 2 on/off hysteresis

Channel 2 (cool) output value
float32
float32
3173
030c
AdvancedLoop.Output.Ch2PotBreak
AdvancedLoop.Output.Ch2PotPosition
AdvancedLoop.Output.CoolType
uint8
float32
float32
uint8
317b
317a
3175
3183
uint8
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
uint8
3181
3185
3186
3188
318d
3187
3184
12673
12677
12678
12680
12685
12679
12676
AdvancedLoop.Output.ForcedOP
AdvancedLoop.Output.ManualMode
AdvancedLoop.Output.ManualOutVal
Channel 2 potentiometer break (0 = Off; 1 = On)

Channel 2 valve position
Channel 2 travel time
Cooling algorithm type
0 = Linear
1 = Oil
2 = Water
3 = Fan
Power feed forward enable (0 = No; 1 = Yes)
Feedforward gain
Feedforward offset
Feedforward output
Feedforward remote
Feedforward trim limit
Feedforward type
0 = None
1 = Remote
2 = SP
3 = PV
Forced manual output value
Manual output mode (0 = Track; 1 = Step; 2 = LastMOP)
Manual output value
12659 Same as AdvancedLoop.Main.MasterPV

780
12667 Not applicable
12666 0dp
12661 1dp
float32
uint8
float32
318f
317f
3180
AdvancedLoop.Output.ManualStartup
AdvancedLoop.Output.MeasuredPower
AdvancedLoop.Output.NudgeLower
AdvancedLoop.Output.NudgeRaise
AdvancedLoop.Output.OutputHighLimit
AdvancedLoop.Output.OutputLowLimit
Manual startup mode (0 = Off; 1 = On)

Measured mains voltage
Valve nudge lower (0 = No; 1 = Yes)
Valve nudge raise (0 = No; 1 = Yes)
Output high limit
Output low limit
bool
float32
uint8
uint8
float32
float32
3190
3182
3177
3176
316d
316e
AdvancedLoop.Output.PotBreakMode
uint8
317c
AdvancedLoop.Output.Rate
AdvancedLoop.Output.RateDisable
AdvancedLoop.Output.RemoteOutputHigh
AdvancedLoop.Output.RemoteOutputLow
AdvancedLoop.Output.SafeOutVal
Potentiometer break mode

0 = Raise
1 = Lower
2 = Reset
Output rate limit value (0 = Off)
Rate disable (0 = No; 1 = Yes)
Remote output high limit
Remote output low limit
Safe output value
12687 1dp
12672 Same as AdvancedLoop.Output.OutputHighLimit
12674 0dp
12653 1dp
12654 Same as AdvancedLoop.Output.OutputHighLimit
float32
bool
float32
float32
float32
3170
3171
318c
318b
317e
12656
12657
12684
12683
12670
AdvancedLoop.Output.SbrkOP
Sensor break output
float32
318e
12686
AdvancedLoop.Output.SlaveSensorBreakMode
AdvancedLoop.Output.TrackEnable
AdvancedLoop.Output.TrackOutput
AdvancedLoop.Setup.CascadeType
AdvancedLoop.Setup.MasterLoop
AdvancedLoop.Setup.MasterName
AdvancedLoop.Setup.ModeAccess
Slave sensor break mode (0 = SbrkOP; 1 = Hold)

Enable output tracking (0 = Off; 1 = On)
Output track value
Cascade type (0 = Full scale; 1 = Trim)
Master loop type (0 = PID)
Master loop name
Mode access
0 = R/W (Logged out) 1 = R/W (Operator) 2 = Read Only
Setpoint access (as Mode Access, above)
Slave heat/channel 1 control type
0 = Off 1 = On/Off 2 = PID 3 = VPU 4 = VPB
Slave cool/channel 2 control type (as above)
Slave loop name
Active set (1 = Set 1; 2 = Set 2; 3 = Set 3)
Scheduler boundary 1-2
Scheduler boundary 2-3
Control action (0 = Reverse acting; 1 = Direct acting)
Cutback high set 1 (0 = Auto)
Cutback low set 1 (0 = Auto)
Derivative time set 1 (0 = Off)
Derivative type (0 = PV; 1 = Error)
Integral time set 1 (0 = Off)
Loop break time set 1 (0 = Off)
Manual reset
Manual reset 2
Manual reset 3
Number of PID sets
Output high limit
Output high limit
Output high limit
Output low limit 2
Output low limit
Output low limit
Proportional band units (0 = Engineering; 1 = Percentage)
uint8
uint8
float32
uint8
uint8
string_t
uint8
317d
318a
3189
1606
31b3
7010
31a8
12669
12682
12681
5638
12723
28688
12712
uint8
uint8
31a7
3101

uint8
string_t
uint8
float32
float32
uint8
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
uint8
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
uint8
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
uint8
3102
7020
3138
3139
133a
3106
313f
3147
314f
3140
3148
3150
313d
3145
314d
3305
313c
3144
314c
3142
314a
3152
3141
3149
3151
3136
3155
3157
3153
3156
3158
3154
3304
12546
28704
12600
12601
4922
12550
12607
12615
12623
12608
12616
12624
12605
12613
12621
13061
12604
12612
12620
12610
12618
12626
12609
12617
12625
12598
12629
12631
12627
12630
12632
12628
13060
AdvancedLoop.Output.EnablePowerFeedforward
AdvancedLoop.Output.FeedForwardGain
AdvancedLoop.Output.FeedForwardOffset
AdvancedLoop.Output.FeedForwardOutput
AdvancedLoop.Output.FeedForwardRemote
AdvancedLoop.Output.FeedForwardTrimLimit
AdvancedLoop.Output.FeedForwardType
AdvancedLoop.Setup.SetpointAccess
AdvancedLoop.Setup.SlaveName
AdvancedLoop.SlavePID.ActiveSet
AdvancedLoop.SlavePID.ControlAction
AdvancedLoop.SlavePID.CutbackHigh
AdvancedLoop.SlavePID.CutbackLow
AdvancedLoop.SlavePID.DerivativeTime
AdvancedLoop.SlavePID.DerivativeType
AdvancedLoop.SlavePID.IntegralTime
AdvancedLoop.SlavePID.LoopBreakTime
AdvancedLoop.SlavePID.ManualReset
AdvancedLoop.SlavePID.NumberOfSets
AdvancedLoop.SlavePID.OutputHi2
AdvancedLoop.SlavePID.OutputHi3
AdvancedLoop.SlavePID.OutputHigh
AdvancedLoop.SlavePID.OutputLo2
AdvancedLoop.SlavePID.OutputLo3
AdvancedLoop.SlavePID.OutputLow
AdvancedLoop.SlavePID.PBUnits
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
Resolution
Not applicable
3dp
0dp
0dp
0dp
0dp
Not applicable
3 = Model
1dp
Not applicable
Same as AdvancedLoop.Main.ActiveOut
Same as AdvancedLoop.Main.ActiveOut
Not applicable
Not applicable
0dp
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
0dp
0dp
Not applicable
1dp
1dp
1dp
1dp
1dp
1dp
1dp
1dp
1dp
Not applicable
1dp
1dp
1dp
0dp
0dp
0dp
1dp
1dp
1dp
Not applicable
1dp
1dp
1dp
1dp
1dp
1dp
Not applicable
Page 168

Parameter path
Description
Type
Hex
Dec
Resolution
AdvancedLoop.SlavePID.ProportionalBand
AdvancedLoop.SlavePID.RelCh2Gain
AdvancedLoop.SlavePID.RemoteInput
AdvancedLoop.SlavePID.SchedulerType
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
uint8
313b
3143
314b
313e
3146
314e
3137
3135
12603
12611
12619
12606
12614
12622
12599
12597
1dp
1dp
1dp
1dp
1dp
1dp
0dp
Not applicable
uint8
31bf
float32
uint8
uint8
31b4
31ca
31c2
12724 Same as AdvancedLoop.Main.SlavePV

AdvancedLoop.SlaveSP.RangeHigh
AdvancedLoop.SlaveSP.RangeLow
AdvancedLoop.SlaveSP.RemoteFeedForward
AdvancedLoop.SlaveSP.RemoteFFEnable
AdvancedLoop.SlaveSP.RemoteFFHigh
AdvancedLoop.SlaveSP.RemoteFFLow
AdvancedLoop.SlaveSP.SbrkSP
AdvancedLoop.SlaveSP.SPHighLimit
AdvancedLoop.SlaveSP.SPLowLimit
AdvancedLoop.SlaveSP.TrimHighLimit
AdvancedLoop.SlaveSP.TrimLowLimit
AdvancedLoop.SlaveSP.TrimRangeHigh
AdvancedLoop.SlaveSP.TrimRangeLow
AdvancedLoop.Tune.A1
AdvancedLoop.Tune.A2
AdvancedLoop.Tune.Alpha
AdvancedLoop.Tune.Alpha_p
AdvancedLoop.Tune.ArgOP
AdvancedLoop.Tune.ArgPV
AdvancedLoop.Tune.Band
AdvancedLoop.Tune.CycleNo
AdvancedLoop.Tune.Debug
AdvancedLoop.Tune.Diagnostics
AdvancedLoop.Tune.Gain
AdvancedLoop.Tune.Hysteresis
AdvancedLoop.Tune.MasterTune
AdvancedLoop.Tune.ModeMan
AdvancedLoop.Tune.ModOP
AdvancedLoop.Tune.ModPV
AdvancedLoop.Tune.OP
AdvancedLoop.Tune.OPDel
AdvancedLoop.Tune.OPss
AdvancedLoop.Tune.OutputHighLimit
Proportional band set 1

Relative cool/channel 2 gain
Relative cool/channel 2 gain 2
Relative cool/channel 2 gain 3
Scheduler remote input
Scheduler type
0 = Off
1 = Manually set 2 = Setpoint
3 = PV
4 = Error
5 = Output
6 = Remote
Feedforward select
0 = Master PV 1 = Master WSP 2 = Remote FF
Local setpoint
Manual track enable (0 = Off; 1 = On)
Master sensor break mode
0 = SbrkSP
1 = Hold
2 = SlaveSB
Range high
Range low
Remote feedforward input
Remote feedforward enable (0 = No; 1 = Yes)
Remote feedforward high
Remote feddforward low
Sensor break setpoint
Setpoint high limit
Setpoint low limit
Trim high limit
Trim low limit
Trim range high
Trim range low
A1
A2
Alpha
Alpha_p
Argument Output
Argument PV
Band
CycleNo
Debug
Tuning diagnostics
Gain
Hysteresis
Master tune
Mode Man
Modulus OP
Modulus PV
Output
OPDel
OPss
Output high
float32
float32
float32
bool
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
bool
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
31c0
31c1
31bb
31be
31bc
31bd
31c3
31b5
31b6
31b9
31ba
31b7
31b8
320d
320e
3211
320f
3209
3208
31c7
3213
3212
31cb
320a
31c6
3203
3201
3207
3206
3202
0319
3210
3132
12736
12737
12731
12734
12732
12733
12739
12725
12726
12729
12730
12727
12728
12813
12814
12817
12815
12809
12808
12743
12819
12818
12747
12810
12742
12803
12801
12807
12806
12802
793
12816
12594
AdvancedLoop.Tune.OutputLowLimit
Output low
float32
3133
12595
AdvancedLoop.Tune.PBs
AdvancedLoop.Tune.Period
AdvancedLoop.Tune.Phase
AdvancedLoop.Tune.Settle
AdvancedLoop.Tune.Stage
PBs
Period
Phase
Settle
Stage
0 = Reset
1 = None
2 = Settling
3 = Current SP
4 = New PP
5 = To SP
6 = Wait Max. 7 = Wait Min
8 = Store
9 = CoolT
10 = PID
11 = Abort
12 = Complete 13 = New R2g 14 = 1: Half Cycle
15 = 2: Full Cycle
16 = 3: Full Cycle
17 = 4: Final cycle
18 = 5: Calculating
Stage time
State
0 = Off
1 = Ready
2 - Running
3 = Complete
4 = Time-out 5 = Ti Limit
6 = R2G limit
TDs
Timeout
Autotune enable (0 = Off; 1 = On)
Tune high
Tune low
Slave R2G tuning type
0 = Standard R2G tuning 1 = R2GPD tuning 2 = Off
Tune slave
Tune Status
0 = Not tuning
1 = Tuning the slave
2 = Tuning the master
3 = Tuning complete
-1 = Tuning aborted or timed-out
Autotune algorithm type (0 = Slave; 1 = Master)
Working setpoint
float32
float32
float32
float32
uint8
3214
320c
320b
3216
0308
12820
12812
12811
12822
776
Not applicable
0dp
0dp
4dp
2dp
1dp
1dp
1dp
0dp
2dp
Not applicable
1dp
1dp
0dp
0dp
1dp
1dp
1dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
0dp
1dp
2dp
Not applicable
float32
uint8
0309
0307
777
775
0dp
Not applicable
float32
float32
bool
float32
float32
uint8
3215
0326
3131
31c8
31c9
3130
12821
806
12593
12744
12745
12592
2dp
0dp
Not applicable
Not applicable
float32
float32
3204
3205
12804 1dp
12805 0dp
uint8
float32
31c5
3200

12800 Same as AdvancedLoop.Main.MasterPV
AdvancedLoop.SlaveSP.FFSelect
AdvancedLoop.SlaveSP.LocalSP
AdvancedLoop.SlaveSP.ManualTrack
AdvancedLoop.SlaveSP.MasterSensorBreakMode
AdvancedLoop.Tune.StageTime
AdvancedLoop.Tune.State
AdvancedLoop.Tune.TDs
AdvancedLoop.Tune.Timeout
AdvancedLoop.Tune.TuneEnable
AdvancedLoop.Tune.TuneHigh
AdvancedLoop.Tune.TuneLow
AdvancedLoop.Tune.TuneR2G
AdvancedLoop.Tune.TuneSlave
AdvancedLoop.Tune.TuneStatus
AdvancedLoop.Tune.TuneType
AdvancedLoop.Tune.WSP
Page 169
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11

Parameter path
Description
Type
Hex
Dec
Resolution
AlarmSummary.AnyAlarm
AlarmSummary.AnyChanAlarm
0 = No active alarms; 1 = one or more alarms active

0 = No channel alarms
1 = Channel alarm(s) active but all ackd.
2 = Channel alarm(s) active but not all ackd
0 = No system alarms; 1 = 1 or more system alm(s)
Acknowledge the most recent channel alarm
Channel and alarm number of most recent alarm
0 = No alarm
4 = Ch1;Al1
5 =Ch1;Al2
8 = Ch2;Al1
9 = Ch2Al2
12 = Ch3;Al1
13 = Ch3;Al2
16 = Ch4;Al1
17 = Ch4;Al2
132 = VC1;Al1
133 = VC1;Al2
136 = VC2;Al1
137 = VC2;Al2
140 = VC3;Al1
141 = VC3;Al2
144 = VC4;Al1
145 = VC4;Al2
148 = VC5;Al1
149 = VC5;Al2
152 = VC6;Al1
153 = VC6;Al2
156 = VC7;Al1
157 = VC7;Al2
160 = VC8;Al1
161 = VC8;Al2
164 = VC9;Al1
165 = VC9;Al2
168 = VC10;Al1
169 = VC10;Al2
172 = VC11;Al1
173 = VC11;Al2
176 = VC12;Al1
177 = VC12;Al2
180 = VC13;Al1
181 = VC13;Al2
184 = VC14;Al1
185 = VC14;Al2
188 = VC15;Al1
189 = VC15:Al2
Status of most recent alarm
0 = Off
1 = Active 2 = Safe unack 3 = Active unack
Acknowledge the 2nd most recent channel alarm
As Alarm1Num, but for 2nd most recent alarm
As Alarm1Status, but for 2nd most recent alarm
Acknowledge the 3rd most recent channel alarm
As Alarm1Num, but for 3rd most recent alarm
As Alarm1Status, but for 3rd most recent alarm
Acknowledge the 4th most recent channel alarm
As Alarm1Num, but for 4th most recent alarm
As Alarm1Status, but for 4th most recent alarm
As Alarm1Num, but for 13th most recent alarmr
As Alarm1Num, but for 14th most recent alarmr
Acknowledge the 21st most recent channel alarm
As Alarm1Num, but for 21st most recent alarm
As Alarm1Status, but for 21st most recent alarm
bool
uint8
01a2
01a0
418
416
Not applicable
Not applicable
bool
bool
uint8
01a1
1192
1190
417
4498
4496
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
uint8
1191
4497
Not applicable
bool
uint8
uint8
bool
uint8
uint8
bool
uint8
uint8
bool
uint8
uint8
bool
uint8
uint8
bool
uint8
uint8
bool
uint8
uint8
bool
uint8
uint8
bool
uint8
uint8
bool
uint8
uint8
bool
uint8
uint8
bool
uint8
uint8
bool
uint8
uint8
bool
uint8
uint8
bool
uint8
uint8
bool
uint8
uint8
bool
uint8
uint8
bool
uint8
uint8
bool
uint8
uint8
bool
uint8
uint8
bool
1195
1193
1194
1198
1196
1197
119b
1199
119a
119e
119c
119d
11a1
119f
11a0
11a4
11a2
11a3
11a7
11a5
11a6
11aa
11a8
11a9
11ad
11ab
11ac
11b0
11ae
11af
11b3
11b1
11b2
11b6
11b4
11b5
11b9
11b7
11b8
11bc
11ba
11bb
11bf
11bd
11be
11c2
11c0
11c1
11c5
11c3
11c4
11c8
11c6
11c7
11cb
11c9
11ca
11ce
11cc
11cd
11d1
4501
4499
4500
4504
4502
4503
4507
4505
4506
4510
4508
4509
4513
4511
4512
4516
4514
4515
4519
4517
4518
4522
4520
4521
4525
4523
4524
4528
4526
4527
4531
4529
4530
4534
4532
4533
4537
4535
4536
4540
4538
4539
4543
4541
4542
4546
4544
4545
4549
4547
4548
4552
4550
4551
4555
4553
4554
4558
4556
4557
4561
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
AlarmSummary.AnySystemAlarm
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm1Ack
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm1Num
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm1Status
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
Page 170

Parameter path
Description
Type
Hex
Dec
Resolution
AlarmSummary.GlobalAck
AlarmSummary.StatusWord1

Acknowledge the 31st most recent channel alarm
As Alarm1Num, but for 31st most recent alarm
As Alarm1Status, but for 31st most recent alarm
As Alarm1Num, but for 33rd most recent alarm
Acknowledge all alarms. 0=No;1 = yes
A summary of Channel 1-4 alarms
Bit 0: 1 = Channel 1 Alarm 1 active
Bit 1: 1 = Channel 1 Alarm 1 not acknowledged
A summary of Virtual Channel 1 to 4 alarms
Bit 0: 1 = Virtual channel 1 Alarm 1 active
Bit 1: 1 = Virtual channel 1 Alarm 1 not ackd
uint8
uint8
bool
uint8
uint8
bool
uint8
uint8
bool
uint8
uint8
bool
uint8
uint8
bool
uint8
uint8
bool
uint8
uint8
bool
uint8
uint8
bool
uint8
uint8
bool
uint8
uint8
bool
uint8
uint8
bool
uint8
uint8
bool
uint8
uint8
bool
uint8
uint8
bool
uint8
uint8
bool
uint8
uint8
bool
uint8
uint8
bool
int16
11cf
11d0
11d4
11d2
11d3
11d7
11d5
11d6
11da
11d8
11d9
11dd
11db
11dc
11e0
11de
11df
11e3
11e1
11e2
11e6
11e4
11e5
11e9
11e7
11e8
11ec
11ea
11eb
11ef
11ed
11ee
11f2
11f0
11f1
11f5
11f3
11f4
11f8
11f6
11f7
11fb
11f9
11fa
11fe
11fc
11fd
1201
11ff
1200
01a3
01a4
4559
4560
4564
4562
4563
4567
4565
4566
4570
4568
4569
4573
4571
4572
4576
4574
4575
4579
4577
4578
4582
4580
4581
4585
4583
4584
4588
4586
4587
4591
4589
4590
4594
4592
4593
4597
4595
4596
4600
4598
4599
4603
4601
4602
4606
4604
4605
4609
4607
4608
419
420
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
int16
01a5
421
Not applicable
Page 171
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11

Parameter path
Description
AlarmSummary.StatusWord2 (Cont.)
AlarmSummary.System.Alarm2ID

As for Status Word 2 but for virtual channs 5 to 8
Most recent active system alarm
0 = No Alarm
1 = Low battery
2 = Battery failure
3 = System clock fail
4 = Channel error
5 = Channel fail
6 = DHCP server fail
7 = FTP Archive file lost
8 = FTP Archive slow
9 = FTP Primary server failure
10 = FTP Secondary server failure
11 = Insufficient non-volatile memory
12 = Maths channel failure 13 = Media archive file lost
14 = Media archive slow
15 = Network boot failure
16 = DC Output Cal. Error 17 = Recording failure
18 = Media failure
19: = Media full
20 =SNTP failure
21 = Time synchronisation failure
22 = Media missing
23: Archive disabled
24 = Archiving failed
25 = Archiving timed out
26 = USB Over Current
27 = USB unsuported
28 = Invalid parameter database
29 = Invalid non-volatile data
30 = Flash write failure
31 = Wiring failure
32 = Broadcast Storm
33 = Non-volatile memory write frequency warning
2nd most recent active system alarm (as Alarm1ID)
3rd most recent active system alarm (as Alarm1ID)
4th most recent active system alarm (as Alarm1ID)
21st most recent active system alarm (as Alarm1ID)
23rd most recent active system alarm (as Alarm1ID)
31st most recent active system alarm (as Alarm1ID)
BCDInput.1.BCDVal
BCDInput.1.DecByte
BCDInput.1.In1
BCDInput.1.In2
BCDInput.1.In3
BCDInput.1.In4
BCDInput.1.In5
BCDInput.1.In6
BCDInput.1.In7
BCDInput.1.In8
BCDInput.1.Tens
BCDInput.1.Units
BCDInput.2.BCDVal
BCDInput.2.DecByte
BCDInput.2.In1
BCDInput.2.In2
BCDInput.2.In3
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
Type
Hex
Dec
Resolution
int16
01a6
422
Not applicable
int16
01a7
423
Not applicable
int16
01a8
424
Not applicable
uint8
1210
4624
Not applicable
uint8
uint8
uint8
uint8
uint8
uint8
uint8
uint8
uint8
uint8
uint8
uint8
uint8
uint8
uint8
uint8
uint8
uint8
uint8
uint8
uint8
uint8
uint8
uint8
uint8
uint8
uint8
uint8
uint8
uint8
uint8
1211
1212
1213
1214
1215
1216
1217
1218
1219
121a
121b
121c
121d
121e
121f
1220
1221
1222
1223
1224
1225
1226
1227
1228
1229
122a
122b
122c
122d
122e
122f
4625
4626
4627
4628
4629
4630
4631
4632
4633
4634
4635
4636
4637
4638
4639
4640
4641
4642
4643
4644
4645
4646
4647
4648
4649
4650
4651
4652
4653
4654
4655
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
BCD1 BCD Value

BCD1 Decimal Value
BCD1 Input 1 (0 = Off; 1 = On)
BCD1 Tens (MSD)
BCD1 Units (LSD)
uint8
uint8
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
uint8
uint8
2ed1
2ed0
2ec8
2ec9
2eca
2ecb
2ecc
2ecd
2ece
2ecf
2ed3
2ed2
11985
11984
11976
11977
11978
11979
11980
11981
11982
11983
11987
11986
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
BCD2 BCD Value

BCD2 Decimal Value
uint8
uint8
bool
bool
bool
2edd
2edc
2ed4
2ed5
2ed6
11997
11996
11988
11989
11990
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Page 172

Parameter path
Description
Type
Hex
Dec
Resolution
BCDInput.2.In4
BCDInput.2.In5
BCDInput.2.In6
BCDInput.2.In7
BCDInput.2.In8
BCDInput.2.Tens
BCDInput.2.Units

BCD2 Tens (MSD)
BCD2 Units (LSD)
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
uint8
uint8
2ed7
2ed8
2ed9
2eda
2edb
2edf
2ede
11991
11992
11993
11994
11995
11999
11998
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Channel.1.Alarm1.Acknowledge
Channel.1.Alarm1.Acknowledgement
Channel.1.Alarm1.Amount
Channel.1.Alarm1.AverageTime
Channel.1.Alarm1.Block
Channel.1.Alarm1.ChangeTime
Channel.1.Alarm1.Deviation
Channel.1.Alarm1.Dwell
Channel.1.Alarm1.Hysteresis
Channel.1.Alarm1.Inactive
Channel.1.Alarm1.Inhibit
Channel.1.Alarm1.Latch
1 = Acknowledge alarm
1 = Alarm acknowledged
1 = Alarm source active, or safe but not ackd
Alarm amount
Average time
Blocking enable (0 = Off; 1 = On)
Change time (0 = Per second; 1= Per minute; 2 =Per hour)
Alarm deviation
Alarm dwell
Alarm hysteresis
1 = the alarm is safe and acknowledged
1 = the alarm is inhibited
Alarm latch type
0 = None
1 = Auto
2 = Manual
3 = Trigger
1 = the alarm has not been acknowledged
Alarm reference
Alarm status
0 = Off
1 = Active
2 = Safe not acknowledged 3 = Active not acknowledged
Alarm threshold
Alarn type
0 = None
1 = Abs High
2 = Abs Low
3 = Dev high
4 = Dev Low
5 = Dev band
6 = ROC rising 7 = ROC falling
10 = Dig Off
11 = Dig high
12 = Dig Low
1 = Acknowledge alarm
1 = Alarm acknowledged
1 = Alarm source active, or safe but not ackd
Alarm amount
Average time
Blocking enable (0 = Off; 1 = On)
Change time (0 = Per second; 1= Per minute; 2 =Per hour)
Alarm deviation
Alarm dwell
Alarm hysteresis
1 = the alarm is safe and acknowledged
1 = the alarm is inhibited
Configures the latching type of the alarm (As Alarm1.Latch)
1 = the alarm has not been acknowledged
Alarm reference
As Alarm1.Status
Alarm threshold
Alarm type (as Alarm1.Type
Cold junction compensation type
0 = None
1 = Internal
2 = External
3 = Remote (Ch1)
4 = Remote (Ch2)
5 = Remote (Ch3)
6 = Remote (Ch4)
Close String
Text string to describe the channel
External CJ temperature
Fault response. 0 = none; 1 = Drive high; 2 = Drive low
Filter time constant
Input range high value
Input range low value
Channel internal cold junction temperature
Input Adjust state (0 = Unadjusted; 1 = Adjusted)
Secondary Input Adjust state (0 = Unadjusted; 1 = Adjusted)
Linearisation type
0 =Type B
1 = Type C
2 = Type D
3 = Type E
4 = Type G2
5 = Type J
6 =Type K
7 = Type L
8 = Type N
9 = Type R
10 = Type S
11 = Type T
12 = Type U
13 = NiMoNiCo
14 = Platinel
15 = NiNiMo
16 = Pt20RhPt40Rh 17 = User 1
18 = User 2
19 = User 3
20 = User 4
21 = Cu10
22 = Pt100
23 = Pt100A
24 = JPT100
25 = Ni100
26 = Ni120
27 = Cu53
28 = Linear
29 = Sqrt
bool
bool
bool
float32
time_t
uint8
uint8
float32
time_t
float32
bool
bool
uint8
01b0
1850
184b
1848
184a
1842
1849
1847
1845
1844
184e
1851
1841
432
6224
6219
6216
6218
6210
6217
6215
6213
6212
6222
6225
6209
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Same as Channel.1.Main.PV
Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
bool
float32
uint8
184f
1846
0102
6223
6214
258
Not applicable
Not applicable
float32
uint8
1843
1840
6211
6208
Not applicable
bool
bool
bool
float32
time_t
uint8
uint8
float32
time_t
float32
bool
bool
uint8
bool
float32
uint8
float32
uint8
uint8
01b1
1870
186b
1868
186a
1862
1869
1867
1865
1864
186e
1871
1861
186f
1866
0103
1863
1860
180c
433
6256
6251
6248
6250
6242
6249
6247
6245
6244
6254
6257
6241
6255
6246
259
6243
6240
6156
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
string_t
string_t
float32
uint8
float32
float32
float32
float32
bool
bool
uint8
4990
4900
180d
1810
180e
1804
1803
1815
1816
181c
1806
18832
18688
6157
6160
6158
6148
6147
6165
6166
6172
6150
Not applicable
Not applicable
1dp
Not applicable
1dp
1dp
1dp
1dp
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
float32
float32
float32
1814
1819
1817
6164
6169
6167
Set by Channel.1.Main.Resolution
3dp
Channel.1.Alarm1.NotAcknowledged
Channel.1.Alarm1.Reference
Channel.1.Alarm1.Status
Channel.1.Alarm1.Threshold
Channel.1.Alarm1.Type
Channel.1.Main.CJType
Channel.1.Main.CloseString
Channel.1.Main.Descriptor
Channel.1.Main.ExtCJTemp
Channel.1.Main.FaultResponse
Channel.1.Main.Filter
Channel.1.Main.InputHigh
Channel.1.Main.InputLow
Channel.1.Main.InternalCJTemp
Channel.1.Main.IPAdjustState
Channel.1.Main.IPAdjustState2
Channel.1.Main.LinType
Channel.1.Main.MeasuredValue
Channel.1.Main.MeasuredValue2
Channel.1.Main.Offset
Page 173
30 = x3/2
32 = x5/2
Input value before linearisation, scaling, adjust etc.
Measured value of the secondary input
Fixed value to be added to/subtracted from PV
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11

Parameter path
Description
Type
Hex
Dec
Resolution
Channel.1.Main.Offset2
Channel.1.Main.OpenString
Channel.1.Main.PV
Channel.1.Main.PV2
Channel.1.Main.RangeHigh
Channel.1.Main.RangeLow
Channel.1.Main.RangeUnits
Channel.1.Main.Resolution
Channel.1.Main.ScaleHigh
Channel.1.Main.ScaleHigh2
Channel.1.Main.ScaleLow
Channel.1.Main.ScaleLow2
Channel.1.Main.SensorBreakType
Channel.1.Main.SensorBreakVal
Channel.1.Main.Shunt
Channel.1.Main.Status
float32
string_t
float32
float32
float32
float32
uint8
uint8
float32
float32
float32
float32
uint8
uint8
float32
uint8
1818
496c
0100
0110
1808
1807
1809
1801
180b
181b
180a
181a
180f
1811
1805
0101
6168
18796
256
272
6152
6151
6153
6145
6155
6171
6154
6170
6159
6161
6149
257
3dp
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
2dp
Not applicable
uint8
uint8
0111
1802
273
6146
Not applicable
Not applicable
uint8
1800
6144
Not applicable
Channel.1.Trend.SpanHigh
Channel.1.Trend.SpanLow
Secondary input offset (as above).

Open String
The process variable (output) of the channel
The secondary input process variable (output) of the channel
Range high value
Range low value
Range units: 0 = C; 1 = F; 2 = Kelvins
Specifies the resolution/number of decimal places
Scale high value
Scale high value for the secondary input
Scale low value
Scale low value for the secondary input
Sensor break type: 0 =Off; 1 = Low; 2 = High
Sensor break value
Shunt value (Ohms)
The PV (output) status
0 =Good
1 = Off
2 = Over range
3 = Under range 4 = HW error
5 = Ranging
6 = Overflow
7 = bad
8 = HW exceeded
9 = No data
12 = Comm channel error
The secondary input PV (output) status (as above)
Channel test waveform
0 = Triangle 5hr
1 = Triangle 40 min
2 = Triangle 4 min
3 = Triangle 40 sec
4 = Sine 5 hr
5 = Sine 40 min
6 = Sine 4 min
7 = Sine 40 sec
Specifies the type of channel
0 = Off
1 = TC
2 = mV
3=V
4 = mA
5 = RTD
6 = Digital
7 = Test
8 = Ohms
9 = Dual mV
10 = Dual mA 11 = Dual TC
Units descriptor
Configures the trend colour for this channeluint8
0 = Red
1 = Blue
2 = Green
3 = Honey
4 = Violet
5 = Russet
6 = Dark blue
7 = Jade
8 = Magenta
9 = Dusky rose
10 = Yellow
11 = Powder blue
12 = Dark red
13 = Avocado
14 = Indigo
15 = Dark brown
16 = Aegean
17 = Cyan
18 = Aubergine
19 = Dark orange
20 = Pale yellow
21 = Hyacinth
22 = Dark green
23 = Sugar pink
24 = Bluebell
25 = Orange
26 = Pink
27 = Buttersilk
28 = Terracotta
29 = Blue babe
30 = Lime
31 = Blue jive
32 = Cucumber
33 = Eurogreen
34 = Wheatgerm
35 = Sea Blue
36 = Ginger
37 = Aqua pool
38 = Pale red
39 = Pale blue
40 = Lilac
41 = Sky blue
42 = Wild moss
43 = Turquoise
44 = Pale green
45 = Coffee
49 = Dark Grey
53 = Light grey
Specifies the highest PV (output value) to be displayed
Specifies the lowest PV (output value) to be displayed
1 = acknowledge alarm
1 = alarm acknowledged
1 = alarm source active, or safe but not ackd
Rate-of-change alarm Amount
Rate-of-change alarm Average time
0 = Blocking alarms off; 1 = Blocking alarms on
Rate-of-change alarm Change Time
Deviation alarm Deviation Value
Alarm dwell time
Alarm hysteresis value
1 = alarm source safe and ackd (if necessary)
1 = Alarm inhibited
Alarm latch type (as for Channel.1.Alarm1)
1 = alarm has not been acknowledged
Deviation alarm Reference value
Alarm status (as for Channel.1.Alarm1)
Alarm trigger threshold
Alarn type (as for Channel.1.Alarm1)
Alarm dwell time
1 = Alarm inhibited
Channel.1.Main.Status2
Channel.1.Main.TestSignal
Channel.1.Main.Type
Channel.1.Trend.Colour
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
string_t
1820
4915

6176
Not applicable
float32
float32
1822
1821
6178
6177
bool
bool
bool
float32
time_t
uint8
uint8
float32
time_t
float32
bool
bool
uint8
bool
float32
uint8
float32
uint8
bool
bool
bool
float32
time_t
uint8
uint8
float32
time_t
float32
bool
bool
uint8
01b2
18d0
18cb
18c8
18ca
18c2
18c9
18c7
18c5
18c4
18ce
18d1
18c1
18cf
18c6
0106
18c3
18c0
01b3
18f0
18eb
18e8
18ea
18e2
18e9
18e7
18e5
18e4
18ee
18f1
18e1
434
6352
6347
6344
6346
6338
6345
6343
6341
6340
6350
6353
6337
6351
6342
262
6339
6336
435
6384
6379
6376
6378
6370
6377
6375
6373
6372
6382
6385
6369
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Page 174

Parameter path
Description
Type
Hex
Dec
Resolution
Channel.2.Main.PV
Channel.2.Main.PV2
Channel.2.Main.Type

Cold junction compensation type (as for Channel.1.Main)
Close String
Input fault response
Input range high value
Input range low value
Channel 2 internal cold junction temperature
Input Adjust state (0 = Unadjusted; 1 =Adjusted)
Linearisation type (as for Channel.1.Main)
Secondary input offset
Open String
The output (displayed) value of the channel.
Range high value
Range low value
Range units (as channel.1.Main)
Scale high value
Scale low value
Sensor break type (as for Channel.1.Main)
Sensor break value
Shunt value in Ohms
Channel status (as for Channel.1.Main.Status)
The secondary input PV (output) status (as above)
Channel test waveform (as for Channel.1.Main)
Channel function (as for Channel.1.Main.Type)
Channel units string
Trend colour (as for Channel.1.Trend.Colour)
bool
float32
uint8
float32
uint8
uint8
string_t
string_t
float32
uint8
float32
float32
float32
float32
bool
bool
uint8
float32
float32
float32
float32
string_t
float32
float32
float32
float32
uint8
uint8
float32
float32
float32
float32
uint8
uint8
float32
uint8
uint8
uint8
uint8
string_t
uint8
float32
float32
18ef
18e6
0107
18e3
18e0
188c
4999
491b
188d
1890
188e
1884
1883
1895
1896
189c
1886
1894
1899
1897
1898
4975
0104
0114
1888
1887
1889
1881
188b
189b
188a
189a
188f
1891
1885
0105
0115
1882
1880
4930
18a0
18a2
18a1
6383
6374
263
6371
6368
6284
18841
18715
6285
6288
6286
6276
6275
6293
6294
6300
6278
6292
6297
6295
6296
18805
260
276
6280
6279
6281
6273
6283
6299
6282
6298
6287
6289
6277
261
277
6274
6272
18736
6304
6306
6305
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
1dp
Not applicable
1dp
1dp
1dp
1dp
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
3dp
3dp
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
2dp
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
0 = Blocking alarms off; 1 = Blocking alarms on.
Alarm dwell time
1 = alarm inhibited
bool
bool
float32
time_t
uint8
uint8
float32
time_t
float32
bool
bool
uint8
bool
float32
uint8
float32
uint8
bool
1950
194b
1948
194a
1942
1949
1947
1945
1944
194e
1951
1941
194f
1946
010a
1943
1940
01b5
6480
6475
6472
6474
6466
6473
6471
6469
6468
6478
6481
6465
6479
6470
266
6467
6464
437
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Alarm dwell time
1 = Alarm inhibited
Cold junction compensation type (as for Channel.1.Main)
Close String
bool
bool
float32
time_t
uint8
uint8
float32
time_t
float32
bool
bool
uint8
bool
float32
uint8
float32
uint8
uint8
string_t
1970
196b
1968
196a
1962
1969
1967
1965
1964
196e
1971
1961
196f
1966
010b
1963
1960
190c
49a2
6512
6507
6504
6506
6498
6505
6503
6501
6500
6510
6513
6497
6511
6502
267
6499
6496
6412
18850
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Page 175
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11

Parameter path
Description
Type
Hex
Dec

string_t
float32
4936
190d

6413 1dp
Channel.3.Main.PV
Channel.3.Main.PV2
Channel.3.Main.Type
Input fault response (As for Channel.1.Main)

Input range maximum value
Input range minimum value
Input Adjust state (0 = Unadjusted; 1 = Adjusted)
Linearisation type (as for Channel.1.Main.LinType)
Input offset
Open String
Range high value
Range low value
Range units
Scale high value
Scale low value
Sensor break value
Shunt value in Ohms
The secondary input PV (output) status
Channel test waveform (as for Channel.1.Main)
Units descriptor
Trend colour (as for Channel.1.Trend.Colour)
uint8
float32
float32
float32
float32
bool
bool
uint8
float32
float32
float32
float32
string_t
float32
float32
float32
float32
uint8
uint8
float32
float32
float32
float32
uint8
uint8
float32
uint8
uint8
uint8
uint8
string_t
uint8
float32
float32
1910
190e
1904
1903
1915
1916
191c
1906
1914
1919
1917
1918
497e
0108
0118
1908
1907
1909
1901
190b
191b
190a
191a
190f
1911
1905
0109
0119
1902
1900
494b
1920
1922
1921
6416
6414
6404
6403
6421
6422
6428
6406
6420
6425
6423
6424
18814
264
280
6408
6407
6409
6401
6411
6427
6410
6426
6415
6417
6405
265
281
6402
6400
18763
6432
6434
6433
Not applicable
1dp
1dp
1dp
1dp
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
3dp
3dp
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
2dp
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Alarm dwell time
1 = alarm inhibited
Alarm dwell time
Cold junction compensation type(as for Channel.1.Main)
Close String
bool
bool
bool
float32
time_t
uint8
uint8
float32
time_t
float32
bool
bool
uint8
bool
float32
uint8
float32
uint8
bool
bool
bool
float32
time_t
uint8
uint8
float32
time_t
float32
bool
uint8
bool
float32
uint8
float32
uint8
uint8
string_t
string_t
float32
01b6
19d0
19cb
19c8
19ca
19c2
19c9
19c7
19c5
19c4
19ce
19d1
19c1
19cf
19c6
010e
19c3
19c0
01b7
19f0
19eb
19e8
19ea
19e2
19e9
19e7
19e5
19e4
19ee
19e1
19ef
19e6
010f
19e3
19e0
198c
49ab
4951
198d
438
6608
6603
6600
6602
6594
6601
6599
6597
6596
6606
6609
6593
6607
6598
270
6595
6592
439
6640
6635
6632
6634
6626
6633
6631
6629
6628
6638
6625
6639
6630
271
6627
6624
6540
18859
18769
6541
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
1dp
Input fault response (as for Channel.1.Main)

Input range maximum value
Input range minimum value
uint8
float32
float32
float32
float32
1990
198e
1984
1983
1995
6544
6542
6532
6531
6549
Not applicable
1dp
1dp
1dp
1dp
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
Resolution
Page 176

Parameter path
Description
Type
Hex
Dec
Channel.4.Main.PV
Channel.4.Main.PV2
Channel.4.Main.Type
Input Adjust state (0 = Unadjusted;1 =Adjusted)

Secondary Input Adjust state (0 = Unadjusted; 1 = Adjusted
Linearisation type (as for Channel.1.Main.LinType)
Open String
Range high value
Range low value
Range units (as channel.1.Main.RangeUnits)
Scale high value
Scale low value
Sensor break value
Shunt value in Ohms
The secondary input PV (output) status
Channel test waveform (as for Channel.1.Main.TestSignal)
Units descriptor
Trend colour (as for Channel.1.Trend.Colour)uint8
CustomMessage.Message1
CustomMessage.Trigger1
Resolution
bool
bool
uint8
float32
float32
float32
float32
string_t
float32
float32
float32
float32
uint8
uint8
float32
float32
float32
float32
uint8
uint8
float32
uint8
uint8
uint8
uint8
string_t
19a0
float32
float32
1996
199c
1986
1994
1999
1997
1998
4987
010c
011c
1988
1987
1989
1981
198b
199b
198a
199a
198f
1991
1985
010d
011d
1982
1980
4966
19a2
19a1
6550
6556
6534
6548
6553
6551
6552
18823
268
284
6536
6535
6537
6529
6539
6555
6538
6554
6543
6545
6533
269
285
6530
6528
18790
6560
6562
6561
Custom message No 1
Custom message No 2
Custom message No 3
Custom message No 4
Custom message No 5
Custom message No 6
Custom message No 7
Custom message No 8
Custom message No 9
Custom message No 10
Trigger for custom message No 1
string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
5e00
5e65
5eca
5f2f
5f94
5ff9
605e
60c3
6128
618d
28f0
28f1
28f2
28f3
28f4
28f5
28f6
28f7
28f8
28f9
24064
24165
24266
24367
24468
24569
24670
24771
24872
24973
10480
10481
10482
10483
10484
10485
10486
10487
10488
10489
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
3dp
3dp
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
2dp
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Fallback PV value
float32
15c9
5577
Set by DCOutput.1A1B_DCOP.Resolution
DCOutput.1A1B_DCOP.MeasuredValue
Measured Value
float32
15ca
5578
2dp
DCOutput.1A1B_DCOP.OPAdjustState
0 = Unadjusted, 1 = Adjusted
bool
15c3
5571
Not applicable
DC Output High value
float32
15c6
5574
2dp
DC Output Low value
float32
15c5
5573
2dp
DCOutput.1A1B_DCOP.PV
DC Output PV
float32
15c1
5569
uint8
15c4
5572
Not applicable
Scale High value
float32
15c8
5576
Scale Low value
float32
15c7
5575
DCOutput.1A1B_DCOP.Status
PV Status
uint8
15c2
5570
Not applicable
0 = Good
1 = Off
2 = Over range
3 = Under range
4 = HW error
5 = Ranging
6 = Overflow
7 = Bad
8 = HW exceeded
9 = No data
10 = Comms channel error
DC Output Type (0 = Volts; 1 = mA)
uint8
15c0
5568
Not applicable
Fallback PV value
float32
15b9
5561
Measured Value
float32
15ba
5562
2dp
bool
15b3
5555
Not applicable
float32
15b6
5558
2dp
DC Output Low value
float32
15b5
5557
2dp
DC Output PV
float32
15b1
5553
uint8
15b4
5556
Not applicable
Scale High value
float32
15b8
5560
Scale Low value
float32
15b7
5559
PV Status (as DCOutput.1A1B_DCOP.Status)
uint8
15b2
5554
Not applicable
uint8
15b0
5552
Not applicable
Page 177
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11

Parameter path
Description
Type
Hex
Dec
Resolution
Fallback PV value
float32
15a9
5545
Measured Value
float32
15aa
5546
2dp
bool
15a3
5539
Not applicable
float32
15a6
5542
2dp
DC Output Low value
float32
15a5
5541
2dp
DC Output PV
float32
15a1
5537
uint8
15a4
5540
Not applicable
Scale High value
float32
15a8
5544
Scale Low value
float32
15a7
5543
PV Status (as DCOutput.1A1B_DCOP.Status)
uint8
15a2
5538
Not applicable
uint8
15a0
5536
Not applicable
Valve positioning backlash compensation (seconds)
float32
1508
5384
1dp
Inertia value for the valve
float32
1507
5383
1dp
1 = Invert; 0 = Do not invert
bool
1503
5379
Not applicable
Time proportioned output minimum on time
float32
1502
5378
2dp
DigitalIO.1A1B.ModuleIdent
Module Identification
uint8
150a
5386
Not applicable
bool
1504
5380
Not applicable
float32
1501
5377
0dp
0 = Digital I/O
1 = Relay output
2 = Triac output
3 = Digital input 4 = Digital output

DigitalIO.1A1B.Output
0 = Output off, 1 = Output on
DigitalIO.1A1B.PV
For contact inputs, 0 = Open, 1 = Closed.

For On Off outputs, <0.5 = Drive low, else drive high
For Time Proportional outputs, PV = demanded output %
Valve positioning standby action (0 = Continue; 1 = Freeze).
uint8
1509
5385
Not applicable
DigitalIO.1A1B.Type
Specifies the type of the digital input / output
uint8
1500
5376
Not applicable
0 = Contact closure input
1 = On Off output
2 = Time proportioniing output
3 = Valve raise
4 = Valve lower
float32
1518
5400
1dp
float32
1517
5399
1dp
bool
1513
5395
Not applicable
float32
1512
5394
2dp
As DigitalIO.1A1B.ModuleIdent
uint8
151a
5402
Not applicable
bool
1514
5396
Not applicable
DigitalIO.2A2B.PV
Digital I/O process value (as DigitalIO.1A1B.PV)
float32
1511
5393
0dp
uint8
1519
5401
Not applicable
DigitalIO.2A2B.Type
Digital I/O type (as DigitalIO.1A1B.Type).
uint8
1510
5392
Not applicable
float32
1538
5432
1dp
float32
1537
5431
1dp
bool
1533
5427
Not applicable
float32
1532
5426
2dp
uint8
153a
5434
Not applicable
bool
1534
5428
Not applicable
DigitalIO.3A3B.PV
float32
1531
5425
0dp
uint8
1539
5433
Not applicable
DigitalIO.3A3B.Type
uint8
1530
5424
Not applicable
DigitalIO.DI_LALC.Backlash
float32
1528
5416
1dp
DigitalIO.DI_LALC.Inertia
float32
1527
5415
1dp
DigitalIO.DI_LALC.Invert
bool
1523
5411
Not applicable
DigitalIO.DI_LALC.MinOnTime
float32
1522
5410
2dp
DigitalIO.DI_LALC.ModuleIdent
uint8
152a
5418
Not applicable
DigitalIO.DI_LALC.Output
bool
1524
5412
Not applicable
DigitalIO.DI_LALC.PV
float32
1521
5409
0dp
DigitalIO.DI_LALC.StandbyAction
uint8
1529
5417
Not applicable
DigitalIO.DI_LALC.Type
uint8
1520
5408
Not applicable
DigitalIO.DI_LBLC.Backlash
float32
1548
5448
1dp
DigitalIO.DI_LBLC.Inertia
float32
1547
5447
1dp
DigitalIO.DI_LBLC.Invert
bool
1543
5443
Not applicable
DigitalIO.DI_LBLC.MinOnTime
float32
1542
5442
2dp
DigitalIO.DI_LBLC.ModuleIdent
uint8
154a
5450
Not applicable
DigitalIO.DI_LBLC.Output
bool
1544
5444
Not applicable
DigitalIO.DI_LBLC.PV
float32
1541
5441
0dp
DigitalIO.DI_LBLC.StandbyAction
uint8
1549
5449
Not applicable
DigitalIO.DI_LBLC.Type
uint8
1540
5440
Not applicable
float32
1558
5464
1dp
float32
1557
5463
1dp
bool
1553
5459
Not applicable
float32
1552
5458
2dp
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
Page 178

Parameter path
Description
Type
Hex
Dec
Resolution
DigitalIO.RELAY_4AC.ModuleIdent
uint8
155a
5466
Not applicable
DigitalIO.RELAY_4AC.Output
bool
1554
5460
Not applicable
DigitalIO.RELAY_4AC.PV
float32
1551
5457
0dp
uint8
1559
5465
Not applicable
uint8
1550
5456
Not applicable
float32
1568
5480
1dp
float32
1567
5479
1dp
bool
1563
5475
Not applicable
float32
1562
5474
2dp
DigitalIO.RELAY_5AC.ModuleIdent
uint8
156a
5482
Not applicable
DigitalIO.RELAY_5AC.Output
bool
1564
5476
Not applicable
DigitalIO.RELAY_5AC.PV
float32
1561
5473
0dp
uint8
1569
5481
Not applicable
uint8
1560
5472
Not applicable
EthernetIP.ImplicitInputs.Input1
Read only input from an EtherNet/IP client

See input 1 for details
eint32
eint32
eint32
eint32
eint32
eint32
eint32
eint32
eint32
eint32
eint32
eint32
eint32
eint32
eint32
eint32
eint32
eint32
eint32
eint32
eint32
eint32
eint32
eint32
eint32
eint32
eint32
eint32
eint32
eint32
eint32
eint32
eint32
eint32
eint32
eint32
eint32
eint32
eint32
eint32
eint32
eint32
eint32
eint32
eint32
eint32
eint32
eint32
eint32
eint32
7e66
7e6a
7e6e
7e72
7e76
7e7a
7e7e
7e82
7e86
7e8a
7e8e
7e92
7e96
7e9a
7e9e
7ea2
7ea6
7eaa
7eae
7eb2
7eb6
7eba
7ebe
7ec2
7ec6
7eca
7ece
7ed2
7ed6
7eda
7ede
7ee2
7ee6
7eea
7eee
7ef2
7ef6
7efa
7efe
7f02
7f06
7f0a
7f0e
7f12
7f16
7f1a
7f1e
7f22
7f26
7f2a
32358
32362
32366
32370
32374
32378
32382
32386
32390
32394
32398
32402
32406
32410
32414
32418
32422
32426
32430
32434
32438
32442
32446
32450
32454
32458
32462
32466
32470
32474
32478
32482
32486
32490
32494
32498
32502
32506
32510
32514
32518
32522
32526
32530
32534
32538
32542
32546
32550
32554
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
EthernetIP.ImplicitInputs.InputValue1
Value of the Input 1 parameter

See input 1 value for details
int16
int16
int16
int16
int16
int16
int16
int16
int16
int16
int16
int16
7e68
7e6c
7e70
7e74
7e78
7e7c
7e80
7e84
7e88
7e8c
7e90
7e94
32360
32364
32368
32372
32376
32380
32384
32388
32392
32396
32400
32404
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Page 179
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11

Parameter path
Description
Type
Hex
Dec
Resolution

int16
int16
int16
int16
int16
int16
int16
int16
int16
int16
int16
int16
int16
int16
int16
int16
int16
int16
int16
int16
int16
int16
int16
int16
int16
int16
int16
int16
int16
int16
int16
int16
int16
int16
int16
int16
int16
int16
7e98
7e9c
7ea0
7ea4
7ea8
7eac
7eb0
7eb4
7eb8
7ebc
7ec0
7ec4
7ec8
7ecc
7ed0
7ed4
7ed8
7edc
7ee0
7ee4
7ee8
7eec
7ef0
7ef4
7ef8
7efc
7f00
7f04
7f08
7f0c
7f10
7f14
7f18
7f1c
7f20
7f24
7f28
7f2c
32408
32412
32416
32420
32424
32428
32432
32436
32440
32444
32448
32452
32456
32460
32464
32468
32472
32476
32480
32484
32488
32492
32496
32500
32504
32508
32512
32516
32520
32524
32528
32532
32536
32540
32544
32548
32552
32556
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
EthernetIP.ImplicitOutputs.Output1
Writable output to the EtherNet/IP client

See output 1 for details
eint32
eint32
eint32
eint32
eint32
eint32
eint32
eint32
eint32
eint32
eint32
eint32
eint32
eint32
eint32
eint32
eint32
eint32
eint32
eint32
eint32
eint32
eint32
eint32
eint32
eint32
eint32
eint32
eint32
eint32
eint32
eint32
eint32
eint32
eint32
eint32
eint32
eint32
eint32
eint32
eint32
eint32
7f2e
7f32
7f36
7f3a
7f3e
7f42
7f46
7f4a
7f4e
7f52
7f56
7f5a
7f5e
7f62
7f66
7f6a
7f6e
7f72
7f76
7f7a
7f7e
7f82
7f86
7f8a
7f8e
7f92
7f96
7f9a
7f9e
7fa2
7fa6
7faa
7fae
7fb2
7fb6
7fba
7fbe
7fc2
7fc6
7fca
7fce
7fd2
32558
32562
32566
32570
32574
32578
32582
32586
32590
32594
32598
32602
32606
32610
32614
32618
32622
32626
32630
32634
32638
32642
32646
32650
32654
32658
32662
32666
32670
32674
32678
32682
32686
32690
32694
32698
32702
32706
32710
32714
32718
32722
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
Page 180

Parameter path
Description
Type
Hex
Dec
Resolution

eint32
eint32
eint32
eint32
eint32
eint32
eint32
eint32
7fd6
7fda
7fde
7fe2
7fe6
7fea
7fee
7ff2
32726
32730
32734
32738
32742
32746
32750
32754
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
EthernetIP.ImplicitOutputs.OutputValue1
Value of the Output 1 parameter

See output 1 value for details
int16
int16
int16
int16
int16
int16
int16
int16
int16
int16
int16
int16
int16
int16
int16
int16
int16
int16
int16
int16
int16
int16
int16
int16
int16
int16
int16
int16
int16
int16
int16
int16
int16
int16
int16
int16
int16
int16
int16
int16
int16
int16
int16
int16
int16
int16
int16
int16
int16
int16
7f30
7f34
7f38
7f3c
7f40
7f44
7f48
7f4c
7f50
7f54
7f58
7f5c
7f60
7f64
7f68
7f6c
7f70
7f74
7f78
7f7c
7f80
7f84
7f88
7f8c
7f90
7f94
7f98
7f9c
7fa0
7fa4
7fa8
7fac
7fb0
7fb4
7fb8
7fbc
7fc0
7fc4
7fc8
7fcc
7fd0
7fd4
7fd8
7fdc
7fe0
7fe4
7fe8
7fec
7ff0
7ff4
32560
32564
32568
32572
32576
32580
32584
32588
32592
32596
32600
32604
32608
32612
32616
32620
32624
32628
32632
32636
32640
32644
32648
32652
32656
32660
32664
32668
32672
32676
32680
32684
32688
32692
32696
32700
32704
32708
32712
32716
32720
32724
32728
32732
32736
32740
32744
32748
32752
32756
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
EthernetIP.InputTags.Input1
A read only input from a PLC device

string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
7838
7839
783a
783b
783c
783d
783e
783f
7840
7841
7842
7843
7844
7845
7846
7847
7848
7849
784a
784b
784c
30776
30777
30778
30779
30780
30781
30782
30783
30784
30785
30786
30787
30788
30789
30790
30791
30792
30793
30794
30795
30796
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Page 181
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11

Parameter path
Description
Type
Hex
Dec
Resolution

string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
784d
784e
784f
7850
7851
7852
7853
7854
7855
30797
30798
30799
30800
30801
30802
30803
30804
30805
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
EthernetIP.Main.ConfigInstance
EthernetIP.Main.ConfigSize
EthernetIP.Main.ConnectionType
EthernetIP.Main.Explicit1
EthernetIP.Main.Explicit2
EthernetIP.Main.ImplicitIO
EthernetIP.Main.InputInstance
EthernetIP.Main.InputSize
EthernetIP.Main.Mode
int16
int16
uint8
string_t
string_t
string_t
int16
int16
uint8
7ffa
7ffb
7ffe
65f1
6601
65e1
7ff6
7ff7
7fff
32762
32763
32766
26097
26113
26081
32758
32759
32767
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
string_t
uint8
6611
7e64

int16
int16
uint8
7ff8
7ff9
7ffc

EthernetIP.Main.ResetComms
EthernetIP.Main.Rpi
EthernetIP.Main.ServerAddress
EthernetIP.Main.SlotNumber
EthernetIP.Main.TagStatusCode
EthernetIP.Main.UCMM
Configuration assembly instance number

Configuration assembly data size in bytes
Implicit I/O connection type (0 = Point to point; 1 = Multicast)
Explicit TCP connection 1
Explicit TCP connection 2
Implicit I/O data channel
Implicit input assembly instance number
Implicit input assembly data size in bytes
EtherNet/IP operation mode
0 = Server
1 = Client (IO)
2 = Client (Tags)
Implicit I/O data channel multicast address
EtherNet/IP communications network status
0 = Offline
2 = On line
3 = Connection timout
4 = Duplicate IP address
5 = Inistialisation
Implicit output assembly instance number
Implicit output assembly data size in bytes
Level of message priority
0 = Low 1 = High
2 = Scheduled
3 = Urgent
Resets the client or server communications (0 = No; 1 = Yes)
Requested Packet Interval (milliseconds)
IP address of a server device
PLC slot number
EtherNet/IP Tag server status code (see table 4.10.1)
Unconnected Message Manager (UCMM)
uint8
int16
string_t
int16
uint8
string_t
7e63
7ffd
7129
7e60
7e62
65d1
32355
32765
28969
32352
32354
26065
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Writable output to the PLC device

string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
7880
7881
7882
7883
7884
7885
7886
7887
7888
7889
788a
788b
788c
788d
788e
788f
7890
7891
7892
7893
7894
7895
7896
7897
7898
7899
789a
789b
789c
789d
30848
30849
30850
30851
30852
30853
30854
30855
30856
30857
30858
30859
30860
30861
30862
30863
30864
30865
30866
30867
30868
30869
30870
30871
30872
30873
30874
30875
30876
30877
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Group.Recording.Channel1En
Group.Recording.Compression
Group.Recording.FlashDuration
Group.Recording.FlashFree
Group.Recording.FlashSize
Channel 1 enable (0 = Disabled; 1 = Enabled)

The UHH file compression rate (0 = Normal; 1 = High)
0 = Recording disabled; 1 = Recording enabled
Time in days until flash history files begin to be overwitten
Size of the internal flash in MBytes
Size of the internal flash in MBytes
bool
bool
bool
bool
uint8
uint8
float32
float32
float32
1023
1024
1025
1026
1040
1020
1039
1038
1037
4131
4132
4133
4134
4160
4128
4153
4152
4151
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
2dp
2dp
2dp
EthernetIP.Main.Multicast
EthernetIP.Main.NetworkStatusCode
EthernetIP.Main.OutputInstance
EthernetIP.Main.OutputSize
EthernetIP.Main.Priority
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
Page 182

Parameter path
Description
Type
Hex
Dec
Resolution
Group.Recording.Interval
Recording interval
0 = 125 secs
1 = .25 secs
2 = 0.5 secs
3 = 1Hz
4 = 2 sec
5 = 5 sec
6 = 10 sec
7 = 20 sec
8 = 30 sec
9 = 1 min
10 = 2 min
11 = 5 min
12 = 10 min
13 = 20 min
14 = 30 min
15 = 1 hr
Recording status
0 = Not recording
1 = Disabled
2 = Messages only
3 = Recording enabled
4 = Recording paused
1 = Suspend recording
Virtual Channel 1 enable (0 = Disabled; 1 = Enabled)
int32
1022
4130
Not applicable
int16
1036
4150
Not applicable
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
1035
1027
1028
1029
102a
102b
102c
102d
102e
102f
1030
1031
1032
1033
1034
103a
103b
103c
103d
103e
103f
1041
1042
1043
1044
1045
1046
1047
1048
1049
104a
4149
4135
4136
4137
4138
4139
4140
4141
4142
4143
4144
4145
4146
4147
4148
4154
4155
4156
4157
4158
4159
4161
4162
4163
4164
4165
4166
4167
4168
4169
4170
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Group.Recording.Status
Group.Recording.Suspend
Group.Trend.Descriptor
Group.Trend.Interval
Group.Trend.MajorDivisions
Group.Trend.Point1
Group.Trend.Point2
Group.Trend.Point3
Group.Trend.Point4
Group.Trend.Point5
Group.Trend.Point6
Group descriptor
Trend interval. As Group.Recording.Interval, above
Number of major divisions
1st point in the group (VCh = Virtual channel)uint8
0 =No trend
1 = Channel 1
2 = Channel 2
3 = Channel 3
4 = Channel 4
5 = VCh1
6 = VCh2
7 = VCh3
8 = VCh4
9 = VCh5
10 = VCh6
11 = VCh7
12 = VCh8
13 = VCh9
14 = VCh10
15 = VCh11
16 = VCh12
17 = VCH13
18 = VCh14
19 = VCh15
20 = VCh 16
21 = VCh17
22 = VCh18
23 = VCh 19
24 = VCh20
25 = VCh21
26 = VCh 22
27 = VCh23
28 = VCh24
29 = VCh 25
30 = VCh26
31 = VCh27
32 = VCh 28
33 = VCh29
34 = VCh30
As Group.Trend.Point1 but for 2nd point in group
As Group.Trend.Point1 but for 3rd point in group
As Group.Trend.Point1 but for 4th point in group
IHumidity.DewPoint
Humidity.DryTemp
Humidity.Pressure
string_t
int32
uint8
1006
5b00
1002
1004

4098 Not applicable
4100 Not applicable
4102
Not applicable
uint8
uint8
uint8
uint8
uint8
1007
1008
1009
100a
100b
4103
4104
4105
4106
4107
Dewpoint
float32
2e79
11897 Set by Humidity.Resolution
Dry Bulb Temperature Measurement
float32
2e7d
11901 0dp
Current Atmospheric Pressure
float32
2e80
11904 1dp
Humidity.PsychroConst
Psychrometric Constant
float32
2e7f
11903 2dp
Humidity.RelHumid
Calculated Relative Humidity
float32
2e78
11896 Set by Humidity.Resolution
Humidity.Resolution
Result Resolution
uint8
2e81
Humidity.SBrk
Sensor Broken (0 = No; 1 = Yes)
bool
2e7e
Humidity.WetOffset
Offset of the Wet Bulb Temperature
float32
2e7b
11899 Same as Humidity.WetTemp
Humidity.WetTemp
Wet Bulb Temperature Measurement
float32
2e7c
11900 0dp
Instrument.Clock.Date
Instrument.Clock.DST
Instrument.Clock.Time
Instrument.Display.AlarmPanel
Instrument.Display.Brightness
Local Date
1 = DST active; 0 = DST not active
Local time (including Zone and DST effects)
1 = Alarm Panel display mode enabled
Display brightness 10 = 10%; 20 = 20% etc. (whole decades)
string_t
bool
time_t
bool
uint8
4400
1082
1081
10eb
1090
17408
4226
4225
4331
4240
Page 183
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11

Parameter path
Description
Type
Hex
Dec
Resolution
Instrument.Display.Cascade
Instrument.Display.DualLoopControl
Instrument.Display.EIPServerPage
Instrument.Display.FaceplateCycling
Instrument.Display.FutureTrend
1 = Cascade control display mode enabled

1 = Dual loop control display mode enabled
1 = EtherNet/IPdisplay mode enabled
1 = Faceplate cycling On
1 = Future trend display mode enabled
Future trend colour(1) (As Channel.1.Trend.Colour)
Future trend colour(2) (As Channel.1.Trend.Colour)
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
uint8
uint8
10f2
109b
10ef
109e
10fb
10fc
10fd
4338
4251
4335
4254
4347
4348
4349
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
History background colour
uint8
10a8
4264
Not applicable
uint8
bool
bool
int16
uint8
bool
uint8
bool
uint8
bool
bool
bool
int16
uint8
1093
1098
1096
1094
109d
109a
109f
10ee
10fe
1099
10f3
10ea
1091
1092
4243
4248
4246
4244
4253
4250
4255
4334
4350
4249
4339
4330
4241
4242
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
bool
uint8
10ec
109c
4332
4252
Not applicable
Not applicable
bool
bool
string_t
int16
int32
uint8
1097
1095
447a
0079
10a0
00c7
4247
4245
17530
121
4256
199
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
float32
uint8
string_t
int32
uint8
int32
uint8
string_t
int16
10f4
10a6
10aa
445f
10a5
10a9
10a4
10a2
4474
10ab
4262
4266
17503
4261
4265
4260
4258
17524
4267
4340
Instrument.Display.HistoryBackground
Instrument.IOFitted.2A2B
0 = Black; 1 = Dark grey; 2 = Light grey; 3 = White

Home page
1 = Horizontal bar mode enabled
1 = Horizontal trend mode enabled
Home time out value in minutes (0 = no timeout)
0 = hide horizontal trend scale; 1 = scale permanent
1 = Loop control display mode enabled
Loop setpoint colour (As Channel.1.Trend.Colour)
1 = Modbus Master display mode enabled
Number format (0 = Rounded; 1 - Truncated)
1 = Numeric display mode enabled
1 = Programmer interface display mode enabled
1 = Promote list display mode enabled
Screen save after (in minutes)
Screen saver brightness 10 = 10%; 20 = 20% etc.
(whole decades only)
1 = Steriliser display mode enabled
Trend chart colour:
0 = Black; 1 = Dark Grey; 2 = Light grey; 3 = White.
1 = Vertical bar display mode enabled
1 = Vertical trend display mode enabled
Instrument bootrom version
Company identification. Always returns 1280
The instrument configuration revision number
Instrument mode
Operating: All algorithms and I/O active.
Standby: Control o/p off. Absolute alarms active
Engineer: All outputs inactive.
Displays the current line voltage
Micro Board Issue
The instrument descriptor
Displays the number of non-volatile writes performed
PSU type. 0 = 240Vac; 1 = 24v ac/dc
The instrument security revision number
Instrument type
Instrument version
Number of wires free
I/O fitted at terminals 1A1Buint8
0 = Digital IO
1= Non-isolated dc op (mA only)
2 = Relay op
3 = TRIAC 1a1b
4 = Relay OP
5 = Isolated dc op (V/mA)
6 = Digital ip
7 = Isolated dc output (mA only)
8 = Digital op
9 = Relay op
10 = Triac 2A2B
I/O fitted at terminals 2A2B (as for 1A1B above)
uint8
10f5
4341
Not applicable
I/O type fitted at terminals 3A3B (as for 1A1B above)
uint8
10f7
4343
Not applicable
Instrument.IOFitted.4AC
I/O type fitted at terminals 4AC (as for 1A1B above)
uint8
10f9
4345
Not applicable
Instrument.IOFitted.5AC
I/O type fitted at terminals 5AC (as for 1A1B above)
uint8
10fa
4346
Not applicable
Instrument.IOFitted.LALC
I/O type fitted at terminals LALC (as for 1A1B above)
uint8
10f6
4342
Not applicable
Instrument.IOFitted.LBLC
Instrument.Locale.DateFormat
Instrument.Locale.DSTenable
Instrument.Locale.EndDay
I/O type fitted at terminals LBLC (as for 1A1B above)

Date format (0 = DDMMYY. 1 = MMDDYY; 2 = YYMMDD)
1 = Daylight Saving Time enabled
Daylight savings: End day
0 = Sunday
1= Monday
2 = Tuesday
3 = Wednesday 4 = Thursday 5 = Friday
6 = Saturday
Daylight savings: End month
0 = Febuary
1= February
2 = March
3 = April
4 = May
5 = June
6 = July
7 = August
8 = September
9 = October
10 = November
11 = December
Week for changing to/from DST
0 = First
1= Second
2 = Third
3 = Fourth
4 = Last
5 = Second to last
DST end time in hours, minutes, seconds and milliseconds
Language (0 = English)
DST start day. As Instrument.Locale.EndDay, above
DST start month As Instrument.Locale.EndMonth, above
Start DST on. As Instrument.Locale.EndOn, above
DST start time. As Instrument.Locale.EndTime above
uint8
uint8
bool
uint8
10f8
10b1
10b3
10ba
4344
4273
4275
4282
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
uint8
10bb
4283
Not applicable
uint8
10b9
4281
Not applicable
time_t
uint8
uint8
uint8
uint8
time_t
10b8
10b0
10b6
10b7
10b5
10b4
4280
4272
4278
4279
4277
4276
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Instrument.Display.HomePage
Instrument.Display.HorizontalBar
Instrument.Display.HorizontalTrend
Instrument.Display.HPageTimeout
Instrument.Display.HTrendScaling
Instrument.Display.LoopControl
Instrument.Display.LoopSetpointColour
Instrument.Display.ModbusMaster
Instrument.Display.NumberFormat
Instrument.Display.Numeric
Instrument.Display.Programmer
Instrument.Display.PromoteListView
Instrument.Display.ScreenSaverAfter
Instrument.Display.ScreenSaverBrightness
Instrument.Display.SteriliserPage
Instrument.Display.TrendBackground
Instrument.Display.VerticalBar
Instrument.Display.VerticalTrend
Instrument.Info.Bootrom
Instrument.Info.CompanyID
Instrument.Info.ConfigRev
Instrument.Info.IM
Instrument.Info.LineVoltage
Instrument.Info.MicroBoardIssue
Instrument.Info.Name
Instrument.Info.NvolWrites
Instrument.Info.PSUType
Instrument.Info.SecurityRev
Instrument.Info.Type
Instrument.Info.Version
Instrument.Info.WiresFree
Instrument.Locale.EndMonth
Instrument.Locale.EndOn
Instrument.Locale.EndTime
Instrument.Locale.Language
Instrument.Locale.StartDay
Instrument.Locale.StartMonth
Instrument.Locale.StartOn
Instrument.Locale.StartTime
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
1dp
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Page 184

Parameter path
Description
Type
Hex
Dec
Resolution
Instrument.Locale.TimeZone
Time zone
0 = GMT - 12 hours
1 = GMT - 11 hours
2 = GMT - 10 hours
3 = GMT - 9 hours
4 = GMT - 8 hours
5 = GMT - 7 hours
6 = GMT - 6 hours
7 = GMT - 5 hours
8 = GMT - 4 hours
9 = GMT - 3.5 hours
10 = GMT - 3 hours
11 = GMT - 2 hours
12 = GMT - 1 hour
13 = GMT
14 = GMT + 1 hour
15 = GMT + 2 hours
16 = GMT + 3 hours
17 = GMT + 3.5 hours
18 = GMT + 4 hours
20 = GMT + 5 hours
22 = GMT + 5.75 hours
23 = GMT + 6 hours
25 = GMT + 7 hours
26 = GMT + 8 hours
27 = GMT + 9 hours
29 = GMT + 10 hours
30 = GMT + 11 hours
31 = GMT + 12 hours
32 = GMT + 13 hours
Operator Note
Operator note 1
Operator note 2
Operator note 3
Operator note 4
Operator note 5
Operator note 6
Operator note 7
Operator note 8
Operator note 9
Operator note 10
Promote list (operator view) title
Promote parameter (1)
Descriptor for promote parameter (1)
1 = Password required for comms access
1 = set all parameters to factory settings
1 = Engineer access required
Engineer pass phrase (default 100)
Features2 pass code
Features3 pass code
Features pass code
OEM pass phrase entry
OEM pass phrase
OEM status (0 = Unlocked; 1 = Locked)
Operator pass phrase (default = blank
The parameter to be written to if comms security is enabled
Supervisor pass phrase (default = blank
uint8
10b2
4274
Not applicable
string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
eint32
string_t
eint32
string_t
eint32
string_t
eint32
string_t
eint32
string_t
eint32
string_t
eint32
string_t
eint32
string_t
eint32
string_t
eint32
string_t
bool
bool
bool
string_t
int32
int32
int32
string_t
string_t
bool
string_t
string_t
string_t
5500
5580
5600
5680
5700
5780
5800
5880
5900
5980
5a00
6d07
10e0
6300
10e1
6315
10e2
632a
10e3
633f
10e4
6354
10e5
6369
10e6
637e
10e7
6393
10e8
63a8
10e9
63bd
10c1
10c2
10c0
63d3
10c4
10c5
10c3
6d61
6d30
10c6
6437
4416
6405
21760
21888
22016
22144
22272
22400
22528
22656
22784
22912
23040
27911
4320
25344
4321
25365
4322
25386
4323
25407
4324
25428
4325
25449
4326
25470
4327
25491
4328
25512
4329
25533
4289
4290
4288
25555
4292
4293
4291
28001
27952
4294
25655
17430
25605
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Instrument.Notes.Note
Instrument.Notes.Note1
Instrument.PromoteList.PromoteListName
Instrument.PromoteList.PromoteParam1
strument.PromoteList.PromoteParam1Desc
Instrument.PromoteList.PromoteParam2Desc
InInstrument.Security.CommsPass
Instrument.Security.DefaultConfig
Instrument.Security.EngineerAccess
Instrument.Security.EngineerPassword
Instrument.Security.Feature2Pass
Instrument.Security.Feature3Pass
Instrument.Security.FeaturePass
Instrument.Security.OEMEntry
Instrument.Security.OEMPass
Instrument.Security.OEMStatus
Instrument.Security.OperatorPassword
Instrument.Security.PassPhrase
Instrument.Security.SupervisorPassword
Lgc2.1.FallbackType
uint8
2efb
Lgc2.1.In1
Fallback Condition
0 = Output False; Status Bad.
1 = Output True; Status Bad
2 = Output False; Status Good.
3 = Output True; Status good
Input Value 1
float32
2ef9
12025 0dp
Lgc2.1.In2
Input Value 2
float32
2efa
12026 0dp
Lgc2.1.Invert
Sense of Input Values

0 = Neither input inverted
1 = Input 1 inverted
2 = Input 2 inverted
3 = Both inputs inverted
Logic Operation
0 = Off; 1 = AND; 2 = OR; 3 = XOR; 4 = 1 set/2 reset
5 = Input 1 = Input 2?
6 = Input 1 Input 2
7 = Input 1 > Input 2?
8 = Input 1< Input 2?
9 = Input 1 Input 2?;
10 = Input 1 Input 2?
Output Value (0 = Off (false); 1 = On (true))
uint8
2efc
uint8
2ef8
bool
2efd
Lgc2.1.Oper
Lgc2.1.Out
Page 185
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11

Parameter path
Description
Type
Hex
Dec
Lgc2.1.OutputStatus
Output Status (0 = Good; 1 = Bad)
uint8
2efe
Lgc2.2.FallbackType
Fallback Condition (as Lgc2.1.FallbackType)
uint8
2f02
Lgc2.2.In1
Input Value 1
float32
2f00
12032 0dp
Lgc2.2.In2
Input Value 2
float32
2f01
12033 0dp
Lgc2.2.Invert
Sense of Input Value (as Lgc2.1.Invert)
uint8
2f03
Lgc2.2.Oper
Logic Operation (as Lgc2.1.Oper)
uint8
2eff
Lgc2.2.Out
The result of the logic operation (as Lgc2.1.Out)
bool
2f04
Lgc2.2.OutputStatus
uint8
2f05
Lgc2.3.FallbackType
uint8
2f09
Lgc2.3.In1
Input Value 1
float32
2f07
12039 0dp
Lgc2.3.In2
Input Value 2
float32
2f08
12040 0dp
Lgc2.3.Invert
uint8
2f0a
Lgc2.3.Oper
uint8
2f06
Lgc2.3.Out
bool
2f0b
Lgc2.3.OutputStatus
uint8
2f0c
Lgc2.4.FallbackType
uint8
2f10
Lgc2.4.In1
Input Value 1
float32
2f0e
12046 0dp
Lgc2.4.In2
Input Value 2
float32
2f0f
12047 0dp
Lgc2.4.Invert
uint8
2f11
Lgc2.4.Oper
uint8
2f0d
Lgc2.4.Out
bool
2f12
Lgc2.4.OutputStatus
uint8
2f13
Lgc2.5.FallbackType
uint8
2f17
Lgc2.5.In1
Input Value 1
float32
2f15
12053 0dp
Lgc2.5.In2
Input Value 2
float32
2f16
12054 0dp
Lgc2.5.Invert
uint8
2f18
Lgc2.5.Oper
uint8
2f14
Lgc2.5.Out
bool
2f19
Lgc2.5.OutputStatus
uint8
2f1a
Lgc2.6.FallbackType
uint8
2f1e
Lgc2.6.In1
Input Value 1
float32
2f1c
12060 0dp
Lgc2.6.In2
Input Value 2
float32
2f1d
12061 0dp
Lgc2.6.Invert
uint8
2f1f
Lgc2.6.Oper
uint8
2f1b
Lgc2.6.Out
bool
2f20
Lgc2.6.OutputStatus
uint8
2f21
Lgc2.7.FallbackType
uint8
2f25
Lgc2.7.In1
Input Value 1
float32
2f23
12067 0dp
Lgc2.7.In2
Input Value 2
float32
2f24
12068 0dp
Lgc2.7.Invert
uint8
2f26
Lgc2.7.Oper
uint8
2f22
Lgc2.7.Out
bool
2f27
Lgc2.7.OutputStatus
uint8
2f28
Lgc2.8.FallbackType
uint8
2f2c
Lgc2.8.In1
Input Value 1
float32
2f2a
12074 0dp
Lgc2.8.In2
Input Value 2
float32
2f2b
12075 0dp
Lgc2.8.Invert
uint8
2f2d
Lgc2.8.Oper
uint8
2f29
Lgc2.8.Out
bool
2f2e
Lgc2.8.OutputStatus
uint8
2f2f
Lgc2.9.FallbackType
uint8
2f33
Lgc2.9.In1
Input Value 1
float32
2f31
12081 0dp
Lgc2.9.In2
Input Value 2
float32
2f32
12082 0dp
Lgc2.9.Invert
uint8
2f34
Lgc2.9.Oper
uint8
2f30
Lgc2.9.Out
bool
2f35
Lgc2.9.OutputStatus
uint8
2f36
Lgc2.10.FallbackType
uint8
2f3a
Lgc2.10.In1
Input Value 1
float32
2f38
12088 0dp
Lgc2.10.In2
Input Value 2
float32
2f39
12089 0dp
Lgc2.10.Invert
uint8
2f3b
Lgc2.10.Oper
uint8
2f37
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
Resolution
Page 186

Parameter path
Description
Type
Hex
Dec
Resolution
Lgc2.10.Out
bool
2f3c
Lgc2.10.OutputStatus
uint8
2f3d
uint8
2f41
Lgc2.11.In1
Input Value 1
float32
2f3f
12095 0dp
Lgc2.11.In2
Input Value 2
float32
2f40
12096 0dp
Lgc2.11.Invert
uint8
2f42
Lgc2.11.Oper
uint8
2f3e
Lgc2.11.Out
bool
2f43
uint8
2f44
uint8
2f48
Lgc2.12.In1
Input Value 1
float32
2f46
12102 0dp
Lgc2.12.In2
Input Value 2
float32
2f47
12103 0dp
Lgc2.12.Invert
uint8
2f49
Lgc2.12.Oper
uint8
2f45
Lgc2.12.Out
bool
2f4a
uint8
2f4b
Lgc8.1.In1
Input 1 Value (0 = Off; 1 = On)
bool
2f4f
Lgc8.1.In2
bool
2f50
Lgc8.1.In3
bool
2f51
Lgc8.1.In4
bool
2f52
Lgc8.1.In5
bool
2f53
Lgc8.1.In6
bool
2f54
Lgc8.1.In7
bool
2f55
Lgc8.1.In8
bool
2f56
Lgc8.1.InInvert
uint8
2f4d
Lgc8.1.NumIn
Invert Selected Inputs (See also section 4.20.3)

Hex0001 = Invert input 1
Hex0010 = invert input 5
Number of Inputs
uint8
2f4e
Lgc8.1.Oper
Logic Operation (0 = Off; 1 = AND; 2 = OR; 3 = XOR)
uint8
2f4c
Lgc8.1.Out
Output Value (0 = Off (false); 1 = On (true))
bool
2f57
Lgc8.1.OutInvert
Invert the Output (0 = No; 1 = Yes)
bool
2f58
Lgc8.2.In1
bool
2f5c
Lgc8.2.In2
bool
2f5d
Lgc8.2.In3
bool
2f5e
Lgc8.2.In4
bool
2f5f
Lgc8.2.In5
bool
2f60
Lgc8.2.In6
bool
2f61
Lgc8.2.In7
bool
2f62
Lgc8.2.In8
bool
2f63
Lgc8.2.InInvert
Invert Selected Inputs (as Lgc8.1.InInvert)
uint8
2f5a
Lgc8.2.NumIn
Number of Inputs
uint8
2f5b
Lgc8.2.Oper
Logic Operation (0 = Off; 1 = AND; 2 = OR; 3 = XOR)
uint8
2f59
Lgc8.2.Out
Output Value (as Lgc8.1.Out)
bool
2f64
Lgc8.2.OutInvert
Invert the Output (0 = No; 1 = Yes)
bool
2f65
Loop.1.Diag.DerivativeOutContrib
Loop.1.Diag.Error
Loop.1.Diag.IntegralOutContrib
Loop.1.Diag.LoopBreakAlarm
Loop.1.Diag.LoopMode
Loop.1.Diag.PropOutContrib
Loop.1.Diag.SBrk
Loop.1.Diag.SchedCBH
Loop.1.Diag.SchedCBL
Loop.1.Diag.SchedLPBrk
Loop.1.Diag.SchedMR
Loop.1.Diag.SchedOPHi
Loop.1.Diag.SchedOPLo
Loop.1.Diag.SchedPB
Loop.1.Diag.SchedR2G
Loop.1.Diag.SchedTd
Loop.1.Diag.SchedTi
Loop.1.Diag.TargetOutVal
Loop.1.Diag.WrkOPHi
Loop.1.Diag.WrkOPLo
Loop.1.Main.ActiveOut
Loop.1.Main.AutoMan
Loop.1.Main.Inhibit
Loop.1.Main.IntHold
Derivative Output Contribution

Calculated error
Integral Output Contribution
Loop Break (0 = No break; 1 = Break)
Mode of the Loop (0 = Auto; 1 = Man; 2 = Off)
Proportional Output Contribution
Sensor Break Status ( 0 = No break; 1 = Break)
The Scheduled Cutback High (0 = Auto)
The Scheduled Cutback Low (0 = Auto)
The Scheduled Loop Break Time (0 = Off)
The Scheduled Manual Reset
The Scheduled Output High Limit
The Scheduled Output Low Limit
The Scheduled Proportional Band
The Scheduled Relative Cool Gain
The Scheduled Derivative Time (0 = Off)
The Scheduled Integral Time (0 = Off)
Target Output value
Working Output High Limit
Working Output Low Limit
Working Output
Auto/Manual Mode (0 = Auto; 1 = Man)
Control Inhibit (0 = No; 1 = Yes)
Integral action inhibit. 0 = No; 1 = Yes
float32
float32
float32
bool
uint8
float32
bool
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
bool
bool
uint8
0212
020d
0211
020f
1691
0210
0213
1695
1696
1698
1697
169a
169b
1692
1699
1694
1693
020e
0215
0214
0204
0201
0205
0206
530
525
529
527
5777
528
531
5781
5782
5784
5783
5786
5787
5778
5785
5780
5779
526
533
532
516
513
517
518
Page 187
0dp
Same as Loop.1.Main.PV
0dp
Not applicable
Not applicable
0dp
Not applicable
0dp
0dp
0dp
1dp
1dp
1dp
1dp
1dp
0dp
0dp
Same as Loop.1.OP.OutputHighLimit
0dp
0dp
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11

Parameter path
Description
Loop1.Maim.PV
Loop.1.Main.TargetSP
Loop.1.Main.WorkingSP
Loop.1.OP.Ch1OnOffHysteresis
Loop.1.OP.Ch1Out
Loop.1.OP.Ch1PotBreak
Loop.1.OP.Ch1PotPosition
Loop.1.OP.Ch1TravelTime
Loop.1.OP.Ch2Deadband
Loop.1.OP.Ch2Out
Loop.1.OP.CoolType
Process varaible
Target Setpoint
Working Setpoint
Ch1 On/Off Hysteresis in Engineering Units
Channel 1 Output Value
Ch1 Potentiometer Break (0 = Off; 1 = On)
Ch1 Valve Position
Channel 1 Travel Time
Channel 2 Deadband
Ch2 On/Off Hysteresis in Eng Units
Channel 2 (Cool) Output Value
Ch2 Valve Position
Cooling Algorithm Type
0 = Linear 1 = Oil
2 = Water
3 = Fan
0 = Power Feedforward disabled; 1 = PFF enabled
Feedforward Gain
Loop.1.OP.EnablePowerFeedforward
Loop.1.OP.FeedForwardGain
Loop.1.OP.FeedForwardOffset
Loop.1.OP.FeedForwardTrimLimit
Loop.1.OP.FeedForwardType
Loop.1.OP.FeedForwardVal
Loop.1.OP.FF_Rem
Loop.1.OP.ForcedOP
Loop.1.OP.ManStartup
Loop.1.OP.ManualMode
Loop.1.OP.ManualOutVal
Loop.1.OP.MeasuredPower
Loop.1.OP.NudgeLower
Loop.1.OP.NudgeRaise
Loop.1.OP.OutputHighLimit
Loop.1.OP.OutputLowLimit
Loop.1.OP.PotBreakMode
Loop.1.OP.Rate
Loop.1.OP.RateDisable
Loop.1.OP.RemOPH
Loop.1.OP.RemOPL
Loop.1.OP.SafeOutVal
Loop.1.OP.SbrkOP
Loop.1.OP.SensorBreakMode
Loop.1.OP.TrackEnable
Loop.1.OP.TrackOutVal
Loop.1.PID.ActiveSet
Loop.1.PID.Boundary1-2
Loop.1.PID.CutbackHigh
Loop.1.PID.CutbackHigh2
Loop.1.PID.CutbackLow
Loop.1.PID.CutbackLow2
Loop.1.PID.DerivativeTime
Loop.1.PID.DerivativeTime2
Loop.1.PID.IntegralTime
Loop.1.PID.IntegralTime2
Loop.1.PID.LoopBreakTime
Loop.1.PID.LoopBreakTime2
Loop.1.PID.ManualReset
Loop.1.PID.ManualReset2
Loop.1.PID.NumSets
Loop.1.PID.OutputHi
Loop.1.PID.OutputHi2
Loop.1.PID.OutputLo
Loop.1.PID.OutputLo2
Loop.1.PID.ProportionalBand
Loop.1.PID.ProportionalBand2
Loop.1.PID.RelCh2Gain
Loop.1.PID.RelCh2Gain2
Loop.1.PID.SchedulerRemoteInput
Loop.1.PID.SchedulerType
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
Feedforward Offset
Feedforward Trim Limit
Feedforward Type (0 = None; 1 = Remote; 2 = SP; 3 = PV)
Feedforward Value
Remote Feed Forward Input
Manual Startup Mode (0 = Off; 1 = On)
Manual Output Mode (0 = Track; 1 = Step; 2 = Last MOP)
Manual Output Value
Measured Mains Voltage
Valve Nudge Lower (1 = Lower)
Valve Nudge Raise (1 = Raise)
Output High Limit
Output Low Limit
Potentiometer Break Mode
(0 = Raise; 1 = Lower; 2 = Rest: 3 = Model)
Output Rate Limit Value (0 = Off)
Output Rate Limit Disable (1 = Disabled)
Remote Output High Limit
Remote Output Low Limit
Safe Output Value
The output power in sensor break
Sensor Break Mode (0 = SbrkOP; 1 = Hold)
Enable Output Tracking (0 = Disabled; 1 = Enabled)
Output Track Value
Current PID Set
Threshold for swapping between set 1 and set 2
Cutback high value for PID set 1 (0 = Auto)
Cutback low value for PID set 1 (0 = Auto)
Derivative time for PID set 1
Integral time for PID set 1
Loop break time for PID set 1
Manual reset value for PID set 1
Number of PID Sets to be used (max = 3)
Gain scheduled output high limit for PID set 1
Gain scheduled output low limit for PID set 1
Proportional band value for PID set 1
Channel 2 relative cool gain value for PID set 1
Scheduler Remote Input
Scheduler Type
0 = Off
1 = Set
2 = SP
3 = PV
4 = Error 5 = OP
6 = Rem
Type
Hex
Dec
Resolution
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
uint8
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
uint8
float32
float32
uint8
0200
0202
0203
1672
020b
1679
1678
1674
166f
1673
020c
167b
167a
1675
1683
512
514
515
5746
523
5753
5752
5748
5743
5747
524
5755
5754
5749
5763
1dp
Not applicable
0dp
1dp
Not applicable
0dp
1dp
Not applicable
uint8
float32
1681
1685
5761
5765
Not applicable
3dp
float32
float32
uint8
float32
float32
float32
bool
uint8
float32
float32
uint8
uint8
float32
float32
uint8
1686
1687
1684
1688
168d
168f
1690
167f
1680
1682
1677
1676
166d
166e
167c
5766
5767
5764
5768
5773
5775
5776
5759
5760
5762
5751
5750
5741
5742
5756
0dp
0dp
Not applicable
0dp
0dp
1dp
Not applicable
Not applicable
0dp
Not applicable
Not applicable
1dp
Not applicable
float32
bool
float32
float32
float32
float32
uint8
uint8
float32
uint8
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
uint8
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
uint8
1670
1671
168c
168b
167e
168e
167d
168a
1689
1638
1639
163a
163f
1647
164f
1640
1648
1650
163d
1645
164d
163c
1644
164c
1642
164a
1652
1641
1649
1651
1636
1653
1655
1657
1654
1656
1658
163b
1643
164b
163e
1646
164e
1637
1635
5744
5745
5772
5771
5758
5774
5757
5770
5769
5688
5689
5690
5695
5703
5711
5696
5704
5712
5693
5701
5709
5692
5700
5708
5698
5706
5714
5697
5705
5713
5686
5715
5717
5719
5716
5718
5720
5691
5699
5707
5694
5702
5710
5687
5685
1dp
Not applicable
Same as Loop.1.Main.ActiveOut
Not applicable
Not applicable
0dp
Not applicable
0dp
0dp
1dp
1dp
1dp
1dp
1dp
1dp
0dp
0dp
0dp
0dp
0dp
0dp
0dp
0dp
0dp
1dp
1dp
1dp
Not applicable
1dp
1dp
1dp
1dp
1dp
1dp
1dp
1dp
1dp
1dp
1dp
1dp
0dp
Not applicable
Page 188

Parameter path
Description
Type
Hex
Dec
Resolution
Loop.1.Setup.AutoManAccess
Edit access to Auto Man in Loop display page

0 = Read/Write (R/W) all modes
1 = Editable in all modes except Logged out
2 = Editable only at Engineer and Supervisor levels
Heat/Ch1 Control Type
0 =Off; 1 = On Off; 2 = PID; 3 = VPU; 4 = VPB
Channel 2 control type (As channel 1, above)
Control Action (0 = Reverse; 1 = Direct)
Derivative Type (0 = PV; 1 = Error)
Loop Name
Loop Type (0 = Single; 1 = Cascade; 2 = Override; 3 = Ratio)
Proportional Band Units
Edit access to SP in Loop display page
Alternative Setpoint
Alternative Setpoint Enable (0 = disable; 1 = enable)
Manual Track Enable (0 = disable; 1 = enable)
Setpoint Range High Limit
Setpoimt Range Low Limit
Setpoint Rate Limit Value (0 = Rate limit off)
Setpoint Rate Limit Disable (0 = No; 1 = Yes)
Setpoint Rate Limit Complete (0 = No; 1 = Yes)
Servo to PV Enable (0 = No; 1 = Yes)
Setpoint 1
Setpoint 2
Setpoint High Limit
SP Integral Balance (0 = Off; 1 = On)
Setpoint Low Limit
Active Setpoint Select (0 = SP1; 1 = SP2)
Enables setpoint tracking (0 = Off; 1 = On)
Setpoint Trim value
Setpoint Trim High Limit
Setpoint Trim Low Limit
Track PV
Manual Tracking Value
Alpha
Alpha_p
Autotune Enable (0 = Autotune Off; 1 = on)
CycleNo
Debug
Tuning diagnostics
OPss
Autotune High Output Power Limit
Autotune Low Output Power Limit
PBs
Settle
Autotune stage
uint8
0 = Reset
1 = None
2 = Monitor
3 = Current SP 4 = NewSP
5 = ToSp
6 = Max
7 = Min
Time in this Stage of Tune
Tune status
0 = Off
1 = Ready
2 = Running
3 = Complete
4 = Timeout
5 = Ti Lmit
6 = R2g limit
TDs
R2G Tuning Type
Tuning
Autotune Algorithm Type
(0 = Cycle; 1 = Single; 2 = Adaptive; 3 = R2GPD)
uint8
16a8
5800
Not applicable
uint8
uint8
uint8
uint8
string_t
uint8
uint8
uint8
1601
1602
1603
1605
5d00
1600
1604
16a7
5633
5634
5635
5637
23808
5632
5636
5799
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
float32
uint8
uint8
float32
float32
float32
bool
bool
bool
float32
float32
float32
bool
float32
uint8
uint8
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
bool
float32
float32
bool
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
0208
1660
1661
1667
1659
165a
1662
1663
020a
166c
165c
165d
165e
166b
165f
165b
1668
1664
1665
1666
1669
166a
16ad
16ab
1631
16af
16ae
31cd
16ac
1632
1633
16b0
16b2
5728
5729
5735
5721
5722
5730
5731
522
5740
5724
5725
5726
5739
5727
5723
5736
5732
5733
5734
5737
5738
5805
5803
5681
5807
5806
12749
5804
5682
5683
5808
5810
520
float32
uint8
0209
0207
521
519
0dp
Not applicable
float32
uint8
float32
uint8
16b1
1607
16aa
1630
5809
5639
5802
5680
2dp
Not applicable
0dp
Not applicable
float32
float32
float32
bool
uint8
float32
bool
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
0292
028d
0291
028f
1791
0290
0293
1795
1796
1798
1797
179a
179b
1792
1799
1794
1793
028e
658
653
657
655
6033
656
659
6037
6038
6040
6039
6042
6043
6034
6041
6036
6035
654
0dp
0dp
Not applicable
Not applicable
0dp
Not applicable
0dp
0dp
0dp
1dp
1dp
1dp
1dp
1dp
0dp
0dp
Loop.1.Setup.CH1ControlType
Loop.1.Setup.ControlAction
Loop.1.Setup.DerivativeType
Loop.1.Setup.LoopName
Loop.1.Setup.LoopType
Loop.1.Setup.PBUnits
Loop.1.Setup.SPAccess
Loop.1.SP.AltSP
Loop.1.SP.AltSPSelect
Loop.1.SP.ManualTrack
Loop.1.SP.RangeHigh
Loop.1.SP.RangeLow
Loop.1.SP.Rate
Loop.1.SP.RateDisable
Loop.1.SP.RateDone
Loop.1.SP.ServoToPV
Loop.1.SP.SP1
Loop.1.SP.SP2
Loop.1.SP.SPHighLimit
Loop.1.SP.SPIntBal
Loop.1.SP.SPLowLimit
Loop.1.SP.SPSelect
Loop.1.SP.SPTrack
Loop.1.SP.SPTrim
Loop.1.SP.SPTrimHighLimit
Loop.1.SP.SPTrimLowLimit
Loop.1.SP.TrackPV
Loop.1.SP.TrackSP
Loop.1.Tune.Alpha
Loop.1.Tune.Alpha_p
Loop.1.Tune.AutotuneEnable
Loop.1.Tune.CycleNo
Loop.1.Tune.Debug
Loop.1.Tune.Diagnostics
Loop.1.Tune.OPss
Loop.1.Tune.OutputHighLimit
Loop.1.Tune.OutputLowLimit
Loop.1.Tune.PBs
Loop.1.Tune.Settle
Loop.1.Tune.Stage
Loop.1.Tune.StageTime
Loop.1.Tune.State
Loop.1.Tune.TDs
Loop.1.Tune.TuneR2G
Loop.1.Tune.Tuning
Loop.1.Tune.Type
Loop.2.Diag.DerivativeOutContrib
Loop.2.Diag.Error
Loop.2.Diag.IntegralOutContrib
Loop.2.Diag.LoopBreakAlarm
Loop.2.Diag.LoopMode
Loop.2.Diag.PropOutContrib
Loop.2.Diag.SBrk
Loop.2.Diag.SchedCBH
Loop.2.Diag.SchedCBL
Loop.2.Diag.SchedLPBrk
Loop.2.Diag.SchedMR
Loop.2.Diag.SchedOPHi
Loop.2.Diag.SchedOPLo
Loop.2.Diag.SchedPB
Loop.2.Diag.SchedR2G
Loop.2.Diag.SchedTd
Loop.2.Diag.SchedTi
Loop.2.Diag.TargetOutVal
Page 189
Derivative Output Contribution

Calculated Error
Integral Output Contribution
Loop Break (0 = No break; 1 = Break)
Loop mode (0 = Auto; 1 = Man; 2 = Off)
Proportional Output Contribution
Sensor break status (0 = No break; 1 = Break)
The Scheduled Cutback Hi (0 = Auto)
The Scheduled Cutback Lo (0 = Auto)
The Scheduled Loop Break Time
The Scheduled Manual Reset
The Scheduled Output High Limit
The Scheduled Output Low Limit
The Scheduled Proportional Band
The Scheduled Relative Cool Gain
The Scheduled Derivative Time (0 = Off)
The Scheduled Integral Time (0 = Off)
Target Output
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
4dp
2dp
Not applicable
0dp
2dp
Not applicable
2dp
2dp
2dp
Not applicable
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11

Parameter path
Description
Type
Hex
Dec
Resolution
Loop.2.Diag.WrkOPHi
Loop.2.Diag.WrkOPLo
Loop.2.Main.ActiveOut
Loop.2.Main.AutoMan
Loop.2.Main.Inhibit
Loop.2.Main.IntHold
Loop.2.Main.PV
Loop.2.Main.TargetSP
Loop.2.Main.WorkingSP
Loop.2.OP.Ch1Out
Loop.2.OP.Ch2Deadband
Loop.2.OP.Ch2Out
Loop.2.OP.CoolType
Working Output Hi Limit

Working Output Lo Limit
Working Output
Auto/Manual Mode (Mode. 0 = Auto; 1 = Man)
Control Inhibit (0 = No; 1 = Yes)
Integral action inhibit. 0 = No; 1 = Yes
Process Variable value
Target Setpoint
Working Setpoint
Channel 1 hysteresis in engineering units
Channel 1 Output Value
Ch1 Valve Position
Channel 2 Deadband
Channel 2 hysteresis in engineering units
Channel 2 output value
Channel 2 Potentiometer Break (0 = Off; 1 = On)
Channel 2 Valve Position
Cooling Algorithm Type
0 = Linear; 1 = Oil; 2 = Water; 3 = Fan
0 = Power Feedforward disabled; 1 = PFF enabled
Feedforward Gain
Feedforward Offset
Feedforward Trim Limit
Feedforward Type (0 = None; 1 = Remote; 2 = SP; 3 = PV)
Feedforward Value
Remote Feed Forward Input
Manual Startup Mode (0 = Off; 1 = On)
Manual Output Mode (0 = Track; 1 = Step; 2 = Last MOP)
Manual Output Value
Measured Mains Voltage
Valve Nudge Lower (1 = Lower)
Valve Nudge Raise (1 = Raise)
Output High Limit
Output Low Limit
Potentiometer Break Mode
(0 = Raise; 1 = Lower; 2 = Rest; 3 = Model)
Output Rate Limit Value (0 = off)
Output Rate Limit Disable (0 = No, 1 = Yes)
Remote Output High Limit
Remote Output Low Limit
Safe Output Value
The output power under sensor break conditions
Sensor Break Mode (0 = SbrkOP; 1 = Hold)
Enable Output Tracking (0 = Off; 1 = On)
Output Track Value
Current PID set
Number of PID sets to be used (max. 3)
float32
float32
float32
bool
bool
uint8
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
uint8
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
uint8
float32
float32
uint8
0295
0294
0284
0281
0285
0286
0280
0282
0283
1772
028b
1779
1778
1774
176f
1773
028c
177b
177a
1775
1783
661
660
644
641
645
646
640
642
643
6002
651
6009
6008
6004
5999
6003
652
6011
6010
6005
6019
0dp
0dp
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
1dp
Not applicable
0dp
1dp
Not applicable
0dp
1dp
Not applicable
uint8
float32
float32
float32
uint8
float32
float32
float32
bool
uint8
float32
float32
uint8
uint8
float32
float32
uint8
1781
1785
1786
1787
1784
1788
178d
178f
1790
177f
1780
1782
1777
1776
176d
176e
177c
6017
6021
6022
6023
6020
6024
6029
6031
6032
6015
6016
6018
6007
6006
5997
5998
6012
Not applicable
3dp
0dp
0dp
Not applicable
0dp
0dp
1dp
Not applicable
Not applicable
0dp
Not applicable
Not applicable
1dp
Not applicable
float32
bool
float32
float32
float32
float32
uint8
uint8
float32
uint8
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
uint8
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
1770
1771
178c
178b
177e
178e
177d
178a
1789
1738
1739
173a
173f
1747
174f
1740
1748
1750
173d
1745
174d
173c
1744
174c
1742
174a
1752
1741
1749
1751
1736
1753
1755
1757
1754
1756
1758
173b
1743
174b
173e
6000
6001
6028
6027
6014
6030
6013
6026
6025
5944
5945
5946
5951
5959
5967
5952
5960
5968
5949
5957
5965
5948
5956
5964
5954
5962
5970
5953
5961
5969
5942
5971
5973
5975
5972
5974
5976
5947
5955
5963
5950
1dp
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
0dp
Not applicable
0dp
0dp
1dp
1dp
1dp
1dp
1dp
1dp
0dp
0dp
0dp
0dp
0dp
0dp
0dp
0dp
0dp
1dp
1dp
1dp
Not applicable
1dp
1dp
1dp
1dp
1dp
1dp
1dp
1dp
1dp
1dp
Loop.2.OP.EnablePowerFeedforward
Loop.2.OP.FeedForwardGain
Loop.2.OP.FeedForwardOffset
Loop.2.OP.FeedForwardTrimLimit
Loop.2.OP.FeedForwardType
Loop.2.OP.FeedForwardVal
Loop.2.OP.FF_Rem
Loop.2.OP.ForcedOP
Loop.2.OP.ManStartup
Loop.2.OP.ManualMode
Loop.2.OP.ManualOutVal
Loop.2.OP.MeasuredPower
Loop.2.OP.NudgeLower
Loop.2.OP.NudgeRaise
Loop.2.OP.OutputHighLimit
Loop.2.OP.OutputLowLimit
Loop.2.OP.PotBreakMode
Loop.2.OP.Rate
Loop.2.OP.RateDisable
Loop.2.OP.RemOPH
Loop.2.OP.RemOPL
Loop.2.OP.SafeOutVal
Loop.2.OP.SbrkOP
Loop.2.OP.SensorBreakMode
Loop.2.OP.TrackEnable
Loop.2.OP.TrackOutVal
Loop.2.PID.ActiveSet
Loop.2.PID.CutbackHigh
Loop.2.PID.CutbackLow
Loop.2.PID.DerivativeTime
Loop.2.PID.IntegralTime
Loop.2.PID.LoopBreakTime
Loop.2.PID.ManualReset
Loop.2.PID.NumSets
Loop.2.PID.OutputHi
Loop.2.PID.OutputLo
Loop.2.PID.ProportionalBand
Loop.2.PID.RelCh2Gain
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
Page 190

Parameter path
Description
Type
Hex
Dec
Resolution
Loop.2.PID.SchedulerRemoteInput
Loop.2.PID.SchedulerType

Scheduler Remote Input
Scheduler Type
0 = Off
1 = Set
2 = SP
3 = PV
4 = Error
5 = OP
6 = Rem
Edit access to Auto Man in Loop display page
Channel 1 Control Type
0 =Off; 1 = On Off; 2 = PID; 3 = VPU; 4 = VPB
Channel 2 Control Type (As channel 1, above)
Control Action (0 = Reverse; 1 = Direct)
Derivative Type (0 = PV; 1 = Error)
Loop Name
Loop Type (0 = single; 1 = cascade; 2 = override; 3 = ratio)
Proportional Band Units (0 = Engineering units; 1 = percent)
Edit access to SP in Loop display page
Alternative Setpoint
Select alternative setpoint (0 = No; 1 = Yes)
Manual Track Enable (0 = disable; 1 = enable)
Setpoint Range High Limit
Setpoint Range Low Limit
Setpoint Rate Limit Value (0 = Rate limit off)
Setpoint Rate Limit Disable (0 = No; 1 = Yes)
Setpoint Rate Limit Complete (0 = No; 1 = Yes)
Servo to PV Enable (0 = No; 1 = Yes)
Setpoint 1
Setpoint 2
Setpoint High Limit
SP Integral Balance (0 = Off; 1 = On)
Setpoint Low Limit
Active Setpoint Select (0 = SP1; 1 = SP2)
Enables setpoint tracking (0 = Off; 1 = On)
Setpoint Trim
Setpoint Trim High Limit
Setpoint Trim Low Limit
PV for Programmer to Track
Manual Tracking Value
Alpha
Alpha_p
Initiate autotune (0 = Autotune Off; 1 = on)
CycleNo
Debug
Tuning diagnostics
OPss
Autotune High Output Power Limit
Autotune Low Output Power Limit
PBs
Settle
Stage of Tune
0 = Reset
1 = None
2 = Monitor
3 = Current SP 4 = NewSP
5 = ToSp
6 = Max
7 = Min
Time in this Stage of Tune
Autotune state
0 = Off
1 = Ready
2 = Complete
3 = Timeout
4 = Ti Lmit
5 = R2g limit
TDs
R2G Tuning Type
Tuning
Autotune Algorithm Type
(0 = Cycle; 1 = Single; 2 = Adaptive; 3 = R2GPD)
float32
float32
float32
uint8
1746
174e
1737
1735
5958
5966
5943
5941
1dp
1dp
0dp
Not applicable
uint8
17a8
6056
Not applicable
uint8
1701
5889
Not applicable
uint8
uint8
uint8
string_t
uint8
uint8
uint8
1702
1703
1705
5d10
1700
1704
17a7
5890
5891
5893
23824
5888
5892
6055
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
float32
uint8
uint8
float32
float32
float32
bool
bool
bool
float32
float32
float32
bool
float32
uint8
uint8
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
bool
float32
float32
bool
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
uint8
1760
1761
1767
1759
175a
1762
1763
028a
176c
175c
175d
175e
176b
175f
175b
1768
1764
1765
1766
1769
176a
17ad
17ab
1731
17af
17ae
31ce
17ac
1732
1733
17b0
17b2
0288
5984
5985
5991
5977
5978
5986
5987
650
5996
5980
5981
5982
5995
5983
5979
5992
5988
5989
5990
5993
5994
6061
6059
5937
6063
6062
12750
6060
5938
5939
6064
6066
648
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
4dp
2dp
Not applicable
0dp
2dp
Not applicable
2dp
2dp
2dp
Not applicable
float32
uint8
0289
0287
649
647
0dp
Not applicable
float32
uint8
float32
uint8
17b1
1608
17aa
1730
6065
5640
6058
5936
2dp
Not applicable
0dp
Not applicable
uint8
2faf
Loop.2.Setup.AutoManAccess
Loop.2.Setup.ControlAction
Loop.2.Setup.DerivativeType
Loop.2.Setup.LoopName
Loop.2.Setup.LoopType
Loop.2.Setup.PBUnits
Loop.2.Setup.SPAccess
Loop.2.SP.AltSP
Loop.2.SP.AltSPSelect
Loop.2.SP.ManualTrack
Loop.2.SP.RangeHigh
Loop.2.SP.RangeLow
Loop.2.SP.Rate
Loop.2.SP.RateDisable
Loop.2.SP.RateDone
Loop.2.SP.ServoToPV
Loop.2.SP.SP1
Loop.2.SP.SP2
Loop.2.SP.SPHighLimit
Loop.2.SP.SPIntBal
Loop.2.SP.SPLowLimit
Loop.2.SP.SPSelect
Loop.2.SP.SPTrack
Loop.2.SP.SPTrim
Loop.2.SP.SPTrimHighLimit
Loop.2.SP.SPTrimLowLimit
Loop.2.SP.TrackPV
Loop.2.SP.TrackSP
Loop.2.Tune.Alpha
Loop.2.Tune.Alpha_p
Loop.2.Tune.AutotuneEnable
Loop.2.Tune.CycleNo
Loop.2.Tune.Debug
Loop.2.Tune.Diagnostics
Loop.2.Tune.OPss
Loop.2.Tune.OutputHighLimit
Loop.2.Tune.OutputLowLimit
Loop.2.Tune.PBs
Loop.2.Tune.Settle
Loop.2.Tune.Stage
Loop.2.Tune.StageTime
Loop.2.Tune.State
Loop.2.Tune.TDs
Loop.2.Tune.TuneR2G
Loop.2.Tune.Tuning
Loop.2.Tune.Type
Math2.1.Fallback
Fallback strategy
Math2.1.FallbackVal
0 = Clip Bad; 1 = Clip Good; 2 = Fallback Bad

3 = Fallback Good; 4 = Up scale; 5 = Down scale.
Fallback Value
float32
2fab
12203 Same as Math2.1.Out
Math2.1.HighLimit
Output High Limit
float32
2fac
Math2.1.In1
Input 1 Value
float32
2fa7
12199 0dp
Math2.1.In1Mul
Input 1 Multiplier
float32
2fa6
12198 1dp
Math2.1.In2
Input 2 Value
float32
2fa9
12201 0dp
Math2.1.In2Mul
Input 2 Multiplier
float32
2fa8
12200 1dp
Math2.1.LowLimit
Output Low Limit
float32
2fad
Page 191
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11

Parameter path
Description
Type
Hex
Dec
Resolution
uint8
2faa
Math2.1.Oper
Operation
Math2.1.Out
0 = Off
3 = Multiply
6 = Select Max
9 = Sample & Hold
12 = Log
15 = 10 to the X
Output Value
float32
2fae
12206 Set by Math2.1.Resolution
Math2.1.Resolution
Output Resolution
uint8
2fb2
Math2.1.Select
Select Input 1 or Input 2
bool
2fb0
Math2.1.Status
Status. 0 = Good (OK); 7 = Bad (Error)
uint8
2fb1
Math2.1.Units
Output Units
string_t
6944
Math2.2.Fallback
Fallback strategy (as Math2.1.Fallback)
uint8
2fbc
Math2.2.FallbackVal
Fallback Value
float32
2fb8
1 = Add
4 =Divide
7 = Select Min
10 = Power
13 = Ln
51 = Select
2 = Subtract
5 = Abs diff
8 = Hot Swap
11 = Square root
14 = Exponential
Math2.2.HighLimit
Output High Limit
float32
2fb9
Math2.2.In1
Input 1 Value
float32
2fb4
12212 0dp
Math2.2.In1Mul
Input 1 Scale
float32
2fb3
12211 1dp
Math2.2.In2
Input 2 Value
float32
2fb6
12214 0dp
Math2.2.In2Mul
Input 2 Scale
float32
2fb5
12213 1dp
Math2.2.LowLimit
Output Low Limit
float32
2fba
Math2.2.Oper
Operation (as Math2.1.Oper)
uint8
2fb7
Math2.2.Out
Output Value
float32
2fbb
Math2.2.Resolution
Output Resolution
uint8
2fbf
Math2.2.Select
Select Input 1 or Input 2
bool
2fbd
Math2.2.Status
uint8
2fbe
Math2.2.Units
Output Units
string_t
694a
Math2.3.Fallback
uint8
2fc9
Math2.3.FallbackVal
Fallback Value
float32
2fc5
Math2.3.HighLimit
Output High Limit
float32
2fc6
Math2.3.In1
Input 1 Value
float32
2fc1
12225 0dp
Math2.3.In1Mul
Input 1 Scale
float32
2fc0
12224 1dp
Math2.3.In2
Input 2 Value
float32
2fc3
12227 0dp
Math2.3.In2Mul
Input 2 Scale
float32
2fc2
12226 1dp
Math2.3.LowLimit
Output Low Limit
float32
2fc7
Math2.3.Oper
uint8
2fc4
Math2.3.Out
Output Value
float32
2fc8
Math2.3.Resolution
Output Resolution
uint8
2fcc
Math2.3.Select
Select Between Input 1 and Input 2
bool
2fca
Math2.3.Status
uint8
2fcb
Math2.3.Units
Output Units
string_t
6950
Math2.4.Fallback
uint8
2fd6
Math2.4.FallbackVal
Fallback Value
float32
2fd2
Math2.4.HighLimit
Output High Limit
float32
2fd3
Math2.4.In1
Input 1 Value
float32
2fce
12238 0dp
Math2.4.In1Mul
Input 1 Scale
float32
2fcd
12237 1dp
Math2.4.In2
Input 2 Value
float32
2fd0
12240 0dp
Math2.4.In2Mul
Input 2 Scale
float32
2fcf
12239 1dp
Math2.4.LowLimit
Output Low Limit
float32
2fd4
Math2.4.Oper
uint8
2fd1
Math2.4.Out
Output Value
float32
2fd5
Math2.4.Resolution
Output Resolution
uint8
2fd9
Math2.4.Select
bool
2fd7
Math2.4.Status
uint8
2fd8
Math2.4.Units
Output Units
string_t
6956
Math2.5.Fallback
uint8
2fe3
Math2.5.FallbackVal
Fallback Value
float32
2fdf
Math2.5.HighLimit
Output High Limit
float32
2fe0
Math2.5.In1
Input 1 Value
float32
2fdb
12251 0dp
Math2.5.In1Mul
Input 1 Scale
float32
2fda
12250 1dp
Math2.5.In2
Input 2 Value
float32
2fdd
12253 0dp
Math2.5.In2Mul
Input 2 Scale
float32
2fdc
12252 1dp
Math2.5.LowLimit
Output Low Limit
float32
2fe1
Math2.5.Oper
uint8
2fde
Math2.5.Out
Output Value
float32
2fe2
Math2.5.Resolution
Output Resolution
uint8
2fe6
Math2.5.Select
bool
2fe4
Math2.5.Status
uint8
2fe5
Math2.5.Units
Output Units
string_t
695c
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
Page 192

Parameter path
Description
Type
Hex
Dec
Resolution
Math2.6.Fallback
uint8
2ff0
Math2.6.FallbackVal
Fallback Value
float32
2fec
Math2.6.HighLimit
Output High Limit
float32
2fed
Math2.6.In1
Input 1 Value
float32
2fe8
12264 0dp
Math2.6.In1Mul
Input 1 Scale
float32
2fe7
12263 1dp
Math2.6.In2
Input 2 Value
float32
2fea
12266 0dp
Math2.6.In2Mul
Input 2 Scale
float32
2fe9
12265 1dp
Math2.6.LowLimit
Output Low Limit
float32
2fee
Math2.6.Oper
uint8
2feb
Math2.6.Out
Output Value
float32
2fef
Math2.6.Resolution
Output Resolution
uint8
2ff3
Math2.6.Select
bool
2ff1
Math2.6.Status
uint8
2ff2
Math2.6.Units
Output Units
string_t
6962
Math2.7.Fallback
uint8
2ffd
Math2.7.FallbackVal
Fallback Value
float32
2ff9
Math2.7.HighLimit
Output High Limit
float32
2ffa
Math2.7.In1
Input 1 Value
float32
2ff5
12277 0dp
Math2.7.In1Mul
Input 1 Scale
float32
2ff4
12276 1dp
Math2.7.In2
Input 2 Value
float32
2ff7
12279 0dp
Math2.7.In2Mul
Input 2 Scale
float32
2ff6
12278 1dp
Math2.7.LowLimit
Output Low Limit
float32
2ffb
Math2.7.Oper
uint8
2ff8
Math2.7.Out
Output Value
float32
2ffc
Math2.7.Resolution
Output Resolution
uint8
3000
Math2.7.Select
bool
2ffe
Math2.7.Status
uint8
2fff
Math2.7.Units
Output Units
string_t
6968
Math2.8.Fallback
uint8
300a
Math2.8.FallbackVal
Fallback Value
float32
3006
Math2.8.HighLimit
Output High Limit
float32
3007
Math2.8.In1
Input 1 Value
float32
3002
12290 0dp
Math2.8.In1Mul
Input 1 Scale
float32
3001
12289 1dp
Math2.8.In2
Input 2 Value
float32
3004
12292 0dp
Math2.8.In2Mul
Input 2 Scale
float32
3003
12291 1dp
Math2.8.LowLimit
Output Low Limit
float32
3008
Math2.8.Oper
uint8
3005
Math2.8.Out
Output Value
float32
3009
Math2.8.Resolution
Output Resolution
uint8
300d
Math2.8.Select
bool
300b
Math2.8.Status
uint8
300c
Math2.8.Units
Output Units
string_t
696e
Math2.9.Fallback
uint8
3017
Math2.9.FallbackVal
Fallback Value
float32
3013
Math2.9.HighLimit
Output High Limit
float32
3014
Math2.9.In1
Input 1 Value
float32
300f
12303 0dp
Math2.9.In1Mul
Input 1 Scale
float32
300e
12302 1dp
Math2.9.In2
Input 2 Value
float32
3011
12305 0dp
Math2.9.In2Mul
Input 2 Scale
float32
3010
12304 1dp
Math2.9.LowLimit
Output Low Limit
float32
3015
Math2.9.Oper
uint8
3012
Math2.9.Out
Output Value
float32
3016
Math2.9.Resolution
Output Resolution
uint8
301a
Math2.9.Select
bool
3018
Math2.9.Status
uint8
3019
Math2.9.Units
Output Units
string_t
6974
Math2.10.Fallback
uint8
3024
Math2.10.FallbackVal
Fallback Value
float32
3020
Math2.10.HighLimit
Output High Limit
float32
3021
Math2.10.In1
Input 1 Value
float32
301c
12316 0dp
Math2.10.In1Mul
Input 1 Scale
float32
301b
12315 1dp
Math2.10.In2
Input 2 Value
float32
301e
12318 0dp
Math2.10.In2Mul
Input 2 Scale
float32
301d
12317 1dp
Math2.10.LowLimit
Output Low Limit
float32
3022
Math2.10.Oper
uint8
301f
Math2.10.Out
Output Value
float32
3023
Math2.10.Resolution
Output Resolution
uint8
3027
Page 193
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11

Parameter path
Description
Type
Hex
Dec
Math2.10.Select
bool
3025
Math2.10.Status
uint8
3026
Math2.10.Units
Output Units
string_t
697a
Math2.11.Fallback
uint8
3031
Fallback Value
float32
302d
Math2.11.HighLimit
Output High Limit
float32
302e
Math2.11.In1
Input 1 Value
float32
3029
12329 0dp
Math2.11.In1Mul
Input 1 Scale
float32
3028
12328 1dp
Math2.11.In2
Input 2 Value
float32
302b
12331 0dp
Math2.11.In2Mul
Input 2 Scale
float32
302a
12330 1dp
Math2.11.LowLimit
Output Low Limit
float32
302f
Math2.11.Oper
uint8
302c
Math2.11.Out
Output Value
float32
3030
Math2.11.Resolution
Output Resolution
uint8
3034
Math2.11.Select
bool
3032
Math2.11.Status
uint8
3033
Math2.11.Units
Output Units
string_t
6980
Math2.12.Fallback
uint8
303e
Fallback Value
float32
303a
Math2.12.HighLimit
Output High Limit
float32
303b
Math2.12.In1
Input 1 Value
float32
3036
12342 0dp
Math2.12.In1Mul
Input 1 Scale
float32
3035
12341 1dp
Math2.12.In2
Input 2 Value
float32
3038
12344 0dp
Math2.12.In2Mul
Input 2 Scale
float32
3037
12343 1dp
Math2.12.LowLimit
Output Low Limit
float32
303c
Math2.12.Oper
uint8
3039
Math2.12.Out
Output Value
float32
303d
Math2.12.Resolution
Output Resolution
uint8
3041
Math2.12.Select
bool
303f
Math2.12.Status
uint8
3040
Math2.12.Units
Output Units
string_t
6986
ModbusMaster.1.Data.AlarmStatus
ModbusMaster.1.Data.BitPosition
ModbusMaster.1.Data.ChanAlarmStatus
7dbb
7d4f
7ddb

7c06
ModbusMaster.1.Data.Value
Alarm status (0 = No alarms; 1 = one or more alarms active)

uint8
Bit position of the bit of interest in a 16 bit data type
uint8
Channel alarm status
uint8
0 = Off 1 = Active 2 = Safe Nackd 3 = Active Nackd
Data type of the data being read/written
uint8
0 = Real
1 = DINT 2 = INT
3 = Byte
4 = UDINT 5 = UINT 6 = UBYTE
8 = Real (Swap)
9 = DINT (Swap)
10 = UDINT (Swap) 11 = BIT
Description for this data item
string_t
Digital status (0 = Off, 1 = On)
bool
Fall back value to be writen to the slave device
float32
The modbus function codeuint8
7be8
1 = Read coil
2 = Read discrete 3 = Read holding
4 = Read input 5 = Write coil
6 = Write single
16 = Write multiple
Modbus register address of the data to be read/written
float32
Auto Manual mode selection (0 = Auto; 1 = Manual)
uint8
Used for multiple instance parameters
uint8
Parameter list for a specific slave device
uint8
Frequency at which the data is read/written
uint8
0 = High 1 = Medium 2 = Low
3 = Acyclic
Process value recieved from slave device
float32
Scaling in decimal places for non floating point data types
uint8
1 = send the write value to the slave
bool
Sets a digital value (1 = on; 0 = off)
bool
Slave device to communicate with.
uint8
Transaction status
uint8
0 = Success
1 = Illegal function 2 = Ilegal address
6 = Slave busy
8 = Parity error
9 = Bad sub
10 = Bad gateway 11 = No response
12 = Idle
13 = Pending
14 = Timeout
15 = Unknown host
16 = Connect fail 17 = No sockets
18 = Loopback fail
19 = Login fail
20 = Unknown error 22 = Write fail
23 = Master reject
The value to be written to the slave device
float32
ModbusMaster.2.Data.DataType
ModbusMaster.2.Data.Descriptor
ModbusMaster.2.Data.Digital
ModbusMaster.2.Data.FallBackValue
Alarm status (as for Modbus Master.1)

Channel alarm status (as for Modbus Master.1)
Type of data being read/written (as for Modbus Master.1)
ModbusMaster.1.Data.FunctionCode
ModbusMaster.1.Data.ModbusAddress
ModbusMaster.1.Data.Mode
ModbusMaster.1.Data.Number
ModbusMaster.1.Data.ParameterList
ModbusMaster.1.Data.Priority
ModbusMaster.1.Data.PV
ModbusMaster.1.Data.Scaling
ModbusMaster.1.Data.Send
ModbusMaster.1.Data.Set
ModbusMaster.1.Data.SlaveDevice
ModbusMaster.1.Data.Status
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
uint8
uint8
uint8
uint8
string_t
bool
float32
6687
7e1b
7c7e
Resolution

31870 2dp
31720
Not applicable
7b8c
7d9b
7d13
7cf5
7c24
31628
32155
32019
31989
31780
0dp
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
7b32
7d31
7cb9
7dfb
7b14
7cd7
31538
32049
31929
32251
31508
31959
2dp
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
7c42
31810 2dp
7dbc
7d50
7ddc
7c07
669c
7e1c
7c80
32188
32080
32220
31751
26268
32284
31872
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
2dp
Page 194

Parameter path
Description
Type
Hex
Dec
Resolution
The modbus function code (as for Modbus Master.1)

Read/Write frequency (as for Modbus Master.1)
Transaction status (as for Modbus Master.1)
uint8
float32
uint8
uint8
uint8
uint8
float32
uint8
bool
bool
uint8
uint8
float32
7be9
7b8e
7d9c
7d14
7cf6
7c25
7b34
7d32
7cba
7dfc
7b15
7cd8
7c44
31721
31630
32156
32020
31990
31781
31540
32050
31930
32252
31509
31960
31812
Not applicable
0dp
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
2dp
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
2dp

Transaction status (as for Modbus Master.1
uint8
uint8
uint8
uint8
string_t
bool
float32
uint8
float32
uint8
uint8
uint8
uint8
float32
uint8
bool
bool
uint8
uint8
float32
7dbd
7d51
7ddd
7c08
66b1
7e1d
7c82
7bea
7b90
7d9d
7d15
7cf7
7c26
7b36
7d33
7cbb
7dfd
7b16
7cd9
7c46
32189
32081
32221
31752
26289
32285
31874
31722
31632
32157
32021
31991
31782
31542
32051
31931
32253
31510
31961
31814
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
2dp
Not applicable
0dp
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
2dp
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
2dp

uint8
uint8
uint8
uint8
string_t
bool
float32
uint8
float32
uint8
uint8
uint8
uint8
float32
uint8
bool
bool
uint8
uint8
float32
7dbe
7d52
7dde
7c09
66c6
7e1e
7c84
7beb
7b92
7d9e
7d16
7cf8
7c27
7b38
7d34
7cbc
7dfe
7b17
7cda
7c48
32190
32082
32222
31753
26310
32286
31876
31723
31634
32158
32022
31992
31783
31544
32052
31932
32254
31511
31962
31816
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
2dp
Not applicable
0dp
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
2dp
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
2dp

uint8
uint8
uint8
uint8
string_t
bool
float32
uint8
float32
uint8
uint8
uint8
uint8
float32
uint8
bool
bool
uint8
uint8
float32
7dbf
7d53
7ddf
7c0a
66db
7e1f
7c86
7bec
7b94
7d9f
7d17
7cf9
7c28
7b3a
7d35
7cbd
7dff
7b18
7cdb
7c4a
32191
32083
32223
31754
26331
32287
31878
31724
31636
32159
32023
31993
31784
31546
32053
31933
32255
31512
31963
31818
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
2dp
Not applicable
0dp
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
2dp
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
2dp

uint8
uint8
uint8
uint8
7dc0
7d54
7de0
7c0b
32192
32084
32224
31755
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Page 195
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11

Parameter path
Description
Type
Hex
Dec
Resolution

string_t
bool
float32
uint8
float32
uint8
uint8
uint8
uint8
float32
uint8
bool
bool
uint8
uint8
float32
66f0
7e20
7c88
7bed
7b96
7da0
7d18
7cfa
7c29
7b3c
7d36
7cbe
7e00
7b19
7cdc
7c4c
26352
32288
31880
31725
31638
32160
32024
31994
31785
31548
32054
31934
32256
31513
31964
31820
Not applicable
Not applicable
2dp
Not applicable
0dp
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
2dp
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
2dp

uint8
uint8
uint8
uint8
string_t
bool
float32
uint8
float32
uint8
uint8
uint8
uint8
float32
uint8
bool
bool
uint8
uint8
float32
7dc1
7d55
7de1
7c0c
6705
7e21
7c8a
7bee
7b98
7da1
7d19
7cfb
7c2a
7b3e
7d37
7cbf
7e01
7b1a
7cdd
7c4e
32193
32085
32225
31756
26373
32289
31882
31726
31640
32161
32025
31995
31786
31550
32055
31935
32257
31514
31965
31822
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
2dp
Not applicable
0dp
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
2dp
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
2dp

uint8
uint8
uint8
uint8
string_t
bool
float32
uint8
float32
uint8
uint8
uint8
uint8
float32
uint8
bool
bool
uint8
uint8
float32
7dc2
7d56
7de2
7c0d
671a
7e22
7c8c
7bef
7b9a
7da2
7d1a
7cfc
7c2b
7b40
7d38
7cc0
7e02
7b1b
7cde
7c50
32194
32086
32226
31757
26394
32290
31884
31727
31642
32162
32026
31996
31787
31552
32056
31936
32258
31515
31966
31824
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
2dp
Not applicable
0dp
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
2dp
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
2dp

FRead/Write frequency (as for Modbus Master.1)
uint8
uint8
uint8
uint8
string_t
bool
float32
uint8
float32
uint8
uint8
uint8
uint8
float32
uint8
bool
bool
uint8
uint8
float32
7dc3
7d57
7de3
7c0e
672f
7e23
7c8e
7bf0
7b9c
7da3
7d1b
7cfd
7c2c
7b42
7d39
7cc1
7e03
7b1c
7cdf
7c52
32195
32087
32227
31758
26415
32291
31886
31728
31644
32163
32027
31997
31788
31554
32057
31937
32259
31516
31967
31826
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
2dp
Not applicable
0dp
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
2dp
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
2dp
uint8
7dc4
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
Page 196

Parameter path
Description
Type
Hex
Dec
Resolution

uint8
uint8
uint8
string_t
bool
float32
uint8
float32
uint8
uint8
uint8
uint8
float32
uint8
bool
bool
uint8
uint8
float32
7d58
7de4
7c0f
6744
7e24
7c90
7bf1
7b9e
7da4
7d1c
7cfe
7c2d
7b44
7d3a
7cc2
7e04
7b1d
7ce0
7c54
32088
32228
31759
26436
32292
31888
31729
31646
32164
32028
31998
31789
31556
32058
31938
32260
31517
31968
31828
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
2dp
Not applicable
0dp
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
2dp
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
2dp

uint8
uint8
uint8
uint8
string_t
bool
float32
uint8
float32
uint8
uint8
uint8
uint8
float32
uint8
bool
bool
uint8
uint8
float32
7dc5
7d59
7de5
7c10
6759
7e25
7c92
7bf2
7bc0
7da5
7d1d
7cff
7c2e
7b46
7d3b
7cc3
7e05
7b1e
7ce1
7c56
32197
32089
32229
31760
26457
32293
31890
31730
31680
32165
32029
31999
31790
31558
32059
31939
32261
31518
31969
31830
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
2dp
Not applicable
0dp
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
2dp
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
2dp

uint8
uint8
uint8
uint8
string_t
bool
float32
uint8
float32
uint8
uint8
uint8
uint8
float32
uint8
bool
bool
uint8
uint8
float32
7dc6
7d5a
7de6
7c11
676e
7e26
7c94
7bf3
7bc2
7da6
7d1e
7d00
7c2f
7b48
7d3c
7cc4
7e06
7b1f
7ce2
7c58
32198
32090
32230
31761
26478
32294
31892
31731
31682
32166
32030
32000
31791
31560
32060
31940
32262
31519
31970
31832
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
2dp
Not applicable
0dp
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
2dp
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
2dp

SSets a digital value (1 = on; 0 = off)
uint8
uint8
uint8
uint8
string_t
bool
float32
uint8
float32
uint8
uint8
uint8
uint8
float32
uint8
bool
bool
uint8
uint8
7dc7
7d5b
7de7
7c12
6783
7e27
7c96
7bf4
7bc4
7da7
7d1f
7d01
7c30
7b4a
7d3d
7cc5
7e07
7b20
7ce3
32199
32091
32231
31762
26499
32295
31894
31732
31684
32167
32031
32001
31792
31562
32061
31941
32263
31520
31971
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
2dp
Not applicable
0dp
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
2dp
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Page 197
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11

Parameter path
Description
Type
Hex
Dec
float32
7c5a
31834 2dp

uint8
uint8
uint8
uint8
string_t
bool
float32
uint8
float32
uint8
uint8
uint8
uint8
float32
uint8
bool
bool
uint8
uint8
float32
7dc8
7d5c
7de8
7c13
6798
7e28
7c98
7bf5
7bc6
7da8
7d20
7d02
7c31
7b4c
7d3e
7cc6
7e08
7b21
7ce4
7c5c
32200
32092
32232
31763
26520
32296
31896
31733
31686
32168
32032
32002
31793
31564
32062
31942
32264
31521
31972
31836
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
2dp
Not applicable
0dp
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
2dp
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
2dp

uint8
uint8
uint8
uint8
string_t
bool
float32
uint8
float32
uint8
uint8
uint8
uint8
float32
uint8
bool
bool
uint8
uint8
float32
7dc9
7d5d
7de9
7c14
67ad
7e29
7c9a
7bf6
7bc8
7da9
7d21
7d03
7c32
7b4e
7d3f
7cc7
7e09
7b22
7ce5
7c5e
32201
32093
32233
31764
26541
32297
31898
31734
31688
32169
32033
32003
31794
31566
32063
31943
32265
31522
31973
31838
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
2dp
Not applicable
0dp
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
2dp
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
2dp

uint8
uint8
uint8
uint8
string_t
bool
float32
uint8
float32
uint8
uint8
uint8
uint8
float32
uint8
bool
bool
uint8
uint8
float32
7dca
7d5e
7dea
7c15
67c2
7e2a
7c9c
7bf7
7bca
7daa
7d22
7d04
7c33
7b50
7d40
7cc8
7e0a
7b23
7ce6
7c60
32202
32094
32234
31765
26562
32298
31900
31735
31690
32170
32034
32004
31795
31568
32064
31944
32266
31523
31974
31840
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
2dp
Not applicable
0dp
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
2dp
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
2dp

uint8
uint8
uint8
uint8
string_t
bool
float32
uint8
float32
uint8
uint8
uint8
uint8
float32
uint8
bool
7dcb
7d5f
7deb
7c16
67d7
7e2b
7c9e
7bf8
7bcc
7dab
7d23
7d05
7c34
7b52
7d41
7cc9
32203
32095
32235
31766
26583
32299
31902
31736
31692
32171
32035
32005
31796
31570
32065
31945
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
2dp
Not applicable
0dp
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
2dp
Not applicable
Not applicable
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
Resolution
Page 198

Parameter path
Description
Type
Hex
Dec
Resolution

bool
uint8
uint8
float32
7e0b
7b24
7ce7
7c62
32267
31524
31975
31842
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
2dp

FRead/Write frequency (as for Modbus Master.1)
uint8
uint8
uint8
uint8
string_t
bool
float32
uint8
float32
uint8
uint8
uint8
uint8
float32
uint8
bool
bool
uint8
uint8
float32
7dcc
7d60
7dec
7c17
67ec
7e2c
7ca0
7bf9
7bce
7dac
7d24
7d06
7c35
7b54
7d42
7cca
7e0c
7b25
7ce8
7c64
32204
32096
32236
31767
26604
32300
31904
31737
31694
32172
32036
32006
31797
31572
32066
31946
32268
31525
31976
31844
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
2dp
Not applicable
0dp
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
2dp
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
2dp

uint8
uint8
uint8
uint8
string_t
bool
float32
uint8
float32
uint8
uint8
uint8
uint8
float32
uint8
bool
bool
uint8
uint8
float32
7dcd
7d61
7ded
7c18
6801
7e2d
7ca2
7bfa
7bd0
7dad
7d25
7d07
7c36
7b56
7d43
7ccb
7e0d
7b26
7ce9
7c66
32205
32097
32237
31768
26625
32301
31906
31738
31696
32173
32037
32007
31798
31574
32067
31947
32269
31526
31977
31846
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
2dp
Not applicable
0dp
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
2dp
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
2dp

SSets a digital value (1 = on; 0 = off)
uint8
uint8
uint8
uint8
string_t
bool
float32
uint8
float32
uint8
uint8
uint8
uint8
float32
uint8
bool
bool
uint8
uint8
float32
7dce
7d62
7dee
7c19
6816
7e2e
7ca4
7bfb
7bd2
7dae
7d26
7d08
7c37
7b58
7d44
7ccc
7e0e
7b27
7cea
7c68
32206
32098
32238
31769
26646
32302
31908
31739
31698
32174
32038
32008
31799
31576
32068
31948
32270
31527
31978
31848
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
2dp
Not applicable
0dp
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
2dp
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
2dp

uint8
uint8
uint8
uint8
string_t
bool
float32
uint8
float32
uint8
uint8
uint8
uint8
7dcf
7d63
7def
7c1a
682b
7e2f
7ca6
7bfc
7bd4
7daf
7d27
7d09
7c38
32207
32099
32239
31770
26667
32303
31910
31740
31700
32175
32039
32009
31800
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
2dp
Not applicable
0dp
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Page 199
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11

Parameter path
Description
Type
Hex
Dec
Resolution

float32
uint8
bool
bool
uint8
uint8
float32
7b5a
7d45
7ccd
7e0f
7b28
7ceb
7c6a
31578
32069
31949
32271
31528
31979
31850
2dp
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
2dp

uint8
uint8
uint8
uint8
string_t
bool
float32
uint8
float32
uint8
uint8
uint8
uint8
float32
uint8
bool
bool
uint8
uint8
float32
7dd0
7d64
7df0
7c1b
6840
7e30
7ca8
7bfd
7bd6
7db0
7d28
7d0a
7c39
7b5c
7d46
7cce
7e10
7b29
7cec
7c6c
32208
32100
32240
31771
26688
32304
31912
31741
31702
32176
32040
32010
31801
31580
32070
31950
32272
31529
31980
31852
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
2dp
Not applicable
0dp
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
2dp
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
2dp

uint8
uint8
uint8
uint8
string_t
bool
float32
uint8
float32
uint8
uint8
uint8
uint8
float32
uint8
bool
bool
uint8
uint8
float32
uint8
uint8
uint8
uint8
string_t
bool
float32
uint8
float32
uint8
uint8
uint8
uint8
float32
uint8
bool
bool
uint8
uint8
float32
7dd1
7d65
7df1
7c1c
6855
7e31
7caa
7bfe
7bd8
7db1
7d29
7d0b
7c3a
7b5e
7d47
7ccf
7e11
7b2a
7ced
7c6e
7dd2
7d66
7df2
7c1d
686a
7e32
7cac
7bff
7bda
7db2
7d2a
7d0c
7c3b
7b60
7d48
7cd0
7e12
7b2b
7cee
7c70
32209
32101
32241
31772
26709
32305
31914
31742
31704
32177
32041
32011
31802
31582
32071
31951
32273
31530
31981
31854
32210
32102
32242
31773
26730
32306
31916
31743
31706
32178
32042
32012
31803
31584
32072
31952
32274
31531
31982
31856
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
2dp
Not applicable
0dp
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
2dp
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
2dp
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
2dp
Not applicable
0dp
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
2dp
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
2dp

uint8
uint8
uint8
uint8
string_t
bool
float32
uint8
float32
uint8
uint8
7dd3
7d67
7df3
7c1e
687f
7e33
7cae
7c00
7bdc
7db3
7d2b
32211
32103
32243
31774
26751
32307
31918
31744
31708
32179
32043
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
2dp
Not applicable
0dp
Not applicable
Not applicable
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
Page 200

Parameter path
Description
Type
Hex
Dec
Resolution

uint8
uint8
float32
uint8
bool
bool
uint8
uint8
float32
7d0d
7c3c
7b62
7d49
7cd1
7e13
7b2c
7cef
7c72
32013
31804
31586
32073
31953
32275
31532
31983
31858
Not applicable
Not applicable
2dp
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
2dp

uint8
uint8
uint8
uint8
string_t
bool
float32
uint8
float32
uint8
uint8
uint8
uint8
float32
uint8
bool
bool
uint8
uint8
float32
7dd4
7d68
7df4
7c1f
6894
7e34
7cb0
7c01
7bde
7db4
7d2c
7d0e
7c3d
7b64
7d4a
7cd2
7e14
7b2d
7cf0
7c74
32212
32104
32244
31775
26772
32308
31920
31745
31710
32180
32044
32014
31805
31588
32074
31954
32276
31533
31984
31860
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
2dp
Not applicable
0dp
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
2dp
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
2dp

uint8
uint8
uint8
uint8
string_t
bool
float32
uint8
float32
uint8
uint8
uint8
uint8
float32
uint8
bool
bool
uint8
uint8
float32
7dd5
7d69
7df5
7c20
68a9
7e35
7cb2
7c02
7be0
7db5
7d2d
7d0f
7c3e
7b66
7d4b
7cd3
7e15
7b2e
7cf1
7c76
32213
32105
32245
31776
26793
32309
31922
31746
31712
32181
32045
32015
31806
31590
32075
31955
32277
31534
31985
31862
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
2dp
Not applicable
0dp
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
2dp
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
2dp

uint8
uint8
uint8
uint8
string_t
bool
float32
uint8
float32
uint8
uint8
uint8
uint8
float32
uint8
bool
bool
uint8
uint8
float32
7dd6
7d6a
7df6
7c21
68be
7e36
7cb4
7c03
7be2
7db6
7d2e
7d10
7c3f
7b68
7d4c
7cd4
7e16
7b2f
7cf2
7c78
32214
32106
32246
31777
26814
32310
31924
31747
31714
32182
32046
32016
31807
31592
32076
31956
32278
31535
31986
31864
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
2dp
Not applicable
0dp
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
2dp
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
2dp

uint8
uint8
uint8
uint8
string_t
bool
float32
uint8
7dd7
7d6b
7df7
7c22
70ff
7e37
7cb6
7c04
32215
32107
32247
31778
28927
32311
31926
31748
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
2dp
Not applicable
Page 201
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11

Parameter path
Description
Type
Hex
Dec
Resolution

float32
uint8
uint8
uint8
uint8
float32
uint8
bool
bool
uint8
uint8
float32
7be4
7db7
7d2f
7d11
7c40
7b6a
7d4d
7cd5
7e17
7b30
7cf3
7c7a
31716
32183
32047
32017
31808
31594
32077
31957
32279
31536
31987
31866
0dp
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
2dp
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
2dp

uint8
uint8
uint8
uint8
string_t
bool
float32
uint8
float32
uint8
uint8
uint8
uint8
float32
uint8
bool
bool
uint8
uint8
float32
7dd8
7d6c
7df8
7c23
7114
7e38
7cb8
7c05
7be6
7db8
7d30
7d12
7c41
7b6c
7d4e
7cd6
7e18
7b31
7cf4
7c7c
32216
32108
32248
31779
28948
32312
31928
31749
31718
32184
32048
32018
31809
31596
32078
31958
32280
31537
31988
31868
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
2dp
Not applicable
0dp
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
2dp
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
2dp
ModbusMaster.Slave1.Data.AlarmStatus
ModbusMaster.Slave1.Data.BitPosition
ModbusMaster.Slave1.Data.ChanAlarmStatus
Alarm status (0 = none; 1 = one or more alarms active)

Channel alarm status
0 = Off
1 = Active 2 = Safe Nakd 3 = Active Nackd
Data type of the data being read/written
0 = Real
1 = DINT 2 = INT
3 = Byte
4 = UDINT 5 = UINT 6 = UBYTE
8 = Real (Swap)
9 = DINT (Swap)
10 = UDINT (Swap) 11 = BIT
Digital status (0 = Off; 1 = On)
The modbus function code
1 = Read coil
2 = Read discrete 3 = Read holding
4 = Read input 5 = Write coil
6 = Write single
16 = Write multiple
Frequency at which the data is read/written
0 = High 1 = Medium 2 = Low 3 = Acyclic
Sets a digital value to on (1) or off (0)
Transaction status
0 = Success
1 = Illegal function 2 = Ilegal address
3 = Illegal value
6 = Slave busy
8 = Parity error
9 = Bad sub
10 = Bad gateway 11 = No response
12 = Idle
13 = Pending
14 = Timeout
15 = Unknown host 16 = Connect fail
17 = No sockets
18 = Loopback fail 19 = Login fail
20 = Unknown error
22 = Write fail
23 = Master reject
1 = a device communications failure
Device descriptor
High priority rate
0 = 125ms
1 = 250ms
2 = 500 ms
3 = 1 sec
4 = 2 secs
5 = 5 secs
6 = 10 secs
7 = 20 secs
8 = 30 secs
9 = 1 min
10 = 2 mins 11 = 5 mins
12 = 10 mins 13 = 20 mins 14 = 30 mins 15 = 1 hr
Internet Protocol (IP) address for a slave device
Low priority rate (as high priority above)
Maximum amount of data in a single transaction
Medium priority rate (as high priority above)
Enables communications (0 = offline; 1 = online)
uint8
uint8
uint8
7db9
7d95
7dd9

uint8
7d7f
string_t
bool
float32
uint8
665d
7e19
7d87
7d7d
26205
32281
32135
32125
Not applicable
Not applicable
2dp
Not applicable
float32
uint8
uint8
uint8
uint8
7d79
7d99
7d91
7d8f
7d81
32121
32153
32145
32143
32129
0dp
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
float32
uint8
bool
bool
uint8
uint8
7d73
7d93
7d8b
7df9
7d71
7d8d
32115
32147
32139
32249
32113
32141
2dp
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
float32
bool
string_t
uint8
7d83
7d97
6633
7b0c
32131
32151
26163
31500
2dp
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
string_t
uint8
uint8
uint8
bool
68d3
7b10
7b0a
7b0e
7b00
26835
31504
31498
31502
31488
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
ModbusMaster.Slave1.Data.DataType
ModbusMaster.Slave1.Data.Descriptor
ModbusMaster.Slave1.Data.Digital
ModbusMaster.Slave1.Data.FallBackValue
ModbusMaster.Slave1.Data.FunctionCode
ModbusMaster.Slave1.Data.ModbusAddress
ModbusMaster.Slave1.Data.Mode
ModbusMaster.Slave1.Data.Number
ModbusMaster.Slave1.Data.ParameterList
ModbusMaster.Slave1.Data.Priority
ModbusMaster.Slave1.Data.PV
ModbusMaster.Slave1.Data.Scaling
ModbusMaster.Slave1.Data.Send
ModbusMaster.Slave1.Data.Set
ModbusMaster.Slave1.Data.SlaveDevice
ModbusMaster.Slave1.Data.Status
ModbusMaster.Slave1.Data.Value
ModbusMaster.Slave1.Main.CommsFailure
ModbusMaster.Slave1.Main.Descriptor
ModbusMaster.Slave1.Main.HighPriority
ModbusMaster.Slave1.Main.IPAddress
ModbusMaster.Slave1.Main.LowPriority
ModbusMaster.Slave1.Main.MaxBlockSize
ModbusMaster.Slave1.Main.MediumPriority
ModbusMaster.Slave1.Main.Online
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
Page 202

Parameter path
Description
Type
Hex
Dec
ModbusMaster.Slave1.Main.Profile
uint8
7b12
uint8
bool
uint8
7b04
7d6d
7d6f

ModbusMaster.Slave1.Main.Timeout
ModbusMaster.Slave1.Main.UnitId
A profile that defines the device type

0 = 3rd party 1 = Mini8 2 = 3xxx 3 = 35xx
4 = 2xxx
5 = 2500
6 = 5000 7 = 6000
8 = nanodac 9 = EPower
Transaction retries
Initiates a slave search (0 = No; 1 = Yes)
Current search status
0 = Searching
1 = Available
2 = Unavailable
3 = Unreachable 4 = Aborted
Time in milliseconds the master will wait for a response
Unit id for a slave device
float32
uint8
7b06
7b02
31494 0dp
ModbusMaster.Slave2.Data.AlarmStatus
ModbusMaster.Slave2.Data.BitPosition
ModbusMaster.Slave2.Data.ChanAlarmStatus
ModbusMaster.Slave2.Data.DataType
ModbusMaster.Slave2.Data.Descriptor
ModbusMaster.Slave2.Data.Digital
ModbusMaster.Slave2.Data.FallBackValue
ModbusMaster.Slave2.Data.FunctionCode
ModbusMaster.Slave2.Data.ModbusAddress
ModbusMaster.Slave2.Data.Mode
ModbusMaster.Slave2.Data.Number
ModbusMaster.Slave2.Data.ParameterList
ModbusMaster.Slave2.Data.Priority
ModbusMaster.Slave2.Data.PV
ModbusMaster.Slave2.Data.Scaling
ModbusMaster.Slave2.Data.Send
ModbusMaster.Slave2.Data.Set
ModbusMaster.Slave2.Data.SlaveDevice
ModbusMaster.Slave2.Data.Status
ModbusMaster.Slave2.Data.Value
ModbusMaster.Slave2.Main.CommsFailure
ModbusMaster.Slave2.Main.Descriptor
ModbusMaster.Slave2.Main.HighPriority
ModbusMaster.Slave2.Main.IPAddress
ModbusMaster.Slave2.Main.LowPriority
ModbusMaster.Slave2.Main.MaxBlockSize
ModbusMaster.Slave2.Main.MediumPriority
ModbusMaster.Slave2.Main.Online
ModbusMaster.Slave2.Main.Profile
ModbusMaster.Slave2.Main.Retries
ModbusMaster.Slave2.Main.SearchDevice
ModbusMaster.Slave2.Main.SearchResult
ModbusMaster.Slave2.Main.Timeout
ModbusMaster.Slave2.Main.UnitId
Alarm status (0 = none; 1 = one or more alarms active)

Channel alarm status (as Slave1.Data)
Data type of the data being read/written (as Slave1.Data)
Digital status (0 = Off; 1 = On)
The modbus function code (as Slave1.Data)
Auto Manual mode selectionn (0 = Auto; 1 = Manual)
Frequency at which the data is read/written (as Slave1.Data)
SSets a digital value to on (1) or off (0)
Transaction status (as for Slave 1)
1 = a device communications failure
Device descriptor
High priority rate (as for Slave 1)
Internet Protocol (IP) address for a slave device
Low priority rate (as for Slave 1)
Maximum amount of data in a single transaction
Medium priority rate (as for Slave 1)
Enables communications (0 = offline; 1 = online)
A profile that defines the device type (as Slave1.Data)
Transaction retries
Initiates a slave search (0 = No; 1 = Yes)
Current search status (as Slave1.Data)
Time in milliseconds the master will wait for a response
Unit id for a slave device
uint8
uint8
uint8
uint8
string_t
bool
float32
uint8
float32
uint8
uint8
uint8
uint8
float32
uint8
bool
bool
uint8
uint8
float32
bool
string_t
uint8
string_t
uint8
uint8
uint8
bool
uint8
uint8
bool
uint8
float32
uint8
7dba
7d96
7dda
7d80
6672
7e1a
7d89
7d7e
7d7b
7d9a
7d92
7d90
7d82
7d75
7d94
7d8c
7dfa
7d72
7d8e
7d85
7d98
6648
7b0d
68e5
7b11
7b0b
7b0f
7b01
7b13
7b05
7d6e
7d70
7b08
7b03
32186
32150
32218
32128
26226
32282
32137
32126
32123
32154
32146
32144
32130
32117
32148
32140
32250
32114
32142
32133
32152
26184
31501
26853
31505
31499
31503
31489
31507
31493
32110
32112
31496
31491
Fallback Strategy
uint8
2f66
ModbusMaster.Slave1.Main.Retries
ModbusMaster.Slave1.Main.SearchDevice
ModbusMaster.Slave1.Main.SearchResult
Mux8.1.Fallback
Resolution
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
2dp
Not applicable
0dp
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
2dp
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
2dp
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
0dp
Not applicable
0 = Clip Bad; 1 = Clip Good; 2 = Fallback Good

3 = Fallback Good; 4 = Up scale; 5 = Down scale.
Mux8.1.FallbackVal
Fallback Value
float32
2f67
12135 1dp
Mux8.1.HighLimit
High Limit
float32
2f69
12137 1dp
Mux8.1.In1
Input 1
float32
2f6b
12139 1dp
Mux8.1.In2
Input 2
float32
2f6c
12140 1dp
Mux8.1.In3
Input 3
float32
2f6d
12141 1dp
Mux8.1.In4
Input 4
float32
2f6e
12142 1dp
Mux8.1.In5
Input 5
float32
2f6f
12143 1dp
Mux8.1.In6
Input 6
float32
2f70
12144 1dp
Mux8.1.In7
Input 7
float32
2f71
12145 1dp
Mux8.1.In8
Input 8
float32
2f72
12146 1dp
Mux8.1.LowLimit
Low Limit
float32
2f6a
12138 1dp
Mux8.1.Out
Output
float32
2f73
12147 Set by Mux8.1.Resolution
Mux8.1.Resolution
Resolution
uint8
2f75
Mux8.1.Select
Input Selection Switch
uint8
2f68
bool
2f74
1 to 8 = input 1 to 8 (respectively) selected for output

Mux8.1.Status
Mux8.2.Fallback
Fallback Strategy (as Mux8.1.Fallback)
uint8
2f76
Mux8.2.FallbackVal
Fallback Value
float32
2f77
12151 1dp
Mux8.2.HighLimit
High Limit
float32
2f79
12153 1dp
Mux8.2.In1
Input 1
float32
2f7b
12155 1dp
Mux8.2.In2
Input 2
float32
2f7c
12156 1dp
Mux8.2.In3
Input 3
float32
2f7d
12157 1dp
Mux8.2.In4
Input 4
float32
2f7e
12158 1dp
Mux8.2.In5
Input 5
float32
2f7f
12159 1dp
Mux8.2.In6
Input 6
float32
2f80
12160 1dp
Mux8.2.In7
Input 7
float32
2f81
12161 1dp
Page 203
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11

Parameter path
Description
Type
Hex
Dec
Mux8.2.In8
Input 8
float32
2f82
12162 1dp
Mux8.2.LowLimit
Low Limit
float32
2f7a
12154 1dp
Mux8.2.Out
Output
float32
2f83
Mux8.2.Resolution
Resolution
uint8
2f85
Mux8.2.Select
Input Selection (as Mux8.1.Select)
uint8
2f78
Mux8.2.Status
bool
2f84
Mux8.3.Fallback
uint8
2f86
Mux8.3.FallbackVal
Fallback Value
float32
2f87
12167 1dp
Mux8.3.HighLimit
High Limit
float32
2f89
12169 1dp
Mux8.3.In1
Input 1
float32
2f8b
12171 1dp
Mux8.3.In2
Input 2
float32
2f8c
12172 1dp
Mux8.3.In3
Input 3
float32
2f8d
12173 1dp
Mux8.3.In4
Input 4
float32
2f8e
12174 1dp
Mux8.3.In5
Input 5
float32
2f8f
12175 1dp
Mux8.3.In6
Input 6
float32
2f90
12176 1dp
Mux8.3.In7
Input 7
float32
2f91
12177 1dp
Mux8.3.In8
Input 8
float32
2f92
12178 1dp
Mux8.3.LowLimit
Low Limit
float32
2f8a
12170 1dp
Mux8.3.Out
Output
float32
2f93
Mux8.3.Resolution
Resolution
uint8
2f95
Mux8.3.Select
uint8
2f88
Mux8.3.Status
bool
2f94
Mux8.4.Fallback
uint8
2f96
Mux8.4.FallbackVal
Fallback Value
float32
2f97
12183 1dp
Mux8.4.HighLimit
High Limit
float32
2f99
12185 1dp
Mux8.4.In1
Input 1
float32
2f9b
12187 1dp
Mux8.4.In2
Input 2
float32
2f9c
12188 1dp
Mux8.4.In3
Input 3
float32
2f9d
12189 1dp
Mux8.4.In4
Input 4
float32
2f9e
12190 1dp
Mux8.4.In5
Input 5
float32
2f9f
12191 1dp
Mux8.4.In6
Input 6
float32
2fa0
12192 1dp
Mux8.4.In7
Input 7
float32
2fa1
12193 1dp
Mux8.4.In8
Input 8
float32
2fa2
12194 1dp
Mux8.4.LowLimit
Low Limit
float32
2f9a
12186 1dp
Mux8.4.Out
Output
float32
2fa3
Mux8.4.Resolution
Resolution
uint8
2fa5
Mux8.4.Select
uint8
2f98
Mux8.4.Status
nano_ui.Access

Access level
0 = Logged out; 1 = Operator; 2 = Supervisor; 3 = Engineer
Password
bool
uint8
2fa4
2c00

string_t
5400
uint8
1114
4372
Not applicable
Network.Archive.CSVDateFormat
Network.Archive.CSVHeaders
Network.Archive.CSVHeadings
Network.Archive.CSVIncludeValues
Network.Archive.CSVMessages
Network.Archive.CSVTabDelimiter
Network.Archive.Destination
Network.Archive.FileFormat
Network.Archive.MediaDuration
Network.Interface.Gateway
Network.Interface.IPaddress
Network.Interface.IPType
Network.Interface.MAC
Network.Interface.SubnetMask
Network.Modbus.Address
Network.Modbus.InputTimeout
Network.Modbus.PrefMasterIP
Network.Modbus.SerialMode
Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Network.Modbus.UnitIdEnable
Rate at which to archive history files

0 = None
1 = Every minute
2 = Hourly
3 = Daily
4 = Weekly
5 = Monthly
6 = Automatic
Date/Time format (0 = Text; 1 = spreadsheet numeric)
Include header details (0 = No; 1 = Yes)
Include headings (0 = No; 1 = Yes)
Include process values (0 = No; 1 = Yes)
Include messages (0 = No; 1 = Yes)
Use Tab delimeter instead of comma (0 = No; 1 = Yes)
Archive destination. 0 = USB; 1 = FTP Server
Archive file format (0 = Binary; 1 = CSV; 2 = both)
Time in days until the USB is full
Default gateway internet protocol address
Internet Protocol (IP) address of this instrument
IP Lookup. 0 = DHCP, 1 = Fixed
Media Access Control (MAC) address of this instrument
Sub network identification mask
Modbus address for this instrument
Modbus Input inactivity timeout (in seconds)
Preferred master IP
Modbus serial port mode
Time parameter comms resolution
Unit ident enable
uint8
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
uint8
uint8
float32
string_t
string_t
uint8
string_t
string_t
uint8
int16
string_t
uint8
uint8
uint8
111d
111b
111c
1119
111a
111e
1111
1115
1118
4524
4500
1102
4548
4512
1140
1141
469c
1143
1144
1142
4381
4379
4380
4377
4378
4382
4369
4373
4376
17700
17664
4354
17736
17682
4416
4417
18076
4419
4420
4418
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
2dp
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
OR.1.Input1
OR.1.Input2
OR.1.Input3
OR.1.Input4
OR.1.Input5
OR.1.Input6
OR.1.Input7
OR Block 1, input 1.
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
2d00
2d01
2d02
2d03
2d04
2d05
2d06
11520
11521
11522
11523
11524
11525
11526
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
nano_ui.Password
Network.Archive.ArchiveRate
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
0 = off; 1 = on
0 = off; 1 = on
0 = off; 1 = on
0 = off; 1 = on
0 = off; 1 = on
0 = off; 1 = on
0 = off; 1 = on
Resolution
Page 204

Parameter path
Description
Type
Hex
Dec
Resolution
OR.1.Input8
OR.1.Output
OR.2.Input1
OR.2.Input2
OR.2.Input3
OR.2.Input4
OR.2.Input5
OR.2.Input6
OR.2.Input7
OR.2.Input8
OR.2.Output
OR.3.Input1
OR.3.Input2
OR.3.Input3
OR.3.Input4
OR.3.Input5
OR.3.Input6
OR.3.Input7
OR.3.Input8
OR.3.Output
OR.4.Input1
OR.4.Input2
OR.4.Input3
OR.4.Input4
OR.4.Input5
OR.4.Input6
OR.4.Input7
OR.4.Input8
OR.4.Output
OR.5.Input1
OR.5.Input2
OR.5.Input3
OR.5.Input4
OR.5.Input5
OR.5.Input6
OR.5.Input7
OR.5.Input8
OR.5.Output
OR.6.Input1
OR.6.Input2
OR.6.Input3
OR.6.Input4
OR.6.Input5
OR.6.Input6
OR.6.Input7
OR.6.Input8
OR.6.Output
OR.7.Input1
OR.7.Input2
OR.7.Input3
OR.7.Input4
OR.7.Input5
OR.7.Input6
OR.7.Input7
OR.7.Input8
OR.7.Output
OR.8.Input1
OR.8.Input2
OR.8.Input3
OR.8.Input4
OR.8.Input5
OR.8.Input6
OR.8.Input7
OR.8.Input8
OR.8.Output
OR.9.Input1
OR.9.Input2
OR.9.Input3
OR.9.Input4
OR.9.Input5
OR.9.Input6
OR.9.Input7
OR.9.Input8
OR.9.Output
OR.10.Input1
OR.10.Input2
OR.10.Input3
OR.10.Input4
OR.10.Input5
OR.10.Input6
OR.10.Input7
OR Block 1, input 8. 0 = off; 1 = on

OR Block 1, output. 0 = off; 1 = on
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
2d07
2d08
2d10
2d11
2d12
2d13
2d14
2d15
2d16
2d17
2d18
2d20
2d21
2d22
2d23
2d24
2d25
2d26
2d27
2d28
2d30
2d31
2d32
2d33
2d34
2d35
2d36
2d37
2d38
2d40
2d41
2d42
2d43
2d44
2d45
2d46
2d47
2d48
2d50
2d51
2d52
2d53
2d54
2d55
2d56
2d57
2d58
2d60
2d61
2d62
2d63
2d64
2d65
2d66
2d67
2d68
2d70
2d71
2d72
2d73
2d74
2d75
2d76
2d77
2d78
2d80
2d81
2d82
2d83
2d84
2d85
2d86
2d87
2d88
2d90
2d91
2d92
2d93
2d94
2d95
2d96
11527
11528
11536
11537
11538
11539
11540
11541
11542
11543
11544
11552
11553
11554
11555
11556
11557
11558
11559
11560
11568
11569
11570
11571
11572
11573
11574
11575
11576
11584
11585
11586
11587
11588
11589
11590
11591
11592
11600
11601
11602
11603
11604
11605
11606
11607
11608
11616
11617
11618
11619
11620
11621
11622
11623
11624
11632
11633
11634
11635
11636
11637
11638
11639
11640
11648
11649
11650
11651
11652
11653
11654
11655
11656
11664
11665
11666
11667
11668
11669
11670
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Page 205
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11

Parameter path
Description
OR.10.Input8
OR.10.Output
OR.11.Input1
OR.11.Input2
OR.11.Input3
OR.11.Input4
OR.11.Input5
OR.11.Input6
OR.11.Input7
OR.11.Input8
OR.11.Output
OR.12.Input1
OR.12.Input2
OR.12.Input3
OR.12.Input4
OR.12.Input5
OR.12.Input6
OR.12.Input7
OR.12.Input8
OR.12.Output

OR Block 10, output.
Program.Ch1Holdback
Program.Ch1HoldbackVal
Program.Ch1RampUnits
Program.Ch2Holdback
Program.Ch2HoldbackVal
Program.Ch2RampUnits
Program.HoldbackStyle
Program.Program
Program.RampStyle
Channel 1 holdback type

0 = Off
1 = Low
2 = High
3 = Band
Channel 1 holdback value
Channel 1 ramp units
Channel 2 holdback type (as for Program.Ch1, above)
Channel 2 ramp units
Holdback style (0 = per segment; 1 = per program)
Program
Ramp style (0 = Time; 1 = Rate)
Programmer.Features.FTPStore
Programmer.Features.Holdback
Programmer.Features.Messages
Programmer.Features.PVEvent
Programmer.Features.UserValue
Programmer.FileList.Filename1
FTP store feature enable

Holdback feature enable
Messages feature enable
PV Event feature enable
User value feature enable
Filename
Filename
Filename
Filename
Filename
Filename
Filename
Filename
Filename
Filename
Filename
Filename
Filename
Filename
Filename
Filename
Filename
Filename
Filename
Filename
Filename
Filename
Filename
Filename
Filename
Filename
Filename
Filename
Filename
Filename
Filename
Filename
Filename
Filename
Filename
Filename
Filename
Filename
Filename
Filename
Filename
Filename
Filename
Filename
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
0 = off; 1 = on
0 = off; 1 = on
0 = off; 1 = on
0 = off; 1 = on
0 = off; 1 = on
0 = off; 1 = on
0 = off; 1 = on
0 = off; 1 = on
0 = off; 1 = on
0 = off; 1 = on
0 = off; 1 = on
0 = off; 1 = on
0 = off; 1 = on
0 = off; 1 = on
0 = off; 1 = on
0 = off; 1 = on
0 = off; 1 = on
0 = off; 1 = on
0 = off; 1 = on
0 = off; 1 = on
Type
Hex
Dec
Resolution
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
2d97
2d98
2da0
2da1
2da2
2da3
2da4
2da5
2da6
2da7
2da8
2db0
2db1
2db2
2db3
2db4
2db5
2db6
2db7
2db8
11671
11672
11680
11681
11682
11683
11684
11685
11686
11687
11688
11696
11697
11698
11699
11700
11701
11702
11703
11704
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
uint8
3aa1
float32
uint8
uint8
float32
uint8
uint8
string_t
uint8
3aa3
3aa6
3aa2
3aa4
3aa7
3aa0
6abb
3aa5
15011
15014
15010
15012
15015
15008
27323
15013
Same as Programmer.SetUp.Ch1PVInput
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
3a04
3a00
3a03
3a01
3a02
7900
7901
7902
7903
7904
7905
7906
7907
7908
7909
790a
790b
790c
790d
790e
790f
7910
7911
7912
7913
7914
7915
7916
7917
7918
7919
791a
791b
791c
791d
791e
791f
7920
7921
7922
7923
7924
7925
7926
7927
7928
7929
792a
792b
14852
14848
14851
14849
14850
30976
30977
30978
30979
30980
30981
30982
30983
30984
30985
30986
30987
30988
30989
30990
30991
30992
30993
30994
30995
30996
30997
30998
30999
31000
31001
31002
31003
31004
31005
31006
31007
31008
31009
31010
31011
31012
31013
31014
31015
31016
31017
31018
31019
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Page 206

Parameter path
Description
Type
Hex
Dec
Resolution
Programmer.FileList.FilenameEntry
Programmer.FileList.Operation
Programmer.FileList.RefreshList
Programmer.FTP.IPAddress
Programmer.FTP.Password
Programmer.FTP.Username
Programmer.Run.Ch1PSP
Programmer.Run.Ch1PVEvent
Programmer.Run.Ch1Rate
Programmer.Run.Ch1Time
Programmer.Run.Ch1TSP
Programmer.Run.Ch1UserVal
Programmer.Run.Ch2PSP
Programmer.Run.Ch2PVEvent
Programmer.Run.Ch2Rate
Programmer.Run.Ch2Time
Programmer.Run.Ch2TSP
Programmer.Run.Ch2UserVal
Programmer.Run.CyclesLeft
Programmer.Run.Duration
Programmer.Run.EndOutput
Programmer.Run.Event1
Filename
Filename
Filename
Filename
Filename
Filename
Filename
Filename
Filename
Filename
Filename
Filename
Filename
Filename
Filename
Filename
Filename
Filename
Filename
Filename
Filename
Filename
Filename
Filename
Filename
Filename
Filename
Filename
Filename
Filename
Filename
Filename
Filename
Filename
Filename
Filename
Filename
Filename
Filename
Filename
Filename
Filename
Filename
Filename
Filename
Filename
Filename
Filename
Filename
Filename
Filename
Filename
Filename
Filename
Filename
Filename
Filename of the program to loaded or stored
Operation (0 = Complete; 1 = Get listing; 2 = iTools only)
Refresh list (0 = No; 1 = Yes)
Internet Protocol address
Password
Username
Channel 1 programmer set-point
Channel 1 PV event (0 = Off; 1 = On)
Channel 1 rate
Channel 1 time
Channel 1 target set-point
Channel 1 user value
Channel 2 programmer set-point
Channel 2 PV event (0 = Off; 1 = On)
Channel 2 rate
Channel 2 time
Cycles left (-1 = continuous)
Duration
End output (0 = Off; 1 = On)
Event 1 (0 = Off; 1 = On)
string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
string_t
uint8
bool
string_t
string_t
string_t
float32
bool
float32
time_t
float32
float32
float32
bool
float32
time_t
float32
float32
int16
time_t
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
792c
792d
792e
792f
7930
7931
7932
7933
7934
7935
7936
7937
7938
7939
793a
793b
793c
793d
793e
793f
7940
7941
7942
7943
7944
7945
7946
7947
7948
7949
794a
794b
794c
794d
794e
794f
7950
7951
7952
7953
7954
7955
7956
7957
7958
7959
795a
795b
795c
795d
795e
795f
7960
7961
7962
7963
6a91
3a80
3a81
698c
6a2c
6a03
3a53
3a6c
3a5e
3a5c
3a5a
3a6a
3a54
3a6d
3a5f
3a5d
3a5b
3a6b
3a60
3a59
3a61
3a62
3a63
3a64
3a65
31020
31021
31022
31023
31024
31025
31026
31027
31028
31029
31030
31031
31032
31033
31034
31035
31036
31037
31038
31039
31040
31041
31042
31043
31044
31045
31046
31047
31048
31049
31050
31051
31052
31053
31054
31055
31056
31057
31058
31059
31060
31061
31062
31063
31064
31065
31066
31067
31068
31069
31070
31071
31072
31073
31074
31075
27281
14976
14977
27020
27180
27139
14931
14956
14942
14940
14938
14954
14932
14957
14943
14941
14939
14955
14944
14937
14945
14946
14947
14948
14949
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Set by Programmer.SetUp.RateResolution
0dp
Not applicable
0dp
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Page 207
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11

Parameter path
Description
Type
Hex
Dec
Resolution
Programmer.Run.Intervention
bool
bool
bool
bool
uint8
3a66
3a67
3a68
3a69
3a6f
14950
14951
14952
14953
14959
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
uint8
time_t
time_t
time_t
string_t
uint8
3a50
3a57
3a70
3a58
6aa6
3a52
14928
14935
14960
14936
27302
14930
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
time_t
time_t
uint8
3a55
3a56
3a51
14933 Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat

bool
bool
float32
uint8
uint8
float32
string_t
float32
uint8
uint8
float32
string_t
uint8
uint8
3a42
3a44
3a26
3a46
3a2a
3a28
6a85
3a27
3a47
3a2b
3a29
6a8b
3a20
3a45
14914
14916
14886
14918
14890
14888
27269
14887
14919
14891
14889
27275
14880
14917
Programmer.SetUp.WaitAnalog1
Programmer.SetUp.WaitAnalog2
Programmer.SetUp.WaitDigital

Intervention
0 = No Program
1 = None
2 = User intervention
4 = PV Event
Mode (1 = Reset; 2 = Run; 4 = Hold)
Program time left
Program time running
Program time spent
Segment
Segment type
0 = End
1 = Ramp
2 = Dwell
3 = Step
4 = Wait
5 = Go back
Segment time left
Segment time run
Status
1 = Reset
2 = Running
4 = Holding
8 = Holdback 16 = Waiting
32 = Complete
Advance (0 = No 1 = Yes)
Amended (0 = No 1 = Yes)
Channel 1 PV input
Channel 1 Resolution
Channel 1 servo to (0 = PV; 1 = SP)
Channel 1 SP input
Channel 1 units
Channel 2 PV input
Channel 2 Resolution
Channel 2 servo to (0 = PV; 1 = SP)
Channel 2 SP input
Channel 2 units
Number of channels
File error status
0 = Busy
1 = OK
2 = Load open file
3 = Store open file 4 =Delete fail
5 = Copy fail
6 = Invalid format
7 = Invalid device 8 = Invalid version
9 = Invalid number of channels
10 = Parameter write failed
11 = Store operation failed to complete
12 = Load operation failed to complete
13 = Delete operation failed to complete
14 = Copy operation failed to complete
15 = Invalid filename entered or selected
16 = General file operation error
17 = Would result in more than the ma.x no. of program files
Hold (0 = No 1 = Yes)
Maximum events
Operation
uint8
1 = Select
2 =Load
4 = Store
8 = Delete
16 = Delete All
32=Copy
64 = Copy All
Power fail action (0 = ramp back; 1 = Reset; 2 = Continue)
Program edit access level
0 = Logged out 1 = Operator
2 = Supervisor 3 = Engineer
Program mode access level (as Program Edit Access, above)
Program store access level (as Program Edit Access, above)
Rate resolution
Reset (0 = No 1 = Yes)
Reset channel 1 user value
Reset channel 2 user value
Reset event 1 (0 = Off, 1 = On)
Run (0 = No 1 = Yes)
Run Hold (0 = No 1 = Yes)
Run Rese (0 = No 1 = Yes)t
Status
0 = Inactive
1 = Success
2 = Failed
3 = Loading
4 = Storing
5 = Deleting
6 = Copying
Wait analog input 1
Wait analog input 2
Wait Digital (0 = Off 1 = On)
RealTimeEvent.1.Duration
Sets the duration for the event to remain On
Programmer.Run.Mode
Programmer.Run.ProgTimeLeft
Programmer.Run.ProgTimeRunning
Programmer.Run.ProgTimeSpent
Programmer.Run.Segment
Programmer.Run.SegmentType
Programmer.Run.SegTimeLeft
Programmer.Run.SegTimeRun
Programmer.Run.Status
Programmer.SetUp.Advance
Programmer.SetUp.Amended
Programmer.SetUp.Ch1PVInput
Programmer.SetUp.Ch1Resolution
Programmer.SetUp.Ch1ServoTo
Programmer.SetUp.Ch1SPInput
Programmer.SetUp.Ch1Units
Programmer.SetUp.Ch2PVInput
Programmer.SetUp.Ch2Resolution
Programmer.SetUp.Ch2ServoTo
Programmer.SetUp.Ch2SPInput
Programmer.SetUp.Ch2Units
Programmer.SetUp.Channels
Programmer.SetUp.FileErrorStatus
Programmer.SetUp.Hold
Programmer.SetUp.MaxEvents
Programmer.SetUp.Operation
Programmer.SetUp.PowerFailAction
Programmer.SetUp.ProgEditAccess
Programmer.SetUp.ProgModeAccess
Programmer.SetUp.ProgStoreAccess
Programmer.SetUp.RateResolution
Programmer.SetUp.Reset
Programmer.SetUp.ResetEvent1
Programmer.SetUp.Run
Programmer.SetUp.RunHold
Programmer.SetUp.RunReset
Programmer.SetUp.Status
Page 208
Not applicable
Not applicable
Set by Programmer.SetUp.Ch1Resolution
Not applicable
Not applicable
0dp
Not applicable
Set by Programmer.SetUp.Ch2Resolution
Not applicable
Not applicable
0dp
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
bool
uint8
3a40
3a39
3a2d

14912
Not applicable
uint8
uint8
3a2c
3a22

uint8
uint8
uint8
bool
float32
float32
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
uint8
3a21
3a23
3a24
3a3a
3a36
3a37
3a2e
3a2f
3a30
3a31
3a32
3a33
3a34
3a35
3a38
3a3c
3a3b
3a41
14881
14883
14884
14906
14902
14903
14894
14895
14896
14897
14898
14899
14900
14901
14904
14908
14907
14913
float32
float32
bool
3a3e
3a3f
3a3d
14910 0dp
14911 0dp
time_t
30e6
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
1dp
1dp
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11

Parameter path
Description
Type
Hex
Dec
RealTimeEvent.1.OffDate
RealTimeEvent.1.OffDay
Sets the date in the month that the event is to switch off
Sets the day the the event is to switch Off
0 = Sunday
1 = Monday
2 = Tuesday
3 = Wednesday 4 = Thursday
5 = Friday
6 = Saturday
7 = Monday to Friday
8 = Saturday to Sunday
9 = Every day
The month number when the event is to switch off
Sets the time that the event is to switch Off
0 = Duration; 1 = Time
Sets the date in the month that the event is to switch on
Sets the day on which event is to switch on (as OffDay, above)
The month number when the event is to switch on
Sets the time that the event is to switch On
The output from the real time event (0 = Off; 1 = On)
Selects the type of Real Time Event
0 = Off
1 = Time and Day 2 = Time and Date
uint8
uint8
30e8
30e9

uint8
time_t
uint8
uint8
uint8
uint8
time_t
bool
uint8
30e7
30ea
30e5
30e2
30e3
30e1
30e4
30eb
30e0
12519
12522
12517
12514
12515
12513
12516
12523
12512
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
RealTimeEvent.1.OffMonth
RealTimeEvent.1.OffTime
RealTimeEvent.1.OffType
RealTimeEvent.1.OnDate
RealTimeEvent.1.OnDay
RealTimeEvent.1.OnMonth
RealTimeEvent.1.OnTime
RealTimeEvent.1.Output
RealTimeEvent.1.Type
Resolution
RealTimeEvent.2.Duration
RealTimeEvent.2.OffDate
RealTimeEvent.2.OffDay
RealTimeEvent.2.OffMonth
RealTimeEvent.2.OffTime
RealTimeEvent.2.OffType
RealTimeEvent.2.OnDate
RealTimeEvent.2.OnDay
RealTimeEvent.2.OnMonth
RealTimeEvent.2.OnTime
RealTimeEvent.2.Output
RealTimeEvent.2.Type
Sets the duration for the event to remain On

Sets the date in the month that the event is to switch off
Sets the day the the event is to switch Off (as for Event 1)
Sets the month that the event is to switch off
Sets the time that the event is to switch Off
Selects the type that will switch off the event (as for Event 1)
Sets the date in the month that the event is to switch on
Sets the day the event is to switch on (as for Event 1)
Sets the month that the event is to switch on
Sets the time that the event is to switch On
The output from the real time event (0 = Off; 1 = On)
Selects the type of Real Time Event
0 = Off
1 = Time and Day 2 = Time and Date
time_t
uint8
uint8
uint8
time_t
uint8
uint8
uint8
uint8
time_t
bool
uint8
30f6
30f8
30f9
30f7
30fa
30f5
30f2
30f3
30f1
30f4
30fb
30f0
12534
12536
12537
12535
12538
12533
12530
12531
12529
12532
12539
12528
Segment.1.Ch1Holdback
uint8
3ac9
float32
uint8
3acb
3ad4
15051 Same as Programmer.SetUp.Ch1PVInput

bool
float32
float32
time_t
float32
float32
uint8
3ae2
3ad6
3ac6
3ac4
3ac2
3ad8
3ace
15074
15062
15046
15044
15042
15064
15054
Not applicable
Same as Programmer.SetUp.ResetCh1UserVal
Not applicable
Segment.1.Ch1WaitVal
Segment.1.Ch2HoldbackVal
Segment.1.Ch2PVEvent
Segment.1.Ch2PVEventUse
Segment.1.Ch2PVEventVal
Segment.1.Ch2Rate

0 = Off
1 = Low
2= High 3 = Band
Channel 1 PV event
0 = Off
1 = Absolute High 2 = Absolute Low
3 = Deviation High 4 = Deviation Low 5 = Deviation Band
Channel 1 PV event use (0 = Trigger; 1 = Alarm)
Channel 1 PV event value
Channel 1 rate
Channel 1 time
Channel 1 Wait (Analogue 1 criterion)
1= Abs high 2 = Abs low 3 = Dev high 4 = Dev Low
Channel 1 wait value
Channel 2 holdback type (as for Ch1Holdback, above)
Channel 2 PV event (as for Ch1PVEvent, above)
Channel 2 PV event use (as for Ch1PVEventUse, above)
Channel 2 rate
float32
uint8
float32
uint8
bool
float32
float32
3ad0
3aca
3acc
3ad5
3ae3
3ad7
3ac7
15056
15050
15052
15061
15075
15063
15047
Segment.1.Ch2Time
Segment.1.Ch2TSP
Segment.1.Ch2UserVal
Channel 2 time
time_t
float32
float32
3ac5
3ac3
3ad9
15045
15043
15065
Segment.1.Ch2Wait
Segment.1.Cycles
Segment.1.Duration
Segment.1.EndType
Segment.1.Event1
Segment.1.Event2
Segment.1.Event3
Segment.1.Event4
Segment.1.Event5
Segment.1.Event6
Segment.1.Event7
Segment.1.Event8
Segment.1.GoBackTo
Segment.1.SegmentName
Segment.1.Type
Channel 2 Wait (analogue 2 criterion; as for Ch1Wait, above)

Cycles (0 = Continuous)
Duration
End type (0 = Dwell; 1 = Reset)
Go back to
Segment name
Type
0 = End
1 = Ramp
2 = Dwell
3 = Step
4 = Wait
5 = GoBack
Wait for
0 = Digital High
1 = Wait analogue 1
2 = Wait analogue 2 3 = Wait analogue 1 and analogue 2
uint8
float32
int16
time_t
uint8
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
uint8
string_t
uint8
3acf
3ad1
3ad3
3ac1
3ac8
3ada
3adb
3adc
3add
3ade
3adf
3ae0
3ae1
3ad2
6ad0
3ac0
15055
15057
15059
15041
15048
15066
15067
15068
15069
15070
15071
15072
15073
15058
27344
15040
Same as Programmer.SetUp.PVWait1
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
uint8
3acd
uint8
3af9
Segment.1.Ch1Rate
Segment.1.Ch1Time
Segment.1.Ch1TSP
Segment.1.Ch1Wait
Segment.1.WaitFor
Page 209
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11

Parameter path
Description
Type
Hex
Dec
Resolution
Segment.2.Ch1Rate
Segment.2.Ch1Time
Segment.2.Ch1TSP
Segment.2.Ch1Wait
Segment.2.Ch2Rate
Segment.2.Ch2Time
Segment.2.Ch2TSP
Segment.2.Ch2Wait
Segment.2.Cycles
Segment.2.Duration
Segment.2.EndType
Segment.2.Event1
Segment.2.Event2
Segment.2.Event3
Segment.2.Event4
Segment.2.Event5
Segment.2.Event6
Segment.2.Event7
Segment.2.Event8
Segment.2.GoBackTo
Segment.2.Type
Segment.2.WaitFor

Channel 1 PV event
Channel 1 PV event use
Channel 1 rate
Channel 1 time
Channel 1 Wait
Channel 2 PV event
Channel 2 rate
Channel 2 time
Channel 2 Wait
Cycles
Duration
End type
Event 1
Event 2
Event 3
Event 4
Event 5
Event 6
Event 7
Event 8
Go back to
Segment name
Type
Wait for
float32
uint8
bool
float32
float32
time_t
float32
float32
uint8
float32
uint8
float32
uint8
bool
float32
float32
time_t
float32
float32
uint8
float32
int16
time_t
uint8
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
uint8
string_t
uint8
uint8
3afb
3b04
3b12
3b06
3af6
3af4
3af2
3b08
3afe
3b00
3afa
3afc
3b05
3b13
3b07
3af7
3af5
3af3
3b09
3aff
3b01
3b03
3af1
3af8
3b0a
3b0b
3b0c
3b0d
3b0e
3b0f
3b10
3b11
3b02
6ae5
3af0
3afd
15099
15108
15122
15110
15094
15092
15090
15112
15102
15104
15098
15100
15109
15123
15111
15095
15093
15091
15113
15103
15105
15107
15089
15096
15114
15115
15116
15117
15118
15119
15120
15121
15106
27365
15088
15101
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Segment.3.Ch1Rate
Segment.3.Ch1Time
Segment.3.Ch1TSP
Segment.3.Ch1Wait
Segment.3.Ch2Rate
Segment.3.Ch2Time
Segment.3.Ch2TSP
Segment.3.Ch2Wait
Segment.3.Cycles
Segment.3.Duration
Segment.3.EndType
Segment.3.Event1
Segment.3.Event2
Segment.3.Event3
Segment.3.Event4
Segment.3.Event5
Segment.3.Event6
Segment.3.Event7
Segment.3.Event8
Segment.3.GoBackTo
Segment.3.Type
Segment.3.WaitFor

Channel 1 PV event
Channel 1 rate
Channel 1 time
Channel 1 Wait
Channel 2 PV event
Channel 2 rate
Channel 2 time
Channel 2 Wait
Cycles
Duration
End type
Event 1
Event 2
Event 3
Event 4
Event 5
Event 6
Event 7
Event 8
Go back to
Segment name
Type
Wait for
uint8
float32
uint8
bool
float32
float32
time_t
float32
float32
uint8
float32
uint8
float32
uint8
bool
float32
float32
time_t
float32
float32
uint8
float32
int16
time_t
uint8
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
uint8
string_t
uint8
uint8
3b29
3b2b
3b34
3b42
3b36
3b26
3b24
3b22
3b38
3b2e
3b30
3b2a
3b2c
3b35
3b43
3b37
3b27
3b25
3b23
3b39
3b2f
3b31
3b33
3b21
3b28
3b3a
3b3b
3b3c
3b3d
3b3e
3b3f
3b40
3b41
3b32
6afa
3b20
3b2d
15145
15147
15156
15170
15158
15142
15140
15138
15160
15150
15152
15146
15148
15157
15171
15159
15143
15141
15139
15161
15151
15153
15155
15137
15144
15162
15163
15164
15165
15166
15167
15168
15169
15154
27386
15136
15149
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Segment.4.Ch1Rate

Channel 1 PV event
Channel 1 rate
uint8
float32
uint8
bool
float32
float32
3b59
3b5b
3b64
3b72
3b66
3b56
15193
15195
15204
15218
15206
15190
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
For parameter
values and settings
(enumerations),
see Segment 1
Page 210

Parameter path
Description
Type
Hex
Dec
Resolution
Segment.4.Ch1Time
Segment.4.Ch1TSP
Segment.4.Ch1Wait
Segment.4.Ch2Rate
Segment.4.Ch2Time
Segment.4.Ch2TSP
Segment.4.Ch2Wait
Segment.4.Cycles
Segment.4.Duration
Segment.4.EndType
Segment.4.Event1
Segment.4.Event2
Segment.4.Event3
Segment.4.Event4
Segment.4.Event5
Segment.4.Event6
Segment.4.Event7
Segment.4.Event8
Segment.4.GoBackTo
Segment.4.Type
Segment.4.WaitFor
Channel 1 time
Channel 1 Wait
Channel 2 PV event
Channel 2 rate
Channel 2 time
Channel 2 Wait
Cycles
Duration
End type
Event 1
Event 2
Event 3
Event 4
Event 5
Event 6
Event 7
Event 8
Go back to
Segment name
Type
Wait for
time_t
float32
float32
uint8
float32
uint8
float32
uint8
bool
float32
float32
time_t
float32
float32
uint8
float32
int16
time_t
uint8
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
uint8
string_t
uint8
uint8
3b54
3b52
3b68
3b5e
3b60
3b5a
3b5c
3b65
3b73
3b67
3b57
3b55
3b53
3b69
3b5f
3b61
3b63
3b51
3b58
3b6a
3b6b
3b6c
3b6d
3b6e
3b6f
3b70
3b71
3b62
6b0f
3b50
3b5d
15188
15186
15208
15198
15200
15194
15196
15205
15219
15207
15191
15189
15187
15209
15199
15201
15203
15185
15192
15210
15211
15212
15213
15214
15215
15216
15217
15202
27407
15184
15197
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Segment.5.Ch1Rate
Segment.5.Ch1Time
Segment.5.Ch1TSP
Segment.5.Ch1Wait
Segment.5.Ch2Rate
Segment.5.Ch2Time
Segment.5.Ch2TSP
Segment.5.Ch2Wait
Segment.5.Cycles
Segment.5.Duration
Segment.5.EndType
Segment.5.Event1
Segment.5.Event2
Segment.5.Event3
Segment.5.Event4
Segment.5.Event5
Segment.5.Event6
Segment.5.Event7
Segment.5.Event8
Segment.5.GoBackTo
Segment.5.Type
Segment.5.WaitFor

Channel 1 PV event
Channel 1 rate
Channel 1 time
Channel 1 Wait
Channel 2 PV event
Channel 2 rate
Channel 2 time
Channel 2 Wait
Cycles
Duration
End type
Event 1
Event 2
Event 3
Event 4
Event 5
Event 6
Event 7
Event 8
Go back to
Segment name
Type
Wait for
uint8
float32
uint8
bool
float32
float32
time_t
float32
float32
uint8
float32
uint8
float32
uint8
bool
float32
float32
time_t
float32
float32
uint8
float32
int16
time_t
uint8
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
uint8
string_t
uint8
uint8
3b89
3b8b
3b94
3ba2
3b96
3b86
3b84
3b82
3b98
3b8e
3b90
3b8a
3b8c
3b95
3ba3
3b97
3b87
3b85
3b83
3b99
3b8f
3b91
3b93
3b81
3b88
3b9a
3b9b
3b9c
3b9d
3b9e
3b9f
3ba0
3ba1
3b92
6b24
3b80
3b8d
15241
15243
15252
15266
15254
15238
15236
15234
15256
15246
15248
15242
15244
15253
15267
15255
15239
15237
15235
15257
15247
15249
15251
15233
15240
15258
15259
15260
15261
15262
15263
15264
15265
15250
27428
15232
15245
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Segment.6.Ch1Rate
Segment.6.Ch1Time
Segment.6.Ch1TSP
Segment.6.Ch1Wait

Channel 1 PV event
Channel 1 rate
Channel 1 time
Channel 1 Wait
uint8
float32
uint8
bool
float32
float32
time_t
float32
float32
uint8
float32
3bb9
3bbb
3bc4
3bd2
3bc6
3bb6
3bb4
3bb2
3bc8
3bbe
3bc0
15289
15291
15300
15314
15302
15286
15284
15282
15304
15294
15296
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Page 211
For parameter
values and settings
(enumerations),
see Segment 1
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11

Parameter path
Description
Type
Hex
Dec
Resolution
Segment.6.Ch2Rate
Segment.6.Ch2Time
Segment.6.Ch2TSP
Segment.6.Ch2Wait
Segment.6.Cycles
Segment.6.Duration
Segment.6.EndType
Segment.6.Event1
Segment.6.Event2
Segment.6.Event3
Segment.6.Event4
Segment.6.Event5
Segment.6.Event6
Segment.6.Event7
Segment.6.Event8
Segment.6.GoBackTo
Segment.6.Type
Segment.6.WaitFor

Channel 2 PV event
Channel 2 rate
Channel 2 time
Channel 2 Wait
Cycles
Duration
End type
Event 1
Event 2
Event 3
Event 4
Event 5
Event 6
Event 7
Event 8
Go back to
Segment name
Type
Wait for
uint8
float32
uint8
bool
float32
float32
time_t
float32
float32
uint8
float32
int16
time_t
uint8
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
uint8
string_t
uint8
uint8
3bba
3bbc
3bc5
3bd3
3bc7
3bb7
3bb5
3bb3
3bc9
3bbf
3bc1
3bc3
3bb1
3bb8
3bca
3bcb
3bcc
3bcd
3bce
3bcf
3bd0
3bd1
3bc2
6b39
3bb0
3bbd
15290
15292
15301
15315
15303
15287
15285
15283
15305
15295
15297
15299
15281
15288
15306
15307
15308
15309
15310
15311
15312
15313
15298
27449
15280
15293
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Segment.7.Ch1Rate
Segment.7.Ch1Time
Segment.7.Ch1TSP
Segment.7.Ch1Wait
Segment.7.Ch2Rate
Segment.7.Ch2Time
Segment.7.Ch2TSP
Segment.7.Ch2Wait
Segment.7.Cycles
Segment.7.Duration
Segment.7.EndType
Segment.7.Event1
Segment.7.Event2
Segment.7.Event3
Segment.7.Event4
Segment.7.Event5
Segment.7.Event6
Segment.7.Event7
Segment.7.Event8
Segment.7.GoBackTo
Segment.7.Type
Segment.7.WaitFor

Channel 1 PV event
Channel 1 rate
Channel 1 time
Channel 1 Wait
Channel 2 PV event
Channel 2 rate
Channel 2 time
Channel 2 Wait
Cycles
Duration
End type
Event 1
Event 2
Event 3
Event 4
Event 5
Event 6
Event 7
Event 8
Go back to
Segment name
Type
Wait for
uint8
float32
uint8
bool
float32
float32
time_t
float32
float32
uint8
float32
uint8
float32
uint8
bool
float32
float32
time_t
float32
float32
uint8
float32
int16
time_t
uint8
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
uint8
string_t
uint8
uint8
3be9
3beb
3bf4
3c02
3bf6
3be6
3be4
3be2
3bf8
3bee
3bf0
3bea
3bec
3bf5
3c03
3bf7
3be7
3be5
3be3
3bf9
3bef
3bf1
3bf3
3be1
3be8
3bfa
3bfb
3bfc
3bfd
3bfe
3bff
3c00
3c01
3bf2
6b4e
3be0
3bed
15337
15339
15348
15362
15350
15334
15332
15330
15352
15342
15344
15338
15340
15349
15363
15351
15335
15333
15331
15353
15343
15345
15347
15329
15336
15354
15355
15356
15357
15358
15359
15360
15361
15346
27470
15328
15341
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Segment.8.Ch1Rate
Segment.8.Ch1Time
Segment.8.Ch1TSP
Segment.8.Ch1Wait

Channel 1 PV event
Channel 1 rate
Channel 1 time
Channel 1 Wait
Channel 2 PV event
uint8
float32
uint8
bool
float32
float32
time_t
float32
float32
uint8
float32
uint8
float32
uint8
bool
float32
3c19
3c1b
3c24
3c32
3c26
3c16
3c14
3c12
3c28
3c1e
3c20
3c1a
3c1c
3c25
3c33
3c27
15385
15387
15396
15410
15398
15382
15380
15378
15400
15390
15392
15386
15388
15397
15411
15399
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
For parameter
values and settings
(enumerations),
see Segment 1
Page 212

Parameter path
Description
Type
Hex
Dec
Resolution
Segment.8.Ch2Rate
Segment.8.Ch2Time
Segment.8.Ch2TSP
Segment.8.Ch2Wait
Segment.8.Cycles
Segment.8.Duration
Segment.8.EndType
Segment.8.Event1
Segment.8.Event2
Segment.8.Event3
Segment.8.Event4
Segment.8.Event5
Segment.8.Event6
Segment.8.Event7
Segment.8.Event8
Segment.8.GoBackTo
Segment.8.Type
Segment.8.WaitFor
Channel 2 rate
Channel 2 time
Channel 2 Wait
Cycles
Duration
End type
Event 1
Event 2
Event 3
Event 4
Event 5
Event 6
Event 7
Event 8
Go back to
Segment name
Type
Wait for
float32
time_t
float32
float32
uint8
float32
int16
time_t
uint8
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
uint8
string_t
uint8
uint8
3c17
3c15
3c13
3c29
3c1f
3c21
3c23
3c11
3c18
3c2a
3c2b
3c2c
3c2d
3c2e
3c2f
3c30
3c31
3c22
6b63
3c10
3c1d
15383
15381
15379
15401
15391
15393
15395
15377
15384
15402
15403
15404
15405
15406
15407
15408
15409
15394
27491
15376
15389
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Segment.9.Ch1Rate
Segment.9.Ch1Time
Segment.9.Ch1TSP
Segment.9.Ch1Wait
Segment.9.Ch2Rate
Segment.9.Ch2Time
Segment.9.Ch2TSP
Segment.9.Ch2Wait
Segment.9.Cycles
Segment.9.Duration
Segment.9.EndType
Segment.9.Event1
Segment.9.Event2
Segment.9.Event3
Segment.9.Event4
Segment.9.Event5
Segment.9.Event6
Segment.9.Event7
Segment.9.Event8
Segment.9.GoBackTo
Segment.9.Type
Segment.9.WaitFor

Channel 1 PV event
Channel 1 rate
Channel 1 time
Channel 1 Wait
Channel 2 PV event
Channel 2 rate
Channel 2 time
Channel 2 Wait
Cycles
Duration
End type
Event 1
Event 2
Event 3
Event 4
Event 5
Event 6
Event 7
Event 8
Go back to
Segment name
Type
Wait for
uint8
float32
uint8
bool
float32
float32
time_t
float32
float32
uint8
float32
uint8
float32
uint8
bool
float32
float32
time_t
float32
float32
uint8
float32
int16
time_t
uint8
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
uint8
string_t
uint8
uint8
3c49
3c4b
3c54
3c62
3c56
3c46
3c44
3c42
3c58
3c4e
3c50
3c4a
3c4c
3c55
3c63
3c57
3c47
3c45
3c43
3c59
3c4f
3c51
3c53
3c41
3c48
3c5a
3c5b
3c5c
3c5d
3c5e
3c5f
3c60
3c61
3c52
6b78
3c40
3c4d
15433
15435
15444
15458
15446
15430
15428
15426
15448
15438
15440
15434
15436
15445
15459
15447
15431
15429
15427
15449
15439
15441
15443
15425
15432
15450
15451
15452
15453
15454
15455
15456
15457
15442
27512
15424
15437
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Segment.10.Ch1Rate
Segment.10.Ch1Time
Segment.10.Ch1TSP
Segment.10.Ch1Wait
Segment.10.Ch2Rate
Segment.10.Ch2Time
Segment.10.Ch2TSP
Segment.10.Ch2Wait

Channel 1 PV event
Channel 1 rate
Channel 1 time
Channel 1 Wait
Channel 2 PV event
Channel 2 rate
Channel 2 time
Channel 2 Wait
uint8
float32
uint8
bool
float32
float32
time_t
float32
float32
uint8
float32
uint8
float32
uint8
bool
float32
float32
time_t
float32
float32
uint8
3c79
3c7b
3c84
3c92
3c86
3c76
3c74
3c72
3c88
3c7e
3c80
3c7a
3c7c
3c85
3c93
3c87
3c77
3c75
3c73
3c89
3c7f
15481
15483
15492
15506
15494
15478
15476
15474
15496
15486
15488
15482
15484
15493
15507
15495
15479
15477
15475
15497
15487
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Page 213
For parameter
values and settings
(enumerations),
see Segment 1
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11

Parameter path
Description
Type
Hex
Dec
Resolution
Segment.10.Cycles
Segment.10.Duration
Segment.10.EndType
Segment.10.Event1
Segment.10.Event2
Segment.10.Event3
Segment.10.Event4
Segment.10.Event5
Segment.10.Event6
Segment.10.Event7
Segment.10.Event8
Segment.10.GoBackTo
Segment.10.Type
Segment.10.WaitFor

Cycles
Duration
End type
Event 1
Event 2
Event 3
Event 4
Event 5
Event 6
Event 7
Event 8
Go back to
Segment name
Type
Wait for
float32
int16
time_t
uint8
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
uint8
string_t
uint8
uint8
3c81
3c83
3c71
3c78
3c8a
3c8b
3c8c
3c8d
3c8e
3c8f
3c90
3c91
3c82
6b8d
3c70
3c7d
15489
15491
15473
15480
15498
15499
15500
15501
15502
15503
15504
15505
15490
27533
15472
15485
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Segment.11.Ch1Rate
Segment.11.Ch1Time
Segment.11.Ch1TSP
Segment.11.Ch1Wait
Segment.11.Ch2Rate
Segment.11.Ch2Time
Segment.11.Ch2TSP
Segment.11.Ch2Wait
Segment.11.Cycles
Segment.11.Duration
Segment.11.EndType
Segment.11.Event1
Segment.11.Event2
Segment.11.Event3
Segment.11.Event4
Segment.11.Event5
Segment.11.Event6
Segment.11.Event7
Segment.11.Event8
Segment.11.GoBackTo
Segment.11.Type
Segment.11.WaitFor

Channel 1 PV event
Channel 1 rate
Channel 1 time
Channel 1 Wait
Channel 2 PV event
Channel 2 rate
Channel 2 time
Channel 2 Wait
Cycles
Duration
End type
Event 1
Event 2
Event 3
Event 4
Event 5
Event 6
Event 7
Event 8
Go back to
Segment name
Type
Wait for
uint8
float32
uint8
bool
float32
float32
time_t
float32
float32
uint8
float32
uint8
float32
uint8
bool
float32
float32
time_t
float32
float32
uint8
float32
int16
time_t
uint8
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
uint8
string_t
uint8
uint8
3ca9
3cab
3cb4
3cc2
3cb6
3ca6
3ca4
3ca2
3cb8
3cae
3cb0
3caa
3cac
3cb5
3cc3
3cb7
3ca7
3ca5
3ca3
3cb9
3caf
3cb1
3cb3
3ca1
3ca8
3cba
3cbb
3cbc
3cbd
3cbe
3cbf
3cc0
3cc1
3cb2
6ba2
3ca0
3cad
15529
15531
15540
15554
15542
15526
15524
15522
15544
15534
15536
15530
15532
15541
15555
15543
15527
15525
15523
15545
15535
15537
15539
15521
15528
15546
15547
15548
15549
15550
15551
15552
15553
15538
27554
15520
15533
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Segment.12.Ch1Rate
Segment.12.Ch1Time
Segment.12.Ch1TSP
Segment.12.Ch1Wait
Segment.12.Ch2Rate
Segment.12.Ch2Time
Segment.12.Ch2TSP
Segment.12.Ch2Wait
Segment.12.Cycles
Segment.12.Duration
Segment.12.EndType
Segment.12.Event1

Channel 1 PV event
Channel 1 rate
Channel 1 time
Channel 1 Wait
Channel 2 PV event
Channel 2 rate
Channel 2 time
Channel 2 Wait
Cycles
Duration
End type
Event 1
uint8
float32
uint8
bool
float32
float32
time_t
float32
float32
uint8
float32
uint8
float32
uint8
bool
float32
float32
time_t
float32
float32
uint8
float32
int16
time_t
uint8
bool
3cd9
3cdb
3ce4
3cf2
3ce6
3cd6
3cd4
3cd2
3ce8
3cde
3ce0
3cda
3cdc
3ce5
3cf3
3ce7
3cd7
3cd5
3cd3
3ce9
3cdf
3ce1
3ce3
3cd1
3cd8
3cea
15577
15579
15588
15602
15590
15574
15572
15570
15592
15582
15584
15578
15580
15589
15603
15591
15575
15573
15571
15593
15583
15585
15587
15569
15576
15594
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
For parameter
values and settings
(enumerations),
see Segment 1
Page 214

Parameter path
Description
Type
Hex
Dec
Resolution
Segment.12.Event2
Segment.12.Event3
Segment.12.Event4
Segment.12.Event5
Segment.12.Event6
Segment.12.Event7
Segment.12.Event8
Segment.12.GoBackTo
Segment.12.Type
Segment.12.WaitFor
Event 2
Event 3
Event 4
Event 5
Event 6
Event 7
Event 8
Go back to
Segment name
Type
Wait for
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
uint8
string_t
uint8
uint8
3ceb
3cec
3ced
3cee
3cef
3cf0
3cf1
3ce2
6bb7
3cd0
3cdd
15595
15596
15597
15598
15599
15600
15601
15586
27575
15568
15581
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Segment.13.Ch1Rate
Segment.13.Ch1Time
Segment.13.Ch1TSP
Segment.13.Ch1Wait
Segment.13.Ch2Rate
Segment.13.Ch2Time
Segment.13.Ch2TSP
Segment.13.Ch2Wait
Segment.13.Cycles
Segment.13.Duration
Segment.13.EndType
Segment.13.Event1
Segment.13.Event2
Segment.13.Event3
Segment.13.Event4
Segment.13.Event5
Segment.13.Event6
Segment.13.Event7
Segment.13.Event8
Segment.13.GoBackTo
Segment.13.Type
Segment.13.WaitFor

Channel 1 PV event
Channel 1 rate
Channel 1 time
Channel 1 Wait
Channel 2 PV event
Channel 2 rate
Channel 2 time
Channel 2 Wait
Cycles
Duration
End type
Event 1
Event 2
Event 3
Event 4
Event 5
Event 6
Event 7
Event 8
Go back to
Segment name
Type
Wait for
uint8
float32
uint8
bool
float32
float32
time_t
float32
float32
uint8
float32
uint8
float32
uint8
bool
float32
float32
time_t
float32
float32
uint8
float32
int16
time_t
uint8
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
uint8
string_t
uint8
uint8
3d09
3d0b
3d14
3d22
3d16
3d06
3d04
3d02
3d18
3d0e
3d10
3d0a
3d0c
3d15
3d23
3d17
3d07
3d05
3d03
3d19
3d0f
3d11
3d13
3d01
3d08
3d1a
3d1b
3d1c
3d1d
3d1e
3d1f
3d20
3d21
3d12
6bcc
3d00
3d0d
15625
15627
15636
15650
15638
15622
15620
15618
15640
15630
15632
15626
15628
15637
15651
15639
15623
15621
15619
15641
15631
15633
15635
15617
15624
15642
15643
15644
15645
15646
15647
15648
15649
15634
27596
15616
15629
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Segment.14.Ch1Rate
Segment.14.Ch1Time
Segment.14.Ch1TSP
Segment.14.Ch1Wait
Segment.14.Ch2Rate
Segment.14.Ch2Time
Segment.14.Ch2TSP
Segment.14.Ch2Wait
Segment.14.Cycles
Segment.14.Duration
Segment.14.EndType
Segment.14.Event1
Segment.14.Event2
Segment.14.Event3
Segment.14.Event4
Segment.14.Event5
Segment.14.Event6

Channel 1 PV event
Channel 1 rate
Channel 1 time
Channel 1 Wait
Channel 2 PV event
Channel 2 rate
Channel 2 time
Channel 2 Wait
Cycles
Duration
End type
Event 1
Event 2
Event 3
Event 4
Event 5
Event 6
uint8
float32
uint8
bool
float32
float32
time_t
float32
float32
uint8
float32
uint8
float32
uint8
bool
float32
float32
time_t
float32
float32
uint8
float32
int16
time_t
uint8
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
3d39
3d3b
3d44
3d52
3d46
3d36
3d34
3d32
3d48
3d3e
3d40
3d3a
3d3c
3d45
3d53
3d47
3d37
3d35
3d33
3d49
3d3f
3d41
3d43
3d31
3d38
3d4a
3d4b
3d4c
3d4d
3d4e
3d4f
15673
15675
15684
15698
15686
15670
15668
15666
15688
15678
15680
15674
15676
15685
15699
15687
15671
15669
15667
15689
15679
15681
15683
15665
15672
15690
15691
15692
15693
15694
15695
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Page 215
For parameter
values and settings
(enumerations),
see Segment 1
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11

Parameter path
Description
Type
Hex
Dec
Resolution
Segment.14.Event7
Segment.14.Event8
Segment.14.GoBackTo
Segment.14.Type
Segment.14.WaitFor
Event 7
Event 8
Go back to
Segment name
Type
Wait for
bool
bool
uint8
string_t
uint8
uint8
3d50
3d51
3d42
6be1
3d30
3d3d
15696
15697
15682
27617
15664
15677
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Segment.15.Ch1Rate
Segment.15.Ch1Time
Segment.15.Ch1TSP
Segment.15.Ch1Wait
Segment.15.Ch2Rate
Segment.15.Ch2Time
Segment.15.Ch2TSP
Segment.15.Ch2Wait
Segment.15.Cycles
Segment.15.Duration
Segment.15.EndType
Segment.15.Event1
Segment.15.Event2
Segment.15.Event3
Segment.15.Event4
Segment.15.Event5
Segment.15.Event6
Segment.15.Event7
Segment.15.Event8
Segment.15.GoBackTo
Segment.15.Type
Segment.15.WaitFor

Channel 1 PV event
Channel 1 rate
Channel 1 time
Channel 1 Wait
Channel 2 PV event
Channel 2 rate
Channel 2 time
Channel 2 Wait
Cycles
Duration
End type
Event 1
Event 2
Event 3
Event 4
Event 5
Event 6
Event 7
Event 8
Go back to
Segment name
Type
Wait for
uint8
float32
uint8
bool
float32
float32
time_t
float32
float32
uint8
float32
uint8
float32
uint8
bool
float32
float32
time_t
float32
float32
uint8
float32
int16
time_t
uint8
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
uint8
string_t
uint8
uint8
3d69
3d6b
3d74
3d82
3d76
3d66
3d64
3d62
3d78
3d6e
3d70
3d6a
3d6c
3d75
3d83
3d77
3d67
3d65
3d63
3d79
3d6f
3d71
3d73
3d61
3d68
3d7a
3d7b
3d7c
3d7d
3d7e
3d7f
3d80
3d81
3d72
6bf6
3d60
3d6d
15721
15723
15732
15746
15734
15718
15716
15714
15736
15726
15728
15722
15724
15733
15747
15735
15719
15717
15715
15737
15727
15729
15731
15713
15720
15738
15739
15740
15741
15742
15743
15744
15745
15730
27638
15712
15725
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Segment.16.Ch1Rate
Segment.16.Ch1Time
Segment.16.Ch1TSP
Segment.16.Ch1Wait
Segment.16.Ch2Rate
Segment.16.Ch2Time
Segment.16.Ch2TSP
Segment.16.Ch2Wait
Segment.16.Cycles
Segment.16.Duration
Segment.16.EndType
Segment.16.Event1
Segment.16.Event2
Segment.16.Event3
Segment.16.Event4
Segment.16.Event5
Segment.16.Event6
Segment.16.Event7
Segment.16.Event8
Segment.16.GoBackTo
Segment.16.Type

Channel 1 PV event
Channel 1 rate
Channel 1 time
Channel 1 Wait
Channel 2 PV event
Channel 2 rate
Channel 2 time
Channel 2 Wait
Cycles
Duration
End type
Event 1
Event 2
Event 3
Event 4
Event 5
Event 6
Event 7
Event 8
Go back to
Segment name
Type
uint8
float32
uint8
bool
float32
float32
time_t
float32
float32
uint8
float32
uint8
float32
uint8
bool
float32
float32
time_t
float32
float32
uint8
float32
int16
time_t
uint8
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
uint8
string_t
uint8
3d99
3d9b
3da4
3db2
3da6
3d96
3d94
3d92
3da8
3d9e
3da0
3d9a
3d9c
3da5
3db3
3da7
3d97
3d95
3d93
3da9
3d9f
3da1
3da3
3d91
3d98
3daa
3dab
3dac
3dad
3dae
3daf
3db0
3db1
3da2
6c0b
3d90
15769
15771
15780
15794
15782
15766
15764
15762
15784
15774
15776
15770
15772
15781
15795
15783
15767
15765
15763
15785
15775
15777
15779
15761
15768
15786
15787
15788
15789
15790
15791
15792
15793
15778
27659
15760
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
For parameter
values and settings
(enumerations),
see Segment 1
Page 216

Parameter path
Description
Type
Hex
Dec
Segment.16.WaitFor
Wait for
uint8
3d9d
Segment.17.Ch1Rate
Segment.17.Ch1Time
Segment.17.Ch1TSP
Segment.17.Ch1Wait
Segment.17.Ch2Rate
Segment.17.Ch2Time
Segment.17.Ch2TSP
Segment.17.Ch2Wait
Segment.17.Cycles
Segment.17.Duration
Segment.17.EndType
Segment.17.Event1
Segment.17.Event2
Segment.17.Event3
Segment.17.Event4
Segment.17.Event5
Segment.17.Event6
Segment.17.Event7
Segment.17.Event8
Segment.17.GoBackTo
Segment.17.Type
Segment.17.WaitFor

Channel 1 PV event
Channel 1 rate
Channel 1 time
Channel 1 Wait
Channel 2 PV event
Channel 2 rate
Channel 2 time
Channel 2 Wait
Cycles
Duration
End type
Event 1
Event 2
Event 3
Event 4
Event 5
Event 6
Event 7
Event 8
Go back to
Segment name
Type
Wait for
uint8
float32
uint8
bool
float32
float32
time_t
float32
float32
uint8
float32
uint8
float32
uint8
bool
float32
float32
time_t
float32
float32
uint8
float32
int16
time_t
uint8
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
uint8
string_t
uint8
uint8
3dc9
3dcb
3dd4
3de2
3dd6
3dc6
3dc4
3dc2
3dd8
3dce
3dd0
3dca
3dcc
3dd5
3de3
3dd7
3dc7
3dc5
3dc3
3dd9
3dcf
3dd1
3dd3
3dc1
3dc8
3dda
3ddb
3ddc
3ddd
3dde
3ddf
3de0
3de1
3dd2
6c20
3dc0
3dcd
15817
15819
15828
15842
15830
15814
15812
15810
15832
15822
15824
15818
15820
15829
15843
15831
15815
15813
15811
15833
15823
15825
15827
15809
15816
15834
15835
15836
15837
15838
15839
15840
15841
15826
27680
15808
15821
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Segment.18.Ch1Rate
Segment.18.Ch1Time
Segment.18.Ch1TSP
Segment.18.Ch1Wait
Segment.18.Ch2Rate
Segment.18.Ch2Time
Segment.18.Ch2TSP
Segment.18.Ch2Wait
Segment.18.Cycles
Segment.18.Duration
Segment.18.EndType
Segment.18.Event1
Segment.18.Event2
Segment.18.Event3
Segment.18.Event4
Segment.18.Event5
Segment.18.Event6
Segment.18.Event7
Segment.18.Event8
Segment.18.GoBackTo
Segment.18.Type
Segment.18.WaitFor

Channel 1 PV event
Channel 1 rate
Channel 1 time
Channel 1 Wait
Channel 2 PV event
Channel 2 rate
Channel 2 time
Channel 2 Wait
Cycles
Duration
End type
Event 1
Event 2
Event 3
Event 4
Event 5
Event 6
Event 7
Event 8
Go back to
Segment name
Type
Wait for
uint8
float32
uint8
bool
float32
float32
time_t
float32
float32
uint8
float32
uint8
float32
uint8
bool
float32
float32
time_t
float32
float32
uint8
float32
int16
time_t
uint8
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
uint8
string_t
uint8
uint8
3df9
3dfb
3e04
3e12
3e06
3df6
3df4
3df2
3e08
3dfe
3e00
3dfa
3dfc
3e05
3e13
3e07
3df7
3df5
3df3
3e09
3dff
3e01
3e03
3df1
3df8
3e0a
3e0b
3e0c
3e0d
3e0e
3e0f
3e10
3e11
3e02
6c35
3df0
3dfd
15865
15867
15876
15890
15878
15862
15860
15858
15880
15870
15872
15866
15868
15877
15891
15879
15863
15861
15859
15881
15871
15873
15875
15857
15864
15882
15883
15884
15885
15886
15887
15888
15889
15874
27701
15856
15869
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable

Channel 1 PV event
uint8
float32
uint8
3e29
3e2b
3e34

15915 Same as Programmer.SetUp.Ch1PVInput
Page 217
For parameter
values and settings
(enumerations),
see Segment 1
Resolution
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11

Parameter path
Description
Type
Hex
Dec
Resolution
Segment.19.Ch1Rate
Segment.19.Ch1Time
Segment.19.Ch1TSP
Segment.19.Ch1Wait
Segment.19.Ch2Rate
Segment.19.Ch2Time
Segment.19.Ch2TSP
Segment.19.Ch2Wait
Segment.19.Cycles
Segment.19.Duration
Segment.19.EndType
Segment.19.Event1
Segment.19.Event2
Segment.19.Event3
Segment.19.Event4
Segment.19.Event5
Segment.19.Event6
Segment.19.Event7
Segment.19.Event8
Segment.19.GoBackTo
Segment.19.Type
Segment.19.WaitFor

Channel 1 rate
Channel 1 time
Channel 1 Wait
Channel 2 PV event
Channel 2 rate
Channel 2 time
Channel 2 Wait
Cycles
Duration
End type
Event 1
Event 2
Event 3
Event 4
Event 5
Event 6
Event 7
Event 8
Go back to
Segment name
Type
Wait for
bool
float32
float32
time_t
float32
float32
uint8
float32
uint8
float32
uint8
bool
float32
float32
time_t
float32
float32
uint8
float32
int16
time_t
uint8
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
uint8
string_t
uint8
uint8
3e42
3e36
3e26
3e24
3e22
3e38
3e2e
3e30
3e2a
3e2c
3e35
3e43
3e37
3e27
3e25
3e23
3e39
3e2f
3e31
3e33
3e21
3e28
3e3a
3e3b
3e3c
3e3d
3e3e
3e3f
3e40
3e41
3e32
6c4a
3e20
3e2d
15938
15926
15910
15908
15906
15928
15918
15920
15914
15916
15925
15939
15927
15911
15909
15907
15929
15919
15921
15923
15905
15912
15930
15931
15932
15933
15934
15935
15936
15937
15922
27722
15904
15917
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Segment.20.Ch1Rate
Segment.20.Ch1Time
Segment.20.Ch1TSP
Segment.20.Ch1Wait
Segment.20.Ch2Rate
Segment.20.Ch2Time
Segment.20.Ch2TSP
Segment.20.Ch2Wait
Segment.20.Cycles
Segment.20.Duration
Segment.20.EndType
Segment.20.Event1
Segment.20.Event2
Segment.20.Event3
Segment.20.Event4
Segment.20.Event5
Segment.20.Event6
Segment.20.Event7
Segment.20.Event8
Segment.20.GoBackTo
Segment.20.Type
Segment.20.WaitFor

Channel 1 PV event
Channel 1 rate
Channel 1 time
Channel 1 Wait
Channel 2 PV event
Channel 2 rate
Channel 2 time
Channel 2 Wait
Cycles
Duration
End type
Event 1
Event 2
Event 3
Event 4
Event 5
Event 6
Event 7
Event 8
Go back to
Segment name
Type
Wait for
uint8
float32
uint8
bool
float32
float32
time_t
float32
float32
uint8
float32
uint8
float32
uint8
bool
float32
float32
time_t
float32
float32
uint8
float32
int16
time_t
uint8
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
uint8
string_t
uint8
uint8
3e59
3e5b
3e64
3e72
3e66
3e56
3e54
3e52
3e68
3e5e
3e60
3e5a
3e5c
3e65
3e73
3e67
3e57
3e55
3e53
3e69
3e5f
3e61
3e63
3e51
3e58
3e6a
3e6b
3e6c
3e6d
3e6e
3e6f
3e70
3e71
3e62
6c5f
3e50
3e5d
15961
15963
15972
15986
15974
15958
15956
15954
15976
15966
15968
15962
15964
15973
15987
15975
15959
15957
15955
15977
15967
15969
15971
15953
15960
15978
15979
15980
15981
15982
15983
15984
15985
15970
27743
15952
15965
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Segment.21.Ch1Rate
Segment.21.Ch1Time
Segment.21.Ch1TSP

Channel 1 PV event
Channel 1 rate
Channel 1 time
uint8
float32
uint8
bool
float32
float32
time_t
float32
3e89
3e8b
3e94
3ea2
3e96
3e86
3e84
3e82
16009
16011
16020
16034
16022
16006
16004
16002
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
For parameter
values and settings
(enumerations),
see Segment 1
Page 218

Parameter path
Description
Type
Hex
Dec
Resolution
Segment.21.Ch1Wait
Segment.21.Ch2Rate
Segment.21.Ch2Time
Segment.21.Ch2TSP
Segment.21.Ch2Wait
Segment.21.Cycles
Segment.21.Duration
Segment.21.EndType
Segment.21.Event1
Segment.21.Event2
Segment.21.Event3
Segment.21.Event4
Segment.21.Event5
Segment.21.Event6
Segment.21.Event7
Segment.21.Event8
Segment.21.GoBackTo
Segment.21.Type
Segment.21.WaitFor

Channel 1 Wait
Channel 2 PV event
Channel 2 rate
Channel 2 time
Channel 2 Wait
Cycles
Duration
End type
Event 1
Event 2
Event 3
Event 4
Event 5
Event 6
Event 7
Event 8
Go back to
Segment name
Type
Wait for
float32
uint8
float32
uint8
float32
uint8
bool
float32
float32
time_t
float32
float32
uint8
float32
int16
time_t
uint8
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
uint8
string_t
uint8
uint8
3e98
3e8e
3e90
3e8a
3e8c
3e95
3ea3
3e97
3e87
3e85
3e83
3e99
3e8f
3e91
3e93
3e81
3e88
3e9a
3e9b
3e9c
3e9d
3e9e
3e9f
3ea0
3ea1
3e92
6c74
3e80
3e8d
16024
16014
16016
16010
16012
16021
16035
16023
16007
16005
16003
16025
16015
16017
16019
16001
16008
16026
16027
16028
16029
16030
16031
16032
16033
16018
27764
16000
16013
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Segment.22.Ch1Rate
Segment.22.Ch1Time
Segment.22.Ch1TSP
Segment.22.Ch1Wait
Segment.22.Ch2Rate
Segment.22.Ch2Time
Segment.22.Ch2TSP
Segment.22.Ch2Wait
Segment.22.Cycles
Segment.22.Duration
Segment.22.EndType
Segment.22.Event1
Segment.22.Event2
Segment.22.Event3
Segment.22.Event4
Segment.22.Event5
Segment.22.Event6
Segment.22.Event7
Segment.22.Event8
Segment.22.GoBackTo
Segment.22.Type
Segment.22.WaitFor

Channel 1 PV event
Channel 1 rate
Channel 1 time
Channel 1 Wait
Channel 2 PV event
Channel 2 rate
Channel 2 time
Channel 2 Wait
Cycles
Duration
End type
Event 1
Event 2
Event 3
Event 4
Event 5
Event 6
Event 7
Event 8
Go back to
Segment name
Type
Wait for
uint8
float32
uint8
bool
float32
float32
time_t
float32
float32
uint8
float32
uint8
float32
uint8
bool
float32
float32
time_t
float32
float32
uint8
float32
int16
time_t
uint8
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
uint8
string_t
uint8
uint8
3eb9
3ebb
3ec4
3ed2
3ec6
3eb6
3eb4
3eb2
3ec8
3ebe
3ec0
3eba
3ebc
3ec5
3ed3
3ec7
3eb7
3eb5
3eb3
3ec9
3ebf
3ec1
3ec3
3eb1
3eb8
3eca
3ecb
3ecc
3ecd
3ece
3ecf
3ed0
3ed1
3ec2
6c89
3eb0
3ebd
16057
16059
16068
16082
16070
16054
16052
16050
16072
16062
16064
16058
16060
16069
16083
16071
16055
16053
16051
16073
16063
16065
16067
16049
16056
16074
16075
16076
16077
16078
16079
16080
16081
16066
27785
16048
16061
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Segment.23.Ch1Rate
Segment.23.Ch1Time
Segment.23.Ch1TSP
Segment.23.Ch1Wait

Channel 1 PV event
Channel 1 rate
Channel 1 time
Channel 1 Wait
uint8
float32
uint8
bool
float32
float32
time_t
float32
float32
uint8
float32
uint8
float32
3ee9
3eeb
3ef4
3f02
3ef6
3ee6
3ee4
3ee2
3ef8
3eee
3ef0
3eea
3eec
16105
16107
16116
16130
16118
16102
16100
16098
16120
16110
16112
16106
16108
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Page 219
For parameter
values and settings
(enumerations),
see Segment 1
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11

Parameter path
Description
Type
Hex
Dec
Resolution
Segment.23.Ch2Rate
Segment.23.Ch2Time
Segment.23.Ch2TSP
Segment.23.Ch2Wait
Segment.23.Cycles
Segment.23.Duration
Segment.23.EndType
Segment.23.Event1
Segment.23.Event2
Segment.23.Event3
Segment.23.Event4
Segment.23.Event5
Segment.23.Event6
Segment.23.Event7
Segment.23.Event8
Segment.23.GoBackTo
Segment.23.Type
Segment.23.WaitFor
Channel 2 PV event
Channel 2 rate
Channel 2 time
Channel 2 Wait
Cycles
Duration
End type
Event 1
Event 2
Event 3
Event 4
Event 5
Event 6
Event 7
Event 8
Go back to
Segment name
Type
Wait for
uint8
bool
float32
float32
time_t
float32
float32
uint8
float32
int16
time_t
uint8
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
uint8
string_t
uint8
uint8
3ef5
3f03
3ef7
3ee7
3ee5
3ee3
3ef9
3eef
3ef1
3ef3
3ee1
3ee8
3efa
3efb
3efc
3efd
3efe
3eff
3f00
3f01
3ef2
6c9e
3ee0
3eed
16117
16131
16119
16103
16101
16099
16121
16111
16113
16115
16097
16104
16122
16123
16124
16125
16126
16127
16128
16129
16114
27806
16096
16109
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Segment.24.Ch1Rate
Segment.24.Ch1Time
Segment.24.Ch1TSP
Segment.24.Ch1Wait
Segment.24.Ch2Rate
Segment.24.Ch2Time
Segment.24.Ch2TSP
Segment.24.Ch2Wait
Segment.24.Cycles
Segment.24.Duration
Segment.24.EndType
Segment.24.Event1
Segment.24.Event2
Segment.24.Event3
Segment.24.Event4
Segment.24.Event5
Segment.24.Event6
Segment.24.Event7
Segment.24.Event8
Segment.24.GoBackTo
Segment.24.Type
Segment.24.WaitFor

Channel 1 PV event
Channel 1 rate
Channel 1 time
Channel 1 Wait
Channel 2 PV event
Channel 2 rate
Channel 2 time
Channel 2 Wait
Cycles
Duration
End type
Event 1
Event 2
Event 3
Event 4
Event 5
Event 6
Event 7
Event 8
Go back to
Segment name
Type
Wait for
uint8
float32
uint8
bool
float32
float32
time_t
float32
float32
uint8
float32
uint8
float32
uint8
bool
float32
float32
time_t
float32
float32
uint8
float32
int16
time_t
uint8
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
uint8
string_t
uint8
uint8
3f19
3f1b
3f24
3f32
3f26
3f16
3f14
3f12
3f28
3f1e
3f20
3f1a
3f1c
3f25
3f33
3f27
3f17
3f15
3f13
3f29
3f1f
3f21
3f23
3f11
3f18
3f2a
3f2b
3f2c
3f2d
3f2e
3f2f
3f30
3f31
3f22
6cb3
3f10
3f1d
16153
16155
16164
16178
16166
16150
16148
16146
16168
16158
16160
16154
16156
16165
16179
16167
16151
16149
16147
16169
16159
16161
16163
16145
16152
16170
16171
16172
16173
16174
16175
16176
16177
16162
27827
16144
16157
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Segment.25.Ch1Rate
Segment.25.Ch1Time
Segment.25.Ch1TSP
Segment.25.Ch1Wait
Segment.25.Ch2Rate
Segment.25.Ch2Time

Channel 1 PV event
Channel 1 rate
Channel 1 time
Channel 1 Wait
Channel 2 PV event
Channel 2 rate
Channel 2 time
uint8
float32
uint8
bool
float32
float32
time_t
float32
float32
uint8
float32
uint8
float32
uint8
bool
float32
float32
time_t
3f49
3f4b
3f54
3f62
3f56
3f46
3f44
3f42
3f58
3f4e
3f50
3f4a
3f4c
3f55
3f63
3f57
3f47
3f45
16201
16203
16212
16226
16214
16198
16196
16194
16216
16206
16208
16202
16204
16213
16227
16215
16199
16197
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
For parameter
values and settings
(enumerations),
see Segment 1
Page 220

Parameter path
Description
Type
Hex
Dec
Resolution
Segment.25.Ch2TSP
Segment.25.Ch2Wait
Segment.25.Cycles
Segment.25.Duration
Segment.25.EndType
Segment.25.Event1
Segment.25.Event2
Segment.25.Event3
Segment.25.Event4
Segment.25.Event5
Segment.25.Event6
Segment.25.Event7
Segment.25.Event8
Segment.25.GoBackTo
Segment.25.Type
Segment.25.WaitFor
Segment.26.Ch1Rate
Segment.26.Ch1Time
Segment.26.Ch1TSP
Segment.26.Ch1Wait
Segment.26.Ch2Rate
Segment.26.Ch2Time
Segment.26.Ch2TSP
Segment.26.Ch2Wait
Segment.26.Cycles
Segment.26.Duration
Segment.26.EndType
Segment.26.Event1
Segment.26.Event2
Segment.26.Event3
Segment.26.Event4
Segment.26.Event5
Segment.26.Event6
Segment.26.Event7
Segment.26.Event8
Segment.26.GoBackTo
Segment.26.Type
Segment.26.WaitFor

Channel 2 Wait
Cycles
Duration
End type
Event 1
Event 2
Event 3
Event 4
Event 5
Event 6
Event 7
Event 8
Go back to
Segment name
Type
Wait for
Channel 1 PV event
Channel 1 rate
Channel 1 time
Channel 1 Wait
Channel 2 PV event
Channel 2 rate
Channel 2 time
Channel 2 Wait
Cycles
Duration
End type
Event 1
Event 2
Event 3
Event 4
Event 5
Event 6
Event 7
Event 8
Go back to
Segment name
Type
Wait for
float32
float32
uint8
float32
int16
time_t
uint8
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
uint8
string_t
uint8
uint8
uint8
float32
uint8
bool
float32
float32
time_t
float32
float32
uint8
float32
uint8
float32
uint8
bool
float32
float32
time_t
float32
float32
uint8
float32
int16
time_t
uint8
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
bool
uint8
string_t
uint8
uint8
3f43
3f59
3f4f
3f51
3f53
3f41
3f48
3f5a
3f5b
3f5c
3f5d
3f5e
3f5f
3f60
3f61
3f52
6cc8
3f40
3f4d
3f79
3f7b
3f84
3f92
3f86
3f76
3f74
3f72
3f88
3f7e
3f80
3f7a
3f7c
3f85
3f93
3f87
3f77
3f75
3f73
3f89
3f7f
3f81
3f83
3f71
3f78
3f8a
3f8b
3f8c
3f8d
3f8e
3f8f
3f90
3f91
3f82
6cdd
3f70
3f7d
16195
16217
16207
16209
16211
16193
16200
16218
16219
16220
16221
16222
16223
16224
16225
16210
27848
16192
16205
16249
16251
16260
16274
16262
16246
16244
16242
16264
16254
16256
16250
16252
16261
16275
16263
16247
16245
16243
16265
16255
16257
16259
16241
16248
16266
16267
16268
16269
16270
16271
16272
16273
16258
27869
16240
16253
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Steriliser.AutoCounter
Automatically increments the cycle number
bool
2e0f
Steriliser.CycleNumber
Current cycle number
int32
2e04
Steriliser.CycleStatus
uint8
2e08
Steriliser.CycleTime
The current cycle status.

0 = Waiting start
1 = Waiting
3 = Sterilising
4 = Passed
6 = Aborted
7 = Test cycle
The total cycle time
time_t
2e25
Steriliser.EquilibrationTime
The equilibration time period for the current cycle.
time_t
2e0c
Steriliser.FailureDwell1
Failure alarm dwell time for input 1
time_t
2e22
time_t
2e2b
time_t
2e2c
Steriliser.FileByTag

Name historical files by cycle number and tagbool
0 = File by Tag Off; 1 = File by Tag On
time_t
2e21
2e2d

11809
Not applicable
Steriliser.FileTag
Used as part of the historical filename
string_t
68f7
Steriliser.Fvalue
F0 (A0)
time_t
2e26
Steriliser.Input1PV
Input 1
float32
2e00
11776 0dp
Steriliser.Input2PV
Input 2
float32
2e01
11777 0dp
Steriliser.Input3PV
Input 3
float32
2e02
11778 0dp
Steriliser.Input4PV
Input 4
float32
2e03
11779 0dp
Page 221
For parameter
values and settings
(enumerations),
see Segment 1
2 = Equilibrisation
5 = Failed
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11

Parameter path
Steriliser.InputType1
Description
Input type 1
0 = Off
1 = thermocouple 2 = Rising pressure
3 = Falling pressure
4 = Rise air detect 5 = Fall air detect
Type
Hex
Dec
Resolution
uint8
2e1d
Input type 2 (as Input type 1, above)
uint8
2e1e
uint8
2e1f
uint8
2e20
Sterilisation temperature input 1 band high.
float32
2e0a
11786 Same as Steriliser.Input1PV
Sterilisation temperature input 1 band low.
float32
2e0b
Input 1 target setpoint
float32
2e07
float32
2e10
float32
2e11
float32
2e16
float32
2e12
float32
2e13
float32
2e17
float32
2e14
float32
2e15
float32
2e18
Steriliser.LowLimit
Low temperature limit for the F0 calculation.
float32
2e2a
11818 0dp
Steriliser.MeasuredTemp
Measured Temperature used in the F0 calculation.
float32
2e27
11815 0dp
Steriliser.PassedOutput
1 = cycle passed; 0 = cycle failed.
uint8
2e1c
Steriliser.Remaining
The holding time remaining for the current cycle.
time_t
2e0e
Steriliser.RunningOutput
1 = cycle running; 0 = cycle not running
uint8
2e1b
Steriliser.Start121
Start a predefined 121C cycle
bool
2e19
Steriliser.Start134
Start a predefined 134C cycle
bool
2e1a
Steriliser.StartCycle
Start a custom cycle
bool
2e05
Steriliser.SterilisingTime
The total time the load was at sterilisation conditions.
time_t
2e0d
Steriliser.TargetTemperature
Target Temperature for the F0 calculation.
float32
2e29
11817 0dp
Steriliser.TargetTime
The target time of the sterilisation period.
time_t
2e09
The target time for a 121C cycle
time_t
2e23
The target time for a 134C cycle
time_t
2e24
Steriliser.ZTemperatureInterval
The Z temperature interval for the F0 calculation.
float32
2e28
11816 0dp
Timer.1.ElapsedTime
Elapsed Time
time_t
2ee0
Timer.1.In
Trigger/Gate input
bool
2ee5
Timer.1.Out
Output (1 = On; 0 = Off)
bool
2ee1
Timer.1.Time
Period for the timer (hh:mm:ss)
time_t
2ee2
Timer.1.Triggered
1 = Timer triggered; 0 = Timer not triggered
bool
2ee3
Timer.1.Type
Type of Timer
uint8
2ee4
0 = Disabled (off)
1 = On Pulse
3 = One shot
4 = Min on.
2 = On delay
Timer.2.ElapsedTime
Elapsed Time
time_t
2ee6
Timer.2.In
Trigger/Gate input
bool
2eeb
Timer.2.Out
bool
2ee7
Timer.2.Time
time_t
2ee8
Timer.2.Triggered
bool
2ee9
Timer.2.Type
Type of Timer (as Timer.1.Type)
uint8
2eea
Timer.3.ElapsedTime
Elapsed Time
time_t
2eec
Timer.3.In
Trigger/Gate input
bool
2ef1
Timer.3.Out
bool
2eed
Timer.3.Time
time_t
2eee
Timer.3.Triggered
bool
2eef
Timer.3.Type
uint8
2ef0
Timer.4.ElapsedTime
Elapsed Time
time_t
2ef2
Timer.4.In
Trigger/Gate input
bool
2ef7
Timer.4.Out
bool
2ef3
Timer.4.Time
time_t
2ef4
Timer.4.Triggered
bool
2ef5
Timer.4.Type
uint8
2ef6
UserLin.1.NumberOfBreakpoints
UserLin.1.X1
UserLin.1.X2
UserLin.1.X3
UserLin.1.X4
UserLin.1.X5
UserLin.1.X6
UserLin.1.X7
UserLin.1.X8
Number of points in user linearisation table 1

User linearisation table 1 X value 1
uint8
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
2900
2901
2903
2905
2907
2909
290b
290d
290f
10496
10497
10499
10501
10503
10505
10507
10509
10511
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
Not applicable
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
Page 222

Parameter path
Description
Type
Hex
Dec
Resolution
UserLin.1.X9
UserLin.1.X10
UserLin.1.X11
UserLin.1.X12
UserLin.1.X13
UserLin.1.X14
UserLin.1.X15
UserLin.1.X16
UserLin.1.X17
UserLin.1.X18
UserLin.1.X19
UserLin.1.X20
UserLin.1.X21
UserLin.1.X22
UserLin.1.X23
UserLin.1.X24
UserLin.1.X25
UserLin.1.X26
UserLin.1.X27
UserLin.1.X28
UserLin.1.X29
UserLin.1.X30
UserLin.1.X31
UserLin.1.X32
UserLin.1.Y1
UserLin.1.Y2
UserLin.1.Y3
UserLin.1.Y4
UserLin.1.Y5
UserLin.1.Y6
UserLin.1.Y7
UserLin.1.Y8
UserLin.1.Y9
UserLin.1.Y10
UserLin.1.Y11
UserLin.1.Y12
UserLin.1.Y13
UserLin.1.Y14
UserLin.1.Y15
UserLin.1.Y16
UserLin.1.Y17
UserLin.1.Y18
UserLin.1.Y19
UserLin.1.Y20
UserLin.1.Y21
UserLin.1.Y22
UserLin.1.Y23
UserLin.1.Y24
UserLin.1.Y25
UserLin.1.Y26
UserLin.1.Y27
UserLin.1.Y28
UserLin.1.Y29
UserLin.1.Y30
UserLin.1.Y31
UserLin.1.Y32

User linearisation table 1 Y value 1
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
2911
2913
2915
2917
2919
291b
291d
291f
2921
2923
2925
2927
2929
292b
292d
292f
2931
2933
2935
2937
2939
293b
293d
293f
2902
2904
2906
2908
290a
290c
290e
2910
2912
2914
2916
2918
291a
291c
291e
2920
2922
2924
2926
2928
292a
292c
292e
2930
2932
2934
2936
2938
293a
293c
293e
2940
10513
10515
10517
10519
10521
10523
10525
10527
10529
10531
10533
10535
10537
10539
10541
10543
10545
10547
10549
10551
10553
10555
10557
10559
10498
10500
10502
10504
10506
10508
10510
10512
10514
10516
10518
10520
10522
10524
10526
10528
10530
10532
10534
10536
10538
10540
10542
10544
10546
10548
10550
10552
10554
10556
10558
10560
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
UserLin.2.X1
UserLin.2.X2
UserLin.2.X3
UserLin.2.X4
UserLin.2.X5
UserLin.2.X6
UserLin.2.X7
UserLin.2.X8
UserLin.2.X9
UserLin.2.X10
UserLin.2.X11
UserLin.2.X12
UserLin.2.X13
UserLin.2.X14
UserLin.2.X15
UserLin.2.X16
UserLin.2.X17
UserLin.2.X18
UserLin.2.X19
UserLin.2.X20
UserLin.2.X21
UserLin.2.X22
UserLin.2.X23

uint8
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
29c0
29c1
29c3
29c5
29c7
29c9
29cb
29cd
29cf
29d1
29d3
29d5
29d7
29d9
29db
29dd
29df
29e1
29e3
29e5
29e7
29e9
29eb
29ed
10688
10689
10691
10693
10695
10697
10699
10701
10703
10705
10707
10709
10711
10713
10715
10717
10719
10721
10723
10725
10727
10729
10731
10733
Not applicable
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
Page 223
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11

Parameter path
Description
Type
Hex
Dec
Resolution
UserLin.2.X24
UserLin.2.X25
UserLin.2.X26
UserLin.2.X27
UserLin.2.X28
UserLin.2.X29
UserLin.2.X30
UserLin.2.X31
UserLin.2.X32
UserLin.2.Y1
UserLin.2.Y2
UserLin.2.Y3
UserLin.2.Y4
UserLin.2.Y5
UserLin.2.Y6
UserLin.2.Y7
UserLin.2.Y8
UserLin.2.Y9
UserLin.2.Y10
UserLin.2.Y11
UserLin.2.Y12
UserLin.2.Y13
UserLin.2.Y14
UserLin.2.Y15
UserLin.2.Y16
UserLin.2.Y17
UserLin.2.Y18
UserLin.2.Y19
UserLin.2.Y20
UserLin.2.Y21
UserLin.2.Y22
UserLin.2.Y23
UserLin.2.Y24
UserLin.2.Y25
UserLin.2.Y26
UserLin.2.Y27
UserLin.2.Y28
UserLin.2.Y29
UserLin.2.Y30
UserLin.2.Y31
UserLin.2.Y32

float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
29ef
29f1
29f3
29f5
29f7
29f9
29fb
29fd
29ff
29c2
29c4
29c6
29c8
29ca
29cc
29ce
29d0
29d2
29d4
29d6
29d8
29da
29dc
29de
29e0
29e2
29e4
29e6
29e8
29ea
29ec
29ee
29f0
29f2
29f4
29f6
29f8
29fa
29fc
29fe
2a00
10735
10737
10739
10741
10743
10745
10747
10749
10751
10690
10692
10694
10696
10698
10700
10702
10704
10706
10708
10710
10712
10714
10716
10718
10720
10722
10724
10726
10728
10730
10732
10734
10736
10738
10740
10742
10744
10746
10748
10750
10752
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
UserLin.3.X1
UserLin.3.X2
UserLin.3.X3
UserLin.3.X4
UserLin.3.X5
UserLin.3.X6
UserLin.3.X7
UserLin.3.X8
UserLin.3.X9
UserLin.3.X10
UserLin.3.X11
UserLin.3.X12
UserLin.3.X13
UserLin.3.X14
UserLin.3.X15
UserLin.3.X16
UserLin.3.X17
UserLin.3.X18
UserLin.3.X19
UserLin.3.X20
UserLin.3.X21
UserLin.3.X22
UserLin.3.X23
UserLin.3.X24
UserLin.3.X25
UserLin.3.X26
UserLin.3.X27
UserLin.3.X28
UserLin.3.X29
UserLin.3.X30
UserLin.3.X31
UserLin.3.X32
UserLin.3.Y1
UserLin.3.Y2
UserLin.3.Y3
UserLin.3.Y4
UserLin.3.Y5
UserLin.3.Y6

uint8
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
2a80
2a81
2a83
2a85
2a87
2a89
2a8b
2a8d
2a8f
2a91
2a93
2a95
2a97
2a99
2a9b
2a9d
2a9f
2aa1
2aa3
2aa5
2aa7
2aa9
2aab
2aad
2aaf
2ab1
2ab3
2ab5
2ab7
2ab9
2abb
2abd
2abf
2a82
2a84
2a86
2a88
2a8a
2a8c
10880
10881
10883
10885
10887
10889
10891
10893
10895
10897
10899
10901
10903
10905
10907
10909
10911
10913
10915
10917
10919
10921
10923
10925
10927
10929
10931
10933
10935
10937
10939
10941
10943
10882
10884
10886
10888
10890
10892
Not applicable
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
Page 224

Parameter path
Description
Type
Hex
Dec
Resolution
UserLin.3.Y7
UserLin.3.Y8
UserLin.3.Y9
UserLin.3.Y10
UserLin.3.Y11
UserLin.3.Y12
UserLin.3.Y13
UserLin.3.Y14
UserLin.3.Y15
UserLin.3.Y16
UserLin.3.Y17
UserLin.3.Y18
UserLin.3.Y19
UserLin.3.Y20
UserLin.3.Y21
UserLin.3.Y22
UserLin.3.Y23
UserLin.3.Y24
UserLin.3.Y25
UserLin.3.Y26
UserLin.3.Y27
UserLin.3.Y28
UserLin.3.Y29
UserLin.3.Y30
UserLin.3.Y31
UserLin.3.Y32
UserLin.4.X1
UserLin.4.X2
UserLin.4.X3
UserLin.4.X4
UserLin.4.X5
UserLin.4.X6
UserLin.4.X7
UserLin.4.X8
UserLin.4.X9
UserLin.4.X10
UserLin.4.X11
UserLin.4.X12
UserLin.4.X13
UserLin.4.X14
UserLin.4.X15
UserLin.4.X16
UserLin.4.X17
UserLin.4.X18
UserLin.4.X19
UserLin.4.X20
UserLin.4.X21
UserLin.4.X22
UserLin.4.X23
UserLin.4.X24
UserLin.4.X25
UserLin.4.X26
UserLin.4.X27
UserLin.4.X28
UserLin.4.X29
UserLin.4.X30
UserLin.4.X31
UserLin.4.X32
UserLin.4.Y1
UserLin.4.Y2
UserLin.4.Y3
UserLin.4.Y4
UserLin.4.Y5
UserLin.4.Y6
UserLin.4.Y7
UserLin.4.Y8
UserLin.4.Y9
UserLin.4.Y10
UserLin.4.Y11
UserLin.4.Y12
UserLin.4.Y13
UserLin.4.Y14
UserLin.4.Y15
UserLin.4.Y16
UserLin.4.Y17
UserLin.4.Y18
UserLin.4.Y19
UserLin.4.Y20
UserLin.4.Y21
UserLin.4.Y22

User linearisation table 4 X value v5
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
uint8
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
2a8e
2a90
2a92
2a94
2a96
2a98
2a9a
2a9c
2a9e
2aa0
2aa2
2aa4
2aa6
2aa8
2aaa
2aac
2aae
2ab0
2ab2
2ab4
2ab6
2ab8
2aba
2abc
2abe
2ac0
2b40
2b41
2b43
2b45
2b47
2b49
2b4b
2b4d
2b4f
2b51
2b53
2b55
2b57
2b59
2b5b
2b5d
2b5f
2b61
2b63
2b65
2b67
2b69
2b6b
2b6d
2b6f
2b71
2b73
2b75
2b77
2b79
2b7b
2b7d
2b7f
2b42
2b44
2b46
2b48
2b4a
2b4c
2b4e
2b50
2b52
2b54
2b56
2b58
2b5a
2b5c
2b5e
2b60
2b62
2b64
2b66
2b68
2b6a
2b6c
10894
10896
10898
10900
10902
10904
10906
10908
10910
10912
10914
10916
10918
10920
10922
10924
10926
10928
10930
10932
10934
10936
10938
10940
10942
10944
11072
11073
11075
11077
11079
11081
11083
11085
11087
11089
11091
11093
11095
11097
11099
11101
11103
11105
11107
11109
11111
11113
11115
11117
11119
11121
11123
11125
11127
11129
11131
11133
11135
11074
11076
11078
11080
11082
11084
11086
11088
11090
11092
11094
11096
11098
11100
11102
11104
11106
11108
11110
11112
11114
11116
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
Not applicable
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
Page 225
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11

Parameter path
Description
Type
Hex
Dec
Resolution
UserLin.4.Y23
UserLin.4.Y24
UserLin.4.Y25
UserLin.4.Y26
UserLin.4.Y27
UserLin.4.Y28
UserLin.4.Y29
UserLin.4.Y30
UserLin.4.Y31
UserLin.4.Y32

float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
2b6e
2b70
2b72
2b74
2b76
2b78
2b7a
2b7c
2b7e
2b80
11118
11120
11122
11124
11126
11128
11130
11132
11134
11136
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
2dp
UsrVal.1.HighLimit
User Value High Limit
float32
2e8c
11916 Set by UsrVal.1.Resolution
UsrVal.1.LowLimit
User Value Low Limit
float32
2e8d
UsrVal.1.Resolution
Result Resolution
uint8
2e90
UsrVal.1.Status
User Value 1 Status (0 = Good (OK); 7 = Bad (Error))
bool
2e8f
UsrVal.1.Units
Units of the value
string_t
68fc
UsrVal.1.Val
The User Value
float32
2e8e
UsrVal.2.HighLimit
float32
2e91
UsrVal.2.LowLimit
float32
2e92
UsrVal.2.Resolution
Result Resolution
uint8
2e95
UsrVal.2.Status
bool
2e94
UsrVal.2.Units
Units of the value
string_t
6902
UsrVal.2.Val
Thw User Value
float32
2e93
UsrVal.3.HighLimit
float32
2e96
UsrVal.3.LowLimit
float32
2e97
UsrVal.3.Resolution
Result Resolution
uint8
2e9a
UsrVal.3.Status
bool
2e99
UsrVal.3.Units
Units of the value
string_t
6908
UsrVal.3.Val
The User Value
float32
2e98
UsrVal.4.HighLimit
float32
2e9b
UsrVal.4.LowLimit
float32
2e9c
UsrVal.4.Resolution
Result Resolution
uint8
2e9f
UsrVal.4.Status
bool
2e9e
UsrVal.4.Units
Units of the value
string_t
690e
UsrVal.4.Val
The User Value
float32
2e9d
UsrVal.5.HighLimit
float32
2ea0
UsrVal.5.LowLimit
float32
2ea1
UsrVal.5.Resolution
Result Resolution
uint8
2ea4
UsrVal.5.Status
bool
2ea3
UsrVal.5.Units
Units of the value
string_t
6914
UsrVal.5.Val
The User Value
float32
2ea2
UsrVal.6.HighLimit
float32
2ea5
UsrVal.6.LowLimit
float32
2ea6
UsrVal.6.Resolution
Result Resolution
uint8
2ea9
UsrVal.6.Status
bool
2ea8
UsrVal.6.Units
Units of the value
string_t
691a
UsrVal.6.Val
The User Value
float32
2ea7
UsrVal.7.HighLimit
float32
2eaa
UsrVal.7.LowLimit
float32
2eab
UsrVal.7.Resolution
Result Resolution
uint8
2eae
UsrVal.7.Status
bool
2ead
UsrVal.7.Units
Units of the value
string_t
6920
UsrVal.7.Val
The User Value
float32
2eac
UsrVal.8.HighLimit
float32
2eaf
UsrVal.8.LowLimit
float32
2eb0
UsrVal.8.Resolution
Result Resolution
uint8
2eb3
UsrVal.8.Status
bool
2eb2
UsrVal.8.Units
Units of the value
string_t
6926
UsrVal.8.Val
The User Value
float32
2eb1
UsrVal.9.HighLimit
float32
2eb4
UsrVal.9.LowLimit
float32
2eb5
UsrVal.9.Resolution
Result Resolution
uint8
2eb8
UsrVal.9.Status
bool
2eb7
UsrVal.9.Units
Units of the value
string_t
692c
UsrVal.9.Val
The User Value
float32
2eb6
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
Page 226

Parameter path
Description
Type
Hex
Dec
UsrVal.10.HighLimit
float32
2eb9
UsrVal.10.LowLimit
float32
2eba
UsrVal.10.Resolution
Result Resolution
uint8
2ebd
UsrVal.10.Status
bool
2ebc
UsrVal.10.Units
Units of the value
string_t
6932
UsrVal.10.Val
The User Value
float32
2ebb
UsrVal.11.HighLimit
float32
2ebe
UsrVal.11.LowLimit
float32
2ebf
Result Resolution
uint8
2ec2
UsrVal.11.Status
bool
2ec1
UsrVal.11.Units
Units of the value
string_t
6938
UsrVal.11.Val
The User Value
float32
2ec0
UsrVal.12.HighLimit
float32
2ec3
UsrVal.12.LowLimit
float32
2ec4
Result Resolution
uint8
2ec7
UsrVal.12.Status
bool
2ec6
UsrVal.12.Units
Units of the value
string_t
693e
UsrVal.12.Val
The User Value
float32
2ec5
VirtualChannel.1.Alarm1.Acknowledge
VirtualChannel.1.Alarm1.Acknowledgement
VirtualChannel.1.Alarm1.Active
VirtualChannel.1.Alarm1.Amount
VirtualChannel.1.Alarm1.AverageTime
VirtualChannel.1.Alarm1.Block
VirtualChannel.1.Alarm1.ChangeTime
VirtualChannel.1.Alarm1.Deviation
VirtualChannel.1.Alarm1.Dwell
VirtualChannel.1.Alarm1.Hysteresis
VirtualChannel.1.Alarm1.Inactive
VirtualChannel.1.Alarm1.Inhibit
VirtualChannel.1.Alarm1.Latch
VirtualChannel.1.Alarm1.NotAcknowledged
VirtualChannel.1.Alarm1.Reference
VirtualChannel.1.Alarm1.Status
Alarm dwell time
1 = alarm inhibited
Alarm latch type (0 = None; 1 = Auto; 2 = Manual; 3 = Trigger
Indication of the active and acknowledge status
0 = Unacknowledged
1 = None
2 = Active
3 = Inactive
4 = Acknowledged
Alarm type
0 = None
1 = Abs High
2 = Abs Low
3 = Dev high
4 = Dev Low
5 = Dev band
6 = ROC rising
7 = ROC falling
10 = Dig Off
11 = Dig High
12 = Dig Low
Alarm dwell time
1 = alarm inhibited
As VirtualChannel1.Alarm1.Latch
As VirtualChannel1.Alarm1.Status
As VirtualChannel1.Alarm1.Type
Virtual Channel descriptor
1 = Virtual channel disabled
High cut off value for totalisers and counters
Input 1 value
Input 2 value
Low cutoff value for totalisers and counters
Modbus input value
Specifies the operation of the virtual channel
0 = Off
2 = Add
3 = Subtract
4 = Multiply
5 = Divide
6 = Group avg
7 = Group min
8 = Group max
9 = Modbus i/p
11 = Copy
20 = Grp min latch 21 = Grp max latch
bool
bool
bool
float32
time_t
uint8
uint8
float32
time_t
float32
bool
bool
uint8
bool
float32
uint8
01c0
1c50
1c4b
1c48
1c4a
1c42
1c49
1c47
1c45
1c44
1c4e
1c51
1c41
1c4f
1c46
0122
448
7248
7243
7240
7242
7234
7241
7239
7237
7236
7246
7249
7233
7247
7238
290
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Same as VirtualChannel.1.Main.PV
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
float32
uint8
1c43
1c40
7235
7232
Not applicable
bool
bool
bool
float32
time_t
uint8
uint8
float32
time_t
float32
bool
bool
uint8
bool
float32
uint8
float32
uint8
string_t
bool
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
uint8
01c1
1c70
1c6b
1c68
1c6a
1c62
1c69
1c67
1c65
1c64
1c6e
1c71
1c61
1c6f
1c66
0123
1c63
1c60
4b00
1c23
1c05
1c07
1c08
1c04
1c06
1c01
449
7280
7275
7272
7274
7266
7273
7271
7269
7268
7278
7281
7265
7279
7270
291
7267
7264
19200
7203
7173
7175
7176
7172
7174
7169
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Set by VirtualChannel.1.Main.Resolution
Not applicable
VirtualChannel.1.Alarm1.Threshold
VirtualChannel.1.Alarm1.Type
VirtualChannel.1.Main.Descriptor
VirtualChannel.1.Main.Disable
VirtualChannel.1.Main.HighCutOff
VirtualChannel.1.Main.Input1
VirtualChannel.1.Main.LowCutOff
VirtualChannel.1.Main.ModbusInput
VirtualChannel.1.Main.Operation
Page 227
Resolution
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11

Parameter path
Description
VirtualChannel.1.Trend.SpanHigh
VirtualChannel.1.Trend.SpanLow
34 = Chan max 35 = Chan min

36 = Chan avg
43 = Config rev 64 = Off
65 = On
80 = Off
81 = On
The time period over which the calculation is made
Initiate preset. 0 = No; 1 = Yes
The preset value
The virtual channel output value
Initiate reset. 0 = No; 1 = Yes
Number of decimal places (0 to 6)
A pulse signal to indicate PV (output) has just rolled over
Virtual Channel output status
0 =Good
1 = Off
2 = Over range
3 = Under range 4 = HW error
5 = Ranging
6 = Overflow
7 = bad
8 = HW exceeded
9 = No data
12 = Comms channel error
Time remaining before the calculation is made
Increment/decrement counter. 0 = No; 1 = Yes
Specifies the type of virtual channel
1 = Maths; 2 = Totaliser; 3 = Counter
Units descriptor
Units scaler for totalisers
Configures the trend colour for this virtual channel
0 = Red
1 = Blue
2 = Green
3 = Honey
4 = Violet
5 = Russet
6 = Dark blue
7 = Jade
8 = Magenta
9 = Dusky rose 10 = Yellow
11 = Powder blue
12 = Dark red
13 = Avocado
14 = Indigo
15 = Dark brown 16 = Aegean
17 = Cyan
18 = Aubergine 19 = Dark orange 20 = Pale yellow
21 = Hyacinth
22 = Dark green
23 = Sugar pink
24 = Bluebell
25 = Orange
26 = Pink
27 = Buttersilk
28 = Terracotta
29 = Blue babe
30 = Lime
31 = Blue jive
32 = Cucumber
33 = Eurogreen 34 = Wheatgerm 35 = Sea Blue
36 = Ginger
37 = Aqua pool
38 = Pale red
39 = Pale blue
40 = Lilac
41 = Sky blue
42 = Wild moss 43 = Turquoise
44 = Pale green
45 = Coffee
49 = Dark Grey
53 = Light grey
Alarm dwell time
1 = alarm inhibited
Alarm dwell time
1 = alarm inhibited
The highest input value that will be totalised/counted
Input 1 value
VirtualChannel.1.Main.Period
VirtualChannel.1.Main.Preset
VirtualChannel.1.Main.PresetValue
VirtualChannel.1.Main.PV
VirtualChannel.1.Main.Reset
VirtualChannel.1.Main.Resolution
VirtualChannel.1.Main.Rollover
VirtualChannel.1.Main.Status
VirtualChannel.1.Main.TimeRemaining
VirtualChannel.1.Main.Trigger
VirtualChannel.1.Main.Type
VirtualChannel.1.Main.Units
VirtualChannel.1.Main.UnitsScaler
VirtualChannel.1.Trend.Colour
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
Type
Hex
Dec
Resolution
int32
bool
float32
float32
bool
uint8
bool
uint8
1c0a
1c0c
1c0d
0120
1c0b
1c02
1c11
0121
7178
7180
7181
288
7179
7170
7185
289
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
time_t
bool
uint8
1c09
1c0e
1c00
7177
7182
7168
Not applicable
Not applicable
string_t
float32
uint8
4b15
1c03
1c20

7171 1dp
7200 Not applicable
float32
float32
1c22
1c21
7202
7201
bool
bool
bool
float32
time_t
uint8
uint8
float32
time_t
float32
bool
bool
uint8
bool
float32
uint8
float32
uint8
bool
bool
bool
float32
time_t
uint8
uint8
float32
time_t
float32
bool
bool
uint8
bool
float32
uint8
float32
uint8
string_t
bool
float32
float32
01c2
1cd0
1ccb
1cc8
1cca
1cc2
1cc9
1cc7
1cc5
1cc4
1cce
1cd1
1cc1
1ccf
1cc6
0126
1cc3
1cc0
01c3
1cf0
1ceb
1ce8
1cea
1ce2
1ce9
1ce7
1ce5
1ce4
1cee
1cf1
1ce1
1cef
1ce6
0127
1ce3
1ce0
4b1b
1ca3
1c85
1c87
450
7376
7371
7368
7370
7362
7369
7367
7365
7364
7374
7377
7361
7375
7366
294
7363
7360
451
7408
7403
7400
7402
7394
7401
7399
7397
7396
7406
7409
7393
7407
7398
295
7395
7392
19227
7331
7301
7303
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Page 228

Parameter path
Description
Type
Hex
Dec
Resolution
Input 2 value
The lowest input value that will be totalised/counted
Modbus input value
As VirtualChannel1.Main.Operation
The Preset value
As VirtualChannel1.Main.Status
As VirtualChannel1.Main.Type
Units descriptor
As VirtualChannel1.Trend.Colour
float32
float32
float32
uint8
int32
bool
float32
float32
bool
uint8
bool
uint8
time_t
bool
uint8
string_t
float32
uint8
float32
float32
1c88
1c84
1c86
1c81
1c8a
1c8c
1c8d
0124
1c8b
1c82
1c91
0125
1c89
1c8e
1c80
4b30
1c83
1ca0
1ca2
1ca1
7304
7300
7302
7297
7306
7308
7309
292
7307
7298
7313
293
7305
7310
7296
19248
7299
7328
7330
7329
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
1dp
Not applicable
Alarm dwell time
1 = alarm inhibited
Alarm dwell time
1 = alarm inhibited
Input 1
Input 2
Modbus input value
The Preset value
Units descriptor
bool
bool
bool
float32
time_t
uint8
uint8
float32
time_t
float32
bool
bool
uint8
bool
float32
uint8
float32
uint8
bool
bool
bool
float32
time_t
uint8
uint8
float32
time_t
float32
bool
bool
uint8
bool
float32
uint8
float32
uint8
string_t
bool
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
uint8
int32
bool
float32
float32
bool
uint8
bool
uint8
time_t
bool
uint8
string_t
float32
uint8
float32
float32
01c4
1d50
1d4b
1d48
1d4a
1d42
1d49
1d47
1d45
1d44
1d4e
1d51
1d41
1d4f
1d46
012a
1d43
1d40
01c5
1d70
1d6b
1d68
1d6a
1d62
1d69
1d67
1d65
1d64
1d6e
1d71
1d61
1d6f
1d66
012b
1d63
1d60
4b36
1d23
1d05
1d07
1d08
1d04
1d06
1d01
1d0a
1d0c
1d0d
0128
1d0b
1d02
1d11
0129
1d09
1d0e
1d00
4b4b
1d03
1d20
1d22
1d21
452
7504
7499
7496
7498
7490
7497
7495
7493
7492
7502
7505
7489
7503
7494
298
7491
7488
453
7536
7531
7528
7530
7522
7529
7527
7525
7524
7534
7537
7521
7535
7526
299
7523
7520
19254
7459
7429
7431
7432
7428
7430
7425
7434
7436
7437
296
7435
7426
7441
297
7433
7438
7424
19275
7427
7456
7458
7457
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
1dp
Not applicable
Page 229
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11

Parameter path
Description
Type
Hex
Dec
Resolution
Alarm dwell time
1 = alarm inhibited
Deviation alarAlarm dwell timeAlarm dwell
1 = alarm inhibited
Input 1 value
Input 2 value
Modbus input value
Averaging period
The Preset value
Units descriptor
bool
bool
bool
float32
time_t
uint8
uint8
float32
time_t
float32
bool
bool
uint8
bool
float32
uint8
float32
uint8
bool
bool
bool
float32
time_t
uint8
uint8
time_t
float32
bool
bool
uint8
bool
float32
uint8
float32
uint8
string_t
bool
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
uint8
int32
bool
float32
float32
bool
uint8
bool
uint8
time_t
bool
uint8
string_t
float32
uint8
float32
float32
01c6
1dd0
1dcb
1dc8
1dca
1dc2
1dc9
1dc7
1dc5
1dc4
1dce
1dd1
1dc1
1dcf
1dc6
012e
1dc3
1dc0
01c7
1df0
1deb
1de8
1dea
1de2
1de9
1de5
1de4
1dee
1df1
1de1
1def
1de6
012f
1de3
1de0
4b51
1da3
1d85
1d87
1d88
1d84
1d86
1d81
1d8a
1d8c
1d8d
012c
1d8b
1d82
1d91
012d
1d89
1d8e
1d80
4b66
1d83
1da0
1da2
1da1
454
7632
7627
7624
7626
7618
7625
7623
7621
7620
7630
7633
7617
7631
7622
302
7619
7616
455
7664
7659
7656
7658
7650
7657
7653
7652
7662
7665
7649
7663
7654
303
7651
7648
19281
7587
7557
7559
7560
7556
7558
7553
7562
7564
7565
300
7563
7554
7569
301
7561
7566
7552
19302
7555
7584
7586
7585
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
1dp
Not applicable
Alarm dwell time
1 = alarm inhibited
bool
bool
bool
float32
time_t
uint8
uint8
float32
time_t
float32
bool
bool
uint8
bool
float32
uint8
float32
uint8
bool
bool
bool
01c8
1e50
1e4b
1e48
1e4a
1e42
1e49
1e47
1e45
1e44
1e4e
1e51
1e41
1e4f
1e46
0132
1e43
1e40
01c9
1e70
1e6b
456
7760
7755
7752
7754
7746
7753
7751
7749
7748
7758
7761
7745
7759
7750
306
7747
7744
457
7792
7787
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Page 230
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11

Parameter path
Description
Type
Hex
Dec
Resolution

Alarm dwell time
1 = alarm inhibited
Input 1 value
Input 2 value
Modbus input value
The Preset value
nitiate reset. 0 = No; 1 = Yes
Units descriptor
float32
time_t
uint8
uint8
float32
time_t
float32
bool
bool
uint8
bool
float32
uint8
float32
uint8
string_t
bool
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
uint8
int32
bool
float32
float32
bool
uint8
bool
uint8
time_t
bool
uint8
string_t
float32
uint8
float32
float32
1e68
1e6a
1e62
1e69
1e67
1e65
1e64
1e6e
1e71
1e61
1e6f
1e66
0133
1e63
1e60
4b6c
1e23
1e05
1e07
1e08
1e04
1e06
1e01
1e0a
1e0c
1e0d
0130
1e0b
1e02
1e11
0131
1e09
1e0e
1e00
4b81
1e03
1e20
1e22
1e21
7784
7786
7778
7785
7783
7781
7780
7790
7793
7777
7791
7782
307
7779
7776
19308
7715
7685
7687
7688
7684
7686
7681
7690
7692
7693
304
7691
7682
7697
305
7689
7694
7680
19329
7683
7712
7714
7713
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
1dp
Not applicable
Alarm dwell time
1 = alarm inhibited
Alarm dwell time
1 = alarm inhibited
Input 1 value
Input 2 value
bool
bool
bool
float32
time_t
uint8
uint8
float32
time_t
float32
bool
bool
uint8
bool
float32
uint8
float32
uint8
bool
bool
bool
float32
time_t
uint8
uint8
float32
time_t
float32
bool
bool
uint8
bool
float32
uint8
float32
uint8
string_t
bool
float32
float32
float32
01ca
1ed0
1ecb
1ec8
1eca
1ec2
1ec9
1ec7
1ec5
1ec4
1ece
1ed1
1ec1
1ecf
1ec6
0136
1ec3
1ec0
01cb
1ef0
1eeb
1ee8
1eea
1ee2
1ee9
1ee7
1ee5
1ee4
1eee
1ef1
1ee1
1eef
1ee6
0137
1ee3
1ee0
4b87
1ea3
1e85
1e87
1e88
458
7888
7883
7880
7882
7874
7881
7879
7877
7876
7886
7889
7873
7887
7878
310
7875
7872
459
7920
7915
7912
7914
7906
7913
7911
7909
7908
7918
7921
7905
7919
7910
311
7907
7904
19335
7843
7813
7815
7816
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Page 231
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11

Parameter path
Description
Type
Hex
Dec
Resolution

Modbus input value
The Preset value
ncrement/decrement counter. 0 = No; 1 = Yes
Units descriptor
float32
float32
uint8
int32
bool
float32
float32
bool
uint8
bool
uint8
time_t
bool
uint8
string_t
float32
uint8
float32
float32
1e84
1e86
1e81
1e8a
1e8c
1e8d
0134
1e8b
1e82
1e91
0135
1e89
1e8e
1e80
4b9c
1e83
1ea0
1ea2
1ea1
7812
7814
7809
7818
7820
7821
308
7819
7810
7825
309
7817
7822
7808
19356
7811
7840
7842
7841
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
1dp
Not applicable
Alarm dwell time
1 = alarm inhibited
Alarm dwell time
1 = alarm inhibited
As VirtualChanneAlarm trigger thresholdAlarm threshold
Input 1 value
Input 2 value
Modbus input value
Averaging period
The Preset value
Time remaining before calculation is made
Units descriptor
bool
bool
bool
float32
time_t
uint8
uint8
float32
time_t
float32
bool
bool
uint8
bool
float32
uint8
float32
uint8
bool
bool
bool
float32
time_t
uint8
uint8
float32
time_t
float32
bool
bool
uint8
bool
float32
float32
uint8
string_t
bool
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
uint8
int32
bool
float32
float32
bool
uint8
bool
uint8
time_t
bool
uint8
string_t
float32
uint8
float32
float32
01cc
1f50
1f4b
1f48
1f4a
1f42
1f49
1f47
1f45
1f44
1f4e
1f51
1f41
1f4f
1f46
013a
1f43
1f40
01cd
1f70
1f6b
1f68
1f6a
1f62
1f69
1f67
1f65
1f64
1f6e
1f71
1f61
1f6f
1f66
1f63
1f60
4ba2
1f23
1f05
1f07
1f08
1f04
1f06
1f01
1f0a
1f0c
1f0d
0138
1f0b
1f02
1f11
0139
1f09
1f0e
1f00
4bb7
1f03
1f20
1f22
1f21
460
8016
8011
8008
8010
8002
8009
8007
8005
8004
8014
8017
8001
8015
8006
314
8003
8000
461
8048
8043
8040
8042
8034
8041
8039
8037
8036
8046
8049
8033
8047
8038
8035
8032
19362
7971
7941
7943
7944
7940
7942
7937
7946
7948
7949
312
7947
7938
7953
313
7945
7950
7936
19383
7939
7968
7970
7969
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
1dp
Not applicable
bool
01ce
462
Not applicable
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
Page 232

Parameter path
Description
Type
Hex
Dec
Resolution
Alarm dwell time
1 = alarm inhibited
Alarm dwell time
1 = alarm inhibited
Input 1 value
Input 2 value
Modbus input value
The Preset value
Units descriptor
bool
bool
float32
time_t
uint8
uint8
float32
time_t
float32
bool
bool
uint8
bool
float32
uint8
float32
uint8
bool
bool
bool
float32
time_t
uint8
uint8
float32
time_t
float32
bool
bool
uint8
bool
float32
uint8
float32
uint8
string_t
bool
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
uint8
int32
bool
float32
float32
bool
uint8
bool
uint8
time_t
bool
uint8
string_t
float32
uint8
float32
float32
1fd0
1fcb
1fc8
1fca
1fc2
1fc9
1fc7
1fc5
1fc4
1fce
1fd1
1fc1
1fcf
1fc6
013e
1fc3
1fc0
01cf
1ff0
1feb
1fe8
1fea
1fe2
1fe9
1fe7
1fe5
1fe4
1fee
1ff1
1fe1
1fef
1fe6
013f
1fe3
1fe0
4bbd
1fa3
1f85
1f87
1f88
1f84
1f86
1f81
1f8a
1f8c
1f8d
013c
1f8b
1f82
1f91
013d
1f89
1f8e
1f80
4bd2
1f83
1fa0
1fa2
1fa1
8144
8139
8136
8138
8130
8137
8135
8133
8132
8142
8145
8129
8143
8134
318
8131
8128
463
8176
8171
8168
8170
8162
8169
8167
8165
8164
8174
8177
8161
8175
8166
319
8163
8160
19389
8099
8069
8071
8072
8068
8070
8065
8074
8076
8077
316
8075
8066
8081
317
8073
8078
8064
19410
8067
8096
8098
8097
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
1dp
Not applicable
Alarm dwell time
1 = alarm inhibited
bool
bool
bool
float32
time_t
uint8
uint8
float32
time_t
float32
bool
bool
uint8
bool
float32
uint8
float32
uint8
bool
bool
bool
01d0
2050
204b
2048
204a
2042
2049
2047
2045
2044
204e
2051
2041
204f
2046
0142
2043
2040
01d1
2070
206b
464
8272
8267
8264
8266
8258
8265
8263
8261
8260
8270
8273
8257
8271
8262
322
8259
8256
465
8304
8299
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Page 233
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11

Parameter path
Description
Type
Hex
Dec
Resolution
Rate-of-change alarm Amountt

Alarm dwell time
Inhibit
Input 1 value
Input 2 value
Modbus input value
The Preset value
Units descriptor
float32
time_t
uint8
uint8
float32
time_t
float32
bool
bool
uint8
bool
float32
uint8
float32
uint8
string_t
bool
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
uint8
int32
bool
float32
float32
bool
uint8
bool
uint8
time_t
bool
uint8
string_t
float32
uint8
float32
float32
2068
206a
2062
2069
2067
2065
2064
206e
2071
2061
206f
2066
0143
2063
2060
4bd8
2023
2005
2007
2008
2004
2006
2001
200a
200c
200d
0140
200b
2002
2011
0141
2009
200e
2000
4bed
2003
2020
2022
2021
8296
8298
8290
8297
8295
8293
8292
8302
8305
8289
8303
8294
323
8291
8288
19416
8227
8197
8199
8200
8196
8198
8193
8202
8204
8205
320
8203
8194
8209
321
8201
8206
8192
19437
8195
8224
8226
8225
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
1dp
Not applicable
Alarm dwell time
1 = alarm inhibited
Alarm dwell time
1 = alarm inhibited
Input 1 value
Input 2 value
bool
bool
bool
float32
time_t
uint8
uint8
float32
time_t
float32
bool
bool
uint8
bool
float32
uint8
float32
uint8
bool
bool
bool
float32
time_t
uint8
uint8
float32
time_t
float32
bool
bool
uint8
bool
float32
uint8
float32
uint8
string_t
bool
float32
float32
float32
01d2
20d0
20cb
20c8
20ca
20c2
20c9
20c7
20c5
20c4
20ce
20d1
20c1
20cf
20c6
0146
20c3
20c0
01d3
20f0
20eb
20e8
20ea
20e2
20e9
20e7
20e5
20e4
20ee
20f1
20e1
20ef
20e6
0147
20e3
20e0
4bf3
20a3
2085
2087
2088
466
8400
8395
8392
8394
8386
8393
8391
8389
8388
8398
8401
8385
8399
8390
326
8387
8384
467
8432
8427
8424
8426
8418
8425
8423
8421
8420
8430
8433
8417
8431
8422
327
8419
8416
19443
8355
8325
8327
8328
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
Page 234

Parameter path
Description
Type
Hex
Dec
Resolution

Modbus input value
Averaging period
The Preset value
Units descriptor
float32
float32
uint8
int32
bool
float32
float32
bool
uint8
bool
uint8
time_t
bool
uint8
string_t
float32
uint8
float32
float32
2084
2086
2081
208a
208c
208d
0144
208b
2082
2091
0145
2089
208e
2080
4c08
2083
20a0
20a2
20a1
8324
8326
8321
8330
8332
8333
324
8331
8322
8337
325
8329
8334
8320
19464
8323
8352
8354
8353
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
1dp
Not applicable
Alarm dwell time
1 = alarm inhibited
Alarm dwell time
1 = alarm inhibited
Input 1 value
Input 2 value
Modbus input value
The Preset value
Units descriptor
bool
bool
bool
float32
time_t
uint8
uint8
float32
time_t
float32
bool
bool
uint8
bool
float32
uint8
float32
uint8
bool
bool
bool
float32
time_t
uint8
uint8
float32
time_t
float32
bool
bool
uint8
bool
float32
uint8
float32
uint8
string_t
bool
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
uint8
int32
bool
float32
float32
bool
uint8
bool
uint8
time_t
bool
uint8
string_t
float32
uint8
float32
float32
01d4
2150
214b
2148
214a
2142
2149
2147
2145
2144
214e
2151
2141
214f
2146
014a
2143
2140
01d5
2170
216b
2168
216a
2162
2169
2167
2165
2164
216e
2171
2161
216f
2166
014b
2163
2160
4c0e
2123
2105
2107
2108
2104
2106
2101
210a
210c
210d
0148
210b
2102
2111
0149
2109
210e
2100
4c23
2103
2120
2122
2121
468
8528
8523
8520
8522
8514
8521
8519
8517
8516
8526
8529
8513
8527
8518
330
8515
8512
469
8560
8555
8552
8554
8546
8553
8551
8549
8548
8558
8561
8545
8559
8550
331
8547
8544
19470
8483
8453
8455
8456
8452
8454
8449
8458
8460
8461
328
8459
8450
8465
329
8457
8462
8448
19491
8451
8480
8482
8481
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
1dp
Not applicable
Page 235
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11

Parameter path
Description
Type
Hex
Dec
Resolution
Alarm dwell time
1 = alarm inhibited
Alarm dwell time
1 = alarm inhibited
Virtual Channel descriptorl
Input 1 value
Input 2 value
Modbus input value
The Preset value
Units descriptor
bool
bool
bool
float32
time_t
uint8
uint8
float32
time_t
float32
bool
bool
uint8
bool
float32
uint8
float32
uint8
bool
bool
bool
float32
time_t
uint8
uint8
float32
time_t
float32
bool
bool
uint8
bool
float32
uint8
float32
uint8
string_t
bool
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
uint8
int32
bool
float32
float32
bool
uint8
bool
uint8
time_t
bool
uint8
string_t
float32
uint8
float32
float32
01d6
21d0
21cb
21c8
21ca
21c2
21c9
21c7
21c5
21c4
21ce
21d1
21c1
21cf
21c6
014e
21c3
21c0
01d7
21f0
21eb
21e8
21ea
21e2
21e9
21e7
21e5
21e4
21ee
21f1
21e1
21ef
21e6
014f
21e3
21e0
4c29
21a3
2185
2187
2188
2184
2186
2181
218a
218c
218d
014c
218b
2182
2191
014d
2189
218e
2180
4c3e
2183
21a0
21a2
21a1
470
8656
8651
8648
8650
8642
8649
8647
8645
8644
8654
8657
8641
8655
8646
334
8643
8640
471
8688
8683
8680
8682
8674
8681
8679
8677
8676
8686
8689
8673
8687
8678
335
8675
8672
19497
8611
8581
8583
8584
8580
8582
8577
8586
8588
8589
332
8587
8578
8593
333
8585
8590
8576
19518
8579
8608
8610
8609
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
1dp
Not applicable
Alarm dwell time
1 = alarm inhibited
bool
bool
bool
float32
time_t
uint8
uint8
float32
time_t
float32
bool
bool
uint8
bool
float32
uint8
float32
uint8
bool
bool
01d8
2250
224b
2248
224a
2242
2249
2247
2245
2244
2251
224e
2241
224f
2246
0152
2243
2240
01d9
2270
472
8784
8779
8776
8778
8770
8777
8775
8773
8772
8785
8782
8769
8783
8774
338
8771
8768
473
8816
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
Page 236

Parameter path
Description
Type
Hex
Dec
Resolution

Alarm dwell time
1 = alarm inhibited
Input 1 value
Input 2 value
Modbus input value
The Preset value
Units descriptor
bool
float32
time_t
uint8
uint8
float32
time_t
float32
bool
bool
uint8
bool
float32
uint8
float32
uint8
string_t
bool
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
uint8
int32
bool
float32
float32
bool
uint8
bool
uint8
time_t
bool
uint8
string_t
float32
uint8
float32
float32
226b
2268
226a
2262
2269
2267
2265
2264
226e
2271
2261
226f
2266
0153
2263
2260
4c44
2223
2205
2207
2208
2204
2206
2201
220a
220c
220d
0150
220b
2202
2211
0151
2209
220e
2200
4c59
2203
2220
2222
2221
8811
8808
8810
8802
8809
8807
8805
8804
8814
8817
8801
8815
8806
339
8803
8800
19524
8739
8709
8711
8712
8708
8710
8705
8714
8716
8717
336
8715
8706
8721
337
8713
8718
8704
19545
8707
8736
8738
8737
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
1dp
Not applicable
Alarm dwell time
1 = alarm inhibited
Alarm dwell time
1 = alarm inhibited
Input 1 value
bool
bool
bool
float32
time_t
uint8
uint8
float32
time_t
float32
bool
bool
uint8
bool
float32
uint8
float32
uint8
bool
bool
bool
float32
time_t
uint8
uint8
float32
time_t
float32
bool
bool
uint8
bool
float32
uint8
float32
uint8
string_t
bool
float32
float32
01da
22d0
22cb
22c8
22ca
22c2
22c9
22c7
22c5
22c4
22ce
22d1
22c1
22cf
22c6
0156
22c3
22c0
01db
22f0
22eb
22e8
22ea
22e2
22e9
22e7
22e5
22e4
22ee
22f1
22e1
22ef
22e6
0157
22e3
22e0
4c5f
22a3
2285
2287
474
8912
8907
8904
8906
8898
8905
8903
8901
8900
8910
8913
8897
8911
8902
342
8899
8896
475
8944
8939
8936
8938
8930
8937
8935
8933
8932
8942
8945
8929
8943
8934
343
8931
8928
19551
8867
8837
8839
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Page 237
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11

Parameter path
Description
Type
Hex
Dec
Resolution
Input 2 value
Modbus input value
The preset value
Units descriptor
float32
float32
float32
uint8
int32
bool
float32
float32
bool
uint8
bool
uint8
time_t
bool
uint8
string_t
float32
uint8
float32
float32
2288
2284
2286
2281
228a
228c
228d
0154
228b
2282
2291
0155
2289
228e
2280
4c75
2283
22a0
22a2
22a1
8840
8836
8838
8833
8842
8844
8845
340
8843
8834
8849
341
8841
8846
8832
19573
8835
8864
8866
8865
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
1dp
Not applicable
Alarm dwell time
1 = Alarm inhibited
Alarm dwell time
1 = alarm inhibited
Input 1 value
Input 2 value
Modbus input value
Specifies the preset value
Units descriptor
bool
bool
bool
float32
time_t
uint8
uint8
float32
time_t
float32
bool
bool
uint8
bool
float32
uint8
float32
uint8
bool
bool
bool
float32
time_t
uint8
uint8
float32
time_t
float32
bool
bool
uint8
bool
float32
uint8
float32
uint8
string_t
bool
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
uint8
int32
bool
float32
float32
bool
uint8
bool
uint8
time_t
bool
uint8
string_t
float32
uint8
float32
float32
01de
2350
234b
2348
234a
2342
2349
2347
2345
2344
234e
2351
2341
234f
2346
015a
2343
2340
01dd
2370
236b
2368
236a
2362
2369
2367
2365
2364
236e
2371
2361
236f
2366
015b
2363
2360
4c7b
2323
2305
2307
2308
2304
2306
2301
230a
230c
230d
0158
230b
2302
2311
0159
2309
230e
2300
4c90
2303
2320
2322
2321
478
9040
9035
9032
9034
9026
9033
9031
9029
9028
9038
9041
9025
9039
9030
346
9027
9024
477
9072
9067
9064
9066
9058
9065
9063
9061
9060
9070
9073
9057
9071
9062
347
9059
9056
19579
8995
8965
8967
8968
8964
8966
8961
8970
8972
8973
344
8971
8962
8977
345
8969
8974
8960
19600
8963
8992
8994
8993
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
1dp
Not applicable
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
Page 238

Parameter path
Description
Type
Hex
Dec
Resolution

Input 1 value
Input 2 value
Modbus input value
Units descriptor
string_t
bool
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
uint8
int32
bool
float32
float32
bool
uint8
bool
uint8
time_t
bool
uint8
string_t
float32
uint8
float32
float32
4c96
23a3
2385
2387
2388
2384
2386
2381
238a
238c
238d
015c
238b
2382
2391
015d
2389
238e
2380
4cab
2383
23a0
23a2
23a1
19606
9123
9093
9095
9096
9092
9094
9089
9098
9100
9101
348
9099
9090
9105
349
9097
9102
9088
19627
9091
9120
9122
9121
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
1dp
Not applicable

Input 1 value
Input 2 value
Modbus input value
Units descriptor
string_t
bool
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
uint8
int32
bool
float32
float32
bool
uint8
bool
uint8
time_t
bool
uint8
string_t
float32
uint8
float32
float32
4cb1
23e3
23c5
23c7
23c8
23c4
23c6
23c1
23ca
23cc
23cd
015e
23cb
23c2
23d1
015f
23c9
23ce
23c0
4cc6
23c3
23e0
23e2
23e1
19633
9187
9157
9159
9160
9156
9158
9153
9162
9164
9165
350
9163
9154
9169
351
9161
9166
9152
19654
9155
9184
9186
9185
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
1dp
Not applicable

Input 1 value
Input 2 value
Modbus input value
Increment/decrement counter. 0 = No; 1 = Yes)
Units descriptor
string_t
bool
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
uint8
int32
bool
float32
float32
bool
uint8
bool
uint8
time_t
bool
uint8
string_t
float32
uint8
float32
float32
4ccc
2523
2405
2407
2408
2404
2406
2401
240a
240c
240d
0160
240b
2402
2411
0161
2409
240e
2400
4ce1
2403
2520
2522
2521
19660
9507
9221
9223
9224
9220
9222
9217
9226
9228
9229
352
9227
9218
9233
353
9225
9230
9216
19681
9219
9504
9506
9505
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
1dp
Not applicable

Input 1 value
Input 2 value
string_t
bool
float32
float32
float32
float32
4ce7
2563
2445
2447
2448
2444
19687
9571
9285
9287
9288
9284
Not applicable
Not applicable
Page 239
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11

Parameter path
Description
Type
Hex
Dec
Resolution
Modbus input value

TAs VirtualChannel1.Main.Statusv
Units descriptor
float32
uint8
int32
bool
float32
float32
bool
uint8
bool
uint8
time_t
bool
uint8
string_t
float32
uint8
float32
float32
2446
2441
244a
244c
244d
0162
244b
2442
2451
0163
2449
244e
2440
4cfc
2443
2560
2562
2561
9286
9281
9290
9292
9293
354
9291
9282
9297
355
9289
9294
9280
19708
9283
9568
9570
9569
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
1dp
Not applicable

Input 1 value
Input 2 value
Modbus input value
TIncrement/decrement counter. 0 = No; 1 = Yes
Units descriptor
string_t
bool
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
uint8
int32
bool
float32
float32
bool
uint8
bool
uint8
time_t
bool
uint8
string_t
float32
uint8
float32
float32
4d02
25a3
2485
2487
2488
2484
2486
2481
248a
248c
248d
0164
248b
2482
2491
0165
2489
248e
2480
4d17
2483
25a0
25a2
25a1
19714
9635
9349
9351
9352
9348
9350
9345
9354
9356
9357
356
9355
9346
9361
357
9353
9358
9344
19735
9347
9632
9634
9633
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
1dp
Not applicable

Input 1 value
Input 2 value
Modbus input value
TThe virtual channel output value
Units descriptor
string_t
bool
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
uint8
int32
bool
float32
float32
bool
uint8
bool
uint8
time_t
bool
uint8
string_t
float32
uint8
float32
float32
4d1d
25e3
24c5
24c7
24c8
24c4
24c6
24c1
24ca
24cc
24cd
0166
24cb
24c2
24d1
0167
24c9
24ce
24c0
4d32
24c3
25e0
25e2
25e1
19741
9699
9413
9415
9416
9412
9414
9409
9418
9420
9421
358
9419
9410
9425
359
9417
9422
9408
19762
9411
9696
9698
9697
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
1dp
Not applicable

Input 1 value
Input 2 value
Modbus input value
TThe virtual channel output value
string_t
bool
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
uint8
int32
bool
float32
float32
4d38
2623
2505
2507
2508
2504
2506
2501
250a
250c
250d
0168
19768
9763
9477
9479
9480
9476
9478
9473
9482
9484
9485
360
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
Page 240

Parameter path
Description
Type
Hex
Dec
Resolution

Units descriptor
bool
uint8
bool
uint8
time_t
bool
uint8
string_t
float32
uint8
float32
float32
250b
2502
2511
0169
2509
250e
2500
4d4d
2503
2620
2622
2621
9483
9474
9489
361
9481
9486
9472
19789
9475
9760
9762
9761
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
1dp
Not applicable

Input 1 value
Input 2 value
Modbus input value
Units descriptor
string_t
bool
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
uint8
int32
bool
float32
float32
bool
uint8
bool
uint8
time_t
bool
uint8
string_t
float32
uint8
float32
float32
4d53
2663
2545
2547
2548
2544
2546
2541
254a
254c
254d
016a
254b
2542
2551
016b
2549
254e
2540
4d68
2543
2660
2662
2661
19795
9827
9541
9543
9544
9540
9542
9537
9546
9548
9549
362
9547
9538
9553
363
9545
9550
9536
19816
9539
9824
9826
9825
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
1dp
Not applicable

Input 1 value
Input 2 value
Modbus input value
Units descriptor
string_t
bool
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
uint8
int32
bool
float32
float32
bool
uint8
bool
uint8
time_t
bool
uint8
string_t
float32
uint8
float32
float32
4d6e
26a3
2585
2587
2588
2584
2586
2581
258a
258c
258d
016c
258b
2582
2591
016d
2589
258e
2580
4d83
2583
26a0
26a2
26a1
19822
9891
9605
9607
9608
9604
9606
9601
9610
9612
9613
364
9611
9602
9617
365
9609
9614
9600
19843
9603
9888
9890
9889
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
1dp
Not applicable

Input 1 value
Input 2 value
Modbus input value
string_t
bool
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
uint8
int32
bool
float32
float32
bool
uint8
bool
uint8
time_t
bool
4d89
26e3
25c5
25c7
25c8
25c4
25c6
25c1
25ca
25cc
25cd
016e
25cb
25c2
25d1
016f
25c9
25ce
19849
9955
9669
9671
9672
9668
9670
9665
9674
9676
9677
366
9675
9666
9681
367
9673
9678
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Page 241
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11

Parameter path
Description
Type
Hex
Dec
Resolution
Units descriptor
uint8
string_t
float32
uint8
float32
float32
25c0
4d9e
25c3
26e0
26e2
26e1
9664
19870
9667
9952
9954
9953
Not applicable
Not applicable
1dp
Not applicable

Input 1 value
Input 2 value
Modbus input value
Units descriptor
string_t
bool
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
uint8
int32
bool
float32
float32
bool
uint8
bool
uint8
time_t
bool
uint8
string_t
float32
uint8
float32
float32
4da4
2723
2605
2607
2608
2604
2606
2601
260a
260c
260d
0170
260b
2602
2611
0171
2609
260e
2600
4db9
2603
2720
2722
2721
19876
10019
9733
9735
9736
9732
9734
9729
9738
9740
9741
368
9739
9730
9745
369
9737
9742
9728
19897
9731
10016
10018
10017
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
1dp
Not applicable

Input 1 value
Input 2 value
Modbus input value
Units descriptor
string_t
bool
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
uint8
int32
bool
float32
float32
bool
uint8
bool
uint8
time_t
bool
uint8
string_t
float32
uint8
float32
float32
4dbf
2763
2645
2647
2648
2644
2646
2641
264a
264c
264d
0172
264b
2642
2651
0173
2649
264e
2640
4dd4
2643
2760
2762
2761
19903
10083
9797
9799
9800
9796
9798
9793
9802
9804
9805
370
9803
9794
9809
371
9801
9806
9792
19924
9795
10080
10082
10081
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
1dp
Not applicable

Input 1 value
Input 2 value
Modbus input value
Units descriptor
string_t
bool
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
uint8
int32
bool
float32
float32
bool
uint8
bool
uint8
time_t
bool
uint8
string_t
float32
uint8
float32
float32
4dda
27a3
2685
2687
2688
2684
2686
2681
268a
268c
268d
0174
268b
2682
2691
0175
2689
268e
2680
4def
2683
27a0
27a2
27a1
19930
10147
9861
9863
9864
9860
9862
9857
9866
9868
9869
372
9867
9858
9873
373
9865
9870
9856
19951
9859
10144
10146
10145
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
1dp
Not applicable
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
Page 242

Parameter path
Description
Type
Hex
Dec
Resolution

Input 1 value
Input 2 value
Modbus input value
Units descriptor
string_t
bool
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
uint8
int32
bool
float32
float32
bool
uint8
bool
uint8
time_t
bool
uint8
string_t
float32
uint8
float32
float32
4df5
27e3
26c5
26c7
26c8
26c4
26c6
26c1
26ca
26cc
26cd
0176
26cb
26c2
26d1
0177
26c9
26ce
26c0
4e0a
26c3
27e0
27e2
27e1
19957
10211
9925
9927
9928
9924
9926
9921
9930
9932
9933
374
9931
9922
9937
375
9929
9934
9920
19978
9923
10208
10210
10209
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
1dp
Not applicable

Input 1 value
Input 2 value
Modbus input value
Units descriptor
string_t
bool
float32
float32
float32
float32
float32
uint8
int32
bool
float32
float32
bool
uint8
bool
uint8
time_t
bool
uint8
string_t
float32
uint8
float32
float32
4e10
2823
2705
2707
2708
2704
2706
2701
270a
270c
270d
0178
270b
2702
2711
0179
2709
270e
2700
4e25
2703
2820
2822
2821
19984
10275
9989
9991
9992
9988
9990
9985
9994
9996
9997
376
9995
9986
10001
377
9993
9998
9984
20005
9987
10272
10274
10273
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
1dp
Not applicable
Zirconia.aC_CO_O2
Zirconia.BalanceIntegral
Zirconia.CarbonPot
Zirconia.Clean.AbortClean
Zirconia.Clean.CantClean
Zirconia.Clean.CleanAbort
Carbon Activity Between CO and O2

Balance Integral
Calculated Carbon Potential
1 = Abort cleaning process
1 = cant clean
1 = Cleaning cycle has been aborted
1 = probe cleaning allowed
Interval between probe cleaning cycles
Maximum temperature for cleaning. If, during the cleaning
cycle, the probe temperature exceeds this value, cleaning
is aborted.
1 = Clear cleaning related alarms
1 = Initiate a probe cleaning cycle
The time taken to recover from last clean.
0 = max. clean recovery time exceeded last time
1 = Clean cycle aborted because cleaning temperature was
too high.
The time for which the probe is cleaned
1 = Enable probe cleaning valve
Probe output after last clean, in mV
Max. recovery time after a purge
Min. recovery time after a purge
1 = Probe failed to recover following the clean cycle
Time to next cleaning cycle
Interval between cleaning cycles
Initiates a demand cleaning cycle
Cleaning State (0 = Waiting, 1 = Cleaning, 2 = Recovering)
The time for which the probe is cleaned
1 = Enable probe cleaning valve
Calculated Dewpoint
Reference value for hydrogen concentration
float32
bool
float32
bool
bool
bool
bool
time_t
float32
289e
289d
2892
28b5
28c3
28c4
28b2
28aa
28b4
10398
10397
10386
10421
10435
10436
10418
10410
10420
4dp
Not applicable
Set by Zirconia.Resolution
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
0dp
bool
bool
time_t
28b3
28b0
28b6

bool
28c5
time_t
bool
float32
time_t
time_t
bool
time_t
time_t
bool
uint8
time_t
bool
float32
float32
28ab
28af
28b7
28ad
28ac
28ae
28b1
2889
289a
2899
288a
2898
2893
2882
10411
10415
10423
10413
10412
10414
10417
10377
10394
10393
10378
10392
10387
10370
Zirconia.Clean.CleanMsgReset
Zirconia.Clean.CleanProbe
Zirconia.Clean.CleanRecoveryTime
Zirconia.Clean.CleanTemp
Zirconia.Clean.CleanValve
Zirconia.Clean.LastCleanMv
Zirconia.Clean.ProbeFault
Zirconia.Clean.Time2Clean
Zirconia.CleanFreq
Zirconia.CleanProbe
Zirconia.CleanState
Zirconia.CleanTime
Zirconia.CleanValve
Zirconia.DewPoint
Zirconia.GasRef
Page 243
Not applicable
0dp
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
1dp
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11

Parameter path
Description
Zirconia.GasRefs.CO_InUse
Zirconia.GasRefs.CO_Remote
Zirconia.GasRefs.H2_InUse
Zirconia.GasRefs.H2_Remote
Zirconia.MinCalTemp
Zirconia.Oxygen
Zirconia.OxygenExp
Zirconia.OxygenType
Gas ref value when Oxygen Type = Nernst

The CO gas measurement value being used
Reference value for CO concentration
CO concentration from remote source
1 = Allow remote gas measurement
The hydrogen gas measurement value being used
Reference value for hydrogen concentration
Hydrogen concentration from remote source
1 = Allow remote gas measurement
Maximum recovery time after a purge
Min. temp at which the calculation is valid
Minimum recovery time after a purge
Number of decimal places
Calculated Oxygen value
Exponent used by log oxygen calculations
The oxygen equation being used.uint8
0 = Nernst
1=Nernst Bosch
2 = Nernst CP
3= Ferronova
Probe Clean Recovery Warning
Probe input in mV
Probe offset in mV
State of the probe measurement system
0 = Measuring
1 = Cleaning
2 = Clean Recovery
3 = Test impedance
4 = Impedance recovery
5 = Not ready
Status of Probe
uint8
0 = OK
1 = mVSbr
2 = TempSbr
3 = MincalcT
Type of Probe
25 = MMI
26 = AACC
27 = Dray
28 = Accu
29 = SSI
30 = MacD
31 = Bosch
32 = Barber
33 = ferono
34 = PrbmV
35 = Eurotherm
Process Factor (Value defined by probe manufacturer)
1 = PV frozen
1 = Enable use of remote gas reference
Remote Gas Reference Value
1 = Soot alarm active
Probe temperature Input
Temperature Offset
Time To Next Clean
Sooting Tolerance
Working Reference Gas Value
Zirconia.ProbeFault
Zirconia.ProbeInput
Zirconia.ProbeState
Zirconia.ProbeStatus
Zirconia.ProbeType
Zirconia.ProcFactor
Zirconia.PVFrozen
Zirconia.RemGasEn
Zirconia.RemGasRef
Zirconia.SootAlm
Zirconia.TempInput
Zirconia.TempOffset
Zirconia.Time2Clean
Zirconia.Tolerance
Zirconia.WrkGas
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
Type
Hex
Dec
float32
float32
float32
float32
bool
float32
float32
float32
bool
time_t
float32
time_t
uint8
float32
int16
28a0
28a9
28a4
28a1
28a2
28a3
28a8
28a5
28a6
28a7
288c
2886
288b
2881
2894
288d
10409
10404
10401
10402
10403
10408
10405
10406
10407
10380
10374
10379
10369
10388
10381
10400
bool
float32
float32
uint8
2896
2890
2891
289f
10390
10384
10385
10399
289c
10396
Resolution
1dp
1dp
1dp
1dp
Not applicable
1dp
1dp
1dp
Not applicable
Same as Zirconia.TempInput
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
0dp
Not applicable
Not applicable
uint8
2880
float32
bool
bool
float32
bool
float32
float32
time_t
float32
float32
2888
2897
2884
2883
2895
288e
288f
289b
2887
2885
10376
10391
10372
10371
10389
10382
10383
10395
10375
10373
1dp
Not applicable
Not applicable
1dp
Not applicable
0dp
1dp
1dp
Page 244
6 iTOOLS
iTools software running on a pc allows quick and easy access to the configuration of the unit. The parameters
used are generally the same as those described in section 4 above, with the addition of various diagnostic
parameters.
iTools also gives the user the ability to create software wiring between function blocks, such wiring being
carried out using the Graphical wiring Editor feature.
A further feature - the display mode Promote List, is populated using iTools - see section 3.4.11 for details.
In addition to the guidance given here, there are two on-line Help systems available within iTools: Parameter
help and iTools help. Parameter help is accessed by clicking on Help in the toolbar (opens the complete
parameter help system), by right-clicking on a parameter and selecting Parameter Help from the resulting
context menu, or by clicking on the Help menu and selecting Device Help. iTools help is accessed by clicking on the Help menu, and selecting Contents. iTools help is also available in manual format under part
number HA028838, either as a physical manual or as a pdf file.
Figure 6 Help access
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
Page 245
6.1 iTools CONNECTION

The following descriptions assume that iTools software has been correctly installed on the pc.
6.1.1 Ethernet (Modbus TCP) communications

Note: the following description is based on windows XP. Windows Vista is similar.
It is first necessary to determine the IP address of the unit, as described under Network.Interface in section
4.2.1.
Once the Ethernet link has been correctly installed, carry out the following actions at the pc:
1. Click on Start
2. Click on Control Panel. (If Control Panel opens in Category View select Classic View instead.)
3. Double-click on iTools.
4. Click on the TCP/IP tab in the Registry settings configuration.
5. Click on Add... The New TCP/IP Port dialogue box opens.
6. Type-in a name for the port, then click Add... again
7. Type the IP address of the unit in the Edit Host box which appears. Click OK.
8. Check the details in the New TCP/IP Port box, then click on OK.
9. Click on OK in the Registry settings box to confirm the new port.
(Continued)
Figure 6.1.1a Adding a new Ethernet port
Page 246
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
6.1.1 ETHERNET (TCP/IP) COMMUNICATIONS (Cont.)

To check that the pc can now communicate with the instrument, Click Start. All Programs, Accessories,
Command Prompt
when the Command Prompt box appears, type in: Ping<Space>IP1.IP2.IP3.IP4<Enter> (where IP1 to IP4 are
the IP address of the instrument).
If the Ethernet link to the instrument is operating correctly, the successful reply arrives. Otherwise, the
failed reply arrives, in which case, the Ethernet link, IP address, and pc port details should be verified.
Figure 6.1.1b Command prompt Ping screens (typical)
Once the Ethernet link to the instrument has been verified, iTools can be started (or shut down and
restarted), and the Scan toolbar icon used, to find the instrument. The scan can be stopped at any
time by clicking on the Scan icon a second time.
See section 6.2 for more details of the scan procedure.
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
Page 247
6.1.2 Direct Connection

This section describes how to connect a pc directly to the instrument.
WIRING
Connection is made from the Ethernet connector at the rear of the Instrument to an Ethernet RJ45
connector, usually located at the rear of the pc. The cable can be either a cross-over or straight
through type.
PC Ethernet
connector.
Once wired correctly, and powered up, it is necessary to enter a suitable IP address and subnet mask into
the Comms configuration of the Driver Module. This information can be found as follows:
1. At the pc, click Start. All Programs, Accessories, Command Prompt
2. When the Command Prompt box appears, type IPConfig<Enter>
The response is a display, such as that shown below, giving the IP address and Subnet mask of the pc.
Choose an address in the range covered by these two values.
A subnet mask element of 255 means that the equivalent element of the IP address must be used
unchanged. A subnet mask element of 0 means that the equivalent element of the IP address may take
any value between 1 and 255 (0 is not allowed). In the example below, the range of IP addresses which
may be chosen for the Driver Module is 123.123.123.2 to 123.123.123.255. (123.123.123.0 is not
allowed and 123.123.123.1 is the same as the pcs address, and may therefore not be used.)
Figure 6.1.2b IP Config command
3.
4.
In Network.Interface configuration (section 4.2.1) enter the selected IP address and the subnet mask
(as it appears in the command prompt window) in the relevant parts of the menu.
Check communications by pinging as described in section 6.1.1, above.
Once the link to the instrument has been verified, iTools can be started (or shut down and re-started), and
the Scan toolbar icon used, to find the instrument. The scan can be stopped at any time by clicking on the
Scan icon a second time.
See section 6.2 for more details of the scan procedure.
Subnet Masks and IP addresses.

Subnet Masks are most readily understood when looked at in binary format.
For example, a mask of 255.255.240.10 can be re-written as:
11111111.11111111.11110000.00001010. In such a case, IP addresses
11111111.11111111.1111xxxx.xxxx1x1x would be recognised (where x can be either a 0 or
Subnet mask
IP addresses
(Binary)
IP addresses
(decimal)
Page 248
255
255
240 to 255
10, 11, 14, 15,

26, 27, 30, 31,
42, 43, 46, 47 etc.
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
6.2 SCANNING FOR INSTRUMENTS

Clicking on the Scan toolbar icon causes a dialogue box (shown below) to appear. This allows the user to
define a search range of addresses.
Notes:
1. The relevant instrument address is that entered in the Network.Modbus configuration item (section 4.2.4, and it can take any value between 1 and 254 inclusive, as long as it is unique to the comms link.
2. The default selection (Scan all device addresses...) will detect any instrument on the serial link,
which has a valid address.
As the search progresses, any instruments detected by the scan appear as thumbnails (faceplates) in the
Panel Views area, normally located at the bottom of the iTools screen. (options/Panel Views position allows
this area to be moved to the top of the window, or the Close icon
can be used to close it. Once closed it
can be re-opened by clicking on Panel Views in the View menu.)
Figure 6.2a Scan range enable
Figure 6.2b iTools initial window with one instrument detected
Once the instrument has been detected stop the scan. When the instrument has synchronised, click on the
Access button to enter configuration mode (a password might be required). Once the editing session is
complete, click on the Access button again to quit configuration mode.
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
Page 249
6.3 GRAPHICAL WIRING EDITOR

Clicking on the Graphical wiring Editor tool bar icon causes the Graphical wiring window for the current instrument configuration to open.
Figure 6.3 Graphical wiring Editor
The graphical wiring editor allows:

1. Function blocks, notes, comments etc. to be drag and dropped into the wiring diagram from the tree
list (left pane).
2. Parameters to be wired to one another by clicking on the output, the clicking on the required input.
3. Viewing and/or editing of parameter values by right-clicking on a function block and selecting Function Block View.
4. The user to select parameter lists and to switch between parameter and wiring editors.
5. Completed wiring to be downloaded to the instrument (function blocks and wiring items with dashed
outlines are new, or have been edited since the last download).
Page 250
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
6.3.1 Tool bar
Download wiring to instrument

Mouse select. Select normal mouse operation. Mutually exclusive with Mouse Pan below.
Mouse Pan. When active, this causes the mouse cursor to change to a hand-shaped icon. Allows the
graphical wiring diagram to be click-dragged within the GWE window aperture.
Zoom. Allows the magnification factor of the wiring diagram to be selected
Pan tool. Whilst left clicked, the cursor appears as a rectangle showing which part of the wiring diagram is currently displayed. Click dragging allows the rectangle to be moved freely about the diagram. The size of the rectangle depends on the zoom setting.
Show/Hide grid. This toggles an alignment grid on and off.
Undo, redo.Allows the user to undo the last action, or, once an undo action has taken place, to undo
the undo. Short cuts are <Ctrl>+<Z. for undo; <Ctrl>+<V, for undo
Cut, Copy, Paste. Normal Cut (copy and delete), Copy (copy without delete) and Paste (insert into)
functions. Shortcuts are: <Ctrl> + <X> for Cut; <Ctrl> + <C> for copy and <Ctrl> + <V> for Paste.
Copy diagram fragment; Paste diagram fragment. Allows a part of the wiring diagram to be selected,
named and be saved to file. The fragment may then be pasted into any wiring diagram, including the
source diagram
Create compound; Flatten compound. These two icons allow compounds to be created and un created (flattened).
6.3.2 Wiring editor operating details

COMPONENT SELECTION
Single wires are shown with boxes at corners when selected. When more than one wire is selected, as part
of a group, the wire colour changes to magenta. All other items have a dashed line drawn round them when
selected.
Clicking on a single item selects it. An Item can be added to the selection by holding down the control key
(ctrl) whilst clicking on the item. (A selected item can be deselected in the same way.) If a block is selected,
then all its associated wires are also selected.
Alternatively, the mouse can be click-dragged on the background to create a rubber band round the relevant area; anything within this area being selected when the mouse is released.
<Ctrl>+<A> selects all items on the active diagram.
BLOCK EXECUTION ORDER
The order in which the blocks are executed by the instrument depends on the way in which they are wired.
Each block displays its place in its sequence in a coloured block in the bottom left-hand corner (figure
6.3.2a).
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
Page 251
6.3.2 WIRING EDITOR OPERATING DETAILS (Cont.)

FUNCTION BLOCKS
A Function Block is an algorithm which may be wired to and from other function blocks to make a control
strategy. Each function block has inputs and outputs. Any parameter may be wired from, but only parameters that are alterable in Operator Mode may we wired to. A function block includes any parameters that are
needed to configure or operate the algorithm. The inputs and outputs which are considered to be of most
use are always shown. In most cases all of these need to be wired before the block can perform a useful task.
If a function block is not faded in the tree (left hand pane) it can be dragged onto the diagram. The block
can be dragged around the diagram using the mouse.
A Channel block is shown below as an example. When block type information is alterable (as in this case)
click on the box with the down arrow in it to display a dialogue box allowing the value to be edited.
Down arrow
Position in
execution order
Figure 6.3.2a Function block example
If it is required to wire from a parameter, which is not shown as a recommended output, click on the
Click to Select Output icon in the bottom right hand corner to display a full list of parameters in the
block (figure 6.3.2c, below). Click on one of these to start a wire.
FUNCTION BLOCK CONTEXT MENU
Right click in the function block to display the context menu.
Function block view Displays a list of parameters associated with the function
block. Hidden parameters can be displayed by de-selecting Hide Parameters and Lists when not Relevant in the options menu Parameter availability setting... item
Re-Route wires
Redraws all wiring associated with the function block.
Re-route input wires Redraws all input wiring associated with the function block
Re-route output wires Redraws all output wiring associated with the function
block.
Show wiring using tags
Wires are not drawn, but their start and end destinations
are indicated by tags instead. Reduces wire clutter in diagrams where source and destination are widely separated.
Hovering the cursor over the tag shows both its source and
destination parameters and their values
Figure 6.3.2b Function block

context menu
Page 252
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11

FUNCTION BLOCK CONTEXT MENU (Cont.)
Hide unwanted connections
Causes the display to include only wired items.
Cut
Allows one or more selected items to be moved to the Clipboard ready for pasting into
another diagram or compound, or for use in a Watch window, or OPC scope. The original items are greyed out, and function blocks and wires are shown dashed until next
download, after which they are removed from the diagram. Short cut = <Ctrl>+<X>.
Cut operations carried out since the last download can be undone by using the Undo
tool bar icon, by selecting Undelete or by using the short cut <Ctrl>+<Z>.
Copy
Allows one or more selected items to be copied to the Clipboard ready for pasting into
another diagram or compound, or for use in a Watch window, or OPC scope. The original items remain in the current wiring diagram. Short cut = <Ctrl>+<C>. If items are
pasted to the same diagram from which they were copied, the items will be replicated
with different block instances. Should this result in more instances of a block than are
available, an error display appears showing details of which items couldnt be copied.
Paste
Copies items from the Clipboard to the current wiring diagram. Short cut =
<Ctrl>+<V>. If items are pasted to the same diagram from which they were copied, the
items will be replicated with different block instances. Should this result in more instances of a block than are available, a Paste error display appears showing details of
those items which could not be copied.
Delete
Marks all selected items for deletion. Such items are shown dashed until next download, after which they are removed from the diagram. Short cut = <Del>.
Undelete
Reverses Delete and Cut operations carried out on selected item(s) since the last
download.
Bring to Front
Brings selected items to the front of the diagram.
Push to Back
Sends the selected items to the back of the diagram.
Edit Parameter Value...This menu item is active if the cursor is hovering over an editable parameter. Selecting
this menu item causes a pop-up window to appear, which allows the user to edit the parameter value.
Parameter Properties This menu item is active if the cursor is hovering over an editable parameter. Selecting
this menu item causes a pop-up window to appear, which allows the user to view the
parameter properties, and also, to view the parameter Help (by clicking on the Help
tab).
Parameter Help
Produces Parameter Properties and Help information for the selected function block or
parameter, depending on the hover position of the cursor, when the right-click occurs.
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
Page 253

WIRES
To make a wire
1. Drag two (or more) blocks onto the diagram from the function block tree.
2. Start a wire by either clicking on a recommended output or
clicking on the Click to Select output icon at the bottom
right corner of the block to bring up the connection dialogue, and clicking on the required parameter. Recommended connections are shown with a green plug symbol;
other parameters which are available being shown in yellow. Clicking on the red button causes all parameters to be
shown. To dismiss the connection dialogue either press the
escape key on the keyboard, or click the cross at the bottom
left of the dialogue box.
3. Once the wire has started a dashed wire is drawn from the
output to the current mouse position. To complete the wire
click on the required destination parameter.
4. Wires remain dashed until they are downloaded
Figure 6.3.2c Output selection dialogue box.
Routing wires
When a wire is placed it is auto-routed. The auto routing algorithm searches for a clear path between the
two blocks. A wire can be auto-routed again using the context menus or by double clicking the wire. A wire
segment can be edited manually by click-dragging. If the block to which it is connected is moved, the end
of the wire moves with it, retaining as much of the path as possible.
If a wire is selected by clicking on it, it is drawn with small boxes on its corners.
Wire Context Menu
Right click on a wire to display the wire block context menu:
Force Exec Break When wires form a loop, a break point must be introduced,
where the value written to the block comes from a source which
was last executed during the previous cycle. A break is automatically placed by iTools, and appears in red.
Force Exec Break
allows the user to define where a break must be placed. Surplus
breaks appear in black.
Re-Route wire
Replaces the current wire route with a new route generated from
scratch.
Use Tags
Toggles between wire and tag mode between parameters. Tag
mode is useful for sources and destinations which are widely separated.
Find Start
Goes to the source of the wire.
Find End
Goes to the destination of the wire.
Cut, Copy, Paste
Not used in this context.
Delete
Marks the wire for deletion. The wire is redrawn as a dashed line (or dashed tags) until
next download. Operation can be reversed until after next download.
Undelete
Reverses the effect of the Delete operation up until the next download, after which, Undelete is disabled.
Bring to Front
Brings the wire to the front of the diagram.
Push to Back
Sends the wire to the back of the diagram.
Page 254
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11

Wire Colours
Black
Red
Magenta
Purple
Green
Normal functioning wire

The wire is connected to a non-changeable parameter. Values are rejected by the destination block.
A normal functioning wire is being hovered-over by the mouse cursor.
A red wire is being hovered-over by the mouse cursor.
New Wire (dashed green wire changes to solid black after being downloaded.)
COMMENTS
Comments are added to a wiring diagram by click-dragging them from the Function Block tree onto the diagram. As soon as the mouse is released, a dialogue box opens to allow the comment text to be entered.
Carriage returns are used to control the width of the comment. Once text entry is complete, OK causes the
comment to appear on the diagram. There are no restrictions on the size of a comment. Comments are
saved to the instrument along with the diagram layout information.
Comments can be linked to function blocks and wires by clicking on the chain icon at the bottom right-hand
corner of the comment box and then clicking again on the required block or wire. A dashed line is drawn to
the top of the block or to the selected wire segment (figure 6.3.2f).
Note: Once the comment has been linked, the Chain icon disappears. It re-appears when the
mouse cursor is hovered over the bottom right-hand corner of the comment box.
Comment Context Menu

Edit
Opens the Comment dialogue box to allow the comment text to
be edited.
Unlink
Deletes the current link from the comment.
Cut
Moves the comment to the Clipboard, ready to be pasted elsewhere. Short cut = <Ctrl>+<X>.
Copy
Copies the comment from the wiring diagram to the Clipboard,
ready to be pasted elsewhere. Short cut = <Ctrl>+<C>.
Paste
Copies a comment from the Clipboard to the wiring diagram.
Figure 6.3.2e
Short cut = <Ctrl>+<V>.
Comment context menu
Delete
Marks the comment for deletion at next download.
Undelete
Undoes the Delete command if download has not taken place
since.
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
Page 255

MONITORS
Monitor points are added to a wiring diagram by click-dragging them from the Function Block tree onto the
diagram. A monitor shows the current value (updated at the iTools parameter list update rate) of the parameter to which it is linked. By default the name of the parameter is shown. To hide the parameter name either
double click on the monitor box or Show Names in the context (right-click) menu can be used to toggle the
parameter name on and off.
Monitors are linked to function blocks and wires by clicking on the chain icon at the bottom right-hand corner of the box and then clicking again on the required parameter. A dashed line is drawn to the top of the
block or the selected wire segment.
Note: Once the monitor has been linked, the Chain icon disappears. It re-appears when the mouse
cursor is hovered over the bottom right-hand corner of the monitor box.
Figure 6.3.2f Comment and Monitor appearance
Monitor Context Menu

Show names
Unlink
Cut
Copy
Paste
Delete
Undelete
Bring to Front
Push to Back
Parameter Help
Toggles parameter names on and off in the monitor box.

Deletes the current link from the monitor.
Moves the monitor to the Clipboard, ready to be pasted elsewhere.
Short cut = <Ctrl>+<X>.
Copies the monitor from the wiring diagram to the Clipboard, ready
to be pasted elsewhere. Short cut = <Ctrl>+<C>.
Copies a monitor from the Clipboard to the wiring diagram. Short
cut = <Ctrl>+<V>.
Marks the monitor for deletion at next download.
Undoes the Delete command if download has not taken place
Figure 6.3.2g
since.
Monitor context menu
Moves the item to the top layer of the diagram.
Moves the item to the bottom layer of the diagram.
Shows parameter help for the item.
DOWNLOADING
When the wiring editor is opened the current wiring and diagram layout is read from the instrument. No
changes are made to the instrument function block execution or wiring until the download button is pressed.
Any changes made using the operator interface after the editor is opened are lost on download.
When a block is dropped onto the diagram, instrument parameters are changed to make the parameters for
that block available. If changes are made and the editor is closed without saving them there is a delay while
the editor clears these parameters.
During download, the wiring is written to the instrument which then calculates the block execution order and
starts executing the blocks. The diagram layout including comments and monitors is then written into instrument flash memory along with the current editor settings. When the editor is reopened, the diagram is
shown positioned as it was when it was last downloaded.
Page 256
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11

COLOURS
Items on the diagram are coloured as follows:
Red
Blue
Green
Magenta
Purple
Black
Items which totally or partially obscure other items and items which are totally or partially obscured by other items. Wires that are connected to unalterable or non-available
parameters. Execution breaks.
Non-available parameters in function blocks.
Items added to the diagram since last download are shown as green dashed lines.
All selected items, or any item over which the cursor is hovering.
Red wires when being hovered over by the mouse cursor.
All items added to the diagram before the last download. Redundant execution breaks.
Monitor and comment text.
DIAGRAM CONTEXT MENU

Cut
Active only when the right click occurs within the bounding
rectangle which appears when more than one item is selected. Moves the selection off the diagram to the Clipboard.
Short cut = <Ctrl>+<X>.
Copy
As for Cut, but the selection is copied, leaving the original
on the diagram. Short cut = <Ctrl>+<C>.
Paste
Copies the contents of the Clipboard to the diagram. Short
cut = <Ctrl>+<V>.
Re-Route wires
Reroutes all selected wires. If no wires are selected, all wires
are re-routed.
Align Tops
Aligns the tops of all blocks in the selected area.
Align Lefts
Aligns the left edges of all blocks in the selected area.
Space Evenly
Spaces selected items such that their top left corners are
spaced evenly across the width of the diagram. Click on the
item which is to be the left-most item, then <Ctrl>+<left
click> the remaining items in the order in which they are to
appear.
Delete
Marks the item for deletion at next download time.
Can be Undeleted up until download occurs.
Figure 6.3.2h
Undelete
Reverses the action of Delete on the selected item.
Diagram
context menu
Select All
Selects all items on the current diagram.
Create Compound Active only when the right click occurs, in the top level diagram, within the bounding
rectangle which appears when more than one item is selected. Creates a new wiring diagram as described in Compound, below.
Rename
Allows a new name to entered for the current wiring diagram. This name appears in the
relevant tab.
Copy Graphic
Copies the selected items (or the whole diagram if no items are selected) to the clipboard as a Windows metafile, suitable for pasting into a documentation application.
Wiring entering/leaving the selection (if any) are drawn in tag mode.
Save Graphic...
As for Copy Graphic above, but saves to a user-specified file location instead of the
clipboard.
Copy Fragment To File...
Copies selected items to a user-named file in folder My iTools Wiring Fragments located in My Documents.
Paste Fragment From File
Allows the user to select a stored fragment for inclusion in the wiring diagram.
Centre
Places the display window at the centre of the selected items. If Select All has previously been clicked-on, then the display widow is placed over the centre of the diagram.
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
Page 257

COMPOUNDS
Compounds are used to simplify the top level wiring diagram, by allowing the placing of any number of function blocks within one box, the inputs and outputs of which operate in the same way as those of a normal
function block.
Each time a compound is created, a new tab appears at the top of the wiring diagram. Initially compounds
and their tabs are named Compound 1, Compound 2, etc. but they can be renamed by right clicking either
on the compound in the top level diagram, or anywhere within an open Compound, selecting Rename and
typing in the required text string (16 characters max.).
Compounds cannot contain other compounds (i.e. they can be created only in the top level diagram).
Compound creation
1. Empty compounds are created within the top level diagram by clicking on the Create Compound tool
bar icon.
2. Compounds can also be created by highlighting one or more function blocks
in the top level diagram and then clicking on the Create Compound tool bar
Create
Flatten
icon. The highlighted items are moved from the top level diagram into a new compound compound
compound.
3. Compounds are uncreated (flattened), by highlighting the relevant item in the top level menu and
then clicking on the Flatten Compound tool bar icon. All the items previously contained within the
compound appear on the top level diagram.
4. Wiring between top level and compound parameters is carried out by clicking on the source parameter, then clicking on the compound (or the compound tab) and then clicking on the destination parameter. Wiring from a compound parameter to a top level parameter or from compound to compound is
carried out in similar manner.
5. Unused function blocks can be moved into compounds by dragging from the tree view. Existing blocks
can be dragged from the top level diagram, or from another compound, onto the tab associated with
the destination compound. Blocks are moved out of compounds to the top level diagram or to another
compound in a similar way. Function blocks can also be cut and pasted.
6. Default compound names (e.g. Compound 2) are used only once, so that if, for example, Compounds
1 and 2 have been created, and Compound 2 is subsequently deleted, then the next compound to be
created will be named Compound 3.
7. Top level elements can be click-dragged into compounds.
TOOL TIPS
Hovering the cursor over the block displays tooltips describing that part of the block beneath the cursor.
For function block parameters the tooltip shows the parameter description, its OPC name, and, if downloaded, its value. Similar tooltips are shown when hovering over inputs, outputs and over many other items on
the iTools screen.
A Function Block is enabled by dragging the block onto the diagram, wiring it, and finally downloading it to
the instrument. Initially blocks and associated wires are drawn with dashed lines, and when in this state the
parameter list for the block is enabled but the block is not executed by the instrument.
The block is added to the instrument function block execution list when the Download icon is operated and
the items are redrawn using solid lines.
If a block which has been downloaded is deleted, it is shown on the diagram in a ghosted form until the
download button is pressed. (This is because it and any wires to/from it are still being executed in the instrument. On download it will be removed from the instrument execution list and the diagram.) A ghosted block
can be undeleted as described in Context menu, above.
When a dashed block is deleted it is removed immediately.
Page 258
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
6.4 PARAMETER EXPLORER

This view can be displayed:
1. by clicking on the Parameter Explorer toolbar icon,
2. by double clicking on the relevant block in the tree pane or in the graphical wiring editor
3. by selecting Function Block View from the Function block context menu in the Graphical wiring Editor.
4. by selecting parameter Explorer from the View menu
5. by using the short cut <Alt>+<Enter>
In each case the function block parameters appear in the iTools window in tabular form, such as the example
in figure 6.4a, below.
Figure 6.4a Parameter table example
The figure above shows the default table layout. Columns can be added/deleted from the view using the
Columns item of the Explorer or context menus (figure 6.4b).
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
Page 259
6.4 PARAMETER EXPLORER (Cont.)
Explorer menu
Context menu
Figure 6.4b Column enable/disable
6.4.1 Parameter explorer detail

Figure 6.4.1a shows a typical parameter table. This particular parameter has a number of subfolders associated with it, and each of these is represented by a tab across the top of the table.
Figure 6.4.1a Typical parameter table
Notes:
1. Parameters in blue are non-editable (Read only). In the example above all the parameters are
read only. Read/write parameters are in black and have a pencil symbol in the read/Write access
column at the left edge of the table. A number of such items are shown in figure 6.4.1a, above.
2. Columns. The default explorer window (figure 6.4a) contains the columns Name, Description,
Address, Value, and Wired From. As can be seen from figure 6.4b, the columns to be displayed can be selected, to a certain extent, using either the Explorer menu or the context menu.
Limits have been enabled for the example above.
3. Hidden Parameters. By default, iTools hides parameters which are considered irrelevant in the
current context. Such hidden parameters can be shown in the table using the Parameter availability settings item of the options menu (figure 6.4.1b). Such items are displayed with a shaded
background.
4. The full pathname for the displayed parameter list is shown at the bottom left hand corner of the
window.
Page 260
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
6.4.1 PARAMETER EXPLORER DETAIL (Cont.)
Figure 6.4.1b Show/Hide parameters
6.4.2 Explorer tools

A number of tool icons appear above the parameter list:
Back to: and Forward to:. The parameter explorer contains a history buffer of up to 10 lists that have
been browsed in the current instance of the window. The Back to: (list name) and Forward to: (list
name) icons allow easy retracing or repeating of the parameter list view sequence.
If the mouse cursor is hovered over the tool icon, the name of the parameter list which will appear if the
icon is clicked-on appears. Clicking on the arrow head displays a pick list of up to 10 previously visited
lists which the user can select. Short cut = <Ctrl>+<B> for Back to or <Ctrl>+<F> for Forward to.
Go Up a Level, Go Down a Level. For nested parameters, these buttons allow the user to navigate vertically between levels. Short cut = <Ctrl>+<U> for Go Up a Level or <Ctrl>+<D> for Go Down a
Level.
Push pin to give the window global scope. Clicking on this icon causes the current parameter list to be
permanently displayed, even if another instrument becomes the current device.
6.4.3 Context Menu
Copy Parameter
Copies the clicked-on parameter to the clipboard
Parameter properties
Displays parameter properties for the clicked-on parameter
Parameter Help... Displays help information for the clicked-on parameter
Edit/Paste/Delete/Follow Wire
Not used in this application
Columns
Allows the user to enable/disable a number of parameter table columns (figure 6.1.4b).
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
Page 261
6.5 WATCH/RECIPE EDITOR

The watch/recipe editor is opened by clicking on the Watch/Recipe tool icon, by selecting Watch/Recipe
in the Views menu or by using the short cut <Ctrl>+<A>. The window is in two parts: the left part containing
the watch list; the right-hand part containing one or more data sets, initially empty and unnamed.
The Watch/Recipe window is used:
1. To monitor a list of parameters. This list can contain parameters from many different, and otherwise
unrelated parameter lists within the same device. It cannot contain parameters from different devices.
2. To create data sets of parameter values which can be selected and downloaded to the device in the
sequence defined in the recipe. The same parameter may be used more than once in a recipe.
Figure 6.5 Watch/Recipe Editor window (with context menu)
6.5.1 Creating a Watch List

After opening the window, parameters can be added to it as described below. The values of the parameters
update in real-time, allowing the user to monitor a number of values simultaneously.
ADDING PARAMETERS TO THE WATCH LIST
1. Parameters can be click-dragged into the watch list from another area of the iTools window (for example, the parameter explorer window, the graphical wiring editor, the browse tree). The parameter is
placed either in an empty row at the bottom of the list, or if it is dragged on top of an already existing
parameter, it is inserted above this parameter, with the remaining parameters being moved down one
place.
2. Parameters can be dragged from one position in the list to another. In such a case, a copy of the
parameter is produced, the source parameter remaining in its original position.
3. Parameters can be copied <Ctrl>+<C> and pasted <Ctrl>+<V> either within the list, or from a source
external to it, for example the parameter browse window or the graphical wiring editor.
4. The Insert item... tool button
the Insert Parameter item in the Recipe or context menu or the short
cut <Insert> can be used to open a browse window from which a parameter is selected for insertion
above the currently selected parameter.
DATA SET CREATION
Once all the required parameters have been added to the list, select the empty data set by clicking on the
column header. Fill the data set with current values using one of the following methods:
1. Clicking on the Capture current values into a data set tool icon
(also known as the Snapshot Values tool).
2. Selecting Snapshot Values from the Recipe or Context (right-click) menu.
3. Using the short cut <Ctrl>+<A>.
Page 262
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
6.5.1 CREATING A WATCH LIST (Cont.)

DATA SET CREATION (Cont.)
Individual data values can now be edited by typing directly into the grid cells. Data values can be left blank
or cleared, in which case, no values will be written for those parameters at download. Data values are cleared
by deleting all the characters in the cell then either moving to a different cell or typing <Enter>.
The set is called Set 1 by default, but it can be renamed by either by using the Rename data set... item in
the Recipe or context menus, or by using the short cut <Ctrl>+<R>.
New, empty data sets can be added using one of the following:
1. Clicking on the Create a new empty data set toolbar icon.
2. Selecting New Data Set in the Recipe or context menus
3. Using the short cut <Ctrl>+<W>
Once created, the data sets are edited as described above.
Finally, once all the required data sets have been created, edited and saved, they can be downloaded the
instrument, one at a time, using the Download tool, the Download Values item in the Recipe or context
menus, or the short cut <Ctrl>+<D>.
6.5.2 Watch Recipe toolbar icons

Create a new watch/recipe list. Creates a new list by clearing out all parameters and data sets from an
open window. If the current list has not been saved, confirmation is requested. Short cut <ctrl>+<N>
Open an existing watch/recipe file. If the current list or data set has not been saved, confirmation is
requested. A file dialogue box then opens allowing the user to select a file to be opened. Short cut
<ctrl>+<O>
Save the current watch/recipe list. Allows the current set to be saved to a user specified location. Short
cut <ctrl>+<S>.
Download the selected data set to the device. Short cut <ctrl>+<D>
Insert item ahead of selected item. Short cut <Insert>.
Remove recipe parameter. Short cut <ctrl>+<Delete>.
Move selected item. Up arrow moves selected parameter up the list; down arrow move the selected
parameter down the list.
Create a new empty data set. Short cut <ctrl>+<w>.
Delete an empty data set. Short cut <ctrl>+<Delete>
Capture current values into a data set. Fills the selected data set with values. Short cut <ctrl>+<A>.
Clear the selected data set. Removes values from the selected data set. Short cut <Shift>+<Delete>.
Open OPC Scope. Opens a separate utility that allows trending, data logging and Dynamic Data
Exchange (DDE). OPC Scope is an OPC explorer program that can connect to any OPC server that is in
the windows registry.
(OPC is an acronym for OLE for Process Control, where OLE stands for Object Linking and Embedding.)
6.5.3 Watch/Recipe Context Menu

The Watch/Recipe Context menu items have the same functions as described above for toolbar items.
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
Page 263
6.6 PROGRAMMER OPTION

Clicking on the Programmer tool bar icon opens the programmer configuration window, displaying the program currently loaded in the instrument, in Segment Parameter view. If no program is loaded, the programmer display opens with just one segment, defined as an End Segment.
Figure 6.6 shows a simple program for example purposes. Parameters are defined in section 3.4.9 and section 4.8.
Figure 6.6 Programmer display
As can be seen from the example, the segments appear below a graphical representation of the program.
6.6.1 Segment parameter editing

SEGMENT NAME
To edit the segment name, click in the segment name field (as shown), and type in the required text, of up
to 20 characters. Alternatively, double click on the existing name and edit it as desired.
SEGMENT TYPE
Clicking on the down arrow symbol to the right of the existing segment type field, produces
a pick list from which a segment type can be selected. The type of segment selected defines
which configuration fields appear for that segment.
END TYPE
Allows the selection of Dwell or Reset as the action to be taken by the End segment.
Page 264
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
6.6.1 SEGMENT EDITING (Cont.)

GO BACK TO
For GoBack segments only, this allows the user to enter a segment number for the program to return to.
CYCLES
For GoBack segments only, this allows the number of times the program returns to the Go Back To segment, before continuing.
DURATION
Sets the amount of time for which Dwell segments are to operate. Times are entered using a hours/minutes/seconds/milliseconds display which appears when the ellipsis button to the
right of the duration field is clicked on.
WAIT FOR
Select an analogue or digital input as the wait criterion. For single channel programs only one analogue input is available; for two-channel programmers one digital and two analoge inputs are available, as shown.
CH1 (2) TSP
The channel 1 (2) target setpoint, editable by the user in a similar way as that used for segment name editing,
described above. Ch2 TSP appears only for two channel programmers.
TIME
For programs where Ramp Style = Time, this allows the user to enter time periods for ramp segments, in
a similar way, as described for Duration, above. For two channel programmers, two times can be entered,
and if the two times are different, the channel with the shorter time waits at its setpoint value until the other
channels time has elapsed.
RATE
For programs where Ramp Style = Rate, this allows the user to eneter a rate value for Ramp segments. This
value is entered in the same way as that used for segment name editing, described above. For two channel
programmers, two rates can be entered.
OTHER PARAMETERS
Holdback, PV Event etc. parameters may or may not appear depending on the programmer features enabled, and they are all edited in the ways described above.
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
Page 265
6.6.2 Digital Event display

Clicking on the Digital Events Output tool bar icon produces a segment display, allowing the user to select
the events on or off as required, for each segment. Figure 6.6.2 shows a programmer where the number of
events is four.
The number of events which appear (maximum eight) is configured in the Programmer Setup menu as described in section 4.8.3
Figure 6.6.2 Event on/off configuration
6.6.3 Program parameters

The number of parameters which appear in this display depends on which program features are enabled.
Figure 6.6.3 shows a basic set of parameters which allows the user to select Rate or Time as the Ramp style,
and to select a value for Rate units.
Figure 6.6.3 Program parameter display
Page 266
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
6.6.4 Adding and deleting segments.

INSERT SEGMENT
As shown in figure 6.6.4, to insert a segment, click in the segment number field of the segment to the right
of where the new segment is to be located. This causes the whole segment to highlight. Click on the blue
down arrow tool icon to insert the new segment. The new segment name is the segment number, and the
segment configuration is that of the segment to the right, unless that segment is a dwell or End segment, in
which case the new segment is a ramp segment.
To insert more than one segment, operate the shift key whilst clicking on the range of contiguous segments
to be copied.
Figure 6.6.4 Insert a segment
Alternatively the mouse can be right-clicked anywhere in a segment, and the Insert segment item selected,
or one or more segment can be highlighted and the Insert key on the pc keyboard used to initiate the process. See section 6.6.7 for more details of the right-click (context) menu.
CUTTING, COPYING AND PASTING SEGMENTS
The process of highlighting one or more segments causes the cut and copy toolbar icons to become active.
The cut tool removes the highlighted segments from the program and stores them on the pasteboard ready
for re-use.
The copy tool copies the selected segment(s) to the paste board, leaving the original segment(s) in place.
Once one or more segments have been cut or copied, the Paste insert and Paste over icons become active
allowing the user to paste the contents of the pasteboard in front of a selected segment (Paste insert), or to
overwrite the existing highlighted segment(s) (Paste over). When using the Paste over tool, the number of
segments being pasted over must match the number of segments on the paste board.
DELETING SEGMENTS
Once one or more segments have been highlighted, the highlighted segments can be removed using the
Delete toolbar icon, by using the Delete Segment item in the right-click (context) menu, or by operating the
pc keyboard Ctrl and Delete keys simultaneously.
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
Page 267
6.6.5 Loading and Saving programs

The four program operation keys at the top left of the programmer window allow the user to load a program
from or save a program to either the currently connected instrument or to a pc.
The fourth icon allows the user to select a program to be deleted from the connected instrument.
See section 6.6.6 for more details.
6.6.6 Toolbar icons
The toolbar icons appearing at the top of the programmer window have the following properties:
Load Program. Opens a browser window allowing the user to select a program on the pc, or a program
stored in the connected instrument to load. Short cut: <Ctrl> + <L>.
Save current program to file. Opens a browser window allowing the user to select a location on the pc
in which to save the current program. This file is saved with a .upiz extension and can be saved to a USB
memory stick for downloading to an instrument, or it can be transferred to the instrument via an ftp server. Short cut: <Ctrl> + <S>.
Store current program on device. Allows the user to save the program to the program store on the instrument. Short cut: <Shift key> + <Ctrl> + <S>.
Delete Programs from Device. Allows the user to delete programs from the program store on the connected instrument. Short cut: <Ctrl> + <F>.
Cut. Removes the highlighted segment(s) from the program and places them on the pasteboard. Short
cut: <Ctrl> + <X>.
Copy. Copies the selected segment(s) to the pasteboard, leaving the original segments in place. Short
cut: <Ctrl> + <C>.
Paste insert. Inserts the segments on the pasteboard into a location to the left of the highlighted segment. Short cut: <Ctrl> + <V>.
Paste over. Overwrites the highlighted segment(s) with the segment(s) on the pasteboard. The number
of segments on the pasteboard must match the number of segments being overwritten. Short cut:
<Shift key> + <Ctrl> + <V>.
Insert. Inserts a new segment to the left of the highlighted segment. If more than one segment is highlighted, then the same number of segments are inserted as are highlighted. Copies the segment type
of the segment to the right of the insertion point except if that segment is an End or GoBack segment,
when newly inserted segments are of type Ramp. Short cut: <Insert>.
Delete. Deletes the highlighted segment(s). Short cut: <Ctrl> + <Delete>.
Go to first. Moves the user to the first segment. Useful in very long programs. Short cut: <Ctrl> + <Left
arrow>.
Go to last. Moves the user to the end segment. Useful in very long programs. Short cut: <Ctrl> + <Right
arrow>.
Analog. Selects the analogue trace chart for display and segment configuration. Short cut: <Ctrl> +
<G>.
Digital Event Outputs. Selects the Event output chart for display and configuration.Short cut: <Ctrl> +
<D>.
Logarithmic. Switches the vertical scale to logarithmic. Short cut: <Ctrl> + <M> (figure 6.6.6)
Page 268
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
6.6.6 TOOLBAR ICONS (Cont.)
Figure 6.6.6 Logarithmic scale example
6.6.7 Context menus

SEGMENT CONTEXT MENU
Right-clicking when the mouse cursor is hovering over a segment in the analogue
segment parameters view produces the segment context menu shown. The various items copy the relevant tool bar icons described above, with the following additions:
Select All
Selects all parameters
Parameter properties Displays the properties window for the parameter right-clicked on, including a Help
tag for that parameter.
PROGRAM CONTEXT MENU

Right-clicking when the mouse cursor is hovering in the program parameters view produces the program context menu shown.
Parameter properties Displays the properties window for the parameter right-clicked on, including a Help
tag for that parameter.
Columns
Allows the user to enable/disable columns in the program parameters display.
CHART CONTEXT MENU
Right-clicking when the mouse cursor is hovering over the analogue chart or the digital
event chart produces the segment context menu shown. This allows the user to copy the
chart to the pasteboard, from where it can be pasted into (for example) a standard word
procesing document.
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
Page 269
6.6.8 Programmer menu

Clicking on the Programmer menu item near the top of the iTools window causes the Programmer menu
(figure 6.6.8) to appear. The items contained within this menu are described in the Toolbar icons and Context menu sections (sections 6.6.6 and 6.6.7 respectively) above.
Figure 6.6.8 Programmer menu
Page 270
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
6.6.9 Two channel programs

The display and editing of segment and program parameters for two-channel programmers is carried out in
the same way as described above, for single channel programs. The major difference in apearance is that
there are two sets of parameters for each segment, instead of one. The background colour for channel 1
parameters is pink; that for channel 2 parameters is green.
The number of channels and the program features enabled are set up at the instrument as desribed in section 3.4.9 and section 4.8.
Figure 6.6.9 Two channel program display
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
Page 271
7 USER WIRING
User wiring, created from the instrument front panel, allows parameters to be wired together so that, for example, a counter can be configured to be incremented when an alarm goes active. This can be used as an
alternative to iTools.
This section is presented as two examples that show the general techniques used to create and delete wires
from the instrument user interface.
Notes:
1. These examples refer to Channel Configuration and to Virtual Channel configuration, descriptions of which are to be found in sections 4.4 and 4.5 respectively.
2. The destination parameter field has a small green triangle at the top left corner to indicate that it
has a wire routed to it. 3A/3B (Relay)
7.1 DRIVE RELAY EXAMPLE

To drive the relay whose terminal contacts are 3A/3B, whilst the temperature being measured by Channel 2
exceeds 30C. For this example Channel 2 alarm 1 and a hysteresis of 4C will be used.
1.
In channel 2, Alarm 1 page (see note), set the following parameters:

Type: Abs. High
Threshold: 30
Hysteresis: 4
Latch: None
Block: Off
Dwell:00:00:00
Acknowledge: No
Channel.2.Alarm1
Type Abs Hi
Threshold 30.0
Hysteresis 4.0
Latch None
Block Off
Dwell 00:00:00
Acknowledge No
Active Yes
Inactive No
N.acknowledged Yes
Acknowledgement No
Inhibit
Figure 7.1a Channel 2, Alarm 1 set up
Note: the channel alarm areas of configuration become accessible only once the channel with which
they are associated has been configured with a suitable Type (section 4.4.1).
Page 272
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
7.1 DRIVE RELAY EXAMPLE (Cont.)

User Wiring
2.
3.
Highlight the Active field, and press and hold the scroll button for
a few seconds, until the top level User Wiring page appears.
The name of the selected parameter appears at the top of the
page. Any already existing wires from this parameter would
appear below the Add new wire area.
To Destination
Add new wire
With Add new wire highlighted operate the Scroll button.

User Wiring
Instrument
Network
Group
4.
Use the down arrow to highlight Digital I/O and press the scroll
button.
Channel
Virtual Channel
Loop
Digital I/O
User Wiring
Loop
Digital I/O
5.
Use the down arrow to highlight 3A3B (Relay) and press the scroll
button.
1A1B (Dig.IO)
2A2B (Relay)
LALC (Dig.In)
3A3B (Relay)
LBLC (Dig.In)
User Wiring
6.
Use the down arrow to highlight PV and press the scroll button.
Loop
Digital I/O
1A1B (Dig.IO)
Note: If this parameter is already wired-to, the wired symbol

appears to the left of the parameter.
2A2B (Relay)
LALC (Dig.In)
3A3B (Relay)
PV
7.
When the confirmation window appears, use the up or down

arrow to highlight Ok, then operate the scroll button again.
Create New Wire?

Cancel
Ok
User Wiring
8.
The top level user wiring page reappears, showing the destination
parameter.
To Destination
Add new wire
Digital I/O.3A3B (Relay).PV
7.1.1 Wire removal

At the top level user wiring page, use the up and down arrow buttons
to highlight the wire to be deleted, and operate the scroll key. In the Delete Wire confirmation window,
highlight Ok and operate the scroll key again. The wire is deleted without further confirmation.
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
Page 273
7.2 COUNTER EXAMPLE

This example shows how to set up a counter to be incremented each time Channel 1 Alarm 1 becomes active, and reset each time channel 2, alarm 1 is acknowledged. For this example, Virtual Channel 3 will be
configured as the counter, with a preset value of 0.
1. At Channel.1.Main, set:
Type = test
Test Signal = Sine 4 min.
Scale Low = 0
Scale High = 100
2. At Channel.1.Alarm1, set:
Type = Abs Hi
Threshold = 50
Latch = None
3. At Channel.2.Main, set:
Type = Test
Test Signal = Sine 40 min.
Scale Low = 0
Scale High = 100
4. At Channel.2.Alarm 1, set:
Type = Abs Hi
Threshold = 90
Latch = Manual
5. At Virtual Channel.3.Main, set:
Type = Counter
Operation = On
Input = 1
All the other parameters can be left at their defaults.
6. Still at Virtual Channel 3 (Main), use the up/down arrow buttons to highlight Trigger. Press and hold
the scroll key. The top level User Wiring page appears, this time with a From Source tab as well as the
To Destination tab of example 1. This is because this parameter is read/write, whereas Alarm Active is
read only (i.e. its value may be read but not changed).
7. Use the up (or down) arrow button to select the From Source tab.
Status Good
Resolution 0
Units
User Wiring
Virtual Channel.3.MainTrigger
To Destination
From Source
Add new wire
Input 1
Preset No
Preset Value 0
Trigger No
User Wiring
Virtual Channel.3.Main.Trigger
To Destination From Source
Add new wire
Figure 7.2a Wiring a counter: part 1
Page 274
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
7.2 COUNTER EXAMPLE (Cont.)

8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
Operate the Scroll key to highlight Add new wire, then again to display the top level parameter list.
Use the down arrow button to highlight Channel and operate the scroll button.
Operate the scroll button to select 1.
Highlight Alarm 1 and operate the scroll button.
Use the down arrow button to highlight Active. Operate the Scroll button again, and create the new
wire.
13. Use the Page button twice to return to the Virtual Channel 3 menu.
User Wiring
User Wiring
Add new wire
Channel
1
Main
Trend
Alarm1
Alarm2
2
User Wiring
User Wiring
Instrument
Alarm1
Type
Network
Group
Status
Channel
Threshold
Virtual Channel
Dwell
Loop
Acknowledge
Digital I/O
Active
Create New Wire?
User Wiring
Cancel
Ok
Instrument
Network
Group
Channel
1
2
User Wiring
Add new wire
Channel.1.Alarm1.Acktive
Figure 7.2b Wiring a counter: part 2
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
Page 275
7.2 COUNTER EXAMPLE (Cont.)

14. At Virtual Channel.3.Main, use the down arrow to select Preset. Press and hold the scroll key. The top
level User Wiring page appears.
15. Use the up (or down) arrow button to select the From Source tab, if not already selected.
16. Operate the Scroll key to highlight Add new wire, then again to display the top level parameter list.
17. Use the down arrow button to highlight Channel and operate the scroll button.
18. Use the down arrow button to highlight 2 and operate the scroll button.
19. Highlight Alarm 1 and operate the scroll button.
20. Use the down arrow button to highlight Acknowledgement (not Acknowledge). Operate the Scroll
button again, and create the new wire.
User Wiring
User Wiring
Virtual Channel.3.Main.Preset
Add new wire
Channel
1
2
Main
Trend
Alarm1
Alarm2
User Wiring
User Wiring
Instrument
Alarm1
Type
Network
Group
Status
Channel
Threshold
Virtual Channel
Inactive
Loop
N.acknowledged
Digital I/O
Acknowledgement
User Wiring
Create New Wire?

Cancel
Ok
Instrument
Network
Group
Channel
1
2
User Wiring
Add new wire
Figure 7.2c Wiring a counter: part 3
Page 276
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
8 USB DEVICES
The devices listed below can be plugged into the USB connector at the back of the instrument, providing
that the maximum current required is less than 100 mA.
1. Memory Stick
2 Bar code reader
3. Keyboard
Notes:
1. See USB device precautions in the Safety Notes preamble section of the manual.
2. See Section A2 for the USB port specification
3. The use of USB hubs is not supported by this instrument.
8.1 MEMORY STICK

The use of the memory stick as an archiving device, or to facilitate software upgrades is well documented in
the relevant sections of this manual.
8.2 BAR CODE READER

If USB Auto Scan is set to Yes in Display Configuration (section 4.1.3) then, with the bar code reader
plugged into the USB port, the scanned data input stream is packaged into a general message displayed on
the trend page and included in the .uhh history file. The format of the message is: DD/MM/YY HH:MM:SS
123--13 (where 123--13 represents the ASCII data read from the bar code.
If USB auto Scan is set to No, the ASCII data read from the bar code is displayed as a message ready for
editing prior to being sent to the display etc. Figure 8.2 shows an example.
Note: the bar code reader must be configured to use a carriage return (decimal 13) terminating
character.
USB ASCII Input

Edit the message, if required, then
use the page, arrow and scroll pushbuttons to confirm the message.
Accept changes?
Cancel
No
Yes
Figure 8.2 Bar Code reader display
8.3 USB KEYBOARD

A QWERTY keyboard may be plugged into the rear USB port to act in parallel with the virtual keyboard. The
editing keys listed below are supported in addition to the standard alpha-numeric characters.
Left arrow Moves the cursor left-wards through the text string (stops at the start of the string).
Right arrow Moves the cursor right-wards through the text string (stops at the end of the string).
Backspace Deletes the character immediately to the left of the cursor.
Delete
Removes the character immediately to the right of the cursor.
End
Moves the cursor to the end of the string
Home
Moves the cursor to the start of the string
Insert
Highlights the entire string, for overwriting
Esc
Exit without saving changes.
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
Page 277
Page 278
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
Appendix A: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

A1 INSTALLATION CATEGORY AND POLLUTION DEGREE
This product has been designed to conform to BS EN61010 installation category II and pollution degree 2,
defined as follows:
Installation category II
The rated impulse voltage for equipment on nominal 230V mains is 2500V.
Pollution degree 2
Normally, only non-conductive pollution occurs. Occasionally, however, a temporary conductivity caused
by condensation shall be expected.
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
Appendix A
Page 279
A2 RECORDER SPECIFICATION
I/O types
Analogue i/p
Digital i/p
Digital (logic) o/p
Relay o/p
DC output
Features
Four (eight if dual input option fitted)

Two
Default
See table A2 for options
CSV archive format
EtherNet/IP (Option)
Options
File transfer protocol (FTP)
Messages
Modbus Master (Option)
Modbus TCP slave
Set point programmer (option)
uhh (history file) archiving
L = Logic output; R = Relay; D = DC output
USB port at rear of instrument
OP4 and OP5 share Common terminals.
User linearisation tables (four)
Two control loops (optional)
Table A2 Output options
Advanced Loop (optional)
Zirconia probe support (optional)
15 Virtual channels (each configurable as maths, totaliser or counter).
30 Virtual channels if Modbus Master or EtherNet/IPoptions fitted (no alarms on virtual channels 16 to 30)
Environmental performance
Ambient temperature range
Operating:
Storage:
Humidity range
Operating:
storage:
Protection
Front panel
Behind panel:
Shock/Vibration
Altitude
Atmosphere
Electrical safety
Electromagnetic compatibility
Emissions (standard units):
Emissions (Low voltage option):
Immunity
0 to 55C
-20 to +70C
5% to 85% RH non condensing
5% to 85% RH non condensing
IP65, NEMA4X (International)
IP10 (International)
To BS EN61131-2 (5 to 150 Hz. at 1g; 1 octave per min.)
<2000 metres
Not suitable for use in explosive or corrosive atmospheres.
BS EN61010-1 (Installation category II; Pollution degree 2)
BS EN61326 Class B - Light industrial.
BS EN61326 Class A - Heavy industrial
BS EN61326 Industrial
Other approvals and compliance details

General:
PV input
RoHS
Packaging
CE and cUL, EN61010

AMS2750D compliant
EU; China
BS EN61131-2 section 2.1.3.3.
Physical
Panel mounting
Weight
Panel cutout dimension
Depth behind panel
1/4 DIN
0.44kg (15.52 oz.)
92 mm x 92 mm (both -0.0 +0.8) or 3.62 in x 3.62 in (both -0.00 +0.03 in) (figure 2.1)
90 mm (3.54 in) (figure 2.1) excluding wiring.
Operator interface
Display
Controls
3.5 TFT colour display (320 pixels wide x 240 pixels high)
Four navigation pushbuttons below the display screen (Page, Scroll, Lower and Raise)
Power requirements
Supply voltage
Standard:
Low voltage option:
Power dissipation
Fuse type
Interrupt protection
Standard:
Low voltage option:
100 to 230Vac 15% at 48 to 62Hz.

24Vac (+10% - 15%), at 48 to 62 Hz, or 24Vdc (+20% -15%)
9W
None
Holdup >10ms at 85V RMS supply voltage.
Holdup >10ms at 20.4V RMS supply voltage.
Battery backup
Stored data
Support time (for real-time clock)
Replacement period
Type
Time, date.
Minimum of 1 year with unit unpowered.
Three years typical
poly-carbonmonofluoride / lithium (BR2330) (PA260195)
Ethernet communications
Type:
Protocols:
Cable type
Maximum length
Termination
Appendix A
Page 280
10/100baseT Ethernet (IEEE802.3)

Modbus TCP/IP slave, FTP, DHCP
Category 5
100metres (110 yards)
RJ45. Green LED illuminated = link connected; Amber LED flashing shows link activity.
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
A2 RECORDER SPECIFICATION (Cont.)

USB port
Number of ports
Standard
Transmission speeds
Maximum current
One at rear of instrument

USB1.1
1.5Mbits/sec (low speed device)
<100mA
Peripherals supported Memory stick (8GB max), Bar code reader, QWERTY keyboard
Update/Archive rates
Sample rate (input/output)
Trend update
Archive sample value
Display value
8Hz (4Hz for digital inputs) (4Hz for dual input channels)
8 Hz max
Latest value at archive time
Latest value at display update time.
A3 ANALOGUE INPUT SPECIFICATION

General
Number of anaologue inputs
Input types
Standard:
Optional:
Input type mix
Sample rate
Conversion method
Input ranges
Mains rejection (48 to 62Hz)
Series mode:
Common mode:
Common mode voltage
Series mode voltage
Input impedance
Overvoltage protection Continuous:
Transient (<1ms):
Sensor break detection
Type
Recognition time:
Minimum break resistance:
Four
dc Volts, dc mV, dc mA (external shunt required), thermocouple, RTD (2-wire and 3-wire), digital (contact closure).
dual mA, dual mV, dual thermocouple.
Freely configurable
8Hz (125ms)
16 bit delta sigma.
See below.
Shunt (mA inputs only)

Values
additional error due to shunt:
1 to 1k, mounted externally.

0.1% input
Isolation
Channel to channel:
Channel to common electronics:
Channel to ground:
Dielectric strength
Test:
Channel to channel:
Channel to ground:
300V RMS or dc (double insulation)

BS EN61010, 1 minute type test
2500 Vac
1500 Vac
>95dB
>179dB
250Vac max.
280mV at lowest range; 5V peak-to-peak, at highest range.
See relevant Range specification, below.
30V RMS
200V pk-pk between terminals.
ac sensor break on each input giving quick response with no associated dc errors.
<3 secs.
40mV, 80mV ranges: 5k; other ranges: 12.5k
DC input ranges
Ranges
40mv, 80mV, 2V; 10V (-4.0 to +10V)
40mV Range
Range:
Resolution
Measurement noise:
Linearity error:
Calibration error:
Temperature coefficient:
Input leakage current:
Input resistance:
-40mV to + 40mV
1.9V (unfiltered)
1.0V peak-to-peak with 1.6s input filter
0.003% (best fit straight line)
4.6V 0.053% of measurement at 25C ambient
0.2V/C 13ppm/C of measurement from 25C ambient
14nA
100M
80mV Range
Range:
Resolution
Measurement noise:
Linearity error:
Calibration error:
Input resistance:
-80mV to + 80mV
3.2V (unfiltered)
3.3V peak-to-peak with 1.6s input filter
7.5V 0.052% of measurement at 25C ambient
0.2V/C 13ppm/C of measurement from 25C ambient
14nA
100M
2V Range
Range:
Resolution
Measurement noise:
Linearity error:
Calibration error:
Input resistance:
2V
82V
90V peak-to-peak with 1.6s input filter
420V 0.044% of measurement at 25C ambient
125V/C 13ppm/C of measurement from 25C ambient
14nA
100M
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
Appendix A
Page 281
A3 ANALOGUE INPUT SPECIFICATION (Cont.)

DC Input ranges (Cont.)
10V Range
Range:
Resolution
Measurement noise:
Linearity error:
Calibration error:
Input resistance:
-3V to +10V
500V
550V peak-to-peak with 1.6s input filter
0.007% (best fit straight line) for zero source resistance. Add 0.003% for each 10 source and lead resistance
1.5mV 0.063% measurement at 25C ambient
66V/C 45ppm/C of measurement from 25C ambient
62.5k for input voltages > 5.6V. 667k for input ranges < 5.6V.
Note: 10V range not available for dual input channels

Resistance input ranges
Temperature scale
RTD Types, ranges and accuracies
Maximum source current
ITS90
See table
200A
Resistance input figures

Range:
Resolution:
Measurement noise:
Linearity error:
Calibration error:
Lead resistance
Bulb current:
0 to 400 (-200 to +850C)

0.05C
0.05C peak-peak with 1.6s input filter
0.31C 0.023% of measurement in C at 25C ambient
0.01C/C 25ppm/C measurement in C from 25C ambient
0 to 22 matched lead resistances
200A nominal
RTD type
Cu10
Cu53
JPT100
Ni100
Ni120
Pt100
Pt100A
Overall range C
-20 to + 400
-70 to + 200
-220 to + 630
-60 to + 250
-50 to + 170
-200 to + 850
-200 to + 600
Standard
Max. linearisation error
General electric Co.
0.02C
RC21-4-1966
<0.01C
JIS C1604:1989
0.01C
DIN43760:1987
0.01C
DIN43760:1987
0.01C
IEC751
0.01C
Eurotherm Recorders SA
0.09C
Table A3a RTD type details

Thermocouple data
Temperature scale
CJC
Types:
Remote CJC source
Internal CJC error
Internal CJC rejection ratio:
Upscale/downscale drive
Types, ranges and accuracies
ITS90
Off, internal, external, remote.
Any input channel
<1 C max, with instrument at 25 C
40:1 from 25C
High, low or none independently configurable for each channels sensor break detection.
See table A3b
T/C type
B
C
D
E
G2
J
K
L
N
R
S
T
U
NiMo/NiCo
Platinel
Mi/NiMo
Pt20%Rh/Pt40%/Rh
Overall range (C)

0 to + 1820
0 to +
0 to +
-270 to +
0 to +
-210 to +
-270 to +
-200 to +
-270 to +
-50 to +
-50 to +
-270 to +
-200 to +
-50 to +
0 to +
0 to +
0 to +
2300
2495
1000
2315
1200
1372
900
1300
1768
1768
400
600
1410
1370
1406
1888
Standard
Max. linearisation error

0 to 400C = 1.7C
400 to 1820C = 0.03C
Hoskins
0.12C
Hoskins
0.08C
IEC584.1
0.03C
Hoskins
0.07C
IEC584.1
0.02C
IEC584.1
0.04C
DIN43710:1985 (to IPTS68)
0.02C
IEC584.1
0.04C
IEC584.1
0.04C
IEC584.1
0.04C
IEC584.1
0.02C
DIN43710:1985
0.08C
ASTM E1751-95
0.06C
Engelhard
0.02C
Ipsen
0.14C
ASTM E1751-95
0.07C
IEC584.1
Table A3b Thermocouple types, ranges and accuracies
Appendix A
Page 282
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
A4 RELAY AND LOGIC I/O SPECIFICATION

OP1, OP2, OP3 logic input, logic output and relay specification.
Active (current on) current sourcing logic output
Voltage output across terminals
Short circuit output current
+11V min; +13V max.

6mA min. (steady state); 44mA max. (switch current)
Inactive (current off) current sourcing logic output (OP1 or OP2 only)
Voltage output across terminals
Output source leakage current
into short circuit
0V (min.); 300mV (max)

0A (min.); 100A max
Active (current on) contact closure sourcing logic input (OP1 only)
Input current
Input at 12V:
inout at 0V:
Open circuit input voltage
Open circuit (inactve) resistance
Closed circuit (active) resistance
0mA (min.); 44mA (max.)

6mA min. (steady state); 44mA max. (switch current)
11V (min.); 13V (max.)
500 (min.); (max.)
0 (min.); 150 (max.)
Relay contacts
Contact switching power (resistive)
Maximum current through terminals
Max: 2A at 230V RMS 15%; Min: 100mA @ 12V.

2A
A5 DIGITAL INPUTS
DigInA, DigInB, contact closure logic input
Contact closure
Short circuit sensing current (source)
Open circuit (inactive) resistance
Closed circuit (active) resistance
Maximum frequency
Minimum pulse width
5.5mA (min.); 6.5mA (max.)

600 (min.); (max.)
0 (min.); 300 (max.)
8 Hz
62.5 ms
A6 DC OUTPUTS
OP1, OP2, OP3 DC analogue outputs
Current outputs (OP1, OP2 and OP3)
Output ranges
Load resistance
Calibration accuracy
Configurable within 0 to 20mA

500 Max.
<100A 1% of reading
Voltage outputs (OP3 only)

Output range
Output impedance
Calibration accuracy
Configurable within 0 to 10V

500 Min.
<50mV 1% of reading
General
Isolation
Resolution
Thermal drift
300Vac double insulated from instrument and other I/O

>11 bits
<100ppm/C
A7 BLOCKS SUPPORTED
A7.1 TOOLKIT BLOCKS
BCD input
Eight-input logic
Eight input multiplexer
Timers
Two-input logic
Two-input maths
User values
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
Appendix A
Page 283
A7.2 APPLICATION BLOCKS

Humidity
Steriliser
Zirconia
Appendix A
Page 284
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
Appendix B CONTROL LOOPS

Note: See section 4.6 for Loop configuration details
B.1 INTRODUCTION
With this recorder, two control loops are available, each loop containing two outputs (Channel 1 and Channel 2) which can be individually configured for PID, On/Off or valve position. For temperature control, channel 1 is normally configured for heating and channel 2 for cooling.
B1.1 EXAMPLE (HEAT ONLY)

Controller (simplified)
Process under control

Control
output
(OP)
Control algorithm
(PID, On/Off, VP)
Error
Power
regulator
Control
loop
Setpoint
(SP)
Temperature
transducer
Heater
PV (Measured
temperature)
Figure B1.1 Control loop example
The measured temperature (process variable, or PV) is connected to the input of the controller, where it is
compared with the Setpoint (SP) (the target temperature). If there is a difference between the PV and the
SP, the controller calculates and outputs a heating demand. This output is applied to the process heating
device, which in turn causes a change in the PV in a direction intended to result in a zero error.
B2 CONTROL LOOP DEFINITIONS

B2.1 AUTO/MANUAL
In manual mode, if On/Off control is configured, the output power may be edited by the user but the only
power values allowed are: +100% (heat on; cool off) for positive user entries, 0% (heat off; cool off) for zero
entry or -100%. (heat off; cool on) for negative entries.
In manual mode, for PID control the output may be edited between +100% and (if cool is configured),
-100%. The actual output value is subject to limiting and output rate limit.
In manual mode, for valve position control, the up and down arrow buttons directly control (nudge) the raise
and lower relay outputs respectively. It is also possible to control the valve by sending nudge commands
over a serial link, or by software wiring from a suitable parameter. A single nudge command moves the valve
by 1 minimum on time; longer nudge demands produce longer valve movements. See section B2.6.10 for
more details.
If sensor break occurs while the controller is in automatic the controller outputs the sensor break output
power. In such a case the user can switch to manual control and edit the output power. On returning to
automatic control, the controller checks again for sensor break.
If autotune is enabled while in manual mode, the autotune remains in a reset state such that when the user
puts the controller into automatic control the autotune starts.
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
Appendix B
Page 285
B2.2 TYPES OF CONTROL LOOP

B2.2.1 On/Off control
This form of control turns heating power on when the process value is below the setpoint, and turns it off
when it is above the setpoint (see also figure B2.6.9a). If cooling is configured, it has its own relay which operates in a similar way. In Direct Acting mode, the behaviour is inverted. On/off is suitable for controlling
switching devices such as relays.
Because of the thermal inertia of the load, a certain amount of oscillation will take place, and this can affect
the quality of the product. For this reason, On/Off control is not recommended for critical applications.
Depending on the nature of the process being controlled, some hysteresis may have to be included to prevent continuous operation or chatter in the controlling device.
B2.2.2 PID Control

Also known as three term control, this type of control continuously adjusts the output demand, according
to a set of rules, in order to control the process as closely as possible to requirements. PID provides more
stable control than On/Off control but is more complex to set up as the parameters must match the characteristics of the process under control.
The three major parameters are: Proportional band (PB), Integral time (Ti) and Derivative time (Td) and the
output from the controller is the sum of these three terms. This output is a function of the size and duration
of the error value and the rate-of-change of the process value.
It is possible to disable the integral and/or derivative terms and control on proportional only, on proportional plus integral (PI) or proportional plus derivative (PD).
PI control is often used when the PV is noisy and/or subject to rapid variations, where derivative action would
cause the output power to fluctuate wildly.
PROPORTIONAL BAND
The proportional band (PB) delivers an output which is proportional to the size of the error signal. It is the
range over which the output power is continuously adjustable in a linear fashion from 0% to 100% (for a heat
only controller). Below the proportional band the output is full on (100%), above the proportional band the
output is full off (0%) as shown in figure B2.2.2a.
The width of the proportional band determines the magnitude of the response to the error. If PB is too narrow (high gain) the system oscillates; if it is too wide (low gain) control is sluggish. The ideal situation is when
the proportional band is as narrow as possible without causing oscillation.
Figure B2.2.2a also shows the effect of narrowing proportional band to the point of oscillation. A wide proportional band results in straight line control but with an appreciable initial error between setpoint and actual temperature. As the band is narrowed the temperature gets closer to setpoint until eventually, it
becomes unstable.
The proportional band may be set in engineering units or as a percentage of the controller range.
Wide
Proportional
band
Setpoint
Output
Temperature
Narrow
SP
Increasing
proportional band
Temperature
Time
Figure B2.2.2a Proportional band action (reverse acting)
Appendix B
Page 286
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec11
B2.2 TYPES OF CONTROL LOOP (Cont.)

INTEGRAL TERM
In a proportional only controller, as seen in the previous section, an error must exist between setpoint and
PV in order for the controller to deliver power. Integral is used to achieve zero steady state control error.
The integral term slowly modifies the output level as a result of any error between setpoint and measured
value. If the measured value is below setpoint the integral action gradually increases the output in an attempt to correct the error. If it is above setpoint integral action gradually decreases the output or increases
the cooling power to correct the error.
Figure B2.2.2b shows proportional plus integral action.
Temperature
SP
Time
Figure B2.2.2b: Proportional + Integral Control
The integral term is set in seconds. The longer the integral time constant, the more slowly the output is modified and the more sluggish the response. Too small an integral time causes the process to overshoot, and
perhaps to start oscillating. The integral action may be disabled by setting its value to Off.
DERIVATIVE TERM
Derivative (or rate) action provides a sudden change in output linked to the rate of change in error, whether
this is caused by PV alone (derivative on PV) or by a change in the SP as well (derivative on error selection).
If the measured value falls quickly, derivative provides a large change in output in an attempt to correct the
perturbation before it goes too far. It is most beneficial in recovering from small perturbations.
Temperature
SP
Time
Figure B2.2.2c Proportional + Integral + Derivative Action
Derivative is used to improve the performance of the loop. There are, however, situations where derivative
may be the cause of instability. For example, if the PV is noisy, then derivative can amplify that noise and
cause excessive output changes, in these situations it is often better to disable the derivative and re-tune the
loop.
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
Appendix B
Page 287
B2.2 TYPES OF CONTROL LOOP (Cont.)

Derivative should not be used to curb overshoot in situations when the output is saturated at Op High or Op
Low for extended periods, such as process start up, since to do so degrades the steady state performance
of the system. Overshoot inhibition is best left to the approach control parameters, High and Low Cutback.
If Derivative is set to Off, no derivative action will be applied.
Derivative can be calculated on change of PV or change of Error. If configured on error, then changes in the
setpoint will be transmitted to the output. For applications such as furnace temperature control, it is common practice to select Derivative on PV to prevent thermal shock caused by a sudden change of output as
a result of a change in setpoint.
B2.2.3 Motorised valve control

Designed specifically for driving motorised valves this type of control can operate in Unbounded mode
(VPU) or Bounded mode (VPB). Relay outputs are used to drive the valve motor.
VPB
Position
PID
SP
ChN
Manual
input
= Mechanical linkage
Velocity
Time
proportioning
Motor
Valve
VPU
Velocity
PID
Load
SP
Temp
sensor
Pot.
Manual input
(Pulses)
Time
proportioning
= Mechanical linkage
Motor
Valve
Load
Temp
sensor
Figure B2.2.3 VPB and VPU comparison
Unbounded valve positioning (VPU) does not require a position feedback potentiometer in order to operate
because it controls directly the direction and velocity of the movement of the valve in order to minimise the
error between the setpoint (SP) and the process variable (PV). Control is performed by delivering a raise or
lower pulse to control the velocity of the valve in response to the control demand signal.
Bounded VP (VPB) control uses PID (or any other combination of the three terms) to set a required valve position. A feedback potentiometer linked to the valve provides a signal giving actual valve position. This allows the control loop to calculate the difference between required and actual position dynamically, and
adjust control output accordingly. Control is performed by delivering a raise or lower pulse to adjust the
valve position.
MANUAL MODE
Bounded VP controls in manual mode because the inner positional loop is still running against the potentiometer feedback, so it is operating as a position loop.
In boundless mode the algorithm is a velocity mode positioner. When manual is selected then the up and
down arrow produce +100% or 100% velocity respectively for the duration of the key press.
In boundless mode it is essential that the motor travel time is set accurately in order to allow the integral time
to calculate correctly. Motor travel time is defined as (valve fully open valve fully closed). This is not necessarily the time printed on the motor since, if mechanical stops have been set on the motor, the travel time
of the valve may be different.
Every time the valve is driven to its end stops the algorithm is reset to 0% or 100% to compensate for any
changes which may occur due to wear in linkages or other mechanical parts.
This technique makes boundless VP look like a positional loop in manual even though it is not. This enables
combinations of heating and cooling e.g. PID heat, VPU cool with manual mode working as expected.
MOTORISED VALVE OUTPUT CONNECTIONS
The loop output which has been configured as valve position can be wired to the PV input of one of the pairs
of relays 2A2B/3A3B or 4AC/5AC which has been configured as Type = Valve Raise. Only one relay input
needs to be wired as the other relay of the pair will be automatically set to Valve Lower. For example, if
Loop 1 Channel 1 output is wired to Relay 2A2B and the Type is configured as Valve Raise then the Type
for Relay 3A3B will be Valve Lower.
Appendix B
Page 288
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec11
B2.3 LOOP PARAMETERS

B2.3.1 Relative cool gain (R2G)
This is the gain of channel 2 control output, relative to the channel 1 control output and is used to compensate for the different quantities of power available to heat and to cool a process. For example, water cooling
applications might require a relative cool gain of 0.25 because cooling is 4 times greater than the heating
process at the operating temperature.
By default, this parameter is set automatically when an Autotune is performed, but setting the Tune menu
parameter AT.R2G to No causes the R2G value(s) entered in the PID menu to be used instead.
B2.3.2 High and Low cutback

Cutback high CBH and Cutback low CBL are values that modify the amount of overshoot, or undershoot,
that occurs during large step changes in PV under start-up conditions, for example. They are independent
of the PID terms which means that the PID terms can be set for optimal steady state response and the cutback parameters used to modify any overshoot which may be present.
Cutback involves moving the proportional band towards the cutback point nearest the measured value
whenever the latter is outside the proportional band and the power is saturated (at 0 or 100% for a heat only
controller). The proportional band moves downscale to the lower cutback point and waits for the measured
value to enter it. It then escorts the measured value with full PID control to the setpoint. In some cases it can
cause a dip in the measured value as it approaches setpoint as shown in figure B2.3.2 but generally decreases the time to needed to bring the process into operation.
The action described above is reversed for falling temperature.
If cutback is set to Auto the cutback values are automatically configured to 3 PB.
Upper cutback point (CBH)
SP
Temperature
0% output
100% output
Proportional band
Lower cutback point (CBL)
Time
Figure B2.3.2 Cutback operation
Briefly, if PV < CBL then the output is set to its maximum.

If PV > CBH, then the output is set to its minimum
If PV lies within the range CBH-CBL, then PID calculations take control.
B2.3.3 Manual Reset

With PID control, the integral term automatically removes the steady state error from the setpoint. With PD
control, the integral term is set to OFF, and the measured value will not settle precisely at the setpoint. The
Manual Reset parameter (MR in the PID menu) represents the value of the power output that will be delivered when the error is zero. This value must be set manually in order to remove the steady state error.
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
Appendix B
Page 289
B2.3 LOOP PARAMETERS (Cont.)
B2.3.4 Integral Hold

If Integral Hold (Main menu) is set to Yes, the integral component of the PID calculation is frozen, that is, it
holds its current value but does not integrate any disturbances in the plant. This is equivalent to switching
into PD control with a manual reset value preconfigured.
Integral Hold may be used, in a situation where the loop is expected to open. For example, it may be necessary to turn heaters off for a short period or to switch into manual at low power. In this case it may be advantageous to wire Integral Hold to a digital input which activates when the heaters are turned off. When the
heaters are switched on again, because the integral is at its previous value, overshoot is minimised.
B2.3.5 Integral De-bump

This feature is not accessible to the user. When changing from Manual to Auto control. the integral component is forced to: (out put value proportional component derivative component) (I = OP P D).
This ensures that no change occurs in output at the point of switch over, (Bumpless Transfer). The output
power then gradually changes in accordance with the demand from the PID algorithm.
If manual mode = Track, bumpless transfer also occurs when changing from Auto to Manual control. At the
point of changeover the output power remains the same as the demand in the auto state. The value can then
be altered by the operator. For other modes, the output steps to the Forced output or Last MOP value as
appropriate. See Manual Mode in the Output menu for further details
B2.3.6 Loop Break

Loop Break attempts to detect loss of restoring action in the control loop by checking the control output, the
process value and its rate of change. Since response times vary from process to process, the Loop Break
Time (LBT) parameter (PID menu) allows a time to be set before a Loop Break Alarm (Loop Break - Diagnostics menu) becomes active. LBT is set automatically in Autotune.
The Loop Break Alarm parameter has no direct effect on control. In order to define behaviour under Loop
Break conditions, the parameter must be wired, for example, to a relay, which can then activate an external
indicator.
It is assumed that, so long as the requested output power is within the output power limits of a control loop,
the loop is operating in linear control and is therefore not in a loop break condition. If, however, the output
becomes saturated then the loop is operating outside its linear control region. If the output remains saturated at the same output power for a significant duration, then this might be symptomatic of a fault in the control loop. The source of the loop break is not important, but the loss of control could be catastrophic.
Since the worst case time constant for a given load is usually known, a worst case time can be calculated over
which the load should have responded with a minimum movement in temperature. By performing this calculation the corresponding rate of approach towards setpoint can be used to determine if the loop can no
longer control at the chosen setpoint. If the PV was drifting away from the setpoint or approaching the setpoint at a rate less than that calculated, the loop break condition would be met.
If an autotune is performed the loop break time is automatically set to Ti 2 for a PI or PID loop, or to 12
Td for a PD loop. For an On/Off controller loop break detection is based on loop range settings as 0.1
Span where Span = Range High Range Low. Therefore, if the output is at limit and the PV has not moved
by 0.1Span in the loop break time a loop break will occur.
If the loop break time is 0 (off) the loop break time can be set manually. Then, if the output is in saturation
and the PV has not moved by >0.5 Pb in the loop break time, a loop break condition is considered to have
occurred.
Appendix B
Page 290
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec11
B2.3.7 Gain Scheduling

In some processes the tuned PID set may be different at low temperatures from that at high temperatures
particularly in control systems where the response to the cooling power is significantly different from that of
the heating power, or when changes in the process have occurred. Gain scheduling allows a number of PID
sets to be stored and provides automatic transfer of control between one set of PID values and another. For
this instrument, the maximum number of sets is three which means that two boundaries are provided to select when the next PID set is used. When a boundary is exceeded the next PID set is selected bumplessly.
Hysteresis is used to stop scheduling oscillation at the boundaries.
Gain scheduling is basically a look up table which can be selected using different strategies or types. Auto
tune tunes to the active scheduled PID set.
The following Gain Scheduled types are offered using the PID menu parameter Sched Type:
Set
Required set selected by the user. Alternatively soft wiring may be used to control the
PID set selection
Setpoint
Transfer between sets is dependent on the setpoint value
PV
Transfer between sets is dependent on the process value
Error
Transfer between sets is dependent on the Error value
Output
Transfer between sets is dependent on the output demand value
Remote
A remote parameter may be wired into the scheduler. The PID set is then selected according to the value of this input.
PV (e.g.)
2 - 3 boundary
1 - 2 boundary
Time
Set 1
Set 2
Set 3
Figure B2.3.7 gain scheduling
B2.4 TUNING
B2.4.1 Introduction
The balancing of the P, I and D terms varies from process to process. In a plastics extruder, for example, there
are different responses to a die, casting roll, drive loop, thickness control loop or pressure loop. In order to
achieve the best performance from an extrusion line all loop tuning parameters must be set to their optimum
values.
Tuning involves setting the following PID menu parameters:
Proportional Band (PB), Integral Time (Ti), Derivative Time (Td), Cutback High (CBH), Cutback Low (CBL), and
Relative Cool Gain (R2G - applicable to heat/cool systems only).
The recorder/controller is shipped with these parameters set to default values. In many cases the default
values give adequate, stable, straight-line control, but the response of the loop may not be ideal. Because
process characteristics vary it is often necessary to adjust the control parameters to achieve best control. To
determine the optimum values for any particular loop or process it is necessary to carry out a procedure
called loop tuning. If significant changes are later made to the process which affect the way in which it responds it may be necessary to retune the loop.
Users have the choice of tuning the loop automatically or manually. Both procedures require the loop to
oscillate and both are described in the following sections.
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
Appendix B
Page 291
B2.4.2 Loop Response

Ignoring loop oscillation, there are three categories of loop performance viz Under damped, Critically
damped and Over damped:
UNDER DAMPED
In this situation the parameters are set to prevent oscillation but lead to an overshoot of the Process Value
(PV) followed by decaying oscillation until the PV finally settles at the Setpoint. This type of response can
give a minimum time to Setpoint but overshoot may cause problems in certain situations and the loop may
be sensitive to sudden changes in PV, resulting in further decaying oscillations before settling once again.
CRITICALLY DAMPED
This represents an ideal situation where noticeable overshoot to small step changes does not occur and the
process responds to changes in a controlled, non oscillatory manner.
OVER DAMPED
In this situation the loop responds in a controlled but sluggish manner which results in a non-ideal and unnecessarily slow loop performance.
B2.4.3 Initial Settings

In addition to the tuning parameters listed above, there are a number of other parameters which can affect
loop response. These parameters must be correctly configured before tuning is initiated. Parameters include, but are not limited to:SETPOINT
Before tuning, the loop conditions should be set as closely as practicable to the actual conditions which will
be met in normal operation. For example, in a furnace or oven application a representative load should be
included, an extruder should be running, etc.
OUTPUT HIGH, OUTPUT LOW
These Output menu heat and cool limits define the overall maximum and minimum power which may be
delivered to the process by the control loop. For a heat only controller the default values are 0 and 100%.
For a heat/cool controller the defaults are -100 and 100%. Although most processes are designed to work
between these limits there may be instances where it is desirable to limit the power delivered to the process.
REM. OUTPUT LOW, REM. OUTPUT HIGH
If these Remote Output Limits parameters (Output menu) are used, they are effective only if they lie within
the Heat/Cool Limits above.
CH2 DEADBAND
Heat/Cool Dead band If a second (cool) channel is configured, a parameter Ch2 Deadband is also available
in the Output menu which sets the distance between the heat and cool proportional bands. The default
value is 0% which means that heating will cease to be available at the same time as cooling becomes available. The dead band may be set to ensure that there is no possibility of the heat and cool channels operating
together, particularly when cycling output stages are installed.
MINIMUM ON TIME
If either or both of the output channels is fitted with a relay or logic output, the parameter Min On Time appears in the output menu. This is the cycling time for a time proportioning output and should be set correctly
before tuning is started.
FILTER
The Filter parameter is found in the Channel Main menu (section 4.4). It is used to remove noise from slowly changing signals so that the underlying trend can be seen more clearly.
Appendix B
Page 292
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec11
B2.4.3 INITIAL SETTINGS (Cont.)

RATE
Sets the maximum PID rate-of-change. The output rate limit is active during tuning and can affect the tuning
results. Rate is useful in preventing rapid changes in output from damaging the process or heater elements.
The parameter Rate is found in the Setpoint menu.
CH1 TRAVEL TIME, CH2 TRAVEL TIME
Valve Travel Time. If the output is a motor valve positioner the Ch1 Travel Time and Ch2 Travel Time Output menu parameters must be set correctly. The valve travel time is the time taken for the valve to travel from
0% (closed) to 100% (open). This may be different from the motor travel time limits because the mechanical
linkage between the motor and the valve, setting of limit switches etc. can modify behaviour. In a valve positioner application, the channel output is wired to the PV input of relay 2A2B or 4AC. Configuring this relay
as Type = Valve Raise causes the associated relay (3A3C or 5AC respectively) to be configured automatically
as Type = Valve Lower, and the action of the relay pair is controlled by the single wire. In a heat/cool application, channel one is the heat valve and channel two is the cool valve.
B2.4.4 Other tuning considerations

If a process includes adjacent interactive zones, each zone should be tuned independently with the adjacent
zones at operating temperature.
It is recommended that a tuning process be initiated when the PV and setpoint are far apart. This allows start
up conditions to be measured and cutback values to be calculated more accurately. Cutback is not set for
Tune at setpoint.
In a programmer/controller tuning should only be attempted during dwell periods and not during ramp
stages. If a programmer/controller is tuned automatically the controller should be placed in Hold during
each dwell period whilst autotune is active.
Note: Tuning, carried out in dwell periods which are at different extremes of temperature may give
different results owing to non linearity of heating (or cooling). This may provide a convenient way to
establish values for Gain Scheduling.
If an auto tune is initiated there are two further parameters (High Output and Low Output) which need to
be set. These are found in the Tune menu.
High Output
Sets a high output limit to be imposed during autotune. Must be Output High, set in
the Output menu.
Low Output
Sets a low output limit to be imposed during autotune. Must be Output Low, set in
the Output menu.
The above values must be set correctly, otherwise sufficient power to achieve SP might not be available during tuning, and the tune will eventually fail.
B2.4.5 Autotune
Autotune automatically sets the following PID menu parameters:
PB
Proportional band.
Ti
Integral time. If previously set to Off Ti will remain off after an autotune.
Td
Derivative time. If previously set to Off Td will remain off after an autotune.
CBH, CBL
Cutback high and low values. If either is set to Auto, it will remain so after auto tuning.
In order that Autotune set the cutback values for the user, a value other than Auto must
be selected before Autotune is initiated. Autotune never returns cutback values less
than 1.6 PB
R2G
Calculated only if the unit is configured as Heat/Cool. Following an Autotune, R2G lies
between 0.1 and 10. If the calculated value lies outside this range, a Tune Fail alarm is
set.
LBT
Loop break time. Following an autotune, LBT is set to 2 Ti (if Ti was not previously set
Off), or to 12 Td (if Ti was previously set to Off).
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
Appendix B
Page 293
B2.4.5 AUTOTUNE (Cont.)

Autotune can be performed at any time, but normally it is performed only once, during the initial commissioning of the process. However, if the process under control subsequently becomes unsatisfactory (because its characteristics have changed), it may be necessary to tune again for the new conditions.
The auto tune algorithm reacts in different ways depending on the initial conditions of the plant. The explanations given later in this section are for the following example conditions:1. Initial PV is below the setpoint and, therefore, approaches the setpoint from below for a heat/cool control loop
2. As above, but for a heat only control loop
3. Initial PV is at the same value as the setpoint (tune at setpoint). That is, within 0.3% of the range of the
controller if PB Units (Setup menu) is set to Percent, or +1 engineering unit (1 in 1000) if the PB Units
is set to Eng. Range is defined as Range High Range Low for process inputs or the thermocouple
or RTD range defined in section A3 for temperature inputs. If the PV is just outside the range stated
above the autotune will attempt a tune from above or below SP.
AUTOTUNE AND SENSOR BREAK
When the controller is autotuning and sensor break occurs, the autotune aborts and the controller outputs
the sensor break output power Sbrk OP set up in the Output menu. Autotune must be re-started when the
sensor break condition is no longer present.
AUTOTUNE AND INHIBIT
If the controller is in autotune when Inhibit is asserted, the tune goes to the Off state (Stage = Reset). On
inhibit being released the controller will re-start autotune.
AUTOTUNE AND GAIN SCHEDULING
When gain scheduling is enabled and an autotune is performed, the calculated PID values are written into
the PID set that is active, on completion of the tune. Therefore, the user may tune within the boundaries of
a set and the values will be written into the appropriate PID set. However, if the boundaries are close (because the range of the loop is not large), then, at the completion of the tune, it cannot be guaranteed that
the PID values will be written to the correct set particularly if the schedule type is PV or OP. In this situation
the scheduler (Sched Type) should be switched to Set and the active set chosen manually.
INITIAL CONDITIONS
Configure the parameters described in sections B2.4.3 and B2.4.4, above.
Notes:
1. The tighter power limit applies. For example, if High Output is set to 80% and Output High is
set to 70% then the output power will be limited to 70%
2. The PV must oscillate to some degree to allow the tuner to calculate the relevant values. The limits must be set so as to allow oscillation about the setpoint.
INITIATING THE AUTOTUNE
In the Loop Tune menu for the relevant loop, set TuneEn to On.
Appendix B
Page 294
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec11

EXAMPLE 1: AUTOTUNE FROM BELOW SP (HEAT/COOL)
The point at which Automatic tuning is performed (Tune Control Point) lies just below the setpoint at which
the process is normally expected to operate (Target Setpoint). This ensures that the process is not significantly overheated or overcooled. The Tune Control Point is calculated as follows:Tune Control Point = Initial PV + 0.75(Target Setpoint Initial PV).
The Initial PV is the PV measured after a 1 minute settling period (point B in the figure below).
Examples:
If Target Setpoint = 500C and Initial PV = 20C, then the Tune Control Point is 380C.
If Target Setpoint = 500C and Initial PV = 400C, then the Tune Control Point is 475C.
This is because the overshoot is likely to be less as the process temperature approaches the target setpoint.
Figure B2.4.5a shows the auto tune sequence.
It is not guaranteed that
PV will not exceed SP
Target SP
1st
overshoot
Peak to
peak
PV
True control point
Hysteresis
High output
Zero output
OP
Low output
B - A = 1 minute
Figure B2.4.5a Autotune heat/cool process
KEY
A
A to B
Start of Autotune
Heating and Cooling off for one minute allows steady state conditions to be established.
First heat/cool cycle to establish first overshoot. Cutback low (CBL) value calculated
from the overshoot magnitude (unless CBL set to Auto).
Two cycles of oscillation allow peak-to-peak value and oscillation period to be determined. PID terms are calculated.
Heating is switched on.
Heating (and cooling) are switched off allowing the plant to respond naturally. Measurements over the period F to G are used to calculate the Relative Cool Gain (R2G). Cutback High is calculated from the equation (CBH = CBL R2G).
Autotune is turned off and the process is allowed to control at the target setpoint using
the new control terms.
B to D
B to F
F
G
Note: Controlling from above SP is identical except that heating and cooling are reversed.
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
Appendix B
Page 295

EXAMPLE 2: AUTOTUNE FROM BELOW SP (HEAT ONLY)
The sequence of operation for a heat only loop is the same as that described above for a heat/cool loop,
except that the sequence ends at F since there is no need to calculate R2G (R2G is set to 1.0 for heat only
processes). At F autotune is turned off and the process is allowed to control using the new control terms.
For a tune from below setpoint CBL is calculated on the basis of the size of the overshoot (assuming it was
not set to Auto in the initial conditions). CBH is then set to the same value as CBL.
Note: Autotune can also occur when the initial PV is above SP. The sequence is the same as tuning
from below setpoint except that the sequence starts with natural cooling applied at B after the first
one minute settling time. In this case CBH is calculated and CBL is then set to the same value as
CBH.
Target SP
1st
overshoot
Peak to
peak
PV
True control point
Hysteresis
High output
OP
Low output
B - A = 1 minute
Figure B2.4.5b Autotune heat only process (from below SP)
A
A to B
B to D
D to F
F
Appendix B
Page 296
Start of Autotune
Heating off for one minute to allow steady state conditions to be established.
First heat cycle to establish first overshoot. Cutback low (CBL) value calculated from the
overshoot magnitude (unless CBL set to Auto).
Calculate PID terms.
Autotune is turned off and the process is allowed to control at the target setpoint using
the new control terms.
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec11

EXAMPLE 3: AUTOTUNE AT SP (HEAT /COOL)
It is sometimes necessary to tune at the actual setpoint being used as shown below.
For a tune at setpoint, autotune does not calculate cutback since there was no initial start up response to the
application of heating or cooling. Cutback values of less than 1.6 PB will not be returned.
Peak to
peak
Hysteresis
Target SP
PV
High output
Zero output
OP
Low output
B - A = 1 minute
Figure B2.4.5c Autotune at setpoint
A to B
C to G
G to H
I
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
Start of Autotune. A test is done at the start of autotune to establish conditions for a
tune at setpoint. Conditions are that SP must remain within 0.3% of the range of the
controller if PB Units (Setup menu) is set to Percent, or +1 engineering unit (1 in 1000)
if the PB Units is set to Eng. Range is defined as Range High Range Low for process inputs or the thermocouple or RTD range defined in section A3 for temperature inputs.
The output is frozen at he current value for one minute, and the conditions are continuously monitored during this period. If the conditions specified above are met, then an
autotune at setpoint is initiated at B. If PV drifts outside the condition limits at any time
during this period, tuning at SP is abandoned, and tuning resumes as a tune from
above or tune from below, depending on the direction of drift. Since the loop is already at setpoint, a Tune Control setpoint is not calculated; the loop is forced to oscillate about the Target SP.
The process is forced to oscillate by switching the output between the output limits.
The oscillation period and the peak-to-peak response are determined, and the PID
terms calculated.
An extra heating stage is initiated, then all heating and cooling are switched off at H,
allowing the plant to respond naturally. The relative cool gain (R2G) is calculated.
Autotune is switched off and the process is allowed to control at the target setpoint using the newly calculated terms.
Appendix B
Page 297

AT.R2G
Some load types and process conditions can cause autotune to set an incorrect value for R2G resulting in an
instability in the system after an autotune has completed, In such circumstances, the value of R2G should be
checked, and if it is low (approaching 0.1) a manual entry should be made as follows:
1. In the Tune menu, set the AT.R2G parameter to No.
2. In the PID menu, enter the new R2G value (calculated as described below)
3. In the Tune menu, enter a value for Low Output, calculated from: Low Output = -High Output x R2G
4. In the Tune menu, set TuneEn On.
R2G CALCULATION
1. In the Main menu, set the controller to Manual mode
2. Turn heating on (limited by the value of Output High in the Output menu) and measure the heating
rate (H C/minute).
3. Allow the process to heat to, say, 10% above the setpoint value then turn the heating off and allow the
temperature to settle.
4. Turn cooling power on (limited by the value of Output Low in the Output menu) and measure the
cooling rate (C C/minute) whilst allowing the temperature to fall below the setpoint value.
5. Calculate the value of R2G from the equation R2G = (H/C) x (Output Low/output High)
Example:
For a measured heating rate (H) of 10C per min and a measured cooling rate (C) of 25 per minute and with,
Output High = 80% and Output Low = 40%, then R2G = (10/25) x (40/80) = 0.4 x 0.5 = 0.2.
OP Power
Heating on
HTemp
Htime
SP
CTemp
Output Lo
HTemp
------------------------ = HeatingRate
Htime
Cooling on
Ctime
Temperature
CTemp
----------------------- = CoolingRate
Ctime
Output Hi
PV
Time
Figure 2.4.5d R2G calculation
Note: This is not a very accurate method as it does not take natural cooling into account. Its main
advantage is that it is simple to achieve.
Appendix B
Page 298
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec11

FAILURE MODES
The conditions for performing an autotune are monitored by the Tune menu parameter State. If autotune
is not successful error conditions are read by this parameter as follows:
Timeout
Set if any one stage is not completed within an hour. Possible causes are the loop being
open circuit, or not responding to the controller demands. Some heavily lagged systems may produce a timeout if the cooling rate is very slow.
TI Limit
This is set if Autotune calculates a value for the integral term which is greater than the
maximum allowable (99999 seconds). This indicates that the loop is not responding or
that the tune is taking too long.
R2G Limit
Error occurs if the calculate value of R2G is outside the range 0.1 to 10.0. R2G limit can
occur if the gain difference between heating and cooling is too large, or if the controller
is configured for heat/cool, but the heating and/or cooling device is turned off or not
working correctly.
B2.4.6 Manual tuning

If, for any reason, automatic tuning gives unsatisfactory results the controller can be tuned manually. There
are a number of standard methods for manual tuning, the Zeigler-Nichols method being described here:
1. Adjust the setpoint to its normal running conditions (assumed to be above the PV so that heat only is
applied.
2. Set the integral and derivative times (Ti and Td) to Off
3. Set High and Low cutback (CBH and CBL) to Auto.
4. If the PV is stable (not necessarily at the setpoint), reduce the proportional band (PB) such that the PV
just starts to oscillate, leaving time between adjustments to allow the loop to stabilise. Make a note of
the PB at this point (PB), and also note the oscillation period (T).
If the PV is already oscillating measure the oscillation period (T) and then gradually increase PB to the
point at which oscillation just ceases. Make a note of the PB (PB) at this point.
5.
6.
7.
If the controller is fitted with a cooling channel, enable this now.

Observe the oscillation waveform and adjust R2G until a symmetrical wave form is observed (Figure
B2.4.6).
Set PB, Ti and Td according to table B2.4.6.
Control type
PB
Ti
Td
Proportional only
P+I
P+I+D
2 PB
2.2 PB
1.7 PB
Off
0.8 T
0.5 T
Off
Off
0.12 T
Table B2.4.6 Calculate parameter values
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
Appendix B
Page 299
B2.4.6 MANUAL TUNING (Cont.)
Temperature
Setpoint
R2G correct
R2G too large
R2G too small
Time
Figure 2.4.6a Relative Cool Gain
CUTBACK VALUES
The PID terms calculated from Table 2.4.6, above, should be entered before the cutback values are set.
The above procedure sets up the parameters for optimum steady state control. If unacceptable levels of
overshoot or undershoot occur during start-up, or for large step changes in PV, then the cutback parameters
should be set manually, as follows:
1.
Initially set the cutback values to one proportional bandwidth converted into display units. This can be
calculated by taking the value in percent that has been installed into the parameter PB and entering it
into the following formula:
PB/100 Span of controller = Cutback High and Cutback Low
For example, if PB = 10% and the span of the controller is 0 to 1200C, then
Cutback High = Cutback Low = 10/100 1200 = 120
2.
If overshoot is observed following the correct settings of the PID terms increase the value of CBL by
the value of the overshoot in display units. If undershoot is observed increase the value of the parameter CBH by the value of the undershoot in display units.
Display units
Initial overshoot
PV approaching SP
from above:
adjust CBH
Setpoint
PV approaching SP
from below:
adjust CBL
Initial undershoot
Time
Figure 2.4.6b Manual Cutback setting
Appendix B
Page 300
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec11
B2.5 SETPOINT
The controller setpoint is the Working Setpoint which can be derived from:1. SP1 or SP2, both of which are manually set by the user and can be switched into use by an external signal or via the user interface.
2. From an external (remote) analogue source
3. The output of a programmer function block.
B2.5.1 Setpoint function block

As well as providing a setpoint, the function block also provides:
1. The ability to limit the rate of change of the setpoint before it is applied to the control algorithm.
2. Upper and lower limits. These are defined as setpoint limits, SP High Limit and SP Low Limit, for the
local setpoints and instrument range high and low for other setpoint sources.
Note: All setpoints are limited by Range High and Range Low so that if SP High Limit, for example, is set higher than Range High, then SP High Limit is ignored and the setpoint is limited at the
Range High value.
User configurable methods for tracking are available, such that the transfers between setpoints and between
operating modes do not cause bumps in the setpoint.
Figure B2.5.1, below, shows the function block schematic.
PSP High Limit
Programmer SP
Prog
PSP Low Limit

Local
SP2
SP High Limit
SP Low Limit
SP1
SP2 Enable
SP High Limit
Enable Rem SP
Local
SP1 Enable
Target SP
SP Low Limit
Remote
Trim High
Range min
Local SP + Remote
trim
Remote type
Trim Low
Remote SP
Range max
Remote only
Local Trim
Remote
+ local trim
Range max
Target SP
Other inputs:
PV
Ramp rate
Servo
Sp changed
Working SP
Ramp
Range min
Ramp Status
Figure 2.5.1 Setpoint Function block
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
Appendix B
Page 301
B2.5.2 Setpoint Limits

The setpoint generator provides limits for each of the setpoint sources as well as an overall set of limits for
the loop. These are summarised in figure 2.5.2, below.
MaxDisp
+Span
Range
High
SP
High Limit
Remote
SP1
SP Trim
High
Target
SP
SP2
SP
Low Limit
Range
Low
Working
SP
LoopAlm
setpoints
SP Trim
SP Trim
Low
-Span
MinDisp
Figure 2.5.2 Setpoint Limits
Range High and Range Low provide the range information for the control loop. They are used in control
calculations to generate proportional bands. Span = Range High Range Low.
B2.5.3 Setpoint Rate Limit

This symmetrical rate limiter allows the rate of change of setpoint to be controlled, preventing step changes
in the setpoint. The limit is applied to the working setpoint which includes setpoint trim.
Rate limiting is enabled using the Rate parameter. If this is set to 0 then any change made to the setpoint
will be effective immediately. If it is set to any other value, then a change in the setpoint will be have rate
limiting applied at the value set, in units per minute. Rate limit applies to SP1, SP2 and Remote SP.
When rate limit is active Rate Done displays No. When the setpoint has been reached the value changes
to Yes.
When Rate is set to a value (other than Off) an additional parameter SP Rate Disable is displayed which
allows the setpoint rate limit to be turned off and on without the need to adjust the Rate parameter between
Off and a working value.
If the PV is in sensor break, the rate limit is suspended and the working setpoint takes the value of 0. On
sensor break being released the working setpoint goes from 0 to the selected setpoint value at the rate limit.
Appendix B
Page 302
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec11
B2.5.4 Setpoint Tracking

The setpoint used by the controller may be derived from a number of sources. For example:1. Local setpoints SP1 and SP2. These may be selected through the front panel using the parameter SP
Select, through digital communications or by configuring a digital input which selects either SP1 or
SP2. This might be used, for example, to switch between normal running conditions and standby conditions. If Rate Limit is switched off the new setpoint value is adopted immediately when the switch is
changed.
2. A programmer generating a setpoint which varies over time. When the programmer is running, the
Track SP and Track PV parameters update continuously so that the programmer can perform its own
servo. This is sometimes referred to as Program Tracking.
3. From a Remote analogue source. The source could be an external analogue input into an analogue
input module wired to the Alt SP parameter or a User Value wired to the Alt SP parameter. The
remote setpoint is used when the parameter Alt SP Enable is set to Yes.
Setpoint tracking (sometimes referred to as Remote Tracking) ensures that the Local setpoint adopts the Remote setpoint value when switching from Local to Remote to maintain bumpless transfer from Remote to Local. Bumpless transfer does not take place when changing from Local to Remote.
Note: If Rate Limit is applied, the setpoint will change at the set rate, when changing from Local to
Remote.
B2.5.5 Manual Tracking

When the controller is operating in manual mode the currently selected SP (SP1 or SP2) tracks the PV. When
the controller resumes automatic control there will be no step change in the resolved SP. Manual tracking
does not apply to the remote setpoint or programmer setpoint.
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
Appendix B
Page 303
B2.6 OUTPUT
B2.6.1 Introduction
The output function block selects the correct output sources to be used, determines whether to heat or cool
and then applies limits. Power feed forward and non-linear cooling are also applied.
It is this block that manages the output in exception conditions such as start up and sensor break.
The outputs, Ch1 Output and Ch2 Output, are normally wired to a digital I/O where they are converted
into analogue or time proportioned signals for electrical heating, cooling or valve movement.
B2.6.2 Output Limits

Figure B2.6.2 shows where output limits are applied.
PID Menu
Including Gain
Scheduling
output limits
Output High
+100
Output Low
-100
Output High 2
+100
Diag Menu
Sched Out High

Sched Out Low
Output Low 2
-100
Output High 3
+100
Output Menu
Diagnostics
Menu
Writable not wirable
Read only
Writable not
wirable
Output High
Working Out Low

Working Out High
Min
Output Low 3
-100
Output Menu
Rem.Output
High
Rem. Output
Low
Working
output
Output Low
Tune Menu
OPL limiting to +ve
High Output
Low Output
Writable and wirable
Figure B2.6.2 Output Limits
Notes:
1. Individual output limits may be set in the PID list for each set of PID parameters when gain scheduling is in use.
2. Limits may also be applied from an external source. These are Rem.Output High and Rem. Output Low found in the Output menu. These parameters are wireable; for example they may be
wired to an analogue input module so that a limit may applied through some external strategy. If
these parameters are not wired +100% limit is applied every time the instrument is powered up.
(Continued)
Appendix B
Page 304
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec11
B2.6.2 OUTPUT LIMITS (Cont.)

Notes (Continued)
3. The tightest limits (between Remote and PID) are connected to the output where an overall limit
is applied using parameters Output High and Output Low.
4. Working Out High and Working Out low found in the Diagnostics list are read only parameters
showing the overall working output limits.
5. The tune limits are a separate part of the algorithm and are applied to the output during the tuning process. The overall limits Output Hi and Output Lo always have priority.
B2.6.3 Output Rate Limit

The output rate limiter is a rate-of-change limiter, set in (%/sec) which prevents step changes in output power
being demanded. Rate limiting is performed by determining the direction in which the output is changing,
and then incrementing or decrementing the Working Output (Main menu) until it equals the required output
(Target OP).
The amount to increment or decrement is calculated using the sampling rate of the algorithm (125ms) and
the selected rate limit. If the change in output is less than the rate limit increment the change takes effect
immediately.
The rate limit direction and increment is calculated on every execution of the rate limit. Therefore, if the rate
limit is changed during execution, the new rate of change takes immediate effect. If the output is changed
whilst rate limiting is taking place, the new value takes immediate effect on the direction of the rate limit and
in determining whether the rate limit has completed.
The rate limiter is self-correcting such that if the increment is small it is accumulated until it takes effect.
The output rate limit is active when the loop is in both auto and manual modes, and during autotune.
B2.6.4 Sensor Break Mode

If a Sensor break is detected by the measurement system the loop reacts in one of two ways, according to
the configuration of Sbrk Mode (Safe or Hold). On exit from sensor break the transfer is bumpless the
power output starts controlling again from the current operating setpoint and moves, under PID closed-loop
control, from its pre-set value to the control value.
SAFE
If set to Safe, the output adopts a pre-set level (Sbrk OP). If rate limit is not configured, the output steps to
the Sbrk OP value, otherwise it ramps to this value at the rate limit.
HOLD
If set to Hold the output remains at its current value. If Output Rate Limit (Rate) has been configured a small
step may be seen as the working output will limit to the value existing two iterations ago.
B2.6.5 Forced Output

This feature enables the user to specify what the output of the loop should do when moving from automatic
control to manual control. The default is that the output power is maintained but it is then adjustable by the
user.
If Manual Mode is set to Step, the user can set a manual output power value and on transition to manual the
output will be forced to that value.
If Manual Mode is set to Track the output steps to the forced manual output and then subsequent edits to
the output power are tracked back into the manual output value.
If Manual Mode is set to Last Man. Out then when moving from automatic to manual mode, the output
adopts the last manual output value.
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
Appendix B
Page 305
B2.6.6 Power Feed Forward

Power feed forward is used when driving an electrical heating element. It monitors the line voltage and compensates for fluctuations before they affect the process temperature. The use of this will give better steady
state performance when the line voltage is not stable.
It is mainly used for digital type outputs which drive contactors or solid state relays. Because it only has value
in this type of application it can be switched off using the parameter Pff En. It should also be disabled for
any non-electric heating process. It is not necessary when Eurotherm analogue thyristor control is used since
compensation for power changes is included in the thyristor driver.
Consider a process running at 25% power, with zero error and then the line voltage falls by 20%. The heater
power would drop by 36% because of the square law dependence of power on voltage. A drop in temperature would result. After a time, the thermocouple and controller would sense this fall and increase the ONTIME of the contactor just enough to bring the temperature back to set point. Meanwhile the process would
be running a bit cooler than optimum which may cause some imperfection in the product.
With power feed forward enabled the line voltage is monitored continuously and ON-TIME increased or decreased to compensate immediately. In this way the process need never suffer a temperature disturbance
caused by a line voltage change.
Power Feed forward should not be confused with Feed forward which is described in section B2.6.8.
B2.6.7 Cool Type

Cooling methods vary from application to application. For example, an extruder barrel may be cooled by
forced air (from a fan), or by circulating water or oil around a jacket. The cooling effect will be different depending on the method. Cool Type (appears only if the setup parameter Ch2 Control is set to PID) is
used to accommodate different types of cooling methods as follows:
LINEAR
The cooling algorithm may be set to linear where the controller output changes linearly with the PID demand
signal.
OIL COOLING
Cool Type = Oil. As oil is, to all intents and purposes, non-evaporative, oil cooling is pulsed in a linear
manner.
WATER COOLING
If the area being cooled is running well above 100C, then the first few pulses of water flash into steam giving
greatly increased cooling due to the latent heat of evaporation. When the area cools, less (or even no) evaporation takes place and the cooling is less effective.
Setting Cool Type to Water delivers much shortened pulses of water for the first few percent of the cooling
range, when the water is likely to be flashing into steam. This compensates for the transition out of the initial
strong evaporative cooling.
FAN COOLING
Cool Type = Fan. Fan cooling is much gentler than water cooling and not so immediate or decisive (because of the long heat transfer path through the process mechanics). With fan cooling, a cool gain setting
of three upwards is typical. Delivery of pulses to the blower is non linear, this non-linearity being caused by
a combination of forced air movement and fan efficiency as a function of air velocity (e. g. the efficiency of a
fan when producing a low speed (laminar) air flow is different from its efficiency when producing a highspeed, turbulent flow.
Appendix B
Page 306
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec11
B2.6.8 Feed forward

Feed forward is a method of adding an extra scalable component to the PID output, before any limiting. It
can be used, for example, in the implementation of cascade loops and constant head control or it can be
used to pre-load the control signal with a value close to that which is required to achieve the setpoint, thus
improving system response. Feed forward (FF) is applied such that the PID output is limited by trim limits
and acts as a trim on a FF value. The FF value is derived either from the PV or setpoint by scaling the PV or
SP by the FF Gain and FF Offset. Alternatively, a remote value may be used for the FF value, but this is not
subject to any scaling. The resultant FF value is added to the limited PID OP and becomes the PID output
as far as the output algorithm is concerned. The feedback value then generated must then have the FF contribution removed before being used again by the PID algorithm. The diagram below shows how feed forward is implemented.
FF Gain
FF Offset
SP
Gain
PV
FF Type
Remote
FF Type
Feedback
TrimHi
SP1
FF Trim Lim
PID
Output
algorithm
Output
PV
TrimLo
Figure B2.6.8 Implementation of Feed forward
B2.6.9 Effect of Control Action, Hysteresis and Deadband

CONTROL ACTION
For temperature control Control Act should be set to Rev. For a PID controller this means that the heater
power decreases as the PV increases. For an on/off controller, output 1 (usually heat) will be on (100%) when
PV is below the setpoint and output 2 (usually cool) will be on when PV is above the setpoint.
HYSTERESIS
Hysteresis applies to on/off control only and is set in the units of the PV. In heating applications the output
will turn off when the PV is at setpoint. It will turn on again when the PV falls below SP by the hysteresis value.
This shown in Figures B2.6.9a and B2.6.9b below for a heat and cool controller.
Hysteresis is intended to prevent the output from repeated switching on and off chattering at the control
setpoint. If the hysteresis is set to 0 then even the smallest change in the PV when at setpoint will cause the
output to switch. Hysteresis should be set to a value which provides an acceptable life for the output contacts, but which does not cause unacceptable oscillations in the PV.
If this performance is unacceptable, it is recommended that PID control be used instead.
DEADBAND
Deadband Ch2 Deadband can operate on both on/off control or PID control where it has the effect of extending the period when no heating or cooling is applied. In PID control the effect is modified by both the
integral and derivative terms. Deadband might be used in PID control, for example, where actuators take
time to complete their cycle thus ensuring that heating and cooling are not being applied at the same time.
Deadband is likely to be used, therefore, in on/off control only. Figure B2.6.9b, below, adds a deadband of
20 to the first example in figure B2.6.9a.
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
Appendix B
Page 307
B2.6.9 EFFECT OF CONTROL ACTION, HYSTERESIS AND DEADBAND (Cont.)

HYST.C
Heating and cooling type

both On/Off.
SP
HYST.H
Setpoint = 300C
Control action = Rev
Heating hysteresis = 8 C
OP1
HEATING
HEATING
Cooling hysteresis = 10C
COOLING
OP2
Heating off at
SP (300C)
Cooling
Cooling
on at
off at SP
SP+ HYST.C (300C)
(310C)
Heating
on at
SP- HYST.H
(292C)
Heating off
at SP
(300C)
Figure B2.6.9a Deadband OFF
HYST.C
D.BAND
SP
Heating and cooling type

both On/Off.
HYST.H
Setpoint = 300C
Control action = Rev
Heating hysteresis = 8 C
OP1
HEATING
HEATING
Cooling hysteresis = 10C
COOLING
OP2
Power deadband
Heating off at
SP (300C)
Cooling
Cooling
on at
SP+ HYST.C off at
D.BAND
(310C)
(305C)
Heating
on at
SP- HYST.H
(292C)
Heating off
at SP
(300C)
Figure B2.6.9b Deadband ON set at 50% of Cooling.
Appendix B
Page 308
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec11
B2.6.10 Valve nudge

For systems configured as Unbounded Valve Positioning (VPU) - set up in Loop Setup configuration Ch1(2)
control), it is possible to move the valve in small increments towards the open position (Nudge Raise) or towards the closed position (Nudge Lower). The trigger for such nudging can be a digital input (e.g. contact
closure) wired to the nudge raise or lower parameter, the up or down arrow keys or a command received
over the serial link.
The nudge command causes the valve drive output to drive the valve for either the minimum on time, or for
as long as the command is true, whichever is the longer (note 2). The default minimum on time is 125ms,
but this can be edited in the configuration for the relevant output relay (section 4.11.2).
Default min on
time
125ms
Default min
on times
Min on time
(User value)
Min on time
(User value)
Min on time
(User value)
Valve drive
Nudge Raise (Lower)

command
Demand < de- Demand > default
fault minimum- minimum- on time
on time
Demand < user entered minimum-on

time. Motor runs for
minimum on time.
Demand > user-entered minimum-on

time. Motor runs until current minimumon time elapses.
Figure B2.6.10 Valve nudge examples
Notes:
1. If Ch1 is set to VPU, Nudge operates the channel 1 valve, no matter what Ch2 is set to. If Ch1 is
not set to VPU, and Ch2 is set to VPU then the nudge operates on channel 2 valve.
2. The minimum on time is continuously retriggered. This means that if a minimum on time of (say)
10 seconds has been configured, then the valve may continue to move for up to 10 seconds
after the command has been removed. That is, it continues until the current minimum on time
period has expired.
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
Appendix B
Page 309
B2.6.11 Time Proportioning
Millieconds
PID controllers somtimes use Time Proportioning to control the average power to the load. This is done by
repeatedly switching the output on for a period (Ton) and then off for a period (Toff). The total period (Ton +
Toff) is called the cycle time. During each cycle, the average power delivered to the load is:
PAvg = PHeater x Duty cycle,
where PHeater is the actual transferred heater (or cooler) power and Duty cycle = Ton/(Ton + Toff), normally
represented as a percentage value.
The PID controller calculates the Duty Cycle (the PID output control signal from 0 to 100%) and provides a
Minimum on time between 100ms to 150 seconds.
Figure B2.6.11 shows how Ton, Toff and cycle time vary with demand %.
Ton + Toff = Cycle time
Ton
Toff
Tmin
Output demand (%)
Figure B2.6.11 Time proportioning curves (Minimum on time = 625ms)
Note: For this instrument, only Min on time is configurable
B2.7 DIAGNOSTICS
See section 4.6.7 for definitions of these parameters
Appendix B
Page 310
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec11
Appendix C: REFERENCE
C1 BATTERY REPLACEMENT
The battery can be replaced only after the unit has been withdrawn from the panel. It is therefore normally
necessary to unwire the instrument before changing the battery.
WARNING
Before removing the supply voltage wiring, isolate the supply voltage and secure it against unintended operation.
Note: The new battery must be installed within 10 seconds of the exhausted batterys removal, or
data will be lost.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Isolate the supply voltage and secure it against accidental operation.

Remove supply voltage wiring from the rear terminals.
Remove all signal wiring
Remove the Ethernet cable and USB device if fitted.
Remove the two securing springs, using a small screwdriver if necessary.
Prise the two chassis-retaining bungs, using a small screwdriver if necessary.
Ease the latching ears outwards, whilst pulling forwards on the bezel, until the chassis is free of the
sleeve.
8. Replace the battery. Recycle the exhausted battery according to local procedures.
9. Reinsert the chassis into the sleeve, and secure it using the chassis-retaining bungs previously
removed.
10. Reinstall the chassis into the panel and secure it using the retaining springs previously removed.
11. Reinstall all wiring, the Ethernet cable and USB device, if any.
12. Reset the date and time as described in section 4.1.1.
Retaining spring
(two places)
Remove retaining
bungs (two places)
Remove
Signal wiring
Remove USB device
and Ethernet cable
Remove retainers (two places)

Isolate supply voltage
Remove
supply voltage wiring
Replace battery
Remove the chassis
from the sleeve
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
Appendix C
Page 311
C2 SETTING UP AN FTP SERVER USING FILEZILLA

C2.1 DOWNLOADING
FileZilla is a free download from the internet (search for FileZilla server download).
1.
Download the latest version, following the instructions on

the screen.
2.
Answer No to the question Do you want to view only the

webpage content that was delivered securely.
3.
If necessary enable file download.
4.
In the Do you want to run or save

this file Security Warning windowclick on Run
5.
In the The Publisher could not be

verified..., Security Warning window, click on Run
6.
Agree or cancel the License agreement. If Agree, choose

Standard as the type of install.
Appendix C
Page 312
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
C2.1 DOWNLOADING (Cont.)

7.
Choose the destination for the file
8.
Select startup settings
9.
Click on Close when Installation is complete.
10.
Click OK in the Connect to Server window.
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
Appendix C
Page 313
C2.2 SERVER SETUP

1.
Create a new folder (directory) called, for this example, Archive

in a suitable location such as the C drive, or the desktop.
2.
In the Filezilla server window, click on File and select Connect to

Server.
The Logged on message appears
In the Edit menu, select Users and in the General

page, click on Add and enter a name for the user,
then click OK. For this example, GeneralUser has
been used, but it may be more advantageous to
use Anonymous because this is the default name
in the recorder/controller. Click on OK.
In the Edit menu, select Users and in the Shared

Folders page, click on Add
A browse window opens allowing the user to
select the new folder (Archive) created in step 1,
above.
When OK has been clicked to confirm the selection, the new folder appears in the centre window
(with an h next to it to indicate that this is the
home folder for this ftp user setup.
5.
Click on the relevant folder to enable the tick

boxes. Click on all the File and Directory enable
tick boxes, then click OK
Appendix C
Page 314
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
C2.3 PC SETUP
1.
Operate the Start button, and select Control Panel from the window that
appears. Double click on Windows Firewall
2.
Click on the Exceptions tab in the window that appears, and check
that both FTPControl and FTPData are enabled (ticked). If not, the
users IT department should be contacted for advice.
3.
Click on Add Program... and browse to the Filezilla destination

defined in step 7 of the download section (C2.1). Select FileZilla
server.exe and click on Open
FileZilla server.exe appears in the Exceptions list.

Click on OK
C2.4 RECORDER/CONTROLLER SET UP

In Network Archiving (section 4.2.2):
1. Enter the IP address of the pc in which the FTP server has been enabled in the Primary Server field.
2. Enter the Primary User name, as entered in step three of the Server setup procedure (section C2.2)
above (GeneralUser in this example).
3. Enter the IP address of another suitable pc which has been configured as an ftp server in the Sec.
Server field, and enter the relevant Sec. User name.
4. Configure the other unattended archive parameters as required (section 4.2.2).
Note: For the example above, Password was not enabled in the User Accounts setup page (section
C2.2), so for this example any Primary (Sec.) password entry is ignored. If a password had been
entered in the User Accounts setup, then the Primary (Sec.) Password field would have to contain
this password.
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
Appendix C
Page 315
C2.5 ARCHIVE ACTIVITY

Once a demand or unattended archive is initiated, the FileZilla Server page shows the activity status as the
archive progresses. Figure C2.5 shows a typical page. The top of the page shows the transaction details
between the server and any clients to which it is connected. The bottom portion shows details of the files
currently being transferred. These files are archived to the Archive folder.
Figure C2.5 FileZilla Server archive activity page
Appendix C
Page 316
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
C3 FUNCTION BLOCK DETAILS

C3.1 EIGHT INPUT OR BLOCK
An eight input logical OR block whose output is high (1, On) if any one or more inputs is high (1, On). If more
than eight inputs are required, a second block is automatically introduced, as shown in figure C3.1a. The
blocks in the figure are given the names A and B, where A and B can be any of the 12 available instances.
Figure C3.1a Eight input OR block
OR blocks are used automatically by the user wiring when more than one source is wired to the same destination parameter. For example, it may be required that Relay (Digital I/O 2A2B) is to operate if channel 1
alarm 1 and/or channel 2 alarm 1 channels goes active. In such a case, the Active parameter for the two
channel alarms would be wired to the same relays PV parameter.
OR blocks are invisible to the user interface, but the iTools graphical wiring page for this configuration (figure C3.1b), shows that an OR block has been introduced to OR the two alarm outputs together.
Figure C3.1b iTools representation of OR block usage
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
Appendix C
Page 317
C4 TCP PORT NUMBERS

The following TCP ports are made use of by the instrument.
Port
20
21
502
Usage
File Transfer protocol (FTP) data
FTP control
Modbus TCP communications
C5 ISOLATION DIAGRAM
Single (50V ac)
Ethernet
comms
Double (300V ac)
Relays /
DC output
Double (300V ac)
PV1*
Microprocessor
and system
circuits
Double (300V ac)
PV2*
Double (300V ac)
SN1
Supply voltage
100 to 240V ac
or
24V ac or dc
Rectification
Power
Supply
Circuits
Double (300V ac)
PV3*
Double (300V ac)
PV4*
Safety Earth
(Protective
conductor
terminal)
USB Comms
PSU Logic/
Digital I/O
Figure C5 Isolation diagram
* Note: Each PV is double isolated (300VRMS) from all other PVs.
Appendix C
Page 318
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
NANODAC RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE
Appendix D: CONFIGURATION MENU OVERVIEW

This appendix contains an overview of the configuration menus for the instrument, including all options as follows:
Instrument - - - - - - Section D1
Network - - - - - - - - Section D2
Group - - - - - - - - - - Section D3
Channel - - - - - - - - Section D4
Virtual Channel - - - Section D5
Loop - - - - - - - - - - - Section D6
Advanced Loop - - Section D7
Progammer- - - - - - Section D8
Modbus Master- - - Section D9
EtherNet/IP - - - - - - Section D10
Digital I/O - - - - - - - Section D11
DC Output - - - - - - Section D12
User Lin- - - - - - - - - Section D13
Custom Message - Section D14
Zirconia- - - - - - - - - Section D15
Steriliser - - - - - - - - Section D16
Humidity - - - - - - - - Section D17
BCD Input - - - - - - - Section D18
Logic (2 input)- - - - Section D19
Logic (8 input)- - - - Section D20
Multiplexer - - - - - - Section D21
Math (2 Input) - - - - Section D22
Timer - - - - - - - - - - Section D23
User Values - - - - - - Section D24
Real time Events - - Section D25
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec11
Appendix D
Page 319
D1 INSTRUMENT CONFIGURATION MENUS

Instrument.Clock
Instrument.Locale
Date
Instrument.Display
Language English
Time
Brightness 100%
Date Format DD/MM/YY

Time Zone GMT
Start On Last
Horizontal Trend
Start Month March
Dual Loop
End Time 02:00
Steriliser
Group
Display
Channel
Nvol Writes 93
Line Voltage 242.2 v
Info
Section 4.1.4
Trend Backgrnd Black

History Backgrnd Dark Grey
End Month October
H.Trend Scaling Hide
Locale
Security Rev 2
Promote List
End Day Sunday
Network
Company ID 1280
Config Rev 5
Vertical Trend
End On Last
Clock
Version 2.10
Bootrom 2.00
HPage Timeout Off
Start Day Sunday
Instrument
Save After 10 min

Home Page V.Trend
Start Time 01:00
Locale
Section 4.1.2
Name nanodac
Type nanodac
Saver Brightness 50%
DST Enable Yes

Clock
Section 4.1.1
Instrument.Info
Faceplate Cycling On
Setpoint Colour Red
Display
Section 4.1.3
USB Auto Scan No
Info
Virtual Channel
Upgrade
Loop
Security
Digital I/O
Upgrade
Section 4.1.5
I/O Fitted
Instrument.Upgrade
Upgrade Firmware (USB)
Source Path Source PAth
Initiate No
Save/Restore
Input Adjust
Output Adjust
Output Adjust
Section 4.1.10
Input Adjust
Section 4.1.9
Save/Restore
Section 4.1.8
I/O Fitted
Section 4.1.7
Instrument.Save/Restore
Operation Select...
1A1B (Dig.IO)
Status Inactive
2A2B (DC.Op)
Instrument.I/O Fitted
Security
Section 4.1.6
Instrument.Security
Engineer Pass **********
Supervisor Pass
Operator Pass
Apply Adjust No
LALC (Dig.In)
Remove Adjust No
3A3B (Relay)
Feature Pass 12345
LBLC Dig In
Feature2 Pass 12354
Apply Adjust No
4AC (Relay)
Remove Adjust No
5AC (Relay)
Comms Pass Enabled

Default Config No
Figure D1 Instrument configuration menus
Appendix D
Page 320
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec11
D2 NETWORK CONFIGURATION MENUS

Network.Archive
Media Size 123.99 MB
Media Free 89.36 MB
Network.Interface
Media Duration 448.55 Days
MAC 00:0A:8D:01:90:00
Rate None
Client Identifier nano_01:90:29
Destination FTP Server
IP Type Fixed
File Format Binary (UHH)
IP Address 123.123.123.10
Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0
Gateway 0.0.0.0
Interface
Section 4.2.1
Primary User anonymous

Primary Password **********
Sec. Server 123.123.123.11
Sec. User anonymous
Sec. Password **********

Instrument
Interface
Network
Archiving
Group
FTP Server
Channel
Virtual Channel
Loop
Digital I/O
Trigger No
Period Daily
Archive
Section 4.2.2
Remote with Binary file format
Network.Archive
Rate Monthly
Destination USB
File Format Both
CSV Values Yes
CSV Messages No
CSV Headers No
CSV Headings Yes
CSV Date Format Text
CSV Tab Del No
On media Full Overwrite
Primary User anonymous
Primary Password **********
Sec. Server 123.123.123.11
Sec. User anonymous
Sec. Password **********
Trigger No
Modbus
Period Daily
Modbus
Section 4.2.4
Network.Modbus
PrefMaster IP 123.123.123.12
Address 1
Input Timeout 0 sec
User ID Enable Instrument
Local with CSV files included

FTP Server
Section 4.2.3
Network.FTP Server
Username history
Password **********
Serial Mode Modbus Slave

Time Format Seconds
PrefMaster Conn 123.123.123.12
Response Time 0
Response Time 0
Response Time 0
Response Time 0
Response Time 0
Figure D2 Network configuration menus
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec11
Appendix D
Page 321
D3 GROUP CONFIGURATION MENU
D4 CHANNEL CONFIGURATION MENU
Note: Channel 1 shown; other channels similar

Instrument
Network
Group
Channel
Channel.1.Main
Descriptor Channel 1
Type Thermocouple
PV 197.35
Status Good
Virtual Channel
IP Adjust State Adjusted
Loop
Group Trend
Section 4.3.1
Group.Trend
Resolution 2
Digital I/O
Channel Main
Section 4.4.1
Descriptor Group 1
Units
Interval 10 secs
Instrument
Network
Test Signal Triangle 5 Hr
Major Divisions 5
Input Low 0
Point1 Channel 1
Trend
Input High 10
Point2 Channel 2
Recording
Point3 Channel 3
Group
Point4 Channel 4
Channel
Shunt 2.49
Instrument
Main
Range Low 0.00

Range High 100.00
Point5 No Trend
Network
Trend
Loop
Point6 No Trend
Group
Alarm1
Channel
Alarm2
Group.Recording
Flash Size 50.00 MB
Group Recording
Section 4.3.2
Lin Type Type K
Virtual Channel
Digital I/O
Range Units
Scale High 100.00
Virtual Channel
Offset 0.000
Loop
CJ Type External
Digital I/O
Ext CJ Temp 0.00

Filter 1.0 sec
Enable Yes
Sensor Break Type Break High
Interval 10 secs
UHH Compression Normal
Channel 2 Yes
Channel 3 Yes
Channel 4 Yes
Note: Alarm 1 shown; Alarm2 similar
Fault Response Drive Low
Channel Alarm
Section 4.4.3
Sensor Break Val 1%

Measured Value 0.2
Channel.1.Alarm1
Internal CJ Temp 35.1
Type Abs. High

VirtualChan 1 No
Threshold 35.00C
VirtualChan 2 No
Hysteresis 5.00C
Virtual Chan 14 No
Latch Manual
Suspend No
Scale Low 0.00
Flash Duration 250.96 Days
Channel 1 Yes
Note: For completeness, the diagram

above shows some configuration items
which are mutually exclusive on the real
instrument
Block Off
Channel Trend
Section 4.4.2
Dwell 00:00:00
Channel.1.Trend
Acknowledge No
Colour Wheatgerm
Active Yes
Span Low 0.00
Inactive No
N.acknowledged Yes
Span High 200.00
Acknowledgement No
Figure D3 Group configuration menus
Appendix D
Page 322
Figure D4 Channel configuration menus
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec11
D5 VIRTUAL CHANNEL CONFIGURATION MENU
Descriptor Virtualchan 1

Instrument
Network
Group
Channel
Virtual Channel
Loop
Digital I/O
Type Math
Operation Add
PV 10
Type Totaliser
Operation On
PV 1803.625 units
Status Ok
Resolution 0
Units
Status Good
Resolution 4
Units units
Input1 7
Input2 3
Type = Math
(Section 4.5.1)
Units Scaler 1
Low Cut Off 0
High Cut Off 100000
Input1 327.1
Period 1 sec

Instrument
Preset No
Preset Value 0
Main
Network
Alarm1
Rollover No
Group
Alarm2
Disable
Channel
Virtual Channel
Type = Totaliser
(Section 4.5.2)
Virtual Channel Alarm

Section 4.4.3
Loop
Type Counter
Operation On
PV 1203 units
Status Good
Resolution 0
Units units
Low Cut Off 0
High Cut Off 200001
Input1 1
Preset No
Preset Value 0 units
Trigger No
Virtual Channel.1.Alarm1
Digital I/O
Rollover No
Disable
Type Abs. High

Type = Counter
(Section 4.5.3)
Threshold 35.00C
Hysteresis 5.00C
Latch Manual
Notes:
1 Alarm 1 shown; Alarm2 similar
2
14 virtual channels are fitted as standard. If the Modbus Master and/or EtherNet/IP options are fitted, the
number of virtual channels is increased to 30, but virtual channels 16 to 30 are supplied without alarms.
Note: Virtual Channel 1 shown; other virtual channels similar
Block Off
Dwell 00:00:00
Acknowledge No
Active Yes
Inactive No
N.acknowledged Yes
Acknowledgement No
Figure D5 Virtual channel configuration menus
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec11
Appendix D
Page 323
D6 LOOP CONFIGURATION MENUS

Instrument
Network
Loop.1.Main
Loop.1.Setup
Auto/Manual Manual
Ch2 Control VPU
Target Setpoint 0.0
Channel
Virtual Channel
Working Setpoint 0.0
Loop
Working Output 0.0
Active Set Set1
State OFF
Boundary 1-2 0
Stage Reset
PB 20.0
Stage Time 0 sec
Deriv. Type PV
Loop 1 Main
(Section 4.6.1)
Number of Sets 2
High Output 100%
Integral Hold No
Advanced Loop
Sched Type Setpoint
Low Output -100%
Ch1 Control PID
Inhibit No
Group
Tune Enable On
Loop name Loop 1
PV 0.0
Loop.1.PID
Loop.1.Tune
Ti 360 sec
Td Off
Loop 1 Tune
(Section 4.6.3)
Auto/Man Access Read/Write
CBH Auto
CBL Auto
Loop 1 Setup
(Section 4.6.2)
Main
Network
Setup
Group
Tune
Channel
Setpoint
Loop
Output
Advanced Loop
LBT 100 sec

Output Low -100 %
Output High 100 %
PB2 20.0
Output High 2 100 %
Loop.1.Output
Loop 1 Output
(Section 4.6.6)
PID
Virtual Channel
Loop 1 PID
(Section 4.6.4)
Note: Loop 1 shown; Loop 2 similar

Instrument
MR 0.0 %
Output low -10.00 %

Output High 10.00 %
Ch1 Output 0.0
Loop.1.Diagnostics
Diagnostics
Loop 1 Diagnostics
(Section 4.6.7)
Ch2 Output -100.0
Error 0.0
Target Output 0.0 %
Working Out Low -100 %
Range Low -200.0
Rate Off
Range High 1372.0
Working Out High 100 %

Prop. Output 0
Deriv. Output 0
Sensor Break
Sched PB 20.0
Sched Ti 360 sec
Sched Td Off
SP1 0.0
Nudge Lower No
SP2 0.0
Sched CBL Auto

Sched MR 0.0 %
Sched Loop Break 100 sec
Safe OP 0.0
Alt SP enable No
Manual Mode Track
Alt SP 0.0
Manual Output 0.0 %
Rate Off
Forced Output 0/0 %
Rate Done Yes

SP Trim Low 0.0
Power In 239 v
SP Trim High 0.0
FF Type None
Manual Track Off
Track Enable Off
Sched Out High 100.0 %
SP Trim 0.0
Pff En Pff En
Track Output 0
Sched Out Low -100.0 %
SP Low Limit -200.0
Sbrk OP 0.0
Manual Startup
Sched CBH Auto
SP Select SP1
Nudge Raise No
Sbrk Mode Safe
Integral Output 0
Loop.1.PID
Ch2 Deadband Off

Loop Break No
Loop 1 Setpoint
(Section 4.6.5)
Rem. Output Low -100.0 %

Rem. Output High 100.0 %
Setpoint Track Off

Track PV 0.0
Track Value 0.0
SP Int Balance
Figure D6 Loop Configuration menus
Appendix D
Page 324
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec11
D7 ADVANCED LOOP CONFIGURATION MENUS

Advanced Loop.Main
Advanced Loop.Setup
Master PV 0.0
Working Output 0.0%
Slave Channel 1 PID
Cascade Mode Slave
Slave Channel 2 Off
No
Slave Int.Hold
No

Instrument
Main
Network
Setup
Group
Tune
Channel
Virtual Channel
Loop
Advanced Loop
Derivative Type PV
PB 20.0
Tune High 1372.0
Cascade Type Full Scale
Slave WSP 32.2
Master Int.Hold
Tune Slave R2G Standard
Master Loop PID
Slave PV 0.0
No
Tune Enable Off
Slave Name SLave
Target setpoint 16.1
Tune Type Master
Master Name Master
Master WSP 16.1
Inhibit
Advanced Loop.Master PID
Advanced Loop.Tune
Ti 360.0 sec
Tune Low -20
Td 60.0 sec
Output High 100.0%
CBH Auto
Output Low 0.0%
CBL Auto

State Off
Mode Access Read/Write
Stage Time 0 sec
Advanced Loop Setup menu

(Section 4.7.2)
Advanced Loop Main

(Section 4.7.1)
MR 0.0 %
LBT 100 sec
Diagnostics
Advanced Loop Tune menu
(Section 4.7.3)
Advanced Loop Master PID menu

(Section 4.7.4)
Advanced Loop Slave PID menu
(Section 4.7.5)
Advanced Loop.Slave PID
Master PID
Advanced Loop.Master.SP
Slave PID
Master SP
Advanced Loop Master SP menu

(Section 4.7.6)
Slave SP
Range High 1372.0 V

Range Low -200 V
SP Select SP1
Output
Diagnostics
SP1 -0.9 V
Advanced Loop Slave SP menu
(Section 4.7.7)
Advanced Loop.Slave.SP
See Figure D7b for Output
and Diagnostics menus
Range High 1372.0 V
SP2 0.0 V
SP High Limit 1372.0 V
SP Low Limit -200.0 V
Alt SP Enable No
Range Low -200 V
Alt SP 0.0 V
Rate 123
SP Low Limit -200

Local SP 1372.0
Trim Range High 100.0
Trim Range Low -100.0
Rate Done No
SP Rate Disable No
Servo to PV No
SP Trim 0.0 V
Trim High Limit 100.0 V
SP Trim High 0.0 V
Trim Low Limit -100 V
SP Trim Low 0.0 V
Remote FF 0.0
Manual Track On
Remote FF Enable No
Setpoint Track On
Remote FF High 1372.0

Remote FF Low -200
Manual Track Off
Track PV 31.5 V
Track SP -0.9 V
SP Int Balance

Derivative Type Error
Sched Type Remote
Number of Sets 3
Remote Input 0
Active Set Set3
Boundary 1-2 0
Boundary 2-3 0
PB 20.0
Ti 360 sec
Td 60 sec
R2G 1.0
CBH Auto
CBL Auto
MR 0.0%
LBT 100 sec
Output Low -100%
Output High 100%
PB2 23.0
Ti2 360.0 sec
Output Low 3 -90.0%
Output High 3 90.0%
Figure D7a Advanced Loop menus sheet 1
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec11
Appendix D
Page 325
D7 ADVANCED LOOP CONFIGURATION (Cont.)

Instrument
Main
Network
Setup
Group
Tune
Channel
Slave PID
Loop
Master SP
Advanced Loop
Advanced Loop Output menu

(Section 4.7.8)
Output High 100 %

Output Low -100 %
Ch1 Output 0.0
See Figure D7a for

these menus
Master PID
Virtual Channel
Advanced Loop.Output
Ch2 Output 0.0

Advanced Diagnostics
Slave SP
Master Erroe 0.0
Output
(M)Prop. Output 0
(M)Integral Out 0.0000
(M)Deriv. Output 0

Ch1 Pot Pos 0
Ch1 Pot Brk Off
(S)Prop. Output 0
(S)Integral Out 0.0000
Advanced Loop Diagnostics menu
(Section 4.7.9)
Rate 15
Rate Disable No
Slave Error 0.0
Diagnostics
Ch2 Deadband Off
(S)Deriv. Output 0
Ch2 Pot Pos 0

Ch2 Pot Brk Off
Pot Brk Mode Raise
Target Output 0.0 %
Sbrk Mode Safe
Loop Break (S) No
Sbrk OP 0.0 %
Loop Break (M) No
Safe OP 0.0 %
Sensor Break (S)
Manual Mode Track
Sensor Break (M)
Manual Output 0.0 %
Sched PB 20.0
Forced Output 0.0 %
Sched Ti 360.0 sec

Sched Td 60.0 sec
Sched CBH Auto
Manual Startup
Pff En Yes
Line Voltage 218 V
Sched CBL Auto
Cool Type Linear
Sched MR 0.0 %
FF Type SP
Sched Loop Break 100 sec

Sched Out High 100 %
Sched Out Low -100
Working Out Low 0 %

Working Out High 100
FF Gain 1.000
FF Offset 0
FF Trim Limit 100
FF Output 0 %
Master FB 12.7
Calc OP 0.0
HiSatLim 20.0
Track Output 0
Track Enable Off
Rem. Output Low -100 %
Rem. Output High 100 %
LoSatLim 0.0
OPPID 12.7
Figure D7b Advanced Loop menus sheet 2
Appendix D
Page 326
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec11
D8 PROGRAMMER CONFIGURATION
Programmer.Features
Programmer.FTP
Holdback
IP Address 123.123.123.111
PV Event
Username anonymous
User Value
Password **********
Messages
Programmer FTP menu

(Section 4.8.2)
FTP Store
Programmer Set Up menu

(Section 4.8.3)
Programmer features menu

(Section 4.8.1)
Group
Channel
Virtual Channel
Prog Mode Access Operator

Prog Edit Access Supervisor
Prog Store Access Supervisor
Rate Resolution 1
Ch1 Units Deg C
Ch1 Resolution 0
Ch1 PV Input 23.7 V

Programmer.Run
Features
FTP
Mode Run
Set Up
Status Running
Run
Loop
Advanced Loop
Programmer
Ch2 Units l/sec

Ch2 Resolution 1
Ch2 Servo To PV
Ch2 PSP 42.9 V
Ch2 PV Input 35.9 V
Segment Heat Init
Ch2 SP Input 431 l/sec
Segment Type Ramp
Programmer Run menu

(Section 4.8.4)
Ch1 SP Input 0 Deg C
Ch1 PSP 43.3 V
Segment Time Left 00:00:33

Note: FTP appears in the menu list only
if FTP Store has been enabled in the
Programmer features configuration.
Channels 2
Ch1 Servo To SP

Network
Programmer.Set Up
Segment Time Run 00:01:17

Prog Time Left 00:18:48
Prog Time Spent 00:00:33
Prog Time Run 00:00:53
Duration 00:00:14
Ch1 TSP 43.3 V
Ch1 Time 00:01:00
Ch2 TSP 10.5 V
Ch2 Time 00:02:23
Cycles Left 10
Ch1 User Val 7
Ch2 User Val 3
Ch1 PV Event
Ch2 PV Event
Event 1
Power Fail Action Ramp back

Max Events 2
Reset Event 1
Reset Event 2
Reset Ch1 UV 0.0
Reset Ch2 UV 0.0
Run No
Hold No
Reset Yes
Run Reset No
Run Hold No
Wait Digital
Wait Analog 1 10
Wait Analog 2 39.7
Advance No
Operation Select...
Status Success
Event 2
End Output
Figure D8 Programmer menus
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec11
Appendix D
Page 327
D9 MODBUS MASTER CONFIGURATION
Slave main menu

(Section 4.9.1)
Modbus Master.Slave.1.Main
Descriptor nanodac
Online
Comms Failure No

Programmer

Programmer
Modbus Master
Slave 1
Slave 2
Modbus Master
EtherNet/IP
EtherNet/IP
Digital I/O
Digital I/O
User Lin
User Lin
Custom Message
Zirconia
IP Address 123.123.123.111
Unit ID 1
Main
Search Device No
Diagnostics
Search Result Available

Modbus Master.Slave.1.Diagnostics
Custom Message
Zirconia
Modbus Master diagnostics menu

(Section 4.9.2)
Timeout (ms) 250
Actual Medium 1.000
Max Block Size 124
Actual Low 2.000

Loopback Test No

Programmer
Data
Descriptor Data Item 1
Modbus Master
PV 0.00
EtherNet/IP
Status Success
Digital I/O
Slave Device nanodac
User Lin
Parameter List Target SP
Custom Message
Zirconia
Number 1
Priority Medium
Retries 3
Actual High 0.125
Device Status Success

Modbus Master data menu
(Section 4.9.3)
Profile nanodac
High Priority 0.125 sec

Medium Priority 1 sec
Low Priority 2 secs
Total 15428
Successful 15428
Failures 0
Retries 0
Timeouts 0
Illegal Function 0
illegal Address 0
Ilegal Data 0
Slave Failure 0
No Gateway Path 0
Reset No
Figure D9 Modbus Master menus
Appendix D
Page 328
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec11
D10 ETHERNET/IP CONFIGURATION
EtherNet/IP.Main
IO Status Code Online
EtherNet/IP Main menu
(Section 4.10.1)
Implicit I/O 123.123.123.223

Explicit 1 No connection
Explicit 2 No Connection
Mode Client (IO)
Server Address 123.123.123.223
Input Instance 100
Size (Bytes) 100
Output Instance 112
Size (Bytes) 100

Connection Type Point2Point
Channel Main
Priority Scheduled
Virtual Channel Implicit Inputs
RPI (ms) 1000
Loop Implicit Outputs
Reset No
Advanced Loop
Programmer
Modbus Master
EtherNet/IP
Implicit inputs menu

(Section 4.10.2)
Implicit outputs menu

(Section 4.10.3)
EtherNet/IP.Implicit Outputs
EtherNet/IP.Implicit Inputs
Input 1 0
Output 1 0
Input 2 0
Output 2 0
Input 3 0
Output 3 0
Input 4 0
Output 4 0
Input 5 0
Output 5 0
Input 6 0
Output 6 0
Input 7 0
Output 7 0
Figure D10 EtherNet/IP menus
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec11
Appendix D
Page 329
D11 DIGITAL I/O CONFIGURATION MENUS
D13 USER LINEARISATION TABLE CONFIGURATION MENU

Digital I/O
(Section 4.11)

Instrument
1A1B
Network
2A2B
Group
LALC (Dig.In)
Channel
3A3B
Virtual Channel
LBLC (Dig.In)
Loop
4AC (Relay)
Digital I/O
5AC (Relay)
Digital I/O.1A1B
Module Ident Dig.IO
Type Time Prop O/P
PV 0
Min On Time 1.00 sec
Invert No
Output Off
User Linearisation Tables

(Section 4.13)
User Lin.1
Network
Group
X1 0.00
Channel
Y1 0.00
Virtual Channel
X2 1.00
Num. of Points 2
Loop
Y2 1.00
Digital I/O
User Lin
Similar to 1A1B above, depending on options available.
Figure D11 Digital I/O configuration menus
D12 DC OUTPUT CONFIGURATION MENUS
D14 CUSTOM MESSAGES CONFIGURATION MENU

DC Output.3A3B (DC Op)

Network
3A3B (DC.Op)
Group
2A2B (DC.Op)
Channel
Virtual Channel
DC Output
(Section 4.12)
Type V
PV 0.00
Status Good
OP Adjust State Adjusted
Resolution 2
Loop
Output Low 0.00
Digital I/O
Output High 10.00
DC Output
Figure D13 User Linearisation tble menus
Scale Low 0.00

Scale High 100.00
Fallback PV 0.00
Custom Message.
Custom messages
(Section 4.14)
Message1 Message 1
Trigger1 0
Message 2 Message 2
Trigger2 0
Message3 Message 3
Trigger3 0
Message4 Message 4
Trigger4 0
Message10 Message 10
Trigger10 0
Measured Value 0.00

Figure D12 DC output configration menus
Appendix D
Page 330
Figure D14 Custom messages configuration
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec11
D15 ZIRCONIA BLOCK CONFIGURATION
Zirconia.Main

Channel
Virtual Chanel
Loop
Probe Type MMI
Main
Resolution 0
Gas References
Clean
Zirconia Main
(Section 4.15.2)
Digital I/O
Min Calc Temp 720

Tolerance 1.0
Process Factor 140.0
User Lin
Custom Message
Oxygen Exp 2
Zirconia
Temp Input 0
Probe Input 0
Carbon Potential Off
Dew Point Off
Oxygen Off
Temp Offset 0
Probe Offset 0
Zirconia Clean
(Section 4.15.2)
Zirconia Gas References

(Section 4.15.2)
Zirconia.Clean
Zirconia.Gas References
Clean Frequency 04:00
CO Local 20
Clean Time 00:03
CO remote 0.1
Min rcov Time 00:00
CO Remote En No
Max rcov Time 00:01
H2 Local 40.0
Clean Valve No
H2 Remote 0.1
Clean Probe Yes
H2 Remote En No
Time to Clean 02:45
Soot Alarm No
PV Frozen Yes
Probe Status Min Calc Temp
Balance Integral No
Carb Act CO O2 0.0000
Probe State Not Ready
Oxygen Type Nernst
H2 In Use 40.0
Clean Enable Yes

Clean Max Temp 1100
Clean Abort No
Clean Rcov Time 0.0 sec
Last Clean 0 mV
Clean Msg Reset No
Probe Fault No
Cant Clean
Clean Abort
Clean Temp
Figure D15 Zirconia block configuration menus
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec11
Appendix D
Page 331
D16 STERILISER BLOCK CONFIGURATION MENU
D17 HUMIDITY BLOCK CONFIGURATION MENU
Steriliser
(Section 4.16)
Humidity block
(Section 4.17)
Steriliser
Humidity.
Virtual Channel
Cycle status Wait Start
Loop
Resolution 2
Loop
Remaining 00:00:00
Didital I/O
Psychro Constant 6.66E-4
Digital I/O
Equilibration 00:00:00
User Lin
Pressure 1013.0
User Lin
Sterilising 00:00:00
Custom Message
Custom Message
Total Cycle 00:00:00
Zirconia
F0 (A0) 00:00:00
Steriliser
Dry Temperature 29.65
Humidity
Relative Hum. 89.93
Zirconia
Steriliser
Running Output No
Wet Temperature 28.23

Wet Offset 0
Passed Output No
Dew Point 27.83
Start No
Sensor Break No
Start 121C No
121C Time 00:03:00
Figure D17 Humidity Block configuration menu
Start 134C No
134C Time 00:15:00
Target Time 00:03:00
Cycle Number 0
Auto Counter No
D18 BCD INPUT BLOCK CONFIGURATION MENU
File by Tag
BCD Input Block

(Section 4.18)
Input 1 Type Thermocouple

PV1 0
BCD Input.1
Target SP 134
Digital I/O
Digital Input 1
Band Low 134
User Lin
Digital Input 2
Band High 137
Custom message
Digital Input 3
Zirconia
Digital Input 4
Input 2 Type Thermo r Detect
Steriliser
Digital Input 5
Humidity
Digital Input 6
BCD Input
Digital Input 7
Measured Temp. 115

Target Temp. 134
Z Temp. 10
Low Limit 134
Digital Input 8
Decimal input 170
BCD Output 99
BCD LS Digit 9
BCD MS Digit 9
Figure D16 Steriliser menu
Appendix D
Page 332
Figure D18 BCD input block menu
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec11
D19 LOGIC (2 INPUT) CONFIGURATION MENU
D21 MULTIPLEXER BLOCK CONFIGURATION MENU

Multiplexer block
(Section 4.21)
Logic (2 Input) block

(Section 4.19)
Logic (2 input).1
Multiplexer.1
User Lin
Custom Message
Zirconia
Steriliser
Humidity
BCD Input
Output On
Logic (8 Input)
Input 1 0.0
Logic (2 Input)
Status Ok
Multiplexer
Input 2 0.0
Zirconia
Input 1 1
Steriliser
Input 2 0
Humidity
Fallback FalseBad
BCD Input
Invert None
Logic (2 input)
Operation OR
High Limit 100000000.0

Low Limit -100000000.0
Fall Back Strategy Clip bad
Fall Back Value 0.0
Input Selector Input 1
Input 3 0.0
Input 8 0.0
Figure D19 logic (2 input) configuration menu
PV Out 0
Status Ok
Resolution 0
Figure D21 Logic (2 input) configuration menu
D20 LOGIC (8 INPUT) CONFIGURATION MENU
D22 MATH (2 INPUT) CONFIGURATION MENU

Math (2 Input)
(Section 4.22)
Logic (8 Input) block

(Section 4.20)

Custom Message
Zirconia
Steriliser
Humidity
Logic (8 input).1
Operation OR
Number of Inputs 2
Invert
Invert Output 0
Math (2 input).1
Operation Sel1
Steriliser
Humidity
BCD Input
Logic (2 input)
Units DegC
Resolution 2
BCD Input
Input 1
Logic (8 Input)
Logic (2 Input)
Input 2
Multiplexer
Low Limit 0.00 DegC
Logic (8 Input)
Output Off
Math (2 Input)
High limit 50.00 DegC

Fallback Strategy ClipGood
Figure D20 logic (8 input) configuration menu
Fallback Value 0.0 DegC

Input Selector Input1
Input 1 30.28 C
Input 2 1.40
Output 30.28 DegC
Status Ok
Figure D22 Math (2 Input) configuration menu
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec11
Appendix D
Page 333
D23 TIMER CONFIGURATION MENU
D25 REAL TIME EVENTS CONFIGURATION MENU

Timer block
(Section 4.23)
Timer.1
Mode Off
Humidity
BCD Input
Time 00:00:00
Logic (2 Input)
Elapsed Time 00:00:00
Logic (8 Input)
Real Time Events

(Section 4.26)
Trigger In
Multiplexer
Output
Math (2 Input)
Triggered

Logic (8 Input)
Multiplexer
Math (2 Input)
Timer
User Values
Timer
Alarm Summary
Real Time Event
Figure D23 Timer configuration menu
D24 USER VALUES CONFIGURATION MENU

Real Time Event.1
User Values block

(Section 4.24)
Type Time and Day

User Value.1
BCD Input
Logic (2 Input)
Resolution 2
Logic (8 Input)
High Limit 100000000.00
Multiplexer
Math (2 Input)
Value 0.00
Timer
Status Ok
User Values
Units
Low Limit -100000000.00
On Day Mon-Fri
Real Time Event.1

Type Time and Date
On Month October
On Time 16:00:00
On Date 11
Off Type Time
On Time 14:50:00
Off day Monday
Off Type Duration
Off Time 09:00:00
Duration 00:01:00
Output
Output
Figure D25 Real Time Event Configration

Figure D24 User Values configuration menu
Appendix D
Page 334
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec11
Symbols
(M) Deriv.Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(M)Integral out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(M)Prop OP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(S) Deriv.Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Index
Alarm (Cont.)
115
115
115
115
Numerics
10 to the X. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
121C Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
134C Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
1A1B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63, 137
2A2B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63, 137
32-Bit resolution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
3A3B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63, 137
4AC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63, 137
5AC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63, 137
A
A0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
A1(2). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Abort . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65, 68
About the recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Abs Diff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Abs Hi. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Abs Low . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Accents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Access levels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Account
Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Username . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Acknowledge alarms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16, 83, 159
Acknowledgement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Active . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Not acked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Set. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94, 107
Actual High/Low/Medium . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Acute accent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Add. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87, 154
New wire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Adding and deleting segments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Adding parameters to the Watch list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Adjust
Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Advanced Loop
Configuration overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Main menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Master PID menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Master SP menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Output menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Setup menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Slave PID menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Slave SP menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Tune menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Alarm
Acknowledgement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Message filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
Panel display mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

Enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Summary display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Symbol. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82, 84
Align Tops/Lefts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
All Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Alt SP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95, 108
Enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95, 108
Amount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Analog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Analogue Input specification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Any Alarm/Channel Alarm/Sys Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Application blocks supported . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Apply Adjust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65, 68
Archive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
All . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Disabled/Failed/Timeout error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Menu (Demand) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71, 281
To . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Archiving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Arg_PV. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
AT.R2G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Attribute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Auto Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Auto/Man Access. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Auto/Manual. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92, 285
Automatic
Archive rate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Probe Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Autotune . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
and gain scheduling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
and inhibit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
and sensor break . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Failure modes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Initiation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Average Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
B
Back to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Background chart colour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Backlash
Dig.IO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Relay OP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Bad Sub . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130, 133
Balance Integral . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Band (Holdback) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Band (M) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Band Low/High
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Definition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Bar code reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Battery
Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Page i
BCD
Input block description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
LS/MS Digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Beacons (steriliser). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Big Endian format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Binary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
BIT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Bit Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Black wiring editor items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Execution order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Blue
Arrow
Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Left/Right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Line across chart. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Wiring editor items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Bootrom upgrade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Both . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Boundary 1-2 (2-3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94, 107
Bounded mode (VPB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Breaks in recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Brightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Bring to Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Bring to Front
Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Monitor context menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Broadcast storm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Broadcast Storm detected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
BYTE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
C
Cant Clean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Cancel All . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Capture current values into a data set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Carb Act CO O2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Carbon Potential . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Cascade
Cascade mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Display mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
CBH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
CBH (CBH2) (CBH3). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94, 107
CBH, CBL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289, 293
CBL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
CBL (CBL2) (CBL3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94, 107
Cedilla . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Centre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Ch1 (Ch2)
Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
OnOff Hyst . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96, 113, 304
Pot Brk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96, 113
Pot Pos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96, 113
Travel Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96, 113
TravelT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Page ii
Ch1 Rate/Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Ch1(2) Holdback parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Ch1(2) PV Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Ch1(2) PVEvent Use. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Ch1(2) PVEvent Val . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Ch1(2) Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Ch1(2) Servo To . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Ch1(2) SP Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Ch1(2) TSP/Rate/Time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Ch1(2) Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Ch1(2) Wait (Val) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Ch1(2)PSP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Ch1(2)TSP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Ch2 Deadband. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96, 113, 292
Chain icon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Chan. Alm Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
ChanAvg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Change battery procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Change Time (Rate of change alarms) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
ChanMax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
ChanMin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Channel
CJC type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
colour. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76, 81
Copy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Damping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Descriptor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
External CJ Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Input filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Input high/low . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Linearisation type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Main . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
No. of decimal places . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78, 89, 90
Prefix (C or V) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
PV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Range Low/high/Units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Scale High/Low/Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Scrolling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9
Shunt value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Trend configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Units
Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Input channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Totaliser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Chart
Colour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Context menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
CJC Type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Class ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Clean
Abort . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143, 144
Max Temp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Msg Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
Clean (Cont.)
Rcov Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Temp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143, 144
Valve. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143, 144
Click to Select Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Clip Bad
Maths block. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Multiplexer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Clip Good
Maths block. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Multiplexer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Clock
Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Cloning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
CO Local/Remote etc.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Cold start. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Cold started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Colour
Channel trend selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Function blocks etc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Column enable/disable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260, 261
Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Comments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Context Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Comms
Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Pass. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Parameter list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Timeouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Company ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Complete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19, 64, 103
Component Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Compounds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Create/Flatten. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Compression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Config Revision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Configuration
Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Default . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
I/O. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Loop
Main menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Output menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Setpoint menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Setup menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Tune menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Totaliser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Zirconia block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Confirm High/Low . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
ConfRev . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Connection Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Connector locations and pinouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Context menu
Comment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
Context menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269

Continue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Control Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92, 105, 106, 307
Control Loops. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Display mode enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Types of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Cool Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97, 114, 306
Copy
Comment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Diagram fragment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Fragment to file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Function block context menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Graphic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
iTools components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
iTools diagram items. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Maths function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Wire context menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Copy (All) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Copying. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Counter configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Create
Compound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251, 257, 258
New empty data set. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
New watch/recipe list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Critically damped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
CSV. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Custom messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Custom note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Cut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251, 268
Comment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Function block context menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Cutback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
High/low . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Cutoff High/Low. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89, 90
Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Cycles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
D
Daily . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Damping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Dashed lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Data configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Data set creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Data Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Data types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Database failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Date
Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Date change indication. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Daylight Saving Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Active/Inactive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
DB revision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
DC input ranges. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
DC Op . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Page iii
DC Output
Adjust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
DC supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Deadband . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
De-bump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Decimal input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Default Config . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255, 268
Comment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Delete (All) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Delete Programs from Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Deleting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Demand Archiving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Deriv
Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92, 105, 106
Derivative action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Descriptor
Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Loop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Maths channels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Modbus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Slave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Totaliser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Destination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
DevBand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
DevHi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Deviation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Device Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
DevLo. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Dew Point
Humidity block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Zirconia block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
DHCP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Server failure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
DIA, DIB specificatoin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Diacriticals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Modbus Master comms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Diagnostics menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Diagram context menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Dig in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Dig IO. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Dig Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Digital communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Digital I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Digital Input 1 to 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Digital input specification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
DigitalHi. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
DigitalLo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
DINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
DINT (Swap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Direct Connection (iTools) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Page iv
Disable
Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Totaliser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Brightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Mode
Alarm panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Cascade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
EtherNet IP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Future trend. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Horizontal bargraph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Horizontal trend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Loop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Modbus master . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Numeric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Promote list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Steriliser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Vertical bargraph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Vertical trend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Div . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Divide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Down arrow key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
Download . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Download the selected data set to the device . . . . . . . . 263
Downscale
Maths Block. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Multiplexer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Dry Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
DST
Active/Inactive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Dual input option. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Duration
Dwell segment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Duty cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Dwell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Dwell segment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
E
Edit
Comment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Eight-input OR block details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Elapsed time
Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Electical installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
En Rem Gas Ref . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Enable
Autotune . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Display modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
PFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97, 114
Probe cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Promote List.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Tracking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97, 114
Tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
End segment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
End Time/date etc for DST. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
End Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Endothermic Gas Correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Eng . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92, 105, 106
Engineer Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
Envelope icon. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Environmental performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Equilibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39, 146, 147
Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Error
Advanced Loop diagnostics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Derivative type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92, 105, 106
Loop diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Sched type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94, 107, 291
Ethernet
Comms spec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Connector location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
EtherNet IP
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
EtherNet IP display mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
EtherNet/IP display mode
Enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Event 1 to 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Events. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Exception codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Exit History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Explicit 1 (2). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Explicit data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Exponential . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Ext. CJ Temp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
External CJC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
F
F0 (A0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Faceplate cycling enable/disable
Default setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Go to View menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Failed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32, 39, 146
Failure Dwell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Failures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Fall Air Detect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Fall Back Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Fall Bad
Maths Block. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Multiplexer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Fall Good
Maths Block. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Multiplexer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Fallback
Logic2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
PV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Strategy
Maths block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Multiplexer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Value
Maths Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Multiplexer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Falling pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
FallROC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97, 114
Fault Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Feature(2) Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Feedforward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97, 114, 306, 307
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97, 114
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97, 114
FF
Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
FF parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97, 114
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
File
By Tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Find
End . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Firmware
FTP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
USB. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Fixed IP Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Flash
Duration/Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Memory full . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Flatten compound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Follow Wire. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Force Exec Break . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Forced Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97, 114, 305
Forward to: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
From Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
FTP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Archiving lost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Archiving to slow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Icon. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Primary/Secondary Server Failure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Server
Automatic archive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Demand archive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Store. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Function blocks
Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Supported . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Function Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Function Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Future Trend. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Future trend display mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
G
Gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Gain Scheduling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Gas Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Gateway. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Ghosted wiring editor items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Global Ack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Go Back segment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Go Back To . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Go to first . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Go to last . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Go to View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Go Up/Down a Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Graphical Wiring Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Grave accent. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Green
Triangle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Green arrow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Green arrow (Modbus master) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Green circle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Green line across chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Greyed-out wiring editor items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Grid, show/hide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
GrpAvg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Page v
GrpMax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GrpMaxlatch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GrpMin. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GrpMinlatch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
87
87
87
87
H
H.Trend Scaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
H2 Local/Remote etc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Hidden parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
High
Compression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Cut Off
Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Totaliser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Cutback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Limit
Maths block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Multiplexer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
User values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Output
Tune menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
High Holdback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Background colour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Option Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97, 113, 121, 305
Holdback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Holding time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Page definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Horizontal bargraph mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Horizontal trend mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Scaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Hot Swap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
HPage Timeout. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Humidity measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Hysteresis
Channel alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
On/off loops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Hysteresis(M) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
I
I/O fitted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Idle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131, 133
Illegal
Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Illegal Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130, 131
Illegal Code. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131, 133
Illegal Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Illegal Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Implicit I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Inactive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64, 83
Inertia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Relay OP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Inhibit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83, 92
Advanced Loop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Page vi
Initialisation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
Stops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
Initiate upgrade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
InOp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Input
Adjust. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Dual input channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
High . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Low . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
Input 1
Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Maths channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Totaliser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Input 1(2)
Logic (2 input) block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Sample and hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Input 2 (Maths channel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Input Instance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Input Multiplier. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Input N
Logic 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Multiplexer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Type (Steriliser). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Input Selector
Maths block. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Multiplexer block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Insert item ahead of selected item (Watch/Recipe) . . . . 263
Installation
Electrical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
Mechanical
Dimensional details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3
Instance ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Instr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
INT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Integral
Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92, 290
Term. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Internal
CJ temp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
CJC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Interval
Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Trend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Invert
DI/DIO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Dig.IO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Logic 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Logic2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Relay OP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
IO Status Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
IP
Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Adjust State(2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
IP Address
Programmer FTP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Slave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Isolation diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
iTools Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Low
119
129
318
246
L
Label symbols. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
LALC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63, 137
Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Last
Archive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Clean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Day/Hour/Month/Week . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
LastMOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97, 114, 305
Latch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
LBLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63, 137
LBT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
LBT (LBT2) (LBT3). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94, 105, 107
Leading paces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
LED type indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Limit setpoint rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Limits
Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Setpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Line across chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Line Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Line voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Linear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97, 114, 306
Linearisation type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Load Program. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Loading and Saving programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Local SP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Locale. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Log
Base 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Base e (Ln) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Logarithmic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Logarithmic scale example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Logic (2 input) block description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Logic 8 input block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Logic I/O specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Login . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Loop
Break . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98, 290
Break (M) (S) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Diagnostics display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Display mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Main menu parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Output menu parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
PID menu parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Setpoint menu parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Setup menu parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Tune menu parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Loopback Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Loose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
Cut Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89, 90

Cutback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Holdback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Maths block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Multiplexer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
User values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93, 103, 293
Priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Voltage option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Lower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96, 113
Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
Lp Break . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
M
MAC address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Magenta wiring editor items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Magnification factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Major Divisions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Man
Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97, 114
Track. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95, 109
Manual
Cascade mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97, 114
Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94, 105, 107, 289
Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97, 114
Tracking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Manual Track
Slave PID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Master
Communications timouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Conn 2 to 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Int.Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Loop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
PID menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
PV
Advanced loop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Rejects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
SP menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
WSP
Advanced loop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
MasterTune. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Math (2 Input) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Maths channel
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Max
Block Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Rcov Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143, 144
Maximum number of traces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Measured
Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Temp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Value (2). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Page vii
Mechanical installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Standard case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Wash-down case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Media
Duration/Free/Size. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
System alarms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Medium Priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Icon. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Min Cal Temp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Min On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Min On Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292, 310
Dig.IO. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
DIO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Relay OP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Min Rcov Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143, 144
MinCalcT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Modbus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Input (Maths) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Parameter list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Advanced Loop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
AdvancedLoop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Alarm Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Alarm summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
BCD Inputs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Channel 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Channel 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Channel 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Channel 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Custom Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
DC output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Digital I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
EtherNet/IP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Humidity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Logic (2 input) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Logic (8 input) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Loop 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Loop 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Math (2 input) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Modbus Master . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Multiplexer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
OR block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Programmer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Real time events. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Segment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Steriliser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
User Lin 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
User Lin 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
User Lin 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
User Lin 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
UsrVal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Virtual Channel 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Virtual Channel 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Virtual Channel 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Virtual Channel 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Virtual Channel 13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Virtual Channel 14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Virtual Channel 15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Page viii
Modbus parameter list (Cont.)

Virtual Channel 16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Virtual Channel 17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Virtual Channel 18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Virtual Channel 19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Virtual Channel 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Virtual Channel 20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Virtual Channel 21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Virtual Channel 22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Virtual Channel 23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Virtual Channel 24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Virtual Channel 25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Virtual Channel 26 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Virtual Channel 27 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Virtual Channel 28 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Virtual Channel 29 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Virtual Channel 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Virtual Channel 30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Virtual Channel 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Virtual Channel 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Virtual Channel 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Virtual Channel 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Virtual Channel 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Virtual Channel 9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Zirconia block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Zirconia probe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
239
239
239
239
228
240
240
240
241
241
241
242
242
242
243
229
243
230
230
231
232
232
233
243
243
TCP Port numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Modbus Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Modbus Master
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Modbus master
Slave menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Modbus master data configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Modbus Master display mode
Enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
EtherNet/IP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Program. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Mode (Timer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96, 113
ModeMan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Mod_OP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Mod_PV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Module Ident
DI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Dig IO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Dig Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Relay/Triac. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Monthly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Motorised valve control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Mouse
Pan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Move selected item
Watch/Recipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
MR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
MR (MR2) (MR3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94, 107
Multi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Multicast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Multiplexer block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Multiply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
mVSbr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
N
N.acknowledged . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Navigation pushbuttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Net Status Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Network
Broadcast storm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Network Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
No Gateway Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
None
Archive (demand) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Automatic archiving Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
FF Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97, 114
Non-volatile memory failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Non-volatile parameters in EEPROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Non-volatile Write Frequency warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Normal compression. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Nudge raise (lower) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Num Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94, 107
Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
of inputs (Logic 8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Resolution (IEEE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Numeric display mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Nvol writes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
O
OEM Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Off. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Offset2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97, 114
Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
On Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
On Media Full . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
On Pulse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
On screen help. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
On/Off control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
One shot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Online
Modbus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
OP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94, 104, 107
OP1, OP2 specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
OPC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
OPDel(M). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Open an existing watch/recipe file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Operation
Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Logic 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Logic 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Maths block. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Maths function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Program store. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Save/Restore. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Totaliser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Operator
Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Pages - See Display modes
Pass. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
OR block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Adjust. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Dig.IO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
DIO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
hi, lo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
High . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Output menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96, 113
PID Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94, 107
Limits (Output menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Logic 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Logic2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Loop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Low . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Output menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96, 113
PID Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94, 107
PID Gain scheduling type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Rate Limit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Relay. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Sample and Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
Output High . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Output Instance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Output menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Over damped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Overflow counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Overwrite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Oxygen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Exp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
P
Page key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
Pan tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Parameter
Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256, 261
Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Parameter List
Modbus Slave Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Parameter properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Parameters
Blue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Explorer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
PID menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Serial comms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Setup menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Tune menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Passed
Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Steriliser cycle status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39, 146
Password
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Default . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Feature upgrade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
FTP server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Programmer FTP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Paste . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Comment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Fragment From File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Page ix
Paste insert / Paste over . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268

Paused symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
PB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105, 293
Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92, 105, 106
PB (PB2) (PB3). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94, 107
Pending . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131, 133
Per Hour/Minute/Second/ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Percent. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92, 105, 106
Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Archive history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Averaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Totaliser time units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Pff En . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97, 114
Phase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
PID
Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Loop setup menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Point1 to Point6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
PotBrk Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96, 113
Power
In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Maths block. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Recorder requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Up (messages) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Power Fail Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Power feed forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97, 114
PrefMaster
Conn. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
IP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Preset
Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Totaliser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Val . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89, 90
Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Primary Server/User/Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133, 135
Priority (Master comms) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Priority levels (Modbus master) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
PriStatus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Probe
Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143, 144
Input/offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Process factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Profile. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Prog
Edit Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Mode Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Store Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Program. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Edit page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Loading, saving and deleting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Progress. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Run/Reset/Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Time remaining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Page x
Program context menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269

Program store. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Programmer
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
FTP menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Run menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Setup menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Programmer display mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Programmer menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Promote List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Prop OP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Proportional band (PB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Proportional plus integral (PI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Psychro constant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Push pin. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Push to Back
iTools monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
iTools wire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
PV
Advanced Loop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
DC output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Derivative type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92, 105, 106
DI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Dig.IO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
DIO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
FF Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97, 114
Frozen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Loop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Maths channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Modbus slave data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Program. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Relay OP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Sched Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94, 107
Totaliser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
PV 1 to 4 (Sterliser) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
PV2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Q
QWERTY keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
R
R symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
R2G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289, 293
Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
R2G (R2G2) (R2G3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94, 107
R2G Limit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Raise. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96, 113
Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
Ramp Back . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Ramp segment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Ramp Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Ramp Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Range
High/Low . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95, 108, 110
Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Automatic archive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Disable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Done. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95, 108
PID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96, 113
Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Working setpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95, 108
Ready . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
REAL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
REAL (swap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Real time events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Recorder
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Panel installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Unpacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Recording
Channels included . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Failure alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Icon. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Red circle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43, 46
Red line across chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Red wiring editor items. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Redo. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Relative cool gain (R2G) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Relative Hum. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Relay
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
I/O Fitted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Pinout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Rem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94, 107
Gas Ref. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Output Low (High) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97, 114
Remaining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39, 147
Remote
CJC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Computer setup (archiving) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
FF Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97, 114
Input (PID menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94, 107
Output Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Path. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Remote FF parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Remove
Input adjust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Output adjust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Recipe parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Rename Wiring Editor diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Re-Route
Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Wires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Power fail action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Reset Ch1(2) UV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Reset Comms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Reset Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
Reset virtual channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

Resistance input ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Resolution
Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
DC output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Humidity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Maths block. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Maths channels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Multiplexer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Totaliser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
User values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Zirconia probe option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Response Time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Rest. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96, 113
Restore factory settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Restoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Retries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129, 131
Review software login . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Right-click menus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Rise Air Detect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Rise ROC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Rising pressure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Rollover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Rounded . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Rpi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
RTD types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Run
Program. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Run menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Running Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
S
Safe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Loop break mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97, 113
Not Acked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
OP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97, 113
Safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1
Sample/Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Save
After . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Current watch/recipe list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Graphic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Save current program to file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Saver Brightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Saving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
SBrk
Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Mode (M) (S) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
OP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
OP (M) (S) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Sbrk Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Sbrk SP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Scale
Divisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
High/Low
DC output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Input channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Scaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
all device addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Page xi
Sched
Advanced Loop diagnostic parameters. . . . . . . . . . 115
Loop diagnostic parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94, 107
Screen brightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Scroll key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Search Device/Result . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Search for . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Sec
Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
User . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Seg Time Left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Segment
Adding to program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Deleting from program. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28, 33
Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Progress. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Segment context menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Sel1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Select
All . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Max/Min. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Select All . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Selecting components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Send . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Sensor Break. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
(M) (S) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Advanced Loop diagnostics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Detection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Humidity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Loop diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Val . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Serial
Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Server. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
IP Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Server Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
ServoToPV. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95, 109
Set. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94, 107, 132, 291
Setpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292, 301
Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Colour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
PID Gain scheduling type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94, 107, 291
Rate Limit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Track. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95, 109
Tracking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Setting time and date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Settling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
Setup
Advanced Loop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101, 102
Programmer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Show
Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Shunt value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Signal wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
Size (bytes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Slave
Cascade mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Diagnostics menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Main menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
PID menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
PV
Advanced Loop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
SP menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
WSP
Advanced Loop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Slave Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Slave Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Slave Int.Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Slot Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Snapshot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Software compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i
Soot alarm. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Sooting alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
SP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97, 114
High (Low) Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95, 108, 110
Int Balance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95, 109
Rate Disable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95, 109
Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95, 108
Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95, 109
Trim High(Low) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95, 109
SP1 (SP2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95, 108
Space Evenly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Span . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Analogue input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
DC (analogue) output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Digital input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Relay. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Splash (USB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Square Root . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Stage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Autotune . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Autotune . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Standby action
Dig.IO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Relay OP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Start
121C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
134C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Day/Month/Time/Week . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
On. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Page xii
Startup mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97, 114

State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
DC output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Demand archive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Logic2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Maths channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Multiplexer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Program store. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Sample and Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Save/Restore. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Segment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Steriliser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Totaliser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
User values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Status2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Step . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97, 114, 305
Step segment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Steriliser
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Display mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Sterilising. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39, 146, 147
Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Stopping the tuning process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Store. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Store current program on Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Strict . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Sub . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Subnet Mask . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Subtract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Success . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32, 130, 133
Successful . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Supervisory Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Supply voltage wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Suspend
Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Suspended
Demand archiving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Symbols used on labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Sys Alm status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
System
Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Message
Filter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
T
Tag Status code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Target
Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98, 115
Setpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
SP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Target setpoint
Advanced loop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
Target Temp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

Target Time
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Steriliser display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
TCP Ports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Td . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105, 293
Td (Td2) (Td3). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94, 107
Temp
Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Sbr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Temperature Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Terminal torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
Termination details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
Test
Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39, 146
Sgnal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Test cycle (steriliser) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Text entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53, 277
Thermocouple
Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Steriliser. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Three term control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Threshold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Ti. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105, 293
Ti (Ti2) (Ti3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94, 107
TI Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Ti Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Tilde . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Time
Format (Modbus) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Ramp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Remaining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
To Clean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143, 144
Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Time change indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Time Proportioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
TimedOut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103, 130, 133, 299
Modbus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Timeout (communications) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Timeouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Timers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
To
Destination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
SP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Tolerance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Toolbar icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Toolkit blocks supported . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Top level menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Total . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Total Cycle
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Steriliser display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Totaliser configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Trace
Colour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Page xiii
Track. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97, 114, 305

Enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97, 114
OP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97, 114
PV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95, 109
Val . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95, 109
Transfer between sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Transferring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Trend
Background colour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Colour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
History menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Trigger
Archive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Triggered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Trim
High/Low limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
High/Low range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Truncated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Tune
Enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Advanced loop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Slave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Type
Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Channel Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
DC output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
DI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Dig.Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
DIO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
of control loop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Relay OP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Segment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Virtual channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86, 88, 90
U
UBYTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
UDINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
UDINT (Swap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
UHH Compression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
UINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Umlaut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Unbounded mode (VPU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Undelete
Comment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Context menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Under Damped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Undo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Unit ID
Slave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Unit ID Enable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
Units
Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Maths block. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Maths channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Scaler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Totaliser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
User values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Unlink
Comment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Unpacking the recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3
Up arrow key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
Update rates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Upgrade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Upscale
Maths Block. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Multiplexer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
USB
Archive destination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Auto Scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Icon. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Keyboard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Maximum capacity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12, 281
Overcurrent. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Port location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
Port specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2
Use Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
User
Linearisation tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
User Value. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Username . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Programmer FTP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
V
Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132, 158
Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Valve Raise/Lower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Version. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Vertical bargraph mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Vertical trend mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Virtual channel configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
VPB. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92, 288
VPU. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92, 288
W
Wait For . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Wait segment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Wait start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39, 146
Waiting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39, 146
Wash-down case
Mechanical installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
Page xiv
Watch/Recipe editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262

Adding parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Capture current values into a data set . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Clear the selected data set. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Create a new empty data set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Create a new watch/recipe list. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Data set creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Download the selected data set to the device . . . . 263
Insert item ahead of selected item . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Move selected item . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Open an existing watch/recipe file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Open OPC Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Remove recipe parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Save the current watch/recipe list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Snapshot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97, 114
Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Weekly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Wet temperature/offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Wires free . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Wiring
Cable sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Electrical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Zirconia Probe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
EtherNet IP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Failure (system error). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Modbus master . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Software
Colours (iTools) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
iTools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Remove wire (user interface) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
User interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Working
Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Out High (Low) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98, 115
Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Setpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92, 301
Working Output
Advanced Loop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
WPD
Advanced Loop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
WSP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
Z
Z Temp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Zirconia block option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Zoom (iTools) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Zoom In/Out (History) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Page xv
Page xvi
HA030554
Issue 4 Dec 11
Eurotherm: International sales and service

AUSTRALIA Melbourne
Invensys Process Systems Australia Pty. Ltd.
Telephone (+61 0) 8562 9800
Fax (+61 0) 8562 9801
E-mail [email protected]
AUSTRIA Vienna
Eurotherm GmbH
Telephone (+43 1) 7987601
Fax (+43 1) 7987605
BELGIUM & LUXEMBOURG Moha

Eurotherm S.A./N.V.
Telephone (+32) 85 274080
Fax (+32 ) 85 274081
BRAZIL Campinas-SP
Eurotherm Ltda.
Telephone (+5519) 3707 5333
Fax (+5519) 3707 5345
CHINA
Eurotherm China
Shanghai Office
Telephone (+86 21) 61451188
Fax (+86 21) 61452602
Beijing Office
Telephone (+86 10) 5909 5700
Fax (+86 10) 5909 5709/10
FRANCE Lyon
Eurotherm Automation SA
Telephone (+33 478) 664500
Fax (+33 478) 352490
GERMANY Limburg
Eurotherm Deutschland GmbH
Telephone (+49 6431) 2980
Fax (+49 6431) 298119
SPAIN Madrid
INDIA Mumbai
Invensys India Pvt. Ltd.
Telephone (+91 22) 67579800
Fax (+91 22) 67579999
SWEDEN Malmo
IRELAND Dublin
Eurotherm Ireland Limited
Telephone (+353 1) 4691800
Fax (+353 1) 4691300
Eurotherm Espaa SA
Telephone (+34 91) 6616001
Fax (+34 91) 6619093
Eurotherm AB
Telephone (+46 40) 384500
Fax (+46 40) 384545
SWITZERLAND Wollerau
Eurotherm Produkte (Schweiz) AG
Telephone (+41 44) 7871040
Fax (+41 44) 7871044
UNITED KINGDOM Worthing

ITALY Como
Eurotherm S.r.l
Telephone (+39 031) 975111
Fax (+39 031) 977512
KOREA Seoul
Invensys Operations Management
Korea
Telephone (+82 2) 2090 0900
Fax (+82 2) 2090 0800
Eurotherm Limited
Telephone (+44 1903) 268500
Fax (+44 1903) 265982
U.S.A. Ashburn VA
Invensys Eurotherm
Telephone (+1 703) 724 7300
Fax (+1 703) 724 7301
ED64
NETHERLANDS Alphen a/d Rijn

Eurotherm B.V.
Telephone (+31 172) 411752
Fax (+31 172) 417260
POLAND Katowice
Invensys Eurotherm Sp z o.o
Telephone (+48 32) 7839500
Fax (+48 32) 7843608/7843609
Copyright Eurotherm Limited 2011

Invensys, Eurotherm, the Eurotherm logo, Chessell, EurothermSuite, Mini8, EPower, nanodac, Eycon, Eyris, Foxboro and Wonderware are trademarks of
Invensys plc, its subsidiaries and affiliates. All other brands may be trademarks of their respective owners.
All rights are strictly reserved. No part of this document may be reproduced, modified or transmitted in any form by any means, neither may it be stored in
a retrieval system other than for the purpose to act as an aid in operating the equipment to which the document relates, without the prior written permission of Eurotherm Limited.
Eurotherm Limited pursues a policy of continuous development and product improvement. The specifications in this document may therefore be changed
without notice. The information in this document is given in good faith, but is intended for guidance only.
Eurotherm Limited will accept no responsibility for any losses arising from errors in this document.
HA030554/4 (CN28017)

Nanodac User Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Nanodac User Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Nanodac User Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

nanodac

2011 Eurotherm Limited

Faraday Close, Worthing, West Sussex,

nanodac Status level A1 and above

EMC emissions specication: EN61326-1: 2006 Class B (100 to 230V ac supply)

EN61326-1: 2006 Industrial locations

IA249986U790 Issue 2 Oct 10 (CN26774)

nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE

Archiving data from the nanodac recorder/controller

nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE

nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE

List of Contents (Cont.)

nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE

List of Contents (Cont.)

4.1.7 I/O fitted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE

List of Contents (Cont.)

4.9 MODBUS MASTER CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE

List of Contents (Cont.)

nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE

List of Contents (Cont.)

6.6.2 Digital Event display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266

nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE

List of Contents (Cont.)

B2.4.2 Loop Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292

nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE

List of Contents (Cont.)

C2.5 ARCHIVE ACTIVITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316

nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE

This page is deliberately left blank

nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE

nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE

SAFETY NOTES (Cont.)

USB DEVICE PRECAUTIONS

SYMBOLS USED ON THE RECORDER LABELLING

Refer to manual for instructions

Risk of electric shock

This unit is CE approved

Precautions against static electrical discharge must be taken when handling

C-Tick mark for Australia (ACA)

Underwriters laboratories listed

For environmental reasons, this unit

Protective conductive terminal

nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE

1.1 UNPACKING THE INSTRUMENT

2.1 MECHANICAL INSTALLATION

2.1.1 Installation procedure

For the sake of clarity, the panel

Push springs towards panel

Figure 2.1.1 Securing the instrument

nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE

2 MECHANICAL INSTALLATION (Cont.)

Figure 2.1a Mechanical installation details (standard case)

nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE

2.1 MECHANICAL INSTALLATION (Cont.)

Figure 2.1b Mechanical installation details (wash down case option)

2.2 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION

2.2.1 Termination details

nanodac RECORDER/CONTROLLER: USER GUIDE